apacite update (5sep07)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@4889 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
author: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> 2007-09-06 00:08:55 +0000
committer: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> 2007-09-06 00:08:55 +0000
commit: a8abd64279331cac2c141488b03a710e755e3fad (patch)
tree: 52b10a31167e0077005f3039f2e8007a8222078a /Master/texmf-dist
parent: ead5e3fc51a4bb838c6501f0b5629ee4bdb05f1e (diff)
21 files changed, 22435 insertions, 7383 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib
index cbaeb444e8d..6d13bbe77c3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/apacite/apa5ex.bib
@@ -1,39 +1,56 @@
-@string{comment = {
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `apa5ex.bib'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
+%%
+%% This is file `apa5ex.bib',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `bibdb')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+%% apa5ex.bib
+%%   [2007/09/03 v4.00 bibliography database for apacite manual]
+
+
+%%
 %% apa5ex.bib: References from the 5th edition of the Publication Manual
 %%             of the APA, plus a few additional references
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%% This version: [2005/06/08]
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
 
-%  Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.)
-%  plus a sequence number within the section.
-%
-%  Note that this ``string'' is used as a comment, because the
-%  @comment construction of BibTeX does not work: `@'-sign in the
-%  e-mail address above would be taken as the beginning of an entry.
-}}
+%% Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.)
+%% plus a sequence number within the section.
 
 @misc{3.94-1,
   author = {Walker},
@@ -81,7 +98,7 @@
   author     = {J{\"{o}}reskog, K[arl] G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, D[ag]},
   year       = {1989},
   title      = {{LISREL} 7: {A} Guide to the Program and Applications},
-  edition    = {2nd},
+  edition    = {2},
   address    = {Chicago},
   publisher  = {SPSS}
 }
@@ -108,7 +125,7 @@
   title        = {Jaarverslag 2002},
   englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002},
   address      = {Amsterdam},
-  publisher    = {Author},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
   note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
                   same key, but with different firstkey.}
 }
@@ -121,7 +138,7 @@
   title        = {Jaarverslag 2003},
   englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003},
   address      = {Amsterdam},
-  publisher    = {Author},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
   note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
                   same key, but with different firstkey.}
 }
@@ -134,7 +151,7 @@
   title        = {Jaarverslag 2002},
   englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002},
   address      = {Amsterdam},
-  publisher    = {Author},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
   note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
                   same key, but with different firstkey.}
 }
@@ -147,7 +164,7 @@
   title        = {Jaarverslag 2003},
   englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003},
   address      = {Amsterdam},
-  publisher    = {Author},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
   note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
                   same key, but with different firstkey.}
 }
@@ -342,6 +359,13 @@
   note   = {no example, but rule given in text}
 }
 
+@misc{3.100-1b,
+  author = {Author},
+  year   = {2003 version},
+  type   = {Unknown},
+  note   = {no example, but rule given in text}
+}
+
 @book{3.100-2,
   author = {Aristotle},
   year   = {1931},
@@ -570,7 +594,8 @@
 }
 
 @misc{4.08-3,
-  author    = {Bulatao, E. {\bibliteral{(with Winford, C. A.)}}},
+  author    = {Bulatao, E. {\protect\bibliteral{(with
+               Winford, C.~A.)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
   year      = {\bibnodate},
   type      = {Unknown}
 }
@@ -578,7 +603,7 @@
 @article{4.09-1,
   author = {Fowers, B. J. and Olson, D. H.},
   year   = {1993},
-  title  = {{ENRICH} {M}arital {S}atisfaction {S}cale:
+  title  = {{ENRICH} {Marital} {Satisfaction} {Scale}:
             {A} Brief Research and Clinical Tool},
   journal = {Journal of Family Psychology},
   volume  = {7},
@@ -588,7 +613,7 @@
 @article{4.10-1,
   author  = {Deutsch, F. M. and Lussier, J. B. and Servis, L. J.},
   year    = {1993},
-  title   = {Husbands At Home: {P}redictors of Paternal Participation
+  title   = {Husbands At Home: Predictors of Paternal Participation
              in Childcare and Housework},
   journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
   volume  = {65},
@@ -599,7 +624,7 @@
   author    = {O'Neil, J. M. and Egan, J.},
   year      = {1992},
   title     = {Men's and Women's Gender Role Journeys:
-               {M}etaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation},
+               Metaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation},
   editor    = {Wainrib, B. R.},
   booktitle = {Gender Issues Across the Life Cycle},
   pages     = {107--123},
@@ -610,7 +635,7 @@
 @article{4.11-1,
   author  = {Buss, D. M. and Schmitt, D. P.},
   year    = {1993},
-  title   = {Sexual Strategies Theory: {A}n Evolutionary Perspective
+  title   = {Sexual Strategies Theory: An Evolutionary Perspective
              on Human Mating},
   journal = {Psychological Review},
   volume  = {100},
@@ -631,7 +656,7 @@
 @book{4.12-1,
   author    = {Saxe, G. B.},
   year      = {1991},
-  title     = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: {S}tudies in
+  title     = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: Studies in
                Mathematical Understanding},
   address   = {Hillsdale, NJ},
   publisher = {Erlbaum}
@@ -668,21 +693,21 @@
 }
 
 @misc{4.15-1,
-  key   = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}},
-  title = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the
-           {A}merican {P}sychological {A}ssociation},
-  year  = {2000},
-  month = oct,
-  day   = {12},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from
-                  \url{http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+  key         = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}},
+  title       = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the
+                 {American} {Psychological} {Association}},
+  year        = {2000},
+  month       = oct,
+  day         = {12},
+  lastchecked = {October 23, 2000},
+  URL         = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html}
 }
 
 @article{4.15-2,
   author = {Eid, M. and Langeheine, R.},
   year   = {1999},
   title  = {The Measurement of Consistency and Occasion Specificity
-            with Latent Class Models: {A} New Model and its
+            with Latent Class Models: A New Model and its
             Application to the Measurement of Affect},
   journal = {Psychological Methods},
   volume  = {4},
@@ -690,13 +715,6 @@
   howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database}
 }
 
-@string{comment = {
-%
-%  The rest is from section 4.16. Section number is omitted,
-%  but A-I are used instead. For the numbered examples, these
-%  letters are also omitted in favor of ``ex''.
-%
-}}
 
 @article{A-1,
   author  = {Herman, L. M. and Kuczaj, III, S. A. and Holder, M. D.},
@@ -784,7 +802,7 @@
 @article{ex7,
   author  = {Brown, L. S.},
   year    = {1993},
-  month   = {Spring},
+  month   = spring,
   title   = {Antidomination Training as a Central Component of
              Diversity in Clinical Psychology Education},
   journal = {The Clinical Psychologist},
@@ -794,7 +812,7 @@
 
 @article{ex8,
   year    = {1993},
-  month   = {August/September},
+  month   = aug # "/" # sep,
   title   = {The New Health-Care Lexicon},
   journal = {Copy Editor},
   volume  = {4},
@@ -837,7 +855,7 @@
   editor  = {Barlow, D. H.},
   year    = {1991},
   title   = {Diagnoses, Dimensions, and \emph{DSM-IV}:
-             {T}he Science of Classification},
+             The Science of Classification},
   type    = {Special issue},
   journal = {Journal of Abnormal Psychology},
   volume  = {100},
@@ -850,14 +868,14 @@
   title   = {Young Children's Understanding of Pretense},
   journal = {Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development},
   volume  = {58},
-  number  = {1, Serial No.~231}
+  number  = {1, Serial No.~231},
 }
 
 @article{ex14,
   author  = {Battig, W. F. and Montague, W. E.},
   year    = {1969},
   title   = {Category Norms for Verbal Items in 56 Categories:
-             {A} Replication and Extension of the {C}onnecticut
+             A Replication and Extension of the {Connecticut}
              Category Norms},
   journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs},
   volume  = {80},
@@ -868,7 +886,7 @@
   author  = {Ganster, D. C. and Schaubroeck, J. and Sime, W. E.
              and Mayes, B. T.},
   year    = {1991},
-  title   = {The Nomological Validity of the {T}ype~{A} Personality
+  title   = {The Nomological Validity of the {Type}~{A} Personality
              Among Employed Adults},
   type    = {Monograph},
   journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
@@ -882,7 +900,7 @@
   year    = {1991},
   title   = {{MAP}-2 Expression in Cholinoceptive Pyramidal Cells
              of Rodent Cortex and Hippocampus is Altered by
-             {P}avlovian Conditioning},
+             {Pavlovian} Conditioning},
   type    = {Abstract},
   journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts},
   volume  = {17},
@@ -892,8 +910,8 @@
 @article{ex17,
   author  = {Nakazato, K. and Shimonaka, Y. and Homma, A.},
   year    = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}},
-  title   = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: {T}he {T}okyo
-             {M}etropolitan {C}entenarian {S}tudy},
+  title   = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: The {Tokyo}
+             {Metropolitan} {Centenarian} {Study}},
   journal = {Japanese Journal of Developmental Psychology},
   volume  = {3},
   pages   = {9--16},
@@ -905,7 +923,7 @@
 @article{ex18,
   author  = {Regier, A. A. and Narrow, W. E. and Rae, D. S.},
   year    = {1990},
-  title   = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: {T}he Epidemiologic
+  title   = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: The Epidemiologic
              Catchment Area ({ECA}) Experience},
   journal = {Journal of Psychiatric Research},
   volume  = {24},
@@ -925,11 +943,11 @@
 @article{ex20,
   author  = {Ising, M.},
   year    = {2000},
-  title   = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {P}otenzial im
-             {EEG}: {S}ind impulsive {P}ersonen {A}ugmenter oder
-             {R}educer?},
+  title   = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {Potenzial} im
+             {EEG}: Sind impulsive {Personen} {Augmenter} oder
+             {Reducer}?},
   englishtitle = {Intensity Dependence in Event-Related {EEG} Potentials:
-             {A}re Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?},
+             Are Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?},
   journal = {Zeitschrift f{\"{u}}r Differentielle und Diagnostische
              Psychologie},
   volume  = {21},
@@ -949,7 +967,7 @@
 @article{ex22,
   author  = {Coltheart, M. and Curtis, B. and Atkins, P. and Haller, M.},
   year    = {1993},
-  title   = {Models of Reading Aloud: {D}ual-Route and
+  title   = {Models of Reading Aloud: Dual-Route and
              Parallel-Distributed-Processing Approaches},
   journal = {Psychological Review},
   volume  = {100},
@@ -959,17 +977,17 @@
 @book{B-1,
   author    = {Beck, C. A. J. and Sales, B. D.},
   year      = {2001},
-  title     = {Family Mediation: {F}acts, Myths, and Future Prospects},
+  title     = {Family Mediation: Facts, Myths, and Future Prospects},
   address   = {Washington, DC},
   publisher = {American Psychological Association}
 }
 
 @book{ex23,
-  author    = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr., J. R.},
+  author    = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr.\hbox{}, J. R.},
   year      = {1987},
-  title     = {People in Organizations: {A}n Introduction to
+  title     = {People in Organizations: An Introduction to
                Organizational Behavior},
-  edition   = {3rd},
+  edition   = {3},
   address   = {New York},
   publisher = {McGraw-Hill}
 }
@@ -978,16 +996,17 @@
   author    = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}},
   year      = {1991},
   title     = {Estimated Resident Population by Age and Sex in
-               Statistical Local Areas, {N}ew {S}outh {W}ales, {J}une 1990},
+               Statistical Local Areas, {New} {South} {Wales},
+               {June} 1990},
   number    = {3209.1},
   address   = {Canberra, Australian Capital Territory},
-  publisher = {Author}
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}}
 }
 
 @book{ex25,
   editor    = {Gibbs, J. T. and Huang, L. N.},
   year      = {1991},
-  title     = {Children of Color: {P}sychological Interventions with
+  title     = {Children of Color: Psychological Interventions with
                Minority Youth},
   address   = {San Francisco},
   publisher = {Jossey-Bass}
@@ -1017,8 +1036,8 @@
 
 @book{ex26,
   year      = {1993},
-  title     = {Merriam-{W}ebster's Collegiate Dictionary},
-  edition   = {10th},
+  title     = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Collegiate Dictionary},
+  edition   = {10},
   address   = {Springfield, MA},
   publisher = {Merriam-Webster}
 }
@@ -1027,7 +1046,7 @@
   author    = {Rosenthal, R.},
   year      = {1987},
   title     = {Meta-Analytic Procedures for Social Research},
-  edition   = {Rev.{}},
+  edition   = {Rev.\hbox{}},
   address   = {Newbury Park, CA},
   publisher = {Sage}
 }
@@ -1042,37 +1061,22 @@
 }
 
 @book{ex29,
-  firstkey  = {{American Psychiatric Association}},
-  key       = {{\APACcitebtitle{DSM-IV}}},
+  key       = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric
+               Association}{Diagnostic and Statistical Manual
+               of Mental Disorders}{4th ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
   author    = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}},
   year      = {1994},
   title     = {Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders},
-  edition   = {4th},
+  edition   = {4},
   address   = {Washington, DC},
-  publisher = {Author}
-}
-
-@misc{ex29-2,
-  author    = {Americana},
-  year      = {\bibnodate},
-  type      = {Unknown},
-  note      = {Test for sorting of American Psychiatric Association
-               in \BibTeX{} and \MakeIndex{}.}
-}
-
-@misc{ex29-3,
-  author    = {Americans},
-  year      = {\bibnodate},
-  type      = {Unknown},
-  note      = {Test for sorting of American Psychiatric Association
-               in \BibTeX{} and \MakeIndex{}.}
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}}
 }
 
 @book{ex30,
   editor    = {Sadie, S.},
   year      = {1980},
   title     = {The New {G}rove Dictionary of Music and Musicians},
-  edition   = {6th},
+  edition   = {6},
   volume    = {1--20},
   address   = {London},
   publisher = {Macmillan}
@@ -1120,18 +1124,19 @@
   year      = {1993},
   title     = {Guidelines for Reporting and Writing About People
                with Disabilities},
-  edition   = {4th},
+  edition   = {4},
   type      = {Brochure},
   address   = {Lawrence, KS},
-  publisher = {Author}
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on
+               Independent Living}}}
 }
 
 @incollection{B-2,
   author    = {Massaro, D.},
   year      = {1992},
   title     = {Broadening the Domain of the Fuzzy Logical Model of Perception},
-  editor    = {Pick, Jr., H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.},
-  booktitle = {Cognition: {C}onceptual and Methodological Issues},
+  editor    = {Pick, Jr.\hbox{}, H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.},
+  booktitle = {Cognition: Conceptual and Methodological Issues},
   pages     = {51--84},
   address   = {Washington, DC},
   publisher = {American Psychological Association}
@@ -1152,10 +1157,10 @@
   author    = {Auerbach, J. S.},
   year      = {\BIP},
   title     = {The Origins of Narcissism and Narcissistic Personality
-               Disorder: {A} Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation},
+               Disorder: A Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation},
   editor    = {Masling, J. M. and Bornstein, R. F.},
   booktitle = {Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic Theories:
-               {V}ol.~4. {P}sychoanalytic Perspectives on Psychopathology},
+               {Vol}.~4. {Psychoanalytic} Perspectives on Psychopathology},
   address   = {Washington, DC},
   publisher = {American Psychological Association}
 }
@@ -1164,12 +1169,12 @@
   author    = {Maccoby, E. E. and Martin, J.},
   year      = {1983},
   title     = {Socialization in the Context of the Family:
-               {P}arent-Child Interaction},
-  editor    = {Mussen (Series Ed.), P. H. and
-               Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.}}, E. M.},
+               Parent-Child Interaction},
+  editor    = {Mussen (Series Ed.\hbox{}), P. H. and
+               Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.\hbox{}}}, E. M.},
   booktitle = {Handbook of Child Psychology:
-               {V}ol.~4. {S}ocialization, Personality, and Social Development},
-  edition   = {4th},
+               {Vol}.~4. {Socialization}, Personality, and Social Development},
+  edition   = {4},
   pages     = {1--101},
   address   = {New York},
   publisher = {Wiley}
@@ -1179,9 +1184,9 @@
   author       = {Davydov, V. V.},
   year         = {1972},
   title        = {De Introductie van het Begrip Grootheid in de Eerste
-                  Klas van de Basisschool: {E}en Experimenteel Onderzoek},
+                  Klas van de Basisschool: Een Experimenteel Onderzoek},
   englishtitle = {The Introduction of the Concept of Quantity in the
-                  First Grade of the Primary School: {A}n Experimental Study},
+                  First Grade of the Primary School: An Experimental Study},
   editor       = {Van Parreren, C. F. and Carpay, J. A. M.},
   booktitle    = {Sovjetpsychologen aan het Woord},
   pages        = {227--289},
@@ -1193,7 +1198,7 @@
   author       = {Bergmann, P. G.},
   year         = {1993},
   title        = {Relativity},
-  booktitle    = {The New Encyclopaedia {B}ritannica},
+  booktitle    = {The New Encyclopaedia {Britannica}},
   volume       = {26},
   pages        = {501--508},
   address      = {Chicago},
@@ -1207,7 +1212,7 @@
     editor       = {Strachey, J.},
     translator   = {Strachey, J.},
     booktitle    = {The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological
-                    Works of {S}igmund {F}reud},
+                    Works of {Sigmund} {Freud}},
     volume       = {19},
     pages        = {3--66},
     address      = {London},
@@ -1218,10 +1223,10 @@
 @incollection{ex40,
     author       = {Piaget, J.},
     year         = {1988},
-    title        = {Extracts from {P}iaget's Theory},
+    title        = {Extracts from {Piaget}'s Theory},
     translator   = {Gellerier, G. and Langer, J.},
     editor       = {Richardson, K. and Sheldon, S.},
-    booktitle    = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: {A} Reader},
+    booktitle    = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: A Reader},
     pages        = {3--18},
     address      = {Hillsdale, NJ},
     publisher    = {Erlbaum},
@@ -1233,6 +1238,22 @@
     originalpublisher = {Wiley}
 }
 
+@incollection{ex40-t1,
+   author          = {Browne, M[ichael] W.},
+   year            = {1977},
+   title           = {Generalized Least Squares Estimators in the Analysis
+                      of Covariance Structures},
+   editor          = {Aigner, D[ennis] J. and Goldberger, A[rthur] S.},
+   booktitle       = {Latent Variables in Socio-Economic Models},
+   pages           = {205--226},
+   address         = {Amsterdam},
+   publisher       = {North Holland},
+   originalyear    = {1974},
+   originaljournal = {South African Statistical Journal},
+   originalvolume  = {8},
+   originalpages   = {1--24},
+}
+
 @techreport{C-1,
   author      = {Mazzeo, J. and Druesne, B. and Raffeld, P. C.
                  and Checketts, K. T. and Muhlstein, A.},
@@ -1264,19 +1285,19 @@
   type        = {\bibnotype},
   address     = {Lincoln},
   institution = {University of Nebraska},
-  note        = {NTIS No.{} PB~91-154~377/AS}
+  note        = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS}
 }
 
 @techreport{ex43,
   author      = {Mead, J. V.},
   year        = {1992},
-  title       = {Looking at Old Photographs: {I}nvestigating the Teacher
+  title       = {Looking at Old Photographs: Investigating the Teacher
                  Tales that Novice Teachers Bring with Them},
   type        = {Report},
   number      = {NCRTL-RR-92-4},
   address     = {East Lansing, MI},
   institution = {National Center for Research on Teacher Learning},
-  note        = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.{} ED346082}
+  note        = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082}
 }
 
 @techreport{ex44,
@@ -1285,17 +1306,18 @@
   firstkey    = {{U.S. Department of Health and Human Services [DHHS]}},
   key         = {{DHHS}},
   year        = {1992},
-  title       = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: {P}rediction and Prevention},
+  title       = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: Prediction and Prevention},
   type        = {AHCPR Publication},
   number      = {92-0047},
   address     = {Rockville, MD},
-  institution = {Author}
+  institution = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and
+                 Human Services}}}
 }
 
 @intechreport{ex45,
   author      = {Matthews, K. A.},
   year        = {1985},
-  title       = {Assessment of {T}ype~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility
+  title       = {Assessment of {Type}~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility
                  in Epidemiologic Studies of Cardiovascular Disease},
   editor      = {Ostfield, A. M. and Eaker, E. D.},
   booktitle   = {Measuring Psychological Variables in Epidemiologic Studies
@@ -1319,8 +1341,8 @@
 @techreport{ex47,
   editor      = {Shuker, R. and Openshaw, R. and Soler, J.},
   year        = {1990},
-  title       = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {N}ew {Z}ealand:
-                 {F}rom Hooligans to Video Nasties},
+  title       = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {New} {Zealand}:
+                 From Hooligans to Video Nasties},
   type        = {Delta Research Monograph},
   number      = {11},
   address     = {Palmerston North, New Zealand},
@@ -1338,17 +1360,17 @@
   type        = {Issue Brief},
   number      = {123},
   address     = {Washington, DC},
-  institution = {Author}
+  institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}}
 }
 
 @incollection{ex49,
   author       = {Deci, E. L. and Ryan, R. M.},
   year         = {1991},
   title        = {A Motivational Approach to Self:
-                  {I}ntegration in Personality},
+                  Integration in Personality},
   editor       = {Dienstbier, R.},
-  booktitle    = {Nebraska {S}ymposium on {M}otivation: {V}ol.~38.
-                  {P}erspectives on Motivation},
+  booktitle    = {Nebraska {Symposium} on {Motivation}: Vol.~38.
+                  {Perspectives} on Motivation},
   pages        = {237--288},
   address      = {Lincoln},
   publisher    = {University of Nebraska Press}
@@ -1373,47 +1395,48 @@
   chair        = {Rosenthal, T. L.},
   symposium    = {Reducing Medication in Geriatric Populations},
   howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the First
-                  International Congress of Behavioral Medicine,
-                  Uppsala, Sweden}
+                  International Congress of Behavioral Medicine},
+  address      = {Uppsala, Sweden}
 }
 
 @lecture{ex52,
   author       = {Lanktree, C. and Briere, J.},
   year         = {1991},
   month        = jan,
-  title        = {Early Data on the {T}rauma {S}ymptom {C}hecklist
-                  for {C}hildren ({TSC-C})},
+  title        = {Early Data on the {Trauma} {Symptom} {Checklist}
+                  for {Children} ({TSC-C})},
   howpublished = {Paper presented at the meeting of the American
-                  Professional Society on the Abuse of Children,
-                  San Diego, CA}
+                  Professional Society on the Abuse of Children},
+  address      = {San Diego, CA}
 }
 
 @lecture{ex53,
   author       = {Ruby, J. and Fulton, C.},
   year         = {1993},
   month        = jun,
-  title        = {Beyond Redlining: {E}diting Software that Works},
+  title        = {Beyond Redlining: Editing Software that Works},
   howpublished = {Poster session presented at the annual meeting of the
-                  Society for Scholarly Publishing, Washington, DC}
+                  Society for Scholarly Publishing},
+  address      = {Washington, DC}
 }
 
 @phdthesis{ex54,
   author       = {Bower, D. L.},
   year         = {1993},
   title        = {Employee Assistant Programs Supervisory Referrals:
-                  {C}haracteristics of Referring and Nonreferring
+                  Characteristics of Referring and Nonreferring
                   Supervisors},
   journal      = {Dissertation Abstracts International},
   volume       = {54},
   number       = {01},
   pages        = {534B},
-  note         = {UMI No.{} 9315947}
+  note         = {UMI No.~9315947}
 }
 
 @phdthesis{ex55,
   author       = {Ross, D. F.},
   year         = {1990},
-  title        = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: {W}hen
+  title        = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: When
                   a Witness Misidentifies a Familiar but Innocent Person
                   from a Lineup},
   school       = {Cornell University},
@@ -1426,7 +1449,7 @@
 @phdthesis{ex56,
   author       = {Wilfley, D. E.},
   year         = {1989},
-  title        = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: {N}ormalweight
+  title        = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: Normalweight
                   and Obese},
   school       = {University of Missouri},
   address      = {Columbia}
@@ -1435,8 +1458,8 @@
 @mastersthesis{ex57,
   author       = {Almeida, D. M.},
   year         = {1990},
-  title        = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: {C}onsequences
-                  for Fathers' Stress and Father-Child Relations},
+  title        = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences
+                  for Fathers' Stress and Father--Child Relations},
   school       = {University of Victoria},
   address      = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada}
 }
@@ -1452,7 +1475,7 @@
 @unpublished{ex59,
   author       = {D{\'{e}}pret, E. F. and Fiske, S. T.},
   year         = {1993},
-  title        = {Perceiving the Powerful: {I}ntriguing Individuals Versus
+  title        = {Perceiving the Powerful: Intriguing Individuals Versus
                   Threatening Groups},
   howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
   organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst}
@@ -1476,8 +1499,8 @@
 @misc{ex62,
   editor       = {Klombers, N.},
   year         = {1993},
-  month        = {Spring},
-  title        = {{ADAA} {R}eporter},
+  month        = spring,
+  title        = {{ADAA} {Reporter}},
   note         = {Available from the Anxiety Disorders Association of
                   America, 6000 Executive Boulevard, Suite 513,
                   Rockville, MD 20852}
@@ -1508,7 +1531,7 @@
 @article{ex64,
   author       = {Kraus, S. J.},
   year         = {1992},
-  title        = {Visions of Psychology: {A} Videotext of Classic Studies},
+  title        = {Visions of Psychology: A Videotext of Classic Studies},
   type         = {Review of the motion picture
                   {\APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}}},
   journal      = {Contemporary Psychology},
@@ -1517,8 +1540,9 @@
 }
 
 @misc{ex65-1,
-  author    = {Scorsese, M. {\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
-               and Lonergan, K. {\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}}},
+  author    = {Scorsese, M. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+               and Lonergan, K.
+               {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
   year      = {2000},
   title     = {You Can Count On Me},
   type      = {Motion picture},
@@ -1527,10 +1551,11 @@
 }
 
 @misc{ex65-2,
-  author    = {Harrison, J. {\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
-               and Schmiechen, R. {\bibliteral{(Director)}}},
+  author    = {Harrison, J. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+               and Schmiechen, R.
+               {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
   year      = {1992},
-  title     = {Changing Our Minds: {T}he Story of {E}velyn {H}ooker},
+  title     = {Changing Our Minds: The Story of {Evelyn} {Hooker}},
   type      = {Motion picture},
   note      = {Available from Changing Our Minds, Inc., 170 West End
                Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023}
@@ -1542,25 +1567,26 @@
   key       = {{APA}},
   year      = {2000},
   title     = {Responding Therapeutically to Patient Expressions of
-               Sexual Attraction: {A} Stimulus Training Tape},
+               Sexual Attraction: A Stimulus Training Tape},
   type      = {Motion picture},
   note      = {Available from the American Psychological Association,
                750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242}
 }
 
 @misc{ex66,
-  author    = {Crystal, L. {\bibliteral{(Executive Producer)}}},
+  author    = {Crystal, L. {\protect\bibliteral{(Executive
+                            Producer)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
   year      = {1993},
   month     = oct,
   day       = {11},
-  title     = {The {M}ac{N}eil/{L}ehrer News Hour},
+  title     = {The {MacNeil}/{Lehrer} News Hour},
   type      = {Television broadcast},
   address   = {New York and Washington, DC},
   publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service}
 }
 
 @misc{ex67,
-  editor    = {Miller, {\bibliteral{R\protect\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
+  editor    = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
   year      = {1989},
   title     = {The Mind},
   type      = {Television series},
@@ -1569,8 +1595,9 @@
 }
 
 @incollection{ex68,
-  author    = {Hall, B. {\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
-               and Bender, J. {\bibliteral{(Director)}}},
+  author    = {Hall, B. {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+               and Bender, J.
+               {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
   year      = {1991},
   title     = {The Rules of the Game},
   type      = {Television series episode},
@@ -1605,7 +1632,7 @@
 }
 
 @misc{ex70,
-  author    = {Costa, Jr. {\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.},
+  author    = {Costa, Jr.\hbox{} {\protect\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.},
   year      = {1988},
   title     = {Personality, Continuity, and Changes of Adult Life},
   type      = {Cassette Recording},
@@ -1626,102 +1653,100 @@
 }
 
 @article{ex71-2,
-  author  = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.},
-  year    = {2001},
-  title   = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources
-             by Psychology Undergraduates},
-  journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research},
-  volume  = {5},
-  pages   = {117--123},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved October 13, 2001, from
-             \url{http://jbr.org/articles.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.},
+  year        = {2001},
+  title       = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources
+                 by Psychology Undergraduates},
+  journal     = {Journal of Bibliographic Research},
+  volume      = {5},
+  pages       = {117--123},
+  lastchecked = {October 13, 2001},
+  url         = {http://jbr.org/articles.html}
 }
 
 @article{ex72,
-  author  = {Fredrickson, B. L.},
-  year    = {2000},
-  month   = mar,
-  day     = {7},
-  title   = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health
-             and Well-Being},
-  journal = {Prevention \& Treatment},
-  volume  = {3},
-  pages   = {Article 0001a},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved November 20, 2000, from
-                  \url{http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/
-                  pre0030001a.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {Fredrickson, B. L.},
+  year        = {2000},
+  month       = mar,
+  day         = {7},
+  title       = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health
+                 and Well-Being},
+  journal     = {Prevention \& Treatment},
+  volume      = {3},
+  pages       = {Article 0001a},
+  lastchecked = {November 20, 2000},
+  url         = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html}
 }
 
 @article{ex73,
-  author  = {Crow, T. J.},
-  year    = {2000},
-  title   = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the
-             {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?},
-  journal = {Psycoloquy},
-  volume  = {11},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved March 25, 2001, from
-            \url{ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/2000.volume.11/
-                 psyc.00.11.001.language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {Crow, T. J.},
+  year        = {2000},
+  title       = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the
+                 {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?},
+  journal     = {Psycoloquy},
+  volume      = {11},
+  lastchecked = {March 25, 2001},
+  url         = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/
+                 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001.
+                 language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow}
 }
 
 @article{ex74,
-  author  = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J.
-             and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others},
-  year    = {1998},
-  month   = jul,
-  title   = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with
-             Epilepsy---{P}roject Update},
-  journal = {Telehealth News},
-  volume  = {2},
-  number  = {2},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved June 6, 2000, from
-    \url{http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J.
+                 and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others},
+  year        = {1998},
+  month       = jul,
+  title       = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with
+                 Epilepsy---{P}roject Update},
+  journal     = {Telehealth News},
+  volume      = {2},
+  number      = {2},
+  lastchecked = {June 6, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1}
 }
 
 @misc{ex75,
-  author   = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy
-               Community 2000,
-               Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}},
-  firstkey = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000,
-               Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}},
-  key      = {{TFTAI}},
-  year     = {\bibnodate},
-  title    = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {Y}ou Do!},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved October 5, 2000, from
-                  \url{http://www.familymealtime.org}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy
+                  Community 2000,
+                  Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}},
+  firstkey    = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000,
+                  Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}},
+  key         = {{TFTAI}},
+  year        = {\bibnodate},
+  title       = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {You} Do!},
+  lastchecked = {October 5, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.familymealtime.org}
 }
 
 @incollection{ex76,
-  author    = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}},
-  year      = {1998},
-  month     = jul,
-  day       = {7},
-  title     = {Barriers to Closing the Gap},
-  booktitle = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: {L}ow-Income Communities in the
-               Information Age},
-  chapter   = {2},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved August 18, 2001, from
-                  \url{http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/
-                       two.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}},
+  year        = {1998},
+  month       = jul,
+  day         = {7},
+  title       = {Barriers to Closing the Gap},
+  booktitle   = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: Low-Income Communities in the
+                 Information Age},
+  chapter     = {2},
+  lastchecked = {August 18, 2001},
+  url         = {http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/two.html},
 }
 
 @misc{ex77,
-  year     = {\bibnodate},
-  title    = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey},
-  howpublished  = {Retrieved August 8, 2000, from
-              \url{http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/
-                   survey-1997-10/}\bibnodot{.}}
+  year        = {\bibnodate},
+  title       = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey},
+  lastchecked = {August 8, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/}
 }
 
 @misc{ex78,
   author    = {Chou, L. and McClintock, R. and Moretti, F. and Nix, D. H.},
   year      = {1993},
-  title     = {Technology and Education: {N}ew Wine in New Bottles:
-               {C}hoosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures},
+  title     = {Technology and Education: New Wine in New Bottles:
+               Choosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures},
   howpublished   = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University,
                Institute for Learning Technologies Web site:
-               \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/publications/papers/
-                    newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+               \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/
+                    publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}}
 }
 
 @misc{ex79,
@@ -1739,26 +1764,26 @@
 }
 
 @misc{ex80,
-  author    = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}},
-  firstkey  = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}},
-  key       = {{USSC}},
-  year      = {\bibnodate},
-  title     = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of
-               Federal Sentencing Statistics},
-  howpublished   = {Retrieved December 8, 1999, from
-               \url{http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}},
+  firstkey    = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}},
+  key         = {{USSC}},
+  year        = {\bibnodate},
+  title       = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of
+                 Federal Sentencing Statistics},
+  lastchecked = {December 8, 1999},
+  url         = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm}
 }
 
 @misc{ex81,
-  author    = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}},
-  year      = {1997},
-  month     = sep,
-  day       = {27},
-  title     = {Towards a {C}anadian Health {IWAY}: {V}ision, Opportunities
-               and Future Steps},
-  howpublished   = {Retrieved November 8, 2000, from
-               \url{http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/health/
-                    healthvision.doc}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}},
+  year        = {1997},
+  month       = sep,
+  day         = {27},
+  title       = {Towards a {Canadian} Health {IWAY}: Vision, Opportunities
+                 and Future Steps},
+  lastchecked = {November 8, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/
+                         health/healthvision.doc}
 }
 
 @techreport{ex82,
@@ -1766,10 +1791,9 @@
   year      = {1995},
   title     = {Extensions to the Delta Rule of Associative Learning},
   type      = {Indiana University Cognitive Science Research Report},
-  number    = {14},
-  howpublished   = {Abstract retrieved October 21, 2000, from
-               \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/
-               deltarule_abstract.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+  number    = {14\BmakeAbstractRetrieved},
+  lastchecked = {October 21, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/deltarule_abstract.html},
 }
 
 @lecture{ex83,
@@ -1780,19 +1804,19 @@
   title        = {Two-Handed Direct Manipulation on the Responsive
                   Workbench},
   howpublished = {Paper presented at the 1997 Symposium on Interactive 3D
-                  Graphics. Abstract retrieved June 12, 2000, from
-                  \url{http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/
-                  twohanded/}\bibnodot{.}}
+                  Graphics\BmakeAbstractRetrieved},
+  lastchecked  = {June 12, 2000},
+  url          = {http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/twohanded/},
 }
 
 @lecture{ex84,
   author       = {Tan, G. and Lewandowsky, S.},
   year         = {1996},
   title        = {A Comparison of Operator Trust in Humans Versus Machines},
-  howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference.
-                  Retrieved May 16, 2000, from
-                  \url{http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/centre/
-                       outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan}\bibnodot{.}}
+  howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference},
+  lastchecked  = {May 16, 2000},
+  url          = {http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/
+                  centre/outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan},
 }
 
 @misc{ex85,
@@ -1803,8 +1827,7 @@
   title  = {Seeing with Sound},
   type   = {\bibmessage},
   number = {1},
-  howpublished = {Message posted to
-            \url{news://sci.psychology.consciousness}\bibnodot{.}}
+  url    = {news://sci.psychology.consciousness}
 }
 
 @misc{ex86,
@@ -1815,9 +1838,7 @@
   title  = {News Resources for Visual Cognition},
   type   = {\bibmessage},
   number = {31},
-  howpublished = {Message posted to
-            \url{http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/
-            31}\bibnodot{.}}
+  url    = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31}
 }
 
 @misc{ex87,
@@ -1825,12 +1846,11 @@
   year   = {2000},
   month  = nov,
   day    = {20},
-  title  = {{YAHC}: {H}andle {P}arameters, {DOI} {G}enres, etc.},
+  title  = {{YAHC}: {Handle} {Parameters}, {DOI} {Genres}, etc.},
   type   = {\bibmessage},
   howpublished = {Message posted to Ref-Links electronic mailing list,
-            archived at
-            \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/ref-link/
-            msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+            archived at \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/
+                             ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}}
 }
 
 @article{ex88,
@@ -1841,24 +1861,24 @@
   journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
   volume  = {78},
   pages   = {443--449},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycARTICLES database}
+  howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database}
 }
 
 @newspaper{ex89,
-  author  = {Hilts, P. J.},
-  year    = {1999},
-  month   = feb,
-  day     = {16},
-  title   = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out},
-  journal = {New York Times},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved November 21, 2000, from
-             \url{http://www.nytimes.com}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {Hilts, P. J.},
+  year        = {1999},
+  month       = feb,
+  day         = {16},
+  title       = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out},
+  journal     = {New York Times},
+  lastchecked = {November 21, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.nytimes.com}
 }
 
 @article{ex90,
   author  = {Fournier, M. and {\lowercase{D}}e Ridder, D. and Bensing, J.},
   year    = {1999},
-  title   = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: {W}hat Does
+  title   = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: What Does
              Optimism Mean?},
   journal = {Journal of Behavioral Medicine},
   volume  = {22},
@@ -1870,39 +1890,48 @@
   author  = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. General Accounting Office}}},
   year    = {1997},
   month   = feb,
-  title   = {Telemedicine: {F}ederal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments},
+  title   = {Telemedicine: Federal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments},
   type    = {Publication},
   number  = {GAO/NSAID/HEHS-97-67},
   howpublished = {Retrieved September 15, 2000, from General Accounting Office
              Reports Online via GPO Access:
-             \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/aces160.shtml?/
-                  gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+             \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/
+                  aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}}
 }
 
 @misc{ex92,
   author    = {Miller, M. E.},
   year      = {1993},
-  title     = {The {I}nteractive {T}ester ({V}ersion~4.0)},
+  title     = {The {Interactive} {Tester}},
+  edition   = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces},
   type      = {\bibcomputersoftware},
   address   = {Westminster, CA},
   publisher = {Psytek Services}
 }
 
 @misc{ex93,
-  author    = {Schwarzer, R.},
-  year      = {1989},
-  title     = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis},
-  type      = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual},
-  howpublished = {Retrieved from
-               \url{http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/
-               meta_e.htm}\bibnodot{.}}
+  author      = {Schwarzer, R.},
+  year        = {1989},
+  title       = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis},
+  type        = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual},
+  lastchecked = {March 23, 2001},
+  url         = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm}
+}
+
+@manual{ex93-t1,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{R Development Core Team}}},
+  year      = {2004},
+  title     = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing},
+  address   = {Vienna, Austria},
+  publisher = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing},
+  url       = {http://www.r-project.org}
 }
 
 @misc{ex94,
   key       = {{\APACcitebtitle{National Health Interview Survey}}},
-  title     = {National {H}ealth {I}nterview {S}urvey---{C}urrent Health
-               Topics: 1991---{L}ongitudinal Study of Aging
-               {\upshape(\uppercase{V}ersion~4)}},
+  title     = {National {Health} {Interview} {Survey}---{Current} Health
+               Topics: 1991---{Longitudinal} Study of Aging},
+  edition   = {Version~4\noedition\ignorespaces},
   type      = {Data file},
   year      = {\bibnodate},
   address   = {Hyattsville, MD},
@@ -1916,7 +1945,7 @@
                 National Center for Health Statistics [DHHS-NCHS]}},
   key       = {{DHHS-NCHS}},
   year      = {1991},
-  title     = {National {H}ealth {P}rovider {I}nventory: {H}ome Health
+  title     = {National {Health} {Provider} {Inventory}: Home Health
                Agencies and Hospices, 1991},
   type      = {Data file},
   howpublished = {Available from National Technical Information Service
@@ -1924,23 +1953,17 @@
 }
 
 
-@string{comment = {
-%
-%  Additional references.
-%
-}}
-
 @book{APAManual3,
   author    = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
   firstkey  = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
   key       = {{APA}},
   year      = {1984},
-  title     = {Publication Manual of the {A}merican {P}sychological
-               {A}ssociation},
-  edition   = {3rd},
+  title     = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+               {Association}},
+  edition   = {3},
   address   = {Washington, DC},
-  publisher = {Author},
-  note      = {with revisions}
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+  note      = {with revisions},
 }
 
 @book{APAManual,
@@ -1948,40 +1971,47 @@
   firstkey  = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
   key       = {{APA}},
   year      = {2001},
-  title     = {Publication Manual of the {A}merican {P}sychological
-               {A}ssociation},
-  edition   = {5th},
+  title     = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+               {Association}},
+  edition   = {5},
   address   = {Washington, DC},
-  publisher = {Author}
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
 }
 
-@book{TeXbook,
-  author    = {Knuth, Donald E.},
-  year      = {1986},
-  title     = {The {\APACSortNoop{TeX}}{\TeX}book},
-  address   = {Reading, MA},
-  publisher = {Addison Wesley},
-  note      = {Reprinted with corrections September, 1993. Therefore,
-               the year should officially be 1986/1993 I guess, but
-               the corrections are presumably very minor.}
+@book{chicago,
+  title     = {The {Chicago} Manual of Style},
+  edition   = {15},
+  year      = {2003},
+  address   = {Chicago},
+  publisher = {The University of Chicago Press},
 }
 
 @book{LaTeXbook,
   author    = {Lamport, Leslie},
   year      = {1994},
-  title     = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: {A} Document Preparation System.
-               {U}ser's Guide and Reference Manual},
-  edition   = {2nd},
+  title     = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System.
+               {User}'s Guide and Reference Manual},
+  edition   = {2},
   address   = {Reading, MA},
-  publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
 }
 
-@book{LaTeXcomp,
-  author    = {Goossens, Michel and Mittelbach, Frank and Samarin, Alexander},
-  year      = {1994},
+@book{KoDa04,
+  author    = {Kopka, Helmut and Daly, Patrick W.},
+  year      = {2004},
+  title     = {Guide To {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}},
+  edition   = {4},
+  address   = {Boston, MA},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{TLC2,
+  author    = {Mittelbach, Frank and Goossens, Michel},
+  year      = {2004},
   title     = {The {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX} Companion},
-  address   = {Reading, MA},
-  publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+  edition   = {2},
+  address   = {Boston, MA},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
 }
 
 @book{meijer1998,
@@ -1989,7 +2019,7 @@
   year      = {1998},
   title     = {Structural Equation Models for Nonnormal Data},
   address   = {Leiden, The Netherlands},
-  publisher = {DSWO Press}
+  publisher = {DSWO Press},
 }
 
 @book{WaMe00,
@@ -1997,7 +2027,7 @@
   year      = {2000},
   title     = {Measurement Error and Latent Variables in Econometrics},
   address   = {Amsterdam},
-  publisher = {North-Holland}
+  publisher = {North-Holland},
 }
 
 @unpublished{APA-3rd-ed-ex53,
@@ -2008,6 +2038,9 @@
   howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
   organization = {Johns Hopkins University, Center for Social
                   Organization of Schools},
-  address      = {Baltimore}
+  address      = {Baltimore},
 }
 
+%%
+%%
+%% End of file `apa5ex.bib'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst
index 0097506a45e..8b416318614 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacite.bst
@@ -1,33 +1,60 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `apacite.bst'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
+%%
+%% This is file `apacite.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `bibstyle')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+%% apacite.bst
+%%   [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]
+
 
 %% apacite.bst : reference list according to APA manual
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%% This version: [2005/06/08]
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version}
+{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file
+  "apacite.bst"
+  " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]"
+  * top$
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% DECLARATION OF FIELDS, INTEGERS, AND STRINGS FOR EACH     %
-% ENTRY                                                     %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 ENTRY
@@ -47,6 +74,7 @@ ENTRY
     journal
     key          % key for second and later citations, or all
                  % citations if firstkey is missing
+    lastchecked  % for URL's
     month
     note
     number       % number of journal or report
@@ -78,6 +106,7 @@ ENTRY
     type         % type of phdthesis (e.g., Doctoral dissertation)
                  % or type of article (e.g., Letter to the editor)
                  % etc.
+    url
     volume
     year
   }
@@ -96,16 +125,17 @@ ENTRY
                            % should be cited and whether a, b, etc.
                            % after year is necessary
     title.sort.label       % for sorting titles
+    type.2                 % Replacement for type with misc entries and
+                           % entries that revert to misc.
   }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% DECLARATION OF GLOBAL INTEGERS AND STRINGS                %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 INTEGERS { len  pos  name.max  old.number  numnames  numnames.old
            nameptr  lastname  format.num.names  cite.initials.old
            cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old  forward
-           multiresult  dot
+           multiresult  dot brace.level
          }
 
 STRINGS  { s  t  u old.label  field
@@ -119,66 +149,53 @@ STRINGS  { s  t  u old.label  field
          }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% A small function for testing purposes.
 
 FUNCTION {test} { #0 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% A small function (ideally replaced by a user-definable
-% MACRO) that indicates whether index entries must be
-% generated.
 
 FUNCTION {make.index} { #0 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% MONTH MACROS                                              %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-MACRO {jan} {"{\APACSortNoop{01}}January"}
 
-MACRO {feb} {"{\APACSortNoop{02}}February"}
+MACRO {jan}    {"{\APACmonth{01}}"}
+
+MACRO {feb}    {"{\APACmonth{02}}"}
+
+MACRO {mar}    {"{\APACmonth{03}}"}
+
+MACRO {apr}    {"{\APACmonth{04}}"}
+
+MACRO {may}    {"{\APACmonth{05}}"}
+
+MACRO {jun}    {"{\APACmonth{06}}"}
 
-MACRO {mar} {"{\APACSortNoop{03}}March"}
+MACRO {jul}    {"{\APACmonth{07}}"}
 
-MACRO {apr} {"{\APACSortNoop{04}}April"}
+MACRO {aug}    {"{\APACmonth{08}}"}
 
-MACRO {may} {"{\APACSortNoop{05}}May"}
+MACRO {sep}    {"{\APACmonth{09}}"}
 
-MACRO {jun} {"{\APACSortNoop{06}}June"}
+MACRO {oct}    {"{\APACmonth{10}}"}
 
-MACRO {jul} {"{\APACSortNoop{07}}July"}
+MACRO {nov}    {"{\APACmonth{11}}"}
 
-MACRO {aug} {"{\APACSortNoop{08}}August"}
+MACRO {dec}    {"{\APACmonth{12}}"}
 
-MACRO {sep} {"{\APACSortNoop{09}}September"}
+MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"}
 
-MACRO {oct} {"{\APACSortNoop{10}}October"}
+MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"}
 
-MACRO {nov} {"{\APACSortNoop{11}}November"}
+MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"}
 
-MACRO {dec} {"{\APACSortNoop{12}}December"}
+MACRO {fall}   {"{\APACmonth{16}}"}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%            LOGICAL `NOT', `AND', AND `OR'                 %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Logical 'not':
-% If the first element on the stack is A then this function
-% does the following:
-%     push { #0 }
-%     push { #1 }
-% So now the first 3 elements of the stack are
-%     { #1 } { #0 } A
-% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if':
-% If A > 0 then { #0 } is executed, else { #1 } is executed:
-%     if A > 0
-%     then 0
-%     else 1
-% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
-% then this does
-%     (if A then false else true)
-% which is a logical 'not'.
 
 FUNCTION {not}
 {   { #0 }
@@ -187,23 +204,6 @@ FUNCTION {not}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Logical 'and':
-% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
-% then this function does the following:
-%     push 'skip$
-%     push { pop$ #0 }
-% So now first 4 elements are
-%     { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B
-% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
-% the stack):
-% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed:
-%     if A > 0
-%     then (B stays on top of stack)
-%     else (B is popped and #0 is pushed)
-% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
-% then this does
-%     (if A then B else false)
-% which is a logical 'and'.
 
 FUNCTION {and}
 {   'skip$
@@ -212,23 +212,6 @@ FUNCTION {and}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Logical 'or':
-% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
-% then this function does the following:
-%     push { pop$ #1 }
-%     push 'skip$
-% So now first 4 elements are
-%     'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B
-% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
-% the stack):
-% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed:
-%     if A > 0
-%     then (B is popped and #1 is pushed)
-%     else (B stays on top of stack)
-% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
-% then this does
-%     (if A then true else B)
-% which is a logical 'or'.
 
 FUNCTION {or}
 {   { pop$ #1 }
@@ -236,9 +219,7 @@ FUNCTION {or}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING                 %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -255,27 +236,19 @@ FUNCTION {warning.if.empty}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty
     %
 FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields}
-{ title empty$
-    type empty$
-      howpublished empty$
-      and
-    and
+{ title        empty$
+  type         empty$ and
+  howpublished empty$ and
     { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ }
     'skip$
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator
@@ -299,7 +272,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000
 
 FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str}
 { duplicate$ #10 <
@@ -320,12 +292,7 @@ FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position
-%          2 if editor not in author position
-%          3 if not applicable: use key
-%          0 if unknown type
 
 FUNCTION {ref.type}
 { type$ "article"      =
@@ -354,7 +321,9 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type}
             type$ "lecture"        =
               type$ "inbook"         =
                 type$ "inproceedings"  =
-                  type$ "intechreport"   =
+                  type$ "conference"  =
+                    type$ "intechreport"   =
+                    or
                   or
                 or
               or
@@ -373,17 +342,19 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type,
-%          0 otherwise
 
 FUNCTION {is.atype}
-{ type$ "article"      =
-    type$ "magazine"     =
-      type$ "newspaper"    =
+{ type$ "article"        =
+    type$ "magazine"       =
+      type$ "newspaper"      =
         type$ "incollection"   =
           type$ "inbook"         =
             type$ "inproceedings"  =
-              type$ "intechreport"   =
+              type$ "conference"  =
+                type$ "intechreport"   =
+                  type$ "manual"         =
+                  or
+                or
               or
             or
           or
@@ -400,8 +371,7 @@ FUNCTION {is.atype}
       and
         { #1 }
         { type$ "misc" =
-            type empty$ not
-            and
+          type empty$ not and
             { type "\bibmessage" =
                 type "\bibcomputerprogram" =
                   type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" =
@@ -484,21 +454,18 @@ FUNCTION {connect.check}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
-    % if length of second is 3 or larger,
+    % if length of second is 4 or larger,
     % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~")
-    % if length of second smaller than 3
+    % if length of second smaller than 4
     %
     % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect
     % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2"
     %
 FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect}
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 <
     { "~" }
     { "\ " }
   if$
@@ -538,7 +505,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check}
 FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check}
 { ": " connect.check }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
@@ -549,8 +515,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check}
 FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check}
 { "\ " connect.check }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % encloses string in pre- and postfix string
@@ -579,7 +543,6 @@ FUNCTION {emphasize.check}
   enclose.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % brackets top of stack
@@ -642,14 +605,20 @@ FUNCTION {multi.result.check}
   multiresult
 }
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e.,
+    % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate".
+    % Call with
+    %   field is.bibcorporate
+    %
+FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate}
+{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove non-alphanumeric characters
-% and change to lower case .
 
 FUNCTION {sortify}
 { purify$
@@ -657,14 +626,6 @@ FUNCTION {sortify}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting.
-%
-% Call with
-%     string remove.spaces
-%
-% E.g.,
-%     "fine old day" remove.spaces
-% gives "fineoldday" .
 
 FUNCTION {remove.spaces}
 {   % Remove spaces from string.
@@ -696,10 +657,8 @@ FUNCTION {remove.spaces}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS                     %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
@@ -711,7 +670,6 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block}
   newline$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
@@ -720,10 +678,10 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block}
     %
 FUNCTION {output.new.block}
 { output.end.block
-  "\newblock{}" write$
+  "\newblock" write$
+  newline$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
@@ -736,13 +694,11 @@ FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty.
-% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or
-% whatever is more defined in \newblock
 
 FUNCTION {start.new.block}
 { newline$
-  "\newblock{}" write$
+  "\unskip\ " write$ newline$
+  "\newblock " write$ newline$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -752,6 +708,7 @@ FUNCTION {start.new.block}
     %
 FUNCTION {fin.entry}
 { output.end.block
+  "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$
   test
     { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ }
     'skip$
@@ -759,27 +716,21 @@ FUNCTION {fin.entry}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING BY AUTHOR (OR SUBSTITUTE), YEAR,   %
-%  TITLE                                                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-%MACRO {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{  f{}}{  vv{}}{  jj{}}" }
-
 FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{  f{}}{  vv{}}{  jj{}}" }
 
 FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{ll}" }
 
-FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f. }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
 
-FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
 
-FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f.~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
 
-FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (1).
-% Initialization.
 
 FUNCTION {init.initials}
 { "yyyyy"  'aut1f.old :=
@@ -788,11 +739,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.initials}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (2).
-% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field  update.no.initials
 
 FUNCTION {update.no.initials}
 { 'field :=
@@ -802,7 +748,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.no.initials}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (3).
 
 FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut}
 {   %
@@ -832,9 +777,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (4).
-% Call with
-%   field  check.add.initials.field
 
 FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field}
 { 'field :=
@@ -847,7 +789,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (4).
 
 FUNCTION {check.add.initials}
 {   %
@@ -907,9 +848,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1).
-% Call with
-%   field  tentative.cite.num.names.field
 
 FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field}
 { 'field :=
@@ -938,7 +876,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2).
 
 FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names}
 {   %
@@ -997,8 +934,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before
-% looping over entries.
 
 FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names}
 { #0      'cite.num.names.old  :=
@@ -1014,7 +949,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Update "number of names to be cited" .
 
 FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names}
 { cite.num.names.short  'cite.num.names.old  :=
@@ -1030,10 +964,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues
-% to determine number of authors that must be cited.
-% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables
-% have already been defined.
 
 FUNCTION {format.6.authors}
 {   %
@@ -1125,9 +1055,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.6.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
-% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable
 
 FUNCTION {change.add.to.year}
 {
@@ -1151,12 +1078,6 @@ FUNCTION {change.add.to.year}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
-% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors
-% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
-% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed
-% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary.
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2}
 {   %
@@ -1203,13 +1124,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2).
-% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors
-% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
-% same year.
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more}
 {   %
@@ -1475,18 +1390,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3).
-% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field  definitive.cite.num.names.field
-%
-% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored.
-% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user
-% should have added additional author names.
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field}
 { 'field :=
@@ -1557,16 +1461,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field}
   update.cite.num.names
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4)
-% and especially whether a's and b's should be added.
-% This function is for the situation when author or editor
-% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is
-% used to cite the referenced work.
-%
-% Call with
-%   formatted.field   definitive.cite.no.names
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names}
 {   %
@@ -1600,7 +1495,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5).
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names}
 {   %
@@ -1647,7 +1541,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b').
 
 FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -1679,71 +1572,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Give month (converted to number) and day when available.
 
 FUNCTION {month.number.day}
 { month empty$
     { "" }
-    {   %
-%     month jan =
-%       { "01" }
-%       { month feb =
-%           { "02" }
-%           { month mar =
-%               { "03" }
-%               { month apr =
-%                   { "04" }
-%                   { month may =
-%                       { "05" }
-%                       { month jun =
-%                           { "06" }
-%                           { month jul =
-%                               { "07" }
-%                               { month aug =
-%                                   { "08" }
-%                                   { month sep =
-%                                       { "09" }
-%                                       { month oct =
-%                                           { "10" }
-%                                           { month nov =
-%                                               { "11" }
-%                                               { month dec =
-%                                                   { "12" }
-%                                                   {   %
-                                                        % Month is something
-                                                        % else, e.g., "Spring"
-                                                        % or jul # "/" # aug.
-                                                        % Currently too
-                                                        % difficult to figure
-                                                        % out: user should
-                                                        % trick the system.
-                                                        %
-                                                      month  sortify
-                                                      remove.spaces
-%                                                   }
-%                                                 if$
-%                                               }
-%                                             if$
-%                                           }
-%                                         if$
-%                                       }
-%                                     if$
-%                                   }
-%                                 if$
-%                               }
-%                             if$
-%                           }
-%                         if$
-%                       }
-%                     if$
-%                   }
-%                 if$
-%               }
-%             if$
-%           }
-%         if$
-%       }
-%     if$
+    { month sortify remove.spaces
         %
         % Add the day when available.
       day empty$
@@ -1757,12 +1590,6 @@ FUNCTION {month.number.day}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of
-% the stack.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field make.name.sort.label
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
 
 FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -1873,17 +1700,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
-% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and
-% editor are empty or unusable.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field make.field.year.sort.label
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
-% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
-% beginning.
 
 FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -1921,11 +1738,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
-% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
-% author or editor may be used
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -1943,9 +1756,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
-% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
-% author (but not editor) may be used
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -1958,10 +1768,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some
-% preprocessing.
 
 FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -2066,15 +1873,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label}
   author.year.sort.label  'sort.key$ :=
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make final sort label with names in field on top of
-% the stack.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field  make.definitive.name.sort.label
-%
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -2097,7 +1896,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
     { name.max  'format.num.names  := }
     { numnames  'format.num.names  := }
   if$
-    % Initialize stack with empty stringh
+    % Initialize stack with empty string
   ""
     %
     % Cycle over authors.
@@ -2126,16 +1925,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called to make definitive sort label if author and
-% editor are empty or unusable.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
-% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
-% beginning.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -2168,10 +1958,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor
-% may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2189,8 +1976,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor
-% may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2203,11 +1988,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make final sort key .
 
 FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key}
 {   %
@@ -2260,24 +2041,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key}
   author.year.sort.label  'sort.key$ :=
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to
-% teststring .
-%
-% Call with
-%     teststring N string chop.word
-%
-% E.g.,
-%     "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word
-% gives "fine old day"
-% and
-%     "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word
-% gives "The fine old day".
 
 FUNCTION {chop.word}
 { 's :=
@@ -2289,10 +2056,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.word}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string.
-%
-% Call with
-%     string chop.articles
 
 FUNCTION {chop.articles}
 { 's :=
@@ -2306,12 +2069,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.articles}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key.
-%
-% Call with
-%    field format.sort.title
-%
-% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here!
 
 FUNCTION {format.sort.title}
 {   %
@@ -2323,7 +2080,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.sort.title}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make title sorting label or substitute.
 
 FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
 { title empty$
@@ -2331,9 +2087,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
         { type empty$
             { howpublished empty$
                 { note empty$
-                    { "no title, type, howpublished, or note in "  cite$ *
-                      warning$
-                      " "
+                    { url empty$
+                        { " " }
+                        { url  format.sort.title }
+                      if$
                     }
                     { note  format.sort.title }
                   if$
@@ -2355,7 +2112,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make title number: rank number of sorted title .
 
 FUNCTION {make.title.number}
 { title.sort.label  old.label  =
@@ -2373,11 +2129,235 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.number}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  CITATION LABELS                                          %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {string.length}
+{ #0 'pos :=
+  % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty,
+  % add 1 to the string length.
+  % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true.
+  { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not }
+    { pos #1 + 'pos := }
+  while$
+  pop$ pos
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens}
+{ 's :=                    % The original string
+  s string.length 'len :=  % Its length (no. of characters)
+  "" 't :=                 % Initialize the transformed string
+  #1 'pos :=
+  #0 'brace.level :=
+    %
+    % while (pos < len) do
+    %
+  { pos len < }
+    { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0
+      brace.level #0 =
+        {
+          % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-".
+          % If so, replace and shift two positions.
+          s pos #2 substring$  ". " =
+          s pos #2 substring$  ".~" = or
+            { t "\BPBI " *  't :=
+              pos #2 +  'pos :=
+            }
+            { s pos #2 substring$  ".-" =
+                { t "\BHBI " *  't :=
+                  pos #2 +  'pos :=
+                }
+                { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position
+                  t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+                  % Check whether we need to increase brace level.
+                  % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+                  % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+                  % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems.
+                  s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+                    { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+                    'skip$
+                  if$
+                  pos #1 +  'pos :=
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally
+          t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+          % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level.
+          % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+          % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+          s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+            { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+            { s pos #1 substring$ "}" =
+                { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+          pos #1 +  'pos :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+    %
+  pos len =
+    { % Last character, copy
+      t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+    }
+    { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-"
+      % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it.
+      % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-".
+      s len #1 - #2 substring$
+      % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t
+      t text.length$ 'len :=   % Length of t (no. of characters)
+      t #1 len #6 - substring$
+      % Concatenate and assign to t
+      swap$ * 't :=
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Now push the result back on the stack
+  t
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen}
+{ % Format initials.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces
+  % and hyphens.
+  initials.with.space.name.format format.name$
+  transform.spaces.and.hyphens
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.last.part.name}
+{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format,
+  % as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.last.part.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.last.part.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  last.part.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+  % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  von.last.junior.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+  % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.von.junior.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.von.junior.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  von.junior.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name}
+{ % Format a name for citing with initials.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.cite.initials.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.cite.initials.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+  % and push on the stack.
+  one.complete.name.format format.name$
+  %
+  % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+  duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  %
+  % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack.
+  swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+  %
+  % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty).
+  "~" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.author.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the reference list.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.author.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.author.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+  % and push on the stack.
+  one.complete.name.format format.name$
+  %
+  % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack.
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name
+  %
+  % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+  swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  %
+  % Connect with last name.
+  connect.with.comma.check
+  %
+  % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials.
+  swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.name}
+{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.editor.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.editor.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  format.cite.initials.name
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.index.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the index.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.index.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.index.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  format.author.name
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Some macro strings about commas, etc. between authors
 
 FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT{}" }
 
@@ -2394,35 +2374,28 @@ FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers{.}" }
 FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod{.}" }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Add author index entry when desired.
-% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the
-%   contents of the relevant author field.
-% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the
-%   number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is
-%   #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.)
-% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written
-% to the .bbl file.
 
 FUNCTION {add.name.index}
 {   %
     %
   make.index
     { "%" * write$ newline$
-      "\protect\AX{"  write$
+        % Check for corporate author
+      field is.bibcorporate
+        { "\corporateAX{" }
+        { "\AX{" }
+      if$
+      write$
       field nameptr sort.name.format  format.name$  sortify  write$ newline$
       "@"  write$
-      field nameptr index.name.format format.name$  "}%"  *   write$ newline$
+      field nameptr format.index.name
+      "}%"  *   write$ newline$
     }
     { "%" * write$ newline$ }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
-% Field is on top of the stack.
-%
-% Call with
-%   format.num.names  field  make.name.cite.label
 
 FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
 { 'field  :=
@@ -2444,8 +2417,8 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
     %
   #1 'nameptr :=
   cite.initials  #1  =
-    { field  nameptr  cite.initials.name.format  format.name$ }
-    { field  nameptr  cite.name.format           format.name$ }
+    { field  nameptr  format.cite.initials.name     }
+    { field  nameptr  cite.name.format format.name$ }
   if$
   add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
     %
@@ -2544,8 +2517,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key
-% is available.
 
 FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
 {   %
@@ -2562,7 +2533,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
         { type empty$
             { howpublished empty$
                 { note empty$
-                    { cite$ }
+                    { url empty$
+                        { cite$ }
+                        { url   }
+                      if$
+                    }
                     { note  }
                   if$
                 }
@@ -2588,7 +2563,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2615,7 +2589,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2634,9 +2607,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement}
 {   %
@@ -2663,7 +2634,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate.
 
 FUNCTION {protect.year}
 { year empty$
@@ -2681,7 +2651,6 @@ FUNCTION {protect.year}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make year label that is used for citations in text.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label}
 { "{\protect\APACyear{"
@@ -2717,16 +2686,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label}
   make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make citation labels:
-% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author
-%   available) for first citation;
-% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent
-%   citations;
-% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b"
-%   etc. addendum when necessary.
 
 FUNCTION {make.cite.labels}
 { newline$
@@ -2806,14 +2766,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.cite.labels}
   "}%"                        write$ newline$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST                             %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix.
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {editor.postfix}
 { editor num.names$ #1 >
@@ -2823,8 +2779,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.postfix}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix}
 { editor num.names$ #1 >
@@ -2846,15 +2800,6 @@ FUNCTION {trans.postfix}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for
-% reference list.
-%
-% Call with
-%    dot  field  format.author.names
-% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors
-% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and
-% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end
-% the formatting.
 
 FUNCTION {format.author.names}
 { 'field  :=
@@ -2880,7 +2825,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
     % Format first author
     %
   #1  'nameptr :=
-  field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$
+  field  nameptr  format.author.name
     %
     % Add period if required and if this is the only author.
     %
@@ -2917,7 +2862,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
                 % Format second author.
                 %
               #2  'nameptr :=
-              field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  nameptr  format.author.name  's :=
                 %
                 % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others".
                 % If so, insert "et al." string.
@@ -2962,7 +2907,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
                     %
                     % Format and add next author
                     %
-                  field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$
+                  field  nameptr  format.author.name
                   add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
                     %
                     % Move to next author
@@ -2974,7 +2919,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
                 % nameptr  =  format.num.names
                 % Format this author.
                 %
-              field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  nameptr  format.author.name  's :=
                 %
               format.num.names  numnames  =
                 {   %
@@ -3035,8 +2980,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that
-% the author field is not empty.
 
 FUNCTION {format.authors}
 { #1 author format.author.names
@@ -3044,14 +2987,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as
-% authors (such as reference to entire edited book)
-%
-% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.).
-%     or
-% Letheridge, S. (Ed.).    (if only 1 editor)
-%
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors}
 { #0  editor  format.author.names
@@ -3059,16 +2994,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also
-% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire
-% edited book of translated articles)
-%
-% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.).
-%     or
-% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.).    (if only 1 editor)
-%
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors}
 { #0  editor  format.author.names
@@ -3076,14 +3001,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format a list of names with the initials before the
-% last names (i.e., names in the editor position),
-% commas between names (not between 2),
-% and ampersand (\&) before last name.
-% These names are not put in the author index.
-%
-% Call with
-%     field format.editor.names
 
 FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
 { 'field  :=
@@ -3098,7 +3015,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
     %
     % Format first editor
     %
-  field  #1  editor.name.format  format.name$
+  field  #1  format.editor.name
     %
   numnames  #1  =
     'skip$
@@ -3109,7 +3026,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
                 % Given that  format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
                 % No comma. Format second editor.
                 %
-              field  #2  editor.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  #2  format.editor.name  's :=
                 %
                 % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others".
                 % If so, insert "et al." string.
@@ -3133,7 +3050,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
                     %
                     % Format and add next editor
                     %
-                  field  nameptr  editor.name.format  format.name$  *
+                  field  nameptr  format.editor.name  *
                     %
                     % Move to next editor
                     %
@@ -3144,7 +3061,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
                 % nameptr  =  format.num.names
                 % Format this editor.
                 %
-              field  nameptr  editor.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  nameptr  format.editor.name  's :=
                 %
               format.num.names  numnames  =
                 {   %
@@ -3176,7 +3093,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format editors in case editors do not act as authors
@@ -3195,7 +3111,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line}
   editor.postfix   connect.with.space.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format editors in case editors are also translators
@@ -3216,7 +3131,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line}
   editor.trans.postfix   connect.with.space.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format translators in case translators act as editors
@@ -3235,7 +3149,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line}
   trans.postfix   connect.with.space.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format translators in case translator does not act as editor
@@ -3312,9 +3225,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check}
 FUNCTION {format.atrans.check}
 { format.translators.in.paren.check   parenthesize.check }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format "In editor (Ed.), "
@@ -3327,7 +3237,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format "In translator (Trans.),"
@@ -3340,8 +3249,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.trans}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)"
@@ -3369,69 +3276,54 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                            DATE                           %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which
-% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
-% Extra label can be used for
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1>
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2>
 
 FUNCTION {format.year.check}
-{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}"  % Opening and closing parentheses
+{ "\APACrefYear{"
   year empty$
-    { "\bibnodate{}" }
-    { year }
+    { "\bibnodate{}" * }
+    { year * }
   if$
     %
     % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
     %
   make.definitive.year.supplement *
-    %
-    % Combine everything
-    %
-  enclose.check
+  "}" *
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Formats year (+ extra label)  + month + day between
-% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
-% Extra label can be used for
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7)  <article 1>
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2>
 
 FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check}
-{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}"  % Opening and closing parentheses
+{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{"
   year empty$
-    { "\bibnodate{}" }
-    { year }
+    { "\bibnodate{}" * }
+    { year * }
   if$
     %
     % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
     %
   make.definitive.year.supplement *
+  "}{" *
     %
     % Add month and day when present.
     %
-  month connect.with.comma.check
-  day   connect.with.space.check
-    %
-    % Combine everything
-    %
-  enclose.check
+  month empty$
+    'skip$
+    { month * }
+  if$
+  "}{" *
+  day empty$
+    'skip$
+    { day * }
+  if$
+  "}" *
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                     TITLE FORMATTING                      %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of article in journal or book
@@ -3444,13 +3336,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot}
   "\BBCQ{}" swap$
   duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ }
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" *
+    }
   if$
   enclose.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of article in journal or book
@@ -3460,15 +3355,19 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot}
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot}
 { "\BBOQ{}" swap$
-  "\BBCQ{} " swap$
+  "\BBCQ{}" swap$
   duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ add.period$ }
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" * add.period$
+    }
   if$
   enclose.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of article in journal or book
@@ -3491,39 +3390,37 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
-    % title of book or so, no period
-    %
+    % title of book or so, without period
     % call with
     %     field format.btitle.no.dot
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot}
 { duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ emphasize.check }
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefbtitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" *
+    }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of book or so, with period
-    %     (maybe emphasize and add.period$ should be reversed)
     % call with
     %     field format.btitle.dot
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot}
 { duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ add.period$ emphasize.check }
+    { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of book and similar
@@ -3569,10 +3466,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot}
     %
     % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.)
     %
-FUNCTION {format.etitle.check}
+FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check}
 { englishtitle empty$
     { "" }
-    { englishtitle "t" change.case$ bracket.check }
+    { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefaetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" *
+                         englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.betitle.check}
+{ englishtitle empty$
+    { "" }
+    { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefbetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" *
+                         englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+    }
   if$
 }
 
@@ -3583,53 +3497,51 @@ FUNCTION {format.etitle.check}
 FUNCTION {format.atype.check}
 { type bracket.check }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title, englishtitle, and type
     % (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   format.atype.check   connect.with.space.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title, englishtitle,
     % and translator (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   format.atrans.check  connect.with.space.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title, englishtitle, type,
     % and translator (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   format.atype.check   connect.with.space.check
   format.atrans.check  connect.with.space.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3639,13 +3551,24 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check}
     %
 FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check }
 { "journal" journal warning.if.empty
-  journal   emphasize.check
-  volume    emphasize.check           connect.with.comma.check
-  number    parenthesize.check  ""    connect.check
-  swap$     connect.with.comma.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+  journal    empty$ and
+  volume     empty$ and
+  number     empty$ and
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     volume  "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     number  "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     swap$   "" connect.check
+      "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume of book, checks whether
     % "Volume" or "Volumes"
@@ -3658,14 +3581,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check}
     'skip$
     { duplicate$ multi.result.check
         { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
-        { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BVOL"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
       if$
     }
   if$
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % edition of book, must not be empty
@@ -3675,11 +3596,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check}
 FUNCTION {format.edition.check}
 { duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "\BEd" connect.with.space.check }
+    { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" *
+      "\BEd" connect.with.space.check
+    }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume and edition of book
@@ -3690,9 +3612,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check}
   connect.with.comma.check
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume and edition of book
@@ -3737,7 +3656,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.bpages.check}
     'skip$
     { duplicate$ multi.result.check
         { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
-        { "\BPG" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BPG~" swap$ * }
       if$
     }
   if$
@@ -3764,7 +3683,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc.
@@ -3778,25 +3696,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages}
   parenthesize.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title, volume, edition of book
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
   format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title, volume, edition, and translator of book
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
   format.bvol.edition.trans  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
 }
@@ -3806,12 +3721,15 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans}
     % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
   format.bvol.edition.editor.trans  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format address and publisher of book etc.
     %
@@ -3822,10 +3740,28 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans}
     % New York   (if publisher empty)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.address.publisher}
-{ address publisher connect.with.colon.check }
-
-
-
+{   %
+    % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author"
+    % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX.
+    % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does
+    % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in
+    % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.)
+    %
+  author empty$
+  publisher empty$ or
+    { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" }
+    { author   publisher =
+      "author" publisher =  or
+      "Author" publisher =  or
+        { author    "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" }
+        { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{"       }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  address "" connect.check  "}{" *
+    % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+  swap$   "" connect.check  "}"  *
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3842,10 +3778,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.address.publisher}
 FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check}
 { "publisher" publisher warning.if.empty
   "address"   address   warning.if.empty
-  format.address.publisher
+  publisher empty$
+  address   empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.address.publisher
+    }
+  if$
 }
 
-
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3858,7 +3806,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check}
     'skip$
     { duplicate$ multi.result.check
         { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
-        { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BNUM"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
       if$
     }
   if$
@@ -3871,16 +3819,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check}
     %   format.type.number
     %
 FUNCTION { format.type.number }
-{ number empty$
-    { type bracket.check }
-    { type
-      number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
+{ type empty$
+    { type.2 }
+    { type   }
+  if$
+  number empty$
+    { bracket.check }
+    { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
       parenthesize.check
     }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format howpublished if not empty,
     % for various entry types
@@ -3890,8 +3844,12 @@ FUNCTION { format.type.number }
 FUNCTION {format.howpublished}
 { howpublished empty$
     'skip$
-    { output.dot.new.block
-      howpublished
+    { % clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'pop$
+        { output.dot.new.block }
+      if$
+      "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" *
     }
   if$
 }
@@ -3906,26 +3864,71 @@ FUNCTION {format.howpublished}
 FUNCTION {output.howpublished}
 { howpublished empty$
     'skip$
-    { howpublished
+    { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" *
       output.dot.new.block
     }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%              NOTE FORMATTING FUNCTIONS                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % begin and end of url environment
+    %
+FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env}
+{ " \begin{APACrefURL} "
+    % For "Retrieved <date>, from"
+  lastchecked empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * }
+  if$
+  " \end{APACrefURL} "
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
-    % format optional note
+    % begin and end of message environment
     %
-FUNCTION {format.note}
-{ note parenthesize.check }
+FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env}
+{ " \begin{APACrefURLmsg} "
+  " \end{APACrefURLmsg} "
+}
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format url given that it is not empty,
+    % for various entry types
+    % call with
+    %   format.url
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{ % First format begin and end of the enclosing environment.
+  % With posted messages, a different environment is used.
+  type.2 empty$
+    { begin.end.url.env }
+    { type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+        { begin.end.msg.env }
+        { begin.end.url.env }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    % The url string.
+  "\url{" url * "}" *
+    % Enclose in begin and end environment
+  enclose.check
+}
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format optional note
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{ "\APACrefnote{"  "}"  note  enclose.check }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3934,33 +3937,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.note}
     %
 FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note}
 { originalyear empty$
-    { note parenthesize.check }
-    { originalyear "\bibnodate" =
-        { note parenthesize.check }
-        { "\BOWP{} " originalyear *          % original work published
-          note connect.with.semicolon.check
-          parenthesize.check
-        }
-      if$
+    { format.note }
+    { "\APACorigyearnote{"
+      originalyear    "" connect.check "}{" *
+      note            "" connect.check "}"  *
     }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format original journal of publication and note
     % (reprint or translation)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note}
-{ "\BREPR{} "                                   % reprinted from
-  originaljournal emphasize.check     *
-  originalyear    connect.with.comma.check
-  originalvolume  emphasize.check     connect.with.comma.check
-  originalnumber  bracket.check ""    connect.check
-  originalpages   connect.with.comma.check
-  note            connect.with.semicolon.check
-  parenthesize.check
+{ "\APACorigjournalnote{"
+  originalyear    "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalvolume  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalnumber  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpages   "" connect.check "}{" *
+  note            "" connect.check "}"  *
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -3969,42 +3966,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note}
     % (reprint or translation)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note}
-{ "\BREPR{}"  % Reprinted from
-    %
-    % title of the book the work was originally published in
-    %
-  originalbooktitle  format.btitle.no.dot  connect.with.space.check
-    %
-    % volume, edition, pages
-    %
-  originaledition    format.edition.check  connect.with.comma.check
-  originalvolume     format.bvolume.check  connect.with.comma.check
-  originalpages      format.bpages.check   connect.with.comma.check
-    %
-    % editor of the original book
+{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear  ""  connect.check "}{" *
     %
   originaleditor empty$
     'skip$
-    { "by " originaleditor format.editor.names *
-      originaleditor num.names$ #1 >
-        { ", \BEDS{}" * }
-        { ", \BED{}"  * }
+    { originaleditor num.names$ #1 >
+        { "\APACorigEDS{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
+        { "\APACorigED{"  * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
       if$
-      connect.with.comma.check
     }
   if$
     %
-    % year of the original publication
-    %
-  originalyear     connect.with.comma.check
-    %
-  originaladdress  originalpublisher  connect.with.colon.check
-      connect.with.comma.check
-  note                                connect.with.semicolon.check
-  parenthesize.check
+  "}{" *
+  originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaledition   format.edition.check "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalvolume    format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpages     format.bpages.check  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaladdress   "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpublisher "" connect.check "}{" *
+  note              "" connect.check "}"  *
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format information about original publication of reprint
@@ -4015,38 +3997,35 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.note}
     { originalbooktitle empty$
         { note empty$
             { originalyear empty$
-                { add.period$ }
+                'skip$
                 { originalyear "\bibnodate" =
-                    { add.period$ }
-                    { output.dot.new.block
+                    'skip$
+                    { output.new.block
                       format.orig.year.note
                     }
                   if$
                 }
               if$
             }
-            { output.dot.new.block
+            { output.new.block
               format.orig.year.note
             }
           if$
         }
-        { output.dot.new.block
+        { output.new.block
           format.orig.book.note
         }
       if$
     }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    { output.new.block
       format.orig.journal.note
     }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                     PERIODICALS                           %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % article in periodical: journal, magazine, newspaper, ...
@@ -4110,7 +4089,20 @@ FUNCTION {periodical}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
     %
     % possible reprint and optional note
     %
@@ -4118,8 +4110,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical}
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % journal article
@@ -4127,8 +4117,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical}
 FUNCTION {article}
 { pages  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % magazine article
@@ -4136,8 +4124,6 @@ FUNCTION {article}
 FUNCTION {magazine}
 { pages  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % newspaper article
@@ -4145,8 +4131,6 @@ FUNCTION {magazine}
 FUNCTION {newspaper}
 { pages  format.bpages.check  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % (translation of) entire book
@@ -4168,7 +4152,7 @@ FUNCTION {book}
         { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans
           format.type.number               connect.with.space.check
           output.dot.new.block
-          format.year.check                output.dot.new.block
+          format.year.check                add.period$
         }
             %
             % format editor and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4196,7 +4180,7 @@ FUNCTION {book}
             }
           if$
           format.type.number     connect.with.space.check
-          output.dot.new.block
+          add.period$
         }
       if$
     }
@@ -4208,7 +4192,7 @@ FUNCTION {book}
       format.year.check                       output.dot.new.block
       format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans
       format.type.number                      connect.with.space.check
-      output.dot.new.block
+      add.period$
     }
   if$
       %
@@ -4216,6 +4200,24 @@ FUNCTION {book}
       %
   format.address.publisher.check
       %
+      % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+      % (used if book is retrieved from the internet)
+      %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
       % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
       % and optional note
       %
@@ -4223,7 +4225,6 @@ FUNCTION {book}
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % (translated) article or chapter in edited book
@@ -4246,7 +4247,7 @@ FUNCTION {incollection}
         % esp. for ``collections'' that are not books,
         % such as parts of internet documents
         %
-      format.year.month.day.check   output.dot.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check   add.period$
     }
         %
         % format author and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4258,25 +4259,38 @@ FUNCTION {incollection}
         { format.atitle.type.trans.check }
         { format.atitle.type.check }
       if$
-      output.new.block
     }
   if$
       %
       % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), "
       % booktitle, volume, edition, pages
       %
+  output.new.block
   format.in.editors.trans
   format.bvol.edition.pages
-  booktitle  format.btitle.connect * output.dot.new.block
+  booktitle  format.btitle.connect * add.period$
       %
       % format address and publisher, check if publisher present
       %
   format.address.publisher.check
-    %
-    % if not empty, insert howpublished.
-    % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
-    %
-  format.howpublished
+      %
+      % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+      % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
+      %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
       %
       % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
       % and optional note
@@ -4286,10 +4300,8 @@ FUNCTION {incollection}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                       REPORTS                             %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % technical report number
@@ -4311,14 +4323,36 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
     % title, volume, edition, report number
     %
 FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number}
-{ format.etitle.check
-  format.bvol.edition.check
-  format.tr.number     connect.with.semicolon.check
-  parenthesize.check   connect.with.space.check
+{ format.betitle.check
+    % Single out the situation in which there is no number
+    % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well.
+    % (Why not use book then?)
+  type empty$
+    { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+      % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+      "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+      format.tr.number *  "}" *
+    }
+    { type "\bibnotype" =
+        number empty$
+          volume empty$
+            edition empty$
+            and
+          and
+        and
+        { "" }
+        { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+          % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+          "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+          format.tr.number *  "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format address and institution of reports etc.
@@ -4332,10 +4366,38 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number}
 FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check}
 { "institution" institution warning.if.empty
   "address"     address     warning.if.empty
-  address institution connect.with.colon.check
+  institution empty$
+  address     empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+        %
+        % If institution = author or institution = "author"
+        % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to
+        % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher
+        %
+      author empty$
+      institution empty$ or
+        { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" }
+        { author   institution =
+          "author" institution =  or
+          "Author" institution =  or
+            { author      "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" }
+            { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{"       }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+      address "" connect.check  "}{" *
+        % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+      swap$   "" connect.check  "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % reports
@@ -4351,7 +4413,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
             % title formatted as book title
             %
         { format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
-          format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check add.period$
         }
             %
             % format editor and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4360,7 +4422,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
             %
         { format.editors.as.authors   start.new.block
           format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
-          format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
+          format.tr.title.number      add.period$
         }
       if$
     }
@@ -4371,7 +4433,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
         %
     { format.authors              start.new.block
       format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
-      format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
+      format.tr.title.number      add.period$
     }
   if$
     %
@@ -4382,21 +4444,36 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
     %
     % format optional note
     %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % (translated) article or chapter in report
@@ -4437,13 +4514,13 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport}
       %
       % volume, edition, report type and number, pages
       %
-  format.bvol.edition.check
-  format.tr.number             connect.with.semicolon.check
-  pages   format.bpages.check  connect.with.comma.check
-  parenthesize.check
+  "\APACbVolEdTRpgs{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+  format.tr.number *
+  "}{" * pages format.bpages.check *
+  "}" *
       %
   booktitle format.btitle.connect *
-  output.dot.new.block
+  add.period$
       %
       % format address and publisher, check if publisher present
       %
@@ -4452,7 +4529,20 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
       %
       % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
       % and optional note
@@ -4477,12 +4567,15 @@ FUNCTION {lecture}
       %
   format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
   symposium empty$
-    { format.etitle.check
+    { format.betitle.check
       title  format.btitle.connect  output.new.block
       howpublished empty$
-        { "symposium and howpublished missing in " * cite$ warning$ }
-        { howpublished }
+        { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * }
       if$
+      address connect.with.comma.check
     }
     { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block
       "\BIn{} "
@@ -4498,26 +4591,42 @@ FUNCTION {lecture}
       if$
       symposium format.btitle.no.dot *
       format.howpublished
+      address connect.with.comma.check
+    }
+  if$
+  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
     }
   if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                        THESES                             %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % default thesis type is on top of stack
@@ -4535,8 +4644,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.type.school}
   school connect.with.comma.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % phd theses, etc.
@@ -4583,7 +4690,7 @@ FUNCTION {thesis}
           parenthesize.check
         }
       if$
-      format.etitle.check
+      format.aetitle.check
       swap$    connect.with.space.check
       "title"  title warning.if.empty
       title    format.atitle.connect   output.new.block
@@ -4594,20 +4701,36 @@ FUNCTION {thesis}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if thesis is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % phd theses, etc.
@@ -4615,7 +4738,6 @@ FUNCTION {thesis}
 FUNCTION {phdthesis}
 { "\BPhD"  "\BUPhD"  thesis }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % master's theses, etc.
@@ -4623,13 +4745,9 @@ FUNCTION {phdthesis}
 FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
 { "\BMTh"  "\BUMTh"  thesis }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                        OTHER                              %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of something (used in unpublished and misc)
@@ -4637,7 +4755,8 @@ FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
     % type and number of something
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
   format.type.number
   connect.with.space.check
   title empty$
@@ -4653,11 +4772,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num}
     % type and number of something
     %
 FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num}
-{ format.etitle.check
-  type "\bibmessage" =
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
+  type.2 "\bibmessage" =
     { number empty$
         'skip$
-        { type number connect.with.space.check
+        { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect
           bracket.check
           connect.with.space.check
         }
@@ -4679,23 +4799,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num}
     % type and number of something (used in misc)
     %
 FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num}
-{ type empty$
+{ type.2 empty$
     { format.btitle.type.num }
-    { type "\bibmessage" =
-        type "\bibcomputerprogram" =
-          type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" =
-            type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" =
-              type "\bibcomputersoftware" =
-                type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" =
-                  type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" =
-                    type "\bibprogramminglanguage" =
-                    or
-                  or
-                or
-              or
-            or
-          or
-        or
+    { type.2 "\bibmessage"                    =
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram"            =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual"      =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual"   =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware"           =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual"     =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual"  =  or
+      type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage"        =  or
         { format.mtitle.type.num }
         { format.btitle.type.num }
       if$
@@ -4718,8 +4831,8 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished}
             % no author or editor: title serves as author.
             % title formatted as book title
             %
-        { format.btitle.type.num       output.dot.new.block
-          format.year.month.day.check
+        { format.btitle.type.num       output.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
         }
             %
             % format editor and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4742,36 +4855,59 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished}
     }
   if$
   howpublished empty$
-    organization empty$
-      address empty$
-      and
-    and
+  organization empty$ and
+  address      empty$ and
     'skip$
-    { output.dot.new.block
-      howpublished
+    { output.new.block
+      "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check
       organization    connect.with.comma.check
       address         connect.with.comma.check
+      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
     }
   if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % nonprint media and other things that don't fit
     %
 FUNCTION {misc}
-{ author empty$
+{   %
+    % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type.
+  type.2 empty$
+  type   empty$ not and
+    { type 'type.2 := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+  author empty$
         %
         % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors
         %
@@ -4782,19 +4918,20 @@ FUNCTION {misc}
             %
             % if no title and no type, howpublished is title
             %
-        { title empty$
-            type empty$
-            and
+        { title  empty$
+          type.2 empty$ and
             { howpublished empty$
                 { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in "
-                  cite$ * warning$ }
-                { howpublished  output.dot.new.block }
+                  cite$ * warning$
+                  ""
+                }
+                { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ }
               if$
-              format.year.month.day.check  output.dot.new.block
+              format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
             }
             { output.misctitle.type.num    output.new.block
-              format.year.month.day.check  output.dot.new.block
-              output.howpublished
+              format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
+              format.howpublished          add.period$
             }
           if$
         }
@@ -4804,8 +4941,8 @@ FUNCTION {misc}
             %
         { format.editors.as.authors        start.new.block
           format.year.month.day.check      output.dot.new.block
-          output.misctitle.type.num        output.new.block
-          output.howpublished
+          output.misctitle.type.num
+          format.howpublished              add.period$
         }
       if$
     }
@@ -4816,24 +4953,47 @@ FUNCTION {misc}
         %
     { format.authors                   start.new.block
       format.year.month.day.check      output.dot.new.block
-      output.misctitle.type.num        output.new.block
-      output.howpublished
+      output.misctitle.type.num
+      format.howpublished              add.period$
     }
   if$
-  address empty$
-    publisher empty$
-    and
+      %
+  address   empty$
+  publisher empty$ and
+      'skip$
+      { % Clear the stack
+        duplicate$ empty$
+          'skip$
+          { output.new.block }
+        if$
+        format.address.publisher add.period$
+      }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
     'skip$
-    { format.address.publisher
-      output.dot.new.block
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
     }
   if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { "" }
-    { format.note }
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
@@ -4853,16 +5013,26 @@ FUNCTION {literal}
   fin.entry
 }
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % technical documentation
+    %
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ %
+  % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual.
+  %
+  type empty$
+    { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual"  'type.2 := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  misc
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % following functions not used for APA Manual examples
     %
 
-
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % booklet
@@ -4870,7 +5040,6 @@ FUNCTION {literal}
 FUNCTION {booklet}
 { misc }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % part of a book
@@ -4878,7 +5047,6 @@ FUNCTION {booklet}
 FUNCTION {inbook}
 { incollection }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % article in proceedings
@@ -4886,16 +5054,12 @@ FUNCTION {inbook}
 FUNCTION {inproceedings}
 { incollection }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
-    % technical documentation
+    % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230)
     %
-FUNCTION {manual}
-{ misc }
-
-
+FUNCTION {conference}
+{ inproceedings }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -4904,7 +5068,6 @@ FUNCTION {manual}
 FUNCTION {proceedings}
 { misc }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % unknown types
@@ -4912,17 +5075,13 @@ FUNCTION {proceedings}
 FUNCTION {default.type}
 { misc }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS                                 %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 FUNCTION {initialize}
 {   %
     % Maximum number of names to be formatted .
   #6  'name.max :=
-%  #250  'entry.max$ :=
-%  #5000  'global.max$ :=
 }
 
 FUNCTION {init.old.number}
@@ -4961,12 +5120,9 @@ FUNCTION {move.backward}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  BASIC BIBLIOGRAPHY OUTPUT FUNCTIONS                      %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Beginning of the thebibliography environment:
-% Write preamble if there is one, write \begin command
 
 FUNCTION {begin.bib}
 { preamble$ empty$
@@ -4977,7 +5133,6 @@ FUNCTION {begin.bib}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Write \end{thebibliography} command
 
 FUNCTION {end.bib}
 { newline$
@@ -4985,8 +5140,6 @@ FUNCTION {end.bib}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to
-% the .bbl file.
 
 FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry}
 {   %
@@ -5000,20 +5153,17 @@ FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  READ AND PROCESS ENTRIES, MAKE THEBIBLIOGRAPHY           %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 
-% Read entries .
-
 READ
 
-% Some initializations .
+
+EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version }
+
 
 EXECUTE { initialize }
 
-% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by
-% its number in later sorting .
 
 ITERATE { make.sort.title }
 
@@ -5025,17 +5175,11 @@ EXECUTE { init.old.label }
 
 ITERATE { make.title.number }
 
-% Now generate some tentative author-year labels and do some
-% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year
-% labels.
 
 ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label }
 
 SORT
 
-% Now check whether initials must be added to first author,
-% how many authors must be formatted, whether an "a", "b",
-% etc., must be added to the year label.
 
 ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year }
 
@@ -5062,30 +5206,21 @@ EXECUTE { move.backward }
 REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names }
 
 
-% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting .
-
 ITERATE { make.final.sort.key }
 
 SORT
 
-% Write preamble and \begin{thebibliography}{} statement
 
 EXECUTE { begin.bib }
 
-% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry,
-% and write to .bbl file.
 
 ITERATE { write.bbl.entry }
 
 
-% Write \end{thebibliography} statement
-
 EXECUTE { end.bib }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  DONE                                                     %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% EOF apacite.bst
-%
+%%
+%%
+%% End of file `apacite.bst'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst
index 604ac347770..0bfa3a538ee 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/apacite/apacitex.bst
@@ -1,33 +1,61 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `apacitex.bst'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
+%%
+%% This is file `apacitex.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `xbibstyle')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+%% apacitex.bst
+%%  [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]
+
 
 %% apacitex.bst : reference list according to APA manual
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%% This version: [2005/06/08]
+%%                with author indexing information
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version}
+{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file
+  "apacitex.bst"
+ " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]"
+  * top$
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% DECLARATION OF FIELDS, INTEGERS, AND STRINGS FOR EACH     %
-% ENTRY                                                     %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 ENTRY
@@ -47,6 +75,7 @@ ENTRY
     journal
     key          % key for second and later citations, or all
                  % citations if firstkey is missing
+    lastchecked  % for URL's
     month
     note
     number       % number of journal or report
@@ -78,6 +107,7 @@ ENTRY
     type         % type of phdthesis (e.g., Doctoral dissertation)
                  % or type of article (e.g., Letter to the editor)
                  % etc.
+    url
     volume
     year
   }
@@ -96,16 +126,17 @@ ENTRY
                            % should be cited and whether a, b, etc.
                            % after year is necessary
     title.sort.label       % for sorting titles
+    type.2                 % Replacement for type with misc entries and
+                           % entries that revert to misc.
   }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% DECLARATION OF GLOBAL INTEGERS AND STRINGS                %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 INTEGERS { len  pos  name.max  old.number  numnames  numnames.old
            nameptr  lastname  format.num.names  cite.initials.old
            cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old  forward
-           multiresult  dot
+           multiresult  dot brace.level
          }
 
 STRINGS  { s  t  u old.label  field
@@ -119,66 +150,53 @@ STRINGS  { s  t  u old.label  field
          }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% A small function for testing purposes.
 
 FUNCTION {test} { #0 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% A small function (ideally replaced by a user-definable
-% MACRO) that indicates whether index entries must be
-% generated.
 
 FUNCTION {make.index} { #1 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% MONTH MACROS                                              %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-MACRO {jan} {"{\APACSortNoop{01}}January"}
 
-MACRO {feb} {"{\APACSortNoop{02}}February"}
+MACRO {jan}    {"{\APACmonth{01}}"}
+
+MACRO {feb}    {"{\APACmonth{02}}"}
+
+MACRO {mar}    {"{\APACmonth{03}}"}
+
+MACRO {apr}    {"{\APACmonth{04}}"}
+
+MACRO {may}    {"{\APACmonth{05}}"}
+
+MACRO {jun}    {"{\APACmonth{06}}"}
 
-MACRO {mar} {"{\APACSortNoop{03}}March"}
+MACRO {jul}    {"{\APACmonth{07}}"}
 
-MACRO {apr} {"{\APACSortNoop{04}}April"}
+MACRO {aug}    {"{\APACmonth{08}}"}
 
-MACRO {may} {"{\APACSortNoop{05}}May"}
+MACRO {sep}    {"{\APACmonth{09}}"}
 
-MACRO {jun} {"{\APACSortNoop{06}}June"}
+MACRO {oct}    {"{\APACmonth{10}}"}
 
-MACRO {jul} {"{\APACSortNoop{07}}July"}
+MACRO {nov}    {"{\APACmonth{11}}"}
 
-MACRO {aug} {"{\APACSortNoop{08}}August"}
+MACRO {dec}    {"{\APACmonth{12}}"}
 
-MACRO {sep} {"{\APACSortNoop{09}}September"}
+MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"}
 
-MACRO {oct} {"{\APACSortNoop{10}}October"}
+MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"}
 
-MACRO {nov} {"{\APACSortNoop{11}}November"}
+MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"}
 
-MACRO {dec} {"{\APACSortNoop{12}}December"}
+MACRO {fall}   {"{\APACmonth{16}}"}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%            LOGICAL `NOT', `AND', AND `OR'                 %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Logical 'not':
-% If the first element on the stack is A then this function
-% does the following:
-%     push { #0 }
-%     push { #1 }
-% So now the first 3 elements of the stack are
-%     { #1 } { #0 } A
-% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if':
-% If A > 0 then { #0 } is executed, else { #1 } is executed:
-%     if A > 0
-%     then 0
-%     else 1
-% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
-% then this does
-%     (if A then false else true)
-% which is a logical 'not'.
 
 FUNCTION {not}
 {   { #0 }
@@ -187,23 +205,6 @@ FUNCTION {not}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Logical 'and':
-% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
-% then this function does the following:
-%     push 'skip$
-%     push { pop$ #0 }
-% So now first 4 elements are
-%     { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B
-% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
-% the stack):
-% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed:
-%     if A > 0
-%     then (B stays on top of stack)
-%     else (B is popped and #0 is pushed)
-% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
-% then this does
-%     (if A then B else false)
-% which is a logical 'and'.
 
 FUNCTION {and}
 {   'skip$
@@ -212,23 +213,6 @@ FUNCTION {and}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Logical 'or':
-% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
-% then this function does the following:
-%     push { pop$ #1 }
-%     push 'skip$
-% So now first 4 elements are
-%     'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B
-% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
-% the stack):
-% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed:
-%     if A > 0
-%     then (B is popped and #1 is pushed)
-%     else (B stays on top of stack)
-% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
-% then this does
-%     (if A then true else B)
-% which is a logical 'or'.
 
 FUNCTION {or}
 {   { pop$ #1 }
@@ -236,9 +220,7 @@ FUNCTION {or}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING                 %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -255,27 +237,19 @@ FUNCTION {warning.if.empty}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty
     %
 FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields}
-{ title empty$
-    type empty$
-      howpublished empty$
-      and
-    and
+{ title        empty$
+  type         empty$ and
+  howpublished empty$ and
     { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ }
     'skip$
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator
@@ -299,7 +273,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000
 
 FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str}
 { duplicate$ #10 <
@@ -320,12 +293,7 @@ FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position
-%          2 if editor not in author position
-%          3 if not applicable: use key
-%          0 if unknown type
 
 FUNCTION {ref.type}
 { type$ "article"      =
@@ -354,7 +322,9 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type}
             type$ "lecture"        =
               type$ "inbook"         =
                 type$ "inproceedings"  =
-                  type$ "intechreport"   =
+                  type$ "conference"  =
+                    type$ "intechreport"   =
+                    or
                   or
                 or
               or
@@ -373,17 +343,19 @@ FUNCTION {ref.type}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type,
-%          0 otherwise
 
 FUNCTION {is.atype}
-{ type$ "article"      =
-    type$ "magazine"     =
-      type$ "newspaper"    =
+{ type$ "article"        =
+    type$ "magazine"       =
+      type$ "newspaper"      =
         type$ "incollection"   =
           type$ "inbook"         =
             type$ "inproceedings"  =
-              type$ "intechreport"   =
+              type$ "conference"  =
+                type$ "intechreport"   =
+                  type$ "manual"         =
+                  or
+                or
               or
             or
           or
@@ -400,8 +372,7 @@ FUNCTION {is.atype}
       and
         { #1 }
         { type$ "misc" =
-            type empty$ not
-            and
+          type empty$ not and
             { type "\bibmessage" =
                 type "\bibcomputerprogram" =
                   type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" =
@@ -484,21 +455,18 @@ FUNCTION {connect.check}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
-    % if length of second is 3 or larger,
+    % if length of second is 4 or larger,
     % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~")
-    % if length of second smaller than 3
+    % if length of second smaller than 4
     %
     % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect
     % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2"
     %
 FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect}
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 <
     { "~" }
     { "\ " }
   if$
@@ -538,7 +506,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check}
 FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check}
 { ": " connect.check }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
@@ -549,8 +516,6 @@ FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check}
 FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check}
 { "\ " connect.check }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % encloses string in pre- and postfix string
@@ -579,7 +544,6 @@ FUNCTION {emphasize.check}
   enclose.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % brackets top of stack
@@ -642,14 +606,20 @@ FUNCTION {multi.result.check}
   multiresult
 }
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e.,
+    % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate".
+    % Call with
+    %   field is.bibcorporate
+    %
+FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate}
+{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove non-alphanumeric characters
-% and change to lower case .
 
 FUNCTION {sortify}
 { purify$
@@ -657,14 +627,6 @@ FUNCTION {sortify}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting.
-%
-% Call with
-%     string remove.spaces
-%
-% E.g.,
-%     "fine old day" remove.spaces
-% gives "fineoldday" .
 
 FUNCTION {remove.spaces}
 {   % Remove spaces from string.
@@ -696,10 +658,8 @@ FUNCTION {remove.spaces}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS                     %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
@@ -711,7 +671,6 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block}
   newline$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
@@ -720,10 +679,10 @@ FUNCTION {output.end.block}
     %
 FUNCTION {output.new.block}
 { output.end.block
-  "\newblock{}" write$
+  "\newblock" write$
+  newline$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
@@ -736,13 +695,11 @@ FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty.
-% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or
-% whatever is more defined in \newblock
 
 FUNCTION {start.new.block}
 { newline$
-  "\newblock{}" write$
+  "\unskip\ " write$ newline$
+  "\newblock " write$ newline$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -752,6 +709,7 @@ FUNCTION {start.new.block}
     %
 FUNCTION {fin.entry}
 { output.end.block
+  "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$
   test
     { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ }
     'skip$
@@ -759,27 +717,21 @@ FUNCTION {fin.entry}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING BY AUTHOR (OR SUBSTITUTE), YEAR,   %
-%  TITLE                                                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-%MACRO {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{  f{}}{  vv{}}{  jj{}}" }
-
 FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{  f{}}{  vv{}}{  jj{}}" }
 
 FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{ll}" }
 
-FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f. }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
 
-FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
 
-FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f.~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
 
-FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (1).
-% Initialization.
 
 FUNCTION {init.initials}
 { "yyyyy"  'aut1f.old :=
@@ -788,11 +740,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.initials}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (2).
-% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field  update.no.initials
 
 FUNCTION {update.no.initials}
 { 'field :=
@@ -802,7 +749,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.no.initials}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (3).
 
 FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut}
 {   %
@@ -832,9 +778,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (4).
-% Call with
-%   field  check.add.initials.field
 
 FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field}
 { 'field :=
@@ -847,7 +790,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Check whether initials must be added (4).
 
 FUNCTION {check.add.initials}
 {   %
@@ -907,9 +849,6 @@ FUNCTION {check.add.initials}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1).
-% Call with
-%   field  tentative.cite.num.names.field
 
 FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field}
 { 'field :=
@@ -938,7 +877,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2).
 
 FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names}
 {   %
@@ -997,8 +935,6 @@ FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before
-% looping over entries.
 
 FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names}
 { #0      'cite.num.names.old  :=
@@ -1014,7 +950,6 @@ FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Update "number of names to be cited" .
 
 FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names}
 { cite.num.names.short  'cite.num.names.old  :=
@@ -1030,10 +965,6 @@ FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues
-% to determine number of authors that must be cited.
-% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables
-% have already been defined.
 
 FUNCTION {format.6.authors}
 {   %
@@ -1125,9 +1056,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.6.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
-% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable
 
 FUNCTION {change.add.to.year}
 {
@@ -1151,12 +1079,6 @@ FUNCTION {change.add.to.year}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
-% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors
-% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
-% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed
-% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary.
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2}
 {   %
@@ -1203,13 +1125,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2).
-% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors
-% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
-% same year.
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more}
 {   %
@@ -1475,18 +1391,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
-% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3).
-% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field  definitive.cite.num.names.field
-%
-% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored.
-% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user
-% should have added additional author names.
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field}
 { 'field :=
@@ -1557,16 +1462,7 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field}
   update.cite.num.names
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4)
-% and especially whether a's and b's should be added.
-% This function is for the situation when author or editor
-% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is
-% used to cite the referenced work.
-%
-% Call with
-%   formatted.field   definitive.cite.no.names
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names}
 {   %
@@ -1600,7 +1496,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5).
 
 FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names}
 {   %
@@ -1647,7 +1542,6 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b').
 
 FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -1679,71 +1573,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Give month (converted to number) and day when available.
 
 FUNCTION {month.number.day}
 { month empty$
     { "" }
-    {   %
-%     month jan =
-%       { "01" }
-%       { month feb =
-%           { "02" }
-%           { month mar =
-%               { "03" }
-%               { month apr =
-%                   { "04" }
-%                   { month may =
-%                       { "05" }
-%                       { month jun =
-%                           { "06" }
-%                           { month jul =
-%                               { "07" }
-%                               { month aug =
-%                                   { "08" }
-%                                   { month sep =
-%                                       { "09" }
-%                                       { month oct =
-%                                           { "10" }
-%                                           { month nov =
-%                                               { "11" }
-%                                               { month dec =
-%                                                   { "12" }
-%                                                   {   %
-                                                        % Month is something
-                                                        % else, e.g., "Spring"
-                                                        % or jul # "/" # aug.
-                                                        % Currently too
-                                                        % difficult to figure
-                                                        % out: user should
-                                                        % trick the system.
-                                                        %
-                                                      month  sortify
-                                                      remove.spaces
-%                                                   }
-%                                                 if$
-%                                               }
-%                                             if$
-%                                           }
-%                                         if$
-%                                       }
-%                                     if$
-%                                   }
-%                                 if$
-%                               }
-%                             if$
-%                           }
-%                         if$
-%                       }
-%                     if$
-%                   }
-%                 if$
-%               }
-%             if$
-%           }
-%         if$
-%       }
-%     if$
+    { month sortify remove.spaces
         %
         % Add the day when available.
       day empty$
@@ -1757,12 +1591,6 @@ FUNCTION {month.number.day}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of
-% the stack.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field make.name.sort.label
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
 
 FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -1873,17 +1701,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
-% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and
-% editor are empty or unusable.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field make.field.year.sort.label
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
-% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
-% beginning.
 
 FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -1921,11 +1739,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
-% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
-% author or editor may be used
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -1943,9 +1757,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
-% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
-% author (but not editor) may be used
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -1958,10 +1769,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some
-% preprocessing.
 
 FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -2066,15 +1874,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label}
   author.year.sort.label  'sort.key$ :=
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make final sort label with names in field on top of
-% the stack.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field  make.definitive.name.sort.label
-%
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -2097,7 +1897,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
     { name.max  'format.num.names  := }
     { numnames  'format.num.names  := }
   if$
-    % Initialize stack with empty stringh
+    % Initialize stack with empty string
   ""
     %
     % Cycle over authors.
@@ -2126,16 +1926,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called to make definitive sort label if author and
-% editor are empty or unusable.
-%
-% Call with
-%   field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
-% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
-% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
-% beginning.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label}
 {   %
@@ -2168,10 +1959,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label}
   'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor
-% may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2189,8 +1977,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor
-% may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2203,11 +1989,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make final sort key .
 
 FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key}
 {   %
@@ -2260,24 +2042,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key}
   author.year.sort.label  'sort.key$ :=
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to
-% teststring .
-%
-% Call with
-%     teststring N string chop.word
-%
-% E.g.,
-%     "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word
-% gives "fine old day"
-% and
-%     "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word
-% gives "The fine old day".
 
 FUNCTION {chop.word}
 { 's :=
@@ -2289,10 +2057,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.word}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string.
-%
-% Call with
-%     string chop.articles
 
 FUNCTION {chop.articles}
 { 's :=
@@ -2306,12 +2070,6 @@ FUNCTION {chop.articles}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key.
-%
-% Call with
-%    field format.sort.title
-%
-% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here!
 
 FUNCTION {format.sort.title}
 {   %
@@ -2323,7 +2081,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.sort.title}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make title sorting label or substitute.
 
 FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
 { title empty$
@@ -2331,9 +2088,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
         { type empty$
             { howpublished empty$
                 { note empty$
-                    { "no title, type, howpublished, or note in "  cite$ *
-                      warning$
-                      " "
+                    { url empty$
+                        { " " }
+                        { url  format.sort.title }
+                      if$
                     }
                     { note  format.sort.title }
                   if$
@@ -2355,7 +2113,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make title number: rank number of sorted title .
 
 FUNCTION {make.title.number}
 { title.sort.label  old.label  =
@@ -2373,11 +2130,235 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.number}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  CITATION LABELS                                          %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {string.length}
+{ #0 'pos :=
+  % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty,
+  % add 1 to the string length.
+  % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true.
+  { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not }
+    { pos #1 + 'pos := }
+  while$
+  pop$ pos
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens}
+{ 's :=                    % The original string
+  s string.length 'len :=  % Its length (no. of characters)
+  "" 't :=                 % Initialize the transformed string
+  #1 'pos :=
+  #0 'brace.level :=
+    %
+    % while (pos < len) do
+    %
+  { pos len < }
+    { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0
+      brace.level #0 =
+        {
+          % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-".
+          % If so, replace and shift two positions.
+          s pos #2 substring$  ". " =
+          s pos #2 substring$  ".~" = or
+            { t "\BPBI " *  't :=
+              pos #2 +  'pos :=
+            }
+            { s pos #2 substring$  ".-" =
+                { t "\BHBI " *  't :=
+                  pos #2 +  'pos :=
+                }
+                { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position
+                  t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+                  % Check whether we need to increase brace level.
+                  % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+                  % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+                  % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems.
+                  s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+                    { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+                    'skip$
+                  if$
+                  pos #1 +  'pos :=
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally
+          t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+          % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level.
+          % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+          % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+          s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+            { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+            { s pos #1 substring$ "}" =
+                { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+          pos #1 +  'pos :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+    %
+  pos len =
+    { % Last character, copy
+      t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+    }
+    { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-"
+      % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it.
+      % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-".
+      s len #1 - #2 substring$
+      % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t
+      t text.length$ 'len :=   % Length of t (no. of characters)
+      t #1 len #6 - substring$
+      % Concatenate and assign to t
+      swap$ * 't :=
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Now push the result back on the stack
+  t
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen}
+{ % Format initials.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces
+  % and hyphens.
+  initials.with.space.name.format format.name$
+  transform.spaces.and.hyphens
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.last.part.name}
+{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format,
+  % as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.last.part.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.last.part.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  last.part.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+  % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  von.last.junior.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+  % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.von.junior.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.von.junior.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  von.junior.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name}
+{ % Format a name for citing with initials.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.cite.initials.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.cite.initials.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+  % and push on the stack.
+  one.complete.name.format format.name$
+  %
+  % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+  duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  %
+  % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack.
+  swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+  %
+  % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty).
+  "~" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.author.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the reference list.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.author.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.author.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+  % and push on the stack.
+  one.complete.name.format format.name$
+  %
+  % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack.
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name
+  %
+  % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+  swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  %
+  % Connect with last name.
+  connect.with.comma.check
+  %
+  % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials.
+  swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.name}
+{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.editor.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.editor.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  format.cite.initials.name
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.index.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the index.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.index.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.index.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  format.author.name
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Some macro strings about commas, etc. between authors
 
 FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT{}" }
 
@@ -2394,35 +2375,28 @@ FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers{.}" }
 FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod{.}" }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Add author index entry when desired.
-% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the
-%   contents of the relevant author field.
-% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the
-%   number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is
-%   #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.)
-% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written
-% to the .bbl file.
 
 FUNCTION {add.name.index}
 {   %
     %
   make.index
     { "%" * write$ newline$
-      "\protect\AX{"  write$
+        % Check for corporate author
+      field is.bibcorporate
+        { "\corporateAX{" }
+        { "\AX{" }
+      if$
+      write$
       field nameptr sort.name.format  format.name$  sortify  write$ newline$
       "@"  write$
-      field nameptr index.name.format format.name$  "}%"  *   write$ newline$
+      field nameptr format.index.name
+      "}%"  *   write$ newline$
     }
     { "%" * write$ newline$ }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
-% Field is on top of the stack.
-%
-% Call with
-%   format.num.names  field  make.name.cite.label
 
 FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
 { 'field  :=
@@ -2444,8 +2418,8 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
     %
   #1 'nameptr :=
   cite.initials  #1  =
-    { field  nameptr  cite.initials.name.format  format.name$ }
-    { field  nameptr  cite.name.format           format.name$ }
+    { field  nameptr  format.cite.initials.name     }
+    { field  nameptr  cite.name.format format.name$ }
   if$
   add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
     %
@@ -2544,8 +2518,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key
-% is available.
 
 FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
 {   %
@@ -2562,7 +2534,11 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
         { type empty$
             { howpublished empty$
                 { note empty$
-                    { cite$ }
+                    { url empty$
+                        { cite$ }
+                        { url   }
+                      if$
+                    }
                     { note  }
                   if$
                 }
@@ -2588,7 +2564,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2615,7 +2590,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used.
 
 FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label}
 { author empty$
@@ -2634,9 +2608,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement}
 {   %
@@ -2663,7 +2635,6 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate.
 
 FUNCTION {protect.year}
 { year empty$
@@ -2681,7 +2652,6 @@ FUNCTION {protect.year}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make year label that is used for citations in text.
 
 FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label}
 { "{\protect\APACyear{"
@@ -2717,16 +2687,7 @@ FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label}
   make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Make citation labels:
-% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author
-%   available) for first citation;
-% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent
-%   citations;
-% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b"
-%   etc. addendum when necessary.
 
 FUNCTION {make.cite.labels}
 { newline$
@@ -2806,14 +2767,10 @@ FUNCTION {make.cite.labels}
   "}%"                        write$ newline$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST                             %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix.
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {editor.postfix}
 { editor num.names$ #1 >
@@ -2823,8 +2780,6 @@ FUNCTION {editor.postfix}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix}
 { editor num.names$ #1 >
@@ -2846,15 +2801,6 @@ FUNCTION {trans.postfix}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for
-% reference list.
-%
-% Call with
-%    dot  field  format.author.names
-% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors
-% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and
-% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end
-% the formatting.
 
 FUNCTION {format.author.names}
 { 'field  :=
@@ -2880,7 +2826,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
     % Format first author
     %
   #1  'nameptr :=
-  field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$
+  field  nameptr  format.author.name
     %
     % Add period if required and if this is the only author.
     %
@@ -2917,7 +2863,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
                 % Format second author.
                 %
               #2  'nameptr :=
-              field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  nameptr  format.author.name  's :=
                 %
                 % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others".
                 % If so, insert "et al." string.
@@ -2962,7 +2908,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
                     %
                     % Format and add next author
                     %
-                  field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$
+                  field  nameptr  format.author.name
                   add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
                     %
                     % Move to next author
@@ -2974,7 +2920,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
                 % nameptr  =  format.num.names
                 % Format this author.
                 %
-              field  nameptr  author.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  nameptr  format.author.name  's :=
                 %
               format.num.names  numnames  =
                 {   %
@@ -3035,8 +2981,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.author.names}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that
-% the author field is not empty.
 
 FUNCTION {format.authors}
 { #1 author format.author.names
@@ -3044,14 +2988,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as
-% authors (such as reference to entire edited book)
-%
-% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.).
-%     or
-% Letheridge, S. (Ed.).    (if only 1 editor)
-%
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors}
 { #0  editor  format.author.names
@@ -3059,16 +2995,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also
-% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire
-% edited book of translated articles)
-%
-% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.).
-%     or
-% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.).    (if only 1 editor)
-%
-% editor must not be empty
 
 FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors}
 { #0  editor  format.author.names
@@ -3076,14 +3002,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Format a list of names with the initials before the
-% last names (i.e., names in the editor position),
-% commas between names (not between 2),
-% and ampersand (\&) before last name.
-% These names are not put in the author index.
-%
-% Call with
-%     field format.editor.names
 
 FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
 { 'field  :=
@@ -3098,7 +3016,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
     %
     % Format first editor
     %
-  field  #1  editor.name.format  format.name$
+  field  #1  format.editor.name
     %
   numnames  #1  =
     'skip$
@@ -3109,7 +3027,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
                 % Given that  format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
                 % No comma. Format second editor.
                 %
-              field  #2  editor.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  #2  format.editor.name  's :=
                 %
                 % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others".
                 % If so, insert "et al." string.
@@ -3133,7 +3051,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
                     %
                     % Format and add next editor
                     %
-                  field  nameptr  editor.name.format  format.name$  *
+                  field  nameptr  format.editor.name  *
                     %
                     % Move to next editor
                     %
@@ -3144,7 +3062,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
                 % nameptr  =  format.num.names
                 % Format this editor.
                 %
-              field  nameptr  editor.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+              field  nameptr  format.editor.name  's :=
                 %
               format.num.names  numnames  =
                 {   %
@@ -3176,7 +3094,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format editors in case editors do not act as authors
@@ -3195,7 +3112,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line}
   editor.postfix   connect.with.space.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format editors in case editors are also translators
@@ -3216,7 +3132,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line}
   editor.trans.postfix   connect.with.space.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format translators in case translators act as editors
@@ -3235,7 +3150,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line}
   trans.postfix   connect.with.space.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format translators in case translator does not act as editor
@@ -3312,9 +3226,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check}
 FUNCTION {format.atrans.check}
 { format.translators.in.paren.check   parenthesize.check }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format "In editor (Ed.), "
@@ -3327,7 +3238,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format "In translator (Trans.),"
@@ -3340,8 +3250,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.trans}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)"
@@ -3369,69 +3277,54 @@ FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                            DATE                           %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which
-% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
-% Extra label can be used for
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1>
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2>
 
 FUNCTION {format.year.check}
-{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}"  % Opening and closing parentheses
+{ "\APACrefYear{"
   year empty$
-    { "\bibnodate{}" }
-    { year }
+    { "\bibnodate{}" * }
+    { year * }
   if$
     %
     % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
     %
   make.definitive.year.supplement *
-    %
-    % Combine everything
-    %
-  enclose.check
+  "}" *
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Formats year (+ extra label)  + month + day between
-% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
-% Extra label can be used for
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7)  <article 1>
-% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2>
 
 FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check}
-{ "\BBOP{}" "\BBCP{}"  % Opening and closing parentheses
+{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{"
   year empty$
-    { "\bibnodate{}" }
-    { year }
+    { "\bibnodate{}" * }
+    { year * }
   if$
     %
     % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
     %
   make.definitive.year.supplement *
+  "}{" *
     %
     % Add month and day when present.
     %
-  month connect.with.comma.check
-  day   connect.with.space.check
-    %
-    % Combine everything
-    %
-  enclose.check
+  month empty$
+    'skip$
+    { month * }
+  if$
+  "}{" *
+  day empty$
+    'skip$
+    { day * }
+  if$
+  "}" *
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                     TITLE FORMATTING                      %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of article in journal or book
@@ -3444,13 +3337,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot}
   "\BBCQ{}" swap$
   duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ }
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" *
+    }
   if$
   enclose.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of article in journal or book
@@ -3460,15 +3356,19 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot}
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot}
 { "\BBOQ{}" swap$
-  "\BBCQ{} " swap$
+  "\BBCQ{}" swap$
   duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ add.period$ }
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" * add.period$
+    }
   if$
   enclose.check
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of article in journal or book
@@ -3491,39 +3391,37 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect}
   if$
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
-    % title of book or so, no period
-    %
+    % title of book or so, without period
     % call with
     %     field format.btitle.no.dot
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot}
 { duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ emphasize.check }
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefbtitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" *
+    }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of book or so, with period
-    %     (maybe emphasize and add.period$ should be reversed)
     % call with
     %     field format.btitle.dot
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot}
 { duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "t" change.case$ add.period$ emphasize.check }
+    { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of book and similar
@@ -3569,10 +3467,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot}
     %
     % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.)
     %
-FUNCTION {format.etitle.check}
+FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check}
 { englishtitle empty$
     { "" }
-    { englishtitle "t" change.case$ bracket.check }
+    { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefaetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" *
+                         englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.betitle.check}
+{ englishtitle empty$
+    { "" }
+    { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefbetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" *
+                         englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+    }
   if$
 }
 
@@ -3583,53 +3498,51 @@ FUNCTION {format.etitle.check}
 FUNCTION {format.atype.check}
 { type bracket.check }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title, englishtitle, and type
     % (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   format.atype.check   connect.with.space.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title, englishtitle,
     % and translator (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   format.atrans.check  connect.with.space.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format title, englishtitle, type,
     % and translator (of article, etc.)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.aetitle.check
   format.atype.check   connect.with.space.check
   format.atrans.check  connect.with.space.check
   title format.atitle.connect
 }
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3639,13 +3552,24 @@ FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check}
     %
 FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check }
 { "journal" journal warning.if.empty
-  journal   emphasize.check
-  volume    emphasize.check           connect.with.comma.check
-  number    parenthesize.check  ""    connect.check
-  swap$     connect.with.comma.check
+  duplicate$ empty$
+  journal    empty$ and
+  volume     empty$ and
+  number     empty$ and
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     volume  "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     number  "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     swap$   "" connect.check
+      "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume of book, checks whether
     % "Volume" or "Volumes"
@@ -3658,14 +3582,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check}
     'skip$
     { duplicate$ multi.result.check
         { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
-        { "\BVOL" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BVOL"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
       if$
     }
   if$
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % edition of book, must not be empty
@@ -3675,11 +3597,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check}
 FUNCTION {format.edition.check}
 { duplicate$ empty$
     'skip$
-    { "\BEd" connect.with.space.check }
+    { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" *
+      "\BEd" connect.with.space.check
+    }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume and edition of book
@@ -3690,9 +3613,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check}
   connect.with.comma.check
 }
 
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume and edition of book
@@ -3737,7 +3657,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.bpages.check}
     'skip$
     { duplicate$ multi.result.check
         { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
-        { "\BPG" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BPG~" swap$ * }
       if$
     }
   if$
@@ -3764,7 +3684,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check}
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc.
@@ -3778,25 +3697,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages}
   parenthesize.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title, volume, edition of book
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
   format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title, volume, edition, and translator of book
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
   format.bvol.edition.trans  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
 }
@@ -3806,12 +3722,15 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans}
     % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
   format.bvol.edition.editor.trans  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format address and publisher of book etc.
     %
@@ -3822,10 +3741,28 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans}
     % New York   (if publisher empty)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.address.publisher}
-{ address publisher connect.with.colon.check }
-
-
-
+{   %
+    % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author"
+    % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX.
+    % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does
+    % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in
+    % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.)
+    %
+  author empty$
+  publisher empty$ or
+    { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" }
+    { author   publisher =
+      "author" publisher =  or
+      "Author" publisher =  or
+        { author    "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" }
+        { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{"       }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  address "" connect.check  "}{" *
+    % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+  swap$   "" connect.check  "}"  *
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3842,10 +3779,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.address.publisher}
 FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check}
 { "publisher" publisher warning.if.empty
   "address"   address   warning.if.empty
-  format.address.publisher
+  publisher empty$
+  address   empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.address.publisher
+    }
+  if$
 }
 
-
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3858,7 +3807,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check}
     'skip$
     { duplicate$ multi.result.check
         { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
-        { "\BNUM" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BNUM"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
       if$
     }
   if$
@@ -3871,16 +3820,22 @@ FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check}
     %   format.type.number
     %
 FUNCTION { format.type.number }
-{ number empty$
-    { type bracket.check }
-    { type
-      number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
+{ type empty$
+    { type.2 }
+    { type   }
+  if$
+  number empty$
+    { bracket.check }
+    { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
       parenthesize.check
     }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format howpublished if not empty,
     % for various entry types
@@ -3890,8 +3845,12 @@ FUNCTION { format.type.number }
 FUNCTION {format.howpublished}
 { howpublished empty$
     'skip$
-    { output.dot.new.block
-      howpublished
+    { % clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'pop$
+        { output.dot.new.block }
+      if$
+      "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" *
     }
   if$
 }
@@ -3906,26 +3865,71 @@ FUNCTION {format.howpublished}
 FUNCTION {output.howpublished}
 { howpublished empty$
     'skip$
-    { howpublished
+    { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" *
       output.dot.new.block
     }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%              NOTE FORMATTING FUNCTIONS                    %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % begin and end of url environment
+    %
+FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env}
+{ " \begin{APACrefURL} "
+    % For "Retrieved <date>, from"
+  lastchecked empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * }
+  if$
+  " \end{APACrefURL} "
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
-    % format optional note
+    % begin and end of message environment
     %
-FUNCTION {format.note}
-{ note parenthesize.check }
+FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env}
+{ " \begin{APACrefURLmsg} "
+  " \end{APACrefURLmsg} "
+}
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format url given that it is not empty,
+    % for various entry types
+    % call with
+    %   format.url
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{ % First format begin and end of the enclosing environment.
+  % With posted messages, a different environment is used.
+  type.2 empty$
+    { begin.end.url.env }
+    { type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+        { begin.end.msg.env }
+        { begin.end.url.env }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    % The url string.
+  "\url{" url * "}" *
+    % Enclose in begin and end environment
+  enclose.check
+}
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format optional note
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{ "\APACrefnote{"  "}"  note  enclose.check }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -3934,33 +3938,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.note}
     %
 FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note}
 { originalyear empty$
-    { note parenthesize.check }
-    { originalyear "\bibnodate" =
-        { note parenthesize.check }
-        { "\BOWP{} " originalyear *          % original work published
-          note connect.with.semicolon.check
-          parenthesize.check
-        }
-      if$
+    { format.note }
+    { "\APACorigyearnote{"
+      originalyear    "" connect.check "}{" *
+      note            "" connect.check "}"  *
     }
   if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format original journal of publication and note
     % (reprint or translation)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note}
-{ "\BREPR{} "                                   % reprinted from
-  originaljournal emphasize.check     *
-  originalyear    connect.with.comma.check
-  originalvolume  emphasize.check     connect.with.comma.check
-  originalnumber  bracket.check ""    connect.check
-  originalpages   connect.with.comma.check
-  note            connect.with.semicolon.check
-  parenthesize.check
+{ "\APACorigjournalnote{"
+  originalyear    "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalvolume  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalnumber  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpages   "" connect.check "}{" *
+  note            "" connect.check "}"  *
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -3969,42 +3967,27 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note}
     % (reprint or translation)
     %
 FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note}
-{ "\BREPR{}"  % Reprinted from
-    %
-    % title of the book the work was originally published in
-    %
-  originalbooktitle  format.btitle.no.dot  connect.with.space.check
-    %
-    % volume, edition, pages
-    %
-  originaledition    format.edition.check  connect.with.comma.check
-  originalvolume     format.bvolume.check  connect.with.comma.check
-  originalpages      format.bpages.check   connect.with.comma.check
-    %
-    % editor of the original book
+{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear  ""  connect.check "}{" *
     %
   originaleditor empty$
     'skip$
-    { "by " originaleditor format.editor.names *
-      originaleditor num.names$ #1 >
-        { ", \BEDS{}" * }
-        { ", \BED{}"  * }
+    { originaleditor num.names$ #1 >
+        { "\APACorigEDS{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
+        { "\APACorigED{"  * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
       if$
-      connect.with.comma.check
     }
   if$
     %
-    % year of the original publication
-    %
-  originalyear     connect.with.comma.check
-    %
-  originaladdress  originalpublisher  connect.with.colon.check
-      connect.with.comma.check
-  note                                connect.with.semicolon.check
-  parenthesize.check
+  "}{" *
+  originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaledition   format.edition.check "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalvolume    format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpages     format.bpages.check  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaladdress   "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpublisher "" connect.check "}{" *
+  note              "" connect.check "}"  *
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format information about original publication of reprint
@@ -4015,38 +3998,35 @@ FUNCTION {format.orig.note}
     { originalbooktitle empty$
         { note empty$
             { originalyear empty$
-                { add.period$ }
+                'skip$
                 { originalyear "\bibnodate" =
-                    { add.period$ }
-                    { output.dot.new.block
+                    'skip$
+                    { output.new.block
                       format.orig.year.note
                     }
                   if$
                 }
               if$
             }
-            { output.dot.new.block
+            { output.new.block
               format.orig.year.note
             }
           if$
         }
-        { output.dot.new.block
+        { output.new.block
           format.orig.book.note
         }
       if$
     }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    { output.new.block
       format.orig.journal.note
     }
   if$
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                     PERIODICALS                           %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % article in periodical: journal, magazine, newspaper, ...
@@ -4110,7 +4090,20 @@ FUNCTION {periodical}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
     %
     % possible reprint and optional note
     %
@@ -4118,8 +4111,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical}
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % journal article
@@ -4127,8 +4118,6 @@ FUNCTION {periodical}
 FUNCTION {article}
 { pages  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % magazine article
@@ -4136,8 +4125,6 @@ FUNCTION {article}
 FUNCTION {magazine}
 { pages  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % newspaper article
@@ -4145,8 +4132,6 @@ FUNCTION {magazine}
 FUNCTION {newspaper}
 { pages  format.bpages.check  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % (translation of) entire book
@@ -4168,7 +4153,7 @@ FUNCTION {book}
         { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans
           format.type.number               connect.with.space.check
           output.dot.new.block
-          format.year.check                output.dot.new.block
+          format.year.check                add.period$
         }
             %
             % format editor and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4196,7 +4181,7 @@ FUNCTION {book}
             }
           if$
           format.type.number     connect.with.space.check
-          output.dot.new.block
+          add.period$
         }
       if$
     }
@@ -4208,7 +4193,7 @@ FUNCTION {book}
       format.year.check                       output.dot.new.block
       format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans
       format.type.number                      connect.with.space.check
-      output.dot.new.block
+      add.period$
     }
   if$
       %
@@ -4216,6 +4201,24 @@ FUNCTION {book}
       %
   format.address.publisher.check
       %
+      % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+      % (used if book is retrieved from the internet)
+      %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
       % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
       % and optional note
       %
@@ -4223,7 +4226,6 @@ FUNCTION {book}
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % (translated) article or chapter in edited book
@@ -4246,7 +4248,7 @@ FUNCTION {incollection}
         % esp. for ``collections'' that are not books,
         % such as parts of internet documents
         %
-      format.year.month.day.check   output.dot.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check   add.period$
     }
         %
         % format author and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4258,25 +4260,38 @@ FUNCTION {incollection}
         { format.atitle.type.trans.check }
         { format.atitle.type.check }
       if$
-      output.new.block
     }
   if$
       %
       % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), "
       % booktitle, volume, edition, pages
       %
+  output.new.block
   format.in.editors.trans
   format.bvol.edition.pages
-  booktitle  format.btitle.connect * output.dot.new.block
+  booktitle  format.btitle.connect * add.period$
       %
       % format address and publisher, check if publisher present
       %
   format.address.publisher.check
-    %
-    % if not empty, insert howpublished.
-    % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
-    %
-  format.howpublished
+      %
+      % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+      % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
+      %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
       %
       % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
       % and optional note
@@ -4286,10 +4301,8 @@ FUNCTION {incollection}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                       REPORTS                             %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % technical report number
@@ -4311,14 +4324,36 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
     % title, volume, edition, report number
     %
 FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number}
-{ format.etitle.check
-  format.bvol.edition.check
-  format.tr.number     connect.with.semicolon.check
-  parenthesize.check   connect.with.space.check
+{ format.betitle.check
+    % Single out the situation in which there is no number
+    % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well.
+    % (Why not use book then?)
+  type empty$
+    { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+      % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+      "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+      format.tr.number *  "}" *
+    }
+    { type "\bibnotype" =
+        number empty$
+          volume empty$
+            edition empty$
+            and
+          and
+        and
+        { "" }
+        { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+          % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+          "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+          format.tr.number *  "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  connect.with.space.check
   title  format.btitle.connect
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % format address and institution of reports etc.
@@ -4332,10 +4367,38 @@ FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number}
 FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check}
 { "institution" institution warning.if.empty
   "address"     address     warning.if.empty
-  address institution connect.with.colon.check
+  institution empty$
+  address     empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+        %
+        % If institution = author or institution = "author"
+        % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to
+        % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher
+        %
+      author empty$
+      institution empty$ or
+        { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" }
+        { author   institution =
+          "author" institution =  or
+          "Author" institution =  or
+            { author      "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" }
+            { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{"       }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+      address "" connect.check  "}{" *
+        % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+      swap$   "" connect.check  "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % reports
@@ -4351,7 +4414,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
             % title formatted as book title
             %
         { format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
-          format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check add.period$
         }
             %
             % format editor and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4360,7 +4423,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
             %
         { format.editors.as.authors   start.new.block
           format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
-          format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
+          format.tr.title.number      add.period$
         }
       if$
     }
@@ -4371,7 +4434,7 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
         %
     { format.authors              start.new.block
       format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
-      format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
+      format.tr.title.number      add.period$
     }
   if$
     %
@@ -4382,21 +4445,36 @@ FUNCTION {techreport}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
     %
     % format optional note
     %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % (translated) article or chapter in report
@@ -4437,13 +4515,13 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport}
       %
       % volume, edition, report type and number, pages
       %
-  format.bvol.edition.check
-  format.tr.number             connect.with.semicolon.check
-  pages   format.bpages.check  connect.with.comma.check
-  parenthesize.check
+  "\APACbVolEdTRpgs{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+  format.tr.number *
+  "}{" * pages format.bpages.check *
+  "}" *
       %
   booktitle format.btitle.connect *
-  output.dot.new.block
+  add.period$
       %
       % format address and publisher, check if publisher present
       %
@@ -4452,7 +4530,20 @@ FUNCTION {intechreport}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
       %
       % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
       % and optional note
@@ -4477,12 +4568,15 @@ FUNCTION {lecture}
       %
   format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
   symposium empty$
-    { format.etitle.check
+    { format.betitle.check
       title  format.btitle.connect  output.new.block
       howpublished empty$
-        { "symposium and howpublished missing in " * cite$ warning$ }
-        { howpublished }
+        { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * }
       if$
+      address connect.with.comma.check
     }
     { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block
       "\BIn{} "
@@ -4498,26 +4592,42 @@ FUNCTION {lecture}
       if$
       symposium format.btitle.no.dot *
       format.howpublished
+      address connect.with.comma.check
+    }
+  if$
+  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
     }
   if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                        THESES                             %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % default thesis type is on top of stack
@@ -4535,8 +4645,6 @@ FUNCTION {format.type.school}
   school connect.with.comma.check
 }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % phd theses, etc.
@@ -4583,7 +4691,7 @@ FUNCTION {thesis}
           parenthesize.check
         }
       if$
-      format.etitle.check
+      format.aetitle.check
       swap$    connect.with.space.check
       "title"  title warning.if.empty
       title    format.atitle.connect   output.new.block
@@ -4594,20 +4702,36 @@ FUNCTION {thesis}
     % if not empty, insert howpublished.
     % (used if thesis is retrieved from the internet)
     %
-  format.howpublished
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % phd theses, etc.
@@ -4615,7 +4739,6 @@ FUNCTION {thesis}
 FUNCTION {phdthesis}
 { "\BPhD"  "\BUPhD"  thesis }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % master's theses, etc.
@@ -4623,13 +4746,9 @@ FUNCTION {phdthesis}
 FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
 { "\BMTh"  "\BUMTh"  thesis }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%                        OTHER                              %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % title of something (used in unpublished and misc)
@@ -4637,7 +4756,8 @@ FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
     % type and number of something
     %
 FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num}
-{ format.etitle.check
+{ format.betitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
   format.type.number
   connect.with.space.check
   title empty$
@@ -4653,11 +4773,12 @@ FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num}
     % type and number of something
     %
 FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num}
-{ format.etitle.check
-  type "\bibmessage" =
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
+  type.2 "\bibmessage" =
     { number empty$
         'skip$
-        { type number connect.with.space.check
+        { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect
           bracket.check
           connect.with.space.check
         }
@@ -4679,23 +4800,16 @@ FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num}
     % type and number of something (used in misc)
     %
 FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num}
-{ type empty$
+{ type.2 empty$
     { format.btitle.type.num }
-    { type "\bibmessage" =
-        type "\bibcomputerprogram" =
-          type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" =
-            type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" =
-              type "\bibcomputersoftware" =
-                type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" =
-                  type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" =
-                    type "\bibprogramminglanguage" =
-                    or
-                  or
-                or
-              or
-            or
-          or
-        or
+    { type.2 "\bibmessage"                    =
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram"            =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual"      =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual"   =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware"           =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual"     =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual"  =  or
+      type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage"        =  or
         { format.mtitle.type.num }
         { format.btitle.type.num }
       if$
@@ -4718,8 +4832,8 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished}
             % no author or editor: title serves as author.
             % title formatted as book title
             %
-        { format.btitle.type.num       output.dot.new.block
-          format.year.month.day.check
+        { format.btitle.type.num       output.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
         }
             %
             % format editor and year, and check if year is present
@@ -4742,36 +4856,59 @@ FUNCTION {unpublished}
     }
   if$
   howpublished empty$
-    organization empty$
-      address empty$
-      and
-    and
+  organization empty$ and
+  address      empty$ and
     'skip$
-    { output.dot.new.block
-      howpublished
+    { output.new.block
+      "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check
       organization    connect.with.comma.check
       address         connect.with.comma.check
+      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
     }
   if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { add.period$ }
-    { output.dot.new.block
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
       format.note
     }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % nonprint media and other things that don't fit
     %
 FUNCTION {misc}
-{ author empty$
+{   %
+    % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type.
+  type.2 empty$
+  type   empty$ not and
+    { type 'type.2 := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+  author empty$
         %
         % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors
         %
@@ -4782,19 +4919,20 @@ FUNCTION {misc}
             %
             % if no title and no type, howpublished is title
             %
-        { title empty$
-            type empty$
-            and
+        { title  empty$
+          type.2 empty$ and
             { howpublished empty$
                 { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in "
-                  cite$ * warning$ }
-                { howpublished  output.dot.new.block }
+                  cite$ * warning$
+                  ""
+                }
+                { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ }
               if$
-              format.year.month.day.check  output.dot.new.block
+              format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
             }
             { output.misctitle.type.num    output.new.block
-              format.year.month.day.check  output.dot.new.block
-              output.howpublished
+              format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
+              format.howpublished          add.period$
             }
           if$
         }
@@ -4804,8 +4942,8 @@ FUNCTION {misc}
             %
         { format.editors.as.authors        start.new.block
           format.year.month.day.check      output.dot.new.block
-          output.misctitle.type.num        output.new.block
-          output.howpublished
+          output.misctitle.type.num
+          format.howpublished              add.period$
         }
       if$
     }
@@ -4816,24 +4954,47 @@ FUNCTION {misc}
         %
     { format.authors                   start.new.block
       format.year.month.day.check      output.dot.new.block
-      output.misctitle.type.num        output.new.block
-      output.howpublished
+      output.misctitle.type.num
+      format.howpublished              add.period$
     }
   if$
-  address empty$
-    publisher empty$
-    and
+      %
+  address   empty$
+  publisher empty$ and
+      'skip$
+      { % Clear the stack
+        duplicate$ empty$
+          'skip$
+          { output.new.block }
+        if$
+        format.address.publisher add.period$
+      }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
     'skip$
-    { format.address.publisher
-      output.dot.new.block
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
     }
   if$
       %
       % format optional note
       %
   note empty$
-    { "" }
-    { format.note }
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
   if$
   fin.entry
 }
@@ -4853,16 +5014,26 @@ FUNCTION {literal}
   fin.entry
 }
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % technical documentation
+    %
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ %
+  % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual.
+  %
+  type empty$
+    { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual"  'type.2 := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  misc
+}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % following functions not used for APA Manual examples
     %
 
-
-
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % booklet
@@ -4870,7 +5041,6 @@ FUNCTION {literal}
 FUNCTION {booklet}
 { misc }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % part of a book
@@ -4878,7 +5048,6 @@ FUNCTION {booklet}
 FUNCTION {inbook}
 { incollection }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % article in proceedings
@@ -4886,16 +5055,12 @@ FUNCTION {inbook}
 FUNCTION {inproceedings}
 { incollection }
 
-
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
-    % technical documentation
+    % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230)
     %
-FUNCTION {manual}
-{ misc }
-
-
+FUNCTION {conference}
+{ inproceedings }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
@@ -4904,7 +5069,6 @@ FUNCTION {manual}
 FUNCTION {proceedings}
 { misc }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     %
     % unknown types
@@ -4912,17 +5076,13 @@ FUNCTION {proceedings}
 FUNCTION {default.type}
 { misc }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS                                 %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 FUNCTION {initialize}
 {   %
     % Maximum number of names to be formatted .
   #6  'name.max :=
-%  #250  'entry.max$ :=
-%  #5000  'global.max$ :=
 }
 
 FUNCTION {init.old.number}
@@ -4961,12 +5121,9 @@ FUNCTION {move.backward}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  BASIC BIBLIOGRAPHY OUTPUT FUNCTIONS                      %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Beginning of the thebibliography environment:
-% Write preamble if there is one, write \begin command
 
 FUNCTION {begin.bib}
 { preamble$ empty$
@@ -4977,7 +5134,6 @@ FUNCTION {begin.bib}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Write \end{thebibliography} command
 
 FUNCTION {end.bib}
 { newline$
@@ -4985,8 +5141,6 @@ FUNCTION {end.bib}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to
-% the .bbl file.
 
 FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry}
 {   %
@@ -5000,20 +5154,17 @@ FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry}
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  READ AND PROCESS ENTRIES, MAKE THEBIBLIOGRAPHY           %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 
-% Read entries .
-
 READ
 
-% Some initializations .
+
+EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version }
+
 
 EXECUTE { initialize }
 
-% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by
-% its number in later sorting .
 
 ITERATE { make.sort.title }
 
@@ -5025,17 +5176,11 @@ EXECUTE { init.old.label }
 
 ITERATE { make.title.number }
 
-% Now generate some tentative author-year labels and do some
-% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year
-% labels.
 
 ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label }
 
 SORT
 
-% Now check whether initials must be added to first author,
-% how many authors must be formatted, whether an "a", "b",
-% etc., must be added to the year label.
 
 ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year }
 
@@ -5062,30 +5207,21 @@ EXECUTE { move.backward }
 REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names }
 
 
-% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting .
-
 ITERATE { make.final.sort.key }
 
 SORT
 
-% Write preamble and \begin{thebibliography}{} statement
 
 EXECUTE { begin.bib }
 
-% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry,
-% and write to .bbl file.
 
 ITERATE { write.bbl.entry }
 
 
-% Write \end{thebibliography} statement
-
 EXECUTE { end.bib }
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  DONE                                                     %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% EOF apacitex.bst
-%
+%%
+%%
+%% End of file `apacitex.bst'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README
index 169ae847d17..b37c2945d3e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/README
@@ -1,70 +1,66 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `README'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-THE APACITE PACKAGE [2005/06/08]
-================================
-
-The apacite package (for LaTeX and BibTeX) attempts to capture the
-requirements of the American Psychological Association concerning citations
-and reference list as closely as possible. In addition, it provides a large
-number of options and other possibilities for customization, so that a wide
-range of citation styles and reference list styles can be handled.
-Furthermore, it also provides the possibility of automatically generating an
-author index.
-
-The documentation of the apacite package is in the file apacite.pdf. This file
-can also be generated by processing the file apacite.tex, which in this way
-acts as an extensive test of the package. To get the references, the author
-index, and the table of contents of apacite.tex right, the following list of
-commands must be executed:
-
-latex apacite
-bibtex apacite
-latex apacite
-latex apacite
-latex apacite
-makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx
-latex apacite
-latex apacite
-makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx
-latex apacite
-
-So 10 runs are necessary in order to get everything OK. Apart from this, the
-url package (url.sty) must be available in a place where TeX can find it. This
-is not necessary for the apacite package itself, but for the test examples
-from the APA manual that are used in the document apacite.tex. Furthermore,
-the index package (index.sty, available from CTAN; search for index.sty or
-index.dtx) must be available in a place where TeX can find it. This is
-necessary for the apacite package if an author index is requested, and this is
-done in the document apacite.tex.
-
-If you have a problem with the package/bibstyle that is not described in the
-documentation, please locate it as specifically as possible and E-Mail me a
-short but comprehensive description of the problem and the pieces of the .tex
-and .bib files that seem to be invoking the problem. If I have time, I will
-have a look and answer (and, I hope, solve the problem).
-
-Good luck with it!
-
-Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-
+
+THE APACITE PACKAGE
+===================
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The apacite package (for LaTeX and BibTeX) implements the requirements
+of the American Psychological Association concerning citations and
+reference list. In addition, it provides a large number of options and
+other possibilities for customization, so that a wide range of citation
+styles and reference list styles can be handled. Furthermore, it also
+provides the possibility of automatically generating an author index.
+
+
+Copyright and license
+---------------------
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this package.
+
+This package may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+See the file apacite.dtx for more details.
+
+
+Building the package and its documentation
+------------------------------------------
+
+The generated LaTeX package (.sty), BibTeX style (.bst), and supporting
+files (.apc, .bib, .drv) are extracted by running:
+
+tex apacite.ins
+
+
+The documentation is generated by the following sequence:
+
+pdflatex apacite.drv  <== Produces apacite.pdf (documentation)
+bibtex   apacite      <== Produces apacite.bbl (reference list)
+pdflatex apacite.drv  <== Include ref. list
+pdflatex apacite.drv  <== Resolve citations
+pdflatex apacite.drv  <== 'Labels may have changed'
+makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx <== (author index)
+pdflatex apacite.drv  <== Include author index
+pdflatex apacite.drv  <== Resolve table of contents
+
+Note that apacite comes with pre-built documentation (PDF format,
+U.S. letter-sized paper), so you only need to regenerate the
+documentation if you are unhappy with the documentation as
+provided. For example, if you want to generate a version for
+A4 paper, or if you want the full reference manual, including the
+documented source code and change log. In the latter case,
+insert the following lines in the sequence, after generating
+the author index:
+
+makeindex -s gind.ist apacite <== Produces apacite.ind (code index)
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo  <== (change log)
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf
index 8cb868f330c..ed50e7a8167 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f7c318f3d9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/apacite.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4082 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `apacite.tex'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-%% apacite.tex : User's manual and test of the apacite package
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%% This version: [2005/06/08]
-%%
-%% See the README file for instructions how to process this file.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% BASIC DOCUMENTCLASS AND LOADING OF PACKAGES
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\documentclass{article}
-
-%%% The following line can be uncommented to test compatibility with TeX4ht.
-%\usepackage{tex4ht}
-
-%%% The following line is used for references to internet sources.
-%%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples.
-\usepackage{url}
-
-%%% The following lines can be uncommented to test compatibility with
-%%% the mentioned other packages and test the language support of
-%%% apacite.
-%\usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref}% citations are not links here
-%\usepackage[english]{babel}% babel must be loaded before apacite
-%\usepackage{german}
-
-%%% Loading apacite with (or without) author index option.
-%\usepackage[tocindex,hyper]{apacite}
-\usepackage[tocindex]{apacite}
-%\usepackage{apacite}
-
-%%% More compatibility tests with other packages.
-%\usepackage{backref}% the order of backref vs. apacite seems irrelevant
-%\usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref} % 1991a does not work here
-
-%%% Explicitly check loading of backref. This information
-%%% is used at the end of the document to change a few settings in order
-%%% to prevent some errors. This explicit check is more convenient than
-%%% simply defining the corresponding \if..., because the \usepackage's
-%%% above can now be commented or uncommented without having to worry
-%%% about these side-effects.
-\makeatletter
-\newif\ifbackrefloaded
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-  \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{\backrefloadedtrue}{\backrefloadedfalse}%
-}
-\makeatother
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS THAT MAY BE USEFUL FOR WIDER USE.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Corporate author
-\newcommand{\bibcorporate}[1]{#1}
-
-% Echo argument literally. Can be used to define a certain author type
-% (``Producer'') in a place where \BibTeX{} expects a first name.
-% Using this command between a pair of braces makes sure that the text
-% is not abbreviated into an initial.
-\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1}
-
-% If the argument is a period (`.'), \BibTeX{} puts no period after it.
-\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{}
-
-% For ``On cdtitle [CD]'' etc., to be used instead of ``In''.
-\newcommand{\BOn}{On}
-
-% Reverse order. Can be used for various reasons.
-\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1}
-
-% The following macro is esp. useful if the year field must be different
-% in text and in reference list. E.g., if 1992/1993 in text and 1992
-% in reference list. Then year can be defined as \bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}.
-% The definition below displays only the second argument (``text'').
-% Just before the reference list, this can then be changed to
-% display only the first argument (``ref'').
-\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2}
-
-% The same command, but now intended for Dutch-style ``von'' parts.
-\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2}
-
-% The following macro changes the definitions of the macros \BED and \BEDS
-% to the argument and then immediately changes the definitions back to their
-% old definitions. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use
-% ``Producer'' instead of ``Ed.'' etc.
-\newcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax}%
-\def\renewbibeditortype{%
-  \def\oldBED{}%
-  \def\oldBEDS{}%
-  \def\bibeditortype##1{%
-    \global\let\oldBED\BED
-    \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS
-    \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED  \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
-    \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
-  }%
-}
-
-% The following macro changes the definition of the macro \BIn to the
-% argument and then immediately changes the definition back to the old
-% definition. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use ``On''
-% instead of ``In'' for a CD-track.
-\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{%
-  \global\let\oldBIn\BIn
-  \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}%
-}
-
-% The \bibskipbracenodot macro suppresses the period after a following closing
-% brace. It does not work entirely well at the moment. In particular, it
-% works differently in an \AX macro in text and an \AX macro in the
-% reference list. This has something to do with robust vs. fragile macros
-% and/or expansion of the macro. I have experimented a lot with many
-% variations, but don't seem to get it right. I don't understand these
-% issues well yet.
-\makeatletter
-\def\swallownext#1{\relax}
-\def\swallowdot{%
-    \@ifnextchar.%
-      {\swallownext}%
-      {\relax}%
-}
-
-% When the above does not work, \bibskipbracenodot should reduce to nothing.
-% This is the current definition. Just before the bibliography, it is
-% redefined.
-\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% CITATIONS TO THE BIBLE
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% The APA manual gives some rules how the Bible and other classic
-% works should be cited. These rules are not implemented in standard
-% apacite, so I provide a workaround here.
-
-%%% To define which Bible version you used.
-\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}}
-\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}
-
-\def\bibleciteA#1{%
-   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
-   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
-      {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}%
-      {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}%
-   }%
-}
-
-\def\fullbibleciteA#1{%
-   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
-   {#1}%
-   { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}%
-   % Flag that bible has been cited.
-   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
-}
-
-\def\shortbibleciteA#1{%
-   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
-   {#1}%
-   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
-   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
-}
-
-\def\biblecite#1{%
-   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
-   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
-      {\fullbiblecite{#1}}%
-      {\shortbiblecite{#1}}%
-   }%
-}
-
-\def\fullbiblecite#1{%
-   % Open parenthesis.
-   {\BBOP}%
-   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
-   {#1}%
-   % Add bible version.
-   {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
-   % Close parenthesis.
-   {\BBCP}%
-   % Flag that bible has been cited.
-   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
-}
-
-\def\shortbiblecite#1{%
-   % Open parenthesis.
-   {\BBOP}%
-   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
-   {#1}%
-   % Close parenthesis.
-   {\BBCP}%
-   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
-   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
-}
-
-\def\bibleciteNP#1{%
-   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
-   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
-      {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}%
-      {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}%
-   }%
-}
-
-\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{%
-   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
-   {#1}%
-   % Add bible version.
-   {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
-   % Flag that bible has been cited.
-   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
-}
-
-\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{%
-   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
-   {#1}%
-   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
-   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
-}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% COMMANDS TO CITE SONGS.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% The APA manual gives some rules how songs should be cited. These
-% rules require some tweaking of standard apacite. This is done here.
-
-\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{}
-
-\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
-  }%
-  \citeauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
-  }%
-  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
-  }%
-  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
-  }%
-  \citeauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
-  }%
-  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
-  }%
-  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
-  }%
-  \citeauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
-  }%
-  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
-    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
-  }%
-  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
-  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
-}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% COMMANDS TO CITE DSM.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% The APA manual gives some rules how the DSM should be cited, which
-% is a bit different from ordinary citations. These rules are not
-% implemented in standard apacite, so I provide a workaround here.
-
-\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{%
-  \@for\@citec:=#1\do{%
-    % Check whether citation is defined.
-    \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}%
-      {\citeA{\@citec}}%
-      {\citeauthor{\@citec}}%
-  }%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{%
-  \fullciteA{#1}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{%
-  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{%
-  {\BBOP}%
-  \@for\@citec:=#1\do{%
-    % Check whether citation is defined.
-    \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}%
-      {\citeNP{\@citec}}%
-      {\citeauthor{\@citec}}%
-  }%
-  {\BBCP}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{%
-  \fullcite{#1}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{%
-  {\BBOP}\shortciteauthor{#1}{\BBCP}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{%
-  \@for\@citec:=#1\do{%
-    % Check whether citation is defined.
-    \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}%
-      {\citeNP{\@citec}}%
-      {\citeauthor{\@citec}}%
-  }
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{%
-  \fullciteNP{#1}%
-}
-
-\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{%
-  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
-}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% These are some commands that are used in this document, but are
-% presumably not especially relevant for users.
-
-\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
-    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% copied from bibtex.web
-\newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}}
-\newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty
-\newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}%
-\newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}%
-\newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}%
-
-% My comments accompanying the examples.
-\newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}}
-
-% The date of a version of apacite. Makes it easy to search the document
-% for these dates. The \relax is a safety measure (probably not needed),
-% which ensures that the square brackets are never interpreted as an
-% optional argument.
-\newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [#1]}
-
-\newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion
-\newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table
-\newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table
-
-\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name
-\newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name
-\newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% field name
-\newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% entry type name
-\newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% package option
-\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}% command, incl. `\'
-
-% Some trickery with backslashes and @ signs.
-\newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash
-\newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape #1}$\rangle$}% generic text
-
-% For \nocite{keys}:
-\newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1\{}\opt{#2}%
-                        \texttt{\}}}}%
-% For \cite[post]{keys}:
-\newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}%
-                        \texttt{]\{}\opt{#3}%
-                        \texttt{\}}}}%
-% For \cite<pre>{keys}:
-\newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}%
-                        \texttt{>\{}\opt{#3}%
-                        \texttt{\}}}}%
-% For \usepackage[options]{apacite}:
-\newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}%
-                        \texttt{]\{#3\}}}}%
-% For all \cite<pre>[post]{keys} variants:
-\newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}%
-                        \texttt{>[}\opt{#3}%
-                        \texttt{]\{}\opt{#4}%
-                        \texttt{\}}}}%
-
-% It is not clear where and how the \flqq command is defined, so provide
-% an escape if it is not available.
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-  \@ifundefined{flqq}{%
-    \newcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2pt}{\ensuremath{{\scriptscriptstyle\ll}}}}%
-    \newcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2pt}{\ensuremath{{\scriptscriptstyle\gg}}}}%
-  }{}}%
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\makeatother
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% START OF ``NORMAL'' PART OF DOCUMENT
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\title{The \pkg{apacite} package\vspace{0.3\baselineskip}\\
-       \large Citation and reference list with \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{}
-       according to the rules of the American Psychological Association}
-\author{Erik Meijer\\
-        \normalsize\itshape
-        Department of Econometrics,
-        University of Groningen\\
-        \normalsize\itshape
-        PO Box 800,
-        9700 AV Groningen,
-        The Netherlands\\
-        \normalsize
-        E-Mail: \textsf{e.meijer@eco.rug.nl}
-}
-\date{June 8, 2005}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\begin{document}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\maketitle
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\begin{abstract}
-  \noindent
-  This document describes and tests the \pkg{apacite} package
-  \APACversiondate{2005/06/08}. This is a package that can be used with
-  \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} to generate citations and a reference list,
-  formatted according to the rules of the American Psychological Association.
-  Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} contains an option to (almost) automatically
-  generate an author index as well. The package can be customized in many
-  ways.
-\end{abstract}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\tableofcontents
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Introduction}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The American Psychological Association (APA) is very strict about the style in
-which manuscripts submitted to its journals are written and formatted. The
-requirements of the APA are described in the \emph{Publication Manual of the
-American Psychological Association}, the latest version of which is the 5th
-edition \cite{APAManual}. In the sequel, this is simply called the \emph{APA
-manual}.
-
-The APA manual discusses how candidate authors should write their manuscripts:
-writing style, parts of a manuscript and their order, presentation of the
-results in the form of tables and figures, and so forth. Candidate authors
-should study this and adhere to this.
-
-The APA manual also gives specific rules about the formatting of a manuscript.
-This includes double spacing, a running head, the typographic style of section
-headings, the placement of tables and figures on separate pages at the end of
-the document, and so forth. \LaTeX{} users will recognize these as ``style''
-elements that should be defined in a package (\fname{.sty} file) or class
-(\fname{.cls} file). Their specific documents (\fname{.tex} file) should be
-largely style-independent. This idea of separating content and logical
-structure from specific formatting is one of the basic elements of \LaTeX{}
-\cite[p.~7]{LaTeXbook}.
-
-An implementation of the formatting rules of the APA manual for use with
-\LaTeX{} is the \pkg{apa} class of Athanassios Protopapas. This handles all
-kinds of issues about general document formatting, title page, section
-headings, figures and tables, and so forth. Therefore, if you intend to submit
-a manuscript to an APA journal, I strongly recommend using the \pkg{apa}
-class.
-
-An important part of the APA style is the way citations and the reference list
-should be formatted. This takes 75 pages in the APA manual (pp.~207--281,
-excluding the references to legal materials). This part is not handled by the
-\pkg{apa} class, but by the \pkg{apacite} package. The \pkg{apa} class
-requires the \pkg{apacite} package, but \pkg{apacite} can be used without
-\pkg{apa}. The current document, for example, does not use the \pkg{apa}
-class, because I find it desirable that possible users can study the
-\pkg{apacite} package and its documentation without having to install several
-other classes and packages first. Therefore, the current document uses
-standard \LaTeX{} as much as possible.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection*{Some history}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-Before the advent of the first version of \pkg{apacite} in 1994, several
-authors have written \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} packages (\fname{.sty}) and \BibTeX{}
-style files (\fname{.bst}) with suggestive names as \pkg{apalike},
-\pkg{newapa}, and \pkg{theapa} to try to capture some of the requirements of
-the APA manual. A severe problem with the APA citations is that, if the number
-of authors is between three and five, inclusive, the first citation must
-include all authors, whereas subsequent citations should refer to the first
-author ``et al.''. This problem had been solved by the \pkg{newapa} and
-\pkg{theapa} packages.
-
-A lot of APA peculiarities, however, were not covered by these citation
-styles. Examples are:
-\begin{itemize}
-    \item In the reference list, authors should be formatted with
-          their initials after their surnames. Editors, however,
-          should be formatted with their initials \emph{before} their
-          surnames if they are not in the author position.
-    \item If the work referred to is a non-English-language source,
-          the English translation of the title should be given in
-          brackets after the title.
-    \item Edition and volume of a book and the pages of an article
-          in that book should be gathered between a single pair
-          of parentheses.
-    \item The publisher of a book and its address should be given as
-          ``address: publisher'', and not as ``publisher, address''.
-    \item When the work used is a reprint or translation of an
-          earlier work, this should be mentioned in the reference
-          list. In text, the year must be given in the form
-          ``1923/1961''.
-    \item There are several ``tricky'' things with brackets and
-          parentheses, for example, with the type of an article
-          (e.g., ``Letter to the editor'',
-          ``Review of the book \emph{The social life of information}'',
-          ``Abstract'', ``Special issue''). Furthermore, magazine and
-          newspaper articles are treated differently than journal
-          articles; papers presented at meetings must be treated
-          differently; translators of articles and books and chairs
-          of symposia must be introduced; an article can have editors
-          instead of authors (e.g., with a special issue); a PhD thesis
-          can be abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International};
-          a (technical) report of some institution can be an (edited)
-          collection of articles.
-\end{itemize}
-The \pkg{apacite} package is devised to get (much) closer to the APA rules
-than the abovementioned other packages and styles.
-
-The original version of the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package consisted for
-a large part of the citation part of \fname{theapa.sty}. The current version,
-however, has been changed and extended in many ways and can therefore not be
-considered a straightforward adaptation of \fname{theapa.sty} anymore,
-although it provides largely the same commands, such as \cmd{\citeA}, and
-peculiarities in the command definitions, such as the use of \verb+<...>+ for
-a prefix note and \verb+[...]+ for a postfix note.
-
-Although the \fname{apacite.bst} \BibTeX{} style started out as a slightly
-adapted version of \fname{theapa.bst}, the number of changes became so large
-and things became so unmanageable that I decided to write a completely new
-bibstyle, although using some small parts of the original. The
-\fname{apacite.bst} file can therefore not anymore be seen as an adaptation of
-\fname{theapa.bst}. Due to the complex rules of the APA manual, it has become
-a large file. In the original process of writing (back in 1994), the error
-\begin{verbatim}
-You've exceeded BibTeX's wizard-defined function space
-\end{verbatim}
-was very hard to overcome. It appears that later versions of \BibTeX{} allowed
-much more space, because I have not received this message anymore in recent
-years, although the bibstyle has been expanded considerably. However, if you
-run an old \BibTeX{}, you may encounter this (and similar) error messages.
-
-In the ``dark years'' between 1994 and 2003, in which there was no official
-new version of \pkg{apacite}, I have been fixing small bugs, discovered either
-by me or by users who sent in their bug reports, and adding some small options
-that were easy to incorporate and that I found useful or that were requested
-by a user. Furthermore, in 1998, I spent considerable effort in adding an
-(almost) automatic author indexing option, first used for my PhD thesis
-\cite{meijer1998}.
-
-In the first few months of 2003, I fixed a number of problems with the
-compatibility between \pkg{apacite} and some other important packages.
-Although I had been planning (or wishing, rather) to release a proper official
-update of \pkg{apacite} for some time, I had not done so, mainly because I had
-not yet taken the time to update the documentation. The compatibility issues
-were so severe, however, that I decided in March 2003 to release an
-intermediate update, which thus became the first official release since the
-original version. This version contained a lot of files with compatibility
-patches and tests. The main shortcomings of that version were the lack of
-up-to-date documentation and the lack of agreement with the latest version of
-the APA manual (5th ed., 2001).
-
-In September 2003, I finally released a complete, fully updated and
-significantly extended version of \pkg{apacite}, including extensive
-documentation. However, that version still was not able to format some
-citations correctly. The \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version was a small
-improvement of the \APACversiondate{2003/09/05} version, but fixed the
-important inadequacies of previous versions.
-
-The current version is also a relatively minor update, but it may be important
-for some users. The main difference with previous versions is that it offers
-support of non-English languages, although this is still limited. Moreover,
-this is clearly a non-APA direction, because all APA publications are in
-English. However, many journals, universities, etc.\ in non-English speaking
-countries base their rules on the APA rules, and thus it may be useful to have
-the possibility to use \pkg{apacite} in combination with documents in
-non-English languages as well. See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a
-description of the implementation of this feature.
-
-Apart from this language support and the facilities for customization, the
-current version of \pkg{apacite} is aimed at conforming with the 5th edition
-of the APA manual. It remains, however, imperfect, although the instances of
-wrongly formatted cases will be rare. Many problems can be solved by
-``tricking'' the style (e.g., by defining the \fieldname{number} field as
-``\verb+2, Serial No. 186+'' if the issue number and serial number of a
-journal are both important), but this makes the \fname{.bib} file less
-compatible with other styles. In the test examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}
-below, many tricks are used and discussed. Remaining problems, omissions, and
-things-to-be-done can be found in section~\ref{sec:todo}.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection*{Philosophy of \pkg{apacite}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-As can be deduced from the discussion thus far, the first priority of
-\pkg{apacite} is to implement the rules of the APA manual with regard to
-citation and reference list as closely as possible. However, just like its
-predecessors, \pkg{apacite} offers some possibilities for customization as
-well. Many details of \pkg{apacite}, particularly punctuation and some fixed
-texts (e.g., ``Tech.\ Rep.'') can be changed easily by the user by redefining
-some commands in \LaTeX{}. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} also offers several
-proper options to change some of its settings.
-
-Whether certain options or customizable aspects are implemented depends on two
-criteria: (1) Is it possible, easy (enough), and convenient to implement them
-without compromising the ability to adhere to the APA rules, and (2) Do I (EM)
-consider them important or useful enough to spend time to implement them.
-Actually, the decision process is the reverse of this: First, I decide whether
-I find it a relevant or useful option. If not, I will not implement it. If so,
-I will think about if and how I can implement it. If I have an idea for a
-solution that is practically feasible, I will pursue it. If I don't see a
-solution, if I think it will take me too much time, or if I think a solution
-will be inconvenient to other users, then I will not pursue it.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection*{Changes since the \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The changes since the \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version are:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Addition of the \cmd{\BBYY} command (see page~\pageref{cmd:BBYY}).
-\item Limited language support (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}).
-\item Resolved some compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and
-      \pkg{natbib} (see section~\ref{sec:compat-natbib}).
-\item Fixed a bug that caused a compatibility problem when \pkg{apacite}
-      was used without one of the author indexing options, but other
-      indexes were requested in the document.
-\item Updated the manual (the current document); rewrote some sections.
-\item Improved some of the ``dirty tricks'' in \fname{apacite.tex}
-      (see section~\ref{sec:xmpl}).
-\item Some minor changes that most users will not notice.
-\end{itemize}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Basic usage and options}
-\label{sec:usage}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The current \pkg{apacite} distribution consists of the following files:
-\begin{description}
-\item[\fname{apacite.sty}] The \LaTeX{} citation package. This must
-  be placed in a directory where \TeX{} can find it;
-\item[\fname{apacite.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style. This
-  must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it;
-\item[\fname{apacitex.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style with
-  added author index support. This must also be placed in a directory
-  where \BibTeX{} can find it;
-\item[\fname{apacite.tex}] Extensive user's manual and test of the
-  \pkg{apacite} package;
-\item[\fname{apacite.pdf}] The processed version of \fname{apacite.tex}
-  so you can read the manual without having to install the package first;
-\item[\fname{apa5ex.bib}] The file with bibliographic information
-  about the references in \fname{apacite.tex};
-\item[\fname{manifest.txt}] The list of files belonging to the \pkg{apacite}
-  package, with a short description;
-\item[\fname{README}] A brief description of the package;
-\item[\fname{lang/}] A directory containing language-specific files
-  (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}).
-\end{description}
-The \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package is loaded by putting
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\cmdthreealt{usepackage}{options}{apacite}
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-somewhere in your document between \verb+\documentclass+ and
-\verb+\begin{document}+, or putting
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\cmdthreealt{RequirePackage}{options}{apacite}
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-in your own personal \LaTeX{} package (say, \fname{mysettings.sty})
-that is loaded by your document.
-
-The following options are recognized by \pkg{apacite}:
-\begin{description}
-\item[\pkgoption{BCAY}] \mbox{}\\
-  This is a technical option for backwards compatibility with old versions
-  (pre-\APACversiondate{2003/09/05}) of \pkg{apacite}. In those versions of
-  \pkg{apacite}, the \cmd{\BCAY} construction was used to pass relevant
-  citation information from the \fname{.bbl} file (\BibTeX{}'s output) to
-  \LaTeX{}. This was taken over from its immediate predecessor, Young U. Ryu's
-  \pkg{theapa}. However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize the \cmd{\BCAY}
-  construction, but it does recognize the analogous \cmd{\citeauthoryear}
-  construction, which was also used by an earlier predecessor of
-  \pkg{apacite}, \pkg{newapa}. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} has reverted to
-  \cmd{\citeauthoryear} as well. This makes different versions of
-  \pkg{apacite} incompatible with each other, because it is not possible to
-  support both constructions at the same time. This option is used to fix
-  that: In the (unlikely) event that you \emph{must} use a \fname{.bbl} file
-  that is generated by an old version of \pkg{apacite}, you can turn this
-  option on.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{accentfix}] \mbox{}\\
-  A cedilla accent (`\c{c}': \verb+\c{c}+) in an author name used to lead to
-  errors, only due to the check whether subsequent authors in the same
-  citation are equivalent. The same problem is anticipated with the
-  \verb+\b{...}+ (`\b{o}') accent, the \verb+\d{...}+ (`\d{o}') accent, and
-  the \verb+\copyright+ (\copyright) symbol (Will the latter ever turn up in
-  an author name?), due to the same use of \cmd{\crcr}, cf.\
-  \citeA[p.~356]{TeXbook}.
-
-  This fix therefore redefines these to sensible alternatives, only for
-  comparison of authors, not for any real formatting. Therefore, the user
-  should not notice this, apart from the lack of error messages, of course.
-  Therefore, it is also a default option. However, because I am not entirely
-  sure that there are no possible adverse effects, I give the user the option
-  to turn it off (\pkgoption{noaccentfix}). The user is then responsible for
-  fixing any error messages generated by such characters.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{noaccentfix}] \mbox{}\\
-  Turns \pkgoption{accentfix} off.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{index}]
-\item[\pkgoption{stdindex}]
-\item[\pkgoption{tocindex}]
-\item[\pkgoption{emindex}] \mbox{}\\
-  These four options turn author indexing on, but differ in the way the index
-  is formatted. See section~\ref{sec:autindex} for a discussion of the author
-  indexing facility. These should be used with the \fname{apacitex.bst}
-  \BibTeX{} style, see below, although they also work with
-  \fname{apacite.bst}, but that does not give author index entries, so these
-  options then typically do not have any effect (and an undesirable effect if
-  they do).
-
-\item[\pkgoption{noindex}] \mbox{}\\
-  Turns author indexing off (the default). Typically used with
-  \fname{apacite.bst}, but can also be used with \fname{apacitex.bst}. In the
-  latter case, the author indexing commands are simply ignored. Therefore,
-  \fname{apacite.bst} is actually superfluous, but because author indexing
-  will be used rarely and it is more likely to lead to errors or
-  incompatibilities, a ``clean'' (no author indexing) version,
-  \fname{apacite.bst}, is provided as well.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{numberedbib}] \mbox{}\\
-  This option implies that the bibliography (reference list) is a numbered
-  section or chapter, e.g., ``6.~References'', instead of just ``References''.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{unnumberedbib}] \mbox{}\\
-  The reverse of \pkgoption{numberedbib}: The bibliography is an unnumbered
-  section or chapter. This is the default. However, it is possible that when
-  using the \pkg{apa} document class, then \pkgoption{numberedbib} works
-  better, because that class turns section numbering off anyway and it may be
-  that \pkg{apa}'s page headings work well if the reference list is a
-  \cmd{\section} and not if it is a \cmd{\section*}. I have not experimented
-  with this (yet), however.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{sectionbib}] \mbox{}\\
-  With this option, the bibliography is a section and not a chapter. Mainly
-  useful in combination with the \pkg{chapterbib} package. Therefore, it will
-  be discussed in more detail in section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{nosectionbib}] \mbox{}\\
-  With this option, the bibliography is a chapter, if the \cmd{\chapter}
-  command is defined. Otherwise, it is always a section. Again, see
-  section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{tocbib}] \mbox{}\\
-  This puts the bibliography in the table of contents, even if it is
-  unnumbered, provided of course that a table of contents is requested in the
-  document (by \cmd{\tableofcontents}). This is the default.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{notocbib}] \mbox{}\\
-  This does not put the bibliography in the table of contents if it is an
-  unnumbered section or chapter. If it's numbered, it is always in the table
-  of contents.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{bibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\
-  The bibliography is started on a new page. This is required by some journal
-  styles, including the APA manual. The \pkg{apa} class already contained this
-  in its \pkgoption{man} option, but now it has been made available directly
-  in \pkg{apacite}.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{nobibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\
-  The bibliography is not explicitly started on a new page, although if the
-  bibliography is a chapter, it will be started on a new page anyway, because
-  chapters are started on a new page. This is the default in \pkg{apacite} and
-  thus is the only time a non-APA setting is used as default instead of an
-  available APA setting. Therefore, to satisfy the APA rules, you have to
-  request the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option explicitly.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{hyper}] \mbox{}\\
-  This switches on some code provided by Ross Moore that makes \pkg{apacite}
-  and \pkg{hyperref} compatible to some extent. However, this also violates
-  the APA manual rules somewhat, so it is not a default option. See
-  section~\ref{sec:compat-hyper} for a more detailed description.
-
-\item[\pkgoption{nohyper}] \mbox{}\\
-  This switches off the code of the \pkgoption{hyper} option mentioned above.
-  This is the default.
-\end{description}
-%
-To load the \fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst} bibliography style in
-\BibTeX{}, put
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacite}+
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-or
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacitex}+
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-respectively, in your document before the \cmd{\bibliography} command. The
-position of the bibliography (reference list) is determined by the line
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\cmdtwo{bibliography}{bibfiles}
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-where \opt{bibfiles} is a list of filenames with \fname{.bib} extension, which
-contain the bibliographic information that is used by \BibTeX{} to construct
-the reference list. Usually, the \cmd{\bibliographystyle} and
-\cmd{\bibliography} are kept together (immediately follow each other) in the
-document, although when you are using the \pkg{apa} document class,
-\pkg{apacite} is used by definition and you are not supposed to use the
-\cmd{\bibliographystyle} command yourself. See the documentation of the
-\pkg{apa} documentclass for details about this.
-
-If you use one of the author indexing options, the author index is put in
-the \LaTeX{} output by the line
-\begin{verbatim}
-\printindex[autx]
-\end{verbatim}
-If you put this line in your document, but use the \pkgoption{noindex} option
-(either explicitly or implicitly by requesting no other index option), it will
-be ignored. For more on author indexing, see section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
-
-To get all parts in the final output, the following sequence of runs should
-typically be taken (when starting from scratch): (1) \LaTeX{}, (2) \BibTeX{},
-(3) \LaTeX{}, (4) \LaTeX{}, and, when author indexing is on, (5) \MakeIndex{},
-(6) \LaTeX{}, and (7) \LaTeX{}. The last one is to get the index in the table
-of contents. If the table of contents is on a regular page, i.e., an
-arabic-numbered page instead of a roman-numbered page in the front matter, it
-may even be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} another time, followed by \LaTeX{}
-once or twice. Occasionally, somewhere in the process, \LaTeX{} may complain
-about labels that may have changed, which requires even more additional
-\LaTeX{} runs at that stage. So the number of runs that are necessary to get
-everything right may become large.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{The citation commands}
-\label{sec:cite}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-In this section, the commands are described that can be used to cite a work.
-Their default behavior will be explained. In section~\ref{sec:custom},
-customization of this behavior will be discussed. Extensive examples are given
-in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}.
-
-If the \pkg{apacite} package is loaded, the following citation commands can be
-used.
-\begin{description}
-    \item[\cmdfour{cite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{fullcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{shortcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        These three commands produce parenthetical citations of the
-        following form:
-        ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1};
-        \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN},
-        \opt{postfix})''.
-        The command \cmd{\fullcite} uses the ``full'' author list, and
-        the \cmd{\shortcite} command uses the abbreviated author list.
-        The \cmd{\cite} command uses the ``full'' list the first time
-        a work is referenced and the ``short'' list the second and
-        subsequent times. In accordance with the APA manual, the
-        ``full'' list consists of all authors if their number is five
-        or less, and the first author suffixed with ``et al.{}''
-        if their number is six or more. Similarly, the ``short'' list
-        consists of all authors if their number is two or less and the
-        first author with ``et al.{}'' if their  number is three or more.
-        There are some nuances for complicated situations. These will
-        be discussed in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}.
-
-        If the (full) author lists of subsequent citations within the
-        same citation command are the same, they are not repeated; only
-        the years of the later citations are given.
-        This holds for all analogous cases as well.
-
-        The prefix and postfix are optional. Thus, e.g.,
-        \cmdtwo{cite}{keys}, \cmdthree{cite}{postfix}{keys},
-        and \cmdthreepre{cite}{prefix}{keys} are also allowed.
-        This holds for all analogous cases as well.
-
-    \item[\cmdfour{citeA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        These commands are similar to the commands without the
-        ``\verb+A+''  suffix. They produce in-text citations of the form
-        ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1} (\opt{Year1}),
-        \opt{Authors2} (\opt{Year2}), \ldots,
-        \opt{AuthorsN} (\opt{YearN}, \opt{postfix})''.
-        Typically, the \opt{prefix} will be empty, because it is
-        part of the main text, and there typically will only be
-        one citation in \opt{keys} (unless the authors of
-        multiple citations are the same), because the authors'
-        names are also part of the main text. But it was easy
-        to provide the additional options, and this enhances
-        the similarity with the other citation commands, which
-        I found desirable.
-
-    \item[\cmdfour{citeauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        These commands are similar to their \cmd{\cite}-type
-        counterparts, except that they produce citations of the form
-         ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Authors2}, \ldots,
-         \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{postfix}''
-        (the years and parentheses are left out).
-        This is typically used in a paragraph when a proper
-        citation (incl.\ year) to the same work has already been
-        given in the paragraph.%
-            \footnote{Note that a paragraph is not
-            a section. Nor does it need to be declared as a
-            \cmd{\paragraph}. A reminder for Dutch readers:
-            ``section'' = ``paragraaf'' and ``paragraph'' = ``alinea''.}
-        In such a case, according to the APA manual, the year must not be
-        repeated for repeated references to the same work in the same
-        paragraph.
-
-        A second important application of these commands is
-        when some complex citations must be constructed, like
-        ``\citeauthor{4.05-1}'s \citeyear{4.05-1} theory'',
-        which makes combined use of \cmd{\citeauthor} and
-        \cmd{\citeyear}, see below.
-
-        Normally, I would expect only one citation per
-        \cmd{\citeauthor}-type command, and no \opt{prefix}
-        or \opt{postfix}.
-
-    \item[\cmdfour{citeyear}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        Produces citations of the form
-        ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN},
-        \opt{postfix})''.
-        See the discussion of \cmd{\citeauthor} above. Typically,
-        the \opt{prefix} would be empty and multiple citations
-        would only be used if they have the same authors.
-
-    \item[\cmdfour{citeyearNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        A ``no parentheses'' version of \cmd{\citeyear}.
-        Produces citations of the form
-        ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN},
-        \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within
-        parenthetical material, like
-        ``the work of \citeauthor{3.99-15} (\citeyearNP{3.99-15};
-        but see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})'',
-        which also uses the \cmd{\citeNP} command, see below.
-
-    \item[\cmdfour{citeNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
-    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        ``No parentheses'' versions of \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\fullcite},
-        and \cmd{\shortcite}. They produce citations of the form
-        ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1};
-        \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN},
-        \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within
-        parenthetical material, see the discussion of
-        \cmd{\citeyearNP} above.
-
-    \item[\cmdtwo{nocite}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        The entries are included in the bibliography without
-        being cited in text. This is standard \LaTeX.
-        Note that the APA manual normally does not allow this.
-        The only exception concerns works that are studied in a
-        meta-analysis, but for these the \cmd{\nocitemeta}
-        command should be used.
-
-    \item[\cmdtwo{nocitemeta}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
-        This is similar to \cmd{\nocite}. It is used to get the
-        list of works included in a meta-analysis in the
-        bibliography. This command has the additional effect that
-        the corresponding items in the bibliography are preceded
-        by an asterisk ($\star$) and a remark explaining this
-        is inserted just before the bibliography, as required
-        by the APA manual.
-\end{description}
-In order to format the examples from the APA manual correctly in
-section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, I have also defined the following additional citation
-commands: \cmd{\DSMcite}, \cmd{\biblecite}, and \cmd{\citesong}, and obvious
-variations with \verb+full+, \verb+short+, \verb+A+, and \verb+NP+. However, I
-have decided not to include these in \fname{apacite.sty}. The most important
-reason for this is that I find it unattractive to introduce different types of
-citation commands for different types of citations. This also makes it more
-difficult to use the same document with another citation package. I hope to be
-able to provide, in a future version of \pkg{apacite}, more elegant solutions
-to the problems for which these commands were defined.
-
-Nevertheless, I used these commands for the examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}
-and therefore included their definitions at the top of the file
-\fname{apacite.tex}. Thus, if you want to use them, you can copy their
-definitions to the top of your own document or personal style file (say,
-\fname{mysettings.sty}, do not change \fname{apacite.sty}), you can study
-their behavior, and perhaps improve them.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Contents of the \fname{.bib} file}
-\label{sec:bib}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The information that is used by \LaTeX/\BibTeX{} to generate
-the citations and reference list must be stored by the user in one
-or more files with the \fname{.bib} extension.
-A detailed overview of the contents of the \fname{.bib} file is
-given in \citeA[section~13.5]{LaTeXcomp}. Roughly speaking, the
-\fname{.bib} file consists of a collection of \emph{entries}
-of the form
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{contents}\verb+}+
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-Most entries describe a work that may be referenced, e.g., a book
-or article. There are, however, two exceptions: a \entryname{preamble}
-entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+preamble+) and a \entryname{string}
-entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+string+). There is typically
-at most one \entryname{preamble} entry. Its \opt{contents} consist of a
-string---according to \BibTeX, i.e., between double quotes (\verb+"+)
-or an additional pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). This
-string, which typically consists of \LaTeX{} commands like
-\verb+\newcommand{\SortNoop}[1]{}+, is literally included
-in the document before the bibliography. It can therefore be used
-to define commands that are used in the (other) entries of the
-\fname{.bib} file and that are not standard \LaTeX{}.
-
-A \entryname{string} entry is similar, but the contents are now not
-included in the document. Instead, the string is assigned to a kind of
-``variable'', the name of which may contain characters
-not usually associated with variable names, like colons and
-hyphens, see \citeA[pp.~402--403]{LaTeXcomp}. An example of a
-\entryname{string} entry is
-\begin{verbatim}
-@string{ JPSP = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} }
-\end{verbatim}
-Then, if in a later entry, the journal is
-\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, you can format this
-as
-\begin{verbatim}
-  journal = JPSP,
-\end{verbatim}
-instead of the usual
-\begin{verbatim}
-  journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
-\end{verbatim}
-This is not only convenient because it saves typing of common
-long journal names, but it can also be used to define
-style-specific variations. For example, some styles abbreviate
-journal names, such as
-\emph{J. Pers. Soc. Psych.} instead of
-\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}.
-You could then put the definitions of all full journal names
-in one \fname{.bib} file (\fname{fulljou.bib}, say) and the definitions
-of the abbreviated journal names in another (\fname{abbrjou.bib}, say).
-Suppose that the information about the referenced works is stored in a
-third file, say, \fname{myrefs.bib}, and that the ``NotAPA''
-style rules, implemented in the \fname{notapa.bst} \BibTeX{} style file,
-require the abbreviated journal names. Then you can use
-\begin{verbatim}
-\bibliographystyle{notapa}
-\bibliography{abbrjou,myrefs}
-\end{verbatim}
-to obtain a reference list complying with the ``NotAPA'' rules. If
-you change your mind and decide to switch to using the rules of the
-APA manual, you only need to change the two lines above into
-\begin{verbatim}
-\bibliographystyle{apacite}
-\bibliography{fulljou,myrefs}
-\end{verbatim}
-(and additionally load the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package
-through \cmd{\usepackage}).
-
-In the accompanying \fname{.bib} file, I have used the
-\entryname{string} entry
-to put some comments in the file:
-\begin{verbatim}
-@string{ comment = {
-\end{verbatim}
-$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{comment text}
-\begin{verbatim}
-}}
-\end{verbatim}
-This is useful because \BibTeX{} does not have a comment character, e.g., the
-percent sign does not work. If you put text between entries, this is ignored,
-so you may not need a comment character, but I wanted to put my e-mail address
-in the comments at the top of the file, and the \verb+@+ sign of an e-mail
-address is interpreted as the start of a new entry by \BibTeX{}, unless it is
-put into a string.
-
-The remaining entry types are types that correspond with the
-type of a referenced work, e.g., \entryname{book} or
-\entryname{article}. These entry types (reference types) are
-discussed in section~\ref{subsec:types} below.
-Such entries have the following structure:
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{key}\verb+,+\\
-$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname1}\verb+ = +\opt{value1}\verb+,+\\
-$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname2}\verb+ = +\opt{value2}\verb+,+\\
-$\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\vdots$\\
-$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldnameN}\verb+ = +\opt{valueN}\\
-\verb+}+
-\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
-where \opt{key} corresponds to the key used in the citation
-commands and matches the entry with the citation (and should
-therefore be unique). The fieldnames are \verb+author+, \verb+year+,
-etc., which are described in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below.
-The values are strings, either defined previously by a
-\entryname{string} entry or explicitly indicated as such here
-by putting the relevant information between double quotes
-(\verb+"+) or a pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+).
-
-To be able to obey the rules of the APA manual, \pkg{apacite}
-provides several fields and reference types that are not
-described in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation
-\cite<e.g.,>[chap.~13]{LaTeXcomp}. Furthermore,
-the meaning and usage of many fields and reference types that
-\emph{are} described there have been altered somewhat. Therefore,
-a complete description is given here.
-The symbol \LC{} will be used to indicate that the field or
-reference type is also described in \citeA[Appendix~B]{LaTeXbook}
-or \citeA[chapter~13]{LaTeXcomp}, although, as mentioned above, the
-specific meaning of the item may have been changed.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Types of references}
-\label{subsec:types}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-In this section, the list of reference types that are recognized by
-\pkg{apacite} is given. An overview of which fields can be used for which
-reference type is given in Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. If fields are not
-relevant, but you use them anyway in your \fname{.bib} file, they are ignored.
-The fields and their use are described in more detail in
-section~\ref{subsec:fields}, but here some specific issues will already be
-mentioned.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\begin{table}[p]
-\begin{center}
-\caption{List of fields that are used by the various reference types
-         (blank = not used; \X{} = used;
-          \Y{} = used, but only for citations).}
-\label{tab:fieldref}
-\small
-\makebox[0pt]{% some manipulation to squeeze the table onto the page
-\newlength{\oldtabcolsep}
-\setlength{\oldtabcolsep}{\tabcolsep}
-\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
-\begin{tabular}{@{}lcccccccccc@{}}
-\hline
- & \multicolumn{10}{c}{Reference type}\\
-   \cline{2-11}
-%
-% Normally, I would use the sideways environment of the rotating
-% package to format this nicely, but I do not want to require
-% other packages to format this document, so I choose an uglier
-% solution here.
-%
- & article\\
- & magazine   &      &              &            &              &
- & phdthesis\\
-Field
- & newspaper  & book & incollection & techreport & intechreport & lecture
- & mastersthesis
- & unpublished
- & misc
- & literal\\
-\hline
-address           &  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&\X&\X&  \\
-annote            &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  \\
-author            &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
-booktitle         &  &  &\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-chair             &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  &  \\
-chapter           &  &  &\X&  &  &  &  &  &  &  \\
-day               &\X&  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&\X&  \\
-edition           &  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  \\
-editor            &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  &  &\X&\X&  \\
-englishtitle      &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
-firstkey          &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
-howpublished      &\X&  &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
-institution       &  &  &  &\X&\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-journal           &\X&  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  \\
-key               &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
-month             &\X&  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&\X&  \\
-note              &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
-number            &\X&\X&  &\X&\X&  &\X&\X&\X&  \\
-organization      &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  \\
-originaladdress   &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originalbooktitle &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originaledition   &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originaleditor    &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originaljournal   &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originalnumber    &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originalpages     &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originalpublisher &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originalvolume    &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
-originalyear      &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
-pages             &\X&  &\X&  &\X&  &\X&  &  &  \\
-publisher         &  &\X&\X&  &  &  &  &  &\X&  \\
-school            &  &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  \\
-series            &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  \\
-symposium         &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  &  \\
-text              &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &\X\\
-title             &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
-translator        &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
-type              &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
-volume            &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  \\
-year              &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\Y\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}%
-\setlength{\tabcolsep}{\oldtabcolsep}
-}
-\end{center}
-%
-\end{table}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-The following entry types (reference types) are defined in \pkg{apacite}:
-\begin{description}
-    \item[\entryname{article}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        A journal article or comparable. If the
-        ``article'' referenced to is a special issue of a journal or
-        something else that has editors instead of authors, the
-        \fieldname{author} field should be empty and the \fieldname{editor}
-        field should be used for the editors. If the journal paginates
-        by issue instead of by volume, or when you are referring to a
-        whole special issue, the issue number should be given
-        in the \fieldname{number} field. In all other cases (including
-        referring to an article within a special issue), the
-        \fieldname{number} field must not be used. The \fieldname{type}
-        field can be used to denote the type of article, for example,
-        ``\verb+Letter to the editor+'', or
-        ``\verb+Review of the book \emph{Life in the middle}+''.
-
-    \item[\entryname{magazine}] \mbox{}\\
-        A magazine article. Unlike in previous versions of \pkg{apacite},
-        this is now equivalent to \entryname{article}. However, with
-        an \entryname{article}, the \fieldname{month} and \fieldname{day}
-        fields should generally not be used, unless there is a compelling
-        reason to use them. For a magazine, the \fieldname{month}, and
-        \fieldname{day} (for weeklies) fields are commonly used.
-
-    \item[\entryname{newspaper}] \mbox{}\\
-        A newspaper article. This is similar to \entryname{article} and
-        \fieldname{magazine}, except that the pages are formatted a little
-        different, with ``pp. 23--49'' instead of just ``23--49''.
-
-    \item[\entryname{book}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        An entire book. The \fieldname{type} field can now be used
-        to denote a specific type of item (so generally not strictly
-        a book), e.g., ``\verb+Brochure+''. Similarly, the
-        \fieldname{number} field can be used if this is considered
-        useful. (It is used in example 24 in the APA manual, see
-        below.) This seems quite rare to me, however. It should
-        certainly \emph{not} be used for ISBN numbers and the like.
-
-    \item[\entryname{incollection}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        An article in a (usually edited) book, or other kind of larger
-        work, except a report, for which the \entryname{intechreport}
-        entry is used. The \fieldname{booktitle} field contains the
-        title of the whole collection (book). The \fieldname{type}
-        field is currently used to denote the type of article, as
-        with the \entryname{article} reference type, although in some
-        cases, it may be more naturally to let the \fieldname{type}
-        field contain the type of the whole work (e.g., CD). Therefore,
-        I may change this somewhat in future versions of \pkg{apacite}.
-
-    \item[\entryname{techreport}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        A report. This may be a ``technical'' report such as published
-        by universities, or a report from government organizations or
-        private companies. The \fieldname{type} field can be used to
-        indicate what kind of report it is, e.g.,
-        ``\verb+College Board Rep.+'' or ``\verb+{DHHS} Publication+''.
-        If the \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type
-        ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.{}+'' is used. If no type description should
-        be given, \verb+\bibnotype+ should be used as the contents of
-        the \fieldname{type} field. The \fieldname{number} field can
-        be used to give the report number. The organization that
-        published the report should be given in the \fieldname{institution}
-        field.
-
-    \item[\entryname{intechreport}] \mbox{}\\
-        An article in a (usually edited) report. This is more or less
-        a combination of \entryname{incollection} and
-        \entryname{techreport}. It uses the same fields as the former
-        to describe the article itself, except \fieldname{type}, e.g.,
-        \fieldname{booktitle}, which is in this case the title of the
-        entire report,
-        and the same fields as the latter to describe the report.
-        In particular, the \fieldname{type}, \fieldname{number},
-        and \fieldname{institution} fields are used for the report.
-
-    \item[\entryname{lecture}] \mbox{}\\
-        A paper presented at a meeting. According to the APA manual,
-        the year and month should be given, but \pkg{apacite} also
-        uses the \fieldname{day} field when available.
-        The \fieldname{symposium} field can be used for the
-        name of the symposium and the \fieldname{chair} field for the chair of
-        the meeting. The \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used to
-        indicate the occasion at which the paper was presented if the
-        \fieldname{symposium} field is empty, e.g.,
-        ``\texttt{Paper presented at the meeting of the American
-                  Professional Society on the Abuse of Children,
-                  San Diego, CA}''.
-        It can also be used to give additional information about
-        the symposium if the \fieldname{symposium} field is not empty.
-
-    \item[\entryname{phdthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        A doctoral dissertation. The \fieldname{school} field is used
-        to denote the university for which the thesis was written.
-        The \fieldname{type} field can be used for the thesis type,
-        e.g., ``\verb+PhD thesis+''. If it is empty, the default type
-        is used, which is ``\verb+Unpublished doctoral dissertation+''
-        or ``\verb+Doctoral dissertation+'', depending on whether
-        the \fieldname{journal} field is empty or not.
-
-        If the thesis is abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts
-        International} or similar, then the \fieldname{journal},
-        \fieldname{volume}, \fieldname{number}, and \fieldname{pages} fields
-        can be used as with journal articles. The \fieldname{year} field
-        should denote the year of the ``journal''.
-        The \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year
-        of the original thesis, even if it is the same as the year of the
-        abstract, provided that the original thesis is used, and not
-        the abstract. Then, the \fieldname{school} field should also
-        be used, and optionally the \fieldname{type} field. If only
-        the abstract is used, it should presumably be treated as a
-        journal article.
-
-
-    \item[\entryname{mastersthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        This is equivalent to the \entryname{phdthesis} type, except that
-        the default ``unpublished'' and ``published'' \fieldname{type}s are
-        ``\verb+Unpublished master's thesis+'' and
-        ``\verb+Master's thesis+''.
-
-    \item[\entryname{unpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-         For unpublished manuscripts and similarly ``obscure'' material.
-         The \fieldname{howpublished} field will typically be used to
-         indicate what kind of work is referred to (e.g.,
-         ``\verb+Unpublished manuscript+''). The \fieldname{organization}
-         field can be used to denote the organization in which the document
-         was produced, e.g., ``\texttt{Johns Hopkins University, Center
-         for Social Organization of Schools}''. Note that the larger
-         organization should be given first and the department after that.
-         The address (city and state, etc., see the discussion of the
-         \fieldname{address} field in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below)
-         of the organization should be given in the \fieldname{address}
-         field, unless it is already mentioned in the name of the
-         organization. Presumably, if the organization is
-         ``\verb+University of Groningen+'', the city name ``Groningen''
-         should not be given in the \fieldname{address} field, but
-         the country ``The Netherlands'' should. When both the
-         \fieldname{organization} and the \fieldname{address} field
-         are available, \pkg{apacite} formats these as
-         ``organization, address''. This is different from the
-         usual ``address: publisher'' form. This behavior cannot
-         explicitly be deduced from the 5th edition, nor from the
-         4th edition, of the APA manual, but the 3rd edition
-         \cite{APAManual3} gives an explicit example (example 53,
-         p.~131): \citeA{APA-3rd-ed-ex53}.
-
-    \item[\entryname{misc}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        For works that do not fit into the other categories, such as
-        motion pictures, cassette recordings, computer software, etc.
-        The \fieldname{type} field can be used to indicate the type
-        of work, and \pkg{apacite} recognizes a few specific types
-        that should be formatted a little differently, see the discussion
-        of the \fieldname{type} field below. If the \fieldname{address}
-        and \fieldname{publisher} fields are available, the address and
-        publisher part is formatted as with books. The \entryname{unpublished}
-        and \entryname{misc} types are very similar, but there are some
-        differences. For example, \entryname{unpublished} uses the
-        \entryname{organization} field and \entryname{misc} uses the
-        \fieldname{publisher} field, and this part is formatted differently.
-        Further, the \entryname{unpublished} type requires
-        \fieldname{author}, \fieldname{editor}, \fieldname{title}, or
-        \fieldname{type}, whereas with \fieldname{misc},
-        \fieldname{howpublished} takes the first position if these fields
-        are all empty. Finally, as briefly indicated above and discussed
-        in more detail below, \entryname{misc} recognizes some special
-        types in the \fieldname{type} field.
-
-    \item[\entryname{literal}] \mbox{}\\
-        If the other categories do not format the item correctly, this
-        category can be used. The \fieldname{text} field is copied literally
-        to the bibliography. The \fieldname{firstkey}, \fieldname{key},
-        \fieldname{year}, and possibly \fieldname{originalyear} and
-        \fieldname{translator} fields are necessary to get correct
-        in-text citations. However, I have never needed to use this
-        entry type and I think that \entryname{misc} should also
-        be able to format the entry correctly. Furthermore, the
-        correct placement of \entryname{literal} references in the
-        reference list (alphabetizing, sorting), may be problematic.
-
-    \item[\entryname{booklet}\LC]
-    \item[\entryname{inbook}\LC]
-    \item[\entryname{inproceedings}\LC]
-    \item[\entryname{manual}\LC]
-    \item[\entryname{proceedings}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        These categories are defined by all standard citation styles. They
-        are, however, not needed for the examples in the APA manual. For
-        compatibility, however, they are included and defined as follows:
-        \entryname{booklet} = \entryname{manual} = \entryname{proceedings} =
-        \entryname{misc}; \entryname{inbook} = \entryname{inproceedings} =
-        \entryname{incollection}.
-\end{description}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Fields}
-\label{subsec:fields}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the
-\fname{.bib} file:
-\begin{description}
-
-    \item[\fieldname{address}\LC] \mbox{}\\%
-       The address (usually the city and state or country) of the
-       publisher, school, institution, or organization that published
-       the item or at which the item was produced. The APA manual
-       requires that the state or territory of a U.S.-city must be given
-       in the official two-letter U.S. Postal Services form. Only for
-       a specific list of 17 specific cities that are ``well known
-       for publishing'' can (must) the state and/or country
-       description be omitted.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       This is used in some annotated bibliography
-       styles. It is not used by \pkg{apacite}, but no warning
-       is given either. It is thus simply ignored.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{author}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The author(s) of the work. This may also be a corporate
-       author when applicable, but some specific measures must
-       then be taken to prevent the corporate name from being
-       interpreted as a first name and last name
-       (such as ``Association, A. P.''), see the examples.
-
-       As discussed in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation,
-       multiple authors must be separated by the word \verb+and+,
-       and each author's name can either be given in the form
-       ``\opt{firstnames}\verb+ +\opt{lastnames}'' or
-       ``\opt{lastnames}\verb+, +\opt{firstnames}''. However,
-       ``von'' parts and ``junior'' parts complicate issues
-       a bit. See the examples and the discussion of them.
-
-       I would generally give the full first name(s) in the \fname{.bib}
-       file, even though the APA manual only requires initials,
-       because other styles require full first name(s) and
-       \pkg{apacite} abbreviates to initials automatically.
-       I have done this only occasionally with the examples,
-       because the APA manual only gives the initials.
-       Therefore, I have only provided first names with a few
-       examples for which I knew the authors' first names.
-
-       If there are more than 6 authors, the APA manual requires
-       that the first 6 should be named in the reference list,
-       followed by ``et al.''. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} uses
-       only the names of the first 6 authors, and inserts an
-       ``et al.'' when applicable. Therefore, in the \fname{.bib}
-       file, the first 6 (or more) authors may be given (separated by
-       ``\verb+and+''), followed by ``\verb+and others+''. This phrase
-       is recognized by \pkg{apacite}.
-       It is, however, better to give all authors in
-       the \fname{.bib} file, so that each style can select its
-       own truncation number.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{booktitle}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The title of the larger work, typically book, but sometimes
-       something else, like a report, in which the referenced item
-       (article) was published.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{chair}] \mbox{}\\
-       The chair(s) of a symposium or meeting. Used for lectures.
-       It is formatted the same way as editors.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{chapter}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The chapter number if the referenced item is a chapter in
-       a larger collection. Typically used if the referenced work
-       is a chapter in an internet document. If the collection is
-       a book, page numbers (in the \fieldname{pages} field)
-       should be used instead according to the APA rules.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{crossref}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The \pkg{apacite} package does not recognize this field,
-       because the APA manual does not discuss explicit
-       cross-referencing. If the referenced work is a chapter
-       (article) in an edited book, all relevant information
-       should be given in the reference list as part of the
-       information about the referenced chapter, not as, e.g.,
-       ``In Wainrib (1992)''. If several chapters from the
-       book edited by Wainrib are referenced, the same information
-       about this book is given with each referenced chapter,
-       and the work itself is not a separate entry in the reference
-       list (unless it is explicitly referred to).
-
-       However, the \fieldname{crossref} field
-       \emph{can} be used, as part of standard \BibTeX{} usage.
-       Missing fields for the referenced work are then copied from
-       the cross-referenced entry, which must come \emph{after}
-       the referring entry in the \fname{.bib} file. If you use
-       this, remember to put the title of the book (also) in the
-       \fieldname{booktitle} field, because the \fieldname{title}
-       field of the referring entry is not empty (it contains
-       the chapter title).
-
-       I have not tested cross-referencing in detail, so I do not
-       know if it behaves well (i.e., complies with the implicit
-       or explicit APA rules) under various circumstances.
-       Therefore, I do not recommend using it without thorough
-       testing.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{day}] \mbox{}\\
-       The day of the month on which the referenced item was published,
-       produced, or presented. Mainly used for articles in daily or
-       weekly magazines or newspapers, for lectures (although the
-       APA manual only specifies the month), and electronic documents.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{edition}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The edition of the book or report. This must be of the form 1st, 2nd,
-       3rd, etc., or ``Rev.'' for a revised edition. Future work may provide
-       routines to handle numbers only (1, 2, 3, etc.), so that
-       language-specific texts are avoided.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{editor}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The editor(s) of a book, report, or special issue of a journal.
-       In the examples, this field is also ``misused'' for the
-       producer of a television series.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{englishtitle}] \mbox{}\\
-       The English translation of the title of an item with a non-English
-       title. The APA manual requires that if the referenced work has a
-       non-English title, an English translation should be given as well. For
-       an article in a journal with a non-English name or in a book with a
-       non-English title, the journal name or book title should not be
-       translated or put in this field, only the title of the referenced work
-       itself must be translated. Because, as of version
-       \APACversiondate{2005/06/01}, \pkg{apacite} contains some support of
-       other languages for the main document (see
-       section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}), this field needs rethinking, which
-       will be deferred to a future version.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{firstkey}] \mbox{}\\
-       The \fieldname{firstkey} field, if not empty, is used as
-       ``author'' for the first citation to an item. Subsequent citations
-       then use the \fieldname{key} field. This can be used if there is
-       no author or editor field that can be used for citations, or in
-       certain cases with corporate authors, where the citation in the
-       text uses an abbreviation of the author's name for second and
-       subsequent citations, where the abbreviation is introduced in the
-       first citation. It can also be used to ``trick'' the system
-       in difficult cases. See also \fieldname{key}.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{howpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       A description of how something was published. For example,
-       ``Unpublished manuscript'' or ``Paper presented at the meeting
-       of the American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children,
-       San Diego, CA''. Also used for retrieval information about
-       electronic documents, e.g., ``Retrieved October 13, 2001, from
-       \url{http://jbr.org/articles.html}\bibnodot{.}''. See also
-       the \fieldname{note} field.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{institution}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The institution, university, or company that published a
-       (technical) report.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{journal}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The journal, magazine, newspaper, etc.{} in which an
-       article, a review, or an abstract of a thesis was published.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{key}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       See \fieldname{firstkey}. The \fieldname{key} field, if not
-       empty, is used for second and subsequent citations, or all citations
-       if \fieldname{firstkey} is missing. If \fieldname{author} is
-       empty and \fieldname{editor} is empty or can not be used as
-       author (e.g., in \entryname{incollection}), the \fieldname{key}
-       field may be necessary to obtain a useful citation. This is
-       so, because the APA manual requires an abbreviation of the
-       title as in-text citation, and the abbreviation must be
-       sensible. In the current version, \pkg{apacite} uses the
-       whole title if \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} are missing.
-       Therefore, if the title is considered too long to use in citations,
-       the user must provide an abbreviation in the \fieldname{key} field.
-       Furthermore, the user must then also define the formatting:
-       If the key is used for a difficult kind of author (e.g.,
-       corporate author), it should be formatted as an author,
-       i.e., in plain text, with names capitalized.
-       If the key is used for an abbreviation of an article
-       title, it should be in plain text, with major words capitalized
-       (unlike in the reference list), and between double quotes
-       (`` and ''; also unlike in the reference list).
-       If the key is used for an abbreviation of a book title, it
-       should be emphasized, with major words capitalized
-       (unlike in the reference list), but not between quotes.
-
-       In a field in the \fname{.bib} file that is also
-       used for the citations, such as the \fieldname{key} field,
-       formatting through, e.g.,
-\begin{verbatim}
-  key = {{\itshape Text}},
-  key = {{\em Text\/}},
-\end{verbatim}
-       can be done (note the extra pair of braces!), but the
-       seemingly more logical variations
-\begin{verbatim}
-  key = {\textit{Text}},
-  key = {{\textit{Text}}},
-  key = {\emph{Text}},
-  key = {{\emph{Text}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-       do not work.
-       However, it is generally preferable to use as less explicit
-       formatting in the \fname{.bib} files as possible, because this
-       decreases the possibilities of successfully using the
-       same \fname{.bib} file with other styles. The following works
-       excellent:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Text}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-       where the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro recognizes that the argument
-       should be formatted as a booktitle (i.e., in italics according to the
-       APA rules). This macro, and its companion \cmd{\APACciteatitle} for
-       article title formatting, are used by \pkg{apacite} if the
-       \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} fields are missing,
-       but can also be used by the user. Note that if you use such a
-       \fname{.bib} file with another style, you have to provide
-       definitions of these macros yourself.
-
-       \emph{Warning:} the \fieldname{key} field, which acts
-       as a kind of pseudo-author, should not be confused with the
-       (citation) \opt{key} that is used to match citations with
-       entries in a \fname{.bib} file.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{month}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The month something was published. Mainly used for
-       magazine or newspaper articles, lectures, and electronic documents.
-       Use the month macros \verb+jan+, \verb+feb+, etc. These are
-       predefined strings in \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst},
-       but can be overridden when desired, e.g., when using another
-       language (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}).
-
-    \item[\fieldname{note}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       A note. This puts additional information between parentheses
-       at the end of a reference list entry. In the examples from
-       the APA manual, it is used for NTIS No., ERIC No., and UMI No.,
-       and for notes about how to obtain the work
-       (``Available from \opt{organization}, \opt{full address}'').
-       If however, the work has been obtained from the internet
-       or from an ``aggregated database'', then the
-       \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used, because it
-       should not be between parentheses then.
-
-       Finally, the \fieldname{note} field is used to give the
-       recording date (i.e., year) of a song when this is different
-       from the date (year) of copyright. The latter should be
-       put in the \fieldname{year} field.
-
-       Do not use the \fieldname{note} field to denote the original
-       publication of a reprint or translation, because the
-       \fieldname{originalyear} field must be used in those cases to
-       obtain the correct citation in the text \cite<e.g.,>{ex39}.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{number}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       The number of a journal issue or a report. This can be quite
-       complex, for example, ``\verb+PRM~92-01+'', or
-       ``\verb+3, Pt.~2+'', or ``\verb+1, Serial No.~231+''.
-       These latter examples imply that the generality (language and
-       style independence) of the \fname{.bib} file is somewhat lost.
-       Furthermore, if the journal paginates by year and not by issue,
-       the issue number should not be mentioned at all (except when
-       referring to a whole special issue). Of course, \pkg{apacite}
-       does not know whether the journal paginates by issue or by year.
-       If the \fieldname{number} field is available, \pkg{apacite}
-       simply assumes that it should be included. It is the user's
-       responsibility to ensure that this is indeed the case.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{organization}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-       Used for the \entryname{unpublished} reference type to denote
-       the organization in which the unpublished work was produced.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{originaladdress}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originalbooktitle}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originaledition}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originaleditor}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originaljournal}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originalnumber}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originalpages}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originalpublisher}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originalvolume}]
-    \item[\fieldname{originalyear}] \mbox{}\\
-        These (\fieldname{original*-}) fields have the same
-        meaning as their counterparts without the ``original'' prefix,
-        except that they refer to the book or journal in which the
-        work was originally published. This can be used in referring to
-        translations or reprints of articles in journals or books. If the
-        original work is a book or other ``standalone'' work,
-        only the \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used. If the
-        original work is a (PhD or Master's) thesis that is also abstracted
-        in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International},
-        \emph{Masters Abstracts International}, or comparable, the
-        \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year
-        of the dissertation and the \fieldname{year} field to
-        denote the year of publication of the abstract, even if they
-        are the same.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{pages}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The (inclusive) page numbers of the article that is referred to,
-        in the journal or book in which it was published. If a range of
-        pages is given (which is usually the case), an  en-dash should
-        be used: ``\verb+29--43+''. Other styles sometimes allow a
-        single hyphen (``\verb+29-43+''), which is then automatically
-        formatted as an en-dash (``29--43''), rather than as a hyphen
-        (``29-43''), but I have encountered situations, esp.\ software
-        manuals, in which the page number was of the form ``II-3'',
-        meaning page~3 of chapter~2. In such a situation, you may
-        get page numbers like ``II-1--II-15'', where the distinction
-        between a hyphen and an en-dash becomes important. Therefore,
-        \pkg{apacite} does not perform such automatic transformations.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{publisher}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The publisher of the item. Primarily used for books.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{school}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The school or university for which a PhD thesis or
-        master's thesis was written.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{series}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        Not used, although the APA manual has a rule for series.
-        If you refer to a volume in a series, the series title,
-        volume number, and volume title should be joined into
-        a two-part title , e.g., \emph{Handbook of child psychology:
-        Vol.~4. Socialization, personality, and social development},
-        see ex.~36. In the current version of \pkg{apacite} this
-        whole part must be put in the \fieldname{title} or
-        \fieldname{booktitle} field (whichever is appropriate).
-        Maybe in a next version I will use the \fieldname{series}
-        field to allow disentangling such situations.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{symposium}] \mbox{}\\
-        The name of the symposium or meeting at which a
-        lecture was given. This is typically used for the
-        construction ``In \opt{chair} (Chair), \opt{symposium}'',
-        see ex.~51. I have never used it myself, however,
-        I always use the ``Paper presented \ldots'' form,
-        which puts this information in the \fieldname{howpublished}
-        field.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{text}] \mbox{}\\
-        Used for items of type \entryname{literal}. This field contains
-        the complete literal text to be used in the bibliography.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{title}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The title of the work.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{translator}] \mbox{}\\
-        The translator of a book or article. This should
-        be formatted in the same way as \fieldname{author} and
-        \fieldname{editor}. If the \fieldname{translator} and
-        \fieldname{editor} fields are identical, they are
-        formatted as if there were only an editor, except that the
-        editor receives the suffix ``(Ed. \& Trans.)'' instead of
-        just ``(Ed.)'', or similarly if there is more than 1 editor.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{type}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The type of \entryname{phdthesis} (e.g.,
-        ``Doctoral dissertation''), type of \entryname{article}
-        (e.g., ``Letter to the editor''), type of \entryname{techreport}
-        (e.g., ``DHHS Publication''), type of \entryname{book}
-        (e.g., ``Brochure''), type of \entryname{misc}
-        (e.g., ``Cassette recording''), and so forth.
-
-        With a review (which is typically an \entryname{article}),
-        the \fieldname{type} field contains a lot of information
-        and formatting, e.g.:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle:
-            Psychological and social development in middle age}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-        where I used the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} command introduced above in
-        the discussion of the \fieldname{key} field.
-
-        In one of the APA manual examples, I used the \fieldname{type}
-        field to give a description of the subject of an unpublished
-        raw data file (``Auditory response latencies in rat auditory
-        cortex''), leaving the \fieldname{title} field blank.
-
-        For most reference types, if the \fieldname{type} field
-        is missing, it is simply ignored and no type description
-        is given. For a \entryname{techreport}, however, if the
-        \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type
-        (``Tech. Rep.'') is inserted. In ex.~42 of the APA manual,
-        a report without a type description is given. To make it
-        possible to format a report successfully without a
-        type description, \pkg{apacite} recognizes
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {\bibnotype},
-\end{verbatim}
-        indicating that there should be no type description.
-
-        Another special purpose use of the \fieldname{type}
-        field is for a computer program, software, programming
-        language and/or manual. These are put into a \entryname{misc}
-        entry, but unlike other \entryname{misc} types (such as
-        motion pictures) the titles of these types should not
-        be italicized. This is now recognized by \pkg{apacite}
-        in the following way: When referring to a computer program,
-        software, programming language and/or manual, you should
-        use the \entryname{misc} reference type with
-        one of the following commands in the \fieldname{type} field:\\
-        \cmd{\bibcomputerprogram},\\
-        \cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual},\\
-        \cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual},\\
-        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftware},\\
-        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual},\\
-        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, or\\
-        \cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}.\\
-        Using any of these commands as type designator of a
-        \entryname{misc} entry ensures that the title is not italicized,
-        as required. Note that the \entryname{manual} entry reduces to
-        \entryname{misc}, so can be used sensibly, but only if the
-        \fieldname{type} field is defined as above. Perhaps it would
-        be logical to define a default type for this, but this is not
-        implemented. Anyway, adding a \fieldname{type} field to a
-        \entryname{manual} entry in a \fname{.bib} file will probably
-        do not any harm with other bibstyles, so this is probably only
-        a minor nuisance.
-
-        Similarly, if you refer to a message that has been posted to
-        a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., you should use the
-        \entryname{misc} reference type with \cmd{\bibmessage} as
-        \fieldname{type} field.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{volume}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The volume or volumes of the referenced book(s) or
-        of the book in which the referenced article was published,
-        or the volume of the journal (magazine, newspaper, \ldots)
-        in which the referenced article was published.
-
-    \item[\fieldname{year}\LC] \mbox{}\\
-        The year in which the referenced item was published, or
-        if it was not published, the year in which it was written
-        or presented. For manuscripts or books that are accepted
-        for publication but have not yet been published, ``in press''
-        should be used according to the APA rules. The best way to do
-        this is to use the ``\cmd{\BIP}'' command, which can be redefined
-        by the user if the language or editorial style requires
-        something else than ``in press''. Furthermore, \cmd{\BIP}
-        is recognized by \pkg{apacite} and treated a little differently,
-        because for multiple ``in press'' references with the same
-        author(s), a hyphen (``-'') should be inserted between the
-        ``year'' (i.e., ``in press'') and the ``a'', ``b'', etc., that
-        follow it to distinguish the works, whereas this hyphen must
-        be omitted if the ``year'' is an ordinary year (1991a, 1991b).
-
-        If no date is explicitly given in (or on) the referenced work,
-        a ``n.d.'' (no date) should be given as year description.
-        For this, \pkg{apacite} supports the \cmd{\bibnodate}
-        command. This sometimes leads to different formatting as well,
-        e.g., by referencing a translation of a work of which there
-        is no original date. Then the \fieldname{originalyear}
-        field should be \cmd{\bibnodate} and the \fieldname{year} field
-        is then, e.g., \verb+1931+. If the \fieldname{translator}
-        field is not empty, the citation in the text is then formatted
-        as, e.g., ``\citeA{3.100-2}''.
-\end{description}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Customization}
-\label{sec:custom}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The description in the previous sections, with the exception of
-section~\ref{sec:usage}, almost exclusively discussed the default behavior of
-\pkg{apacite}. However, as mentioned in the introduction, in addition to the
-options, \pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization. Most
-punctuation used in the citations and reference list are implemented through
-\LaTeX{} commands instead of explicit symbols. Consequently, the user can
-fine-tune the behavior of \pkg{apacite} by redefining these commands, through
-\cmd{\renewcommand} after \pkg{apacite} has been loaded. Analogously, most
-fixed texts, like ``Tech.\ Rep.{}'' and ``Eds.{}'' are implemented through
-\LaTeX{} commands as well, and can similarly be changed by the user. The
-commands used by \pkg{apacite} are discussed in this section. Of course, the
-defaults are based on the rules of the APA manual.
-
-Some commands, predominantly punctuation, are used both in citations and in
-the reference list. If you want their definitions in citations to be different
-from their definitions in the reference list, you can simply redefine their
-definitions before starting the bibliography.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Punctuation and formatting}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The following punctuation commands are provided and used for
-the citations and reference list.
-\begin{description}
-  \item[\cmd{\BAstyle}] This defines the text style of the authors
-      (or whatever takes their place) for an in-text citation. It
-      defaults to nothing: The authors use the same fonts as the
-      text surrounding it. Introduced because some journals use
-      a different style. For example, \emph{Statistica Neerlandica}
-      uses small-caps, so for that journal, you would define
-\begin{verbatim}
-\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}
-\end{verbatim}
-      Do not use the \cmd{\textsc}-type commands, but \cmd{\scshape},
-      \cmd{\bfseries}, etc. The \cmd{\BAstyle} command is used for
-      the author-part by the citation commands
-      \cmd{\cite},   \cmd{\shortcite},   \cmd{\fullcite},
-      \cmd{\citeA},  \cmd{\shortciteA},  \cmd{\fullciteA},
-      \cmd{\citeNP}, \cmd{\shortciteNP}, and \cmd{\fullciteNP}.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BAastyle}] This is the same as \cmd{\BAstyle}, except that
-      \cmd{\BAastyle} is used for \cmd{\citeauthor}, \cmd{\shortciteauthor},
-      and \cmd{\fullciteauthor}.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBOP}] Open parenthesis, used for parentheses opening
-      a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1973)'', and the
-      year in the reference list, as in ``Rao, C. R. (1973).''
-      Default is ``\verb+(+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBCP}] The corresponding closing parenthesis.
-      Default is ``\verb+)+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BAP}] This command is inserted after the prefix and before
-      the first citation in a \cmd{\cite} command. It defaults to an
-      ordinary space.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBAA}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation
-      between parentheses and in the reference list, as in
-      ``(Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)'' or ``Mooijaart, A., \&
-      Bentler, P. M. (1986).''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBAB}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation in text,
-      as in ``Mooijaart and Bentler (1986)''. Default is ``\verb+and+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBAY}] Punctuation between author(s) and year in a citation
-      between parentheses, as in ``(Rao, 1973)''. Default is ``\verb+, +''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBYY}] \label{cmd:BBYY}
-      Punctuation between two subsequent years, if two works
-      by the same author(s) are referenced in a single citation command,
-      as in ``(Rao, 1965, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1965, 1973)''.
-      Default is ``\verb+, +''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBC}] Punctuation between multiple cites, as in
-      ``(Rao, 1973; Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)''.
-      Default is ``\verb+; +''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBN}] Punctuation before a note (postfix) after
-      a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973, chap.~2)''.
-      Default is ``\verb+, +''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBOQ}] Opening quote for an article title in the
-      reference list, as in
-      ``\flqq Random polynomial factor analysis.\frqq'' Default is
-      the empty string: no quotes used.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BBCQ}] Closing quote for an article title in the
-      reference list. Default is the empty string.
-      (The \pkg{theapa} package required the closing period to be part
-      of the closing quote, but this has been
-      changed, because the period must be left out if title comments,
-      such as type, English translation of non-English title, or
-      translator follow the title.)
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BCBT}] Comma between authors in the reference section when
-      the number of authors is two, as in
-      ``Mooijaart, A., \& Bentler, P. M. (1986).'' The comma
-      after the ``A.'' is this one. Default is ``\verb+,+''.
-      The APA manual requires it, but other styles leave out this
-      comma. In such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to
-      be the empty string:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BCBL}] Comma before the last author (for 3 or more authors)
-      in a citation and in the reference section, as in ``(Gill, Murray,
-      \& Wright, 1981)'' or ``Gill, P. E., Murray, W., \& Wright, M. H.
-      (1981).'' Default is ``\verb+,+''. The APA manual requires it,
-      which is standard U.S. usage, but other styles, particularly
-      European, such as British English, leave out this comma. Again,
-      in such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to
-      be the empty string.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BAnd}] This is the ``and'' that is used in the reference list
-      if someone is both editor and translator:
-      ``In J. Strachey (Ed. \& Trans),''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\theBibCnt}] If there are multiple citations with the same
-      author and year, a letter should be added to the year to distinguish
-      the references. For example, one may refer to two or more articles
-      by J. Smith published in 1982. They should be referred to as
-      ``Smith (1982a)'', ``Smith (1982b)'', and so forth. To accomplish
-      this, the counter \verb+BibCnt+ is defined in \fname{apacite.sty}.
-      The \cmd{\theBibCnt} command defines how the value of \verb+BibCnt+
-      is formatted. The default is ``\verb+\alph{BibCnt}+''. To
-      emphasize (italicize) the ``a'', ``b'', etc., you can redefine
-      this as
-\begin{verbatim}
-\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}
-\end{verbatim}
-      (This presumably works better than ``\verb+\emph{\alph{BibCnt}}+''.)
-      To control this behavior, redefining the \cmd{\theBibCnt} command
-      should normally be sufficient. However, the complete formatting
-      commands are \cmd{\BCnt}, \cmd{\BCntIP}, and \cmd{\BCntND}. The
-      second of these is for ``in press'' works, which need an extra hyphen
-      between ``in press'' and the ``a'' and ``b'' suffixes. The third is
-      similar, for works without a date. Their default definitions
-      in \fname{apacite.sty} are
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt}
-\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt}
-\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-  \item[\cmd{\APACciteatitle}] The formatting of the title of an
-      article (or similar work)
-      when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor
-      is available for that purpose. Its default definition
-      in \fname{apacite.sty} is
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}
-\end{verbatim}
-      i.e., the title is put between double quotes.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\APACcitebtitle}] The formatting of the title of a book
-      (or other independent work)
-      when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor
-      is available for that purpose. Its default definition
-      in \fname{apacite.sty} is
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}
-\end{verbatim}
-      i.e., the title is emphasized (in italics) but not put between
-      double quotes.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\APACmetastar}] The asterisk that precedes an item in the
-      bibliography to denote that it is included in the meta-analysis.
-      The default value is ``\verb+$\star$\ +''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibnewpage}] If the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option
-      is chosen, this command is included before the bibliography.
-      Its default definition is \cmd{\clearpage}, but \fname{apa.cls}
-      uses a similar construction with its \pkgoption{man} option
-      through \cmd{\newpage}.
-      See \citeA[p.~215]{LaTeXbook} for the differences between
-      \cmd{\clearpage} and \cmd{\newpage}.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibliographytypesize}] This command is used before
-      the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading.
-      It is intended for the font size of the reference list:
-      For \citeA{WaMe00}, I defined it as \cmd{\small} (and even then
-      the reference list took up 34 pages). The default value is
-      \cmd{\normalsize}.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibleftmargin}] This gives the indentation of the second
-      and subsequent lines of a reference list entry, relative to the
-      usual left margin. It is not a proper command, but a
-      ``skip'' (rubber length), which means that it cannot be changed by
-      \cmd{\renewcommand}, but by \cmd{\setlength}. Its default
-      value is \verb+2.5em+.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibindent}] This gives the indentation of the first
-      line of a reference list entry, relative to the second line.
-      It is also a ``skip''. Its default value is \verb+-\bibleftmargin+,
-      which means that the first line starts at the original left margin,
-      and the second and subsequent lines are indented by 2.5em.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibitemsep}] This gives the vertical separation
-      between two reference list entries. It is also a ``skip'', with
-      default value ``\verb+\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax+'', i.e., 0pt,
-      but it may be stretched a little to fill the page nicely.
-      This is an old (Plain \TeX) style definition, I will probably
-      change that in a next version. If you want to change it,
-      e.g., to get a blank line between reference list entries,
-      you can use
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{description}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Labels}
-\label{sec:labels}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-There are a lot of specific pieces of text that can be put into the reference
-list or a citation by \pkg{apacite}. Here, these pieces are called
-\emph{labels}. Almost all of these are to some extent language-specific, and
-sometimes style-specific even within the same language. Therefore, they are
-implemented through \LaTeX{} commands, so that users can easily change them.
-In this section, these commands and their purposes are described, and their
-(U.S.\ English) defaults are given. Section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} below will
-discuss how these commands are changed if another language is used.
-
-The following label commands are used:
-\begin{description}
-  \item[\cmd{\bibmessage}] This is the first of 9 specific type
-      commands that are recognized by \pkg{apacite}. If you
-      define the \fieldname{type} field of a \entryname{misc}
-      entry as ``\cmd{\bibmessage}'', the formatting of the
-      entry is changed (e.g., the title is not italicized),
-      see the discussion of the \fieldname{type} field in
-      section~\ref{subsec:fields} above. This one is used for
-      messages in newsgroups, internet forums, etc.
-      Default is ``\verb+Msg+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogram}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Computer program+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Computer program manual+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Computer program and manual+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftware}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Computer software+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Computer software manual+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Computer software and manual+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}]
-      Default is ``\verb+Programming language+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibnotype}]
-      This one is a bit different from the previous 8. It is used for
-      \entryname{techreport} entries to indicate that the type specifier
-      should be suppressed. Its default value is the empty string, but this
-      will not have an effect on \pkg{apacite} behavior, because the type
-      specifier is suppressed anyway by \pkg{apacite}. However, by defining it
-      as the empty string, formatting may become better (i.e., closer to the
-      desired formatting) with other styles.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibnodate}] Used in the \fieldname{year} and
-      \fieldname{originalyear} fields to indicate that no
-      publication date has been given. Default value is ``\verb+n.d.{}+''.
-      The extra pair of braces ensures that \TeX\ does not treat
-      the period before them as a sentence-ending period, after which
-      more space is inserted. This also applies to several other
-      labels discussed below.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BOthers}] Used for ``others'' if the number of authors
-      or editors is too large, as in ``(Gill et al., 1981)''.
-      The default is ``\verb+et al.{}+''.
-
-      However, the definition contains a slight adaptation, because
-      in a previous version of \pkg{apacite}, there was a problem
-      implying that in some cases \BibTeX{} might put an extra period after
-      \cmd{\BOthers}, not recognizing that it already contains a period,
-      so that you would get ``et al.{}.'', which is undesirable.
-      It depends on the definition of \cmd{\BOthers} whether there should
-      be a period or not: If it is defined as ``\verb+et al.{}+'',
-      there should not be an additional period, but if it is defined
-      as, say, ``\verb+and others+'', then there should be an additional
-      period. But \BibTeX{} does not know what the (later) definition
-      of this command will be in \LaTeX{}. Therefore, the \cmd{\BOthers}
-      command is defined to have one argument. In \BibTeX{},
-      \pkg{apacite} inserts \verb+\BOthers{.}+ in the output, so no
-      additional period is inserted by \BibTeX{}. By default, this
-      command is defined as ``\verb+et al.{}+'', and the argument is
-      simply ignored.
-
-      If you redefine the \cmd{\BOthers} command and need the additional
-      period, you can redefine it appropriately. However, in the current
-      version, the \cmd{\BOthers} command is distinguished from the
-      \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} command and I think the mentioned problems
-      do not occur anymore. Nevertheless, I have kept the definition of the
-      previous version. I may decide, after thorough testing, to change
-      this again in a next version.
-
-      There is still a complication, however. If you use a \cmd{\citeauthor}
-      at the end of a sentence, there may be a period too many, if
-      you end the sentence explicitly with it and \cmd{\BOthers} is
-      ``et al.{}''. On the other hand, if you omit the sentence-finishing
-      period but decide to redefine \cmd{\BOthers} to ``and others'',
-      the period is missing. Therefore, it seems wise not to end a sentence
-      with a \cmd{\citeauthor}, or you could define a command, e.g.,
-      \cmd{\finishsentence}, and insert it in an appropriate place.
-      Then, this command should be changed along with \cmd{\BOthers}.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BOthersPeriod}] Also used for ``others'' if the number of
-      authors or editors is too large, as in ``Gill, P. E., et al. (1981)''.
-      But this one is used for situations when it should always end with
-      a period. The default is ``\verb+et al.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BIP}] ``In press'', the string to be used as year for
-      in-press references. In the \fname{.bib} file, the \fieldname{year}
-      field should be ``\verb+\BIP+'', so that \pkg{apacite} can recognize
-      this and use appropriate formatting and sorting.
-      The default value is ``\verb+in press+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BIn}] Used for \entryname{incollection} and
-      \entryname{intechreport}, for ``In \opt{editor} (Ed.{}),
-      \opt{booktitle}'', and similar phrases. Default value is ``\verb+In+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BCHAP}] Used for \entryname{incollection} if the
-      \fieldname{pages} field is empty, to denote the chapter number
-      of the referenced work in the collection. Used primarily for
-      internet documents, where there are no page numbers.
-      Default value is ``\verb+chap.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BCHAPS}] Just like \cmd{\BCHAP}, but this one is used
-      if the \fieldname{chapter} field refers to more than 1 chapter.
-      Default value is ``\verb+chap.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BED}] Editor in reference list, as in
-      ``In P. R. Krishnaiah (Ed.{})''. Default is ``\verb+Ed.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BEDS}] Editors (more than one editor) in reference list,
-      as in ``In C. R. Rao \& J. K. Ghosh (Eds.{})''.
-      Default is ``\verb+Eds.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BTRANS}] Translator, as in ``(J. Strachey, Trans.{})''.
-      Default is ``\verb+Trans.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BTRANSS}] Translators. Default is ``\verb+Trans.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BTRANSL}] Translation. Used in a text citation when
-      referring to a translated work for which there is no date
-      for the original work. This is then formatted as
-      ``Aristotle (trans.{} 1931)''. Default is ``\verb+trans.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BCHAIR}] Chair of a symposium, etc.
-      Default is ``\verb+Chair+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BCHAIRS}] Chairs. Default is ``\verb+Chairs+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BVOL}] Volume, as in ``Vol.\ 1''.
-      Default is ``\verb+Vol.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BVOLS}] Volumes, as in ``Vols.{} 1--4''.
-      Default is ``\verb+Vols.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BNUM}] Number, as in ``Tech.\ Rep.{} No.{} 12''.
-      Default is ``\verb+No.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BNUMS}] Numbers, as in ``Nos.{} 3--5''.
-      Default is ``\verb+Nos.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BEd}] Edition, as in ``2nd ed.{}''.
-      Default is ``\verb+ed.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BPG}] Page, default is ``\verb+p.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BPGS}] Pages, default is ``\verb+pp.{}+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BTR}] The (default) technical report type name, which can be
-      overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
-      ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.{}+''
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BPhD}] The (default) PhD thesis type name, which can be
-      overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
-      ``\texttt{Doctoral dissertation}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BUPhD}] The (default) Unpublished PhD thesis type name,
-      which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
-      ``\texttt{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BMTh}] The (default) master's thesis type name, which can be
-      overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
-      ``\texttt{Master's thesis}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BUMTh}] The (default) unpublished master's thesis type name,
-      which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
-      ``\texttt{Unpublished master's thesis}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BOWP}] ``Original work published'', default is
-      ``\texttt{Original work published}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\BREPR}] ``Reprinted from'', default is
-      ``\texttt{Reprinted from}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\refname}] Name of the reference list if it's a section.
-      (So it's the section name.) Default is ``\verb+References+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibname}] Name of the reference list if it's a chapter.
-      Default is ``\verb+References+''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\bibliographyprenote}] This command is used before
-      the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading,
-      and immediately after \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}.
-      It is intended for an optional note just before the references
-      in the reference list. It defaults to nothing, but can be changed
-      to a list of commands (e.g., if some commands should be different
-      in the reference list than in the text) and/or some text.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\APACmetaprenote}] If a meta-analysis is reported, the
-      works included in the meta-analysis should in the bibliography be
-      preceded by an asterisk, see the description of \cmd{\APACmetastar}
-      above. This should then be explained in a note before the references.
-      This command contains the text of that note. Default is
-      ``\texttt{References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
-      included in the meta-analysis.}''.
-
-  \item[\cmd{\authorindexname}] Name (heading) of the author index.
-      Default is ``\verb+Author Index+''.
-\end{description}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Language support}
-\label{sec:compat-babel}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The APA is, of course, American, and therefore the rules in the APA manual
-are also based on the (U.S.) English language. Because \pkg{apacite} was
-primarily designed to implement the APA rules, and because I write all
-my scientific work in English, \pkg{apacite} never contained explicit
-support for other languages. However, most language-specific elements
-have been implemented in the form of \LaTeX{} commands, so that users
-could define their own \LaTeX{} package in which these elements were
-changed. The labels discussed in section~\ref{sec:labels} above are the
-most important part of this.
-
-Furthermore, when writing in a non-English language, the \pkg{babel} package
-will usually be loaded. The \pkg{babel} package is an extensive package that
-facilitates using \LaTeX{} for documents in languages other than English.
-There have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{babel} and
-\pkg{apacite}, and therefore since 2003 \pkg{apacite} contained some
-explicit code to overcome the compatibility problems. I think this works
-well, provided that \pkg{apacite} is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{babel}.
-
-Thus, although \pkg{apacite} did not support non-English languages
-explicitly, it did facilitate them. Supporting non-English languages is
-not a main objective of \pkg{apacite}, because it is not needed for
-the APA. Nevertheless, it would be a useful addition. Many journals in
-non-English languages and universities in countries where other languages
-are spoken base their rules on the APA manual. Therefore, it would be
-efficient if, with a few adaptations, \pkg{apacite} could also be used in
-these circumstances. For this reason, and based on user requests, the
-current version of \pkg{apacite} contains a first attempt at explicit
-language support.
-
-The \pkg{apacite} distribution now contains a subdirectory \fname{lang},
-which contains files that have names according to the construction
-\opt{language}\fname{.apc}, i.e., \fname{english.apc}, \fname{dutch.apc}, etc.
-These files contain the language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite},
-mainly translations of terms like ``and'', ``Ed.{}'', etc., and have been
-written by \pkg{apacite} users that are (native) speakers of the languages
-involved. If the \pkg{babel}, \pkg{german}, or \pkg{ngerman} package is
-loaded, \pkg{apacite} is able to determine the language of the document that
-is processed. Then the corresponding \fname{.apc} file, when available, is
-read. In this way, language-specific elements are changed to the relevant
-language. This is done fully automatically, the user does not have to do
-anything explicitly. However, sometimes an \fname{.apc} file makes some
-assumptions (such as \fname{greek.apc}, which assumes ISO-8859-7 encoding)
-or makes some choices that are nontrivial. Therefore, look at the source
-code of the \fname{.apc} file if you obtain unexpected results. These files
-contain some brief documentation of the specific issues relevant for the
-language at hand.
-
-The list with available \fname{.apc} files can be found in the file
-\fname{manifest.txt}. One file is defined for each ``language'', which can be
-used for several ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel} terminology). For example,
-\fname{english.apc} is also used if the language is ``american''. See the
-documentation of the \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} packages for a list of
-dialects of the language files supplied. If an \fname{.apc} file is not
-available for the language you need, you can use one of the supplied ones as a
-template and write your own. If you send it to me, I can include it in a next
-version of \pkg{apacite}.
-
-Note, however, that this form of language support is still very limited.
-There are many aspects that are not yet covered, like different forms of
-dates (month-day vs.\ day-month). I have recently discovered the
-\pkg{babelbib} package, which offers very sophisticated support of
-different languages. I will study this and see whether I can use some
-of its features in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
-
-One of the issues that is not yet settled is how to treat the months.
-I could define these as commands like \cmd{\January} or according
-to a construction like \verb+\bibmonth{1}+. The months are now still
-hard-coded in English as macros in \fname{apacite.bst}.
-This means that, when using a different language, they can (and must)
-be redefined in the \fname{.bib} file, by including lines like:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  @string{jan = "{\APACSortNoop{01}}January"}
-\end{verbatim}
-etc., where you replace ``\verb+January+'' by the translation of January
-in the desired language. The ``\verb+{\APACSortNoop{01}}+'' ensures that
-\BibTeX{} sorts January before, say, April, when that is needed.
-
-It is likely that you would use these month definitions a lot, in which case
-an even better solution would be to write a special \fname{.bib} file, say
-\opt{language}\fname{.bib}, which only contains these month redefinitions.
-Then you could put this file somewhere where \BibTeX{} can find it and include
-this before your (other) \fname{.bib} file(s) that contain the actual
-references:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\bibliographystyle{apacite}
-\bibliography{language,otherbibfiles}
-\end{verbatim}
-See \citeA[p.~159]{LaTeXbook} or \citeA[p.~403]{LaTeXcomp} for a discussion
-of these issues.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Compatibility}
-\label{sec:compat}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-Generally speaking, I would want \pkg{apacite} to be compatible with other
-packages, of course. However, what does compatibility mean? It can mean
-various things:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item \label{compat1}%
-      The same \fname{.bib} file can be used with
-      different \BibTeX{} styles and \LaTeX{} citation packages;
-\item \label{compat2}%
-      The same citation commands as other citation packages;
-\item \label{compat3}%
-      Another \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a
-      \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by the \pkg{apacite}
-      \BibTeX{} style;
-\item \label{compat4}%
-      The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a
-      \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by another \BibTeX{} style;
-\item \label{compat5}%
-      The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be loaded at the
-      same time as other packages without errors or undesirable
-      side-effects.
-\end{enumerate}
-Because of the complicated rules of the APA manual, it is not always possible
-to achieve all kinds of compatibility with all other packages. Later in this
-section, I will discuss compatibility issues with other packages with which
-known incompatibility problems exist or have existed. A first example of this,
-the \pkg{babel} package, has already been mentioned above in
-section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}.
-
-Point~\ref{compat1} is the most important. If you have to write a completely
-different \fname{.bib} file for different citation styles, there does not seem
-to be an advantage in using \BibTeX{}. You might as well write the reference
-list explicitly in \LaTeX{} then. However, not even this point can be achieved
-completely, although the vast majority of the items will be the same for
-different styles. But there remain a number of choices that are style-specific
-and that lead to differences in the \fname{.bib} file. Examples from the APA
-manual are:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If a referenced book is volume~III according to its title
-      page, this should be referenced as Vol.~3 according to the
-      APA manual rules, but that may not be the case with other
-      styles;
-\item Journal names are abbreviated by some styles, but not
-      according to the APA manual rules;
-\item Publisher names should be abbreviated according to the
-      APA manual, e.g., ``John Wiley \& Sons'' becomes ``Wiley''.
-      Other styles do not do this;
-\item The issue number of a journal should only be given if
-      the journal starts each issue with page~1, not if page
-      numbers of different issues in the same volume are consecutive.
-      Other styles may require the issue number in all cases;
-\item Page ranges are given as ``341--351'' in APA style, whereas
-      other styles use ``341--51'';
-\item The APA rules require a capital after a colon (`\verb+:+'),
-      so that subtitles start with a capital as well. Other styles
-      may not do this;
-\item The APA has specific rules about the address: For a U.S. city,
-      the state (or territory) should be given as a 2-letter code
-      from the U.S. Postal Services, and the province and country
-      should be given if it is a non-U.S. city, unless it is one of
-      the 17 (U.S. and non-U.S.) cities that are ``well-known for
-      publishing''. Then, only the city should be mentioned. There
-      are similar exceptions if the name of the state (and sometimes
-      even city) is already mentioned in the university name and
-      the university acts as publisher;
-\item Yearbooks like \emph{Annual Review of Psychology} should be treated
-      as journals according to the APA rules, whereas other styles
-      treat these as books;
-\item The additional fields (such as \fieldname{translator} and the
-      \fieldname{original*}-fields) that are used by \pkg{apacite} but are
-      not defined in other \BibTeX{} styles are of course
-      \pkg{apacite}-specific.
-\end{itemize}
-Some of these problems can be handled relatively elegantly. For example,
-the user could use a command like ``\verb+\RomanVol{3}+'' in the
-\fieldname{volume} field. Then, the user could define a counter,
-\verb+RomanVolcounter+, say, in \LaTeX{} and then define
-\cmd{\RomanVol} (similar to \cmd{\BCnt} discussed earlier) as
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcommand{\RomanVol}[1]{%
-  \setcounter{RomanVolcounter}{#1}\theRomanVolcounter}
-\end{verbatim}
-where \cmd{\theRomanVolcounter} is defined as \verb+\arabic{RomanVolcounter}+
-if \pkg{apacite} is loaded and as \verb+\Roman{RomanVolcounter}+ if another
-package is loaded that desires this. The example with style-specific
-\fname{.bib} files that contain the definitions of journal-strings was already
-given in section~\ref{sec:bib} above. However, many users will not go through
-all this trouble, and not all problems can be solved in this way. So we have
-to realize that not all entries in the \fname{.bib} file will be suitable for
-all citation styles. On the other hand, most citation styles and journals are
-not as critical as APA journals and many styles in psychology and other social
-sciences (including economics) are very similar, so a \fname{.bib} file that
-is tailor-made for \pkg{apacite} is likely to be suitable enough for the
-styles of most relevant alternative journals.
-
-Point~\ref{compat2} above is currently not fulfilled. The \pkg{apacite}
-citation commands are directly based on those of its immediate predecessor,
-\pkg{theapa}. But the use of `\verb+<+' and `\verb+>+' for prefixes is not
-used by other packages. The influential \pkg{natbib} package uses \cmd{\citep}
-and \cmd{\citet} instead of \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\citeA}, and uses many more
-alternative commands, see section~\ref{sec:compat-natbib} below. The
-\pkg{chicago} package uses \cmd{\citeA} instead of \cmd{\citeauthor}, many
-``numerical'' citation styles only recognize \cmd{\cite}, and so forth. As
-discussed below, I now consider \pkg{natbib} as the standard with which other
-packages should comply. Therefore, future versions of \pkg{apacite} will
-support the \pkg{natbib} citation commands, but the current version does not
-do that.
-
-I think that points~\ref{compat3} and~\ref{compat4} are not that important. It
-seems to me that there is not much wrong with defining a style through a
-combination of a \fname{.sty} and \fname{.bst} file, each requiring the other
-to work. However, given the possibilities and philosophy of the \pkg{natbib}
-package, it would be desirable that \fname{natbib.sty} can be used with
-\fname{apacite.bst}. As discussed below, this works to some extent, although
-it requires \fname{apacite.sty} to be loaded as well, before
-\fname{natbib.sty}.
-
-Point~\ref{compat5} is very important, especially with other packages that are
-complementary to \pkg{apacite} in some sense. It would be very annoying having
-to choose between using \pkg{babel} and \pkg{apacite}, or between
-\pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{apacite}, etc. These packages serve totally different
-purposes, cannot usefully be compared, and are more valuable when they can be
-used jointly. The rest of this section addresses this issue for a number of
-packages with which compatibility problems are known to exist or have existed.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Compatibility of \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{natbib}}
-\label{sec:compat-natbib}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The \pkg{natbib} package is a general purpose citation package that is
-intended to work with a broad range of \BibTeX{} (and non-\BibTeX{}) styles
-that generate the bibliography. The \pkg{natbib} package is quite advanced and
-can be used to switch easily between completely different citation styles.
-Furthermore, the apparent popularity of \pkg{natbib} has inspired writers of
-packages that would otherwise be incompatible with \pkg{natbib} to write code
-to resolve these incompatibilities. I will mention some of these packages
-below.
-
-I consider \pkg{natbib} as the \emph{de facto} standard with which
-other packages should be compatible. Unfortunately, \pkg{apacite} is still
-not entirely compatible with \pkg{natbib}. The main incompatibility is that
-different citation commands are used, so that it is not possible to use the
-same document with \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{apacite}.
-
-\pkg{apacite}, building on its predecessors, uses \cmd{\cite} for
-parenthetical citations and \cmd{\citeA} for in-text citations, whereas
-\pkg{natbib} uses \cmd{\citep} and \cmd{\citet} for these purposes. Moreover,
-text that should precede the citation is entered between \verb+<+ and \verb+>+
-marks and text that should follow the citation is entered between square
-brackets (\verb+[+ and \verb+]+, i.e., a standard \LaTeX{} optional argument)
-in \pkg{apacite},  whereas \pkg{natbib} uses \emph{two} optional arguments
-between brackets. If there is one optional argument, \pkg{natbib} interprets
-this as text following the citation (just like \pkg{apacite}). If there is
-text that should precede the citation, but not text that should follow the
-citation, two optional arguments must be used in \pkg{natbib}, the second
-being empty.
-
-Furthermore, both packages have defined some alternative citation commands,
-such as \cmd{\citeNP} (\pkg{apacite}) and \cmd{\citealp} (\pkg{natbib}), some
-of which serve the same purpose and could therefore be mapped onto each other
-easily, but some others have no equivalent in the other package.
-
-A partial conversion table, listing the main \pkg{apacite} commands and their
-(closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalent is given in Table~\ref{tab:APAnatConv}. The
-APA requirement and \pkg{apacite} behavior of listing the full author list for
-the first citation (if there are at most 5 authors) and the short author list
-in subsequent citations is accomplished by loading \pkg{natbib} with the
-\pkgoption{longnamesfirst} option. This is assumed in the table. An example of
-better APA-like behavior of \pkg{natbib} is that, by using the
-\pkgoption{sort} option, \pkg{natbib} is able to sort the references within
-the same citation command, as required by the APA manual, whereas
-\pkg{apacite} does not have this option yet.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\begin{table}[htp]
-\caption{Partial conversion table of the main \pkg{apacite}
-         citation commands and their (closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalents.}
-\label{tab:APAnatConv}
-\begin{tabular}{lcl}
-\hline
-\pkg{apacite}          & $\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\mbox{}$ & \pkg{natbib}       \\
-\cline{1-1}\cline{3-3}
-\cmd{\cite}            &                              & \cmd{\citep}       \\
-\cmd{\citeA}           &                              & \cmd{\citet}       \\
-\cmd{\citeNP}          &                              & \cmd{\citealp}     \\
-\cmd{\citeauthor}      &                              & \cmd{\citeauthor}  \\
-\\
-\cmd{\fullcite}        &                              & \cmd{\citep*}      \\
-\cmd{\fullciteA}       &                              & \cmd{\citet*}      \\
-\cmd{\fullciteNP}      &                              & \cmd{\citealp*}    \\
-\cmd{\fullciteauthor}  &                              & \cmd{\citeauthor*} \\
-\\
-\cmd{\shortcite}       &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citep}       \\
-\cmd{\shortciteA}      &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citet}       \\
-\cmd{\shortciteNP}     &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citealp}     \\
-\cmd{\shortciteauthor} &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citeauthor}  \\
-\\
-\cmd{\citeyear}        &                              & \cmd{\citeyearpar} \\
-\cmd{\citeyearNP}      &                              & \cmd{\citeyear}    \\
-\cmd{\nocite}          &                              & \cmd{\nocite}      \\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{table}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-Many labeling and punctuation commands are also different but similar between
-\pkg{natbib} and \pkg{apacite}. I haven't studied the \pkg{natbib} commands
-in detail, but will do so in the future. It is my intention to add
-\pkg{natbib}-compatible commands to apacite in the future, so that the same
-document can be processed either with \pkg{natbib} or with \pkg{apacite}.
-
-With previous versions of \pkg{apacite}, there used to be some erratic
-behavior (error messages and wrong formatting) when the \pkg{natbib}
-\LaTeX{} package (\fname{natbib.sty}) was used with the \pkg{apacite}
-\BibTeX{} style (\fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst}). These
-problems have now been almost entirely resolved (I believe).
-
-When you want to use \pkg{natbib} for citation and \pkg{apacite} for the
-reference list, you still need to load the \LaTeX{} package \fname{apacite.sty}
-(with \cmd{\usepackage}), because of the commands that are included in the
-\BibTeX{} output (as defined in section~\ref{sec:custom} above). The
-\fname{apacite.sty} file must be loaded \emph{before} \fname{natbib.sty},
-otherwise you will get lots of error messages. I may try to fix that for
-a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
-
-Using \pkg{natbib} for the citations has some advantages over using
-\pkg{apacite} for the citations. Apart from the abovementioned sorting
-of citations within a single citation command, these are mainly
-\pkg{natbib}'s better compatibility with other important packages,
-such as \pkg{hyperref}.
-
-However, \pkg{natbib} does not fully comply with the APA rules.
-Known incompatibilities between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules are: (1)
-Multiple adjacent citations with the same author and year are formatted
-as ``Johnson, 1991a,b'' by \pkg{natbib}, whereas the APA manual requires
-this to be ``Johnson, 1991a, 1991b''; (2) The APA manual requires ``and''
-between authors to be ``and'' in text and ``\&'' in parenthetical citation.
-
-I could change the \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst} \BibTeX{}
-style files so that \pkg{natbib} would be ``fooled'' and the first
-problem would be resolved. However, this has the drawback of imposing APA
-style citations when you request \pkg{natbib} style citations, and you
-may actually want the behavior mentioned above. I am only able to provide
-one of these possibilities. It would be better to add an option to
-\pkg{natbib} with which the desired behavior can be chosen. Thus, you
-could try to put pressure on the author of \pkg{natbib} to achieve this.
-Alternatively, I might attempt to provide an option to \pkg{apacite}
-in the future that controls this behavior of \pkg{natbib}.
-
-The second incompatibility between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules mentioned
-above occurs because \pkg{apacite} uses the re-definable \cmd{\BBA}
-command for this usage of ``and''. With \pkg{natbib}, it is not possible
-that \cmd{\BBA} ``knows'' whether it is parenthetical or in-text, so you can
-choose only one of these, or you must redefine \cmd{\BBA} explicitly before
-each citation.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Compatibility of \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref}}
-\label{sec:compat-hyper}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The \pkg{hyperref} package turns (cross-) references into hypertext links.
-This can be used in conjunction with a program such as \latextohtml{} to
-compose \fname{.html} files with clickable links, to internet pages or within
-the same document, or it can be used to create a \fname{.pdf} document with
-clickable crossreferences. Evidently, citations are also references.
-Therefore, the \pkg{hyperref} package transforms these into hypertext links as
-well, and needs to redefine the citation commands and reference list commands
-in order to do so. These redefinitions are incompatible with redefinitions of
-the citation commands by \pkg{apacite}.
-
-Similar problems occur between \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{natbib}, and some code
-is included in both packages, which jointly resolves these incompatibilities.
-In order to make \pkg{apacite} compatible with \pkg{hyperref}, similar code
-should be developed and included in \pkg{apacite}.
-
-An attempt to achieve this can be tried through the \pkgoption{hyper} option
-of \pkg{apacite}. This activates some code provided by Ross Moore (thanks,
-Ross) that makes \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref} work together to some
-extent. However, different things go wrong depending on the order in which the
-two packages are loaded.
-
-If the \pkg{hyperref} package is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{apacite}, different
-citations with the same author(s) and year do not work well: \pkg{hyperref}
-suppresses the ``a'', ``b'', etc., so ``(Johnson, 1991a)'' becomes ``(Johnson,
-1991)'', which is undesirable. If the \pkg{hyperref} package is loaded
-\emph{before} \pkg{apacite}, this problem does not occur, but the citations in
-the text do not link to the reference list anymore.
-
-The following problems are independent of the order of loading:
-(1) Citations of the form ``(Author, year1, year2)'', i.e., with multiple
-    references to the same author(s) in the same citation command are not
-    recognized as such and are thus formatted as ``(Author, year1; Author,
-    year2)'';
-(2) If the \cmd{\url} command from the \pkg{url} package is used for internet
-    addresses (e.g., for retrieval information in the reference list), line
-    breaks are not inserted within the address, even if it's way too long for
-    the line, and ``\verb+#+'' characters in the internet address are not
-    processed well, see the discussion of the \pkg{backref} package below.
-
-Because of these known problems, the \pkgoption{hyper} option is not executed
-by default (the \pkgoption{nohyper} option is), but if you find the advantages
-more important than the disadvantages, you can request this option. Note that
-you should load the \pkg{hyperref} package yourself, this is not done by
-\pkg{apacite}. Thus, you can choose the order in which to load the packages.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Compatibility of \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{backref}}
-\label{sec:compat-backref}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The \pkg{backref} package adds to each entry in the bibliography a list
-of pages (or sections) on which it is referenced. Hence, it serves as
-an alternative to an author index, in which not the entries themselves
-are backreferenced, but the authors of these entries, see
-section~\ref{sec:autindex}. Note that \pkg{natbib} offers yet another
-possibility, viz.\ the citations in the standard index, or a separate
-citation index, see the \pkg{natbib} documentation. In my opinion,
-the \pkg{backref} way of indexing the page numbers of the citations
-is more logical. Moreover, it is more condensed as well.
-
-Obviously, the \pkg{backref} package has to change the citation commands
-and reference list to be able to do its backreferencing.
-Because \pkg{apacite} redefines these as well, they are conflicting
-to some degree. A similar compatibility problem between \pkg{backref}
-and \pkg{natbib} was noticed by the author of \pkg{backref}. Therefore,
-\pkg{backref} contains some code to make it compatible with \pkg{natbib}.
-This code has been adapted for \pkg{apacite} and incorporated in
-\pkg{apacite}. Thus, \pkg{backref} as a standalone package has been made
-compatible with \pkg{apacite}. The drawback of this solution is that if
-changes are made in the \pkg{backref} package, this may result in new
-incompatibilities with \pkg{apacite} unless \pkg{apacite} is changed as
-well. Whether, and if so, when, this will occur will be a question for
-the future.
-
-Ex.~74 of the APA manual references an internet address that contains a
-``\verb+#+''. This leads to an error with \pkg{backref} and when entered
-through, \LaTeX{} inserts ``\verb+##+'' in the output instead of ``\verb+#+''.
-This will not occur often in practice, but unfortunately occurs in the
-mentioned example, which might give the impression that it is an \pkg{apacite}
-bug, but it is not an \pkg{apacite} problem or even a compatibility problem,
-but a \pkg{backref} problem. I had to use some nasty code in the current
-document (\fname{apacite.tex}) to have the bibliography entry of this
-reference formatted correctly when \pkg{backref} is loaded. When you
-encounter this problem, you can use this code.
-
-Apart from being a standalone package, \pkg{backref} can also be
-combined with \pkg{hyperref}. It is then not loaded separately,
-but through the \pkgoption{backref} or \pkgoption{pagebackref}
-option of the \pkg{hyperref} package. In this case, the backreferences
-become hypertext links. See the discussion of the \pkg{hyperref}
-package above.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Multiple bibliographies}
-\label{sec:compat-chapterbib}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The \pkg{chapterbib} package allows separate bibliographies for separate
-chapters of a book, or, technically, separate \cmd{\include}d files. To work
-properly, it needs some small changes to the citation package, which are
-clearly described in the \pkg{chapterbib} documentation. These changes have
-been incorporated in \pkg{apacite}, and therefore \pkg{apacite} is compatible
-with \pkg{chapterbib}.
-
-It is generally advisable not to use the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option of
-\pkg{chapterbib}, because this redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which
-interferes with the redefinition by \pkg{apacite}. You can use the
-\pkgoption{sectionbib} option of \pkg{apacite} to accomplish that the
-bibliography or bibliographies are sections, rather than chapters.
-
-Moreover, \pkg{apacite} is configured such that it takes a section as default
-if it is in the main matter (signified by \cmd{\mainmatter}) of the document.
-In the back matter (\cmd{\backmatter}) the bibliography is put in a chapter.
-This is also the case if \cmd{\chapter} is defined but \cmd{\mainmatter} not.
-(Is this possible? Perhaps for reports?) Consequently, the
-\pkgoption{sectionbib} option is only useful in specific circumstances. The
-\pkgoption{nosectionbib} forces the bibliography to be a chapter, provided
-\cmd{\chapter} is defined. (I figured a \pkgoption{chapterbib} option would be
-a bit confusing, so I stuck with \pkgoption{nosectionbib}.)
-
-The \pkg{bibunits} package is an alternative to \pkg{chapterbib}. It allows a
-greater flexibility in choosing the scope of a bibliography (chapter, section,
-or arbitrarily defined part of the document). I haven't tested it thoroughly,
-but it seems like there are no compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite}
-and \pkg{bibunits}.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\subsection{Programs for conversion to html, rtf, etc.}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-There are several programs that convert \LaTeX{} files to other types
-of files, most notably html and rtf. This may, for example, be useful if you
-want to publish your document on the internet or if you are requested to send
-a ``Word'' file to a journal. I have received reports that \latextohtml{}
-and \LaTeXrtf{} do not handle documents that use \pkg{apacite} well.
-Therefore, I have studied these programs.
-
-\latextohtml{} is a \Perl{} program that converts a \LaTeX{} input
-file into one or more \fname{.html} files, so that a document that is prepared
-with \LaTeX{} can be used as a (user-friendly) internet document. For papers,
-lecture notes, and transparencies of classes, I always convert the
-\fname{.dvi} file output by \LaTeX{} to a \fname{.pdf} file (through the
-\pkg{dvipdfm} program), which can be read by most people, e.g., using the
-\pkg{Adobe Reader} program or browser plug-in. I find \fname{.pdf} files
-more convenient, because I can download a whole paper or presentation
-with a single click and then print it and read it when and where I desire,
-whereas typical examples of conversions to \fname{.html} use many
-\fname{.html} files, which can only be conveniently read from the computer
-screen when and where you're connected to the internet. Nevertheless, I can
-imagine that someone would like to convert a document to \fname{.html}, e.g.,
-because it loads faster and reads easier from the screen, because for some
-documents most people will have to use only a small part and can easier browse
-or search through it, or just because you want to make a home page and do not
-want to learn the html-language.
-
-Similarly, \LaTeXrtf{} is a standalone program that converts a \LaTeX{}
-document to \fname{.rtf} format, which can be read by most word processors.
-This may be convenient if you (a \LaTeX{} user) want to share a document with
-someone who does not work with \LaTeX{}, or as mentioned above, if you are
-required to send a ``Word'' file to a journal.
-
-Both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} implement \LaTeX{} macros etc.\ in
-another programming language (\latextohtml{}: \Perl{}; \LaTeXrtf{}: C) and
-process the \fname{.tex} files directly. This design implies that the
-conversion program must know the definitions of all \LaTeX{} macros that
-are used. A drawback of this design is that essentially the same code has
-to be written in different programming languages (\LaTeX{} macros for the
-\fname{.sty} file, \Perl{} for \latextohtml{}, and C for \LaTeXrtf{}), but
-typically with some adaptations specific for the application at hand.
-
-With \LaTeXrtf{}, the \LaTeX{} macros that it is able to process are included
-in the C source code that is compiled. Consequently, no user additions are
-possible in principle. However, the source code is freely available, so if you
-define a \LaTeX{} macro, you could adapt \LaTeXrtf{}'s source code and
-recompile \LaTeXrtf{}. It is obvious that this is very inconvenient,
-especially if \LaTeX{} macros are defined differently for different styles or
-if they are defined differently in different parts of the same document.
-
-Version~1.9.15 and higher of \LaTeXrtf{} contains some support for
-\pkg{apacite}, but lags a few versions of \pkg{apacite} behind and thus
-doesn't work with recent versions of \pkg{apacite}. Moreover, even if this
-would be fixed, e.g., because I (or you) send patches to the \LaTeXrtf{}
-authors, this wouldn't do justice to the flexibility of \pkg{apacite}, i.e.,
-its customization options.
-
-In contrast with this, \latextohtml{} allows the possibility to supply
-external \Perl{} scripts. If \latextohtml{} encounters a
-\cmdtwo{usepackage}{package} command in the document, it attempts to read the
-corresponding \opt{package}\fname{.perl} \Perl{} script. \latextohtml{} is
-shipped with many such \Perl{} scripts. There is not one for \pkg{apacite},
-but there is one for \pkg{natbib}, which could possibly be adapted for
-\pkg{apacite}. Alternatively, you could use the \pkg{natbib} citation commands
-and use the \pkg{natbib} package, which should work. This will become more
-straightforward when, in a future version, \pkg{apacite} also supports the
-\pkg{natbib} citation commands. Then the \fname{natbib.perl} script may
-possibly be copied to \fname{apacite.perl} without having to adapt much.
-However, I have never studied \Perl{}, and I do not particularly like the
-idea of having to learn that language for this purpose, so it is not very
-likely that in the near future \latextohtml{} will work well with
-\pkg{apacite}.
-
-Note, however, that the design with the \Perl{} scripts has the advantage
-that, if you customize the usage of \pkg{apacite} by writing your own
-\fname{.sty} file that renews the definitions of some macros, you can also
-supply a corresponding \Perl{} script, so that your customizations are
-processed.
-
-An alternative to both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} is \TeXht{}. This is
-a collection of programs and style files that convert \LaTeX{} to
-various formats, such as html, xml, and OpenOffice format. If you have
-OpenOffice, the latter can be used to convert to Word (or rtf) format.
-The principle of \TeXht{} is to let \LaTeX{} do most of the formatting and
-processing of commands, and do the conversion at low-level \TeX{} commands.
-In this way, all newly defined commands and user-defined changes are
-automatically supported. This even carries over to redefinitions of macros
-in the middle of a document. However, for some specific purposes, there are
-some additional things that must be arranged. Therefore, \TeXht{} contains a
-large list of \fname{.4ht} files that are necessary to support various
-\LaTeX{} packages. One of these is the \fname{apacite.4ht} file. The main
-purpose of this file is to make citations into hyperlinks to the corresponding
-entries in the reference list. Currently, this only works partially, but
-the citation text itself is formatted correctly, so this is only a
-relatively minor inconvenience. But, of course, it would be better if this
-would work perfectly. I suspect that this issue is related to the problems
-with the compatibility of \pkg{apacite} with \pkg{hyperref}, and can be
-solved in the same way. I intend to study this issue in the near future and
-hope to solve this for a future version (although, technically, it is a
-\TeXht{} problem and not an \pkg{apacite} problem).
-
-The choice of which converter to use will typically not (only) depend on how
-good it works in conjunction with \pkg{apacite}. Furthermore, apart from the
-converters mentioned above, there are several additional converters that I
-haven't studied at all. I will only study them if I receive reports about
-incompatibility and even then it is far from certain that I will be willing or
-able to fix the problems. It would be very demanding if I would have to define
-the \pkg{apacite} commands in a large number of programming languages for a
-large number of different converters. Because I prefer the design of \TeXht{}
-and because this converter seems to work best at the moment, I will give a
-bit more attention to this one.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Generating an author index}
-\label{sec:autindex}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-The \pkg{apacite} package contains an option to (almost) automatically
-generate an author index. This is done by using the \fname{apacitex.bst}
-\BibTeX{} style file instead of \fname{apacite.bst} and loading the
-\fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package with one of the \pkgoption{index},
-\pkgoption{stdindex}, \pkgoption{tocindex}, or \pkgoption{emindex} options. In
-that case, the \pkg{apacite} package automatically loads the \pkg{index}
-package that supports multiple indexes, so that you can have a subject index
-as well as an author index. Consequently, the \pkg{index} package must be
-available in a directory that is read by \LaTeX{}. If a subject index is
-desired, it must be defined by the user, it is not defined by \pkg{apacite}.
-See the manual of the \pkg{index} package on how to do this. A default author
-index \emph{is} defined by \pkg{apacite}. The author index is then requested
-by putting
-\begin{verbatim}
-\printindex[autx]
-\end{verbatim}
-at the point in the \LaTeX{} document where the index is supposed to appear.
-To include the author index in the processed document, the following sequence
-must be followed: First, \LaTeX{}, which puts citation entries in the
-\fname{.aux} file. Second, \BibTeX{}, which generates the bibliography in the
-\fname{.bbl} file. Third, \LaTeX{} (at least) twice, which puts index entries
-in a \fname{.adx} file, Fourth, \MakeIndex{}, which uses the \fname{.adx} file
-as input and puts the formatted index in a \fname{.and} file, which can be
-processed by \LaTeX{}. So, if the main document is \fname{filename.tex}, then
-\MakeIndex{} must be called as follows:
-\begin{verbatim}
-makeindex -o filename.and filename.adx
-\end{verbatim}
-although the command with which the \MakeIndex{} program must be called may on
-some systems be slightly different, e.g., \fname{makeinde} or
-\fname{makeindx}. Furthermore, several additional options may be chosen on the
-\MakeIndex{} command line. Fifth, run \LaTeX{} again, which (finally) includes
-the formatted author index in the \fname{.dvi} file.
-
-The \pkg{apacite} package provides some options to change the appearance of
-the index somewhat. With the \pkgoption{index} option, the indexing facility
-is turned on, but the \cmd{theindex} environment is not explicitly (re)defined
-by \pkg{apacite}. This means that this environment is defined just like in the
-\pkg{index} package, unless it is overridden by the \pkgoption{tocindex} or
-\pkgoption{emindex} options or redefined by the user or another package that
-is loaded.
-
-The \pkgoption{stdindex} option explicitly uses the definition of the
-\cmd{theindex} environment that is defined in the \pkg{index} package
-[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)].
-With this definition, the index does not appear in the table of contents. With
-the \pkgoption{tocindex} option, this definition is augmented with a table of
-contents entry. Finally, with the \pkgoption{emindex} option, there are some
-alternative definitions. It writes a table of contents entry as well, but the
-index itself is now set in two columns using the \pkg{multicol} package
-instead of the \cmd{\twocolumn} command, the text of the index is set in small
-type, and the page head is not put in uppercase.
-
-When a table of contents entry is desired, another additional \LaTeX{} run is
-required to obtain the table of contents with the author index included. In
-exceptional cases, such as the current document, the extra line in de table of
-contents may cause the text to be moved as well, so that it may be necessary
-to run \MakeIndex{} a second time, followed by yet another \LaTeX{} run.
-
-The definitions of the index discussed apply to all indexes in the document,
-so to, e.g., the subject index as well as the author index. Finally, the
-formatting of the index itself can be changed by writing a \fname{.ist} file
-containing the preferred options. \MakeIndex{} should then be called with the
-filename of this index style file after a ``\verb+-s+'' option on the command
-line, so, e.g.,
-\begin{verbatim}
-makeindex -s mystyle.ist -o filename.and filename.adx
-\end{verbatim}
-The \MakeIndex{} documentation discusses the possible options that can be put
-into the \fname{.ist} file.
-
-If you process the file \fname{apacite.tex} in the way discussed above (look
-at the instructions in the \fname{README} file), it becomes clear that the
-author index is almost as desired, but there are a few exceptions. First, I
-can imagine that you would not want corporate authors, such as ``American
-Psychological Association'', in the author index, but only human authors. I
-haven't (yet) figured out a way to do this (semi-) automatically, so this has
-to be done manually by editing the \fname{.bbl} file, see below.
-
-Second, serious problems occur with cases such as ``Bender, J.~{(Director)}.''
-and ``Bulatao, E.~{(with Winford, C. A.)}.''. Obviously, the description
-``{(Director)}.'' should not be in the index and Winford should not be listed
-as part of Bulatao, but as a separate author. These problems are caused by the
-``tricks'' I used to make \BibTeX{} format them correctly in the reference
-list, see section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. They can also be manually solved by
-editing the \fname{.bbl} file as discussed below.
-
-The author index does not contain entries for the authors Shocked and
-Goodenough (as well as several corporate authors) as cited in text, although
-it does for the reference list part, because the \fieldname{key} field was
-used for the citations. If you use the \fieldname{key} (and
-\fieldname{firstkey}) field and you want the authors in the author index as
-well, you have to include the index command \verb+\protect\AX+ explicitly. For
-example, the ``tricked'' \fieldname{key} field for Michelle Shocked is
-\begin{verbatim}
-  key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the
-         Waterfall}{track~5}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-and if we change this into
-\begin{verbatim}
-  key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked\protect\AX{shocked  m
-         @Shocked, M.}}{1992}{Over the Waterfall}{track~5}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-then citations to her are included in the author index. The \cmd{\AX} command
-will be discussed below.
-
-Summarizing, the author indexing part works very well for most commonly
-encountered cases. However, it does not work (entirely) correctly if special
-measures need to be taken to get them formatted correctly in \BibTeX{}
-(citations, reference list).
-
-An easy solution to incorrect formatting and/or sorting in the author index is
-to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually. This should be done at a time when
-\BibTeX{} will not have to be run again. Otherwise, the changes would be
-overwritten by the next \BibTeX{} run. This editing of the \fname{.bbl} file
-is not in the \TeX-spirit, but in my experience --- I used it for two books
-with lots of references \cite{meijer1998,WaMe00}, with a previous version of
-\pkg{apacite} that caused many more problematic cases --- this takes very
-little time, usually only minutes (compare that with the time spent on writing
-a book, or with the time that would be necessary to manually make an author
-index).
-
-The connection between the \fname{.bbl} file and the author index is through
-\cmd{\AX} commands that are entered by \fname{apacitex.bst} in the
-\fname{.bbl} file. These are responsible for the author indexing facilities.
-By looking at the contents of the \fname{.bbl} file, some changes that lead to
-correct formatting are immediately obvious. For example, the entry for Bender
-is generated by the following lines:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\protect\AX{bender  jdirector
-@Bender, J.~{\bibliteral{(Director)}}.}}{%
-\end{verbatim}
-It is immediately clear that this can be changed to
-\begin{verbatim}
-\protect\AX{bender  j
-@Bender, J.}}{%
-\end{verbatim}
-Then, this author will be placed and formatted correctly in the author index.
-Note that \pkg{apacite} uses the \opt{key}\verb+@+\opt{visual} form of
-indexing. This form is used in \MakeIndex{} to distinguish between the actual
-representation in the index and the place where it should occur. The \opt{key}
-is used by \MakeIndex{} to sort the entry, but the entry actually appearing in
-the index is \opt{visual}. In the \opt{key} part as formatted by
-\pkg{apacite}, all names are in lower case letters and all accents and
-punctuation are removed. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} inserts \emph{two} spaces
-between surname and initials, and to \MakeIndex{}, two spaces are different
-from one space. Spaces between surnames are removed, as well as spaces between
-initials.
-
-The correct author index could also be accomplished by editing the final
-\fname{.and} file, which contains the final formatted author index. However,
-it is more convenient to edit the \fname{.bbl} file, which is usually
-``final'' in a much earlier stage.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Known problems, things to be done, etc.}
-\label{sec:todo}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-With any kind of software, there is usually a list with known problems (bugs)
-and desirable future work (to-do), and \pkg{apacite} is no exception. These
-subjects will be discussed in this section.
-
-A class of problems was already discussed in section~\ref{sec:compat} above.
-This concerns the incompatibility of the \fname{.bib} file with other citation
-styles, through \pkg{apacite}-specific fields, APA-specific contents of
-fields, or through special tricks. These lead to correctly formatted
-references in APA style, but may cause problems with using the \fname{.bib}
-file with other styles (in case APA journals reject your article~\ldots). As
-discussed there, however, this problem is unavoidable and presumably not a
-very big problem to most users.
-
-An incomplete list of other known problems and things that I would
-like to do with \pkg{apacite} is:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Sort entries within a single citation command. The \pkg{natbib}
-      package already offers this option;
-\item Swap (optionally?) the order of closing quotes and various other
-      punctuation marks (\verb+.,;!?+) in a citation, for articles where
-      there is no named author and the title (between quotes) takes the
-      role of the author;
-\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This
-      currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I can
-      think of a better solution.
-\item Add the \fieldname{address} field for \entryname{lecture} entries.
-      In the current version, the address is part of the description of
-      the meeting in the \fieldname{howpublished} field, but it makes
-      sense to disentangle these;
-\item Give explicit support for citation to the Bible and other
-      ``classic'' works and the \emph{DSM};
-\item Give explicit support for music recordings in \entryname{incollection}
-      entries;
-\item Study referencing legal materials (Appendix~D of the APA manual);
-\item Define \BibTeX{} macros or strings for commonly encountered
-      journals (at least the APA journals);
-\item Support \pkg{natbib} citation commands (\cmd{\citet}, \cmd{\citep},
-      etc.);
-\item Improve and extend language support;
-\item Make a \pkg{doc}/\pkg{docstrip} version, so that the whole suite
-      consists of a \fname{.dtx} file containing all code, documentation,
-      and test documents, and a \fname{.ins} file that extracts the various
-      desired files from the \fname{.dtx} file.
-\end{itemize}
-Quite likely, other problems will come up when using the current version of
-\pkg{apacite}, but at least I got it working on the APA manual examples, see
-section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. I have lots of ideas for improvements,
-extensions, options, etc., but not much time to devote to it. Therefore, it is
-difficult to give a good estimate of when I will release a new update.
-However, in the meantime, if you have questions, remarks, suggestions, or bug
-reports, you can e-mail them to me.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Examples of the APA manual}
-\label{sec:xmpl}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-In this section, the \pkg{apacite} package is tested by citing the examples of
-the APA manual (5th ed., pp.~207--281), and some additional references for
-additional purposes.
-
-The following list gives the examples from chapter~3 of the APA manual, with
-section number. For these and all later examples, whenever I thought it
-necessary or desirable, I added some comments. These are indicated by the \EM{}
-symbol. Especially for later examples (from chap.~4), the comments frequently
-pertain to the corresponding reference list entry.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[3.94]  \citeA{3.94-1} compared reaction times\\
-             In a recent study of reaction times \cite{3.94-1}\\
-             In \citeyearNP{3.94-1} \citeauthor{3.94-1} compared
-               reaction times\\
-             In a recent study of reaction times, \citeA{3.94-1}
-             described the method\ldots. \citeauthor{3.94-1} also found
-\item[3.95]  \citeA{3.95-1} found\\
-             \citeA{3.95-1} found\\
-             \citeauthor{3.95-1} found\\
-             \fullcite{3.95-2} and \fullcite{3.95-3}\\
-             \citeA{3.95-2} and \citeA{3.95-3}\\
-             \EM It seems that if ``et al.'' would refer to one additional
-             author, then this author is named instead of the ``et al.''
-             clause.\\
-             \citeA{3.95-4} and \citeA{3.95-5}\\
-             as \citeA{3.95-6} demonstrated\\
-             \EM The comma after ``Nightlinger'' in the reference list
-             does not look right, but is explicitly required by the APA.
-             Of course, with people as authors,
-             one almost always has initials (although I have seen
-             an example of an econometrician who only had
-             one name), so this problem is not likely to occur.
-             With nicknames (``screen names'' as they are called in the
-             APA manual below ex. 85) in messages to newsgroups, initials
-             are typically missing, but then there is usually (always?)
-             only one author, so the problem does not exist either.
-             The problem can, however, come up when there are two authors,
-             the first of which is a corporate author, or with artists,
-             e.g., the song ``Into the Groove'' is written by
-             Madonna and Stephen Bray. (But perhaps the APA would want
-             Madonna to be referred to as ``Ciccone, M.'').\\
-             as has been shown \cite{3.95-7}
-\item[3.96]  \cite{3.96-1}\\
-             \cite{3.96-1}\\
-             \cite{3.96-2}\\
-             \EM For this document, I defined the \cmd{\bibcorporate}
-             macro, which indicates that the author is a corporate
-             author. The way it is used now only has the effect that
-             in the reference list, the name is treated as a whole,
-             and not as a firstname-lastname combination. My idea is
-             to think of a way to define this macro such that it is
-             able to suppress inclusion of the corporate author in the
-             author index, but I have not succeeded in this.
-             Note, however, that this is not part of \pkg{apacite}, but
-             part of the trick box of the user.\\
-             \EM If the \fieldname{firstkey} field is different
-             and the \fieldname{key} field is the same, then, analogous
-             to the use of extra authors in 3.95 above, \pkg{apacite}
-             uses the \fieldname{firstkey} field for all citations:\\
-             \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6};\\
-             \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6}.\\
-             Although this is a constructed example, these organizations
-             really exist. The ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond''
-             is the Royal Dutch Chess Association and the
-             ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond'' is the Royal Dutch
-             Skating Association. Both are abbreviated to KNSB and
-             presumably, both publish an annual report each year.
-\item[3.97]  on free care \cite{3.97-1}\\
-             \EM The order of the
-             closing quotes and the comma is different from the
-             APA manual. I think this one is more logical, although the
-             APA manual's is the conventional one, presumably for
-             aesthetic reasons. I hope to implement this in a future
-             version.\\
-             the book \citeA{3.97-2}\\
-             \cite{3.97-3}\\
-             \EM If two articles both have no author and the title and
-             the year are the same, a's and b's should be used:
-             \citeA{3.97-4}, \citeA{3.97-5}, and \citeA{3.97-6}.
-             The latter two entries are correctly sorted by month,
-             through the way the month macros are defined in
-             \fname{apacitex.bst}.
-\item[3.98]  \citeA{3.98-1} and \citeA{3.98-2} also found\\
-             \citeA{3.98-3} and \citeA{3.98-4} studied
-\item[3.99]  Past research \cite{3.99-1,3.99-2}\\
-             Past research \cite{3.99-3,3.99-4,3.99-5}\\
-             Several studies
-               \cite{3.99-6,3.99-7,3.99-8,3.99-9,3.99-10,3.99-11}\\
-             Several studies \cite{3.99-12,3.99-13,3.99-14}\\
-             \EM \pkg{apacite} does not (yet?) sort the cited
-             references in the text (of course it does for the reference
-             list), as required by the APA manual.\\
-             (\citeNP{3.99-15}; see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})\\
-             \EM Note that I had to use \cmd{\citeNP} here.
-\item[3.100] \cite{3.100-1}\\
-             \EM This is not an example, but a rule in the text.
-             The ``\bibnodate'' is handled by the \cmd{\bibnodate}
-             macro. It is not clear whether it is really meant that the
-             in-text form is \citeauthor{3.100-1}, \citeyearNP{3.100-1}
-             or the more logically consistent \citeA{3.100-1}.
-             The former can (currently) only be accomplished by using
-             \cmd{\citeauthor} and \cmd{\citeyearNP} explicitly,
-             whereas the latter is simply obtained by \cmd{\citeA}.\\
-             \cite{3.100-2}\\
-             \citeA{3.100-3}
-
-             \EM For citations to the bible, I defined a \cmd{\biblecite}
-             command and several obvious variations on it. For example:\\
-             \cmd{\bibleciteA}, first cite:  \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
-             \cmd{\bibleciteA}, second cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
-             \cmd{\biblecite}, first cite: \fullbiblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
-             \cmd{\biblecite}, second cite: \biblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
-             (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, first cite:
-              \fullbibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\
-             (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, second cite:
-              \bibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\
-             \EM Here, there probably should be a comma if it's the first
-             cite and not a comma when it's a later cite. A difficult one.\\
-             \EM Are there other ``classical works'' that should be treated
-             like this? If so, which and how?
-\item[3.101] \cite[p.~332]{3.101-1}\\
-             \cite[chap.~3]{3.101-2}\\
-             \EM If you like, you can use the \pkg{apacite}-defined
-             abbreviation commands \verb+\BPG+ and \verb+\BCHAP+.\\
-             \cite[\P~5]{3.101-3}\\
-             \cite[Conclusion section, para.~1]{3.101-4}
-\item[3.102] \EM Personal communication is not really citation and should
-             be done manually:\\
-             T.~K. Lutes (personal communication, April 18, 2001)\\
-             (V.-G. Nguyen, personal communication, September 28, 1998)
-\item[3.103] \cite<see Table~2 of>[for complete data]{3.103-1}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\noindent
-Chapter~4 of the APA manual deals with the reference list
-and only mentions some in-text citation issues in passing.
-Therefore, the rest mainly requires a lot of moving back and forth
-between the reference list and this part. I start with the
-more ``general'' part, sections 4.01--4.15, presented similar to
-the sections from chapter~3 as presented above.
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[4.04] \EM First, some examples mentioned in the text:\\
-            \citeA{4.04-t1},
-            \citeA{4.04-t2},
-            \citeA{4.04-t3},
-            \citeA{4.04-t4},
-            \citeA{4.04-t5},
-            \citeA{4.04-t6},
-            \citeA{4.04-t7},
-            \citeA{4.04-t8},
-            \citeA{4.04-t9}\\
-            \EM The APA manual states that prefixes must be treated
-            according to the rules of the language of origin. These rules
-            can differ a lot between languages (and countries) and it
-            is impossible to know all these rules. The APA manual gives two
-            examples, one in which ``De Vries'' is treated as the surname,
-            and one in which ``Helmholtz'' is the surname and ``von'' is
-            the ``von'' part of the name.
-
-            In the former case, the author is referred to as, say, ``De Vries
-            (1999)'' in text and ``De Vries, J. (1999).'', alphabetized under
-            ``D'' in the reference list. In the second example, the author is
-            referred to as, say, ``Helmholtz (1870)'' and listed in the
-            reference list as ``Helmholtz, H. L. F. von. (1870).'',
-            alphabetized under ``H''. To get this right, the author must be
-            defined as
-\begin{verbatim}
-  author = {H. L. F. von Helmholtz},
-\end{verbatim}
-            or
-\begin{verbatim}
-  author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.},
-\end{verbatim}
-            then \BibTeX{} will assign the correct parts to the first names,
-            ``von''-part, and last name. The seemingly logical
-\begin{verbatim}
-  author = {Helmholtz, H. L. F. von},
-\end{verbatim}
-            will not be formatted correctly, because ``von'' is now
-            considered to be part of the first names and therefore
-            abbreviated to ``v.''.
-
-            Below, under example B-2, I will further discuss some
-            issues about ``von'' parts.
-
-            \EM The APA manual requires that numerals are alphabetized
-            as if they were spelled out. This is not done by \pkg{apacite},
-            so when applicable should be done by the user, e.g.\ by using
-            the \cmd{\SortNoop} command as defined in
-            \citeA[p.~404]{LaTeXcomp}. I give one fictitious example
-            \cite{4.04-t10}.
-
-            \citeA{4.04-1}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-2}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-3}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-4}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-5}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-6}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-7}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-8}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-9}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-10}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-11}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-12}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-13}\\
-            \citeA{4.04-14}\\
-            \EM I have not (yet?) studied referencing legal materials.
-            In the first version of \pkg{apacite}, I defined a
-            \entryname{literal} type, so that the users can
-            literally format  such entries themselves. However,
-            I think that if you need to refer to legal cases, you
-            can find a way to use the \entryname{misc} type to get
-            it right. I might study this and give examples in a
-            next version of \pkg{apacite}.
-\item[4.05] \citeA{4.05-1}\\
-            \nocitemeta{4.05-2}\citeA{4.05-2}\\
-            \EM Here I used the \cmd{\nocitemeta} command to let
-            \pkg{apacite} know that a meta-analysis is reported and this
-            work is included in it. As you can see, you can still cite
-            the work by using the normal citation commands such as
-            \cmd{\citeA}.
-\item[4.08] \citeA{4.08-1}\\
-            \citeA{4.08-2}\\
-            \citeA{4.08-3}\\
-            \EM I used the \verb+\bibliteral+ construction,
-            which echoes its argument literally, to obtain the
-            ``(with \ldots)'' description in the reference list. However,
-            to \BibTeX{}, this is not a description, but a complicated
-            accented character which is the second initial of the author.
-            Consequently, this does not work properly with styles that put
-            the initials \emph{before} the surnames, and care must be
-            exercised with ``junior'' parts (see ex. 70). Furthermore,
-            this construction must be put between a pair of
-            braces in order for \BibTeX{} to treat it as an accented letter.
-\item[4.09] \citeA{4.09-1}
-\item[4.10] \citeA{4.10-1}\\
-            \citeA{4.10-2}
-\item[4.11] \citeA{4.11-1}\\
-            \citeA{4.11-2}\\
-            \EM Note that in the \fname{.bib} file, the ``junior'' part comes
-            directly after the surname and a comma, with the initials
-            after the ``junior'' part, whereas in the formatted
-            reference list, the more logical order \opt{surname},
-            \opt{initials}, \opt{junior}, is used.
-\item[4.12] \citeA{4.12-1}
-\item[4.13] \citeA{4.13-1}\\
-            \EM ``For substantial reference works with a large editorial
-            board, naming the lead editor followed by \texttt{et al.} is
-            acceptable''. This is now implemented in \pkg{apacite} as
-            follows: If there are 7 or more editors, only the first one
-            is named, followed by ``et al.'' \cite{4.13-2}.\\
-\item[4.15] \citeA{4.15-1}\\
-            \EM I used the \cmd{\url} command from the \pkg{url}
-            package to format internet addresses. This command, however,
-            breaks addresses at different positions than the APA requires
-            (in particular, \emph{after} a dot and \emph{before} the
-            double slashes). Furthermore, I used a construction
-            through a \verb+\bibnodot{.}+ expression, which swallows
-            the dot, to prevent \BibTeX{} from adding a period
-            after the internet address.\\
-            \citeA{4.15-2}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\noindent
-The rest is from section 4.16, the examples section. The section number
-is omitted, but A--I are used instead for the unnumbered examples. For
-the numbered examples, only the number is given.
-
-The following enumerated list gives the example number, and
-the two basic in-text citation commands, both in a full and
-short form, of the examples.
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item[A-1] \cite{A-1}  \\ \cite{A-1} \\ \fullciteA{A-1} \\ \citeA{A-1}
-\item \cite{ex1}  \\ \cite{ex1} \\ \fullciteA{ex1} \\ \citeA{ex1}
-\item \cite{ex2}  \\ \cite{ex2} \\ \fullciteA{ex2} \\ \citeA{ex2}
-\item \cite{ex3}  \\ \cite{ex3} \\ \fullciteA{ex3} \\ \citeA{ex3}
-\item \cite{ex4}  \\ \cite{ex4} \\ \fullciteA{ex4} \\ \citeA{ex4}\\
-      \cite{ex4-2} \\ \cite{ex4-2} \\ \fullciteA{ex4-2} \\ \citeA{ex4-2}\\
-      \EM Note that the list of authors can be finished with
-      ``\verb+and others+'' if there are more than 6 authors, or
-      all authors can be given, in which case \pkg{apacite} truncates
-      the list after the first 6. For compatibility with other styles,
-      the latter is preferable.
-\item \cite{ex5}  \\ \cite{ex5} \\ \fullciteA{ex5} \\ \citeA{ex5}
-\item \cite{ex6}  \\ \cite{ex6} \\ \fullciteA{ex6} \\ \citeA{ex6}
-\item \cite{ex7}  \\ \cite{ex7} \\ \fullciteA{ex7} \\ \citeA{ex7}\\
-      \EM Here, I used
-\begin{verbatim}
-  month = {Spring},
-\end{verbatim}
-      which is perfectly fine to \BibTeX{}.
-\item \cite{ex8}  \\ \cite{ex8} \\ \fullciteA{ex8} \\ \citeA{ex8}\\
-      \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the
-      following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.
-\item \cite{ex9}  \\ \cite{ex9} \\ \fullciteA{ex9} \\ \citeA{ex9}\\
-      \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the
-      following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.
-\item \cite{ex10} \\ \cite{ex10}\\ \fullciteA{ex10}\\ \citeA{ex10}
-\item \cite{ex11} \\ \cite{ex11}\\ \fullciteA{ex11}\\ \citeA{ex11}\\
-      \EM Apparently, a weekly newspaper is not a magazine and should
-      therefore include ``p.'' or ``pp.'' in front of the page
-      number(s), whereas a magazine article should not. I do not
-      understand the distinction very well and find it not very
-      useful as well, but will adhere to it. It means that the
-      \entryname{newspaper} type gets the ``pp.'', whereas
-      \entryname{magazine} and \entryname{article}, which are now
-      identical, do not.
-\item \cite{ex12} \\ \cite{ex12}\\ \fullciteA{ex12}\\ \citeA{ex12}\\
-      \EM Here, \verb+\emph{DSM-IV}+ must be entered without an extra
-      pair of braces in the title field, see ex.~73 for the intricacies
-      of braces and \verb+\emph+ in the title field.
-\item \cite{ex13} \\ \cite{ex13}\\ \fullciteA{ex13}\\ \citeA{ex13}
-\item \cite{ex14} \\ \cite{ex14}\\ \fullciteA{ex14}\\ \citeA{ex14}
-\item \cite{ex15} \\ \cite{ex15}\\ \fullciteA{ex15}\\ \citeA{ex15}
-\item \cite{ex16} \\ \cite{ex16}\\ \fullciteA{ex16}\\ \citeA{ex16}
-\item \cite{ex17} \\ \cite{ex17}\\ \fullciteA{ex17}\\ \citeA{ex17}\\
-      \EM This case is the opposite of the more common situation where a
-      reprint is cited and an original publication year is given. I could
-      implement similar code to handle this case (and I may if I get requests
-      to do this), but for the moment, I decided to trick the system: I
-      defined a macro \cmd{\bibreftext} which must be called with two
-      arguments. Initially, it places the second argument in the text, but
-      just before the bibliography, its definition is changed so that the
-      first argument is placed in the reference list. By defining
-\begin{verbatim}
-  year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-      in the \fname{.bib} file, the year is ``1992'' in the reference
-      list and ``1992/1993'' in the text citations. The \cmd{\protect}
-      is necessary to make sure that the \cmd{\bibreftext} macro is not
-      written out in the label-part of the bibliography, because then
-      only ``1992'' would appear in the text reference. The additional
-      pair of braces are necessary to make sure that the entry
-      is alphabetized correctly. When these are omitted, the entry
-      is alphabetized under the ``P'' of ``protect''. Of course, the
-      latter is only important if the reference list contains
-      multiple works by the same author(s), but the same phenomenon
-      is encountered when the \fieldname{author} or \fieldname{editor}
-      field starts with a command, or when there is no author or editor
-      and the \fieldname{title} field starts with a command, as in
-      the entry \citeA{4.04-t10} introduced in 4.04 above.
-
-      Of course, you can save yourself a lot of trouble by
-      obtaining the original article and citing that.
-\item \cite{ex18} \\ \cite{ex18}\\ \fullciteA{ex18}\\ \citeA{ex18}
-\item \cite{ex19} \\ \cite{ex19}\\ \fullciteA{ex19}\\ \citeA{ex19}
-\item \cite{ex20} \\ \cite{ex20}\\ \fullciteA{ex20}\\ \citeA{ex20}
-\item \cite{ex21} \\ \cite{ex21}\\ \fullciteA{ex21}\\ \citeA{ex21}\\
-      \EM Apparently, a translator and original publication date
-      do not have to be mentioned here.
-\item Seidenberg and McClelland's study \cite<as cited in>{ex22}\\
-      %\cite{ex22} \\ \cite{ex22}\\ \fullciteA{ex22}\\ \citeA{ex22}
-\item[B-1] \cite{B-1}  \\ \cite{B-1} \\ \fullciteA{B-1} \\ \citeA{B-1}
-\item \cite{ex23} \\ \cite{ex23}\\ \fullciteA{ex23}\\ \citeA{ex23}
-\item \cite{ex24} \\ \cite{ex24}\\ \fullciteA{ex24}\\ \citeA{ex24}\\
-      \EM The APA manual gives a number, which would not ordinarily be
-      done with proper books and which suggests that it could also
-      be treated as a report. In that case, the default ``Tech. Rep.''
-      description should be left out, however. This can be accomplished
-      by defining
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {\bibnotype},
-\end{verbatim}
-      which flags that the type must be left out, see example 42.
-      However, for books, it now works fine leaving the \fieldname{type}
-      field empty and giving the number in the \fieldname{number} field.
-\item \cite{ex25} \\ \cite{ex25}\\ \fullciteA{ex25}\\ \citeA{ex25}\\
-      \EM According to the note after ex.~25 in the APA manual,
-      an edited book with ``just one'' author should list
-      the editor (and translator, when available) after the
-      title, just like the translator. An example of this is
-      \citeA{ex25-t1}. (Should the original years of publication
-      be used here?)
-
-      However, what does ``just one author'' mean here? Does it mean that if
-      there are 2 authors and 1 or more editors, the editors should
-      not be mentioned, or the authors should not be mentioned?
-      Presumably, it means the following:
-      In the default case, an edited book consists of several chapters,
-      with different chapters written by different authors. In this case,
-      the reference to the whole book lists only the editor(s).
-      If every chapter is written by the same author, and there are 1
-      or more editors, their condition holds. I think that if all
-      chapters are written by the same $n$ ($\geq 2$) authors, it should
-      also be treated in this way, i.e., with the authors in the
-      author position and the editor behind the title. A difficult
-      case would appear if the book were a collection of works of, say,
-      2 authors, with some chapters written by one and some by the
-      other, and some jointly, as in \citeA{ex25-t2}. These choices have
-      to be made by the user, however, \pkg{apacite} will format author,
-      editor, and translator, whenever available.
-\item \cite{ex26} \\ \cite{ex26}\\ \fullciteA{ex26}\\ \citeA{ex26}\\
-      \EM According to section~3.97, the title should be in italics.
-      In this example, in the citation, it is not given in italics,
-      but this must be an error, because they do give it in italics
-      on p.~219 (but give no date there).
-\item \cite{ex27} \\ \cite{ex27}\\ \fullciteA{ex27}\\ \citeA{ex27}
-\item \cite{ex28} \\ \cite{ex28}\\ \fullciteA{ex28}\\ \citeA{ex28}
-\item \EM I defined a \verb+\DSMcite+ macro and some related
-      alternatives to get the \emph{DSM} references right:\\
-      \cmd{\DSMcite}, first citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\
-      \cmd{\DSMcite}, second citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\
-      \cmd{\DSMciteA}, first citation: \DSMfullciteA{ex29} \\
-      \cmd{\DSMciteA}, second citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\
-      \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, first citation: \DSMfullciteNP{ex29} \\
-      \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, second citation: \DSMciteNP{ex29} \\
-      \EM Actually, these macros are not related to the \emph{DSM} at all,
-      except that they are defined to handle these. These macros
-      act as a normal citation the first time a \emph{DSM} is
-      referenced and all subsequent times as a suitably formatted
-      \cmd{\citeauthor}. So the only difference with ordinary
-      citations is that the year is left out the second and later
-      times. By defining
-\begin{verbatim}
-  firstkey  = {{American Psychiatric Association}},
-  key       = {{\APACcitebtitle{DSM-IV}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-      using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro introduced before,
-      the \emph{DSM} citations are correctly formatted.
-      However, the \cmd{\DSM*} macros are still very rough. Multiple
-      citations are not handled well, so only one work should
-      be cited with such a macro. Furthermore, the pre- and
-      postfixes (through \verb+<...>+ and \verb+[...]+) are not
-      available.
-
-      \EM The following two are for testing the ordering (sorting)
-      in \BibTeX{} and \MakeIndex{} \cite{ex29-2,ex29-3}.
-
-\item \cite{ex30} \\ \cite{ex30}\\ \fullciteA{ex30}\\ \citeA{ex30}\\
-      \EM Here, ``6th ed.'' comes before ``Vols.\ 1--20'', so it is
-      Vols.\ 1--20 of the 6th edition. \pkg{apacite} now uses this
-      order. Pre-[2003/09/05] versions placed volumes before editions,
-      which is appropriate when different volumes of a series
-      are not updated jointly, so that you may have the 3rd edition
-      of Vol.~2, but only the 1st edition of Vol.~6. Should you
-      want this, you have to trick the system by putting both
-      elements in the \fieldname{edition} field:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  edition = {\BVOLS\ 1--20, 6th},
-\end{verbatim}
-      and leaving the \fieldname{volume} field empty.\\
-      \EM Does the remark about large editorial boards mean that the
-      APA intended to add ``et al.'' here? Anyway, here is an example
-      of such a situation: \citeA{ex30-2}.
-\item \cite{ex31} \\ \cite{ex31}\\ \fullciteA{ex31}\\ \citeA{ex31}
-\item \cite{ex32} \\ \cite{ex32}\\ \fullciteA{ex32}\\ \citeA{ex32}
-\item \cite{ex33} \\ \cite{ex33}\\ \fullciteA{ex33}\\ \citeA{ex33}
-\item[B-2] \cite{B-2} \\ \cite{B-2} \\ \fullciteA{B-2} \\ \citeA{B-2} \\
-      \EM This is a suitable point to discuss ``von'' parts further.
-      One of the editors in the current example is called
-      P. van den Broek. I am Dutch and I recognize this as a Dutch
-      name, so let's assume that this person is Dutch. Let us now
-      consider the situation that this person is the (only) author.
-      Then according to the Dutch rules, this person would be listed in the
-      reference list as ``Broek, P. van den. (1992)'' and listed under ``B'',
-      but referred to in the text as ``Van den Broek (1992)'', including
-      the ``von'' part and capitalizing the first letter. When an
-      initial precedes the ``von'' part (e.g., when there are two
-      primary authors with this surname, but with different initials),
-      then this person would be referred to in the text as
-      ``P. van den Broek (1992)'', including the ``von'' part, but now
-      in lower case. The Dutch rules are very difficult to do right in
-      \BibTeX{}/\LaTeX{} and they conflict with the rules for other
-      languages, and presumably with the rules of the APA, which would
-      require this person to be alphabetized under ``V'', at least.
-
-      For the current editor position, there is no big problem with
-      the APA rules. The ``von'' part can really be put in the ``von''
-      part as recognized by \BibTeX{}, which I did, or it can be enclosed
-      in braces, making the whole last name one part. Either will come
-      out right and the editor will not be referred to in the text
-      anyway. With styles that put the initials behind the surname,
-      it will only work right when put in the ``von'' part. In the
-      author position, however, things are different. Then this author
-      could be formatted as
-\begin{verbatim}
-  author = {Van {\lowercase{D}}en Broek, P.},
-\end{verbatim}
-      where the \verb+{\lowercase{D}}+ construction is used to prevent
-      \BibTeX{} from interpreting it as a ``von'' part, or
-\begin{verbatim}
-  author = {Van{\ }den{\ }Broek, P.},
-  author = {{Van den Broek}, P.},
-\end{verbatim}
-      which in most situations gives the correct version according to the
-      Dutch rules with the correct alphabetizing according to the APA
-      rules. Only in situations when the initial would appear
-      \emph{before} the surname (when there are other authors with the
-      same surname or when using other styles), this would lead to
-      unwanted results.
-
-      If you really want to alphabetize according to the Dutch rules
-      (which is \emph{not} APA in my interpretation), you can use the
-      following trick. Define a macro \verb+\Dutchvon+ with
-      two arguments which is equivalent to the \verb+\bibreftext+
-      macro discussed in ex.~17 above. That is, in the beginning
-      of the document, it is defined as echoing its second argument,
-      and just before the reference list, it is redefined to echo
-      its first argument. Then define the author as
-\begin{verbatim}
-  author = {van den {\protect\Dutchvon{Broek}{Van den Broek}}, P.},
-\end{verbatim}
-      which, combined with the \pkg{apacite} formatting implies
-      that in text, ``Van den Broek'' is used, whereas the author
-      is alphabetized under ``B'' in the reference list, and listed
-      as ``Broek, P. van den''. Of course, we could simply have
-      used \verb+\bibreftext+ again, but that was used to cover a
-      completely different situation, and I can easily imagine that
-      when switching to another citation style, the former application
-      (i.e., 1992/1993) must be kept, but the ``von'' part is handled
-      differently, so that \verb+\Dutchvon+ must be redefined.
-      Based on this example, users should be able to define their
-      own tricks for similar peculiarities.
-
-      Finally, note that in Belgium, where many people
-      speak Dutch as well, it is customary to alphabetize under ``V''
-      anyway (``Van Damme'').
-\item \cite{ex34} \\ \cite{ex34}\\ \fullciteA{ex34}\\ \citeA{ex34}
-\item \cite{ex35} \\ \cite{ex35}\\ \fullciteA{ex35}\\ \citeA{ex35}
-\item \cite{ex36} \\ \cite{ex36}\\ \fullciteA{ex36}\\ \citeA{ex36}\\
-      \EM I had to use some tricks to get the Series and Volume Editors'
-      descriptions right. The ``(Series Ed.)'' is according to
-      \BibTeX{} part of the last name of the first editor,
-      and I used a \verb+\bibeditortype+ macro to get the volume
-      editor right. The \verb+\bibeditortype+ macro has one argument.
-      The macro changes the definitions of the macros \verb+\BED+ and
-      \verb+\BEDS+ to the argument and then immediately changes the
-      definitions back to their old definitions. So it makes a one-time
-      change.
-
-      It seems to me that only mentioning the
-      volume editor as ``editor'' would be sufficient, but the APA
-      requires both. It raises the question when series editors
-      should be mentioned: only if the specific volume in the
-      series is itself an edited work (as with this handbook),
-      or also with books that are published in a series. Many books
-      are published in some series, with one or more series editors
-      and I have never seen any mentioning of the series editors of
-      such books, but it is not clear to me when this should be done
-      then.
-\item \cite{ex37} \\ \cite{ex37}\\ \fullciteA{ex37}\\ \citeA{ex37}
-\item \cite{ex38} \\ \cite{ex38}\\ \fullciteA{ex38}\\ \citeA{ex38}
-\item \cite{ex39} \\ \cite{ex39}\\ \fullciteA{ex39}\\ \citeA{ex39}\\
-      \EM Here, it is stated that the translator's name should be put
-      after the editor's name when both are different, but in example
-      40, the translators are put after the title, before the editors.
-      Apparently, if the book is a collection of works by one
-      author(-group), edited and translated, then the translator
-      should come after the editor, but if different chapters
-      are translated by different translators, or perhaps not all
-      are translated works, then the translator should come after
-      the title. Of course, \pkg{apacite} has no way of knowing this.
-      In the current implementation, for an \entryname{incollection},
-      if the editor and translator are the same, they are formatted as
-      in this example, whereas if they are different, they are treated
-      as in example 40 below. I think this will be satisfactory in
-      most cases. If you really want the translator after the editor
-      when they are different, you can trick the system in a way
-      similar to example 36.
-\item \cite{ex40} \\ \cite{ex40}\\ \fullciteA{ex40}\\ \citeA{ex40}\\
-      \EM See my comments to example 39 above.
-\item[C-1] \cite{C-1}  \\ \cite{C-1} \\ \fullciteA{C-1} \\ \citeA{C-1}
-\item \cite{ex41} \\ \cite{ex41}\\ \fullciteA{ex41}\\ \citeA{ex41}
-\item \cite{ex42} \\ \cite{ex42}\\ \fullciteA{ex42}\\ \citeA{ex42}\\
-      \EM I used the \cmd{\bibnotype} construction discussed
-      in example~24 to suppress the default ``(Tech.\ Rep.{})''
-      description. Actually, I don't think there is anything wrong with
-      calling a report a report, be it ``technical'' by default, or by
-      specifying
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {Report},
-\end{verbatim}
-      except that it's not done so in this specific example in the
-      APA manual. But there does not seem to be a rule against it.
-\item \cite{ex43} \\ \cite{ex43}\\ \fullciteA{ex43}\\ \citeA{ex43}
-\item \cite{ex44} \\ \cite{ex44}\\ \fullciteA{ex44}\\ \citeA{ex44}
-\item \cite{ex45} \\ \cite{ex45}\\ \fullciteA{ex45}\\ \citeA{ex45}
-\item \cite{ex46} \\ \cite{ex46}\\ \fullciteA{ex46}\\ \citeA{ex46}\\
-      \EM Note that in the example in the APA manual, ``Western Australia''
-      \emph{is} mentioned in the publisher location, whereas their rule
-      explicitly states that this should not be the case in this
-      situation, and they stress that again below the example.
-      Therefore, I did not mention ``Western Australia'' in the
-      \fieldname{publisher} field.
-\item \cite{ex47} \\ \cite{ex47}\\ \fullciteA{ex47}\\ \citeA{ex47}
-\item \cite{ex48} \\ \cite{ex48}\\ \fullciteA{ex48}\\ \citeA{ex48}
-\item \cite{ex49} \\ \cite{ex49}\\ \fullciteA{ex49}\\ \citeA{ex49}
-\item \cite{ex50} \\ \cite{ex50}\\ \fullciteA{ex50}\\ \citeA{ex50}
-\item \cite{ex51} \\ \cite{ex51}\\ \fullciteA{ex51}\\ \citeA{ex51}
-\item \cite{ex52} \\ \cite{ex52}\\ \fullciteA{ex52}\\ \citeA{ex52}
-\item \cite{ex53} \\ \cite{ex53}\\ \fullciteA{ex53}\\ \citeA{ex53}
-\item \cite{ex54} \\ \cite{ex54}\\ \fullciteA{ex54}\\ \citeA{ex54}
-\item \cite{ex55} \\ \cite{ex55}\\ \fullciteA{ex55}\\ \citeA{ex55}\\
-      \EM It seems logical to suppress the original year if it's the
-      same as the year of the abstract.
-
-      \EM According to example 54 and the text below it, an ``A''
-      or ``B'' should be added to the volume number of \emph{DAI}
-      of this entry, presumably an ``A'', but because they did not
-      give one, I left it out as well.
-\item \cite{ex56} \\ \cite{ex56}\\ \fullciteA{ex56}\\ \citeA{ex56}
-\item \cite{ex57} \\ \cite{ex57}\\ \fullciteA{ex57}\\ \citeA{ex57}
-\item \cite{ex58} \\ \cite{ex58}\\ \fullciteA{ex58}\\ \citeA{ex58}
-\item \cite{ex59} \\ \cite{ex59}\\ \fullciteA{ex59}\\ \citeA{ex59}
-\item \cite{ex60} \\ \cite{ex60}\\ \fullciteA{ex60}\\ \citeA{ex60}
-\item \cite{ex61} \\ \cite{ex61}\\ \fullciteA{ex61}\\ \citeA{ex61}\\
-      \EM The description of the data goes into the
-      \fieldname{type} field. It may be more logical to put it
-      in the \fieldname{title} field, with some trickery to indicate
-      that it's a description and not a title, but putting it in the
-      \fieldname{type} field already ensures that it's formatted
-      correctly, so I think I'm gonna be lazy on this one. The same
-      applies more or less to reviews (G-1, 63, 64), although there
-      it is logical to put at least ``Review'' in the \fieldname{type}
-      field, so as we're already there, we might as well make it
-      complete.
-\item \cite{ex62} \\ \cite{ex62}\\ \fullciteA{ex62}\\ \citeA{ex62}
-\item[G-1] \cite{G-1}  \\ \cite{G-1} \\ \fullciteA{G-1} \\ \citeA{G-1}\\
-      \EM See my comments to example 61 above about the logic of the
-      \fieldname{type} field. For a review, the \fieldname{type}
-      field must contain the message that it is a review of a
-      \emph{book} (or motion picture, or whatever it is a review of)
-      and give the title of the reviewed work in italics, which must
-      be manually formatted, e.g., by using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle}
-      macro. The author of the reviewed work should apparently not be
-      mentioned.
-\item \cite{ex63} \\ \cite{ex63}\\ \fullciteA{ex63}\\ \citeA{ex63}
-\item \cite{ex64} \\ \cite{ex64}\\ \fullciteA{ex64}\\ \citeA{ex64}
-\item \EM The rules for movies, television series, etc.\ do not appeal
-      very much to me, although they are not nearly as bad as those
-      for music recordings (ex.~69 and further, see below). My
-      primary objection is that when referring to movies and TV series,
-      the title is the most important characteristic. The director
-      may be a good second in some cases, but producers and writers are
-      almost always unknown to the general public and not relevant
-      when referring to them. You talk about the movie \emph{Jaws}
-      and not about Spielberg (1975) or whoever wrote the script.
-      Recognizing the primary creative input or authorship may be
-      politically correct, but not particularly informative.
-      However, you may think that my objections are mainly
-      driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries
-      in \BibTeX{}. Anyway, here are my attempts to implement
-      the APA rules.\\
-      \cite{ex65-1} \\ \cite{ex65-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-1}\\ \citeA{ex65-1} \\
-      \cite{ex65-2} \\ \cite{ex65-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-2}\\ \citeA{ex65-2} \\
-      \EM Note that this and the following ``Available from'' must be between
-      parentheses (accomplished by putting it in the \fieldname{note} field),
-      whereas ``Available from'' some web site must not be between
-      parentheses, cf.\ ex.~95 (accomplished by putting it in the
-      \fieldname{howpublished} field).
-
-      \EM Here I also used the \cmd{\bibliteral} construction again, which
-      was introduced in my discussion of 4.08 above.
-      Furthermore, I used the \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}
-      macro, which suppresses the period after the closing
-      brace after ``(Producer)''.\\
-      \cite{ex65-3} \\ \cite{ex65-3}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-3}\\ \citeA{ex65-3}\\
-      \EM Here, I simply let ``(Producer)'' be part of the author name,
-      but because of this addendum, the entry is not sorted correctly
-      in the reference list: It should be before \citeA{APAManual},
-      but because of the addendum, the authors are different to \BibTeX{}
-      and this one comes after \citeA{APAManual}. I don't see an easy
-      solution to this (presumably extremely rare) problem. Therefore,
-      in such a case, the \fname{.bbl} file should be edited manually.
-\item \cite{ex66} \\ \cite{ex66}\\ \fullciteA{ex66}\\ \citeA{ex66} \\
-      \EM Here, I used the same tricks as in example 65.
-\item \cite{ex67} \\ \cite{ex67}\\ \fullciteA{ex67}\\ \citeA{ex67} \\
-      \EM I used several tricks introduced before: the \cmd{\bibeditortype}
-      (cf.\ ex.~36) construction to be able to use ``(Producer)'' in
-      the editor position instead of  ``(Ed.)'', and the ones used
-      in the previous examples. Because there is another Miller as well,
-      the initial is given here. To make sure that \BibTeX{} thinks
-      that there is only one initial, but the ``(Producer)'' is formatted
-      correctly, the name is defined as follows:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  editor = {Miller, {\bibliteral{R\protect\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-      It is then formatted correctly both in the text and in the reference
-      list if \cmd{\bibeditortype} is defined to swallow its argument
-      in the text, and redefined prior to the bibliography. After the
-      bibliography (before the index), it has to be redefined again
-      to swallow its argument. However, it leads to two different entries
-      in the author index, so if you're requesting an author index,
-      you still have to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually, as with
-      all such types of ``authors'' or ``editors''.
-\item \cite{ex68} \\ \cite{ex68}\\ \fullciteA{ex68}\\ \citeA{ex68}\\
-      \EM Again, I used several tricks that were also used in the previous
-      examples.
-\item \EM The rules for music recordings do not make any sense, and they
-      are not entirely clear as well. It would seem to me that
-      most pop, rock, and other ``light'' music songs are almost always
-      attributed to the performing artist. You can usually read who the
-      composer and lyricist of the song are on the inlay-details
-      of the CD, but if you want the reader to refer to ``My Way'',
-      the reader will easier find it (in a CD store or on the
-      internet, for example) under ``Frank Sinatra'' than under
-      the composer's name (whoever that may be). Furthermore, the
-      year of release of the CD (or other medium) seems more relevant
-      in referring to the CD than the year of copyright of the
-      specific song, or the recording date.
-
-      For classical music, things are different. Then, the writer (composer)
-      is usually more important than the performing artist, although
-      the percentage of people who know who wrote the lyrics for
-      Mozart's operas may not be high. Furthermore, it may be
-      time-consuming and not very relevant for most authors and
-      readers to find the year in which a certain piece was written,
-      although strictly speaking, we should use the ``date of copyright'',
-      which is not relevant for a lot of classical music.
-
-      However, when referring to Beethoven's 9th symphony, say, it will
-      typically not be very informative to refer to a specific recording on a
-      specific CD, unless that specific recording is the subject of interest,
-      but then it would seem that the ``performing artist'' (conductor or
-      orchestra) should take the role of ``author''. For example, when
-      comparing a performance of this symphony conducted in 1975 by Masur with
-      a performance of this symphony conducted in 1990 by Bernstein (assuming
-      this exists), it does not seem logical to compare ``9th Symphony''
-      (Beethoven, 1823a, tracks~1--4) with ``9th Symphony'' (Beethoven, 1823b,
-      tracks~1--4), but more logical to compare Masur (1975) with
-      Bernstein (1990).
-
-      Finally, it seems a bit strange that the track number should be
-      mentioned in text, but not in the reference list.
-
-      Again, you may think that my objections are mainly
-      driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries
-      in \BibTeX{}. Nevertheless, here are my attempts to implement
-      the APA rules.\\
-      \begin{tabular}{ll}
-      \verb+\citeAsong+:  & \citeAsong{ex69-1} \\
-      \verb+\citesong+:   & \citesong{ex69-1}  \\
-      \verb+\citesongNP+: & \citesongNP{ex69-1}\\
-      \verb+\citeAsong+:  & \citeAsong{ex69-2} \\
-      \verb+\citesong+:   & \citesong{ex69-2}  \\
-      \verb+\citesongNP+: & \citesongNP{ex69-2}
-      \end{tabular}\\
-      \EM I defined and used several macros, i.e., \verb+\citesong+
-      and some variations. These cite a song as required by the APA
-      (except for the relative placement of closing quotes and comma).
-      For that, the \fieldname{key} field (and possibly \fieldname{firstkey})
-      should contain the relevant information in the form of a protected
-      \verb+\bibsong+ command:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-      Furthermore, I used some tricks to get the reference list
-      entry right. I used the \entryname{incollection} type as
-      a basis, with the CD title in the \fieldname{booktitle} field.
-      At first sight, it seems natural to define
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {CD},
-\end{verbatim}
-      but with an \entryname{incollection}, the \fieldname{type}
-      field is put after the title, not after the book title.
-      I plan to change this for music-types (CD, record, etc.),
-      but this is currently not yet implemented. This means that the
-      ``[CD]'' description must be put in the \fieldname{booktitle}
-      field, after the CD title and with explicit formatting
-      commands:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
-\end{verbatim}
-      On the other hand, we can now use the \fieldname{type}
-      field to put the recording artists in for the second example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett},
-\end{verbatim}
-      We have to change the ``In'' string to ``On''
-      (``In'' a book versus ``On'' a CD). This is done with a
-      macro similar to the \verb+\bibeditortype+ macro discussed
-      in example 36. In this case, the macro is \verb+\bibInstring+,
-      which has one argument. The macro changes the definition of
-      the macro \verb+\BIn+ to the argument and then immediately changes
-      the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time
-      change. Of course, the \verb+\bibInstring+ macro only works
-      if it is executed \emph{before} the \verb+\BIn+ macro. The latter
-      macro comes before the \fieldname{booktitle}, so
-      \verb+\bibInstring+ must be added to a field that comes before
-      that. I put it in the \fieldname{title} field:
-\begin{verbatim}
-  title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
-\end{verbatim}
-      where \verb+\BOn+ is defined by default as ``\BOn''.
-      Finally, the recording date of the second example (1990) must
-      be put in the \fieldname{note} field.
-
-      Note that this is all trickery within the \LaTeX{} domain
-      and the \fname{.bib} file, i.e., the user-definable and
-      user-customizable area.
-\item \cite{ex70} \\ \cite{ex70}\\ \fullciteA{ex70}\\ \citeA{ex70}
-\item \cite{ex71-1} \\ \cite{ex71-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-1}\\ \citeA{ex71-1} \\
-      \cite{ex71-2} \\ \cite{ex71-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-2}\\ \citeA{ex71-2} \\
-      \EM Here and in almost all remaining examples, the
-      ``Retrieved \ldots'' message must be put in the
-      \fieldname{howpublished} field if it refers to an internet
-      address or aggregated database. See the discussion of 4.15
-      above for the use of \verb+\url+ and \verb+\bibnodot{.}+.
-\item \cite{ex72} \\ \cite{ex72}\\ \fullciteA{ex72}\\ \citeA{ex72}
-\item \cite{ex73} \\ \cite{ex73}\\ \fullciteA{ex73}\\ \citeA{ex73} \\
-      \EM Note that the APA manual breaks a line \emph{after} a
-      period instead of before. I take it that it's not very
-      detrimental to use slightly different line breaking through
-      the \pkg{url} package. Furthermore, the APA manual uses a
-      typeface in which `1' (one) and `l' (ell) are not distinguishable.
-      This requires some guessing of the correct url's. I think that this
-      conflicts with their own stress on accuracy w.r.t.\ url's.
-
-      \EM Note the subtle use of braces to get \emph{Homo sapiens}
-      correctly formatted: The capital in \verb+\emph{Homo}+
-      is retained by \BibTeX{}, whereas the capital in
-      \verb+{\emph{Sapiens}}+ is changed into a lower case letter
-      by \BibTeX{}, because of the extra pair of braces.
-\item \cite{ex74} \\ \cite{ex74}\\ \fullciteA{ex74}\\ \citeA{ex74}\\
-      \EM As mentioned in section~\ref{sec:compat-backref}, I had
-      to use some nasty code in the current document to have the
-      bibliography entry of this reference formatted correctly
-      when \pkg{backref} is loaded.
-\item \cite{ex75} \\ \cite{ex75}\\ \fullciteA{ex75}\\ \citeA{ex75}
-\item \cite{ex76} \\ \cite{ex76}\\ \fullciteA{ex76}\\ \citeA{ex76}
-\item \cite{ex77} \\ \cite{ex77}\\ \fullciteA{ex77}\\ \citeA{ex77}
-\item \cite{ex78} \\ \cite{ex78}\\ \fullciteA{ex78}\\ \citeA{ex78}
-\item \cite{ex79} \\ \cite{ex79}\\ \fullciteA{ex79}\\ \citeA{ex79}
-\item \cite{ex80} \\ \cite{ex80}\\ \fullciteA{ex80}\\ \citeA{ex80}
-\item \cite{ex81} \\ \cite{ex81}\\ \fullciteA{ex81}\\ \citeA{ex81}
-\item \cite{ex82} \\ \cite{ex82}\\ \fullciteA{ex82}\\ \citeA{ex82}
-\item \cite{ex83} \\ \cite{ex83}\\ \fullciteA{ex83}\\ \citeA{ex83} \\
-      \EM Here and in the next example, both ``Paper presented \ldots''
-      and ``Retrieved \ldots'' must be put in a single
-      \fieldname{howpublished} field.
-\item \cite{ex84} \\ \cite{ex84}\\ \fullciteA{ex84}\\ \citeA{ex84}
-\item \cite{ex85} \\ \cite{ex85}\\ \fullciteA{ex85}\\ \citeA{ex85} \\
-      \EM When referring to a message to a newsgroup, internet forum, etc.,
-      use the \entryname{misc} type. Then define
-\begin{verbatim}
-  type = {\bibmessage},
-\end{verbatim}
-      and use the \fieldname{number} field when relevant. Furthermore,
-      you should include a description like ``Message posted to ... ''
-      in the \fieldname{howpublished} field.  Then the entry is formatted
-      correctly: If the message has a number, say 1, it reverts to
-      ``\verb+[\bibmessage\ 1]+'', i.e., ``[Msg\ 1]'' with the default
-      definition of \cmd{\bibmessage}. If there is no number, the
-      type identifier is omitted (because it must be mentioned in the
-      \fieldname{howpublished} field anyway). In both cases,
-      however, the title is formatted as an article title, i.e., not
-      italicized.
-\item \cite{ex86} \\ \cite{ex86}\\ \fullciteA{ex86}\\ \citeA{ex86}
-\item \cite{ex87} \\ \cite{ex87}\\ \fullciteA{ex87}\\ \citeA{ex87}
-\item \cite{ex88} \\ \cite{ex88}\\ \fullciteA{ex88}\\ \citeA{ex88}
-\item \cite{ex89} \\ \cite{ex89}\\ \fullciteA{ex89}\\ \citeA{ex89}
-\item \cite{ex90} \\ \cite{ex90}\\ \fullciteA{ex90}\\ \citeA{ex90} \\
-      \EM Here, ``de Ridder'' may well be a Dutch name. If the APA
-      manual is serious about its rule to format names as they
-      should according to the rule of the country of origin,
-      this name should then be formatted as ``De Ridder''.
-\item \cite{ex91} \\ \cite{ex91}\\ \fullciteA{ex91}\\ \citeA{ex91}
-\item \cite{ex92} \\ \cite{ex92}\\ \fullciteA{ex92}\\ \citeA{ex92}
-\item \cite{ex93} \\ \cite{ex93}\\ \fullciteA{ex93}\\ \citeA{ex93}\\
-      \EM Strangely enough, the APA apparently does not find it necessary
-      to give a retrieval date or more exact publication date for
-      downloaded software, whereas it does require a retrieval date
-      for downloaded papers.
-\item \cite{ex94} \\ \cite{ex94}\\ \fullciteA{ex94}\\ \citeA{ex94}\\
-      \EM The example in the APA manual does not list a date, not even
-      a ``n.d.''. Given the logic of the APA manual, this seems an error
-      to me, so I added a ``\verb+\bibnodate+'' in the \fieldname{year}
-      field, which becomes ``\bibnodate'' in the output. If it would
-      really be the rule to omit the year, then it is not clear when
-      a year must be omitted and when not, or replaced by ``n.d.''.
-      Furthermore, formatting in both the \fname{.sty} file and
-      the \fname{.bst} file would have to be adapted to anticipate
-      a missing year. Currently, I assume that there should always
-      be something that acts like a date (a year, an ``in press'',
-      or a ``n.d.'').
-
-      \EM To get the version number correctly formatted, I added the
-      information and the correct formatting to the title field:
-      \verb+{\upshape(\uppercase{V}ersion~4)}+. A version is a kind
-      of edition, but it is more difficult to obtain the correct
-      formatting if the \fieldname{edition} field would be used,
-      because ``Version'' comes before the number and ``ed.'' after.
-\item \cite{ex95} \\ \cite{ex95}\\ \fullciteA{ex95}\\ \citeA{ex95}\\
-      \EM Note that here, unlike ex.~44 and ex.~91,
-      ``U.S.'' is omitted before ``Department of Health and Human
-      Services''.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography.
-\renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#1}%
-\renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#1}%
-\renewbibeditortype
-\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}
-%
-% Dirty trick: request apacitex.bst if apacite is loaded with one of the
-% index options, and request apacite.bst otherwise.
-\makeatletter
-\if@APAC@index
-  \bibliographystyle{apacitex}% with index option
-\else
-  \bibliographystyle{apacite}% or without
-\fi
-\makeatother
-%
-% Solve the `#' problem of backref, see the backref section above.
-% This hack provided by Heiko Oberdiek.
-\ifbackrefloaded
-  \catcode`\#=12\relax
-\fi
-%
-% Include the bibliography
-\bibliography{apa5ex}
-%
-% Reset the above hack.
-\ifbackrefloaded
-  \catcode`\#=6\relax
-\fi
-%
-% Again redefine a command.
-\renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}%
-%
-% Include the author index if the index option is on.
-\printindex[autx]
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\end{document}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% EOF apacite.tex
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/manifest.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 26d670ce0c1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/apacite/manifest.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-CONTENTS OF THE APACITE PACKAGE [2005/06/08]
-============================================
-
-apacite.sty  ->  The LaTeX citation package. This must
-                 be placed in a directory where TeX can find it;
-
-apacite.bst  ->  The BibTeX reference list style. This must be placed
-                 in a directory where BibTeX can find it;
-
-apacitex.bst ->  The BibTeX reference list style with added author
-                 index support. This must also be placed in a directory
-                 where BibTeX can find it;
-
-apacite.tex  ->  Extensive user's manual and test of the apacite package;
-
-apacite.pdf  ->  The processed file apacite.tex, so you can read the manual
-                 without having to install the package first;
-
-apa5ex.bib   ->  The file with bibliographic information about the
-                 references in apacite.tex;
-
-manifest.txt ->  The list of files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-                 short description;
-
-README       ->  A brief description of the package;
-
-
-Directory lang/
-===============
-
-This subdirectory contains files that contain language-specific
-modifications of apacite, mainly translations of terms like "and", "Ed.",
-etc., and have been written by apacite users that are (native) speakers
-of the languages involved. See the documentation for further details.
-The following files are currently available (note that most of these
-are also used for ``dialects'' in the sense of babel):
-
-dutch.apc    -> dutch
-english.apc  -> english
-german.apc   -> german
-greek.apc    -> greek
-ngerman.apc  -> german (new orthography)
-swedish.apc  -> swedish
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.drv b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.drv
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..383bcf7baa4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.drv
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apacite.drv',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `driver')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+%% You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate
+%% the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose
+%% whether or not to include the documented source code). Please
+%% do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{apacite.drv}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation driver file]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc}
+%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+%%
+\usepackage{apacdoc}[2007/09/03]
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% LOADING OF PACKAGES
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% The following line can be uncommented to test compatibility with TeX4ht.
+%% \usepackage{tex4ht}
+%%
+%% The following line is used for references to internet sources.
+%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples.
+\usepackage{url}
+%%
+%% The following lines can be uncommented to test compatibility with
+%% the mentioned other packages and test the language support of
+%% apacite.
+%% \usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref}
+%% \usepackage[pdftex,pagebackref]{hyperref}
+%% \usepackage[english]{babel}% babel must be loaded before apacite
+%% \usepackage{german}
+%%
+%% Loading apacite with author index option.
+\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2007/09/03]
+%%
+\raggedbottom
+%%
+%% To include the detailed explanation of the coding, comment out
+%% the next line
+\OnlyDescription
+%%
+%% To produce a command index: add the following line for one run,
+%% then run  makeindex -s gind.ist apacite
+%% and reprocess, with or without this line (much faster without)
+% \EnableCrossrefs\CodelineIndex
+%%
+%% To produce a change history: add the following line for one run,
+%% then run  makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo
+%% and reprocess, with or without this line (faster without)
+% \RecordChanges
+%%
+\DisableCrossrefs %May stay; zapped by \EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineNumbered %May stay
+%%
+%% For getting something useful out of greek.apc in the documentation.
+\IfFileExists{iso-8859-7.def}{%
+  \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}}{}
+\begin{document}
+  \DocInput{apacite.dtx}
+\end{document}
+
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `apacite.drv'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2a2c665f398
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,17010 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+% elsewhere in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%
+% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+% the generated files.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{4973}
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*dtx>
+\ProvidesFile{apacite.dtx}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite dtx file]
+%</dtx>
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{apacite.drv}
+%<package|docpkg>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{apacite}
+%<docpkg>\ProvidesPackage{apacdoc}
+%<english>\ProvidesFile{english.apc}
+%<dutch>\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc}
+%<finnish>\ProvidesFile{finnish.apc}
+%<german>\ProvidesFile{german.apc}
+%<ngerman>\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc}
+%<greek>\ProvidesFile{greek.apc}
+%<norsk>\ProvidesFile{norsk.apc}
+%<spanish>\ProvidesFile{spanish.apc}
+%<swedish>\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc}
+%<bibdb>%% apa5ex.bib
+%<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst
+%<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst
+%^^A
+%^^A I have to find out how I can replace the hard-coded date+version with a command
+%^^A such that the value of the command is written to the file instead of the name.
+%^^A
+%<driver>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation driver file]
+%<package>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA citation]
+%<docpkg>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation style]
+%<english>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<dutch>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<finnish>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<german>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<ngerman>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<greek>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<norsk>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<spanish>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<swedish>   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+%<bibdb>%%   [2007/09/03 v4.00 bibliography database for apacite manual]
+%<bibstyle>%%   [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]
+%<xbibstyle>%%  [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]
+%
+%<*install>
+%^^A =============================================
+%^^A    Here is the docstrip installation file
+%^^A    It is written on first LaTeX run if it
+%^^A    does not already exist
+%^^A =============================================
+\begin{filecontents*}{apacite.ins}
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%%
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\declarepreamble\drvpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate
+the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose
+whether or not to include the documented source code). Please
+do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\edef\noendinputpostamble{%
+  \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+  \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.%
+}
+
+\askonceonly
+\generate{%
+  \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+  \file{apacite.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{package}}
+  \file{apacdoc.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{docpkg}}
+  \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}}
+  \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}}
+  \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}}
+  \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}}
+  \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}}
+  \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}}
+  \file{norsk.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{norsk}}
+  \file{spanish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{spanish}}
+  \file{swedish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{swedish}}
+  \usepreamble\drvpreamble
+  \file{apacite.drv}{\from{apacite.dtx}{driver}}
+  \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+  \usepostamble\noendinputpostamble
+  \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}}
+  \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}}
+  \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}}
+}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the   *}
+\Msg{* following files into a directory searched by TeX: *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*     All *.apc, *.sty                              *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* and to move the following files into a directory  *}
+\Msg{* searched by BibTeX:                               *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*     All *.bib, *.bst                              *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation, run the following   *}
+\Msg{* script (or something similar, depending on your   *}
+\Msg{* operating system):                                *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  bibtex   apacite                                 *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* See the README file for a brief explanation and   *}
+\Msg{* the file apacite.drv for how to customize the     *}
+\Msg{* manual (e.g., to include the documented source    *}
+\Msg{* code.                                             *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!                                     *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile
+\end{filecontents*}
+%</install>
+%<*gobble>
+\IfFileExists{apacdoc.sty}{%
+    \let\finishprematurely\relax
+}{%
+    \typeout{**************************************************%
+             ********************}%
+    \typeout{*}%
+    \typeout{* To extract the package, style, and support files
+             of apacite,}%
+    \typeout{* run TeX on apacite.ins}%
+    \typeout{*}%
+    \typeout{* To (re)generate the apacite documentation, first
+             run TeX on}%
+    \typeout{* apacite.ins and then run LaTeX on apacite.drv
+             or apacite.dtx}%
+    \typeout{*}%
+    \typeout{**************************************************%
+             ********************^^J}%
+    \makeatletter
+    \edef\finishprematurely{\csname @@end\endcsname}%
+    \makeatother
+}
+\finishprematurely
+%</gobble>
+% \fi
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\begin,\CodelineIndex,\CodelineNumbered,\def,\DisableCrossrefs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DocInput,\documentclass,\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\GetFileInfo}
+% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\OnlyDescription,\RecordChanges,\usepackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage,\ProvidesFile,\RequirePackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\LoadClass,\PassOptionsToClass,\PassOptionsToPackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareOption,\CurrentOption,\ProcessOptions,\ExecuteOptions}
+% \DoNotIndex{\AtEndOfClass,\AtEndOfPackage,\AtBeginDocument,\AtEndDocument}
+% \DoNotIndex{\InputIfFileExists,\IfFileExists,\ClassError,\PackageError}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ClassWarning,\PackageWarning,\ClassWarningNoLine}
+% \DoNotIndex{\PackageWarningNoLine,\ClassInfo,\PackageInfo,\MessageBreak}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\protect,\DeclareRobustCommand,\CheckCommand}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\renewcommand,\providecommand,\newenvironment}
+% \DoNotIndex{\renewenvironment,\newif,\newlength,\newcounter,\setlength}
+% \DoNotIndex{\setcounter,\if,\ifx,\ifcase,\ifnum,\ifdim,\else,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\texttt,\textbf,\textrm,\textsl,\textsc,\reset@font}
+% \DoNotIndex{\textup,\textit,\textmd,\textsf,\emph,\futurelet}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ttfamily,\rmfamily,\sffamily,\mdseries,\bfseries,\upshape}
+% \DoNotIndex{\slshape,\scshape,\itshape,\em,\LaTeX,\LaTeXe}
+% \DoNotIndex{\filename,\fileversion,\filedate,\let,\makeindex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@auxout,\@for,\@gobble,\@ifnextchar,\@m,\@mkboth,\@nil}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@noitemerr,\@tempa,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@warning}
+% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\arabic,\AtBeginDocument,\bf,\bibname,\chapter}
+% \DoNotIndex{\citation,\clubpenalty,\CodelineNumbered,\csname}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DisableCrossrefs,\do,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endlist}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\gdef,\global,\hbox,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if,\if@filesw,\if@tempswa,\ifx,\immediate,\itemindent,\labelsep}
+% \DoNotIndex{\labelwidth,\lastskip,\leftmargin,\list,\mbox,\newblock}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newpage,\p@enumiv,\parindent,\penalty,\refname}
+% \DoNotIndex{\relax,\section,\settowidth,\sfcode,\sloppy,\small,\string}
+% \DoNotIndex{\theenumiv,\thepage,\unskip,\uppercase,\usecounter,\vskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\z@,\catcode,\ifnum,\the}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@empty,\@ifundefined,\@latex@warning,\@minus,\@plus,\ }
+% \DoNotIndex{\document,\@namedef,\@listi,\markboth,\or,\p@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\listparindent,\noexpand,\par,\parsep,\pb,\pbf,\pbfseries}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pc,\pd,\pem,\pit,\pitshape,\pmdseries,\prm,\prmfamily,\psc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pscshape,\psf,\psffamily,\psl,\pslshape,\ptt,\pttfamily}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pupshape,\@iden,\@firstofone,\@unexpandable@protect}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if@draft,\typeout}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@ifclassloaded,\@ifstar,\@onlypreamble,\@preamblecmds}
+% \DoNotIndex{\addtolength,\endinput,\@bsphack,\begingroup,\@wrindex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@listctr,\bibname,\enddocument,\hfil,\ignorespaces,\item}
+% \DoNotIndex{\NAT@temp,\refname,\stepcounter,\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@gobbletwo,\index,\itemsep,\markright,\scriptsize}
+% \DoNotIndex{\textsuperscript,\@undefined}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@celt,\@cite@list,\@citea,\@citeb,\@compress@cite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@h@ld,\@make@cite@list,\@ne}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@sort@celt,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\delimiter,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\m@ne,\number}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@markboth,\@mkboth,\nobreak,\SK@,\SK@@citex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\SK@@label,\SK@@ref,SK@def,\SK@lbibitem,\bbl@redefine}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@safe@activesfalse,\@save@activestrue,\active@prefix}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\ ,\&,\{,\},\.,\!,\",\#,\%,\',\(,\),\*,\,,\-,\/}
+% \DoNotIndex{\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\@,\[,\\,\],\^,\_,\`,\|,\~}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@backslashchar,\@citec,\@element@,\@input@,\@nameuse}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@makeschapterhead,\@restonecolfalse,\@restonecoltrue}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@old@endthebibliography,\@oldbibpreamble,\@orig@@cite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@orig@@nocitemeta,\@orig@nocite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tmp@arg,\@xp,\AA,\aa,\addcontentsline}
+% \DoNotIndex{\afterassignment,\aftergroup,\alph,\ast,\b@ex}
+% \DoNotIndex{\backslash,\baselineskip,\BibTeX,\bigskip,\bs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\cmd,\cmdfour,\cmdthree,\cmdthreealt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cmdthreepre,\cmdtwo,\columnsep,\columnseprule,\count@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\dag,\do@url@hyp,\EM,\ensuremath,\entryname,\envirname}
+% \DoNotIndex{\evensidemargin,\fieldname,\flqq,\fname,\fontencoding}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fontfamily,\footnotesize,\footskip,\frqq}
+% \DoNotIndex{\g@addto@macro,\GlossaryPrologue,\headheight,\headsep}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hoffset,\if@mainmatter,\ifcodeline@index,\iffalse}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifhave@multicol,\index@prologue,\IndexMin,\IndexParms}
+% \DoNotIndex{\IndexPrologue,\input,\jobname,\kern,\langle,\LaTeXrtf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\latextohtml,\lbrace,\LC,\ldots,\linewidth,\lower}
+% \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter,\makeatother,\MakeIndex,\MakeUppercase}
+% \DoNotIndex{\marginparpush,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\mid}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathbin,\mathchar,\mathord,\newskip,\newwrite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\normalsize,\oddsidemargin,\oldBED,\oldBEd,\oldBEDS}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldbibinitial,\oldbibliteral,\oldbibskipbracenodot}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldBIn,\oldBRetrieved,\oldevensidemargin,\oldfootskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldheadheight,\oldheadsep,\oldhoffset,\oldlinewidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldmarginparpush,\oldmarginparsep,\oldmarginparwidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldoddsidemargin,\oldtextheight,\oldtextwidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\oldtopmargin,\oldvoffset,\onecolumn,\openout,\opt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\orig@printindex,\origbibDSM,\parskip,\Perl,\pfill}
+% \DoNotIndex{\pkg,\pkgoption,\protected@edef,\protected@write}
+% \DoNotIndex{\quad,\raggedright,\raisebox,\rangle,\rbrace,\rm,\sc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\simpleguillemots,\symbol,\TeX,\TeXht}
+% \DoNotIndex{\textheight,\textwidth,\thinspace,\thispagestyle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\thr@@,\times,\tiny,\topmargin,\triangleright}
+% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\undefined,\voffset,\vspace,\X,\Y}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%<driver>%\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc}
+%<driver>%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+%<driver>%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+%%
+\usepackage{apacdoc}[2007/09/03]
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% LOADING OF PACKAGES
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% The following line can be uncommented to test compatibility with TeX4ht.
+%% \usepackage{tex4ht}
+%%
+%% The following line is used for references to internet sources.
+%% It is not generally necessary for apacite, but used in the examples.
+\usepackage{url}
+%%
+%% The following lines can be uncommented to test compatibility with
+%% the mentioned other packages and test the language support of
+%% apacite.
+%% \usepackage[dvips,pagebackref]{hyperref}
+%% \usepackage[pdftex,pagebackref]{hyperref}
+%% \usepackage[english]{babel}% babel must be loaded before apacite
+%% \usepackage{german}
+%%
+%% Loading apacite with author index option.
+\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2007/09/03]
+%%
+\raggedbottom
+%%
+%% To include the detailed explanation of the coding, comment out
+%% the next line
+\OnlyDescription
+%%
+%% To produce a command index: add the following line for one run,
+%% then run  makeindex -s gind.ist apacite
+%% and reprocess, with or without this line (much faster without)
+%<driver>% \EnableCrossrefs\CodelineIndex
+%%
+%% To produce a change history: add the following line for one run,
+%% then run  makeindex -s gglo.ist -o apacite.gls apacite.glo
+%% and reprocess, with or without this line (faster without)
+%<driver>% \RecordChanges
+%%
+\DisableCrossrefs %May stay; zapped by \EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineNumbered %May stay
+%%
+%% For getting something useful out of greek.apc in the documentation.
+\IfFileExists{iso-8859-7.def}{%
+  \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}}{}
+\begin{document}
+  \DocInput{apacite.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (I have to find out how to get the following remark in the right
+% ^^A place in the documentation.)
+% ^^A The version numbers have been assigned afterwards; originally,
+% ^^A apacite had only release dates.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0}{1994/11/30}{First public version}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2000/09/22}{Second packaged version, the result of
+%   continuous updating over many years. Not officially released through
+%   ctan because there was no update of the documentation, but this was
+%   available through my homepage at the time. Many additions in terms
+%   of customizability, and introduction of the author indexing
+%   facilities, which were first used in my PhD thesis in 1998.}
+% \changes{v2.1}{2003/03/27}{First official release since 1994. Compared
+%   to 2.0, this primarily solved some important compatibility problems
+%   with other packages.}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2003/09/05}{Updated for the 5th edition of the APA
+%   manual, up to date documentation and test document, reorganized the
+%   material, and improved compatibility.}
+% \changes{v3.0}{2004/07/01}{Now adds initials if necessary to
+%   distinguish first authors; now adds 2nd and later authors if necessary
+%   to distinguish references; now truncates author list after 6th author
+%   and editor list after 1st in reference list if there are more than 6
+%   authors/editors; improved sorting for reference list; improved author
+%   index support; added explicit support for reporting a meta-analysis.}
+% \changes{v3.1}{2005/06/01}{Introduces explicit non-English language
+%   support, solves some compatibility problems.}
+% \changes{v3.2}{2005/06/08}{Fix of a small but annoying bug.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2007/09/03}{Solved many compatibility issues; improved
+%   and extended language support; more extensive customizability.}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{apacite.sty}
+%
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% ^^A Start documentation here.
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*dtx>
+% \fi
+\MakePercentComment
+%
+% Previously apacite.tex :
+% User's reference manual and test of the apacite package.
+% Written by Erik Meijer
+%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% START OF ``NORMAL'' PART OF DOCUMENT
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{The \pkg{apacite} package%
+       \thanks{This document describes \pkg{apacite} version~\fileversion{}
+       dated \filedate.}
+       \vspace{0.3\baselineskip}\\
+       \large Citation and reference list with \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{}
+       according to the rules of the American Psychological Association}
+\author{Erik Meijer\\
+        \textsf{apacite at gmail.com}
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% If ecmr (T1) font not available:
+\simpleguillemots
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\maketitle
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{abstract}
+  \noindent
+  This document describes and tests the \pkg{apacite} package
+  \APACversiondate{\filedate}. This is a package that can be used with
+  \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} to generate citations and a reference list,
+  formatted according to the rules of the American Psychological Association.
+  Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} contains an option to (almost) automatically
+  generate an author index as well. The package can be customized in many
+  ways.
+\end{abstract}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\clearpage
+\tableofcontents
+\clearpage
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Introduction}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The American Psychological Association (APA) is very strict about the style in
+which manuscripts submitted to its journals are written and formatted. The
+requirements of the APA are described in the \emph{Publication Manual of the
+American Psychological Association}, the latest version of which is the 5th
+edition \cite{APAManual}. In the sequel, this is simply called the \emph{APA
+manual}.
+
+The APA manual discusses how candidate authors should write their manuscripts:
+writing style, parts of a manuscript and their order, presentation of the
+results in the form of tables and figures, and so forth. Candidate authors
+should study this and adhere to this.
+
+The APA manual also gives specific rules about the formatting of a manuscript.
+This includes double spacing, a running head, the typographic style of section
+headings, the placement of tables and figures on separate pages at the end of
+the document, and so forth. \LaTeX{} users will recognize these as ``style''
+elements that should be defined in a package (\fname{.sty} file) or class
+(\fname{.cls} file). Their specific documents (\fname{.tex} file) should be
+largely style-independent. This idea of separating content and logical
+structure from specific formatting is one of the basic elements of \LaTeX{}
+\cite[p.~7]{LaTeXbook}.
+
+An implementation of the formatting rules of the APA manual for use with
+\LaTeX{} is the \pkg{apa} class of Athanassios Protopapas. This handles all
+kinds of issues about general document formatting, title page, section
+headings, figures and tables, and so forth. Therefore, if you intend to submit
+a manuscript to an APA journal, I strongly recommend using the \pkg{apa}
+class.
+
+An important part of the APA style is the way citations and the reference list
+should be formatted. This takes 75 pages in the APA manual (pp.~207--281,
+excluding the references to legal materials). This part is not handled by the
+\pkg{apa} class, but by the \pkg{apacite} package. The \pkg{apa} class
+requires the \pkg{apacite} package, but \pkg{apacite} can be used without
+\pkg{apa}. The current document, for example, does not use the \pkg{apa}
+class, because I find it desirable that possible users can study the
+\pkg{apacite} package and its documentation without having to install several
+other classes and packages first. Therefore, the current document uses
+standard \LaTeX{} as much as possible.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection*{Some history}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Before the advent of the first version of \pkg{apacite} in 1994, several
+authors have written \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} packages (\fname{.sty}) and \BibTeX{}
+style files (\fname{.bst}) with suggestive names as \pkg{apalike},
+\pkg{newapa}, and \pkg{theapa} to try to capture some of the requirements of
+the APA manual. A severe problem with the APA citations is that, if the number
+of authors is between three and five, inclusive, the first citation must
+include all authors, whereas subsequent citations should refer to the first
+author ``et al.''. This problem had been solved by the \pkg{newapa} and
+\pkg{theapa} packages.
+
+A lot of APA peculiarities, however, were not covered by these citation
+styles. Examples are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item In the reference list, authors should be formatted with
+      their initials after their surnames. Editors, however,
+      should be formatted with their initials \emph{before} their
+      surnames if they are not in the author position.
+\item If the work referred to is a non-English-language source,
+      the English translation of the title should be given in
+      brackets after the title.
+\item Edition and volume of a book and the pages of an article
+      in that book should be gathered between a single pair
+      of parentheses.
+\item The publisher of a book and its address should be given as
+      ``address: publisher'', and not as ``publisher, address''.
+\item When the work used is a reprint or translation of an
+      earlier work, this should be mentioned in the reference
+      list. In text, the year must be given in the form
+      ``1923/1961''.
+\item There are several ``tricky'' things with brackets and
+      parentheses, for example, with the type of an article
+      (e.g., ``Letter to the editor'',
+      ``Review of the book \emph{The social life of information}'',
+      ``Abstract'', ``Special issue''). Furthermore, magazine and
+      newspaper articles are treated differently than journal
+      articles; papers presented at meetings must be treated
+      differently; translators of articles and books and chairs
+      of symposia must be introduced; an article can have editors
+      instead of authors (e.g., with a special issue); a PhD thesis
+      can be abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International};
+      a (technical) report of some institution can be an (edited)
+      collection of articles.
+\end{itemize}
+The \pkg{apacite} package is devised to get (much) closer to the APA rules
+than the abovementioned other packages and styles.
+
+The original version of the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package consisted for
+a large part of the citation part of \fname{theapa.sty}. The current version,
+however, has been changed and extended in many ways and can therefore not be
+considered a straightforward adaptation of \fname{theapa.sty} anymore,
+although it provides largely the same commands, such as \cmd{\citeA}, and
+peculiarities in the command definitions, such as the use of \verb+<...>+ for
+a prefix note and \verb+[...]+ for a postfix note.
+
+Although the \fname{apacite.bst} \BibTeX{} style started out as a slightly
+adapted version of \fname{theapa.bst}, the number of changes became so large
+and things became so unmanageable that I decided to write a completely new
+bibstyle, although using some small parts of the original. The
+\fname{apacite.bst} file can therefore not anymore be seen as an adaptation of
+\fname{theapa.bst}. Due to the complex rules of the APA manual, it has become
+a large file. In the original process of writing (back in 1994), the error
+\begin{verbatim}
+You've exceeded BibTeX's wizard-defined function space
+\end{verbatim}
+was very hard to overcome. It appears that later versions of \BibTeX{} allowed
+much more space, because I have not received this message anymore in recent
+years, although the bibstyle has been expanded considerably. However, if you
+run an old \BibTeX{}, you may encounter this (and similar) error messages.
+
+In the ``dark years'' between 1994 and 2003, in which there was no official
+new version of \pkg{apacite}, I have been fixing small bugs, discovered either
+by me or by users who sent in their bug reports, and adding some small options
+that were easy to incorporate and that I found useful or that were requested
+by a user. Furthermore, in 1998, I spent considerable effort in adding an
+(almost) automatic author indexing option, first used for my PhD thesis
+\cite{meijer1998}.
+
+In the first few months of 2003, I fixed a number of problems with the
+compatibility between \pkg{apacite} and some other important packages.
+Although I had been planning (or wishing, rather) to release a proper official
+update of \pkg{apacite} for some time, I had not done so, mainly because I had
+not yet taken the time to update the documentation. The compatibility issues
+were so severe, however, that I decided in March 2003 to release an
+intermediate update, which thus became the first official release since the
+original version. This version contained a lot of files with compatibility
+patches and tests. The main shortcomings of that version were the lack of
+up-to-date documentation and the lack of agreement with the latest version of
+the APA manual (5th ed., 2001).
+
+In September 2003, I finally released a complete, fully updated and
+significantly extended version of \pkg{apacite}, including extensive
+documentation. However, that version still was not able to format some
+citations correctly. The \APACversiondate{2004/07/01} version was a small
+improvement of the \APACversiondate{2003/09/05} version, but fixed the
+important inadequacies of previous versions.
+
+The \APACversiondate{2005/06/08} version introduced (limited) support of
+non-English languages. This is clearly a non-APA direction, because all
+APA publications are in English. However, many journals, universities,
+etc.\ in non-English speaking countries base their rules on the APA rules,
+and thus it may be useful to have the possibility to use \pkg{apacite}
+in combination with documents in non-English languages as well. This
+language feature has been further extended in the current version.
+See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a description of the implementation
+of this feature.
+
+The most salient differences in the current version are the much improved
+compatibility with a large number of other packages (most notably
+\pkg{hyperref}) and the shift of many formatting decisions from \BibTeX\
+to \LaTeX, so that they are easier to change by the user.
+
+Apart from the language support and the facilities for customization, the
+current version of \pkg{apacite} is aimed at conforming with the 5th edition
+of the APA manual. It remains, however, imperfect, although the instances of
+incorrectly formatted cases will be rare. The problems can be solved by
+``tricking'' the style (e.g., by defining the \fieldname{number} field as
+``\verb+2, Serial No. 186+'' if the issue number and serial number of a
+journal are both important), but this makes the \fname{.bib} file less
+compatible with other styles. In the test examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}
+below, many tricks are used and discussed. Remaining problems, omissions, and
+things-to-be-done can be found in section~\ref{sec:todo}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection*{Philosophy of \pkg{apacite}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+As can be deduced from the discussion thus far, the first priority of
+\pkg{apacite} is to implement the rules of the APA manual with regard to
+citation and reference list as closely as possible. However, just like its
+predecessors, and actually expanding much beyond their realm,
+\pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization as
+well. Many details of \pkg{apacite}, particularly punctuation and some fixed
+texts (e.g., ``Tech.\ Rep.'') can be changed easily by the user by redefining
+some commands in \LaTeX{}. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} also offers several
+proper options to change some of its settings.
+
+Whether certain options or customizable aspects are implemented depends on two
+criteria: (1) Is it possible, easy (enough), and convenient to implement them
+without compromising the ability to adhere to the APA rules, and (2) Do I (EM)
+consider them important or useful enough to spend time to implement them.
+Actually, the decision process is the reverse of this: First, I decide whether
+I find it a relevant or useful option. If not, I will not implement it. If so,
+I will think about if and how I can implement it. If I have an idea for a
+solution that is practically feasible, I will pursue it. If I don't see a
+solution, if I think it will take me too much time, or if I think a solution
+will be inconvenient to other users, then I will not pursue it.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection*{New in this version}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The changes since the \APACversiondate{2005/06/08} version are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \pkg{apacite} is now packaged in \fname{dtx}
+      (\pkg{doc}/\pkg{docstrip}) form, as is usual for \LaTeX{} packages.
+      However, this is still rudimentary and considerable work is still
+      needed to separate documentation from source code and to insert
+      the convenient margin par notes and index entries.
+\item The \pkg{apacite} manual-specific commands are now put in a separate
+      package file, \fname{apacdoc.sty}. Apart from specific commands and
+      settings that are only of interest for this manual, this contains
+      the definitions of commands that are considered too ad hoc,
+      ill-designed, or otherwise not generally useful, but that are
+      necessary to handle certain complicated references satisfactorily.
+      For the latter reason, these may be interesting for users who
+      encounter similar problems. See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for usage
+      instructions.
+\item Improved customizability of the reference list by replacing many
+      formatting decisions made by \fname{apacite.bst}, i.e., in the
+      \BibTeX{} stage, by \LaTeX{} commands in the \fname{.bbl} file;
+      see section~\ref{sec:custom-big-formatting}.
+      In this way, formatting can be changed by the user by redefining
+      the \LaTeX\ commands through \cmd{\renewcommand}. Hence, many new
+      formatting commands have been introduced in \LaTeX. The drawback
+      of this is that it is less easy to read the \fname{.bbl} file
+      and make small changes by editing this file.
+\item Added \pkgoption{indexpackage}, \pkgoption{noindexpackage}, and
+      \pkgoption{ltxemindex} options to be able to generate an author
+      index with or without the \pkg{index} package.
+\item Resolved many compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and
+      other packages, esp.\ \pkg{natbib}, \pkg{hyperref}, and several
+      packages that can be used to generate multiple bibliographies
+      (see section~\ref{sec:compat}). The \pkgoption{hyper} and
+      \pkgoption{nohyper} have thus become obsolete and now give
+      innocuous warnings.
+\item Added \pkgoption{includecorporate} and \pkgoption{suppresscorporate}
+      options that determine whether corporate authors are to be included
+      in the author index or not (with one of the indexing options,
+      of course). This works by using the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command
+      in the \fname{.bib} file. Also, if the author is the publisher as well,
+      the decision of how to indicate this in the reference list is now
+      deferred to the \LaTeX{} realm, so that the user can choose whether
+      to use the APA-dictated ``Author'' or the name of the publisher itself.
+\item Added \cmd{\citeauthorNP}, \cmd{\fullciteauthorNP}, and
+      \cmd{\shortciteauthorNP} commands, which are equivalent to the non-\verb+NP+
+      versions, except that they use the parenthetical ``and'' (`\&' by
+      default) between authors.
+\item The citation commands now allow spaces between the works cited:\\
+      \verb+\cite{Jones:1999, Smith:2001}+. This is more convenient
+      with word-wrapping text editors and corresponds to the implementation
+      of other citation packages, as well as standard \LaTeX.
+\item Explicit (and thus improved) support of the \entryname{manual}
+      reference type.
+\item The \fieldname{edition} and \fieldname{originaledition} fields can
+      now be supplied as numbers; the ``st'', ``nd'', ``rd'', and ``th''
+      suffixes are automatically inserted in this case. If it is not a
+      number (e.g., ``Rev.'' or ``2nd'', then the argument is copied
+      literally, as in previous versions.
+\item The location of a \entryname{lecture} can now be given in the
+      \fieldname{address} field and does not need to be included in the
+      \fieldname{howpublished} field anymore.
+\item Added support for the \fieldname{url} and \fieldname{lastchecked}
+      fields to improve references to websites. Also, the number of other
+      fields that are supported has been increased, most notably
+      \fieldname{howpublished} for \entryname{book}s and \fieldname{address}
+      for \entryname{lecture}s; see Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. Defined
+      URL formatting styles for usage with the \pkg{url} package that
+      adhere to the APA rules in this regard (esp.\ line-breaking).
+\item Improved and extended language support (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}):
+      new added languages, thanks to \pkg{apacite} users, and extended
+      customizability. Additional commands that anticipate further
+      language-improvements are
+      \cmd{\BPBI}, \cmd{\BPBI}, \cmd{\APACmonth}, \cmd{\Bby}, \cmd{\BAuthor},
+      \cmd{\BAvailFrom}, \cmd{\BRetrieved}, and \cmd{\BMsgPostedTo}.
+      However, these commands have not been defined in the language
+      files yet.
+\item A few small changes to the examples from the APA manual
+      (section~\ref{sec:xmpl}), incorporating a few errata to
+      the APA manual published on the APA's web site.
+      Also, some improved tricks in the examples.
+      These primarily fix some problems with
+      the author index induced by earlier tricks.
+\item Some minor changes and bug fixes that most users will not notice.
+      One consequence is that the earlier \pkgoption{accentfix} and
+      \pkgoption{noaccentfix} options have become obsolete and now give
+      innocuous warnings.
+\end{itemize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Installation, package loading, and running \BibTeX{}}
+\label{sec:usage}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+As of this version, \pkg{apacite} is distributed as a \fname{.dtx}
+file, like most \LaTeX{} packages. This file, \fname{apacite.dtx},
+is supplemented by a \fname{README} file, which gives a brief
+introduction and installation instructions, the user's manual
+in the file \fname{apacite.pdf} (which you are reading right now),
+and the installation file \fname{apacite.ins}. Strictly speaking,
+only the \fname{apacite.dtx} file is necessary, because the
+installation file is regenerated from it if it is not available,
+and the user's manual is generated by running \LaTeX{} on
+\fname{apacite.dtx}. But it is customary (and convenient for
+potential users) to include the other files as well.
+
+The \LaTeX{} packages, \BibTeX{} style files, and other files in the
+distribution are generated by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.ins}.
+This generates the following files:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fname{apacite.sty}] The \LaTeX{} citation package. This must
+  be placed in a directory where \TeX{} can find it.
+\item[\fname{apacite.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style. This
+  must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it.
+\item[\fname{apacitex.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style with
+  added author index support. This must also be placed in a directory
+  where \BibTeX{} can find it.
+\item[\fname{apa5ex.bib}] The file with bibliographic information
+  about the references used in the user's manual (i.e., the
+  current document). This is also useful for users to find out how
+  certain nontrivial problems can be solved. This can best be kept
+  in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}.
+\item[\fname{apacite.drv}] Documentation driver. Run \LaTeX{} on this
+  file to regenerate the user's manual. This is the current document,
+  and can also be ontained by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.dtx},
+  but you can edit the file \fname{apacite.drv} to change some settings,
+  e.g., choose whether or not the documented source code must be
+  included in the manual or not. Please don't edit \fname{apacite.dtx}
+  itself. The file \fname{apacite.drv} can best be kept
+  in the same directory as \fname{apacite.dtx}.
+\item[\fname{*.apc}] Language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite}.
+  See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a discussion of these.
+  These must be placed in a directory where \LaTeX{} can find them.
+  The files that are currently supplied are \fname{english.apc},
+  \fname{dutch.apc}, \fname{finnish.apc}, \fname{german.apc},
+  \fname{ngerman.apc}, \fname{greek.apc}, \fname{norsk.apc},
+  \fname{spanish.apc}, and \fname{swedish.apc}.
+\item[\fname{apacdoc.sty}] A \LaTeX{} package that contains commands
+  and settings used in this user's manual. This can be placed in a
+  directory where \TeX{} can find it, but given that it is primarily
+  useful for processing the user's manual and not intended as a
+  package for wider usage, it can also be left in the same directory as
+  \fname{apacite.dtx}. See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for a further discussion
+  of this package.
+\end{description}
+Previous versions of \pkg{apacite} provided the file \fname{apacite.tex},
+which contained the user's manual, but this is now included in
+\fname{apacite.dtx} and can be formatted by running \LaTeX{} on
+\fname{apacite.drv}.
+
+The \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package is loaded by putting
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\cmdthreealt{usepackage}{options}{apacite}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+somewhere in your document between \cmd{\documentclass} and
+\verb+\begin{document}+, or putting
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\cmdthreealt{RequirePackage}{options}{apacite}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+in your own personal \LaTeX{} package (say, \fname{mysettings.sty})
+that is loaded by your document.
+
+To load the \fname{apacite.bst} or \fname{apacitex.bst} bibliography style in
+\BibTeX{}, put
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacite}+
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+or
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\verb+\bibliographystyle{apacitex}+
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+respectively, in your document before the \cmd{\bibliography} command. The
+position of the bibliography (reference list) is determined by the line
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\cmdtwo{bibliography}{bibfiles}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+where \opt{bibfiles} is a list of filenames with \fname{.bib} extension, which
+contain the bibliographic information that is used by \BibTeX{} to construct
+the reference list. Usually, the \cmd{\bibliographystyle} and
+\cmd{\bibliography} are kept together (immediately follow each other) in the
+document, although when you are using the \pkg{apa} document class,
+\pkg{apacite} is used by definition and you are not supposed to use the
+\cmd{\bibliographystyle} command yourself. See the documentation of the
+\pkg{apa} documentclass for details about this.
+
+If you use one of the author indexing options, the author index is put in
+the \LaTeX{} output by the line
+\begin{verbatim}
+\printindex[autx]
+\end{verbatim}
+If you put this line in your document, but don't use one of the author
+indexing options, it will be ignored. For more on author indexing, see
+section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+
+To get all parts in the final output, the following sequence of runs should
+typically be taken (when starting from scratch): (1) \LaTeX{}, (2) \BibTeX{},
+(3) \LaTeX{}, (4) \LaTeX{}, and, when author indexing is on, (5) \MakeIndex{},
+(6) \LaTeX{}, and (7) \LaTeX{}. The last one is to get the index in the table
+of contents. If the table of contents is on a regular page, i.e., an
+arabic-numbered page instead of a roman-numbered page in the front matter, it
+may even be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} another time, followed by \LaTeX{}
+once or twice. Occasionally, somewhere in the process, \LaTeX{} may complain
+about labels that may have changed, which requires even more additional
+\LaTeX{} runs at that stage. So the number of runs that are necessary to get
+everything right may become large.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Package options}
+\label{sec:options}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The following options are recognized by \pkg{apacite}:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\pkgoption{BCAY}] \mbox{}\\
+  This is a technical option for backwards compatibility with old versions
+  (pre-\APACversiondate{2003/09/05}) of \pkg{apacite}. In those versions of
+  \pkg{apacite}, the \cmd{\BCAY} construction was used to pass relevant
+  citation information from the \fname{.bbl} file (\BibTeX{}'s output) to
+  \LaTeX{}. This was taken over from its immediate predecessor, Young U. Ryu's
+  \pkg{theapa}. However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize the \cmd{\BCAY}
+  construction, but it does recognize the analogous \cmd{\citeauthoryear}
+  construction, which was also used by an earlier predecessor of
+  \pkg{apacite}, \pkg{newapa}. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} has reverted to
+  \cmd{\citeauthoryear} as well. This makes different versions of
+  \pkg{apacite} incompatible with each other, because it is not possible to
+  support both constructions at the same time. This option is used to fix
+  that: In the (unlikely) event that you \emph{must} use a \fname{.bbl} file
+  that is generated by an old version of \pkg{apacite}, you can turn this
+  option on.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{index}]
+\item[\pkgoption{indexpackage}]
+\item[\pkgoption{noindexpackage}]
+  The \pkgoption{index} option turns author indexing on. See
+  section~\ref{sec:autindex} for a discussion of the author indexing facility.
+  The \pkgoption{index} option should be used with the \fname{apacitex.bst}
+  \BibTeX{} style, although it does not give errors with \fname{apacite.bst},
+  but simply does not give author index entries, so then this option
+  typically does not have any effect (and an undesirable effect if
+  it does). The \pkgoption{indexpackage} and \pkgoption{noindexpackage}
+  select whether the author index entries should be generated according
+  to the method of the \pkg{index} package or using a more standard-\LaTeX{}
+  method.
+
+  By default, if the \pkgoption{index} option is requested, the
+  \pkgoption{indexpackage} option is turned on as well, consistent with
+  the behavior of previous versions of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{noindex}] \mbox{}\\
+  Turns author indexing off (the default). Typically used with
+  \fname{apacite.bst}, but can also be used with \fname{apacitex.bst}. In the
+  latter case, the author indexing commands are simply ignored. Therefore,
+  \fname{apacite.bst} is actually superfluous, but because author indexing
+  will be used rarely and \fname{apacitex.bst} is more likely to lead to errors
+  or incompatibilities, a ``clean'' (no author indexing) version,
+  \fname{apacite.bst}, is provided as well.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{suppresscorporate}] \mbox{}\\
+  Excludes corporate authors from the author index. The \cmd{\bibcorporate}
+  command must be used in the \fname{.bib} file to denote a corporate author;
+  see sections~\ref{subsec:fields}, \ref{subsec:labels}, and~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{includecorporate}] \mbox{}\\
+  Includes corporate authors in the author index, provided that an author index
+  is requested of course.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{stdindex}]
+\item[\pkgoption{tocindex}]
+\item[\pkgoption{emindex}]
+\item[\pkgoption{ltxemindex}] \mbox{}\\
+  These options select the style of index formatting. They all imply the
+  \pkgoption{index} option. The first three of these imply the
+  \pkgoption{indexpackage} option, whereas the fourth implies
+  \pkgoption{noindexpackage}. See section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{numberedbib}] \mbox{}\\
+  This option implies that the bibliography (reference list) is a numbered
+  section or chapter, e.g., ``6.~References'', instead of just ``References''.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{unnumberedbib}] \mbox{}\\
+  The reverse of \pkgoption{numberedbib}: The bibliography is an unnumbered
+  section or chapter. This is the default. However, it is possible that when
+  using the \pkg{apa} document class, then \pkgoption{numberedbib} works
+  better, because that class turns section numbering off anyway and it may be
+  that \pkg{apa}'s page headings work well if the reference list is a
+  \cmd{\section} and not if it is a \cmd{\section*}. I have not experimented
+  with this (yet), however.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{sectionbib}] \mbox{}\\
+  With this option, the bibliography is a section and not a chapter. Mainly
+  useful in combination with the \pkg{chapterbib} package. Therefore, it will
+  be discussed in more detail in section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{nosectionbib}] \mbox{}\\
+  With this option, the bibliography is a chapter, if the \cmd{\chapter}
+  command is defined. Otherwise, it is always a section. Again, see
+  section~\ref{sec:compat-chapterbib}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{tocbib}] \mbox{}\\
+  This puts the bibliography in the table of contents, even if it is
+  unnumbered, provided of course that a table of contents is requested in the
+  document (by \cmd{\tableofcontents}). This is the default.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{notocbib}] \mbox{}\\
+  This does not put the bibliography in the table of contents if it is an
+  unnumbered section or chapter. If it's numbered, it is always in the table
+  of contents.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{bibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\
+  The bibliography is started on a new page. This is required by some journal
+  styles, including the APA manual. The \pkg{apa} class already contained this
+  in its \pkgoption{man} option, but now it has been made available directly
+  in \pkg{apacite}.
+
+\item[\pkgoption{nobibnewpage}] \mbox{}\\
+  The bibliography is not explicitly started on a new page, although if the
+  bibliography is a chapter, it will be started on a new page anyway, because
+  chapters are started on a new page. This is the default in \pkg{apacite} and
+  thus is the only time a non-APA setting is used as default instead of an
+  available APA setting. Therefore, to satisfy the APA rules, you have to
+  request the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option explicitly.
+\end{description}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{The citation commands}
+\label{sec:cite}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In this section, the commands are described that can be used to cite a work.
+Their default behavior will be explained. In section~\ref{sec:custom},
+customization of this behavior will be discussed. Extensive examples are given
+in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. Table~\ref{tab:basic-cite} gives a brief
+impression of the usage and results of the most common citation commands.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{table}[tp]
+\begin{center}
+\caption{Examples of usage of basic citation commands.}
+\label{tab:basic-cite}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+\hline
+Command & Result \\
+\hline
+\verb+\cite<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+       &
+   (e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11) \\
+\verb+\citeNP<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+       &
+   e.g., Jones, 2001; Ross, 1987, p.~11 \\
+\verb+\citeA<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+      &
+   e.g., Jones (2001); Ross (1987, p.~11) \\
+\verb+\citeauthor<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+ &
+   e.g., Jones; Ross, p.~11 \\
+\verb+\citeyear<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+   &
+   (e.g., 2001; 1987, p.~11) \\
+\verb+\citeyearNP<e.g.,>[p.~11]{Jone01,Ross87}+   &
+   e.g., 2001; 1987, p.~11 \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+If the \pkg{apacite} package is loaded, the following citation commands can be
+used.
+\begin{description}
+    \item[\cmdfour{cite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{fullcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{shortcite}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        These three commands produce parenthetical citations of the
+        following form:
+        ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1};
+        \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN},
+        \opt{postfix})''.
+        The command \cmd{\fullcite} uses the ``full'' author list, and
+        the \cmd{\shortcite} command uses the abbreviated author list.
+        The \cmd{\cite} command uses the ``full'' list the first time
+        a work is referenced and the ``short'' list the second and
+        subsequent times. In accordance with the APA manual, the
+        ``full'' list consists of all authors if their number is five
+        or less, and the first author suffixed with ``et al.{}''
+        if their number is six or more. Similarly, the ``short'' list
+        consists of all authors if their number is two or less and the
+        first author with ``et al.{}'' if their  number is three or more.
+        There are some nuances for complicated situations. These will
+        be discussed in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}.
+
+        If the (full) author lists of subsequent citations within the
+        same citation command are the same, they are not repeated; only
+        the years of the later citations are given.
+        This holds for all analogous cases as well.
+
+        The prefix and postfix are optional. Thus, e.g.,
+        \cmdtwo{cite}{keys}, \cmdthree{cite}{postfix}{keys},
+        and \cmdthreepre{cite}{prefix}{keys} are also allowed.
+        This holds for all analogous cases as well.
+
+    \item[\cmdfour{citeNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        ``No parentheses'' versions of \cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\fullcite},
+        and \cmd{\shortcite}. They produce citations of the form
+        ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Year1};
+        \opt{Authors2}, \opt{Year2}; \ldots; \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{YearN},
+        \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within
+        parenthetical material, see the discussion of
+        \cmd{\citeyearNP} below.
+
+    \item[\cmdfour{citeA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteA}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        These commands are similar to the commands without the
+        ``\verb+A+''  suffix. They produce in-text citations of the form
+        ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1} (\opt{Year1}),
+        \opt{Authors2} (\opt{Year2}), \ldots,
+        \opt{AuthorsN} (\opt{YearN}, \opt{postfix})''.
+        Typically, the \opt{prefix} will be empty, because it is
+        part of the main text, and there typically will only be
+        one citation in \opt{keys} (unless the authors of
+        multiple citations are the same), because the authors'
+        names are also part of the main text. But it was easy
+        to provide the additional options, and this enhances
+        the similarity with the other citation commands, which
+        I found desirable.
+
+    \item[\cmdfour{citeauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteauthor}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{citeauthorNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{fullciteauthorNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}]
+    \item[\cmdfour{shortciteauthorNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        These commands are similar to their \cmd{\cite}-type
+        counterparts, except that they produce citations of the form
+         ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Authors1}, \opt{Authors2}, \ldots,
+         \opt{AuthorsN}, \opt{postfix}''
+        (the years and parentheses are left out).
+        This is typically used in a paragraph when a proper
+        citation (incl.\ year) to the same work has already been
+        given in the paragraph.%
+            \footnote{Note that a paragraph is not
+            a section. Nor does it need to be declared as a
+            \cmd{\paragraph}. A reminder for Dutch readers:
+            ``section'' = ``paragraaf'' and ``paragraph'' = ``alinea''.}
+        In such a case, according to the APA manual, the year must not be
+        repeated for repeated references to the same work in the same
+        paragraph.
+
+        A second important application of these commands is
+        when some complex citations must be constructed, like
+        ``\citeauthor{4.05-1}'s \citeyear{4.05-1} theory'',
+        which makes combined use of \cmd{\citeauthor} and
+        \cmd{\citeyear}, see below.
+
+        Normally, I would expect only one citation per
+        \cmd{\citeauthor}-type command, and no \opt{prefix}
+        or \opt{postfix}.
+
+        The difference between the ``non-\verb+NP+'' versions and the
+        ``\verb+NP+'' versions is that the latter are intended to
+        be used parenthetically, like \cmd{\cite}, whereas the former
+        are intended to be used in the running text, like \cmd{\citeA}.
+        Neither of these generate the parentheses, though. Thus, the
+        only real difference is that the ``non-\verb+NP+'' versions
+        use ``and'' between authors and the ``\verb+NP+'' versions
+        use ``\&''.
+
+        Following the \cmd{\cite}--\cmd{\citeNP}--\cmd{\citeA} logic,
+        \cmd{\citeauthor} should actually be called \cmd{\citeauthorA}
+        and a \cmd{\citeauthor} command should be supplied that is the
+        same as the current \cmd{\citeauthorNP} but with parentheses
+        added. For historical reasons and some compatibility with
+        other citation packages, this is currently not the case. I may
+        try to invent a decent solution for a next release of
+        \pkg{apacite}.
+
+    \item[\cmdfour{citeyear}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        Produces citations of the form
+        ``(\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN},
+        \opt{postfix})''.
+        See the discussion of \cmd{\citeauthor} above. Typically,
+        the \opt{prefix} would be empty and multiple citations
+        would only be used if they have the same authors.
+
+    \item[\cmdfour{citeyearNP}{prefix}{postfix}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        A ``no parentheses'' version of \cmd{\citeyear}.
+        Produces citations of the form
+        ``\opt{prefix} \opt{Year1}, \opt{Year2}, \ldots, \opt{YearN},
+        \opt{postfix}''. Can be used for complex citations within
+        parenthetical material, like
+        ``the work of \citeauthor{3.99-15} (\citeyearNP{3.99-15};
+        but see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})'',
+        which also uses the \cmd{\citeNP} command.
+
+    \item[\cmdtwo{nocite}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        The entries are included in the bibliography without
+        being cited in text. This is standard \LaTeX.
+        Note that the APA manual normally does not allow this.
+        The only exception concerns works that are studied in a
+        meta-analysis, but for these the \cmd{\nocitemeta}
+        command should be used.
+
+    \item[\cmdtwo{nocitemeta}{keys}] \mbox{}\\
+        This is similar to \cmd{\nocite}. It is used to get the
+        list of works included in a meta-analysis in the
+        bibliography. This command has the additional effect that
+        the corresponding items in the bibliography are preceded
+        by an asterisk (\APACmetastar) and a remark explaining this
+        is inserted just before the bibliography, as required
+        by the APA manual.
+\end{description}
+In order to format the examples from the APA manual correctly in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, the \fname{apacdoc.sty} package defines the
+following additional citation
+commands: \cmd{\DSMcite}, \cmd{\biblecite}, and \cmd{\citesong}, and obvious
+variations with \verb+full+, \verb+short+, \verb+A+, and \verb+NP+. I
+have decided not to include these in \fname{apacite.sty}, primarily because
+I find it unattractive to introduce different types of citation commands for
+different types of citations. This also makes it more difficult to use the
+same document with another citation package. Perhaps I'll be able to provide,
+in a future version of \pkg{apacite}, more elegant solutions to the problems
+for which these commands were defined.
+See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for a description of the \fname{apacdoc.sty}
+package and some brief usage instructions.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Contents of the bibliography database file}
+\label{sec:bib}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The information that is used by \LaTeX/\BibTeX{} to generate
+the citations and reference list must be stored by the user in one
+or more files with the \fname{.bib} extension.
+A detailed overview of the contents of the \fname{.bib} file is
+given in \citeA[section~12.2]{KoDa04} and \citeA[section~13.2]{TLC2}.
+Roughly speaking, the
+\fname{.bib} file consists of a collection of \emph{entries}
+of the form
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{contents}\verb+}+
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+Most entries describe a work that may be referenced, e.g., a book
+or article. There are, however, two exceptions: a \entryname{preamble}
+entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+preamble+) and a \entryname{string}
+entry (with \opt{entryname} = \verb+string+). There is typically
+at most one \entryname{preamble} entry. Its \opt{contents} consist of a
+string---according to \BibTeX, i.e., between double quotes (\verb+"+)
+or an additional pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+). This
+string, which typically consists of \LaTeX{} commands like
+\verb+\newcommand{\SortNoop}[1]{}+, is literally included
+in the document before the bibliography. It can therefore be used
+to define commands that are used in the (other) entries of the
+\fname{.bib} file and that are not standard \LaTeX{}.
+
+A \entryname{string} entry is similar, but the contents are now not
+included in the document. Instead, the string is assigned to a kind of
+``variable'', the name of which may contain characters
+not usually associated with variable names, like colons and
+hyphens, see \citeA[p.~769]{TLC2}. An example of a
+\entryname{string} entry is
+\begin{verbatim}
+@string{ JPSP = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} }
+\end{verbatim}
+Then, if in a later entry, the journal is
+\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, you can format this
+as
+\begin{verbatim}
+  journal = JPSP,
+\end{verbatim}
+instead of the usual
+\begin{verbatim}
+  journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+\end{verbatim}
+This is not only convenient because it saves typing of common
+long journal names (and reduces the likelihood of typos), but it can
+also be used to define style-specific variations. For example, some
+styles abbreviate journal names, such as
+\emph{J.~Pers.\ Soc.\ Psych.}\hbox{} instead of
+\emph{Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}.
+You could then put the definitions of all full journal names
+in one \fname{.bib} file (\fname{fulljou.bib}, say) and the definitions
+of the abbreviated journal names in another (\fname{abbrjou.bib}, say).
+Suppose that the information about the referenced works is stored in a
+third file, say, \fname{myrefs.bib}, and that the ``NotAPA''
+style rules, implemented in the \fname{notapa.bst} \BibTeX{} style file,
+require the abbreviated journal names. Then you can use
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{notapa}
+\bibliography{abbrjou,myrefs}
+\end{verbatim}
+to obtain a reference list complying with the ``NotAPA'' rules. If
+you change your mind and decide to switch to using the rules of the
+APA manual, you only need to change the two lines above into
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{apacite}
+\bibliography{fulljou,myrefs}
+\end{verbatim}
+(and additionally load the \fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package
+through \cmd{\usepackage}).
+
+The remaining entry types are types that correspond with the
+type of a referenced work, e.g., \entryname{book} or
+\entryname{article}. These entry types (reference types) are
+discussed in section~\ref{subsec:types} below.
+Such entries have the following structure:
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\verb+@+\opt{entryname}\verb+{+\opt{key}\verb+,+\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname1}\verb+ = +\opt{value1}\verb+,+\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldname2}\verb+ = +\opt{value2}\verb+,+\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\vdots$\\
+$\mbox{}\qquad$\opt{fieldnameN}\verb+ = +\opt{valueN}\verb+,+\\
+\verb+}+
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+where \opt{key} corresponds to the key used in the citation
+commands and matches the entry with the citation (and should
+therefore be unique). The fieldnames are \verb+author+, \verb+year+,
+etc., which are described in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below.
+The values are strings, either defined previously by a
+\entryname{string} entry or explicitly indicated as such here
+by putting the relevant information between double quotes
+(\verb+"+) or a pair of braces (\verb+{+ and \verb+}+).
+
+To be able to obey the rules of the APA manual, \pkg{apacite}
+provides several fields and reference types that are not
+described in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation
+\cite<e.g.,>[chap.~13]{TLC2}. Furthermore,
+the meaning and usage of many fields and reference types that
+\emph{are} described there have been altered somewhat. Therefore,
+a complete description is given here.
+The symbol \LC{} will be used to indicate that the field or
+reference type is also described in \citeA[Appendix~B]{LaTeXbook},
+\citeA[chap.~12]{KoDa04}, or \citeA[chap.~13]{TLC2}, although, as
+mentioned above, the specific meaning of the item may have been
+changed.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Types of references}
+\label{subsec:types}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In this section, the list of reference types that are recognized by
+\pkg{apacite} is given. An overview of which fields can be used for which
+reference type is given in Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. If fields are not
+relevant, but you use them anyway in your \fname{.bib} file, they are ignored.
+The fields and their use are described in more detail in
+section~\ref{subsec:fields}, but here some specific issues will already be
+mentioned.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{table}[p]
+\centering
+\caption{List of fields that are used by the various reference types
+         (blank = not used; \X{} = used;
+          \Y{} = used, but only for citations).}
+\label{tab:fieldref}
+\small
+\makebox[0pt]{% some manipulation to squeeze the table onto the page
+\newlength{\oldtabcolsep}
+\setlength{\oldtabcolsep}{\tabcolsep}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}cccccccccc@{}}
+\hline
+ & \multicolumn{10}{c}{Reference type}\\
+   \cline{2-11}
+%
+% Normally, I would use the sideways environment of the rotating
+% package to format this nicely, but I do not want to require
+% other packages to format this document, so I choose an uglier
+% solution here.
+%
+ & article\\
+ & magazine   &      &              &            &              &
+ & phdthesis
+ &
+ & manual\\
+Field
+ & newspaper  & book & incollection & techreport & intechreport & lecture
+ & mastersthesis
+ & unpublished
+ & misc
+ & literal\\
+\hline
+address           &  &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+annote            &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  \\
+author            &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+booktitle         &  &  &\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+chair             &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  &  \\
+chapter           &  &  &\X&  &  &  &  &  &  &  \\
+day               &\X&  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&\X&  \\
+edition           &  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &\X&  \\
+editor            &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  &  &\X&\X&  \\
+englishtitle      &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+firstkey          &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+howpublished      &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+institution       &  &  &  &\X&\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+journal           &\X&  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  \\
+key               &\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+lastchecked       &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+month             &\X&  &\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&\X&  \\
+note              &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+number            &\X&\X&  &\X&\X&  &\X&\X&\X&  \\
+organization      &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  \\
+originaladdress   &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originalbooktitle &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originaledition   &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originaleditor    &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originaljournal   &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originalnumber    &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originalpages     &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originalpublisher &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originalvolume    &\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &  &  &  &  \\
+originalyear      &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+pages             &\X&  &\X&  &\X&  &\X&  &  &  \\
+publisher         &  &\X&\X&  &  &  &  &  &\X&  \\
+school            &  &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  \\
+series            &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  \\
+symposium         &  &  &  &  &  &\X&  &  &  &  \\
+text              &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &  &\X\\
+title             &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+translator        &\X&\X&\X&\Y&\X&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y&\Y\\
+type              &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+url               &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  \\
+volume            &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&  &\X&  &\X&  \\
+year              &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\Y\\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}%
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{\oldtabcolsep}
+}
+%
+\end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+The following entry types (reference types) are defined in \pkg{apacite}:
+\begin{description}
+    \item[\entryname{article}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        A journal article or comparable. If the
+        ``article'' referenced to is a special issue of a journal or
+        something else that has editors instead of authors, the
+        \fieldname{author} field should be empty and the \fieldname{editor}
+        field should be used for the editors. If the journal paginates
+        by issue instead of by volume, or when you are referring to a
+        whole special issue, the issue number should be given
+        in the \fieldname{number} field. In all other cases (including
+        referring to an article within a special issue), the
+        \fieldname{number} field must not be used. The \fieldname{type}
+        field can be used to denote the type of article, for example,
+        ``\verb+Letter to the editor+'', or
+        ``\verb+Review of the book \emph{Life in the middle}+''.
+
+    \item[\entryname{magazine}] \mbox{}\\
+        A magazine article. Unlike in early versions of \pkg{apacite},
+        this is now equivalent to \entryname{article}. However, with
+        an \entryname{article}, the \fieldname{month} and \fieldname{day}
+        fields should generally not be used, unless there is a compelling
+        reason to use them. For a magazine, the \fieldname{month}, and
+        \fieldname{day} (for weeklies) fields are commonly used.
+
+    \item[\entryname{newspaper}] \mbox{}\\
+        A newspaper article. This is similar to \entryname{article} and
+        \fieldname{magazine}, except that the pages are formatted a little
+        different, with ``pp.~23--49'' instead of just ``23--49''.
+
+    \item[\entryname{book}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        An entire book. The \fieldname{type} field can be used
+        to denote a specific type of item (so generally not strictly
+        a book), e.g., ``\verb+Brochure+''. Similarly, the
+        \fieldname{number} field can be used if this is considered
+        useful. (It is used in example 24 in the APA manual, see
+        below.) This seems quite rare to me, however. It should
+        certainly \emph{not} be used for ISBN numbers and the like.
+
+    \item[\entryname{incollection}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        An article in a (usually edited) book, or other kind of larger
+        work, except a report, for which the \entryname{intechreport}
+        entry is used. The \fieldname{booktitle} field contains the
+        title of the whole collection (book). The \fieldname{type}
+        field is currently used to denote the type of article, as
+        with the \entryname{article} reference type, although in some
+        cases, it may be more naturally to let the \fieldname{type}
+        field contain the type of the whole work (e.g., CD). Therefore,
+        I may change this somewhat in future versions of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+    \item[\entryname{techreport}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        A report. This may be a ``technical'' report such as published
+        by universities, or a report from government organizations or
+        private companies. The \fieldname{type} field can be used to
+        indicate what kind of report it is, e.g.,
+        ``\verb+College Board Rep.+'' or ``\verb+{DHHS} Publication+''.
+        If the \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type
+        ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}+'' is used. (The \verb+\hbox{}+
+        ensures that \TeX{} does not view the period as the end of a
+        sentence, which would insert too much space.) If no type
+        description should
+        be given, \verb+\bibnotype+ should be used as the contents of
+        the \fieldname{type} field. The \fieldname{number} field can
+        be used to give the report number. The organization that
+        published the report should be given in the \fieldname{institution}
+        field.
+
+    \item[\entryname{intechreport}] \mbox{}\\
+        An article in a (usually edited) report. This is more or less
+        a combination of \entryname{incollection} and
+        \entryname{techreport}. It uses the same fields as the former
+        to describe the article itself, except \fieldname{type}, e.g.,
+        \fieldname{booktitle}, which is in this case the title of the
+        entire report,
+        and the same fields as the latter to describe the report.
+        In particular, the \fieldname{type}, \fieldname{number},
+        and \fieldname{institution} fields are used for the report.
+
+    \item[\entryname{lecture}] \mbox{}\\
+        A paper presented at a meeting. According to the APA manual,
+        the year and month should be given, but \pkg{apacite} also
+        uses the \fieldname{day} field when available.
+        The \fieldname{symposium} field can be used for the
+        name of the symposium and the \fieldname{chair} field for the chair of
+        the meeting. The \fieldname{howpublished} field should be used to
+        indicate the occasion at which the paper was presented if the
+        \fieldname{symposium} field is empty, e.g.,
+        ``\texttt{Paper presented at the meeting of the American
+                  Professional Society on the Abuse of Children}''.
+        It can also be used to give additional information about
+        the symposium if the \fieldname{symposium} field is not empty.
+
+    \item[\entryname{phdthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        A doctoral dissertation. The \fieldname{school} field is used
+        to denote the university for which the thesis was written.
+        The \fieldname{type} field can be used for the thesis type,
+        e.g., ``\verb+PhD thesis+''. If it is empty, the default type
+        is used, which is ``\verb+Unpublished doctoral dissertation+''
+        or ``\verb+Doctoral dissertation+'', depending on whether
+        the \fieldname{journal} field is empty or not.
+
+        If the thesis is abstracted in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts
+        International} or similar, then the \fieldname{journal},
+        \fieldname{volume}, \fieldname{number}, and \fieldname{pages} fields
+        can be used as with journal articles. The \fieldname{year} field
+        should denote the year of the ``journal''.
+        The \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year
+        of the original thesis, even if it is the same as the year of the
+        abstract, provided that the original thesis is used, and not
+        the abstract. Then, the \fieldname{school} field should also
+        be used, and optionally the \fieldname{type} field. If only
+        the abstract is used, it should presumably be treated as a
+        journal article.
+
+
+    \item[\entryname{mastersthesis}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        This is equivalent to the \entryname{phdthesis} type, except that
+        the default ``unpublished'' and ``published'' \fieldname{type}s are
+        ``\verb+Unpublished master's thesis+'' and
+        ``\verb+Master's thesis+''.
+
+    \item[\entryname{unpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+         For unpublished manuscripts and similarly ``obscure'' material.
+         The \fieldname{howpublished} field will typically be used to
+         indicate what kind of work is referred to (e.g.,
+         ``\verb+Unpublished manuscript+''). The \fieldname{organization}
+         field can be used to denote the organization in which the document
+         was produced, e.g., ``\texttt{Johns Hopkins University, Center
+         for Social Organization of Schools}''. Note that the larger
+         organization should be given first and the department after that.
+         The address (city and state, etc., see the discussion of the
+         \fieldname{address} field in section~\ref{subsec:fields} below)
+         of the organization should be given in the \fieldname{address}
+         field, unless it is already mentioned in the name of the
+         organization. Presumably, if the organization is
+         ``\verb+University of Groningen+'', the city name ``Groningen''
+         should not be given in the \fieldname{address} field, but
+         the country ``The Netherlands'' should. When both the
+         \fieldname{organization} and the \fieldname{address} field
+         are available, \pkg{apacite} formats these as
+         ``organization, address''. This is different from the
+         usual ``address: publisher'' form. This behavior cannot
+         explicitly be deduced from the 5th edition, nor from the
+         4th edition, of the APA manual, but the 3rd edition
+         \cite{APAManual3} gives an explicit example (example 53,
+         p.~131): \citeA{APA-3rd-ed-ex53}.
+
+    \item[\entryname{misc}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        For works that do not fit into the other categories, such as
+        motion pictures, cassette recordings, computer software, etc.
+        The \fieldname{type} field can be used to indicate the type
+        of work, and \pkg{apacite} recognizes a few specific types
+        that should be formatted a little differently, see the discussion
+        of the \fieldname{type} field below. If the \fieldname{address}
+        and \fieldname{publisher} fields are available, the address and
+        publisher part is formatted as with books. The \entryname{unpublished}
+        and \entryname{misc} types are very similar, but there are some
+        differences. For example, \entryname{unpublished} uses the
+        \entryname{organization} field and \entryname{misc} uses the
+        \fieldname{publisher} field, and this part is formatted differently.
+        Further, the \entryname{unpublished} type requires
+        \fieldname{author}, \fieldname{editor}, \fieldname{title}, or
+        \fieldname{type}, whereas with \fieldname{misc},
+        \fieldname{howpublished} takes the first position if these fields
+        are all empty. Finally, as briefly indicated above and discussed
+        in more detail below, \entryname{misc} recognizes some special
+        types in the \fieldname{type} field.
+
+    \item[\entryname{literal}] \mbox{}\\
+        If the other categories do not format the item correctly, this
+        category can be used. The \fieldname{text} field is copied literally
+        to the bibliography. The \fieldname{firstkey}, \fieldname{key},
+        \fieldname{year}, and possibly \fieldname{originalyear} and
+        \fieldname{translator} fields are necessary to get correct
+        in-text citations. However, I have never needed to use this
+        entry type and I think that \entryname{misc} should also
+        be able to format the entry correctly. Furthermore, the
+        correct placement of \entryname{literal} references in the
+        reference list (alphabetizing, sorting), may be problematic.
+
+    \item[\entryname{manual}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        This is treated as a \entryname{misc}, except that when the
+        \fieldname{type} field is empty, it is assumed to be a
+        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}. See also the description of
+        the \fieldname{type} field below.
+
+    \item[\entryname{booklet}\LC]
+    \item[\entryname{inbook}\LC]
+    \item[\entryname{inproceedings}\LC]
+    \item[\entryname{proceedings}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        These categories are defined by all standard citation styles. They
+        are, however, not needed for the examples in the APA manual. For
+        compatibility, however, they are included and defined as follows:
+        \entryname{booklet} = \entryname{proceedings} =
+        \entryname{misc}; \entryname{inbook} = \entryname{inproceedings} =
+        \entryname{incollection}. \citeA[p.~230]{KoDa04} also mention
+        \entryname{conference} as being the same as \entryname{inproceedings};
+        for compatibility, this is now supported in \pkg{apacite}.
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Fields}
+\label{subsec:fields}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the
+\fname{.bib} file:
+\begin{description}
+
+    \item[\fieldname{address}\LC] \mbox{}\\%
+       The address (usually the city and state or country) of the
+       publisher, school, institution, or organization that published
+       the item or at which the item was produced. The APA manual
+       requires that the state or territory of a U.S.-city must be given
+       in the official two-letter U.S. Postal Services form. Only for
+       a specific list of 17 specific cities that are ``well known
+       for publishing'' can (must) the state and/or country
+       description be omitted.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       This is used in some annotated bibliography
+       styles. It is not used by \pkg{apacite}, but no warning
+       is given either. It is thus simply ignored.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{author}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The author(s) of the work. This may also be a corporate
+       author when applicable, but some specific measures must
+       then be taken to prevent the corporate name from being
+       interpreted as a first name and last name
+       (such as ``Association, A. P.''):
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+       It is important to surround the \cmd{\bibcorporate}\marg{Author}
+       by an additional pair of braces. Otherwise, \BibTeX{} sorts
+       the entry as if its name was ``Bibcorporate\marg{Author}''.
+       Section~\ref{sec:xmpl} contains more examples.
+
+       As discussed in the standard \BibTeX{} documentation,
+       multiple authors must be separated by the word \verb+and+,
+       and each author's name can either be given in the form
+       ``\opt{firstnames}\verb+ +\opt{lastnames}'' or
+       ``\opt{lastnames}\verb+, +\opt{firstnames}''. However,
+       ``von'' parts and ``junior'' parts complicate issues
+       a bit. See the examples and the discussion of them.
+
+       I would generally give the full first name(s) in the \fname{.bib}
+       file, even though the APA manual only requires initials,
+       because other styles require full first name(s) and
+       \pkg{apacite} abbreviates to initials automatically.
+       I have done this only occasionally with the examples,
+       because the APA manual only gives the initials.
+       Therefore, I have only provided first names with a few
+       examples for which I knew the authors' first names.
+
+       If there are more than 6 authors, the APA manual requires
+       that the first 6 should be named in the reference list,
+       followed by ``et al.''. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} uses
+       only the names of the first 6 authors, and inserts an
+       ``et al.\hbox{}'' when applicable. Therefore, in the \fname{.bib}
+       file, the first 6 (or more) authors may be given (separated by
+       ``\verb+and+''), followed by ``\verb+and others+''. This phrase
+       is recognized by \pkg{apacite}.
+       It is, however, better to give all authors in
+       the \fname{.bib} file, so that each style can select its
+       own truncation number.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{booktitle}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The title of the larger work, typically book, but sometimes
+       something else, like a report, in which the referenced item
+       (article) was published.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{chair}] \mbox{}\\
+       The chair(s) of a symposium or meeting. Used for lectures.
+       It is formatted the same way as editors.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{chapter}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The chapter number if the referenced item is a chapter in
+       a larger collection. Typically used if the referenced work
+       is a chapter in an internet document. If the collection is
+       a book, page numbers (in the \fieldname{pages} field)
+       should be used instead according to the APA rules.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{crossref}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The \pkg{apacite} package does not recognize this field,
+       because the APA manual does not discuss explicit
+       cross-referencing. If the referenced work is a chapter
+       (article) in an edited book, all relevant information
+       should be given in the reference list as part of the
+       information about the referenced chapter, not as, e.g.,
+       ``In Wainrib (1992)''. If several chapters from the
+       book edited by Wainrib are referenced, the same information
+       about this book is given with each referenced chapter,
+       and the work itself is not a separate entry in the reference
+       list (unless it is explicitly referred to).
+
+       However, the \fieldname{crossref} field
+       \emph{can} be used, as part of standard \BibTeX{} usage.
+       Missing fields for the referenced work are then copied from
+       the cross-referenced entry, which must come \emph{after}
+       the referring entry in the \fname{.bib} file. If you use
+       this, remember to put the title of the book (also) in the
+       \fieldname{booktitle} field, because the \fieldname{title}
+       field of the referring entry is not empty (it contains
+       the chapter title).
+
+       I have not tested cross-referencing in detail, so I do not
+       know whether it behaves well (i.e., complies with the implicit
+       or explicit APA rules) under various circumstances.
+       Therefore, I do not recommend using it without thorough
+       testing.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{day}] \mbox{}\\
+       The day of the month on which the referenced item was published,
+       produced, or presented. Mainly used for articles in daily or
+       weekly magazines or newspapers, for lectures (although the
+       APA manual only specifies the month), and electronic documents.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{edition}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The edition of the book or report. Traditionally, this is of the
+       form ``1st'', ``2nd'', ``3rd'', etc., or ``Rev.'' for a revised edition.
+       This form is still supported, but \pkg{apacite} now also supports
+       the form in which only the number is given: ``1'', ``2'', etc.
+       If \pkg{apacite} detects that only a number is given, it inserts
+       ``\cmd{\PrintCardinal}\marg{number}'' in the \fname{.bbl} file.
+       This \LaTeX{} function converts the number again to ``1st'', etc.
+       The advantage of this is that the same bibliography database can be
+       used for documents in different languages. At least in principle,
+       because language-specific versions of \cmd{\PrintCardinal} have
+       not yet been implemented in \pkg{apacite}.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{editor}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The editor(s) of a book, report, or special issue of a journal.
+       In the examples, this field is also ``misused'' for the
+       producer of a television series.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{englishtitle}] \mbox{}\\
+       The English translation of the title of an item with a non-English
+       title. The APA manual requires that if the referenced work has a
+       non-English title, an English translation should be given as well. For
+       an article in a journal with a non-English name or in a book with a
+       non-English title, the journal name or book title should not be
+       translated or put in this field, only the title of the referenced work
+       itself must be translated. Because, as of version
+       \APACversiondate{2005/06/01}, \pkg{apacite} contains some support of
+       other languages for the main document (see
+       section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}), this field needs rethinking, which
+       will be deferred to a future version (but, as always, suggestions
+       are welcome).
+
+    \item[\fieldname{firstkey}] \mbox{}\\
+       The \fieldname{firstkey} field, if not empty, is used as
+       ``author'' for the first citation to an item. Subsequent citations
+       then use the \fieldname{key} field. This can be used if there is
+       no author or editor field that can be used for citations, or in
+       certain cases with corporate authors, where the citation in the
+       text uses an abbreviation of the author's name for second and
+       subsequent citations, where the abbreviation is introduced in the
+       first citation. It can also be used to ``trick'' the system
+       in difficult cases. See also \fieldname{key}.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{howpublished}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       A description of how something was ``published''. For example,
+       ``Unpublished manuscript'' or ``Paper presented at the meeting
+       of the American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children''.
+       Also used for more retrieval information about electronic
+       documents, e.g., ``Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the
+       PsycARTICLES database'', or
+\begin{verbatim}
+  howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University,
+                  Institute for Learning Technologies Web site:
+                  \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/
+                    publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+\end{verbatim}
+        However, if the retrieval information consists only of a
+        date and/or a URL, it is better to use the \fieldname{lastchecked}
+        and \fieldname{url} fields for this and let \pkg{apacite}
+        format this information. See also the \fieldname{note} field
+        for an alternative to the \fieldname{howpublished} field.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{institution}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The institution, university, or company that published a
+       (technical) report.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{journal}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The journal, magazine, newspaper, etc.{} in which an
+       article, a review, or an abstract of a thesis was published.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{key}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       See \fieldname{firstkey}. The \fieldname{key} field, if not
+       empty, is used for second and subsequent citations, or all citations
+       if \fieldname{firstkey} is missing. If \fieldname{author} is
+       empty and \fieldname{editor} is empty or can not be used as
+       author (e.g., in \entryname{incollection}), the \fieldname{key}
+       field may be necessary to obtain a useful citation. This is
+       so, because the APA manual requires an abbreviation of the
+       title as in-text citation, and the abbreviation must be
+       sensible. In the current version, \pkg{apacite} uses the
+       whole title if \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} are missing.
+       Therefore, if the title is considered too long to use in citations,
+       the user must provide an abbreviation in the \fieldname{key} field.
+       Furthermore, the user must then also define the formatting:
+       If the key is used for a difficult kind of author (e.g.,
+       corporate author), it should be formatted as an author,
+       i.e., in plain text, with names capitalized.
+       If the key is used for an abbreviation of an article
+       title, it should be in plain text, with major words capitalized
+       (unlike in the reference list), and between double quotes
+       (`` and ''; also unlike in the reference list).
+       If the key is used for an abbreviation of a book title, it
+       should be emphasized, with major words capitalized
+       (unlike in the reference list), but not between quotes.
+
+       In a field in the \fname{.bib} file that is also
+       used for the citations, such as the \fieldname{key} field,
+       formatting through, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\itshape Text}},
+  key = {{\em Text\/}},
+\end{verbatim}
+       can be done (note the extra pair of braces!), but the
+       seemingly more logical variations
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {\textit{Text}},
+  key = {{\textit{Text}}},
+  key = {\emph{Text}},
+  key = {{\emph{Text}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+       do not work.
+       However, it is generally preferable to use as less explicit
+       formatting in the \fname{.bib} files as possible, because this
+       decreases the possibilities of successfully using the
+       same \fname{.bib} file with other styles. The following works
+       excellent:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\APACcitebtitle{Text}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+       where the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} macro recognizes that the argument
+       should be formatted as a booktitle (i.e., in italics according to the
+       APA rules). This macro, and its companion \cmd{\APACciteatitle} for
+       article title formatting, are used by \pkg{apacite} if the
+       \fieldname{firstkey} and \fieldname{key} fields are missing,
+       but can also be used by the user. Note that if you use such a
+       \fname{.bib} file with another style, you have to provide
+       definitions of these macros yourself (which can be copied from
+       the \pkg{apacite} source code).
+
+       \emph{Warning:} the \fieldname{key} field, which acts
+       as a kind of pseudo-author, should not be confused with the
+       (citation) \opt{key} that is used to match citations with
+       entries in a \fname{.bib} file.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{lastchecked}] \mbox{}\\
+       The date on which a web page was last visited. Only used in
+       combination with the \fieldname{url} field. Currently,
+       \pkg{apacite} does not contain language-specific code to
+       dissect this date, but copies its contents literally to the
+       \fname{.bbl} file. Hence, if you intend to use the same
+       bibliography database for documents in different languages,
+       you may have to use a self-defined command for this. You can
+       use the \pkg{apacite} commands \cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay}
+       and \cmd{\APACmonth} as templates for this. I will probably
+       provide such a facility in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{month}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The month something was published. Mainly used for
+       magazine or newspaper articles, lectures, and electronic documents.
+       Use the month macros \verb+jan+, \verb+feb+, etc. These are
+       predefined strings in \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst},
+       reverting to \verb+{\APACmonth{01}}+'', etc., with \verb+winter+,
+       \verb+spring+, \verb+summer+, and \verb+fall+ being 13--16. The
+       \cmd{\APACmonth} command translates the numbers to the month or
+       season names. This system allows language-specific behavior at
+       the \LaTeX{} stage, although \cmd{\APACmonth} has not yet been
+       defined for non-English languages. This will be done in a future
+       version of \pkg{apacite}. For the moment, you can easily do this
+       yourself, using the default in \fname{apacite.sty} as a template.
+       If desired, the macros can be overridden by using lines like
+\begin{verbatim}
+@string{jan = "januari"}
+\end{verbatim}
+       at the top of your \fname{.bib} file, but it seems better to redefine
+       the \cmd{\APACmonth} command in your \LaTeX{} document.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{note}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       A note. This puts additional information between parentheses
+       at the end of a reference list entry. In the examples from
+       the APA manual, it is used for NTIS No., ERIC No., and UMI No.,
+       and for notes about how to obtain the work
+       (``Available from \opt{organization}, \opt{full address}'').
+       If however, the work has been obtained from the internet
+       or from an ``aggregated database'', then the
+       \fieldname{howpublished} or \fieldname{url} field should be
+       used, because it should not be between parentheses then.
+
+       Finally, the \fieldname{note} field is used to give the
+       recording date (i.e., year) of a song when this is different
+       from the date (year) of copyright. The latter should be
+       put in the \fieldname{year} field.
+
+       Do not use the \fieldname{note} field to denote the original
+       publication of a reprint or translation, because the
+       \fieldname{originalyear} field must be used in those cases to
+       obtain the correct citation in the text \cite<e.g.,>{ex39}.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{number}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       The number of a journal issue or a report. This can be quite
+       complex, for example, ``\verb+PRM~92-01+'', or
+       ``\verb+3, Pt.~2+'', or ``\verb+1, Serial No.~231+''.
+       These latter examples imply that the generality (language and
+       style independence) of the \fname{.bib} file is somewhat lost.
+       Furthermore, if the journal paginates by year and not by issue,
+       the issue number should not be mentioned at all (except when
+       referring to a whole special issue). Of course, \pkg{apacite}
+       does not know whether the journal paginates by issue or by year.
+       If the \fieldname{number} field is available, \pkg{apacite}
+       simply assumes that it should be included. It is the user's
+       responsibility to ensure that this is indeed the case.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{organization}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+       Used for the \entryname{unpublished} reference type to denote
+       the organization in which the unpublished work was produced.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{originaladdress}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originalbooktitle}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originaledition}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originaleditor}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originaljournal}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originalnumber}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originalpages}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originalpublisher}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originalvolume}]
+    \item[\fieldname{originalyear}] \mbox{}\\
+        These (\fieldname{original*-}) fields have the same
+        meaning as their counterparts without the ``original'' prefix,
+        except that they refer to the book or journal in which the
+        work was originally published. This can be used in referring to
+        translations or reprints of articles in journals or books. If the
+        original work is a book or other ``standalone'' work,
+        only the \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used. If the
+        original work is a (PhD or Master's) thesis that is also abstracted
+        in \emph{Dissertation Abstracts International},
+        \emph{Masters Abstracts International}, or comparable, the
+        \fieldname{originalyear} field should be used to denote the year
+        of the dissertation and the \fieldname{year} field to
+        denote the year of publication of the abstract, even if they
+        are the same.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{pages}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The (inclusive) page numbers of the article that is referred to,
+        in the journal or book in which it was published. If a range of
+        pages is given (which is usually the case), an  en-dash should
+        be used: ``\verb+29--43+''. Other styles sometimes allow a
+        single hyphen (``\verb+29-43+''), which is then automatically
+        formatted as an en-dash (``29--43''), rather than as a hyphen
+        (``29-43''), but I have encountered situations, such as software
+        manuals (LISREL) and reports for the U.S. Government, in which
+        the page number was of the form ``II-3'',
+        meaning page~3 of chapter~2. In such a situation, you may
+        get page numbers like ``II-1--II-15'', where the distinction
+        between a hyphen and an en-dash becomes important. Therefore,
+        \pkg{apacite} does not perform such automatic transformations.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{publisher}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The publisher of the item. Primarily used for books.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{school}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The school or university for which a PhD thesis or
+        master's thesis was written.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{series}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        Not used, although the APA manual has a rule for series.
+        If you refer to a volume in a series, the series title,
+        volume number, and volume title should be joined into
+        a two-part title , e.g., \emph{Handbook of child psychology:
+        Vol.~4. Socialization, personality, and social development},
+        see ex.~36. In \pkg{apacite} this whole part must be put in
+        the \fieldname{title} or \fieldname{booktitle} field
+        (whichever is appropriate).
+
+        For a long time, I have intended to support the
+        \fieldname{series} field to allow disentangling such
+        situations. However, in the end, I have decided not to
+        do this. The reason for this is that, according to my
+        interpretation, the meaning of ``series'' in the APA manual
+        is quite different from the meaning of the \fieldname{series}
+        field, as intended by Oren Patashnik (the author of \BibTeX{}
+        and the original style files). Many books are published in
+        some sort of series. For example, my book with Tom Wansbeek
+        \cite{WaMe00}, is vol.~37 in the \emph{Advanced Textbooks
+        in Economics} series, of which the series editors are
+        C.~J. Bliss and M.~D. Intriligator. The intention of the
+        \fieldname{series} field is to generate a reference list entry
+        like
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{list}{\relax}{\labelsep=0em%
+              \parsep=0pt%
+              \itemsep=0pt plus .3pt\relax%
+              \leftmargin=2.5em%
+              \itemindent=-2.5em}%
+\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
+\sfcode`\.=1000\relax
+\item
+Wansbeek, T., \& Meijer, E.
+\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em
+(2000).
+\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em
+\Bem{Measurement error and latent variables in econometrics}
+(Advanced Textbooks in Economics No.~37).
+\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em
+Amsterdam: North-Holland.
+\end{list}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        In economics (and often in psychology, I guess), mentioning
+        the series usually does not add much relevant information,
+        and it is therefore typically omitted. I think this is how
+        the APA intends it as well. However, in computer science, it
+        is often very convenient, because certain series, like Springer's
+        \emph{Lecture Notes in Computer Science} (LNCS) have a certain
+        status of their own, and researchers know how to find volumes
+        in this series.
+
+        In my interpretation, the APA ``series'' refers to a single
+        multivolume work with separate editors for the constituent
+        volumes, but with a series editor who initiates the whole
+        series. In the example from the APA manual, the
+        \emph{Handbook of child psychology} is not a loose collection
+        of separate books by different authors, but a combined effort
+        managed by the series editor to give an overview of the field.
+        In this case, the series editor may be considered the primary
+        author and it makes sense to have the different volumes of the
+        series together in the reference list. With my book with
+        Tom Wansbeek, the series editors act more like journal editors,
+        and different volumes of the series are unrelated books that
+        do not need to be gathered together in the reference list.
+        It would make no sense to cite this book as
+        ``Bliss, Intriligator, Wansbeek, \& Meijer (2000)''.
+
+        Because in my interpretation, the usual meaning of the
+        \fieldname{series} field should not be included in the
+        reference list according to the APA rules, \pkg{apacite}
+        ignores the \fieldname{series} field. Perhaps I'll
+        implement the APA manual ``series'' rules by introducing
+        a \fieldname{volumetitle} field, but this will further reduce
+        compatibility with other citation styles.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{symposium}] \mbox{}\\
+        The name of the symposium or meeting at which a
+        lecture was given. This is typically used for the
+        construction ``In \opt{chair} (Chair), \opt{symposium}'',
+        see ex.~51. I have never used it myself, however,
+        I always use the ``Paper presented \dots'' form,
+        which puts this information in the \fieldname{howpublished}
+        field.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{text}] \mbox{}\\
+        Used for items of type \entryname{literal}. This field contains
+        the complete literal text to be used in the bibliography.
+        I've never used it.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{title}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The title of the work.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{translator}] \mbox{}\\
+        The translator of a book or article. This should
+        be formatted in the same way as \fieldname{author} and
+        \fieldname{editor}. If the \fieldname{translator} and
+        \fieldname{editor} fields are identical, they are
+        formatted as if there were only an editor, except that the
+        editor receives the suffix ``(Ed. \& Trans.)'' instead of
+        just ``(Ed.)'', or similarly if there is more than 1 editor.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{type}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The type of \entryname{phdthesis} (e.g.,
+        ``Doctoral dissertation''), type of \entryname{article}
+        (e.g., ``Letter to the editor''), type of \entryname{techreport}
+        (e.g., ``DHHS Publication''), type of \entryname{book}
+        (e.g., ``Brochure''), type of \entryname{misc}
+        (e.g., ``Cassette recording''), and so forth.
+
+        With a review (which is typically an \entryname{article}),
+        the \fieldname{type} field contains a lot of information
+        and formatting, e.g.:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle:
+            Psychological and social development in middle age}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+        where I used the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle} command introduced above in
+        the discussion of the \fieldname{key} field.
+
+        In one of the APA manual examples, I used the \fieldname{type}
+        field to give a description of the subject of an unpublished
+        raw data file (``Auditory response latencies in rat auditory
+        cortex''), leaving the \fieldname{title} field blank.
+
+        For most reference types, if the \fieldname{type} field
+        is missing, it is simply ignored and no type description
+        is given. For a \entryname{techreport}, however, if the
+        \fieldname{type} field is missing, the default type
+        (``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'') is inserted. In ex.~42 of the APA manual,
+        a report without a type description is given. To make it
+        possible to format a report successfully without a
+        type description, \pkg{apacite} recognizes
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {\bibnotype},
+\end{verbatim}
+        indicating that there should be no type description.
+
+        Another special purpose use of the \fieldname{type}
+        field is for a computer program, software, programming
+        language and/or manual. These are put into a \entryname{misc}
+        entry, but unlike other \entryname{misc} types (such as
+        motion pictures) the titles of these types should not
+        be italicized. This is now recognized by \pkg{apacite}
+        in the following way: When referring to a computer program,
+        software, programming language and/or manual, you should
+        use the \entryname{misc} reference type with
+        one of the following commands in the \fieldname{type} field:\\
+        \cmd{\bibcomputerprogram},\\
+        \cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual},\\
+        \cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual},\\
+        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftware},\\
+        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual},\\
+        \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, or\\
+        \cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}.\\
+        Using any of these commands as type designator of a
+        \entryname{misc} entry ensures that the title is not italicized,
+        as required. The \entryname{manual} entry is now equal to
+        \entryname{misc} with default type \cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}
+        if the \fieldname{type} field is empty.
+
+        Similarly, if you refer to a message that has been posted to
+        a newsgroup, internet forum, etc., you should use the
+        \entryname{misc} reference type with \cmd{\bibmessage} as
+        \fieldname{type} field.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{url}] \mbox{}\\
+       The web address of a web page. Used if the cited document (or
+       other work) is a web page or was obtained from a website.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{volume}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The volume or volumes of the referenced book(s) or
+        of the book in which the referenced article was published,
+        or the volume of the journal (magazine, newspaper, \ldots)
+        in which the referenced article was published.
+
+    \item[\fieldname{year}\LC] \mbox{}\\
+        The year in which the referenced item was published, or
+        if it was not published, the year in which it was written
+        or presented. For manuscripts or books that are accepted
+        for publication but have not yet been published, ``in press''
+        should be used according to the APA rules. The best way to do
+        this is to use the ``\cmd{\BIP}'' command, which can be redefined
+        by the user if the language or editorial style requires
+        something else than ``in press''. Furthermore, \cmd{\BIP}
+        is recognized by \pkg{apacite} and treated a little differently,
+        because for multiple ``in press'' references with the same
+        author(s), a hyphen (``-'') should be inserted between the
+        ``year'' (i.e., ``in press'') and the ``a'', ``b'', etc., that
+        follow it to distinguish the works, whereas this hyphen must
+        be omitted if the ``year'' is an ordinary year (1991a, 1991b).
+
+        If no date is explicitly given in (or on) the referenced work,
+        a ``n.d.'' (no date) should be given as year description.
+        For this, \pkg{apacite} supports the \cmd{\bibnodate}
+        command. This sometimes leads to different formatting as well,
+        e.g., by referencing a translation of a work of which there
+        is no original date. Then the \fieldname{originalyear}
+        field should be \cmd{\bibnodate} and the \fieldname{year} field
+        is then, e.g., \verb+1931+. If the \fieldname{translator}
+        field is not empty, the citation in the text is then formatted
+        as, e.g., ``\citeA{3.100-2}''.
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Overriding the default sorting orders}
+\label{subsec:sort}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Occasionally, it may be necessary to override \BibTeX's default sorting.
+For example, the way \BibTeX{} handles accents and other nonstandard
+characters, which is typically fine for documents in English, may
+not be acceptable for documents in other languages:
+``\verb+\"{u}+'' is treated as ``\verb+u+'', ``\verb+\ss+'' is treated as
+``\verb+ss+'', and ``\verb+\ae+'' is treated as ``\verb+ae+''.
+In non-English languages this sorting may not be appropriate and one
+may desire that ``\verb+\"{u}+'' is treated as ``\verb+ue+''.
+Numerous problems are caused by different conventions in different languages.
+Some examples are given in the documentation of the \textsf{amsrefs}
+package. Non-latin scripts (Greek, Hebrew, Arabic, Chinese, etc.) may not be
+handled correctly as well. I am not able to judge this, nor does it seem
+to be a problem that must be solved in \textsf{apacite}. It has been
+announced that \BibTeX~1.0, when it will be released, will support
+non-English languages as well.
+
+An issue that occurs in English (APA) documents is that, according to
+the APA, numbers should be sorted as if they were spelled in words:
+``2003'' must be sorted as if it says ``\mbox{twothousandandthree}'';
+see example~4.04 in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below.
+
+Overriding the default sorting order can be done by using the
+\cmd{\APACSortNoop} command in the \fname{.bib} file. This is a \LaTeX{}
+command provided by \pkg{apacite}. It has one mandatory argument, but it
+outputs nothing. However, \BibTeX{} does not know this and uses the
+contents of this command to sort the entry. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd},
+\end{verbatim}
+is sorted as ``\verb*+muller  g+'', whereas
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {{\APACSortNoop{Mueller}}M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd},
+\end{verbatim}
+is sorted as ``\verb*+muellermuller  g+'', which typically results
+in the correct ordering. In the typeset document, both look like
+``M{\"{u}}ller''. Note that the extra pair of braces around the
+\cmd{\APACSortNoop} command are necessary to suggest to \BibTeX{}
+that it is an ``accent''. The specification
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {\APACSortNoop{Mueller}M{\"{u}}ller, Gerd},
+\end{verbatim}
+is sorted as ``\verb*+apacsortnoopmuellermuller  g+'', which is
+incorrect.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Customization}
+\label{sec:custom}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The description in the previous sections, with the exception of
+section~\ref{sec:options}, primarily discussed the default behavior of
+\pkg{apacite}. However, as mentioned in the introduction, in addition to the
+options, \pkg{apacite} offers many possibilities for customization. Most
+punctuation used in the citations and reference list are implemented through
+\LaTeX{} commands instead of explicit symbols. Consequently, the user can
+fine-tune the behavior of \pkg{apacite} by redefining these commands, through
+\cmd{\renewcommand} after \pkg{apacite} has been loaded. Analogously, most
+fixed texts, like ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}'' and ``Eds.\hbox{}'' are implemented
+through \LaTeX{} commands as well, and can similarly be changed by the user.
+The commands used by \pkg{apacite} are discussed in this section. Of course,
+the defaults are based on the rules of the APA manual.
+
+Some commands, predominantly punctuation, are used both in citations and in
+the reference list. If you want their definitions in citations to be different
+from their definitions in the reference list, you can simply redefine their
+definitions before starting the bibliography.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Punctuation and small formatting issues}
+\label{sec:custom-punct}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The following punctuation commands are provided and used for
+the citations and reference list.
+\begin{description}
+  \item[\cmd{\BAstyle}] This defines the text style of the authors
+      (or whatever takes their place) for an in-text citation. It
+      defaults to nothing: The authors use the same fonts as the
+      text surrounding it. Introduced because some journals use
+      a different style. For example, \emph{Statistica Neerlandica}
+      uses small-caps, so for that journal, you would define
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}
+\end{verbatim}
+      Do not use the \cmd{\textsc}-type commands, but \cmd{\scshape},
+      \cmd{\bfseries}, etc. The \cmd{\BAstyle} command is used for
+      the author-part by the citation commands
+      \cmd{\cite},   \cmd{\shortcite},   \cmd{\fullcite},
+      \cmd{\citeA},  \cmd{\shortciteA},  \cmd{\fullciteA},
+      \cmd{\citeNP}, \cmd{\shortciteNP}, and \cmd{\fullciteNP}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BAastyle}] This is the same as \cmd{\BAstyle}, except that
+      \cmd{\BAastyle} is used for \cmd{\citeauthor}, \cmd{\shortciteauthor},
+      and \cmd{\fullciteauthor}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBOP}] Open parenthesis, used for parentheses opening
+      a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1973)'', and the
+      year in the reference list, as in ``Rao, C. R. (1973).''
+      Default is ``\verb+(+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBCP}] The corresponding closing parenthesis.
+      Default is ``\verb+)+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BAP}] This command is inserted after the prefix and before
+      the first citation in a \cmd{\cite} command. It defaults to an
+      ordinary space.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBAA}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation
+      between parentheses and in the reference list, as in
+      ``(Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)'' or ``Mooijaart, A., \&
+      Bentler, P. M. (1986).''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBAB}] Last ``and'' between authors in a citation in text,
+      as in ``Mooijaart and Bentler (1986)''. Default is ``\verb+and+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBAY}] Punctuation between author(s) and year in a citation
+      between parentheses, as in ``(Rao, 1973)''. Default is ``\verb+, +''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBYY}] \label{cmd:BBYY}
+      Punctuation between two subsequent years, if two works
+      by the same author(s) are referenced in a single citation command,
+      as in ``(Rao, 1965, 1973)'' or ``Rao (1965, 1973)''.
+      Default is ``\verb+, +''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBC}] Punctuation between multiple cites, as in
+      ``(Rao, 1973; Mooijaart \& Bentler, 1986)''.
+      Default is ``\verb+; +''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBN}] Punctuation before a note (postfix) after
+      a citation, as in ``(Rao, 1973, chap.~2)''.
+      Default is ``\verb+, +''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBOQ}] Opening quote for an article title in the
+      reference list, as in
+      ``\flqq Random polynomial factor analysis.\frqq'' Default is
+      the empty string: no quotes used.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BBCQ}] Closing quote for an article title in the
+      reference list. Default is the empty string.
+      (The \pkg{theapa} package required the closing period to be part
+      of the closing quote, but this has been
+      changed, because the period must be left out if title comments,
+      such as type, English translation of non-English title, or
+      translator follow the title.)
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BPBI}] Period between initials. Default is ``\verb+.~+'',
+      i.e., a period and a non-breaking space, as required by the APA
+      manual. However, many users prefer removing or reducing the space
+      and in some non-English speaking countries this is customary. This
+      can be achieved by redefining this command to, e.g., ``\verb+.+''
+      (no space) or ``\verb+.\,+'' (small space). This command cannot
+      be used to remove periods altogether, because there is still a
+      period at the end. I.e., redefining it as an empty string gives
+      awkward results like ``Bentler, PM., \& Mooijaart, A.''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BHBI}] Hyphen between initials. Introduced for analogy with
+      \cmd{\BPBI} and used for authors who have two or more first names
+      with a hyphen between them, e.g., Jean-Paul Sartre. Default is
+      ``\verb+.-+'', i.e., a period and a hyphen. Unlike \cmd{\BPBI},
+      I think this one will not be changed often, although \BibTeX{}
+      suppresses hyphens when it suppresses spaces between initials
+      as well, so there are people who have different preferences.
+      (Hence, \pkg{apacite} partly bypasses the standard \BibTeX{}
+      formatting functions to make this work.)
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BCBT}] Comma between authors in the reference section when
+      the number of authors is two, as in
+      ``Mooijaart, A., \& Bentler, P.~M. (1986).'' The comma
+      after the ``A.'' is this one. Default is ``\verb+,+''.
+      The APA manual requires it, but other styles leave out this
+      comma. In such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to
+      be the empty string:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BCBL}] Comma before the last author (for 3 or more authors)
+      in a citation and in the reference section, as in ``(Gill, Murray,
+      \& Wright, 1981)'' or ``Gill, P.~E., Murray, W., \& Wright, M.~H.
+      (1981).'' Default is ``\verb+,+''. The APA manual requires it,
+      which is standard U.S. usage, but other styles, particularly
+      European, such as British English, leave out this comma. Again,
+      in such a case, you would redefine this ``comma'' to
+      be the empty string.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BAnd}] This is the ``and'' that is used in the reference list
+      if someone is both editor and translator:
+      ``In J. Strachey (Ed. \& Trans),''. Default is ``\verb+\&+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\theBibCnt}] If there are multiple citations with the same
+      author and year, a letter should be added to the year to distinguish
+      the references. For example, one may refer to two or more articles
+      by J. Smith published in 1982. They should be referred to as
+      ``Smith (1982a)'', ``Smith (1982b)'', and so forth. To accomplish
+      this, the counter \verb+BibCnt+ is defined in \fname{apacite.sty}.
+      The \cmd{\theBibCnt} command defines how the value of \verb+BibCnt+
+      is formatted. The default is ``\verb+\alph{BibCnt}+''. To
+      emphasize (italicize) the ``a'', ``b'', etc., you can redefine
+      this as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}
+\end{verbatim}
+      (This presumably works better than ``\verb+\emph{\alph{BibCnt}}+''.)
+      To control this behavior, redefining the \cmd{\theBibCnt} command
+      should normally be sufficient. However, the complete formatting
+      commands are \cmd{\BCnt}, \cmd{\BCntIP}, and \cmd{\BCntND}. The
+      second of these is for ``in press'' works, which need an extra hyphen
+      between ``in press'' and the ``a'' and ``b'' suffixes. The third is
+      similar, for works without a date. Their default definitions
+      in \fname{apacite.sty} are
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt}
+\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt}
+\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+  \item[\cmd{\APACciteatitle}] The formatting of the title of an
+      article (or similar work)
+      when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor
+      is available for that purpose. Its default definition
+      in \fname{apacite.sty} is
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}
+\end{verbatim}
+      i.e., the title is put between double quotes.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\APACcitebtitle}] The formatting of the title of a book
+      (or other independent work)
+      when used as a citation in the text when no author or editor
+      is available for that purpose. Its default definition
+      in \fname{apacite.sty} is
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}
+\end{verbatim}
+      i.e., the title is emphasized (in italics) but not put between
+      double quotes.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\APACmetastar}] The asterisk that precedes an item in the
+      bibliography to denote that it is included in the meta-analysis.
+      The default value is ``\verb+\ensuremath{{}^\ast}+'', which
+      prints as ``\APACmetastar''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibnewpage}] If the \pkgoption{bibnewpage} option
+      is chosen, this command is included before the bibliography.
+      Its default definition is \cmd{\clearpage}, but \fname{apa.cls}
+      uses a similar construction with its \pkgoption{man} option
+      through \cmd{\newpage}.
+      See \citeA[p.~215]{LaTeXbook} or \citeA[p.~37]{KoDa04} for the
+      differences between \cmd{\clearpage} and \cmd{\newpage}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibliographytypesize}] This command is used before
+      the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading.
+      It is intended for the font size of the reference list:
+      For \citeA{WaMe00}, I defined it as \cmd{\small} (and even then
+      the reference list took up 34 pages). The default value is
+      \cmd{\normalsize}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibleftmargin}] This gives the indentation of the second
+      and subsequent lines of a reference list entry, relative to the
+      usual left margin. It is not a proper command, but a
+      ``skip'' (rubber length), which means that it cannot be changed by
+      \cmd{\renewcommand}, but by \cmd{\setlength}. Its default
+      value is \verb+2.5em+.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibindent}] This gives the indentation of the first
+      line of a reference list entry, relative to the second line.
+      It is also a ``skip''. Its default value is \verb+-\bibleftmargin+,
+      which means that the first line starts at the original left margin,
+      and the second and subsequent lines are indented by 2.5em.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibitemsep}] This gives the vertical separation
+      between two reference list entries. It is also a ``skip'', with
+      default value ``\verb+\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax+'', i.e., 0pt,
+      but it may be stretched a little to fill the page nicely.
+      This is an old (Plain \TeX) style definition, I will probably
+      change that in a next version. If you want to change it,
+      e.g., to get a blank line between reference list entries,
+      you can use
+\begin{verbatim}
+\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}
+\end{verbatim}
+  \item[\cmd{\bibparsep}] This gives the vertical separation
+      between two paragraphs in the same reference list entry. Such a
+      situation does not occur in the default setup, so it is not
+      used, but it is conceivable that certain customizations lead
+      to its use. It is a ``skip'' with default value 0pt.
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Labels}
+\label{subsec:labels}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+There are many specific pieces of text that can be put into the reference
+list or a citation by \pkg{apacite}. Here, these pieces are called
+\emph{labels}. Almost all of these are to some extent language-specific, and
+sometimes style-specific even within the same language. Therefore, they are
+implemented through \LaTeX{} commands, so that users can easily change them.
+In this section, these commands and their purposes are described, and their
+(U.S.\ English) defaults are given. Section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} below will
+discuss how these commands are changed if another language is used.
+
+The following label commands are used:
+\begin{description}
+  \item[\cmd{\bibmessage}] This is the first of 9 specific type
+      commands that are recognized by \pkg{apacite}. If you
+      define the \fieldname{type} field of a \entryname{misc}
+      entry as ``\cmd{\bibmessage}'', the formatting of the
+      entry is changed (e.g., the title is not italicized),
+      see the discussion of the \fieldname{type} field in
+      section~\ref{subsec:fields} above. This one is used for
+      messages in newsgroups, internet forums, etc.
+      Default is ``\verb+Msg+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogram}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Computer program+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Computer program manual+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Computer program and manual+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftware}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Computer software+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Computer software manual+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Computer software and manual+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibprogramminglanguage}]
+      Default is ``\verb+Programming language+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibnotype}]
+      This one is a bit different from the previous 8. It is used for
+      \entryname{techreport} entries to indicate that the type specifier
+      should be suppressed. Its default value is the empty string, but this
+      will not have an effect on \pkg{apacite} behavior, because the type
+      specifier is suppressed anyway by \pkg{apacite}. However, by defining it
+      as the empty string, formatting may become better (i.e., closer to the
+      desired formatting) with other styles.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibnodate}] Used in the \fieldname{year} and
+      \fieldname{originalyear} fields to indicate that no
+      publication date has been given. Default value is ``\verb+n.d.\hbox{}+''.
+      The ``\verb+\hbox{}+'' ensures that \TeX{} does not treat
+      the last period as a sentence-ending period, after which
+      more space is inserted. This also applies to several other
+      labels discussed below.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BOthers}] Used for ``others'' if the number of authors
+      or editors is too large, as in ``(Gill et al., 1981)''.
+      The default is ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+''.
+
+      However, the definition contains a slight adaptation, because
+      in a previous version of \pkg{apacite}, there was a problem
+      implying that in some cases \BibTeX{} might put an extra period after
+      \cmd{\BOthers}, not recognizing that it already contains a period,
+      so that you would get ``et al.\hbox{}.'', which is undesirable.
+      It depends on the definition of \cmd{\BOthers} whether there should
+      be a period or not: If it is defined as ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+'',
+      there should not be an additional period, but if it is defined
+      as, say, ``\verb+and others+'', then there should be an additional
+      period. But \BibTeX{} does not know what the (later) definition
+      of this command will be in \LaTeX{}. Therefore, the \cmd{\BOthers}
+      command is defined to have one argument. In \BibTeX,
+      \pkg{apacite} inserts \verb+\BOthers{.}+ in the output, so no
+      additional period is inserted by \BibTeX. By default, this
+      command is defined as ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+'', and the argument is
+      simply ignored.
+
+      If you redefine the \cmd{\BOthers} command and need the additional
+      period, you can redefine it appropriately. However, in the current
+      version, the \cmd{\BOthers} command is distinguished from the
+      \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} command and I think the mentioned problems
+      do not occur anymore. Nevertheless, I have kept the definition of the
+      previous version. I may decide, after thorough testing, to change
+      this again in a next version.
+
+      There is still a complication, however. If you use a \cmd{\citeauthor}
+      at the end of a sentence, there may be a period too many, if
+      you end the sentence explicitly with it and \cmd{\BOthers} is
+      ``et al.\hbox{}''. On the other hand, if you omit the sentence-finishing
+      period but decide to redefine \cmd{\BOthers} to ``and others'',
+      the period is missing. Therefore, it seems wise not to end a sentence
+      with a \cmd{\citeauthor}, or you could define a command, e.g.,
+      \cmd{\finishsentence}, and insert it in an appropriate place.
+      Then, this command should be changed along with \cmd{\BOthers}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BOthersPeriod}] Also used for ``others'' if the number of
+      authors or editors is too large, as in
+      ``Gill, P. E., et al.\hbox{} (1981)''.
+      But this one is used for situations when it should always end with
+      a period. The default is ``\verb+et al.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibcorporate}] This command can be used in the \fieldname{author}
+      field (and \fieldname{editor} and \fieldname{translator}) to tell
+      \pkg{apacite} that the author is a corporate author. See
+      section~\ref{subsec:fields} for an example of its usage. In combination
+      with the \pkgoption{includecorporate} and \pkgoption{suppresscorporate}
+      options, it can be used to include or exclude corporate authors from
+      the author index. The usage as described above is structured as if
+      \cmd{\bibcorporate} has an argument, the corporate author name, but
+      by default, this argument simply would have to be copied to the output
+      without further processing. Therefore, in the actual implementation,
+      \cmd{\bibcorporate} does not have an argument and reduces to \cmd{\relax},
+      i.e., it does nothing in \LaTeX{} and exerts its influence at the
+      \BibTeX{} stage.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BIP}] ``In press'', the string to be used as year for
+      in-press references. In the \fname{.bib} file, the \fieldname{year}
+      field should be ``\verb+\BIP+'', so that \pkg{apacite} can recognize
+      this and use appropriate formatting and sorting.
+      The default value is ``\verb+in press+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BIn}] Used for \entryname{incollection} and
+      \entryname{intechreport}, for ``In \opt{editor} (Ed.\hbox{}),
+      \opt{booktitle}'', and similar phrases. Default value is ``\verb+In+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BCHAP}] Used for \entryname{incollection} if the
+      \fieldname{pages} field is empty, to denote the chapter number
+      of the referenced work in the collection. Used primarily for
+      internet documents, where there are no page numbers.
+      Default value is ``\verb+chap.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BCHAPS}] Just like \cmd{\BCHAP}, but this one is used
+      if the \fieldname{chapter} field refers to more than 1 chapter.
+      Default value is ``\verb+chap.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BED}] Editor in reference list, as in
+      ``In P. R. Krishnaiah (Ed.\hbox{})''. Default is ``\verb+Ed.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BEDS}] Editors (more than one editor) in reference list,
+      as in ``In C.~R. Rao \& J.~K. Ghosh (Eds.\hbox{})''.
+      Default is ``\verb+Eds.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BTRANS}] Translator, as in ``(J. Strachey, Trans.\hbox{})''.
+      Default is ``\verb+Trans.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BTRANSS}] Translators. Default is ``\verb+Trans.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BTRANSL}] Translation. Used in a text citation when
+      referring to a translated work for which there is no date
+      for the original work. This is then formatted as
+      ``Aristotle (trans.\hbox{} 1931)''. Default is
+      ``\verb+trans.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BCHAIR}] Chair of a symposium, etc.
+      Default is ``\verb+Chair+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BCHAIRS}] Chairs. Default is ``\verb+Chairs+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BVOL}] Volume, as in ``Vol.\hbox{}~1''.
+      Default is ``\verb+Vol.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BVOLS}] Volumes, as in ``Vols.\hbox{} 1--4''.
+      Default is ``\verb+Vols.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BNUM}] Number, as in ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}
+      No.\hbox{}~12''.
+      Default is ``\verb+No.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BNUMS}] Numbers, as in ``Nos.\hbox{} 3--5''.
+      Default is ``\verb+Nos.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BEd}] Edition, as in ``2nd ed.\hbox{}''.
+      Default is ``\verb+ed.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BPG}] Page, default is ``\verb+p.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BPGS}] Pages, default is ``\verb+pp.\hbox{}+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BTR}] The (default) technical report type name, which can be
+      overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+      ``\verb+Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}+''
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BPhD}] The (default) PhD thesis type name, which can be
+      overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+      ``\texttt{Doctoral dissertation}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BUPhD}] The (default) Unpublished PhD thesis type name,
+      which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+      ``\texttt{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BMTh}] The (default) master's thesis type name, which can be
+      overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+      ``\texttt{Master's thesis}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BUMTh}] The (default) unpublished master's thesis type name,
+      which can be overridden by the \fieldname{type} field. Default is
+      ``\texttt{Unpublished master's thesis}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BOWP}] ``Original work published'', default is
+      ``\texttt{Original work published}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BREPR}] ``Reprinted from'', default is
+      ``\texttt{Reprinted from}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\Bby}] ``by'' in the construction
+       ``by P.~R. Krishnaiah, Ed.\hbox{}'' referring to the original
+       editor of a reprinted work. Default is ``\verb+by+''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BAuthor}] ``Author'' as a description of the publisher
+       if the author and publisher are the same. Default is
+       ``\verb+Author+''
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BAvailFrom}] ``Available from'', used if the \fieldname{url}
+       field is specified but the \fieldname{lastchecked} field is not.
+       Default is ``\verb+Available from\ +''. Note the extra space.
+       This construction allows customization by redefining this command
+       as being empty, thereby omitting the phrase altogether, without
+       undesirable extra space.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BRetrieved}] ``Retrieved from'', used if both the
+       \fieldname{url} field and the \fieldname{lastchecked} field are
+       specified. It has one argumnt: the date, i.e., the contents of
+       the \fieldname{lastchecked} field. The default is
+       ``\verb+Retrieved {#1}, from\ +'', again with extra space.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\BMsgPostedTo}] Used for messages to newsgroups and the like.
+       Default is ``\verb+Message posted to\ +'', with space.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\refname}] Name of the reference list if it's a section.
+      (So it's the section name.) Default is ``\verb+References+''.
+      A problem with the current implementation is, that if you use
+      \pkg{babel}'s \cmd{\selectlanguage} command, then \cmd{\refname}
+      and \cmd{\bibname} are overwritten. Because \pkg{babel}'s
+      definitions of these commands are often (for various languages)
+      different from the names prescribed by the APA manual and analogous
+      bodies in other countries, it will often be necessary to redefine
+      \cmd{\refname} or \cmd{\bibname} if you have used
+      \cmd{\selectlanguage}. I hope to provide a fix in a next version
+      of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibname}] Name of the reference list if it's a chapter.
+      Default is ``\verb+References+''. See also \cmd{\refname}.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\bibliographyprenote}] This command is used before
+      the reference list, but after the section or chapter heading,
+      and immediately after \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}.
+      It is intended for an optional note just before the references
+      in the reference list. It defaults to nothing, but can be changed
+      to a list of commands (e.g., if some commands should be different
+      in the reference list than in the text) and/or some text.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\APACmetaprenote}] If a meta-analysis is reported, the
+      works included in the meta-analysis should in the bibliography be
+      preceded by an asterisk, see the description of \cmd{\APACmetastar}
+      above. This should then be explained in a note before the references.
+      This command contains the text of that note. Default is
+      ``\texttt{References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+      included in the meta-analysis.}''.
+
+  \item[\cmd{\authorindexname}] Name (heading) of the author index.
+      Default is ``\verb+Author Index+''.
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{More drastic formatting changes to the reference list}
+\label{sec:custom-big-formatting}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, most of the formatting of the
+reference list is done in the \BibTeX{} stage, i.e., by the \fname{.bst}
+files. This corresponds with most other \BibTeX{} styles. This makes
+it difficult for users to customize the formatting of the reference
+list: They would have to make their own \fname{.bst} file, by adapting
+\fname{apacite.bst}. Certain small changes are relatively easy to make,
+but \BibTeX's ``bst'' language is not easy to understand for most users,
+and thus most desired changes, though seemingly small, may be too
+complicated to implement. Another drawback of this setup is that, each
+time I release a new version of \pkg{apacite}, users would have to make
+the same adaptations again. In the early days of \pkg{apacite}, wasting
+disk space was another drawback, but this is not important anymore.
+
+To overcome the most salient of these problems, \pkg{apacite} has always
+deferred some formatting choices to the \LaTeX{} stage, by using
+tailor-made formatting commands instead of explicit formatting,
+as discussed in sections~\ref{sec:custom-punct} and~\ref{subsec:labels}
+above. The amount of formatting thus handled has slightly grown over
+time, but still most choices were hard wired in the \BibTeX{} styles.
+
+In the current version of \pkg{apacite}, a big step has been made in
+transferring these choices to the \LaTeX{} domain. Hence, a much
+larger set of commands, with wider-ranging scope, has been defined,
+and considerably fewer choices are made at the \BibTeX{} stage. For
+example, \fname{apacite.bst} now inserts
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\mbox{\cmd{\APACjournalVolNumPages}%
+      \marg{journal}%
+      \marg{volume}%
+      \marg{number}%
+      \marg{pages}%
+     }
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+in the \fname{.bbl} file for an \entryname{article} entry, and
+the actual formatting of this information is defined in
+\fname{apacite.sty}. If all four components are available, the
+default (APA manual) formatting of this looks like
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\mbox{\Bem{Acta Paedopsychiatrica},
+      \Bem{38}(9),
+      {229--231}}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+but by redefining this command, users can change this, e.g., to
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\mbox{\Bem{Acta Paedopsychiatrica}
+      \textbf{38}, No.~9:
+      {229--231}}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+The advantage of this is that users can fairly easily construct a
+customized style by redefining only a few commands in \LaTeX, by
+using \cmd{\renewcommand}. Users will generally find it much easier
+to do this than adapt the \fname{.bst} files. Furthermore, only
+the affected commands need to be redefined, so that, when a new
+version of \pkg{apacite} becomes available, all the new features
+can be used---with the exception of the redefined commands, of
+course---without having to adapt everything again. The drawback
+is that the \fname{.bbl} file becomes less readable and more
+difficult to adapt: Previously, it was easy to make ad-hoc changes
+by editing the \fname{.bbl} file, but this has now become more
+difficult. However, I intend to make this facility more user-friendly
+in the future, e.g., by introducing options in the \LaTeX{} package
+(say, \pkgoption{boldvolume}) or by introducing user-friendly
+commands that accomplish the same (say, \cmd{\boldvolume}), so that
+the advantages will clearly outweigh the disadvantages for the vast
+majority of users.
+
+Some packages (\pkg{amsrefs} and \pkg{biblatex} are the ones I am
+aware of) handle the formatting of the reference list completely
+in the \LaTeX{} domain, using \BibTeX{} only for sorting the reference
+list. The current version of \pkg{apacite} does not go that far;
+there are still certain choices that are hardwired in the \BibTeX{}
+code. Examples are the ordering of the various blocks (most notably
+the position of the year; some styles have this at the end) and the
+formatting of names. It is doubtful whether \pkg{apacite} will follow
+the path toward the end, like these other packages. Some formatting
+choices are closely connected with sorting of entries (e.g., by title
+if there is no author; this assumes that the title then takes the
+author position) or other cross-entry relations (such as adding
+`a' and `b' suffixes to the year). Therefore, it does not seem
+useful to disconnect these choices by handing them over to \LaTeX.
+
+The following commands are currently implemented to format the reference
+list. If you want to customize them, you can study the source code in
+the file \pkg{apacite.sty}, copy it to you own package file, and adapt
+the code as desired.
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+\cmd{\APACmonth}                    & Month name (as function of a number)                       \\
+\cmd{\APACrefYear}                  & Year in the reference list                                 \\
+\cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay}          & Year + month + day                                         \\
+\cmd{\APACrefatitle}                & Title (article style, default upright)                     \\
+\cmd{\APACrefbtitle}                & Title (book style, default italicized)                     \\
+\cmd{\APACrefaetitle}               & English translation of title (article)                     \\
+\cmd{\APACrefbetitle}               & English translation of title (book)                        \\
+\cmd{\APACjournalVolNumPages}       & Journal, volume, number, and pages                         \\
+\cmd{\APACaddressPublisher}         & Address and publisher                                      \\
+\cmd{\APACaddressInstitution}       & Address and institution (for technical reports)            \\
+\cmd{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}   & Address and publisher if the publisher is the author       \\
+\cmd{\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth} & Address and institution if the latter is the author        \\
+\cmd{\APAChowpublished}             & \fieldname{howpublished} field                             \\
+\cmd{\APACorigED}                   & Original editor for reprints and translations              \\
+\cmd{\APACorigEDS}                  & Ditto, multiple editors                                    \\
+\cmd{\APACrefnote}                  & Formatting of \fieldname{note} field                       \\
+\cmd{\APACorigyearnote}             & Original year + optional note                              \\
+\cmd{\APACorigjournalnote}          & Original journal (+ volume, number, pages) + optional note \\
+\cmd{\APACorigbooknote}             & Formatting of ``original'' information if the original is a book \\
+\cmd{\APACbVolEdTR}                 & Technical report information                               \\
+\cmd{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}              & Ditto, for \entryname{intechreport}
+\end{tabular}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+In addition, the following environments are used:
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+\envirname{APACrefURL}    & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field              \\
+\envirname{APACrefURLmsg} & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field for messages
+\end{tabular}
+\mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\
+It is likely that these lists will be expanded in future versions of
+\pkg{apacite}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Language support}
+\label{sec:compat-babel}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The APA is, of course, American, and therefore the rules in the APA manual
+are also based on the (U.S.) English language. Because \pkg{apacite} was
+primarily designed to implement the APA rules, and because I write all
+my scientific work in English, \pkg{apacite} originally did not contain
+explicit support for other languages. However, most language-specific
+elements have been implemented in the form of \LaTeX{} commands, so that
+users could define their own \LaTeX{} package in which these elements were
+changed. The labels discussed in section~\ref{subsec:labels} above are the
+most important part of this.
+
+Furthermore, when writing in a non-English language, the \pkg{babel} package
+will usually be loaded. The \pkg{babel} package is an extensive package that
+facilitates using \LaTeX{} for documents in languages other than English.
+There have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{babel} and
+\pkg{apacite}, and therefore since 2003 \pkg{apacite} contained some
+explicit code to overcome the compatibility problems. I think this works
+well, provided that \pkg{apacite} is loaded \emph{after} \pkg{babel}.
+
+Thus, although \pkg{apacite} did not support non-English languages
+explicitly, it did facilitate them. Supporting non-English languages is
+not a main objective of \pkg{apacite}, because it is not needed for
+the APA. Nevertheless, it potentially is a useful addition. Many journals in
+non-English languages and universities in countries where other languages
+are spoken base their rules on the APA manual. Therefore, it is
+efficient if, with a few adaptations, \pkg{apacite} can also be used in
+these circumstances. For this reason, and based on user requests,
+\pkg{apacite} has contained some explicit language support since June 2005.
+
+The unpacked \pkg{apacite} distribution contains files that have names
+according to the construction \opt{language}\fname{.apc}, i.e.,
+\fname{english.apc}, \fname{dutch.apc}, etc.
+These files define the language-specific modifications of \pkg{apacite},
+mainly translations of terms like ``and'', ``Ed.\hbox{}'', etc. They have been
+written by \pkg{apacite} users who are (native) speakers of the languages
+involved. If the \pkg{babel}, \pkg{german}, or \pkg{ngerman} package is
+loaded, \pkg{apacite} is able to determine the language of the document that
+is processed. Then the corresponding \fname{.apc} file, when available, is
+read. In this way, language-specific elements are changed to the relevant
+language. This is done fully automatically, the user does not have to do
+anything explicitly. However, sometimes an \fname{.apc} file makes some
+assumptions (such as \fname{greek.apc}, which assumes ISO-8859-7 encoding)
+or makes some choices that are nontrivial. Therefore, look at the source
+code of the \fname{.apc} file (or in the Implementation section of this
+manual if you have generated this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation}
+option) if you obtain unexpected results. These files contain some brief
+documentation of the specific issues relevant for the language at hand.
+
+The list with available \fname{.apc} files has been given in
+section~\ref{sec:usage}. One file is defined for each ``language'', which can
+be used for several ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel} terminology). For example,
+\fname{english.apc} is also used if the language is ``american''. See the
+documentation of the \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} packages for a list of
+dialects of the language files supplied. If an \fname{.apc} file is not
+available for the language you need, you can use one of the supplied ones as a
+template and write your own. If you send it to me, I can include it in a next
+version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+Note, however, that this form of language support is still very limited.
+There are many aspects that are not yet covered, like different forms of
+dates (month-day vs.\ day-month). As is clear from this manual, some
+facilities for expanded language support have been implemented in
+\pkg{apacite}, but this has often not yet been applied in the \fname{.apc}
+files. Thus, future versions of \pkg{apacite} need to improve on this.
+
+The \pkg{babelbib} package offers very sophisticated support of
+different languages. Perhaps some of the features that it offers are
+useful additions to \pkg{apacite} as well, and this these may be included
+in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Compatibility}
+\label{sec:compat}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Generally speaking, I would want \pkg{apacite} to be compatible with other
+packages, of course. However, what does compatibility mean? It can mean
+various things:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \label{compat1}%
+      The same \fname{.bib} file can be used with
+      different \BibTeX{} styles and \LaTeX{} citation packages;
+\item \label{compat2}%
+      The same citation commands as other citation packages;
+\item \label{compat3}%
+      Another \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a
+      \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by the \pkg{apacite}
+      \BibTeX{} style;
+\item \label{compat4}%
+      The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be used with a
+      \fname{.bbl} file that is generated by another \BibTeX{} style;
+\item \label{compat5}%
+      The \pkg{apacite} \LaTeX{} citation package can be loaded at the
+      same time as other packages without errors or undesirable
+      side-effects.
+\end{enumerate}
+Because of the complicated rules of the APA manual, it is not always possible
+to achieve all kinds of compatibility with all other packages. Later in this
+section, I will discuss compatibility issues with other packages with which
+known incompatibility problems exist or have existed. A first example of this,
+the \pkg{babel} package, has already been mentioned above in
+section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}.
+
+Point~\ref{compat1} is the most important. If you have to write a completely
+different \fname{.bib} file for different citation styles, there does not seem
+to be an advantage in using \BibTeX{}. You might as well write the reference
+list explicitly in \LaTeX{} then. However, not even this point can be achieved
+completely, although the vast majority of the items will be the same for
+different styles. But there remain a number of choices that are style-specific
+and that lead to differences in the \fname{.bib} file. Examples from the APA
+manual are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If a referenced book is volume~III according to its title
+      page, this should be referenced as Vol.~3 according to the
+      APA manual rules, but that may not be the case with other
+      styles;
+\item Journal names are abbreviated by some styles, but not
+      according to the APA manual rules;
+\item Publisher names should be abbreviated according to the
+      APA manual, e.g., ``John Wiley \& Sons'' becomes ``Wiley''.
+      Other styles do not do this;
+\item The issue number of a journal should only be given if
+      the journal starts each issue with page~1, not if page
+      numbers of different issues in the same volume are consecutive.
+      Other styles may require the issue number in all cases;
+\item Page ranges are given as ``341--351'' in APA style, whereas
+      other styles use ``341--51'';
+\item The APA rules require a capital after a colon (`\verb+:+'),
+      so that subtitles start with a capital as well. Other styles
+      may not do this;
+\item The APA has specific rules about the address: For a U.S. city,
+      the state (or territory) should be given as a 2-letter code
+      from the U.S. Postal Services, and the province and country
+      should be given if it is a non-U.S. city, unless it is one of
+      the 17 (U.S. and non-U.S.) cities that are ``well-known for
+      publishing''. Then, only the city should be mentioned. There
+      are similar exceptions if the name of the state (and sometimes
+      even city) is already mentioned in the university name and
+      the university acts as publisher;
+\item Yearbooks like \emph{Annual Review of Psychology} should be treated
+      as journals according to the APA rules, whereas other styles
+      treat these as books;
+\item The additional fields (such as \fieldname{translator} and the
+      \fieldname{original*}-fields) that are used by \pkg{apacite} but are
+      not defined in other \BibTeX{} styles are of course
+      \pkg{apacite}-specific.
+\end{itemize}
+Some of these problems can be handled relatively elegantly. For example,
+the user could use a command like ``\verb+\RomanVol{3}+'' in the
+\fieldname{volume} field. Then, the user could define a counter,
+\verb+RomanVolcounter+, say, in \LaTeX{} and then define
+\cmd{\RomanVol} (similar to \cmd{\BCnt} discussed earlier) as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\RomanVol}[1]{%
+  \setcounter{RomanVolcounter}{#1}\theRomanVolcounter}
+\end{verbatim}
+where \cmd{\theRomanVolcounter} is defined as \verb+\arabic{RomanVolcounter}+
+if \pkg{apacite} is loaded and as \verb+\Roman{RomanVolcounter}+ if another
+package is loaded that desires this. The example with style-specific
+\fname{.bib} files that contain the definitions of journal-strings was already
+given in section~\ref{sec:bib} above. However, many users will not go through
+all this trouble, and not all problems can be solved in this way. So we have
+to realize that not all entries in the \fname{.bib} file will be suitable for
+all citation styles. On the other hand, most citation styles and journals are
+not as critical as APA journals and many styles in psychology and other social
+sciences (including economics) are very similar, so a \fname{.bib} file that
+is tailor-made for \pkg{apacite} is likely to be suitable enough for the
+styles of most relevant alternative journals.
+
+Point~\ref{compat2} above is currently not fulfilled. The \pkg{apacite}
+citation commands are directly based on those of its immediate predecessor,
+\pkg{theapa}. But the use of `\verb+<+' and `\verb+>+' for prefixes is not
+used by other packages. The influential \pkg{natbib} package uses \cmd{\citep}
+and \cmd{\citet} instead of \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\citeA}, and uses many more
+alternative commands, see section~\ref{sec:compat-natbib} below. The
+\pkg{chicago} package uses \cmd{\citeA} instead of \cmd{\citeauthor}, many
+``numerical'' citation styles only recognize \cmd{\cite}, and so forth. As
+discussed below, I now consider \pkg{natbib} as the standard with which other
+packages should comply. Therefore, future versions of \pkg{apacite} will
+support the \pkg{natbib} citation commands, but the current version does not
+do that.
+
+I think that points~\ref{compat3} and~\ref{compat4} are not that important. It
+seems to me that there is not much wrong with defining a style through a
+combination of a \fname{.sty} and \fname{.bst} file, each requiring the other
+to work. However, given the possibilities and philosophy of the \pkg{natbib}
+package, it would be desirable that \fname{natbib.sty} can be used with
+\fname{apacite.bst}. As discussed below, this works, although it requires
+\fname{apacite.sty} to be loaded as well, before \fname{natbib.sty}.
+
+Point~\ref{compat5} is very important, especially with other packages that are
+complementary to \pkg{apacite} in some sense. It would be very annoying having
+to choose between using \pkg{babel} and \pkg{apacite}, or between
+\pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{apacite}, etc. These packages serve totally different
+purposes, cannot usefully be compared, and are more valuable when they can be
+used jointly. The rest of this section addresses this issue for a number of
+packages with which compatibility problems are known to exist or have existed.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{\pkg{natbib}}
+\label{sec:compat-natbib}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{natbib} package is a general purpose citation package that is
+intended to work with a broad range of \BibTeX{} (and non-\BibTeX{}) styles
+that generate the bibliography. The \pkg{natbib} package is quite advanced and
+can be used to switch easily between completely different citation styles.
+Furthermore, the apparent popularity of \pkg{natbib} has inspired writers of
+packages that would otherwise be incompatible with \pkg{natbib} to write code
+to resolve these incompatibilities. I will mention some of these packages
+below.
+
+I consider \pkg{natbib} as the \emph{de facto} standard with which
+other packages should be compatible. Unfortunately, \pkg{apacite} is still
+not entirely compatible with \pkg{natbib}. The main incompatibility is that
+different citation commands are used, so that it is not possible to use the
+same document with \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{apacite}.
+
+\pkg{apacite}, building on its predecessors, uses \cmd{\cite} for
+parenthetical citations and \cmd{\citeA} for in-text citations, whereas
+\pkg{natbib} uses \cmd{\citep} and \cmd{\citet} for these purposes. Moreover,
+text that should precede the citation is entered between \verb+<+ and \verb+>+
+marks and text that should follow the citation is entered between square
+brackets (\verb+[+ and \verb+]+, i.e., a standard \LaTeX{} optional argument)
+in \pkg{apacite},  whereas \pkg{natbib} uses \emph{two} optional arguments
+between brackets. If there is one optional argument, \pkg{natbib} interprets
+this as text following the citation (just like \pkg{apacite}). If there is
+text that should precede the citation, but not text that should follow the
+citation, two optional arguments must be used in \pkg{natbib}, the second
+being empty.
+
+Furthermore, both packages have defined some alternative citation commands,
+such as \cmd{\citeNP} (\pkg{apacite}) and \cmd{\citealp} (\pkg{natbib}), some
+of which serve the same purpose and could therefore be mapped onto each other
+easily, but some others have no equivalent in the other package.
+
+A partial conversion table, listing the main \pkg{apacite} commands and their
+(closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalent is given in Table~\ref{tab:APAnatConv}. The
+APA requirement and \pkg{apacite} behavior of listing the full author list for
+the first citation (if there are at most 5 authors) and the short author list
+in subsequent citations is accomplished by loading \pkg{natbib} with the
+\pkgoption{longnamesfirst} option. This is assumed in the table. An example of
+better APA-like behavior of \pkg{natbib} is that, by using the
+\pkgoption{sort} option, \pkg{natbib} is able to sort the references within
+the same citation command, as required by the APA manual, whereas
+\pkg{apacite} does not have this option yet.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{table}[htp]
+\caption{Partial conversion table of the main \pkg{apacite}
+         citation commands and their (closest) \pkg{natbib} equivalents.}
+\label{tab:APAnatConv}
+\begin{tabular}{lcl}
+\hline
+\pkg{apacite}            & $\mbox{}\qquad\qquad\mbox{}$ & \pkg{natbib}       \\
+\cline{1-1}\cline{3-3}
+\cmd{\cite}              &                              & \cmd{\citep}       \\
+\cmd{\citeNP}            &                              & \cmd{\citealp}     \\
+\cmd{\citeA}             &                              & \cmd{\citet}       \\
+\cmd{\citeauthor}        &                              & \cmd{\citeauthor}  \\
+\cmd{\citeauthorNP}      &                              & \cmd{\citeauthor}  \\
+\\
+\cmd{\fullcite}          &                              & \cmd{\citep*}      \\
+\cmd{\fullciteNP}        &                              & \cmd{\citealp*}    \\
+\cmd{\fullciteA}         &                              & \cmd{\citet*}      \\
+\cmd{\fullciteauthor}    &                              & \cmd{\citeauthor*} \\
+\cmd{\fullciteauthorNP}  &                              & \cmd{\citeauthor*} \\
+\\
+\cmd{\shortcite}         &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citep}       \\
+\cmd{\shortciteNP}       &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citealp}     \\
+\cmd{\shortciteA}        &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citet}       \\
+\cmd{\shortciteauthor}   &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citeauthor}  \\
+\cmd{\shortciteauthorNP} &     & \cmdtwo{shortcites}{keys}\cmd{\citeauthor}  \\
+\\
+\cmd{\citeyear}          &                              & \cmd{\citeyearpar} \\
+\cmd{\citeyearNP}        &                              & \cmd{\citeyear}    \\
+\cmd{\nocite}            &                              & \cmd{\nocite}      \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Many labeling and punctuation commands are also different but similar between
+\pkg{natbib} and \pkg{apacite}. I haven't studied the \pkg{natbib} commands
+in detail, but will do so in the future. It is my intention to add
+\pkg{natbib}-compatible commands to apacite in the future, so that the same
+document can be processed either with \pkg{natbib} or with \pkg{apacite}.
+
+When you want to use \pkg{natbib} for citation and \pkg{apacite} for the
+reference list, you still need to load the \LaTeX{} package \fname{apacite.sty}
+(with \cmd{\usepackage}), because of the commands that are included in the
+\BibTeX{} output (as defined in section~\ref{sec:custom} above). The
+\fname{apacite.sty} file must be loaded \emph{before} \fname{natbib.sty},
+otherwise you will get lots of error messages. I may try to fix that for
+a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+Using \pkg{natbib} for the citations has some advantages over using
+\pkg{apacite} for the citations. Apart from the abovementioned sorting
+of citations within a single citation command, these are mainly
+\pkg{natbib}'s better compatibility with some other important packages,
+although many compatibility problems with \pkg{apacite} have now been
+solved.
+
+However, \pkg{natbib} does not fully comply with the APA rules.
+Known incompatibilities between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules are: (1)
+Multiple adjacent citations with the same author and year are formatted
+as ``Johnson, 1991a,b'' by \pkg{natbib}, whereas the APA manual requires
+this to be ``Johnson, 1991a, 1991b''; (2) The APA manual requires ``and''
+between authors to be ``and'' in text and ``\&'' in parenthetical citation,
+but \pkg{natbib} does not make this distinction.
+
+I could change the \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst} \BibTeX{}
+style files so that \pkg{natbib} would be ``fooled'' and the first
+problem would be resolved. However, this has the drawback of imposing APA
+style citations when you request \pkg{natbib} style citations, and you
+may actually want the behavior mentioned above. I am only able to provide
+one of these possibilities. It would be better to add an option to
+\pkg{natbib} with which the desired behavior can be chosen. Thus, you
+could try to put pressure on the author of \pkg{natbib} to achieve this.
+Alternatively, I might attempt to provide an option to \pkg{apacite}
+in the future that controls this behavior of \pkg{natbib}.
+
+The second incompatibility between \pkg{natbib} and the APA rules mentioned
+above occurs because \pkg{apacite} uses the re-definable \cmd{\BBA}
+command for this usage of ``and''. The \pkg{natbib} citation commands
+do not redefine \cmd{\BBA}, so you can choose only one of these, or you
+must redefine \cmd{\BBA} explicitly before each citation.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{\pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{backref}, and \pkg{url}}
+\label{sec:compat-hyper}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{hyperref} package turns (\mbox{cross-}) references into hypertext
+links. This can be used in conjunction with a program such as \latextohtml{}
+to compose \fname{.html} files with clickable links, to internet pages or
+within the same document, or it can be used to create a \fname{.pdf} document
+with clickable crossreferences. Evidently, citations are also references.
+Therefore, the \pkg{hyperref} package transforms these into hypertext links as
+well, and needs to redefine the citation commands and reference list commands
+in order to do so. These redefinitions have caused severe incompatibility
+problems between \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{hyperref} in the past. Previous
+versions of \pkg{apacite} contained an experimental \pkgoption{hyper}
+option that solved some problems, but left others. In the current version
+of \pkg{apacite}, the incompatibility problems have been solved, and
+the \pkgoption{hyper} and \pkgoption{nohyper} options are now obsolete.
+However, some of the ``dirty tricks'' I needed for complicated examples
+in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} still conflict with \pkg{hyperref}. You will
+probably not encounter these problems very often, but if you do these can
+be easily solved by editing the \fname{.bbl} file instead of using
+dangerous tricks; see also section~\ref{sec:autindex} below.
+
+The \pkg{backref} package adds to each entry in the bibliography a list
+of pages (or sections) on which it is referenced. Hence, it serves as
+an alternative to an author index, in which not the entries themselves
+are backreferenced, but the authors of these entries, see
+section~\ref{sec:autindex}. Note that \pkg{natbib} offers yet another
+possibility, viz.\ the citations in the standard index, or a separate
+citation index, see the \pkg{natbib} documentation. In my opinion,
+the \pkg{backref} way of indexing the page numbers of the citations
+is more logical. Moreover, it is more condensed as well.
+
+Obviously, the \pkg{backref} package has to change the citation commands
+and reference list to be able to do its backreferencing.
+Because \pkg{apacite} redefines these as well, they are conflicting
+to some degree. A similar compatibility problem between \pkg{backref}
+and \pkg{natbib} was noticed by the author of \pkg{backref}. Therefore,
+\pkg{backref} contains some code to make it compatible with \pkg{natbib}.
+This code has been adapted for \pkg{apacite} and incorporated in
+\pkg{apacite}. Thus, \pkg{backref} as a standalone package has been made
+compatible with \pkg{apacite}. The drawback of this solution is that if
+changes are made in the \pkg{backref} package, this may result in new
+incompatibilities with \pkg{apacite} unless \pkg{apacite} is changed as
+well. Whether, and if so, when, this will occur will be a question for
+the future.
+
+Apart from being a standalone package, \pkg{backref} can also be
+combined with \pkg{hyperref}. It is then not loaded separately,
+but through the \pkgoption{backref} or \pkgoption{pagebackref}
+option of the \pkg{hyperref} package. In this case, the backreferences
+become hypertext links. See the discussion of the \pkg{hyperref}
+package above.
+
+The \pkg{url} package provides the \cmd{\url} command for formatting URLs,
+i.e., web addresses. It is typically loaded if \pkg{hyperref} is also
+loaded, but it is very useful on its own as well. There are no
+compatibility problems with \pkg{apacite} and it is not required when
+using \pkg{apacite}. However, if you use the \fieldname{url} field,
+\pkg{apacite} puts it into a \cmd{\url} command. If the \pkg{url}
+command is not defined by another package, \pkg{apacite} provides a
+crude definition, so that no errors are generated. But the formatting
+thus obtained usually does not satisfy the APA rules about formatting,
+especially its rules about line breaking within a URL. The default
+line breaking rules of the \pkg{url} package are fairly close to the
+APA rules, but there are some differences. Therefore, \pkg{apacite}
+provides several URL-styles that adhere to the APA line breaking
+rules, supplemented by the additional suggestions in
+\citeA[p.~645]{chicago}.
+
+The only difference between the URL styles defined by \pkg{apacite}
+is which font family they use: \verb+APACtt+ uses \cmd{\ttfamily},
+\verb+APACsf+ uses \cmd{\sffamily}, \verb+APACrm+ uses \cmd{\rmfamily},
+and \verb+APACsame+ does not define a font family, and thus uses the
+font family that is active at the start of the URL. \verb+APACtt+ is
+selected by default, but you can select another URL style by inserting
+the command \cmd{\urlstyle}\marg{style} in your document, after
+\verb+\begin{document}+. See the documentation of the \pkg{url}
+package for more details.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Multiple bibliographies}
+\label{sec:compat-chapterbib}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{chapterbib} package allows separate bibliographies for separate
+chapters of a book, or, technically, separate \cmd{\include}d files. To work
+properly, it needs some small changes to the citation package, which are
+clearly described in the \pkg{chapterbib} documentation. These changes have
+been incorporated in \pkg{apacite}, and therefore \pkg{apacite} is compatible
+with \pkg{chapterbib}.
+
+It is generally advisable not to use the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option of
+\pkg{chapterbib}, because this redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which
+interferes with the redefinition by \pkg{apacite}. You can use the
+\pkgoption{sectionbib} option of \pkg{apacite} to accomplish that the
+bibliography or bibliographies are sections, rather than chapters.
+
+Moreover, \pkg{apacite} is configured such that it takes a section as default
+if it is in the main matter (signified by \cmd{\mainmatter}) of the document.
+In the back matter (\cmd{\backmatter}) the bibliography is put in a chapter.
+This is also the case if \cmd{\chapter} is defined but \cmd{\mainmatter} not.
+(Is this possible? Perhaps for reports?) Consequently, the
+\pkgoption{sectionbib} option is only useful in specific circumstances. The
+\pkgoption{nosectionbib} forces the bibliography to be a chapter, provided
+\cmd{\chapter} is defined. (I figured a \pkgoption{chapterbib} option would be
+a bit confusing, so I stuck with \pkgoption{nosectionbib}.)
+
+The \pkg{bibunits} package is an alternative to \pkg{chapterbib}. It allows a
+greater flexibility in choosing the scope of a bibliography (chapter, section,
+or arbitrarily defined part of the document). In previous versions, there
+have been some compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{bibunits},
+but these have now been solved.
+
+The \pkg{multibib} and \pkg{multibbl} packages support using multiple
+bibliographies simultaneously. Thus, one can cite entries from multiple
+bibliographies in the same part of the document. This may be useful of one
+wants thematically different bibliographies or separate bibliographies for
+references in different scripts (e.g., Latin and Greek). These packages
+accomplish this by introducing different citation commands for the different
+bibliographies. \pkg{apacite} contains compatibility code such that these
+packages can be used jointly with \pkg{apacite}.
+
+The \pkg{bibtopic} package offers a similar functionality, but instead of
+using separate citation commands, it requires the user to keep the references
+in different \fname{.bib} files, so that there is one bibliography per
+\fname{.bib} file. \pkg{apacite} contains a little bit of compatibility code,
+which largely seems to work, but ``and'' between authors is always ``\&'', even
+in \cmd{\citeA}. I hope to fix this in a future version of \pkg{apacite}.
+
+Another package that offers similar functionality is \pkg{splitbib}. This
+uses neither different citation commands, nor separate \fname{.bib} files.
+rather, it requires the user to declare the ``category'' of each cited
+reference, typically at the beginning of the document. Again, \pkg{apacite}
+contains compatibility code such that simultaneous redefinitions of some
+of the citation and reference list commands do not conflict.
+
+A few caveats must be mentioned here. First, simultaneous bibliographies
+only work well if it is guaranteed that there are no ambiguities in the
+reference lists. With a single bibliography, ambiguities are resolved at the
+\BibTeX{} stage by adding initials to ambiguous first author names,
+adding additional authors before (or instead of) ``et al.\hbox{}'' to
+ambiguous multiple-author lists, and adding ``a'' and ``b'' suffixed to
+the year for references to different documents with the same authors published
+in the same year. Because, with the exception of \pkg{splitbib}, these
+packages require multiple \BibTeX{} runs on separate selections of references,
+\fname{apacite.bst} can only resolve ambiguities within the same bibliography.
+When there are cross-bibliography ambiguities, these are not resolved. It
+seems like these packages are primarily intended to work with numbered
+citation styles, or otherwise labeled citation styles, so that unique
+cross-bibliography numbers or labels can be generated at the \LaTeX{} stage.
+
+Second, I wrote the compatibility code in early 2006 (sorry about the long
+delay for this release) and have only superficially tested it recently.
+It seems to work, apart from minor details, but there may be problems I am
+not aware of. Please let me know if you encounter such problems. Then I'll
+try to fix them or at the least mention them in the next version of the
+manual. In particular, I believe that usage of \cmd{\nocitemeta} is not
+prefectly integrated yet: You may get the ``References marked\dots'' message
+even if the relevant bibliography does not contain marked references,
+or references that are \cmd{\nocitemeta}'d for one bibliography but not
+for another are marked for both. I don't think the \cmd{\nocitemeta}
+command is used much, so I would be surprised if anybody encountered
+such problems, but please let me know if you do. Then I'll try to fix them.
+
+Third, the compatibility code for all of these packages either follows
+instructions given in those packages, or brutally redefines part of the
+code of those packages. If these packages change, this may mean that
+new compatibility problems are created, or that improved features of
+these packages are not available when combined with \pkg{apacite}. I do
+not have the time to regularly check for updates of these packages and
+then study changes and/or test compatibility again. Instead, I only take
+action when a user notifies me of a problem, or I coincidentally find out
+myself. Therefore, again, please let me know if you encounter problems.
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\subsection{Programs for conversion to html, rtf, etc.}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+There are several programs that convert \LaTeX{} files to other types
+of files, most notably \fname{html} and \fname{rtf}. This may, for example,
+be useful if you want to publish your document on the internet or if you
+are requested to send a ``Word'' file to a journal. I have received reports
+that \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} do not handle documents that use
+\pkg{apacite} well. Therefore, I have studied these programs. This section
+contains my observations. Note that these are quite old and not updated, and
+it is quite likely that the software mentioned in this section has been
+altered (improved) considerably. Therefore, the information may be outdated.
+Please let me know if there are major changes that I should be aware of.
+
+\latextohtml{} is a \Perl{} program that converts a \LaTeX{} input
+file into one or more \fname{.html} files, so that a document that is prepared
+with \LaTeX{} can be used as a (user-friendly) internet document. For papers,
+lecture notes, and transparencies of classes, I always convert the
+\fname{.dvi} file output by \LaTeX{} to a \fname{.pdf} file (through the
+\pkg{dvipdfm} program), which can be read by most people, e.g., using the
+\pkg{Adobe Reader} program or browser plug-in. I find \fname{.pdf} files
+more convenient, because I can download a whole paper or presentation
+with a single click and then print it and read it when and where I desire,
+whereas typical examples of conversions to \fname{.html} use many
+\fname{.html} files, which can only be conveniently read from the computer
+screen when and where you're connected to the internet. Nevertheless, I can
+imagine that someone would like to convert a document to \fname{.html}, e.g.,
+because it loads faster and reads easier from the screen, because for some
+documents most people will have to use only a small part and can easier browse
+or search through it, or just because you want to make a home page and do not
+want to learn the html-language.
+
+Similarly, \LaTeXrtf{} is a standalone program that converts a \LaTeX{}
+document to \fname{.rtf} format, which can be read by most word processors.
+This may be convenient if you (a \LaTeX{} user) want to share a document with
+someone who does not work with \LaTeX{}, or as mentioned above, if you are
+required to send a ``Word'' file to a journal.
+
+Both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} implement \LaTeX{} macros etc.\ in
+another programming language (\latextohtml{}: \Perl{}; \LaTeXrtf{}: C) and
+process the \fname{.tex} files directly. This design implies that the
+conversion program must know the definitions of all \LaTeX{} macros that
+are used. A drawback of this design is that essentially the same code has
+to be written in different programming languages (\LaTeX{} macros for the
+\fname{.sty} file, \Perl{} for \latextohtml{}, and C for \LaTeXrtf{}), but
+typically with some adaptations specific for the application at hand.
+
+With \LaTeXrtf{}, the \LaTeX{} macros that it is able to process are included
+in the C source code that is compiled. Consequently, no user additions are
+possible in principle. However, the source code is freely available, so if you
+define a \LaTeX{} macro, you could adapt \LaTeXrtf{}'s source code and
+recompile \LaTeXrtf{}. It is obvious that this is very inconvenient,
+especially if \LaTeX{} macros are defined differently for different styles or
+if they are defined differently in different parts of the same document.
+
+Version~1.9.15 and higher of \LaTeXrtf{} contains some support for
+\pkg{apacite}, but lags a few versions of \pkg{apacite} behind and thus
+doesn't work with recent versions of \pkg{apacite}. Moreover, even if this
+would be fixed, e.g., because I (or you) send patches to the \LaTeXrtf{}
+authors, this wouldn't do justice to the flexibility of \pkg{apacite}, i.e.,
+its customization options.
+
+In contrast with this, \latextohtml{} allows the possibility to supply
+external \Perl{} scripts. If \latextohtml{} encounters a
+\cmdtwo{usepackage}{package} command in the document, it attempts to read the
+corresponding \opt{package}\fname{.perl} \Perl{} script. \latextohtml{} is
+shipped with many such \Perl{} scripts. There is not one for \pkg{apacite},
+but there is one for \pkg{natbib}, which could possibly be adapted for
+\pkg{apacite}. Alternatively, you could use the \pkg{natbib} citation commands
+and use the \pkg{natbib} package, which should work. This will become more
+straightforward when, in a future version, \pkg{apacite} also supports the
+\pkg{natbib} citation commands. Then the \fname{natbib.perl} script may
+possibly be copied to \fname{apacite.perl} without having to adapt much.
+However, I have never studied \Perl{}, and I do not particularly like the
+idea of having to learn that language for this purpose, so it is not very
+likely that in the near future \latextohtml{} will work well with
+\pkg{apacite}.
+
+Note, however, that the design with the \Perl{} scripts has the advantage
+that, if you customize the usage of \pkg{apacite} by writing your own
+\fname{.sty} file that renews the definitions of some macros, you can also
+supply a corresponding \Perl{} script, so that your customizations are
+processed.
+
+An alternative to both \latextohtml{} and \LaTeXrtf{} is \TeXht{}. This is
+a collection of programs and style files that convert \LaTeX{} to
+various formats, such as html, xml, and OpenOffice format. If you have
+OpenOffice, the latter can be used to convert to Word (or rtf) format.
+The principle of \TeXht{} is to let \LaTeX{} do most of the formatting and
+processing of commands, and do the conversion at low-level \TeX{} commands.
+In this way, all newly defined commands and user-defined changes are
+automatically supported. This even carries over to redefinitions of macros
+in the middle of a document. However, for some specific purposes, there are
+some additional things that must be arranged. Therefore, \TeXht{} contains a
+large list of \fname{.4ht} files that are necessary to support various
+\LaTeX{} packages. One of these is the \fname{apacite.4ht} file. The main
+purpose of this file is to make citations into hyperlinks to the corresponding
+entries in the reference list. Currently, this only works partially, but
+the citation text itself is formatted correctly, so this is only a
+relatively minor inconvenience. But, of course, it would be better if this
+would work perfectly. Perhaps I'll study the problems in the future and
+solve this for a future version (although, technically, it is a \TeXht{}
+problem and not an \pkg{apacite} problem).
+
+The choice of which converter to use will typically not (only) depend on how
+good it works in conjunction with \pkg{apacite}. Furthermore, apart from the
+converters mentioned above, there are several additional converters that I
+haven't studied at all. I will only study them if I receive reports about
+incompatibility and even then it is far from certain that I will be willing or
+able to fix the problems. It would be very demanding if I would have to define
+the \pkg{apacite} commands in a large number of programming languages for a
+large number of different converters. Because I prefer the design of \TeXht{}
+and because this converter seems to work best at the moment, I will give a
+bit more attention to this one.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Generating an author index}
+\label{sec:autindex}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+The \pkg{apacite} package contains an option to (almost) automatically
+generate an author index. This is done by using the \fname{apacitex.bst}
+\BibTeX{} style file instead of \fname{apacite.bst} and loading the
+\fname{apacite.sty} \LaTeX{} package with the \pkgoption{index} option,
+either explicitly or implicitlt through one of the \pkgoption{stdindex},
+\pkgoption{tocindex}, \pkgoption{emindex}, or \pkgoption{ltxemindex} options.
+
+In previous versions of \pkg{apacite}, the \pkgoption{index} option
+automatically loaded the \pkg{index} package for multiple indexes, so that
+you can have a subject index as well as an author index. However,
+the current document uses the standard \pkg{ltxdoc} class for documenting
+\LaTeX{} packages, and this class uses another method for supporting
+multiple indexes, which appears incompatible with the \pkg{index} package.
+I have yet been unable to resolve these compatibility problems and,
+therefore, have implemented another way to generate an author index in
+addition to other indexes. This uses the same principles as \pkg{ltxdoc}
+and thus does work for this user's manual. As a consequence,
+\pkg{apacite} now offers options that generate the author index either
+with the \pkg{index} package or without it.
+
+The \pkgoption{indexpackage} option implies that author indexing is done
+according to the \pkg{index}-scheme, whereas the \pkgoption{noindexpackage}
+uses the \pkg{ltxdoc}-based scheme. These options are ignored if the
+\pkgoption{index} option of \pkg{apacite} is not requested. When the
+\pkgoption{index} option is requested, the \pkgoption{indexpackage} option
+loads the \pkg{index} package. This is the default unless it is disabled
+by using either the \pkgoption{noindexpackage} option or the
+\pkgoption{ltxemindex} option.
+
+Obviously, the \pkg{index} package must be available in a directory that
+is read by \LaTeX{} if the \pkgoption{indexpackage} option is requested,
+either explicitly or implicitly. If a subject index is desired, it must be
+defined by the user, it is not defined by \pkg{apacite}. See the manual of
+the \pkg{index} package on how to do this. A default author index \emph{is}
+defined by \pkg{apacite}. The author index is then requested by putting
+\begin{verbatim}
+\printindex[autx]
+\end{verbatim}
+at the point in the \LaTeX{} document where the index is supposed to appear.
+To include the author index in the processed document, the following sequence
+must be followed: First, \LaTeX{}, which puts citation entries in the
+\fname{.aux} file. Second, \BibTeX{}, which generates the bibliography in the
+\fname{.bbl} file. Third, \LaTeX{} (at least) twice, which puts index entries
+in a \fname{.adx} file, Fourth, \MakeIndex{}, which uses the \fname{.adx} file
+as input and puts the formatted index in a \fname{.and} file, which can be
+processed by \LaTeX{}. So, if the main document is \fname{filename.tex}, then
+\MakeIndex{} must be called as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+makeindex -o filename.and filename.adx
+\end{verbatim}
+although the command with which the \MakeIndex{} program must be called may on
+some systems be slightly different, e.g., \fname{makeinde} or
+\fname{makeindx}. Furthermore, several additional options may be chosen on the
+\MakeIndex{} command line. Fifth, run \LaTeX{} again, which (finally) includes
+the formatted author index in the \fname{.dvi} file.
+
+The \pkg{apacite} package provides some options to change the appearance of
+the index somewhat. With (only) the \pkgoption{index} option, the indexing
+facility is turned on, but the \envirname{theindex} environment is not explicitly
+(re)defined by \pkg{apacite}. This means that this environment is defined just
+like in standard \LaTeX{}, or the \pkg{index} package, or some other package
+that be loaded that redefines this environment.
+
+The \pkgoption{stdindex} option explicitly uses the definition of the
+\envirname{theindex} environment that is defined in the \pkg{index} package
+[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)].
+With this definition, the index does not appear in the table of contents. With
+the \pkgoption{tocindex} option, this definition is augmented with a table of
+contents entry. With the \pkgoption{emindex} option, there are some alternative
+definitions. It writes a table of contents entry as well, but the index itself
+is now set in two columns using the \pkg{multicol} package instead of the
+\cmd{\twocolumn} command, the text of the index is set in small type, and the
+page head is not put in uppercase. The \pkgoption{ltxemindex} option uses
+the same style as the \pkgoption{emindex} option, except that it does not
+load the \pkg{index} package and is thus tailored to a somewhat different
+indexing method.
+
+When a table of contents entry is desired, another additional \LaTeX{} run is
+required to obtain the table of contents with the author index included. In
+exceptional cases, the extra line in de table of contents may cause the text
+to be moved as well, so that it may be necessary to run \MakeIndex{} a second
+time, followed by yet one or two more \LaTeX{} runs.
+
+The definitions of the index discussed apply to all indexes in the document,
+so to, e.g., the subject index as well as the author index. This may be
+undesirable, and therefore future versions of \pkg{apacite} may contain
+options or commands to switch index styles. In fact, this is done in the
+current document (if you generate it with \cmd{\AlsoImplementation}),
+using the \cmd{\APACdocindex} command defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}.
+In the absence of explicit options, if you want a different index style,
+either for all indexes in your document or only for some indexes, you can
+define such a style using the \cmd{\renewenvironment} command in the
+appropriate place. See the standard \LaTeX{} documentation for this
+command. You can use the source code of the \pkg{index} package, or
+the \pkg{apacite} source code for that matter, as a template.
+
+Finally, some elements of the formatting of the index itself can be changed
+by using (and/or writing) an \fname{.ist} file containing the preferred
+options. \MakeIndex{} should then be called with the filename of this index
+style file after a ``\verb+-s+'' option on the command line, so, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+makeindex -s mystyle.ist -o filename.and filename.adx
+\end{verbatim}
+The \MakeIndex{} documentation discusses the possible options that can be put
+into the \fname{.ist} file.
+
+As discussed in sections~\ref{sec:options}, \ref{subsec:fields}, and
+\ref{subsec:labels}, the \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} and
+\pkgoption{includecorporate} options can be used to either
+excludes corporate authors from the author index or include them in it.
+The \cmd{\bibcorporate} command must be used in the \fname{.bib} file
+to denote a corporate author.
+
+For some of the examples from the APA manual, I had to use quite advanced
+\LaTeX{} tricks to obtain the correct formatting in the text, the reference
+list, and the author index; see section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. This will
+typically not be necessary in practice. In the unlikely event that you
+encounter similar difficult cases, it will usually be sufficient to use
+a relatively simple trick in the \fname{.bib} file. In rare situations,
+this may still give incorrect formatting, most likely in the author index.
+Somewhat less rare is the situation when there is such a problematic case
+but you also want to use the \pkg{hyperref} package. The tricks I used
+conflict with \pkg{hyperref}.
+
+An easy solution to incorrect formatting and/or sorting in the author index is
+to edit the \fname{.bbl} file manually. This should be done at a time when
+\BibTeX{} will not have to be run again. Otherwise, the changes would be
+overwritten by the next \BibTeX{} run. This editing of the \fname{.bbl} file
+is not in the \TeX-spirit, but in my experience---I used it for two books
+with lots of references \cite{meijer1998,WaMe00}, with a previous version of
+\pkg{apacite} that caused a fair amount of problematic cases---this takes very
+little time, usually only minutes (compare that with the time spent on writing
+a book, or with the time that would be necessary to manually make an author
+index).
+
+The connection between the \fname{.bbl} file and the author index is through
+\cmd{\AX} commands that are entered by \fname{apacitex.bst} in the
+\fname{.bbl} file. These are responsible for the author indexing facilities.
+By looking at the contents of the \fname{.bbl} file, some changes that lead to
+correct formatting are immediately obvious. For example, the entry for Bender
+is generated by the following lines:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AX{bender  jdirector
+@Bender, J\BPBI
+  {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}.}%
+\end{verbatim}
+It is immediately clear that this can be changed to
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AX{bender  j
+@Bender, J.}%
+\end{verbatim}
+Then, this author will be formatted correctly in the author index,
+and conflicts with \pkg{hyperref} are resolved.
+Note that \pkg{apacite} uses the \opt{key}\verb+@+\opt{visual} form of
+indexing. This form is used in \MakeIndex{} to distinguish between the actual
+representation in the index and the place where it should occur. The \opt{key}
+is used by \MakeIndex{} to sort the entry, but the entry actually appearing in
+the index is \opt{visual}. In the \opt{key} part as formatted by
+\pkg{apacite}, all names are in lower case letters and all accents and
+punctuation are removed. Furthermore, \pkg{apacite} inserts \emph{two} spaces
+between surname and initials, and to \MakeIndex{}, two spaces are different
+from one space. Spaces between surnames are removed, as well as spaces between
+initials. Finally, note that \pkg{apacite} always inserts a new line before
+the ``\verb+@+''. This is to avoid bad line breaks by \BibTeX. To \MakeIndex,
+this means that each citation \opt{key} ends with a space.
+
+The author index of the current document does not contain entries for the authors
+Shocked and Goodenough as cited in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}, although it does for
+the reference list part. The reason for this is that the \fieldname{key} field was
+used for the citations. If you use the \fieldname{key} (and \fieldname{firstkey})
+field and you want the authors in the author index as well, you have to include
+the index command \cmd{\AX} explicitly. For example, the \fieldname{key} field
+for Michelle Shocked is
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the
+         Waterfall}{track~5}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+and if we change this into
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked\AX{shocked  m
+         @Shocked, M.}}{1992}{Over the Waterfall}{track~5}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+then citations to her are included in the author index.
+
+For corporate authors, the \cmd{\corporateAX} command is used instead of the
+\cmd{\AX} command. Depending on whether the \pkgoption{suppresscorporate}
+option or the \pkgoption{includecorporate} option is requested, either explicitly
+or implicitly, \cmd{\corporateAX} either swallows its argument or is equivalent
+to \cmd{AX}. To make sure that this ends up correctly in the author index,
+it is important that this command as entered in the \fieldname{key} and/or
+\fieldname{firstkey} field is exactly as output by \fname{apacite.bst} for
+the \fieldname{author} field. The easiest way to accomplish this is to start
+with \fieldname{key} and/or \fieldname{firstkey} fields that do not have
+the \cmd{\corporateAX} command yet. Then, run \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} and
+extract the correct \cmd{\corporateAX} command from the \fname{.bbl} file
+and insert this in the \fieldname{key} and/or \fieldname{firstkey} fields.
+Rerun \BibTeX{} and after that proceed as usual. For example, the following
+is an excerpt from an entry for one of the examples from section~3.96 in the
+APA manual:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author   = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+  firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}},
+  key      = {{NIMH}},
+\end{verbatim}
+If I run \LaTeX{} and \BibTeX{} on the current document, the \fname{.bbl}
+file contains the lines
+\begin{verbatim}
+\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+@{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+Note the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command and the additional braces. If these
+are left out,
+\begin{verbatim}
+  firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health
+              [NIMH]}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+              @{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+  key      = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+              @{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+then this organization gets two separate entries in the author index, which
+is incorrect. Instead, if we copy them literally,
+\begin{verbatim}
+  firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health
+              [NIMH]}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+              @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}},
+  key      = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth
+              @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+then evrything is as desired. The additional spaces before the ``\verb+@+''
+sign make no difference, but percentage signs should not be included in
+the \fname{.bib} file at the end of lines to hide a line break (as in
+\LaTeX{}), because \BibTeX{} does not recognize the percentage sign as
+a comment. Rather, it includes it in the \fname{.bbl} file and sometimes
+puts additional code behind it, which would then not be read by \LaTeX{}
+because \LaTeX{} does interpret the percent sign as a comment. This
+behavior has now become less likely, because \pkg{apacite} inserts
+numerous line breaks in the \fname{.bbl} file to avoid this problem and,
+more importantly, line breaks inserted by \BibTeX{} at undesired
+locations (e.g., in the middle of a command name or in the argument of
+a \cmd{url} command), but is still a possibility.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{\fname{apacdoc.sty}}
+\label{sec:apacdoc}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below cites all examples from the APA manual.
+This is a test of \pkg{apacite} and a proof that it does what it's
+supposed to do---format citations and reference lists complying with
+the APA rules. However, the APA manual discusses many nonstandard
+issues and several of them need nonstandard treatment. Some of these
+can only be formatted by what I call ``tricking'' the system. This
+has been done by defining several \LaTeX{} commands that are too
+specifically tailored for a certain reference, or ad hoc in other
+ways, or more generally experimental and not well tested, and likely
+to lead to more (compatibility) errors. Therefore,
+I do not consider these commands suitable for inclusion in the
+\pkg{apacite} package proper, i.e., the file \fname{apacite.sty}.
+
+They are not important enough for that, and thus you would rarely need
+them, and for most of them I anticipated (or hoped) at one point that
+better solutions would be available in the future. Thus, it seemed
+quite likely that major changes in these commands would be made,
+and I didn't want to feel obliged to keep supporting them for backwards
+compatibility. Rather, I considered these as illustrations of the
+power of \LaTeX{} and templates that users can base their own tricks
+upon. Accordingly, these commands were defined in the preamble of
+previous versions of the user's manual, which used to be the file
+\fname{apacite.dtx}.
+
+I still largely feel the same way about these commands, although
+I'm not convinced anymore that within reasonable time I will come up
+with elegant solutions that make them obsolete. Nevertheless, I still
+make improvements in this direction, and the support of the
+\fieldname{url} and \fieldname{lastchecked} fields in his version of
+\pkg{apacite} is an example of this.
+
+With the restructuring of the distribution in a \fname{.dtx} file,
+I have reconsidered the position of these commands, and have decided
+to put them in a supplementary package file, \fname{apacdoc.sty}. As
+this name indicates, it is a package that is intended to be used
+for the \pkg{apacite} documentation (i.e., the current document).
+
+It contains several commands and settings (like page margins) that
+are not interesting outside this document. However, as mentioned
+above, I needed many of the commands defined in this file for the
+examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. Thus, you might encounter
+similar situations as well, and these commands may be useful for you.
+
+Because most of the commands in \fname{apacdoc.sty} will not be
+useful for you (or may even interfere with your document), and
+because the settings defined in it will most likely not be what you
+want, it is generally not a good idea to load this file with
+\cmd{\usepackage} to use the commands that are useful to you.
+Instead, if you want to use them, you can copy their definitions
+to the top of your own document or personal style file (say,
+\fname{mysettings.sty}, study their behavior, and perhaps improve
+them. This reflects the ``illustration'' or ``template'' nature
+of these commands.
+
+Accordingly, this section briefly mentions the commands that may
+be useful outside the context of the current document. Thorough
+documentation is outside the scope of this manual; their definitions
+can be studied in the source code of \fname{apacdoc.sty}, and their
+usage is illustrated in section~\ref{sec:xmpl}. I will mildly
+support them, though: If you want to use them, you can ask me
+questions, but I will not put as much effort in fixing possible
+problems as I do with proper \pkg{apacite} issues.
+
+The list below mentions (some of) the numbered examples in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} in which the commands are used.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\cmd{\bibleciteA}]
+\item[\cmd{\fullbibleciteA}]
+\item[\cmd{\shortbibleciteA}]
+\item[\cmd{\biblecite}]
+\item[\cmd{\fullbiblecite}]
+\item[\cmd{\shortbiblecite}]
+\item[\cmd{\bibleciteNP}]
+\item[\cmd{\fullbibleciteNP}]
+\item[\cmd{\shortbibleciteNP}] \mbox{}\\
+Citing the Bible. One mandatory argument: relevant chapter and verse, e.g.,
+\verb+\biblecite{1~Cor.\ 13:1}+ (ex.~3.100-3).
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibleversion}] \mbox{}\\
+Defines the version of the Bible used:
+\verb+\bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}+. Use this before using
+the bible citing commands, typically in the preamble of your document.
+Note that the Bible is not included in the reference list. You can use
+these commands as templates for references to other ``classic'' works.
+See ex.~3.100-3.
+
+\item[\cmd{\citesong}]
+\item[\cmd{\fullcitesong}]
+\item[\cmd{\shortcitesong}]
+\item[\cmd{\citeAsong}]
+\item[\cmd{\fullciteAsong}]
+\item[\cmd{\shortciteAsong}]
+\item[\cmd{\citesongNP}]
+\item[\cmd{\fullcitesongNP}]
+\item[\cmd{\shortcitesongNP}] \mbox{}\\
+These cite a song as required by the APA (except for the relative
+placement of closing quotes and comma). See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibsong}] \mbox{}\\
+For \cmd{\citesong} and its siblings, the \fieldname{key} field
+(and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) should contain the relevant
+information in the form of a protected \cmd{\bibsong} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibInstring}] \mbox{}\\
+This command has one argument. The macro changes the definition of
+the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the argument and then immediately changes
+the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time
+change. Used to change ``In'' a book to ``On'' a CD for citing songs.
+See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\BOn}] \mbox{}\\
+``On'', for citing songs ``On'' a CD. See ex.~69.
+
+\item[\cmd{\DSMcite}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMfullcite}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMshortcite}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMciteA}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMfullciteA}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMshortciteA}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMciteNP}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMfullciteNP}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMshortciteNP}] \mbox{}\\
+Commands to cite the DSM. See ex.~29. Can also be used for other
+``named'' works. \pkg{natbib} offers a similar functionality
+through the definition of an \emph{alias}, but I think that to
+get this working in the way the APA wants (i.e., the alias is not
+used for the first citation, but only for second and subsequent
+citations), it cannot be directly used. But the technical
+implementation of its functionality may form a useful basis
+for a better (more elegant) solution for this type of citation.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibDSM}] \mbox{}\\
+For \cmd{\DSMcite} and its siblings, the \fieldname{key} field
+(and possibly \fieldname{firstkey}) should contain the relevant
+\cmd{\bibDSM} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric Association}{Diagnostic
+         and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}{4th
+         ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+See ex.~29.
+
+\item[\cmd{\DSMauthor}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMfulltitle}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMedition}]
+\item[\cmd{\DSMshorttitle}] \mbox{}\\
+These four commands extract the four elements of a \cmd{\bibDSM}
+command. They are used in the \cmd{\DSMcite} command and its
+siblings, but may occasionally be useful by themselves.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibliteral}] \mbox{}\\
+This command is used in some of the examples in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} to put some literal text into the
+reference list that would otherwise be abbreviated to a
+single ``initial'' at the \BibTeX{} stage. For example, in
+ex.~4.08, the authors are ``Bulatao, E. (with Winford, C.~A.)'',
+where ``(with Winford, C.~A.)'' is inserted by wrapping it
+in a \cmd{\bibliteral} command, which itself is wrapped in
+an additional pair of braces, so that \BibTeX{} treats it a
+a complicated ``accent'' and the argument as a complicated
+single character. This text should not be put in the author
+index, and therefore some manipulation through redefining
+the meaning of this command before and after the reference
+list is used to suppress this text, as well as an additional
+period, there. Used in examples 4.08, 65, 66, 68, and 70.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibinitial}] \mbox{}\\
+This command is similar to \cmd{\bibliteral}. It is used in
+one example (ex.~67), where the ``author'' is a ``(Producer)'',
+but the initial of the author is put in the text because there
+is another author with the same surname (Miller). This
+causes problems not encountered in the examples where
+\cmd{\bibliteral} is used, and after a lot of trial and error,
+the current definition of \cmd{\bibinitial} was developed
+to format this particular author correctly in text, reference
+list, and author index. It looks like this is an improved
+version of the \cmd{\bibliteral} command, so perhaps in the
+next release I'll use \cmd{\bibinitial} for all the examples
+in which now \cmd{\bibliteral} is used.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibreftext}] \mbox{}\\
+This command takes two arguments. By default, it ignores the
+first and inserts the second in the output. In this manual,
+it is redefined before the reference list to ignore its
+second argument and insert the first argument in the output.
+This is used in ex.~17, where the year in the in-text
+citation should be ``1992/1993'', whereas in the reference
+list, it should be 1992 (and the 1993 is listed elsewhere).
+For reprints and translations, this is handled automatically
+by \pkg{apacite} if you use the \fieldname{original*} fields,
+but this one is different.
+
+\item[\cmd{\Dutchvon}] \mbox{}\\
+This command is equivalent to \cmd{\bibreftext}, but is used
+for a different situation, and therefore, depending on
+language, subtle style differences, and other preferences,
+you might want to change the definition of one but not of
+the other. This one illustrates how the Dutch way to treat
+``von'' parts of surnames can be handled. It is discussed
+in ex.~B-2, although it is not actually used in the examples,
+because the Dutch way to treat ``von'' parts is not APA
+style.
+
+\item[\cmd{\SwapArgs}] \mbox{}\\
+This command takes two arguments and swaps their order. This
+is useful if you cite a work whose title, (corporate) author,
+or other element starts with an article that should be
+disregarded for ordering. \pkg{apacite} disregards ``a'',
+``an'', and ``the'' in the sorting of titles, but these are
+obviously English. For French, you could say
+\begin{verbatim}
+  title = {\SwapArgs{Marseillaise}{La }},
+\end{verbatim}
+which is thus alphabetized under M. (Not used in the examples.)
+
+\item[\cmd{\swallownext}] \mbox{}\\
+Eats up the next character. Dangerous but sometimes useful.
+Used in the definitions of some of the following commands.
+
+\item[\cmd{\swallowdot}] \mbox{}\\
+Eats up the next character, but only if it's a dot (`.').
+Used in the definitions of some of the following commands.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibnodot}] \mbox{}\\
+Used as \verb+\bibnodot{.}+. Eats the period, but prevents \BibTeX{}
+from adding one. Used in examples 78, 79, 87, 91, and 95.
+This is likely to be useful for many users, and is stable, so it
+may be upgraded to \fname{apacite.sty} in the next release of
+\pkg{apacite}. The only thing against this is that it is used in
+highly unelegant manual formatting of a fairly large piece of the
+description of a reference to a website in a
+\fieldname{howpublished} field. I'd prefer to avoid this, but that
+would require either adding another idiosyncratic field or even
+less elegant trickery in the \fname{.bib} file.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}] \mbox{}\\
+Suppresses the period after a subsequent closing brace. Quickly leads
+to errors because it uses very low level \TeX{} code that (locally)
+changes some fundamental settings. This is used in some examples
+(65, 68) where \cmd{\bibliteral} is used to insert a description
+of a first ``author'', such as ``(Producer)''. This is
+interpreted by \BibTeX{} as a complicated one-letter first
+name, and thus it adds a period to make it into an initial.
+This period is the one that's eaten by this command.
+Used in examples 65 and 68.
+
+\item[\cmd{\indexskipbracenodot}] \mbox{}\\
+This serves the same purpose as \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}, and it
+uses the same code, but whereas \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot} is
+activated for the reference list, \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot}
+is only activated for the author index. This has technical
+reasons and it does not work under all circumstances. Used in
+examples 4.08-3, 65, 66, and 68.
+
+\item[\cmd{\bibeditortype}] \mbox{}\\
+This has one argument. The macro changes the definitions of the macros
+\cmd{\BED} and \cmd{\BEDS} to the argument and then immediately
+changes the definitions back to their old definitions. So it makes a
+one-time change. This is used when there is someone in an ``editor-type''
+role, but with another designation, such as ``producer'' or ``director''.
+Ex.\ 36, 67, and 68.
+
+\item[\cmd{\renewbibeditortype}] \mbox{}\\
+The above-mentioned definition of \cmd{\bibeditortype} is only relevant
+in the reference list: In the citations in the text and in the author
+index, the command should do nothing. Therefore, the command is
+initially defined as ``nothing''. The definition discussed above is
+initialized by \cmd{\renewbibeditortype}. This command is executed
+just before the reference list in the current document. (After the
+reference list, \cmd{\bibeditortype} becomes ``nothing'' again.)
+
+\item[\cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}] \mbox{}\\
+This command is similar to \cmd{\BRetrieved}, except that it
+inserts ``Abstract retrieved'' instead of ``Retrieved''. Used in
+examples 82 and 83.
+
+\item[\cmd{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}] \mbox{}\\
+This command functions much like \cmd{\bibeditortype}: It replaces
+the next instance of \cmd{\BRetrieved} by \cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}.
+Used in examples 82 and 83.
+
+\item[\cmd{\noedition}] \mbox{}\\
+Suppresses the ``ed.'' (or ``\cmd{\BEd}'', rather) of an
+\fieldname{edition}. Used in examples 92 and 94 to format a
+string like ``Version~4'' as an \fieldname{edition}.
+
+\item[\cmd{\APACmanBeforeBib}] \mbox{}\\
+Illustrates how some of the commands defined above are used in practice:
+This command is given just before the \cmd{\bibliography} command, and
+redefines some of the commands above, so that their meaning
+is different in the reference list from their meaning in the main text.
+Similar commands: \cmd{\APACmanBeforeIndex}, \cmd{\APACmanAfterIndex}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Known problems and todo-list}
+\label{sec:todo}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+With any kind of software, there is usually a list with known problems (bugs)
+and desirable future work (to-do), and \pkg{apacite} is no exception. These
+subjects will be discussed in this section.
+
+A class of problems was already discussed in section~\ref{sec:compat} above.
+This concerns the incompatibility of the \fname{.bib} file with other citation
+styles, through \pkg{apacite}-specific fields, APA-specific contents of
+fields, or through special tricks. These lead to correctly formatted
+references in APA style, but may cause problems with using the \fname{.bib}
+file with other styles (in case APA journals reject your article~\ldots). As
+discussed there, however, this problem is unavoidable and presumably not a
+very big problem to most users.
+
+An incomplete list of other known problems and things that I would
+like to do with \pkg{apacite} follows below. Several items of this list
+are the direct result of the tricks I had to use for the examples in
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Sort entries within a single citation command. The \pkg{natbib}
+      package already offers this option.
+\item Swap (optionally) the order of closing quotes and various other
+      punctuation marks (\verb+.,;!?+) in a citation, for articles where
+      there is no named author and the title (between quotes) takes the
+      role of the author.
+\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This
+      currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you)
+      can think of a better solution.
+\item Support nonstandard types of authors, like ``Director'' and
+      ``Series Ed.\hbox{}''. This currently must be tricked in a
+      nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) can think of a better solution.
+\item Give explicit support for citation to the Bible and other
+      ``classic'' works and the \emph{DSM}.
+\item Give explicit support for music recordings in \entryname{incollection}
+      entries.
+\item Perhaps study referencing legal materials (Appendix~D of the APA
+      manual). This is actually not high on my priority list. Perhaps
+      you can use the \pkg{camel} package if you do this often.
+\item Define \BibTeX{} macros or strings for commonly encountered
+      journals (at least the APA journals).
+\item Support \pkg{natbib} citation commands (\cmd{\citet}, \cmd{\citep},
+      etc.).
+\item Improve and extend language support. Most importantly, make sure that
+      all the \fname{.apc} files support all the new commands with possibly
+      language-specific code.
+\item Continue with transferring reference list formatting code from
+      \BibTeX{} to \LaTeX.
+\item Add options and/or commands for easier customization of reference
+      list and author index.
+\item Introduce options for the \BibTeX{} part, e.g., index vs.\ noindex (so
+      that \fname{apacitex.bst} becomes superfluous); full first names
+      instead of only initials, or perhaps options for putting initials
+      in front of (2nd and later) author names; unsorted reference lists
+      or lists sorted chronologically (forward or reverse; for CVs); etc.
+\item Improve the source code documentation, esp.\ the formatting,
+      indexing, and cross-referencing. (You only see this if you regenerate
+      this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation} flag set.)
+\item The APA has recently (June 2007) published the 24-page electronic
+      document \APACcitebtitle{APA Style Guide to Electronic References},
+      see \url{http://books.apa.org/books.cfm?id=4210509} I will
+      probably purchase this and study it, and incorporate my findings
+      in the next version of \pkg{apacite}.
+\end{itemize}
+Quite likely, other problems will come up when using the current version of
+\pkg{apacite}, but at least I got it working on the APA manual examples, see
+section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. I have lots of ideas for improvements,
+extensions, options, etc., but not much time to devote to it. Therefore, it is
+difficult to give a good estimate of when I will release a new update.
+However, in the meantime, if you have questions, remarks, suggestions, or bug
+reports, you can e-mail them to me.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Examples of the APA manual}
+\label{sec:xmpl}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+In this section, the \pkg{apacite} package is tested by citing the examples of
+the APA manual (5th ed., pp.~207--281), and some additional references for
+additional purposes.
+
+The following list gives the examples from chapter~3 of the APA manual, with
+section number. For these and all later examples, whenever I thought it
+necessary or desirable, I added some comments. These are indicated by the \EM{}
+symbol. Especially for later examples (from chap.~4), the comments frequently
+pertain to the corresponding reference list entry.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[3.94]  \citeA{3.94-1} compared reaction times\\
+             In a recent study of reaction times \cite{3.94-1}\\
+             In \citeyearNP{3.94-1} \citeauthor{3.94-1} compared
+               reaction times\\
+             In a recent study of reaction times, \citeA{3.94-1}
+             described the method\ldots. \citeauthor{3.94-1} also found
+\item[3.95]  \citeA{3.95-1} found\\
+             \citeA{3.95-1} found\\
+             \citeauthor{3.95-1} found\\
+             \fullcite{3.95-2} and \fullcite{3.95-3}\\
+             \citeA{3.95-2} and \citeA{3.95-3}\\
+             \EM It seems that if ``et al.\hbox{}'' would refer to one additional
+             author, then this author is named instead of the ``et al.\hbox{}''
+             clause.\\
+             \citeA{3.95-4} and \citeA{3.95-5}\\
+             as \citeA{3.95-6} demonstrated\\
+             \EM The comma after ``Nightlinger'' in the reference list
+             does not look right, but is explicitly required by the APA.
+             Of course, with people as authors,
+             one almost always has initials (although I have seen
+             an example of an econometrician who only had
+             one name), so this problem is not likely to occur.
+             With nicknames (``screen names'' as they are called in the
+             APA manual below ex. 85) in messages to newsgroups, initials
+             are typically missing, but then there is usually (always?)
+             only one author, so the problem does not exist either.
+             The problem can, however, come up when there are two authors,
+             the first of which is a corporate author, or with artists,
+             e.g., the song ``Into the Groove'' is written by
+             Madonna and Stephen Bray. \\
+             as has been shown \cite{3.95-7}
+\item[3.96]  \cite{3.96-1}\\
+             \cite{3.96-1}\\
+             \cite{3.96-2}\\
+             \EM If the \fieldname{firstkey} field is different for different
+             references
+             and the \fieldname{key} field is the same, then, analogous
+             to the use of extra authors in 3.95 above, \pkg{apacite}
+             uses the \fieldname{firstkey} field for all citations:\\
+             \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6};\\
+             \citeA{3.96-3}, \citeA{3.96-4}, \citeA{3.96-5}, \citeA{3.96-6}.\\
+             Although this is a constructed example, these organizations
+             really exist. The ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond''
+             is the Royal Dutch Chess Association and the
+             ``Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond'' is the Royal Dutch
+             Skating Association. Both are abbreviated to KNSB and
+             presumably, both publish an annual report each year.
+             Furthermore, in these examples, I copied the contents of the
+             \fieldname{author} field to the \fieldname{publisher} field.
+             \pkg{apacite} recognizes this and puts the APA-requirement
+             ``Author'' as publisher description in the reference list.
+             Other styles may prefer the full publisher name again.
+\item[3.97]  on free care \cite{3.97-1}\\
+             \EM The order of the
+             closing quotes and the comma is different from the
+             APA manual. I think this one is more logical, although the
+             APA manual's is the conventional one, presumably for
+             aesthetic reasons. I hope to implement this in a future
+             version.\\
+             the book \citeA{3.97-2}\\
+             \cite{3.97-3}\\
+             \EM If two articles both have no author and the title and
+             the year are the same, a's and b's should be used:
+             \citeA{3.97-4}, \citeA{3.97-5}, and \citeA{3.97-6}.
+             The latter two entries are correctly sorted by month,
+             through the way the month macros are defined in
+             the \fname{.bst} files.
+\item[3.98]  \citeA{3.98-1} and \citeA{3.98-2} also found\\
+             \citeA{3.98-3} and \citeA{3.98-4} studied
+\item[3.99]  Past research \cite{3.99-1,3.99-2}\\
+             Past research \cite{3.99-3,3.99-4,3.99-5}\\
+             Several studies
+               \cite{3.99-6,3.99-7,3.99-8,3.99-9,3.99-10,3.99-11}\\
+             Several studies \cite{3.99-12,3.99-13,3.99-14}\\
+             \EM \pkg{apacite} does not (yet?) sort the cited
+             references in the text (of course it does for the reference
+             list), as required by the APA manual.\\
+             (\citeNP{3.99-15}; see also \citeNP{3.99-16,3.99-17})\\
+             \EM Note that I had to use \cmd{\citeNP} here.
+\item[3.100] \cite{3.100-1}\\
+             \EM This is not an example, but a rule in the text.
+             The ``\bibnodate'' is handled by the \cmd{\bibnodate}
+             macro. It is not clear whether it is really meant that the
+             in-text form is \citeauthor{3.100-1}, \citeyearNP{3.100-1}
+             or the more logically consistent \citeA{3.100-1}.
+             The former can (currently) only be accomplished by using
+             \cmd{\citeauthor} and \cmd{\citeyearNP} explicitly,
+             whereas the latter is simply obtained by \cmd{\citeA}.\\
+             \cite{3.100-1b}\\
+             \EM Again, this is not an example, but a rule in the text.\\
+             \cite{3.100-2}\\
+             \citeA{3.100-3}\\
+             \EM For citations to the bible, I used \cmd{\biblecite} and
+             several obvious variations on it, as discussed in
+             section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}:\\
+             \cmd{\bibleciteA}, first cite:  \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+             \cmd{\bibleciteA}, second cite: \bibleciteA{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+             \cmd{\biblecite}, first cite: \fullbiblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+             \cmd{\biblecite}, second cite: \biblecite{1 Cor.\ 13:1}\\
+             (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, first cite:
+              \fullbibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\
+             (\cmd{\bibleciteNP}, second cite:
+              \bibleciteNP{1 Cor.\ 13:1} and some text surrounding it)\\
+             \EM Here, there probably should be a comma if it's the first
+             cite and not a comma when it's a later cite. A difficult one.\\
+             \EM Ancient Greek and Roman works should be treated similarly,
+             i.e., not be listed in the reference list. But it seems to me
+             that title and/or author must be given in the text as well.
+             Maybe I will try to construct a tentative example of this in
+             a future release.
+\item[3.101] \cite[p.~332]{3.101-1}\\
+             \cite[chap.~3]{3.101-2}\\
+             \EM If you like, you can use the \pkg{apacite}-defined
+             abbreviation commands \verb+\BPG+ and \verb+\BCHAP+.\\
+             \cite[\P~5]{3.101-3}\\
+             \cite[Conclusion section, para.~1]{3.101-4}
+\item[3.102] \EM Personal communication is not really citation and should
+             be done manually:\\
+             T.~K. Lutes (personal communication, April 18, 2001)\\
+             (V.-G. Nguyen, personal communication, September 28, 1998)
+\item[3.103] \cite<see Table~2 of>[for complete data]{3.103-1}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\noindent
+Chapter~4 of the APA manual deals with the reference list
+and only mentions some in-text citation issues in passing.
+Therefore, the rest mainly requires a lot of moving back and forth
+between the reference list and this part. I start with the
+more general part, sections 4.01--4.15, presented similar to
+the sections from chapter~3 as presented above.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[4.04] \EM First, some examples mentioned in the text:\\
+            \citeA{4.04-t1},
+            \citeA{4.04-t2},
+            \citeA{4.04-t3},
+            \citeA{4.04-t4},
+            \citeA{4.04-t5},
+            \citeA{4.04-t6},
+            \citeA{4.04-t7},
+            \citeA{4.04-t8},
+            \citeA{4.04-t9}\\
+            \EM The APA manual states that prefixes must be treated
+            according to the rules of the language of origin. These rules
+            can differ a lot between languages (and countries) and it
+            is impossible to know all these rules. The APA manual gives two
+            examples, one in which ``De Vries'' is treated as the surname,
+            and one in which ``Helmholtz'' is the surname and ``von'' is
+            the ``von'' part of the name.
+
+            In the former case, the author is referred to as, say, ``De Vries
+            (1999)'' in text and ``De Vries, J. (1999).'', alphabetized under
+            ``D'' in the reference list. In the second example, the author is
+            referred to as, say, ``Helmholtz (1870)'' and listed in the
+            reference list as ``Helmholtz, H. L. F. von. (1870).'',
+            alphabetized under ``H''. To get this right, the author must be
+            defined as
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {H. L. F. von Helmholtz},
+\end{verbatim}
+            or
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.},
+\end{verbatim}
+            then \BibTeX{} will assign the correct parts to the first names,
+            ``von''-part, and last name. The seemingly logical
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {Helmholtz, H. L. F. von},
+\end{verbatim}
+            will not be formatted correctly, because ``von'' is now
+            considered to be part of the first names and therefore
+            abbreviated to ``v.''.
+
+            Below, under example B-2, I will further discuss some
+            issues about ``von'' parts.
+
+            \EM The APA manual requires that numerals are alphabetized
+            as if they were spelled out. This is not done by \pkg{apacite},
+            so when applicable should be done by the user, e.g.\ by using
+            the \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command as discussed in
+            section~\ref{subsec:sort}. I give one fictitious example
+            \cite{4.04-t10}.
+
+            \citeA{4.04-1}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-2}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-3}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-4}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-5}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-6}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-7}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-8}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-9}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-10}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-11}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-12}\\
+            \EM As stated in the APA manual, an exception to the rule
+            of sorting by title if author and year are the same occurs
+            when the works are identified as a series. Then ordering
+            the parts of the series sequentially can be done using the
+            \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command.\\
+            \EM Here, it says that only ``A'' and ``The'' are excluded
+            from the sorting (if they are the initial words), but I
+            assume they mean ``An'' as well. This is how it is
+            implemented in \pkg{apacite}.
+
+            \citeA{4.04-13}\\
+            \citeA{4.04-14}\\
+            \EM I have not (yet?) studied referencing legal materials.
+            In the first version of \pkg{apacite}, I defined a
+            \entryname{literal} type, so that the users can
+            literally format such entries themselves. This is still
+            available. However, I think that if you need to refer to
+            legal cases, you can find a way to use the
+            \entryname{misc} type to get it right. I might study this
+            and give examples in a next version of \pkg{apacite}.
+\item[4.05] \citeA{4.05-1}\\
+            \nocitemeta{4.05-2}\citeA{4.05-2}\\
+            \EM Here I used the \cmd{\nocitemeta} command to let
+            \pkg{apacite} know that a meta-analysis is reported and this
+            work is included in it. As you can see, you can still cite
+            the work by using the normal citation commands such as
+            \cmd{\citeA}.
+\item[4.08] \citeA{4.08-1}\\
+            \citeA{4.08-2}\\
+            \citeA{4.08-3}\\
+            \EM To obtain the ``(with \dots)'' description in the
+            reference list, I used the \cmd{\bibliteral} command.
+            Furthermore, to get this formatted correctly in the author
+            index, I used the \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} command to
+            suppress an additional period. These commands are described
+            in section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}.
+
+            To \BibTeX{}, the \cmd{\bibliteral} construction is a complicated
+            accented character, which is the second initial of the author.
+            Consequently, this does not work properly with styles that put
+            the initials \emph{before} the surnames, and care must be
+            exercised with ``junior'' parts (see ex.~70). Furthermore,
+            this construction must be put between a pair of
+            braces in order for \BibTeX{} to treat it as an accented letter,
+            instead of abbreviating it.
+\item[4.09] \citeA{4.09-1}
+\item[4.10] \citeA{4.10-1}\\
+            \citeA{4.10-2}
+\item[4.11] \citeA{4.11-1}\\
+            \citeA{4.11-2}\\
+            \EM Note that in the \fname{.bib} file, the ``junior'' part comes
+            directly after the surname and a comma, with the initials
+            after the ``junior'' part, whereas in the formatted
+            reference list, the more logical order \opt{surname},
+            \opt{initials}, \opt{junior}, is used.
+\item[4.12] \citeA{4.12-1}
+\item[4.13] \citeA{4.13-1}\\
+            \EM ``For substantial reference works with a large editorial
+            board, naming the lead editor followed by \texttt{et al.} is
+            acceptable''. This is now implemented in \pkg{apacite} as
+            follows: If there are 7 or more editors, only the first one
+            is named, followed by ``et al.\hbox{}'' \cite{4.13-2}.
+\item[4.15] \citeA{4.15-1}\\
+            \EM Here I used the new \fieldname{url} and
+            \fieldname{lastchecked} fields.\\
+            \citeA{4.15-2}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\noindent
+The rest is from section~4.16, the examples section. The section number
+is omitted, but A--I are used instead for the unnumbered examples. For
+the numbered examples, only the number is given.
+The following enumerated list gives the example number, and
+the two basic in-text citation commands, both in a full and
+short form, of the examples.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[A-1] \cite{A-1}  \\ \cite{A-1} \\ \fullciteA{A-1} \\ \citeA{A-1}
+\item \cite{ex1}  \\ \cite{ex1} \\ \fullciteA{ex1} \\ \citeA{ex1}
+\item \cite{ex2}  \\ \cite{ex2} \\ \fullciteA{ex2} \\ \citeA{ex2}
+\item \cite{ex3}  \\ \cite{ex3} \\ \fullciteA{ex3} \\ \citeA{ex3}
+\item \cite{ex4}  \\ \cite{ex4} \\ \fullciteA{ex4} \\ \citeA{ex4}\\
+      \cite{ex4-2} \\ \cite{ex4-2} \\ \fullciteA{ex4-2} \\ \citeA{ex4-2}\\
+      \EM Note that the list of authors can be finished with
+      ``\verb+and others+'' if there are more than 6 authors, or
+      all authors can be given, in which case \pkg{apacite} truncates
+      the list after the first~6. For compatibility with other styles,
+      the latter is preferable.
+\item \cite{ex5}  \\ \cite{ex5} \\ \fullciteA{ex5} \\ \citeA{ex5}
+\item \cite{ex6}  \\ \cite{ex6} \\ \fullciteA{ex6} \\ \citeA{ex6}
+\item \cite{ex7}  \\ \cite{ex7} \\ \fullciteA{ex7} \\ \citeA{ex7}\\
+      \EM Here, I used
+\begin{verbatim}
+  month = spring,
+\end{verbatim}
+      using the new \verb+spring+ macro defined in the \fname{.bst} files.
+\item \cite{ex8}  \\ \cite{ex8} \\ \fullciteA{ex8} \\ \citeA{ex8}\\
+      \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the
+      following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.\\
+      \EM The \fieldname{month} field is formatted as
+\begin{verbatim}
+  month = aug # "/" # sep,
+\end{verbatim}
+      which uses the month macros and \BibTeX's concatenation
+      operator `\verb+#+'.
+\item \cite{ex9}  \\ \cite{ex9} \\ \fullciteA{ex9} \\ \citeA{ex9}\\
+      \EM Here, again, the order of the closing quotes and the
+      following comma should be reversed according to the APA rules.
+\item \cite{ex10} \\ \cite{ex10}\\ \fullciteA{ex10}\\ \citeA{ex10}
+\item \cite{ex11} \\ \cite{ex11}\\ \fullciteA{ex11}\\ \citeA{ex11}\\
+      \EM Apparently, a weekly newspaper is not a magazine and should
+      therefore include ``p.\hbox{}'' or ``pp.\hbox{}'' in front of
+      the page
+      number(s), whereas a magazine article should not. I do not
+      understand the distinction very well and find it not very
+      useful as well, but will adhere to it. It means that the
+      \entryname{newspaper} type gets the ``pp.\hbox{}'', whereas
+      \entryname{magazine} and \entryname{article}, which are now
+      identical, do not.
+\item \cite{ex12} \\ \cite{ex12}\\ \fullciteA{ex12}\\ \citeA{ex12}\\
+      \EM Here, \verb+\emph{DSM-IV}+ must be entered without an extra
+      pair of braces in the title field; see ex.~73 for the intricacies
+      of braces and \verb+\emph+ in the title field.
+\item \cite{ex13} \\ \cite{ex13}\\ \fullciteA{ex13}\\ \citeA{ex13}\\
+      \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+1, Serial No.~231+.
+\item \cite{ex14} \\ \cite{ex14}\\ \fullciteA{ex14}\\ \citeA{ex14}\\
+      \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+3, Pt.~2+.
+\item \cite{ex15} \\ \cite{ex15}\\ \fullciteA{ex15}\\ \citeA{ex15}
+\item \cite{ex16} \\ \cite{ex16}\\ \fullciteA{ex16}\\ \citeA{ex16}
+\item \cite{ex17} \\ \cite{ex17}\\ \fullciteA{ex17}\\ \citeA{ex17}\\
+      \EM This case is the opposite of the more common situation where a
+      reprint is cited and an original publication year is given. I could
+      implement similar code to handle this case (and I may if I get requests
+      to do this), but for the moment, I decided to trick the system: I
+      used the \cmd{\bibreftext} command mentioned in
+      section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}. It must be called with two
+      arguments. Initially, it places the second argument in the text, but
+      just before the bibliography, its definition is changed so that the
+      first argument is placed in the reference list. By defining
+\begin{verbatim}
+  year = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+      in the \fname{.bib} file, the year is ``1992'' in the reference
+      list and ``1992/1993'' in the text citations. The \cmd{\protect}
+      is necessary to make sure that the \cmd{\bibreftext} macro is not
+      written out in the label-part of the bibliography, because then
+      only ``1992'' would appear in the text reference. The additional
+      pair of braces are necessary to make sure that the entry
+      is alphabetized correctly. When these are omitted, the entry
+      is alphabetized under the ``P'' of ``protect''. Of course, the
+      latter is only important if the reference list contains
+      multiple works by the same author(s), but the same phenomenon
+      is encountered when the \fieldname{author} or \fieldname{editor}
+      field starts with a command, or when there is no author or editor
+      and the \fieldname{title} field starts with a command, as in
+      the entry \citeA{4.04-t10} introduced in 4.04 above.
+
+      Of course, you can save yourself a lot of trouble by
+      obtaining the original article and citing that.
+\item \cite{ex18} \\ \cite{ex18}\\ \fullciteA{ex18}\\ \citeA{ex18}\\
+      \EM Here, the \fieldname{number} field is \verb+Suppl.~2+.
+\item \cite{ex19} \\ \cite{ex19}\\ \fullciteA{ex19}\\ \citeA{ex19}\\
+      \EM Other styles treat the \emph{Annual Review} as a book
+      (\emph{Sociological Methodology} is an even stronger example),
+      so this is a point where the \fname{.bib} file becomes
+      highly incompatible between styles. This cannot be avoided.
+\item \cite{ex20} \\ \cite{ex20}\\ \fullciteA{ex20}\\ \citeA{ex20}\\
+      \EM Here, the \fieldname{englishtitle} field is used for the
+      English translation of the German title. To get the German
+      capitalization of the title right, the capitalized words must
+      be protected by an additional pair of braces.
+\item \cite{ex21} \\ \cite{ex21}\\ \fullciteA{ex21}\\ \citeA{ex21}\\
+      \EM Apparently, a translator and original publication date
+      do not have to be mentioned here.
+\item Seidenberg and McClelland's study \cite<as cited in>{ex22}\\
+      %\cite{ex22} \\ \cite{ex22}\\ \fullciteA{ex22}\\ \citeA{ex22}\\
+      \EM The APA website (\url{http://www.apastyle.org/faqs.html})
+      mentions that the year should generally also be mentioned,
+      making it a complete cite, except that there is no reference
+      list entry. In my opinion, it would be better to list the
+      complete original work in the reference list as well, in case
+      readers do have access to the original work, but not to the
+      secondary source. But this is not the APA rule. \\
+      \EM You may like to have the authors of the unlisted reference
+      in the author index as well. Use the \cmd{\AX} command for
+      this, as explained in section~\ref{sec:autindex}.
+\item[B-1] \cite{B-1}  \\ \cite{B-1} \\ \fullciteA{B-1} \\ \citeA{B-1}
+\item \cite{ex23} \\ \cite{ex23}\\ \fullciteA{ex23}\\ \citeA{ex23}\\
+      \EM Here, and in several other references, I put \verb+\hbox{}+
+      after the ``\verb+Jr.+'', so that \TeX{} does not consider the
+      period as a sentence-ending period.\\
+      \EM \pkg{apacite} now supports only an integer value (``\verb+3+'')
+      in the \fieldname{edition} field, and transforms this to
+      ``3rd''.
+\item \cite{ex24} \\ \cite{ex24}\\ \fullciteA{ex24}\\ \citeA{ex24}\\
+      \EM The APA manual gives a number, which would not ordinarily be
+      done with proper books and which suggests that it could also
+      be treated as a report. In that case, the default
+      ``Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}''
+      description should be left out, however. This can be accomplished
+      by defining
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {\bibnotype},
+\end{verbatim}
+      which flags that the type must be left out, see ex.~42.
+      However, for books, it now works fine leaving the \fieldname{type}
+      field empty and giving the number in the \fieldname{number} field.
+\item \cite{ex25} \\ \cite{ex25}\\ \fullciteA{ex25}\\ \citeA{ex25}\\
+      \EM According to the note after ex.~25 in the APA manual,
+      an edited book with ``just one'' author should list
+      the editor (and translator, when available) after the
+      title, just like the translator. An example of this is
+      \citeA{ex25-t1}. (Should the original years of publication
+      be used here?)
+
+      However, what does ``just one author'' mean here? Does it mean that if
+      there are 2 authors and 1 or more editors, the editors should
+      not be mentioned, or the authors should not be mentioned?
+      Presumably, it means the following:
+      In the default case, an edited book consists of several chapters,
+      with different chapters written by different authors. In this case,
+      the reference to the whole book lists only the editor(s).
+      If every chapter is written by the same author, and there are 1
+      or more editors, their condition holds. I think that if all
+      chapters are written by the same $n$ ($\geq 2$) authors, it should
+      also be treated in this way, i.e., with the authors in the
+      author position and the editor behind the title. A difficult
+      case would appear if the book were a collection of works of, say,
+      2 authors, with some chapters written by one and some by the
+      other, and some jointly, as in \citeA{ex25-t2}. These choices have
+      to be made by the user, however, \pkg{apacite} will format author,
+      editor, and translator, whenever available.
+\item \cite{ex26} \\ \cite{ex26}\\ \fullciteA{ex26}\\ \citeA{ex26}\\
+      \EM According to section~3.97, the title should be in italics.
+      In this example, in the citation, it is not given in italics,
+      but this must be an error, because they do give it in italics
+      on p.~219 (but give no date there).
+\item \cite{ex27} \\ \cite{ex27}\\ \fullciteA{ex27}\\ \citeA{ex27}\\
+      \EM Here, the \fieldname{edition} field has value
+      ``\verb+Rev.\hbox{}+'' and \pkg{apacite} handles this
+      noninteger value correctly as well.
+\item \cite{ex28} \\ \cite{ex28}\\ \fullciteA{ex28}\\ \citeA{ex28}\\
+      \EM Use the en-dash (``\verb+--+'') and not simply a hyphen
+      (``\verb+-+''), because the latter is not considered to mean
+      ``to'' by \pkg{apacite} (cf.\hbox{} ``Vol.~A-1'').
+\item \EM As mentioned in section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}, \fname{apacdoc.sty}
+      provides the \cmd{\DSMcite} macro and some related
+      alternatives to get the \emph{DSM} references right. On rereading
+      the description in the APA manual, I discovered that previous
+      versions of \pkg{apacite} did not format the first citation
+      correctly, although the description is a bit ambiguous as to
+      how exactly the first citation should be formatted. Therefore,
+      I looked at a recent issue of
+      \emph{Journal of Abnormal Psychology}, \emph{116}(3); and
+      \emph{Psychological Assessment}, \emph{19}(2). These show
+      some slight variations, some of which have good reasons, but
+      others seem arbitrary. In all articles I looked at, the first
+      citation was an in-text citation, and the following form was
+      the most frequently used, and thus implemented in
+      \fname{apacdoc.sty}:\\
+      \cmd{\DSMciteA}, first citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\
+      \EM The following citations then only use the abbreviated title:\\
+      \cmd{\DSMciteA}, second citation: \DSMciteA{ex29} \\
+      \EM Because I haven't found a parenthetical first cite, I
+      have to use some logic and common sense to define it:\\
+      \cmd{\DSMcite}, first citation: \DSMfullcite{ex29} \\
+      \EM Subsequent parenthetical cites are formatted as\\
+      \cmd{\DSMcite}, second citation: \DSMcite{ex29} \\
+      \EM Finally, here are ``\verb+NP+'' versions of them:\\
+      \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, first citation: \DSMfullciteNP{ex29} \\
+      \cmd{\DSMciteNP}, second citation: \DSMciteNP{ex29} \\
+      To use these citation commands, you have to provide a
+      \fieldname{key} field that contains a \cmd{\bibDSM}
+      command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric Association}{Diagnostic
+         and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}{4th
+         ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+      As is evident from this example, the four arguments are
+      author, full title, edition, short title. Thus, because
+      all this information is provided in the \fname{.bib}
+      entry (and not preprogrammed in \pkg{apacite}), it is
+      conceivable that this command is useful for other types
+      of works as well. The generality is a bit limited, though,
+      because all four arguments must be available and have
+      meaningful content (i.e., should not be empty). But it
+      is relatively straightforward to write your own specialized
+      citation commands, based on the \cmd{\DSMcite} code,
+      which do not require all parts to be available.
+
+      However, the \cmd{\DSM*} macros are still very rough. Multiple
+      citations are not handled well, so only one work should
+      be cited with such a macro. Furthermore, the pre- and
+      postfixes (through \verb+<...>+ and \verb+[...]+) are not
+      available. Note also that the edition should be spelled
+      out as ``\verb+4th ed.\hbox{}+''. When I experimented with
+      just ``\verb+4+'', trying to use the \cmd{\PrintCardinal}
+      function, things went terribly wrong. Even if I put
+      \verb+\PrintCardinal{4}+ in the \fieldname{key} field, it
+      didn't work. Finally, the ``ed.\hbox{}'' must be added
+      to allow reference to the ``3rd ed., rev.\hbox{}'' and the
+      ``4th ed., text rev.\hbox{}'' as well.
+
+      \EM In some of the articles I studied, ordinary citations
+      were used, esp.\ when page numbers were given in
+      parenthetical cites. Thus, you can also use\\
+      \verb+\cite[p.~25]{ex29}+: \cite[p.~25]{ex29}
+\item \cite{ex30} \\ \cite{ex30}\\ \fullciteA{ex30}\\ \citeA{ex30}\\
+      \EM Here, ``6th ed.'' comes before ``Vols.\ 1--20'', so it is
+      Vols.\ 1--20 of the 6th edition. Pre-[2003/09/05] versions
+      of \pkg{apacite} placed volumes before editions,
+      which is appropriate when different volumes of a series
+      are not updated jointly, so that you may have the 3rd edition
+      of Vol.~2, but only the 1st edition of Vol.~6. Should you
+      want this, you have to trick the system by putting both
+      elements in the \fieldname{edition} field:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  edition = {\BVOLS\ 1--20, 6th},
+\end{verbatim}
+      and leaving the \fieldname{volume} field empty.\\
+      \EM Does the remark about large editorial boards mean that the
+      APA intended to add ``et al.\hbox{}'' here? Anyway, here is an
+      example of such a situation: \citeA{ex30-2}.
+\item \cite{ex31} \\ \cite{ex31}\\ \fullciteA{ex31}\\ \citeA{ex31}
+\item \cite{ex32} \\ \cite{ex32}\\ \fullciteA{ex32}\\ \citeA{ex32}
+\item \cite{ex33} \\ \cite{ex33}\\ \fullciteA{ex33}\\ \citeA{ex33}\\
+      \EM This illustrates that a \fieldname{type} field can be used
+      with a \entryname{book} entry.
+\item[B-2] \cite{B-2} \\ \cite{B-2} \\ \fullciteA{B-2} \\ \citeA{B-2} \\
+      \EM This is a suitable point to discuss ``von'' parts further.
+      One of the editors in the current example is called
+      P. van den Broek. I am Dutch and I recognize this as a Dutch
+      name, so let's assume that this person is Dutch. Let us now
+      consider the situation that this person is the (only) author.
+      Then according to the Dutch rules, this person would be listed in the
+      reference list as ``Broek, P. van den. (1992)'' and listed under ``B'',
+      but referred to in the text as ``Van den Broek (1992)'', including
+      the ``von'' part and capitalizing the first letter. When an
+      initial precedes the ``von'' part (e.g., when there are two
+      primary authors with this surname, but with different initials),
+      then this person would be referred to in the text as
+      ``P. van den Broek (1992)'', including the ``von'' part, but now
+      in lower case. The Dutch rules are very difficult to do right in
+      \BibTeX{}/\LaTeX{} and they conflict with the rules for other
+      languages, and presumably with the rules of the APA, which would
+      require this person to be alphabetized under ``V'', at least.
+
+      For the current editor position, there is no big problem with
+      the APA rules. The ``von'' part can really be put in the ``von''
+      part as recognized by \BibTeX{}, which I did, or it can be enclosed
+      in braces, making the whole last name one part. Either will come
+      out right and the editor will not be referred to in the text
+      anyway. With styles that put the initials behind the surname,
+      it will only work right when put in the ``von'' part. In the
+      author position, however, things are different. Then this author
+      could be formatted as
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {Van {\lowercase{D}}en Broek, P.},
+\end{verbatim}
+      where the \verb+{\lowercase{D}}+ construction is used to prevent
+      \BibTeX{} from interpreting it as a ``von'' part, or
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {Van{\ }den{\ }Broek, P.},
+  author = {{Van den Broek}, P.},
+\end{verbatim}
+      which in most situations gives the correct version according to the
+      Dutch rules with the correct alphabetizing according to the APA
+      rules. Only in situations when the initial would appear
+      \emph{before} the surname (when there are other authors with the
+      same surname or when using other styles), this would lead to
+      unwanted results.
+
+      If you really want to alphabetize according to the Dutch rules
+      (which is \emph{not} APA in my interpretation), you can use the
+      following trick. \fname{apacdoc.sty} defines a macro \cmd{\Dutchvon}
+      with two arguments, which is equivalent to the \cmd{\bibreftext}
+      macro discussed in ex.~17 above. That is, in the beginning
+      of the document, it is defined as echoing its second argument,
+      and just before the reference list, it is redefined to echo
+      its first argument. Then define the author as
+\begin{verbatim}
+  author = {van den {\protect\Dutchvon{Broek}{Van den Broek}}, P.},
+\end{verbatim}
+      which, combined with the \pkg{apacite} formatting implies
+      that in text, ``Van den Broek'' is used, whereas the author
+      is alphabetized under ``B'' in the reference list, and listed
+      as ``Broek, P. van den''. Of course, we could simply have
+      used \cmd{\bibreftext} again, but that was used to cover a
+      completely different situation, and I can easily imagine that
+      when switching to another citation style, the former application
+      (i.e., 1992/1993) must be kept, but the ``von'' part is handled
+      differently, so that \cmd{\Dutchvon} must be redefined.
+      Based on this example, users should be able to define their
+      own tricks for similar peculiarities.
+
+      Finally, note that in Belgium, where many people
+      speak Dutch as well, it is customary to alphabetize under ``V''
+      anyway (``Van Damme'').
+\item \cite{ex34} \\ \cite{ex34}\\ \fullciteA{ex34}\\ \citeA{ex34}
+\item \cite{ex35} \\ \cite{ex35}\\ \fullciteA{ex35}\\ \citeA{ex35}\\
+      \EM The series title, volume number, and volume title are all
+      put into the \fieldname{booktitle} field.
+\item \cite{ex36} \\ \cite{ex36}\\ \fullciteA{ex36}\\ \citeA{ex36}\\
+      \EM Again, the series title, volume number, and volume title are
+      all put into the \fieldname{booktitle} field.\\
+      \EM I had to use some tricks to get the Series and Volume Editors'
+      descriptions right. The ``(Series Ed.\hbox{})'' is according to
+      \BibTeX{} part of the last name of the first editor,
+      and I used the \cmd{\bibeditortype} macro from
+      \fname{apacdoc.sty} to get the volume editor right.
+      See section~\ref{subsec:fields} for my interpretation of
+      APA's usage of the term ``series''.
+\item \cite{ex37} \\ \cite{ex37}\\ \fullciteA{ex37}\\ \citeA{ex37}\\
+      \EM Note that ``Van'' in the first editor's surname is
+      capitalized here, as in the APA manual. In the original Dutch,
+      this would be in lower case.
+\item \cite{ex38} \\ \cite{ex38}\\ \fullciteA{ex38}\\ \citeA{ex38}
+\item \cite{ex39} \\ \cite{ex39}\\ \fullciteA{ex39}\\ \citeA{ex39}\\
+      \EM Here, it is stated that the translator's name should be put
+      after the editor's name when both are different, but in ex.~40,
+      the translators are put after the title, before the editors.
+      Apparently, if the book is a collection of works by one
+      author(-group), edited and translated, then the translator
+      should come after the editor, but if different chapters
+      are translated by different translators, or perhaps not all
+      are translated works, then the translator should come after
+      the title. Of course, \pkg{apacite} has no way of knowing this.
+      In the current implementation, for an \entryname{incollection},
+      if the editor and translator are the same, they are formatted as
+      in this example, whereas if they are different, they are treated
+      as in ex.~40 below. I think this will be satisfactory in
+      most cases. If you really want the translator after the editor
+      when they are different, you can trick the system in a way
+      similar to ex.~36.
+\item \cite{ex40} \\ \cite{ex40}\\ \fullciteA{ex40}\\ \citeA{ex40}\\
+      \EM See my comments to ex.~39 above.
+
+      A test of the \fieldname{originaljournal} formatting:
+      \citeA{ex40-t1}.
+\item[C-1] \cite{C-1}  \\ \cite{C-1} \\ \fullciteA{C-1} \\ \citeA{C-1}\\
+      \EM The APA manual initially formats the number with an
+      en-dash: ``91--5''. When it discusses the number separately,
+      however (p.~256), it uses a single hyphen: ``91-5''. Logically,
+      the latter makes more sense to me (and is generally used in
+      other numbers in the APA manual as well), so that's what I
+      did here. Moreover, if the en-dash would be entered as
+      ``\verb+--+'' in the \fieldname{number} field, \pkg{apacite}
+      would interpret this as ``to'' and insert ``Nos.\hbox{}''
+      instead of ``No.\hbox{}''. Thus, if you want the en-dash,
+      you have to put this in the \fname{.bib} file in a different
+      way, e.g., using the \cmd{\textendash} command.
+\item \cite{ex41} \\ \cite{ex41}\\ \fullciteA{ex41}\\ \citeA{ex41}
+\item \cite{ex42} \\ \cite{ex42}\\ \fullciteA{ex42}\\ \citeA{ex42}\\
+      \EM I used the \cmd{\bibnotype} command to suppress the default
+      ``(Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{})'' description. Actually, I don't think
+      there is anything wrong with calling a report a report, be it
+      ``technical'' by default, or by specifying
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {Report},
+\end{verbatim}
+      except that it's not done so in this specific example in the
+      APA manual. But there does not seem to be a rule against it.
+
+      \EM The NTIS information is put in a \fieldname{note} field.
+\item \cite{ex43} \\ \cite{ex43}\\ \fullciteA{ex43}\\ \citeA{ex43}\\
+      \EM The ERIC number is given in the \fieldname{note} field.
+\item \cite{ex44} \\ \cite{ex44}\\ \fullciteA{ex44}\\ \citeA{ex44}
+\item \cite{ex45} \\ \cite{ex45}\\ \fullciteA{ex45}\\ \citeA{ex45}
+\item \cite{ex46} \\ \cite{ex46}\\ \fullciteA{ex46}\\ \citeA{ex46}\\
+      \EM Note that in the example in the APA manual, ``Western Australia''
+      \emph{is} mentioned in the publisher location, whereas their rule
+      explicitly states that this should not be the case in this
+      situation, and they stress that again below the example.
+      Therefore, I did not mention ``Western Australia'' in the
+      \fieldname{publisher} field.
+\item \cite{ex47} \\ \cite{ex47}\\ \fullciteA{ex47}\\ \citeA{ex47}
+\item \cite{ex48} \\ \cite{ex48}\\ \fullciteA{ex48}\\ \citeA{ex48}
+\item \cite{ex49} \\ \cite{ex49}\\ \fullciteA{ex49}\\ \citeA{ex49}
+\item \cite{ex50} \\ \cite{ex50}\\ \fullciteA{ex50}\\ \citeA{ex50}
+\item \cite{ex51} \\ \cite{ex51}\\ \fullciteA{ex51}\\ \citeA{ex51}\\
+      \EM As of this version of \pkg{apacite}, the location of a
+      \entryname{lecture} can be given in the \fieldname{address}
+      field.
+\item \cite{ex52} \\ \cite{ex52}\\ \fullciteA{ex52}\\ \citeA{ex52}
+\item \cite{ex53} \\ \cite{ex53}\\ \fullciteA{ex53}\\ \citeA{ex53}
+\item \cite{ex54} \\ \cite{ex54}\\ \fullciteA{ex54}\\ \citeA{ex54}
+\item \cite{ex55} \\ \cite{ex55}\\ \fullciteA{ex55}\\ \citeA{ex55}\\
+      \EM It seems logical to suppress the original year in the
+      citation if it's the same as the year of the abstract, cf.\
+      the comment to ex.~17 in the APA manual (p.~245).
+
+      \EM According to example 54 and the text below it, an ``A''
+      or ``B'' should be added to the volume number of \emph{DAI}
+      of this entry, presumably an ``A'', but because they did not
+      give one, I left it out as well.
+\item \cite{ex56} \\ \cite{ex56}\\ \fullciteA{ex56}\\ \citeA{ex56}
+\item \cite{ex57} \\ \cite{ex57}\\ \fullciteA{ex57}\\ \citeA{ex57}\\
+      \EM In ex.~59, the city should not be mentioned because it is
+      already mentioned in the name of the university. Here, the
+      city \emph{is} mentioned again, which seems contradictory.
+      This is all in the \fname{.bib} file; \pkg{apacite} uses
+      whatever is given there, so this is not a formatting problem
+      for \pkg{apacite} itself.
+\item \cite{ex58} \\ \cite{ex58}\\ \fullciteA{ex58}\\ \citeA{ex58}
+\item \cite{ex59} \\ \cite{ex59}\\ \fullciteA{ex59}\\ \citeA{ex59}\\
+      \EM See ex.~57 for the city issue.
+\item \cite{ex60} \\ \cite{ex60}\\ \fullciteA{ex60}\\ \citeA{ex60}
+\item \cite{ex61} \\ \cite{ex61}\\ \fullciteA{ex61}\\ \citeA{ex61}\\
+      \EM The description of the data goes into the
+      \fieldname{type} field. It may be more logical to put it
+      in the \fieldname{title} field, with some trickery to indicate
+      that it's a description and not a title, but putting it in the
+      \fieldname{type} field already ensures that it's formatted
+      correctly, so I think I'm gonna be lazy on this one. The same
+      applies more or less to reviews (G-1, 63, 64), although there
+      it is logical to put at least ``Review'' in the \fieldname{type}
+      field, so as we're already there, we might as well make it
+      complete.
+\item \cite{ex62} \\ \cite{ex62}\\ \fullciteA{ex62}\\ \citeA{ex62}\\
+      \EM ``Available from'' an address should be spelled out in the
+      \fieldname{note} field, to get the parentheses. ``Available
+      from'' a website is without parentheses, see ex.~95.
+\item[G-1] \cite{G-1}  \\ \cite{G-1} \\ \fullciteA{G-1} \\ \citeA{G-1}\\
+      \EM See my comments to ex.~61 above about the logic of the
+      \fieldname{type} field. For a review, the \fieldname{type}
+      field must contain the message that it is a review of a
+      \emph{book} (or motion picture, or whatever it is a review of)
+      and give the title of the reviewed work in italics, which must
+      be manually formatted, e.g., by using the \cmd{\APACcitebtitle}
+      macro. The author of the reviewed work should apparently not be
+      mentioned.
+\item \cite{ex63} \\ \cite{ex63}\\ \fullciteA{ex63}\\ \citeA{ex63}
+\item \cite{ex64} \\ \cite{ex64}\\ \fullciteA{ex64}\\ \citeA{ex64} \\
+      \EM Here, the title of the motion picture,
+      \APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}, is capitalized,
+      whereas this was not done with book titles in ex.~G-1 and 63.
+      I don't know whether this is an error or an implicit rule,
+      but this formatting must be done in the \fname{.bib} file,
+      so it's up to the user to do this as desired.
+\item \EM The rules for movies, television series, etc.\ do not appeal
+      very much to me, although they are not nearly as bad as those
+      for music recordings (ex.~69 and further, see below). My
+      primary objection is that when referring to movies and TV series,
+      the title is the most important characteristic. The director
+      may be a good second in some cases, but producers and writers are
+      almost always unknown to the general public and not relevant
+      when referring to them. You talk about the movie \emph{Jaws}
+      and not about Spielberg (1975) or whoever wrote the script.
+      Recognizing the primary creative input or authorship may be
+      politically correct, but not particularly informative.
+      However, you may think that my objections are mainly
+      driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries
+      in \BibTeX{}. Anyway, here are my attempts to implement
+      the APA rules.\\
+      \cite{ex65-1} \\ \cite{ex65-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-1}\\ \citeA{ex65-1} \\
+      \EM I find ``United States'' a somewhat uninformative address.
+
+      \cite{ex65-2} \\ \cite{ex65-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-2}\\ \citeA{ex65-2} \\
+      \EM Note again that this and the following ``Available from''
+      must be between
+      parentheses (accomplished by putting it in the \fieldname{note} field),
+      whereas ``Available from'' some web site must not be between
+      parentheses, cf.\ ex.~95.
+
+      \EM In these examples, I used the \cmd{\bibliteral},
+      \cmd{\bibskipbracenodot}, and  \cmd{\indexskipbracenodot} commands
+      from \fname{apacdoc.sty}.\\
+      \cite{ex65-3} \\ \cite{ex65-3}\\ \fullciteA{ex65-3}\\ \citeA{ex65-3}\\
+      \EM Here, I simply let ``(Producer)'' be part of the author name,
+      but because of this addendum, the entry is not sorted correctly
+      in the reference list: It should be before \citeA{APAManual},
+      but because of the addendum, the authors are different to \BibTeX{}
+      and this one comes after \citeA{APAManual}. The ordering can be
+      corrected by using the \cmd{\APACSortNoop} command as discussed in
+      section~\ref{subsec:sort}. However, the authors of these entries will
+      still be different. If it's important that they are the same (e.g.,
+      for the author index), the \fname{.bbl} file should be edited manually.
+      This seems an extremely rare event, though.
+\item \cite{ex66} \\ \cite{ex66}\\ \fullciteA{ex66}\\ \citeA{ex66} \\
+      \EM Here, I used the same tricks as in ex.~65.
+\item \cite{ex67} \\ \cite{ex67}\\ \fullciteA{ex67}\\ \citeA{ex67} \\
+      \EM I used several tricks introduced before: the \cmd{\bibeditortype}
+      (cf.\ ex.~36) construction to be able to use ``(Producer)'' in
+      the editor position instead of  ``(Ed.\hbox{})'', and the ones used
+      in the previous examples. Because there is another Miller as well,
+      the initial is given here. To make sure that \BibTeX{} thinks
+      that there is only one initial, but the ``(Producer)'' is formatted
+      correctly, the name is defined as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  editor = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+      using the \cmd{\bibinitial} and \cmd{\bibeditortype} commands from
+      \fname{apacdoc.sty}.
+      It is then formatted correctly both in the text and in the reference
+      list if \cmd{\bibeditortype} is defined to swallow its argument
+      in the text, and redefined prior to the bibliography. After the
+      bibliography (before the index), it has to be redefined again
+      to swallow its argument.
+\item \cite{ex68} \\ \cite{ex68}\\ \fullciteA{ex68}\\ \citeA{ex68}\\
+      \EM Again, I used several tricks that were also used in the previous
+      examples.
+\item \EM The rules for music recordings do not make any sense, and they
+      are not entirely clear as well. It would seem to me that
+      most pop, rock, and other ``light'' music songs are almost always
+      attributed to the performing artist. You can usually read who the
+      composer and lyricist of the song are on the inlay-details
+      of the CD, but if you want the reader to refer to ``My Way'',
+      the reader will easier find it (in a CD store or on the
+      internet, for example) under ``Frank Sinatra'' than under
+      the composer's name (whoever that may be). Furthermore, the
+      year of release of the CD (or other medium) seems more relevant
+      in referring to the CD than the year of copyright of the
+      specific song, or the recording date.
+
+      For classical music, things are different. Then, the writer (composer)
+      is often more important than the performing artist, although
+      the percentage of people who know who wrote the lyrics for
+      Mozart's operas may not be high. Furthermore, it may be
+      time-consuming and not very relevant for most authors and
+      readers to find the year in which a certain piece was written,
+      although strictly speaking, we should use the ``date of copyright'',
+      which is not relevant for a lot of classical music.
+
+      However, when referring to Beethoven's 9th symphony, say, it will
+      typically not be very informative to refer to a specific recording on a
+      specific CD, unless that specific recording is the subject of interest,
+      but then it would seem that the ``performing artist'' (conductor or
+      orchestra) should take the role of ``author''. For example, when
+      comparing a performance of this symphony conducted in 1975 by Masur with
+      a performance of this symphony conducted in 1990 by Bernstein (assuming
+      this exists), it does not seem logical to compare ``9th Symphony''
+      (Beethoven, 1823a, tracks~1--4) with ``9th Symphony'' (Beethoven, 1823b,
+      tracks~1--4), but more logical to compare Masur (1975) with
+      Bernstein (1990).
+
+      Finally, it seems a bit strange that the track number should be
+      mentioned in text, but not in the reference list.
+
+      Again, you may think that my objections are mainly
+      driven by the difficulties of trying to format the entries
+      in \BibTeX. Nevertheless, here are my attempts to implement
+      the APA rules, using variations of the \cmd{\citesong}
+      command, defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}:\\
+      \begin{tabular}{ll}
+      \cmd{\citeAsong}:  & \citeAsong{ex69-1} \\
+      \cmd{\citesong}:   & \citesong{ex69-1}  \\
+      \cmd{\citesongNP}: & \citesongNP{ex69-1}\\
+      \cmd{\citeAsong}:  & \citeAsong{ex69-2} \\
+      \cmd{\citesong}:   & \citesong{ex69-2}  \\
+      \cmd{\citesongNP}: & \citesongNP{ex69-2}
+      \end{tabular}\\
+      \EM The \fieldname{key} field contains the relevant
+      information in the form of a protected \cmd{\bibsong} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  key = {{\protect\bibsong{author}{year}{song title}{track info}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+      Furthermore, I used some tricks to get the reference list
+      entry right. I used the \entryname{incollection} type as
+      a basis, with the CD title in the \fieldname{booktitle} field.
+      At first sight, it seems natural to define
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {CD},
+\end{verbatim}
+      but with an \entryname{incollection}, the \fieldname{type}
+      field is put after the title, not after the book title.
+      I may change this for music-types (CD, record, etc.),
+      but this is currently not yet implemented. This means that the
+      ``[CD]'' description must be put in the \fieldname{booktitle}
+      field, after the CD title and with explicit formatting
+      commands:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
+\end{verbatim}
+      On the other hand, we can now use the \fieldname{type}
+      field to put the recording artists in for the second example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett},
+\end{verbatim}
+      We have to change the ``In'' string to ``On''
+      (``In'' a book versus ``On'' a CD). This is done with a
+      macro similar to the \cmd{\bibeditortype} macro discussed
+      in ex.~36. In this case, the macro is \cmd{\bibInstring},
+      defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty},
+      which has one argument. The macro changes the definition of
+      the macro \cmd{\BIn} to the argument and then immediately changes
+      the definition back to the old definition. So it makes a one-time
+      change. Of course, the \cmd{\bibInstring} macro only works
+      if it is executed \emph{before} the \cmd{\BIn} macro. The latter
+      macro comes before the \fieldname{booktitle}, so
+      \cmd{\bibInstring} must be added to a field that comes before
+      that. I put it in the \fieldname{title} field:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
+\end{verbatim}
+      where \cmd{\BOn} is defined by default as ``\BOn''.
+      Finally, the recording date of the second example (1990) must
+      be put in the \fieldname{note} field.
+
+      If you want an author index, you would want the authors of
+      these works in the index as well. Because of the usage of the
+      \fieldname{key} field, this is not automatically done for the
+      citations. The \cmd{\AX} command has to be inserted explicitly,
+      see section~\ref{sec:autindex} above.
+
+      Note that this is all trickery within the \LaTeX{} domain
+      and the \fname{.bib} file, i.e., the user-definable and
+      user-customizable area.
+\item \cite{ex70} \\ \cite{ex70}\\ \fullciteA{ex70}\\ \citeA{ex70}
+\item \cite{ex71-1} \\ \cite{ex71-1}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-1}\\ \citeA{ex71-1} \\
+      \cite{ex71-2} \\ \cite{ex71-2}\\ \fullciteA{ex71-2}\\ \citeA{ex71-2} \\
+      \EM In contrast with earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, in which
+      the ``Retrieved \dots'' message had to be formatted in the
+      \fieldname{howpublished} field, this is now formatted
+      automatically by using the \fieldname{url} and
+      \fieldname{lastchecked} fields.
+\item \cite{ex72} \\ \cite{ex72}\\ \fullciteA{ex72}\\ \citeA{ex72}
+\item \cite{ex73} \\ \cite{ex73}\\ \fullciteA{ex73}\\ \citeA{ex73} \\
+      \EM Note that the APA manual breaks a line \emph{after} a
+      period instead of before, against their own rules. Furthermore,
+      the APA manual uses a typeface in which `1' (one) and `l' (ell)
+      are not distinguishable. This requires some guessing of the
+      correct URLs. I think that this conflicts with their own stress
+      on accuracy w.r.t.\ URLs.
+
+      \EM Note the subtle use of braces to get \emph{Homo sapiens}
+      correctly formatted: The capital in \verb+\emph{Homo}+
+      is retained by \BibTeX, whereas the capital in
+      \verb+{\emph{Sapiens}}+ is changed into a lower case letter
+      by \BibTeX, because of the extra pair of braces.
+\item \cite{ex74} \\ \cite{ex74}\\ \fullciteA{ex74}\\ \citeA{ex74}
+\item \cite{ex75} \\ \cite{ex75}\\ \fullciteA{ex75}\\ \citeA{ex75}\\
+      \EM Note that \BibTeX{} does not consider a question mark
+      or an exclamation point as the end of the title and the beginning
+      of the subtitle. Hence, if there is a subtitle after it, the
+      capitalization of its first word is not retained (unlike
+      after a colon), so we have to protect it using braces in the
+      \fname{.bib} file.
+\item \cite{ex76} \\ \cite{ex76}\\ \fullciteA{ex76}\\ \citeA{ex76}
+\item \cite{ex77} \\ \cite{ex77}\\ \fullciteA{ex77}\\ \citeA{ex77}
+\item \cite{ex78} \\ \cite{ex78}\\ \fullciteA{ex78}\\ \citeA{ex78}\\
+      \EM For this example, the source is not simply the URL, but
+      with the qualification ``Columbia University, Institute for
+      Learning Technologies Web site:''. This means that we cannot
+      simply use the \fieldname{lastchecked} and \fieldname{url}
+      fields, but must revert to the way I proposed to format
+      references to electronic sources in previous versions of
+      \pkg{apacite}: by putting all the information in a
+      \fieldname{howpublished} field. This includes explicitly using
+      the \cmd{\url} command and adding ``\verb+\bibnodot{.}+''
+      immediately after the URL. The \cmd{\bibnodot} command,
+      defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}, swallows the period, so that
+      there is no period after the URL in the reference list, thus
+      complying with the APA rules. This also applies to examples
+      79, 87, 91, and 95, and all the examples that do not list
+      a specific URL, but only a description, like
+      ``the PsycARTICLES database'' (ex.~88).
+\item \cite{ex79} \\ \cite{ex79}\\ \fullciteA{ex79}\\ \citeA{ex79}
+\item \cite{ex80} \\ \cite{ex80}\\ \fullciteA{ex80}\\ \citeA{ex80}
+\item \cite{ex81} \\ \cite{ex81}\\ \fullciteA{ex81}\\ \citeA{ex81}
+\item \cite{ex82} \\ \cite{ex82}\\ \fullciteA{ex82}\\ \citeA{ex82}\\
+      \EM Here and in ex.~83, I used the \cmd{\BAbstractRetrieved}
+      and \cmd{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved} commands defined in
+      \fname{apacdoc.sty} to replace ``Retrieved'' by
+      ``Abstract retrieved''.
+\item \cite{ex83} \\ \cite{ex83}\\ \fullciteA{ex83}\\ \citeA{ex83} \\
+\item \cite{ex84} \\ \cite{ex84}\\ \fullciteA{ex84}\\ \citeA{ex84}
+\item \cite{ex85} \\ \cite{ex85}\\ \fullciteA{ex85}\\ \citeA{ex85} \\
+      \EM When referring to a message to a newsgroup, internet forum, etc.,
+      use the \entryname{misc} type. Then define
+\begin{verbatim}
+  type = {\bibmessage},
+\end{verbatim}
+      and use the \fieldname{number} field when relevant. The URL
+      of the message is given in the \fieldname{url} field.  Then
+      the entry is formatted
+      correctly: If the message has a number, say 1, it reverts to
+      ``\verb+[\bibmessage~1]+'', i.e., ``[Msg~1]'' with the default
+      definition of \cmd{\bibmessage}. If there is no number, the
+      type identifier is omitted (because it is mentioned as
+      ``Message posted to [\dots]'' anyway). In both cases,
+      the title is formatted as an article title, i.e., not
+      italicized.
+\item \cite{ex86} \\ \cite{ex86}\\ \fullciteA{ex86}\\ \citeA{ex86}
+\item \cite{ex87} \\ \cite{ex87}\\ \fullciteA{ex87}\\ \citeA{ex87}
+\item \cite{ex88} \\ \cite{ex88}\\ \fullciteA{ex88}\\ \citeA{ex88}
+\item \cite{ex89} \\ \cite{ex89}\\ \fullciteA{ex89}\\ \citeA{ex89}
+\item \cite{ex90} \\ \cite{ex90}\\ \fullciteA{ex90}\\ \citeA{ex90} \\
+      \EM Here, ``de Ridder'' may well be a Dutch name. If the APA
+      manual is serious about its rule to format names as they
+      should according to the rule of the country of origin,
+      this name should then be formatted as ``De Ridder''.
+\item \cite{ex91} \\ \cite{ex91}\\ \fullciteA{ex91}\\ \citeA{ex91}
+\item \cite{ex92} \\ \cite{ex92}\\ \fullciteA{ex92}\\ \citeA{ex92}\\
+      \EM From ex.~94 below, I deduce that the version information
+      should be treated as an edition and not as part of the title.
+      Therefore, in this example and ex.~94, the version is formatted
+      in the \fieldname{edition} field:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces},
+\end{verbatim}
+      using the \cmd{\noedition} command from \fname{apacdoc.sty},
+      which temporarily redefines \cmd{\BEd} to do nothing, and
+      \cmd{\ignorespaces}, which eats up the space that is ordinarily
+      present between the edition number and the ``ed.\hbox{}'' string.
+\item \cite{ex93} \\ \cite{ex93}\\ \fullciteA{ex93}\\ \citeA{ex93}\\
+      \EM To test the \entryname{manual} entry: \citeA{ex93-t1}.
+\item \cite{ex94} \\ \cite{ex94}\\ \fullciteA{ex94}\\ \citeA{ex94}\\
+      \EM The example in the APA manual does not list a date, not even
+      a ``n.d.\hbox{}''. Given the logic of the APA manual, this seems
+      an error to me, so I added a ``\cmd{\bibnodate}'' in the
+      \fieldname{year} field, which becomes ``\bibnodate'' in the
+      output. If it would really be the rule to omit the year, then
+      it is not clear when a year must be omitted and when not, or
+      replaced by ``n.d.\hbox{}''. Furthermore, formatting in both
+      the \fname{.sty} file and the \fname{.bst} file would have to
+      be adapted to anticipate a missing year. Currently, I assume
+      that there should always be something that acts like a date
+      (a year, an ``in press'', or a ``n.d.\hbox{}'').
+
+      \EM See ex.~92 for the treatment of the version.
+\item \cite{ex95} \\ \cite{ex95}\\ \fullciteA{ex95}\\ \citeA{ex95}\\
+      \EM Note that here, unlike ex.~44 and ex.~91,
+      ``U.S.'' is omitted before ``Department of Health and Human
+      Services''.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\StopEventually{%
+\MakePercentComment
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Change History
+\PrintChanges
+%
+% Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography.
+\APACmanBeforeBib
+%
+% Request apacite or apacitex bibliography style
+% depending on whether an index option was requested or not.
+\bibliographystyle{\APACbibstyle}%
+% Include the bibliography
+\bibliography{apa5ex}%
+%
+% Again redefine commands.
+\APACmanBeforeIndex
+%
+% Include the author index if the index option is on.
+\printindex[autx]
+%
+% Again redefine commands.
+\APACmanAfterIndex
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\PrintIndex
+\MakePercentIgnore
+}
+%
+\MakePercentIgnore
+% \iffalse
+%</dtx>
+% \fi
+%
+% \clearpage
+% \APACcodePageLayout
+% \section{Implementation}
+% The following sections describe the source code of the various
+% constituent parts of \pkg{apacite}.
+%
+
+%
+% \section{\LaTeX\ package (\fname{apacite.sty})}
+% This is the \LaTeX\ package part of \pkg{apacite}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%%
+%% apacite.sty : citation and reference list according to APA manual
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% Contains code adapted from
+%%   index.sty [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)],
+%%   hyperref.dtx [6.71, 2000/10/04],
+%%   babel.def [2001/03/01, v3.7h],
+%%   backref.dtx [1.20, 2002/06/09],
+%%   ltbibl.dtx [2004/02/15 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)],
+%%   bibtopic.dtx [2002/08/22 v1.0k],
+%%   multibib.dtx [2004/01/28 v1.3 Multiple bibliographies for one document.],
+%%   multibbl.dtx [2004/07/27 v1.1],
+%%   amsrefs.dtx [2004/06/30 v2.0]
+%%   ltidxglo.dtx [1996/01/20 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Index and Glossary)]
+%%   doc.dtx [2004/02/09 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)]
+%% and code (used with permission) provided by:
+%%   Stefan Bj\"ork.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Default. The ``old'' version
+%%%   \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}
+%%% cannot exist jointly with this, so has to be moved to an option.
+\def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3}
+
+\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with old versions
+   \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}%
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% The \if is necessary because packages can not be required here, so
+% we must handle the consequences of the index and noindex options
+% later.
+%
+\newif\if@APAC@index
+\DeclareOption{noindex}{\@APAC@indexfalse}%
+%
+%%%%%% End No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+\DeclareOption{index}{\@APAC@indextrue}%
+%
+%%%%%% End Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% Include Corporate Authors in index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Use an \if here, the real definitions are handled within the
+% index options.
+%
+\newif\if@APAC@include@corporate
+\DeclareOption{includecorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatetrue}%
+\DeclareOption{suppresscorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatefalse}%
+%
+%%%%%% End Corporate Author options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% Use index package or standard LaTeX index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Use an \if here, the real definitions are handled within the
+% index options.
+%
+\newif\if@APAC@index@package
+\DeclareOption{indexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagetrue}%
+\DeclareOption{noindexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagefalse}%
+%
+%%%%%% End index package options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%% Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% Standard index: from the index package
+\DeclareOption{stdindex}{%
+  %%
+  %% Index style as defined in the index package
+  %% [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)],
+  %% which is the same code as in (v3.02, 15 September 1993),
+  %% i.e., without table of contents entry.
+  %%
+  \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option requires the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}%
+  %%
+  \AtEndOfPackage{%
+    \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
+       \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+           \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+           \if@twocolumn
+               \@restonecolfalse
+           \else
+               \@restonecoltrue
+           \fi
+           \columnseprule \z@
+           \columnsep 35\p@
+           \twocolumn[%
+               \section*{\indexname}%
+               \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+                   \index@prologue
+                   \bigskip
+               \fi
+           ]%
+           \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+                   {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+           \thispagestyle{plain}%
+           \parindent\z@
+           \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+           \let\item\@idxitem
+       }{%
+           \if@restonecol
+               \onecolumn
+           \else
+               \clearpage
+           \fi
+       }
+    }{%
+       \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+           \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+           \if@twocolumn
+               \@restonecolfalse
+           \else
+               \@restonecoltrue
+           \fi
+           \columnseprule \z@
+           \columnsep 35\p@
+           \twocolumn[%
+               \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}%
+               \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+                   \index@prologue
+                   \bigskip
+               \fi
+           ]%
+           \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+                   {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+           \thispagestyle{plain}%
+           \parindent\z@
+           \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+           \let\item\@idxitem
+       }{%
+           \if@restonecol
+               \onecolumn
+           \else
+               \clearpage
+           \fi
+       }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}%
+%
+\DeclareOption{tocindex}{%
+  %%
+  %% Index style as with the stdindex option, but with an
+  %% added table of contents entry.
+  %%
+  \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option requires the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}%
+  %%
+  \AtEndOfPackage{%
+    \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
+       \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+           \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+           \if@twocolumn
+               \@restonecolfalse
+           \else
+               \@restonecoltrue
+           \fi
+           \columnseprule \z@
+           \columnsep 35\p@
+           \twocolumn[%
+               \section*{\indexname}%
+               \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+                   \index@prologue
+                   \bigskip
+               \fi
+           ]%
+           \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+                   {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+           %
+           % the following line added by EM
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\indexname}%
+           %
+           \thispagestyle{plain}%
+           \parindent\z@
+           \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+           \let\item\@idxitem
+       }{%
+           \if@restonecol
+               \onecolumn
+           \else
+               \clearpage
+           \fi
+       }
+    }{%
+       \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+           \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+           \if@twocolumn
+               \@restonecolfalse
+           \else
+               \@restonecoltrue
+           \fi
+           \columnseprule \z@
+           \columnsep 35\p@
+           \twocolumn[%
+               \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}%
+               \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else
+                   \index@prologue
+                   \bigskip
+               \fi
+           ]%
+           \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+                   {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+           %
+           % the following line added by EM
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
+           %
+           \thispagestyle{plain}%
+           \parindent\z@
+           \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+           \let\item\@idxitem
+       }{%
+           \if@restonecol
+               \onecolumn
+           \else
+               \clearpage
+           \fi
+       }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%
+\DeclareOption{emindex}{%
+  %%
+  %% My (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too.
+  %%
+  \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option requires the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}%
+  %%
+  \AtEndOfPackage{%
+    %%
+    %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section
+    %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents
+    %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment.
+    %%
+    \RequirePackage{multicol}
+    \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+        \edef\@indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}%
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+          {\section*{\@indexname}%
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}%
+          }%
+          {\chapter*{\@indexname}%
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}%
+          }%
+        \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this?
+        \parindent\z@
+        \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+        \let\item\@idxitem
+        \setlength{\columnsep}{2em}
+        \small
+        \begin{multicols}{2}
+        \raggedright
+      }%
+      {\end{multicols}\normalsize
+      }%
+  }%
+}%
+%
+\DeclareOption{ltxemindex}{%
+  %%
+  %% Variation on emindex, without the `index' package
+  %%
+  \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option drops the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}%
+  %%
+  \AtEndOfPackage{%
+    %%
+    %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section
+    %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents
+    %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment.
+    %%
+    \RequirePackage{multicol}
+    \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+        % The index naming scheme of the `index' package is also absent,
+        % therefore try to guess an index name.
+        \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{%
+          \@ifundefined{indexname}{%
+            \edef\@indexname{Index}%
+          }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}%
+        }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}%
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+          {\section*{\@indexname}%
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}%
+          }%
+          {\chapter*{\@indexname}%
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}%
+          }%
+        \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this?
+        \def\pfill{\relax{}}%
+        \parindent\z@
+        \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+        \let\item\@idxitem
+        \setlength{\columnsep}{2em}
+        \small
+        \begin{multicols}{2}
+        \raggedright
+      }%
+      {\end{multicols}\normalsize
+      }%
+  }%
+}
+%%%%%% End Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%% Some options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+\newif\if@numberedbib
+\DeclareOption{numberedbib}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography is a section or chapter with a number (e.g.,
+  % section 6 or chapter 10). I think this does not work (i.e., it is
+  % still unnumbered) when the section/chapter is in the backmatter.
+  %
+  \@numberedbibtrue
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{unnumberedbib}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography is a section or chapter without a number (i.e.,
+  % a section* or chapter*). This is the default.
+  %
+  \@numberedbibfalse
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{sectionbib}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography is a section. Typically used with the chapterbib
+  % package, then each chapter has a bibliography section. The
+  % nosectionbib option makes the bibliography a chapter (if chapters
+  % are defined). If none of these options are requested, apacite tries
+  % to guess the most logical choice. The bibliography is a section if
+  % chapters are not defined or if we are in the ``mainmatter'' of a
+  % document. Otherwise, it is a chapter.
+  %
+  \@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}{\newif\if@sectionbib}{}%
+  %
+  \@sectionbibtrue
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{nosectionbib}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography is a chapter if chapters are defined
+  % (otherwise, it is always a section). See the description
+  % of the sectionbib option above for its usage.
+  %
+  \@ifundefined{@sectionbibfalse}{\newif\if@sectionbib}{}%
+  %
+  \@sectionbibfalse
+}
+
+\newif\if@tocbib
+\DeclareOption{tocbib}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography in the table of contents, even if it's
+  % unnumbered. This is the default.
+  %
+  \@tocbibtrue
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{notocbib}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography not in the table of contents if it's
+  % unnumbered. (Will be ignored if it's numbered.)
+  %
+  \@tocbibfalse
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{bibnewpage}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography is started on a new page if it's a section.
+  % (Will be ignored if it's a chapter.)
+  %
+  \def\@bibnewpage{\bibnewpage}
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{nobibnewpage}{%
+  %
+  % The bibliography is started on the same page if it's a section.
+  % (Will be ignored if it's a chapter.)
+  %
+  \let\@bibnewpage\relax
+}
+
+
+%%%%%% End options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% Obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% (For compatibility with previous versions of apacite.)
+%
+\DeclareOption{hyper}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `hyper' ignored}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{nohyper}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `nohyper' ignored}%
+}
+%%%%%% End obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% Obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% (For compatibility with previous versions of apacite.)
+%
+\DeclareOption{accentfix}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `accentfix' ignored}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `noaccentfix' ignored}%
+}
+%%%%%% End obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%% Execute default options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+\ExecuteOptions{noindex,indexpackage,unnumberedbib,tocbib,%
+                nobibnewpage,suppresscorporate}
+
+%%%%%% Execute user-requested options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+\ProcessOptions
+
+%%%%%% Define author indexing stuff when requested
+%
+\newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}
+\if@APAC@index
+    %
+    % Author index requested.
+    %
+    \if@APAC@index@package
+        %
+        % Load \pkg{index} package.
+        \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28]
+        %
+        % Define Author Index.
+        % This may be changed in the preamble of the
+        % document (or in a user-provided package)
+        % by a \renewindex command.
+        %
+        \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname}
+        %
+        % Author indexing command
+        %
+        \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{%
+          \if@filesw{%
+            \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+              \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{%
+              \string\string\string
+              \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}%
+          }%
+          \fi
+        }%
+    \else
+        %
+        % Without \pkg{index} package (experimental).
+        % A bit of code adapted from ltidxglo.dtx
+        \newwrite\@AXfile
+        \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx
+        \typeout
+            {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }%
+        %
+        \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{%
+            \protected@write\@AXfile{}%
+                {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % Some code adapted from doc.dtx
+        \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}%
+             \@input@{\jobname.and}%
+             \global\let\PrintAX\@empty
+        }%
+        %
+        % Do some hacking to make sure both \printindex and \printindex[autx] are defined
+        % As yet untested.
+        \AtBeginDocument{%
+          % Make sure \printindex is defined.
+          \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}%
+          % Now, redefine \printindex to accommodate both \printindex and \printindex[autx]
+          \let\orig@printindex\printindex
+          \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{%
+                                        \orig@printindex}}%
+          %
+          \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}%
+        }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Index corporate authors?
+    \if@APAC@include@corporate
+        % Include corporate authors in index.
+      \let\corporateAX\AX
+    \else
+        % Swallow argument (do not index).
+      \let\corporateAX\@gobble
+    \fi
+    %
+\else
+    %
+    % No author index.
+    %
+    % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another
+    % package is loaded that defines \printindex.
+    %
+    \AtBeginDocument{%
+      \@ifundefined{printindex}%
+        {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it
+          % suppresses the indexes.
+          \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{%
+                                        \check@printindex[]}}%
+          %
+          \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }%
+        }%
+        {% \printindex defined, so save its definition.
+          \let\orig@printindex\printindex
+          %
+          % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index
+          % but does not change other indexes.
+          % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original
+          %    definition.
+          \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}%
+          %
+          % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is
+          %    equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index.
+          %    If not, use the original definition.
+          \def\check@printindex[#1]{%
+            % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx
+            % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work.
+            \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+            \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}%
+              {\orig@printindex[#1]}%
+              {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}%
+          }%
+        }%
+    }%
+    %
+    % Empty author indexing commands
+    %
+    \let\AX\@gobble
+    \let\corporateAX\@gobble
+    %
+\fi
+
+
+%%%%%% Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From the instructions of the chapterbib package.
+
+\@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{}
+\gdef\@extra@binfo{}
+
+%%%%%% End Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\newcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}
+\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}
+\newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Command for corporate authors.
+%%% This is recognized by apacite.bst.
+\let\bibcorporate\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The following commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+%%% They denote that the publication date is unknown,
+%%% and that the type should be left empty (for @techreport, where
+%%% ``Tech. Rep.'' is the default type if the field is left empty).
+\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}
+\newcommand{\bibnotype}{}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% cite punctuations %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% text style of authors in-text citation
+%      (\cite,   \shortcite,   \fullcite,
+%       \citeA,  \shortciteA,  \fullciteA,
+%       \citeNP, \shortciteNP, \fullciteNP)
+\newcommand{\BAstyle}{}%
+
+% text style of authors in-text citation
+%      (\citeauthor, \shortciteauthor, \fullciteauthor)
+\newcommand{\BAastyle}{}%
+
+\newcommand{\BBOP}{(}   % open parenthesis
+\newcommand{\BBCP}{)}   % closing parenthesis
+\newcommand{\BAP}{ }    % after prefix, before first citation
+\newcommand{\BBAA}{\&}  % between authors in parentheses and ref. sec.
+\newcommand{\BBAB}{and} % between authors in text
+\newcommand{\BBAY}{, }  % between author(s) and year
+\newcommand{\BBYY}{, }  % between years of multiple citations with same author
+\newcommand{\BBC}{; }   % between cites
+\newcommand{\BBN}{, }   % before note
+\newcommand{\BBOQ}{}    % open quote for article title
+\newcommand{\BBCQ}{}    % closing quote for article title
+%
+\newcommand{\BCBT}{,}   % comma between authors in ref. sec
+                        % when no. of authors = 2
+\newcommand{\BCBL}{,}   % comma before last author
+\newcommand{\BAnd}{\&}  % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
+%
+\newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA}
+%
+\let\Bem\emph
+
+\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}%  Format as article title in text
+\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}% Format as book title in text
+\newcommand{\APACSortNoop}[1]{} % Can be used to change the sorting order:
+                                % When put between a pair of braces at the
+                                % front of a field, the entry is sorted on
+                                % the argument of this command, but the
+                                % argument is never displayed.
+
+% Two commands that are used to trick natbib.
+\newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}%
+\newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}%
+
+%
+% For multiple citations with same author-year.
+% (Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b)
+% The \protect is necessary when natbib is used.
+%
+\newcounter{BibCnt}
+\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}}
+\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\protect\theBibCnt}
+%
+% In press, no date.
+% The \mbox prevents a line break at the hyphen.
+%
+\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}}
+\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Labels, mostly for reference list %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one
+% in the reference list. Here and in other cases, the \hbox{} ensures that
+% TeX does not mistake the abbreviation period for a sentence-ending period.
+\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}
+% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one
+% in the reference list. The difference with \BOthers is that, if another
+% string is used to define \BOthers, this one should always finish with a
+% period and the previous one not necessarily (e.g., if explicit ``others''
+% is used).
+\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}
+\newcommand{\BIP}{in press}           % used as year for in-press citations
+\newcommand{\BIn}{In}                 % for ``In '' editor...
+\newcommand{\Bby}{by}                 % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}     % chapter
+\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}    % chapters
+\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}         % editor
+\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}       % editors
+\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}   % translator
+\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}  % translators
+\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}  % translation, for the year field
+\newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}           % chair of symposium
+\newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}         % chairs
+\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}       % volume
+\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}     % volumes
+\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}        % number
+\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}      % numbers
+\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}         % edition
+\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}          % page
+\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}        % pages
+\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name
+\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name
+\newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}
+\newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}   % (default) master's thesis type name
+% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name
+\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}
+\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}         % Used if publisher = author
+\newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}
+\newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}
+\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }%          Websites; note the space.
+\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }%     Messages; note the space.
+%
+\def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%
+% An optional note just before the references in the reference list.
+% Defaults to nothing, but can be changed to a list of commands
+% (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the reference
+% list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note).
+%
+\newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}
+
+%
+% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
+% when a meta-analysis is reported.
+%
+\newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+  included in the meta-analysis.}
+%
+% The star that's put in front of the entries used in the meta-analysis
+%
+\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  Load language dependent sections from an external file.
+%  (Based on code by Stefan Bj\"ork, 2004/12/25.)
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+    %
+    % Both babel and (n)german use \iflanguage to check the main
+    % language. They both also use \languagename, but that gives
+    % more problems with dialects. E.g., if \languagename = austrian
+    % then \iflanguage{german}{Yes}{No} gives Yes. This allows us
+    % to provide only .apc files for the language class without
+    % complicated code to check whether a certain dialect is used.
+    %
+    % Check whether \iflanguage is defined. If not, no language support
+    % is offered.
+    %
+  \@ifundefined{iflanguage}%
+    {\relax }%
+    {%  %
+        % My teTeX under Cygwin automatically loads babel with
+        % default language "nohyphenation", so this language should
+        % revert to doing nothing. Strangely enough \iflanguage
+        % does not work correctly, so I'll use a trick. (Some trial
+        % and error, because babel.dtx states that there must be
+        % a '\string ' before the 'nohyphenation', but apparently in
+        % this situation it's the other way around.)
+        %
+      \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}%
+      \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp
+      \else
+        \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{%
+            %
+            % \languagename.apc does not exist; try whether the current
+            % language is a dialect of one of the known languages. This
+            % is not perfect, because languages for which no hyphenation
+            % patterns have been found revert to the default language,
+            % so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that
+            % case.
+            %
+            % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true"
+            % code if the language is defined and equal to the current
+            % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives
+            % an error if the language is not loaded.)
+            %
+          \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{%
+            \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax
+            \else
+              \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language
+                {##2}%
+              \fi
+            \fi
+          }%
+            % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input
+            % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file
+            % has been defined.
+            %
+          \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}%
+            %
+            % The default English as last one.
+          \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}%
+            %
+          \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{%
+            \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
+              No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}%
+          }{%
+             \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{%
+               \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
+                 Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}%
+             }%
+          }%
+          \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined
+        }%
+      \fi
+      \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined
+    }%
+    \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  Bibliography style parameters.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}% apa.cls uses \newpage, change with \renewcommand
+\let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize
+%
+%%% declare four parameters
+\newskip{\bibleftmargin}
+\newskip{\bibindent}
+\newskip{\bibparsep}
+\newskip{\bibitemsep}
+%
+%%% and give them default values
+\bibleftmargin=2.5em
+\bibindent=-\bibleftmargin
+\bibparsep=0pt%
+\bibitemsep\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+
+%
+% To force another order (in Part 1, Part 2 cases)
+% Actually, this is the same as \SortNoop used in the examples,
+% so I do not discuss this in the documentation. It should
+% not be considered part of apacite, but I keep it for backwards
+% compatibility.
+\newcommand{\bibphant}[1]{}
+
+%
+% Replacement of the chapterbib `\@extra@b@citeb' command. This one
+% accumulates all kinds of `extra' flags to accommodate multiple
+% bibliographies of various packages (chapterbib, bibunits).
+\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}%
+\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% label-bibitem %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{%
+    \def\BBA{\BBAA}%
+      % For compatibility with chapterbib, bibunits, backref, and hyperref.
+      % Adapted from natbib.dtx.
+    \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+          \@biblabel{#1}%
+          \hyper@natanchorend]%
+    \if@filesw{%
+        \def\BBA{\string\BBA}%
+        \let\protect\noexpand
+          % bibunits redefines \bibcite through \AtBeginDocument
+          % in a way that is incompatible with apacite's definition.
+          % The simplest way to get things working automatically
+          % seems to be introducing the parallel \APACbibcite command.
+          % This should also solve many other compatibility problems.
+        \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}%
+        \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}%
+        \def\BBA{\BBAA}%
+    }%
+    \fi
+    \ignorespaces
+}
+
+% Year is separately handled by \Y@<citation key>
+\def\APACbibcite#1#2{%
+  \global\expandafter
+    \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}%        names
+  \global\expandafter
+    \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year
+}
+% We don't need this one anymore, but other packages may use it.
+\let\bibcite\APACbibcite
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL                         %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx:
+%%
+%%    Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with
+%%    macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten
+%%    to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''.
+%%
+%% END COMMENTS
+%%
+%% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted.
+%% The other \bibcite-restoring compatibility code above does something
+%% similar, but does not do the job correctly if babel is loaded (why?).
+%% Clearly, this only works if babel is loaded before apacite, but
+%% putting it in a \AtBeginDocument does not work well.
+
+\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{%
+  \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{%
+    \let\bibcite\APACbibcite
+  }%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBTOPIC                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{%
+      %
+      % Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired
+      % error message of bibtopic.
+    \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}%
+  }{%
+      %
+      % These bibtopic hooks are included in the thebibliography
+      % environment, so bibtopic should work correctly. If bibtopic is
+      % not loaded, they should do nothing.
+    \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax}
+    \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax}
+  }%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBUNITS                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Store the default apacite definitions.
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+  \let\APACstd@cite\cite
+  \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite
+  \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem
+}
+
+% Default definition.
+\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{%
+      % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.).
+    \def\APAC@bu{%
+      \ifx\cite\std@cite
+          % Outside a bibunit; the `@APACbu' strings are intended to
+          % minimize the possibility of wrong matches, such as
+          % \b@ex11 = ex11 from the global aux
+          %   or
+          % \b@ex11 = ex1  from bibunit 1,
+          % and the last `@' is similarly intended to avoid confusion
+          % if both bibunits and chapterbib are loaded (`11@1' = 11th
+          % bibunit, 1st chapterbib unit; `1@11' = 1st bibunit, 11th
+          % chapterbib unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would
+          % be used at the same time, but safety first.
+        @APACbu0@%
+      \else
+          % Within a bibunit: use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits.
+        @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @%
+      \fi
+    }%%
+      % Standard apacite definition of \cite and \nocite commands.
+    \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite
+      % This is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect `Citation undefined'
+      % warnings.
+    \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite
+      % Restore apacite definition of \bibitem, mainly because of the
+      % \@newciteauxhandle instead of \@auxout.
+    \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{%
+      \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux
+      \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}%
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout
+    }%%
+      % To make sure everything works whether bibunits is loaded
+      % before or after apacite.
+    \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem
+      %
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBBL                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Almost all of multibbl's code is redefined here, mainly because
+% apacite needs to distinguish which citation refers to which
+% bibliography, so that flags can be correctly set whether a citation
+% is the first citation to the work in from the specific bibliography
+% and correctly includes the meta-analysis flags with the various
+% bibliographies.
+%
+% Default flag definition if multibbl is not loaded.
+\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{}
+%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{%
+      % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.).
+    \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}%
+      % Ditto. This puts the \bibcite commands in #1.aux instead
+      % of in the main aux file, so that the flags can be differentiated.
+      % This also means that the aux file has to be read by LaTeX
+      % before it is overwritten.
+    \def\newbibliography#1{%
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+      \@input@{#1.aux}%
+      \begingroup
+        \if@filesw
+          \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname
+          \expandafter\immediate\openout
+            \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax
+          \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }%
+        \fi
+      \endgroup
+    }%%
+      % Add the flag to the bibliography.
+    \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography
+    \def\bibliography#1#2#3{%
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+      \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle
+      \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}%
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp
+      \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout
+    }%%
+      % Add an extra argument to \@@cite.
+    \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite
+    \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{%
+      \nocite{#3}{#4}%
+      \let\@temp@nocite\nocite
+      \let\nocite\@gobble
+        %
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}%
+      \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}%
+        %
+      \let\nocite\@temp@nocite
+      \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined
+    }%%
+      %
+      % Add an extra argument to \nocite.
+    \let\@orig@nocite\nocite
+    \def\nocite#1#2{%
+        % Define a flag.
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+        %
+        % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite,
+        % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite.
+      \@bsphack
+      \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+          % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations:
+        \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
+          \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+            % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib
+            % #1@auxfile for compatibility with multibbl
+          \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{%
+            \if@filesw
+              \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+            \fi
+          }{\if@filesw
+              \expandafter\immediate%
+              \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+            \fi
+          }%
+            %
+          \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{%
+            \edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
+            \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy
+            \else
+              \G@refundefinedtrue
+              \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+            \fi
+          }{}%
+        }%
+      \else
+           % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work
+           % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested
+           % in ltbibl.dtx:
+         \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}%
+      \fi
+      \@esphack
+        %
+        % For compatibility with multibib.
+      \@restore@auxhandle
+    }%%
+      %
+      % Add an extra argument to \nocitemeta.
+    \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta
+    \def\nocitemeta#1#2{%
+      \nocite{#1}{#2}%
+      \let\@temp@nocite\nocite
+      \let\nocite\@gobble
+        %
+      \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}%
+        %
+      \let\nocite\@temp@nocite
+      \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined
+    }%
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBIB                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% From instructions in multibib.dtx.
+\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}
+\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}}
+% List of citation commands
+\def\@mb@citenamelist{%
+  cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,%
+  citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,%
+  citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,%
+  citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta%
+}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH SPLITBIB                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{splitbib}{%
+      % Presumably, this doesn't hurt without splitbib as well.
+    \def\citeauthoryear{\string\citeauthoryear}%
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH NATBIB                        %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
+      %
+      % Redefine a natbib command. This may be ethically dubious, but
+      % without it, natbib simply cannot handle apacite-generated .bbl
+      % files. The only reason I can think of why both apacite.sty
+      % and natbib would be loaded is exactly the situation when you
+      % want to use natbib for the citations and apacite for the reference
+      % list. In this situation you would load apacite.sty, not for the
+      % citation commands, but for the punctuation commands and labels
+      % defined by apacite. In this situation, the redefinition below
+      % is necessary and therefore I do this here.
+      %
+    \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{%
+      \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}%
+    }%
+      %
+      % natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little
+      % with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches.
+      %
+    \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble
+    \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined
+                     % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought
+                     % of a better hack yet.
+      \@oldbibpreamble%
+      \bibliographytypesize%
+      \bibliographyprenote%
+      \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+        {}% skip
+        {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+    }%
+    \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography
+    \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography%
+                            \normalsize}%
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH HYPERREF                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The code here is adapted from hyperref, natbib, and their respective
+% documentation, to make use of their interoperability.
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+    \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{%
+      \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{%
+      \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{%
+      \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{%
+      \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{%
+      \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{%
+      \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}%
+}
+%
+% Remove spaces from hyperlinks (hyperref keeps them, even if they
+% are removed from the visible output, so you'd get awkward results
+% like \href{http://my .link}{http://my.link}.
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+      % The next should always be true, but just to be sure...
+    \@ifpackageloaded{url}{%
+        % Is obeyspaces option requested? If not, then...
+      \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty
+        % remove spaces from hyperlinks.
+        \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}%
+                    \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}%
+                    \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}%
+      \fi
+    }{}%
+  }{}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF                       %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% A bit of code that makes life a little easier
+%% (adapted from amsrefs.dtx).
+\def\back@cite{}%
+\def\CurrentBib{}%
+\def\PrintBackRefs{}%
+\def\APACrestorebibitem{}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{%
+      % Make sure that \ifBR@verbose is defined.
+    \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{%
+      \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse
+      \let\fi\fi}{}%
+      % A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better
+      % readable.
+    \def\back@cite#1{%
+      \ifBR@verbose
+        \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}%
+      \fi
+      \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+    }%%
+      % Adaptation of the \bibitem command so that backref does not
+      % scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly
+      % done through \PrintBackRefs.
+    \def\APACrestorebibitem{%
+      \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{%
+        \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}%
+        \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+      }%%
+    }%
+      % Printing the backrefs: revert to the standard backrefs macro.
+    \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}%
+  }{%%%
+      % backref not loaded.
+    \let\back@cite\@gobble
+    \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{%
+  \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3%
+  \BR@backref{#2}%
+}%
+
+%
+% Setting catcode of `#'; mainly useful in case the bibliography
+% contains url's containing `#' symbols. Analogous to \makeatother and
+% \makeatletter.
+% Undocumented! [EM, 2007/08/30]
+\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax}%
+\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax}%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%           FOR USE WITH THE URL PACKAGE (AND HYPERREF)              %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% APA requires breaking of url's AFTER a slash or BEFORE a dot.
+% In particular, there should not be a break between "http:" and "//".
+% url.sty also defines many other (punctuation) symbols at which a
+% break may occur. APA does not mention this, but it seems in the spirit
+% of the APA manual
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{url}{%
+      % To circumvent an ``undefined'' error
+    \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}%
+      %
+      % The original dot. (Simply using `.' causes an infinite loop.
+      % This command is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved
+      % easier by redefining \Url@APACdot.)
+    \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }%
+    \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }%
+    \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }%
+    \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }%
+    \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }%
+    \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}%
+      %
+      % APA-definitions.
+    \def\APACurlBreaks{%
+        % Remove dot and slash from ordinary breaks.
+      \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}%
+        % Add slash to big breaks, so that http:// is broken after the second
+        % slash instead of after the colon.
+      \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}%
+        % These are the default ones. Repeat them to get a complete style and
+        % we don't have to rely on what is the default (which might change).
+      \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}%
+      \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}%
+        % Define a dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may
+        % occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur).
+        % The Chicago Manual of Style requests the same treatment of
+        % a couple of other punctuation marks, different from url.sty's
+        % default behavior.
+      \def\UrlSpecials{%
+        \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }\do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }%
+        \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }%
+        \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }%
+        \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }%
+        \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }%
+        \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}%
+        \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde
+    }%%
+    % Change underscore for when a non-tt font is used.
+    \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do
+      \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do
+      \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial}
+
+      % Now define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in
+      % url.sty.
+    \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+    \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+    \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+    \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }%
+      %
+      % Use APACtt-style by default.
+    \urlstyle{APACtt}%
+  }{}%
+}
+
+% In case \url is undefined, define a very simple version.
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{url}{%
+    \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}%
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                    THE CITATION COMMANDS                           %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% First citation in multi-citation.
+\newif\if@F@cite\@F@citetrue
+
+% Two flags to denote whether only author or year must be cited or both.
+\newif\if@A@cite\@A@citefalse
+\newif\if@Y@cite\@Y@citefalse
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \cite<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \fullcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \shortcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
+%       produces (prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix)
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\cite{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%     % >
+        {\@cite}%
+        {\@cite<>}%
+}
+
+\def\fullcite{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%     % >
+        {\@cite}%
+        {\@cite<>}%
+}
+
+\def\shortcite{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%     % >
+        {\@cite}%
+        {\@cite<>}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \citeNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \fullciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \shortciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
+%       produces prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\citeNP{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%% >
+        {\@cite}%
+        {\@cite<>}%
+}
+
+\def\fullciteNP{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%% >
+        {\@cite}%
+        {\@cite<>}%
+}
+
+\def\shortciteNP{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%% >
+        {\@cite}%
+        {\@cite<>}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%       second layer of \cite command
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\@cite<#1>{%
+      %
+      % definition of some parameters
+      %
+    \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+    \def\@BBA{\BBAA}%  % `and' between authors
+    \def\@BBAY{\BBAY}% % between author and year
+    \def\@BAY{}%       % after year
+    \def\@BBY{\BBYY}%  % between years of multiple citations with same author
+    \def\@BBC{\BBC}%   % between cites
+    \def\@BBN{\BBN}%   % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+    \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors
+    \@A@citetrue%       % cite authors
+    \@Y@citetrue%       % cite years
+    \@ifnextchar[%      % ]
+        {\@@cite<#1>}%
+        {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \citeA<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \fullciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \shortciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
+%       produces prefix Authors1 (Year1), ..., AuthorN (YearN, postfix)
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\citeA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%          %>
+        {\@citeA}%
+        {\@citeA<>}%
+}
+
+\def\fullciteA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%          %>
+        {\@citeA}%
+        {\@citeA<>}%
+}
+
+\def\shortciteA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%          %>
+        {\@citeA}%
+        {\@citeA<>}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%       second layer of \citeA command
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\@citeA<#1>{%
+      %
+      % definition of some parameters
+      %
+    \def\@BBOP{}%      % open parenthesis.
+    \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+    \def\@BBA{\BBAB}%  % `and' between authors
+    \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year
+    \def\@BAY{\BBCP}%  % after year
+    \def\@BBY{\BBYY}%  % between years of multiple citations with same author
+    \def\@BBC{\BBC}%   % between cites
+    \def\@BBN{\BBN}%   % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+    \def\@BBCP{}%      % close parenthesis
+    \def\@BAstyle{\BAstyle}% text style of authors
+    \@A@citetrue%      % cite authors
+    \@Y@citetrue%      % cite years
+    \@ifnextchar[%     % ]
+        {\@@cite<#1>}%
+        {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \citeauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \fullciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \shortciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
+%       produces prefix Authors1, ..., AuthorsN, postfix
+%
+% \citeauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \fullciteauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+% \shortciteauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       does the same, but for a parenthetical citation
+%       (the difference being `\&' instead of `and' between authors)
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\citeauthor{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthor}%
+        {\@citeauthor<>}%
+}
+
+\def\fullciteauthor{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthor}%
+        {\@citeauthor<>}%
+}
+
+\def\shortciteauthor{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthor}%
+        {\@citeauthor<>}%
+}
+
+\def\citeauthorNP{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthorNP}%
+        {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+
+\def\fullciteauthorA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthorNP}%
+        {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+
+\def\shortciteauthorA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthorNP}%
+        {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%       second layer of \citeauthor and \citeauthorNP commands
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\@citeauthor<#1>{%
+      %
+      % definition of some parameters
+      %
+    \def\@BBOP{}%      % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+    \def\@BBA{\BBAB}%  % `and' between authors
+    \def\@BBAY{}%      % between author and year
+    \def\@BAY{}%       % after year
+    \def\@BBY{}%       % between years of multiple citations with same author
+    \def\@BBC{\BBC}%   % between cites
+    \def\@BBN{\BBN}%   % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+    \def\@BBCP{}%      % close parenthesis
+    \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+    \@A@citetrue%      % cite authors
+    \@Y@citefalse%     % do not cite years
+    \@ifnextchar[%     % ]
+        {\@@cite<#1>}%
+        {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+
+\def\@citeauthorNP<#1>{%
+      %
+      % definition of some parameters
+      %
+    \def\@BBOP{}%      % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+    \def\@BBA{\BBAA}%  % `and' between authors
+    \def\@BBAY{}%      % between author and year
+    \def\@BAY{}%       % after year
+    \def\@BBY{}%       % between years of multiple citations with same author
+    \def\@BBC{\BBC}%   % between cites
+    \def\@BBN{\BBN}%   % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+    \def\@BBCP{}%      % close parenthesis
+    \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+    \@A@citetrue%      % cite authors
+    \@Y@citefalse%     % do not cite years
+    \@ifnextchar[%     % ]
+        {\@@cite<#1>}%
+        {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \citeyear<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
+%       produces (prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix)
+%
+% \citeyearNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
+%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
+%       produces prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\citeyear{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{\BBOP}% % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{\BBCP}% % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%     % >
+        {\@citeyear}%
+        {\@citeyear<>}%
+}
+
+\def\citeyearNP{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \def\@BBOP{}%   % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBCP{}%   % close parenthesis
+    \@ifnextchar<%  % >
+        {\@citeyear}%
+        {\@citeyear<>}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%       second layer of \citeyear command
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\@citeyear<#1>{%
+      %
+      % definition of some parameters
+      %
+    \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+    \def\@BBA{}%       % `and' between authors
+    \def\@BBAY{}%      % between author and year
+    \def\@BAY{}%       % after year
+    \def\@BBY{\BBYY}%  % between years of multiple citations with same author
+    \def\@BBC{\BBC}%   % between cites
+    \def\@BBN{\BBN}%   % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+    \def\@BAstyle{}%   % text style of authors
+    \@A@citefalse%     % do not cite authors
+    \@Y@citetrue%      % cite years
+    \@ifnextchar[%     % ]
+        {\@@cite<#1>}%
+        {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% The core citation routines
+%% The following commands must have been defined:
+%%    \@BBOP        open parenthesis
+%%    \@BAP         after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+%%    \@BBA         `and' between authors
+%%    \@BBAY        between author and year
+%%    \@BAY         after year
+%%    \@BBY         between years of multiple citations with same author
+%%    \@BBC         between cites
+%%    \@BBN         after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+%%    \@BBCP        close parenthesis
+%%    \@BAstyle     formatting style of authors (e. g., \scshape)
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal previous
+\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de#1{%
+  \if@F@cite%
+     \@F@citefalse%
+  \else%
+     \if@Y@cite%
+        {\@BBY}%
+     \fi%
+  \fi%
+  \if@Y@cite%
+     \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+     {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkend
+  \fi%
+}
+
+%%% Code to be executed if current author(s) do not equal previous
+\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{%
+  \if@F@cite%
+     \@F@citefalse%
+  \else%
+     \if@Y@cite%
+        {\@BAY}%
+     \fi%
+     {\@BBC}%
+  \fi%
+  \edef\@cite@undefined{?}%
+  \def\BBA{\@BBA}%
+  \if@A@cite%
+     \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+     {\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkend
+     \if@Y@cite%
+        {\@BBAY}%
+     \fi%
+  \fi%
+  \if@Y@cite%
+     \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+     {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkend
+  \fi%
+  \let\BBA\relax%
+}
+
+\def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3{%
+      %
+      % Write citation(s) to .aux file(s)
+      %
+    \nocite{#3}%
+      %
+      % the previous cite, for multiple citations with same author
+      %
+    \edef\@citeP{}%
+      %
+      % open parenthesis and pre-note
+      % The \mbox is to avoid hyperref problems if a \citeA follows an \item.
+    \mbox{\@BBOP}%
+    \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \else%
+      {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}%
+    \fi%
+      %
+      % loop over citation entries
+      %
+    \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%
+          % Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that
+          % e.g. \cite{key1, key2} can be done.
+        \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+          % For backref.
+        \back@cite{\@citeb}%
+          %
+          % check whether citation is defined
+          %
+        \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+          {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+           \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+           % The following is now handled by \nocite
+           %\G@refundefinedtrue
+           %\@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+          }%%
+            % If citation is defined:
+            % check whether flag is set that identifies that
+            % this is not the first citation to the work
+            % if flag is not set, it will be set to DUMMY
+            % if this is the first citation to the work,
+            % the full citation is used; else the short version
+            % is used
+            %
+          {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+             {\global\expandafter
+              \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+              \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##1}}%
+             }%
+             {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}%
+             }%
+          }%
+           % Check whether current author(s) is (are) equivalent
+           % to previous. If so, only year is cited in text
+           % and a \@BBY (probably comma and space) is inserted between
+           % the two years.
+           %
+           % The \protected@edef fixes the problem with authors with accents
+           % (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Previous versions of apacite solved this
+           % less elegantly (accentfix option). This fix provided by Robert Schlicht.
+           % See also the new definition of \@citeP below.
+        \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+        \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy%
+            \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+        \else%
+            \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+        \fi%
+           % define previous citation-author as current
+           %
+        \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+           %
+        \let\BCA\relax%
+    }%%
+      % end loop over citation entries
+      % add note [=#2] and closing parenthesis
+      %
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else%
+      {\@BBN #2}%
+    \fi%
+    \if@Y@cite%
+       {\@BAY}%
+    \fi%
+    {\@BBCP}%
+      %
+      % define first citation true for next \@@cite
+      %
+    \@F@citetrue %
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \nocite{key} : entry in reference list, not in text
+%
+% This is a little different from \@@cite with
+%  \@A@citefalse and \@Y@citefalse
+% because of the `*' variant (cite all entries in bibfile)
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\nocite#1{%
+    % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite,
+    % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite.
+  \@bsphack
+  \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+      % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations:
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib
+      \if@filesw
+        \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+      \fi
+        %
+      \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{%
+        \edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
+        \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy
+        \else
+          \G@refundefinedtrue
+          \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+        \fi
+      }{}%
+    }%
+  \else
+       % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work
+       % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested
+       % in ltbibl.dtx:
+     \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}%
+  \fi
+  \@esphack
+    %
+    % For compatibility with multibib.
+  \@restore@auxhandle
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \nocitemeta{key} : entry in reference list, not in text,
+%                    for entries that are used in a meta-analysis.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\nocitemeta#1{%
+    \nocite{#1}%
+    \@bsphack%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\def
+      \csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{%
+        \APACmetaprenote}%
+    %
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+       \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+         % Define meta-analysis flag for current item
+       \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\global\expandafter
+          \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+         }%
+         {}%
+    }%
+    \@esphack%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \APACinsertmetastar{key}: insert an asterisk before the names in the
+%     reference list for entries that are used in a meta-analysis.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\APACinsertmetastar#1{%
+  \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+    \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+    \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+      {}% skip
+      {{\APACmetastar}}%
+  }%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% No labels in the bibliography.
+%
+\def\@biblabel#1{}
+
+%
+\def\st@rtbibsection{%
+  \@bibnewpage%           start a new page if desired
+  \if@numberedbib%
+    \section{\refname}%   e.g.,   6. References
+  \else%
+    \section*{\refname}%  e.g.,   References
+    \if@tocbib%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
+    \fi%
+    \@ifundefined{chapter}
+      {\@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}}% do we need this? yep. why?
+      {\markright{{\refname}}}% do we need this? yep. why?
+    %
+  \fi%
+}%
+%
+\def\st@rtbibchapter{%
+  % here no \@bibnewpage, because it is assumed that
+  % the \chapter starts a new page
+  \if@numberedbib%
+    \chapter{\bibname}%   e.g.,   6. References
+  \else%
+    \chapter*{\bibname}%   e.g.,   References
+    \if@tocbib%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}%
+    \fi%
+    \@mkboth{{\bibname}}{{\bibname}}% do we need this? yep. why?
+    %
+  \fi%
+}%
+%
+%
+\def\thebibliography#1{%
+    %
+    % Start the bibliography section or chapter
+    %
+  \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+    {\st@rtbibsection}%
+% else: chapter is defined
+    {\@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}%     we have to guess
+       {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}% check if mainmatter exists
+          {\st@rtbibchapter}%
+%       else: mainmatter is defined
+          {\if@mainmatter%
+             \st@rtbibsection% typically, a chapter-specific bibliogr.
+           \else%
+             \st@rtbibchapter% a bibliography at the end
+           \fi%
+          }%
+       }%
+       {% an explicit option has been chosen
+        %
+        \if@sectionbib%
+          \st@rtbibsection% bibliography is a section
+        \else%
+          \st@rtbibchapter% bibliography is a chapter
+        \fi%
+       }%
+    }%
+    %
+  \bibliographytypesize% e.g., to put the bibliography in \small type
+  \bibliographyprenote%  some explanatory note before the references
+  %
+  \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+    {}% skip
+    {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+    %
+  \list{\relax}{\labelsep=0em%
+%               \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+                \parsep=\bibparsep%
+                \itemsep=\bibitemsep%
+                \leftmargin=\bibleftmargin%
+                \itemindent=\bibindent}% changed to cope with 4th ed.
+   \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
+   \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
+   \sfcode`\.=1000\relax
+     % For compatibility with bibtopic.
+   \bt@beg@thb@hook
+     % To overrule backref.
+   \APACrestorebibitem
+}
+\def\endthebibliography{%
+     % For compatibility with bibtopic.
+   \bt@end@thb@hook
+     %
+   \def\@noitemerr{%
+       \@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}%
+   }%
+   \endlist\normalsize
+}
+%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%               REFERENCE LIST FORMATTING COMMANDS                   %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Dates
+%
+\newcommand{\APACrefYear}[1]{%
+  % Should never be empty.
+  {\BBOP}{#1}{\BBCP}%
+}
+\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or
+    April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or
+    November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else
+    {#1}\fi}
+% This command should be replaced by a language-dependent one.
+\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+    % year (+ addendum)
+  {\BBOP}{#1}%
+    % month
+  \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#2}%
+  \fi
+    % day
+  \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip\ {#3}%
+  \fi
+  {\BBCP}%
+}
+%
+% Titles
+% Arguments: #1 = capitalized title, #2 = not capitalized title
+%
+% Article title (roman, not capitalized)
+\newcommand{\APACrefatitle}[2]{#2}
+% Book title (italic, not capitalized)
+\newcommand{\APACrefbtitle}[2]{\Bem{#2}}
+% English translation of foreign article title (bracketed, roman, not capitalized)
+\newcommand{\APACrefaetitle}[2]{[#2]}
+% English translation of foreign book title (bracketed, roman, not capitalized)
+\newcommand{\APACrefbetitle}[2]{[#2]}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% I copied the following couple of functions literally from
+% amsrefs.dtx (\PrintEdition ff.) and made only one slight
+% adaptation: removing \editiontext.
+% Perhaps I can make this more language-neutral, but I think
+% separate functions are needed for different languages.
+\let\@xp\expandafter
+% \PrintCardinal{2} gives `2nd' etc.
+% If the argument is not an integer number, it is copied literally
+% to the output. (At least, apparently, because I do not really
+% understand how it works.)
+\newcommand{\PrintCardinal}[1]{%
+    \afterassignment\print@cardinal
+    \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}
+\def\print@cardinal#1#2\@nil{%
+    \ifx\relax#1\relax
+        \ifnum\count@>\z@
+            \CardinalNumeric\count@
+        \else
+            ??th%
+        \fi
+    \else
+        \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+        #1#2\relax
+    \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+    \number#1\relax
+    \if
+        \ifnum#1<14
+            \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+        \else
+            F%
+        \fi
+        T%
+        th%
+    \else
+        \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+        \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi
+    \fi
+}
+\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{%
+    \ifx\relax#2%
+        \@xp\@gobbletwo
+    \else
+        #1=#2\relax
+    \fi
+    \keep@last@digit#1%
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Journal, volume, number, pages
+% (#1 = journal, #2 = volume, #3 = number, #4 = formatted pages)
+\newcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{%
+    % journal
+  \Bem{#1}%
+    % volume
+  \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, \Bem{#2}%
+  \fi
+    % issue number
+  \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip({#3})%
+  \fi
+    % pages
+  \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Addres and publisher/institution
+% (#1 = address, #2 = publisher)
+\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      % publisher
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+      {#2}%
+    \fi
+      %
+  \else
+      % address
+    {#1}%
+      % publisher
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+      \unskip: {#2}%
+    \fi
+      %
+  \fi
+}
+%
+\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher
+%
+% Addres and publisher/institution if the latter is also the author.
+% (#1 = address, #2 = publisher)
+\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      % Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the author.
+    {\BAuthor{}}%
+      %
+  \else
+      % Address and publisher. These are not empty.
+    {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}%
+      %
+  \fi
+}
+%
+\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth
+%
+% Howpublished.
+% \APAChowpublished is only inserted in the .bbl file if the
+% argument is nonempty. Because we don't want any special formatting,
+% and \def\APAChowpublished#1{#1} leads to problems with hash marks
+% in url's that may be present in howpublished, we simply pretend
+% that \APAChowpublished does not have an argument and does nothing.
+%\def\APAChowpublished{}%
+\let\APAChowpublished\relax
+%
+% URL formatting
+\newenvironment{APACrefURL}[1][]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \BAvailFrom
+  \else
+    \BRetrieved{#1}%
+  \fi
+}{}
+% URLs of messages
+\newenvironment{APACrefURLmsg}{%
+  \BMsgPostedTo
+}{}
+%
+% Original editor(s) for reprints and translations.
+\newcommand{\APACorigED}[1]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+      % ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)''
+    \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}%
+  \fi
+}
+%
+\newcommand{\APACorigEDS}[1]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+      % ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)''
+    \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}%
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Various note formatting functions.
+%
+% Only note
+\newcommand{\APACrefnote}[1]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+    ({#1})%
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Original year + optional note.
+% Arguments: #1 = year, #2 =  note.
+\newcommand{\APACorigyearnote}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      % Original year empty: format note.
+    \APACrefnote{#2}%
+  \else
+      % Check for \bibnodate. I think the following command does not check
+      % whether #1 = `\bibnodate', but expands them, but that should
+      % also be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \expandafter commands.
+    \ifx\bibnodate#1\@empty
+        % Original year unknown: format (only) note.
+      \APACrefnote{#2}%
+    \else
+        % Original year has been given: ``Original work published''.
+      (\BOWP{} {#1}%
+        % Note
+      \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \else
+        \unskip; {#2}%
+      \fi
+        % Final parenthesis.
+      )%%
+        %
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Original journal + optional note
+% Arguments: #1 = year, #2 = journal, #3 = volume, #4 = issue number,
+%            #5 = formatted pages, #6 = note.
+\newcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{%
+    % "(Reprinted from " (note the space)
+  (\BREPR{} %
+    % Journal (should not be empty)
+  \Bem{#2}%
+    % Year
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#1}%
+  \fi
+    % Volume
+  \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, \Bem{#3}%
+  \fi
+    % Issue number
+  \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip{[#4]}%
+  \fi
+    % Pages
+  \ifx\@empty#5\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#5}%
+  \fi
+    % Note
+  \ifx\@empty#6\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip; {#6}%
+  \fi
+    % Final parenthesis.
+  )%%
+    %
+}
+%
+% An auxiliary function: make a comma-separated output list of the
+% input, recognizing empty arguments. Must be called with one
+% argument, and the argument contains a comma-separated list of elements.
+% The elements of this should generally be enclosed in braces.
+\def\@connect@with@commas#1{%
+    % Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty.
+  \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }%
+  \let\@connect@string\relax
+    % Loop over elements.
+  \@for\@element@:=#1\do{%
+     \ifx\@empty\@element@%
+     \else
+         % Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first
+         % nonempty element, a comma and space afterwards).
+       \@connect@string\@element@%
+       \let\@connect@string\@comma@space
+     \fi
+  }%
+  \let\@connect@string\@undefined
+  \let\@comma@space\@undefined
+}
+%
+% Original book + optional note.
+% Arguments:
+% #1 = year, #2 = formatted editor, #3 = formatted title,
+% #4 = formatted edition, #5 = formatted volume, #6 = formatted pages,
+% #7 = address, #8 = publisher, #9 = note.
+\newcommand{\APACorigbooknote}[9]{%
+    %
+    % "(Reprinted from " (note the space)
+  (\BREPR{} %
+    %
+    % Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher
+    % These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here
+    % (because it's done in the .bst file).
+  \@connect@with@commas{%
+    {#3},{#4},{#5},{#6},{#2},{#1},{\APACaddressPublisher{#7}{#8}}%
+  }%%
+    %
+    % Add optional note.
+  \ifx\@empty#9\@empty
+  \else
+    ; #9%
+  \fi
+    %
+    % Final parenthesis.
+  )%%
+    %
+}
+%
+% Formatting of Technical Report information.
+%
+% Volume, edition, type, number.
+% Arguments: #1 = formatted edition + volume,
+% #2 = formatted technical report type + number
+\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+        % (Technical Report No.\ <no>)
+      {(#2)}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+      % (2nd ed., Vol.~1
+    ({#1}%
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+        % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>
+      \unskip; {#2}%
+    \fi
+      % Final parenthesis.
+    )%%
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Volume, edition, type, number, pages (for @intechreport).
+% Arguments: #1 = formatted edition + volume,
+% #2 = formatted technical report type + number, #3 = formatted pages.
+\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+      \else
+          % (pp. 10--30)
+        {(#3)}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+        % (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30)
+      (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})%
+    \fi
+  \else
+      % (2nd ed., Vol.~1
+    ({#1}%
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+      \else
+          % ; pp. 10--30
+        \unskip; {#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+        % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30
+      \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}%
+    \fi
+      % Final parenthesis.
+    )%%
+  \fi
+}
+%%
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Documentation package (\fname{apacdoc.sty})}
+% The \pkg{apacdoc} package is written for generating the \pkg{apacite}
+% user's manual. But it also contains a few commands that are too
+% experimental or otherwise unsuitable to be included in \fname{apacite.sty},
+% but which are necessary to format some examples from the APA manual
+% correctly. As such, these commands may be useful for users if they
+% encounter similar citation problems. In such a case, it is probably
+% better to copy the definitions of the desired commands to the top
+% of your \fname{.tex} document (before \verb+\begin{document}+) or
+% to a tailor-made \fname{.sty} file, rather than loading the \pkg{apacdoc}
+% package.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*docpkg>
+%%
+%% apacdoc.sty : Style package that is used for the apacite documentation.
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+% Generate Author Index?
+\newif\if@APACdoc@AX
+\DeclareOption{makeAX}{\@APACdoc@AXtrue}%
+\@APACdoc@AXfalse
+\ProcessOptions
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS THAT MAY BE USEFUL FOR WIDER USE.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Echo argument literally. Can be used to define a certain author type
+% (``Producer'') in a place where \BibTeX{} expects a first name.
+% Using this command between a pair of braces makes sure that the text
+% is not abbreviated into an initial.
+%%\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}}
+%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1}
+%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}}
+%% This is the result of lots of trial and error. If I change something
+%% in another part, I typically have to change something here as well.
+%% The \space is necessary because in the current setup, an additional
+%% space is inserted in the bibliography, and MakeIndex is space-sensitive.
+\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral\space{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibinitial}[1]{\string#1}
+%\newcommand{\bibinitial}{\string\bibinitial\space}
+
+% If the argument is a period (`.'), \BibTeX{} puts no period after it.
+\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{}
+
+% For ``On cdtitle [CD]'' etc., to be used instead of ``In''.
+\newcommand{\BOn}{On}
+
+% Reverse order. Can be used for various reasons.
+\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1}
+
+% The following macro is esp. useful if the year field must be different
+% in text and in reference list. E.g., if 1992/1993 in text and 1992
+% in reference list. Then year can be defined as \bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}.
+% The definition below displays only the second argument (``text'').
+% Just before the reference list, this can then be changed to
+% display only the first argument (``ref'').
+\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2}
+
+% The same command, but now intended for Dutch-style ``von'' parts.
+\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2}
+
+% The following macro changes the definitions of the macros \BED and \BEDS
+% to the argument and then immediately changes the definitions back to their
+% old definitions. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use
+% ``Producer'' instead of ``Ed.'' etc.
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax }%
+\def\renewbibeditortype{%
+  \def\oldBED{}%
+  \def\oldBEDS{}%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{%
+    \global\let\oldBED\BED
+    \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS
+    \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED  \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
+    \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% The following macro changes the definition of the macro \BIn to the
+% argument and then immediately changes the definition back to the old
+% definition. So it makes a one-time change. Can be used to use ``On''
+% instead of ``In'' for a CD-track.
+\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{%
+  \global\let\oldBIn\BIn
+  \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}%
+}
+
+% The following macros are used to change ``Retrieved'' into
+% ``Abstract retrieved''. They use the same principle as \renewbibeditortype.
+\global\def\BAbstractRetrieved#1{Abstract retrieved {#1}, from\ }%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}{%
+  \global\def\oldBRetrieved{}%
+  \global\let\oldBRetrieved\BRetrieved
+  \global\def\BRetrieved##1{%
+     \BAbstractRetrieved{##1}%
+     \global\let\BRetrieved\oldBRetrieved%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Suppress ``ed.'' to format ``Version 4.0'' in an edition field.
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\noedition}{%
+  \global\def\oldBEd{}%
+  \global\let\oldBEd\BEd
+  \global\def\BEd{%
+     \unskip
+     \global\let\BEd\oldBEd
+  }%
+}
+
+% The \bibskipbracenodot macro suppresses the period after a following closing
+% brace. It does not work entirely well at the moment. In particular, it
+% works differently in an \AX macro in text and an \AX macro in the
+% reference list. This has something to do with robust vs. fragile macros
+% and/or expansion of the macro. I have experimented a lot with many
+% variations, but don't seem to get it right. I don't understand these
+% issues well yet.
+\def\swallownext#1{\relax}
+\def\swallowdot{%
+    \@ifnextchar.%
+      {\swallownext}%
+      {\relax}%
+}
+
+% When the above does not work, \bibskipbracenodot should reduce to nothing.
+% This is the current definition. Just before the bibliography, it is
+% redefined.
+%\def\bibskipbracenodot{\string\bibskipbracenodot}
+\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot}
+%\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}
+%\let\bibskipbracenodot\relax
+\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}
+
+\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeBib}{%
+    % Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography.
+    \renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{##1}%
+    \renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{##1}%
+    \renewbibeditortype
+    \global\let\oldbibskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot
+    \global\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}%
+    \global\let\oldbibliteral\bibliteral
+    \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{##1}%
+    \global\let\oldbibinitial\bibinitial
+    \renewcommand{\bibinitial}[1]{##1}%
+}
+
+% Dirty trick: request apacitex.bst if apacite is loaded with one of the
+% index options, and request apacite.bst otherwise.
+\def\APACbibstyle{%
+  \if@APAC@index
+    apacitex% with index option
+  \else
+    apacite% without index option
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeIndex}{%
+    \clearpage
+    % Redefine commands that should be different in the author index.
+    \renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}%
+    \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\unskip}%
+    \global\let\indexskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot
+}
+
+\newcommand{\APACmanAfterIndex}{%
+    % Revert to old definitions of commands.
+    \global\let\bibskipbracenodot\oldbibskipbracenodot
+    \global\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}%
+    \APACdocindex
+}
+
+% Redefine some indexing-related commands from doc.sty and ltxdoc.cls
+% Unfortunately, I couldn't get the code index and change history
+% working with the index package, so I have to tweak everything so
+% that the apacite manual does not use the index package (which is
+% loaded by apacite when an index option is requested).
+
+\@ifundefined{IndexPrologue}{}{%
+  \IndexPrologue{\clearpage\section*{{Code Index}}%
+                 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Code Index}%
+                 \markboth{{Code Index}}{{Code Index}}%
+                 Numbers written in italic refer to the page
+                 where the corresponding entry is described;
+                 numbers underlined refer to the
+                 \ifcodeline@index
+                   code line of the
+                 \fi
+                 definition; numbers in roman refer to the
+                 \ifcodeline@index
+                   code lines
+                 \else
+                   pages
+                 \fi
+                 where the entry is used.
+                }%
+}
+\@ifundefined{GlossaryPrologue}{}{%
+  \GlossaryPrologue{\section{{Change History}}%
+                    \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}%
+                   }%
+}
+
+% From doc.dtx
+\def\APACdocindex{%
+    \ifhave@multicol
+      \renewenvironment{theindex}
+        {\begin{multicols}\c@IndexColumns[\index@prologue][\IndexMin]%
+          \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
+        {\end{multicols}}
+    \else
+      \typeout{Can't find multicol.sty -- will use normal index layout if
+         necessary.}
+      \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+        \columnseprule \z@  \columnsep 35\p@
+        \twocolumn[\index@prologue]%
+        \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+      \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+    \fi
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% CITATIONS TO THE BIBLE
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The APA manual gives some rules how the Bible and other classic
+% works should be cited. These rules are not implemented in standard
+% apacite, so I provide a workaround here.
+
+%%% To define which Bible version you used.
+\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}}
+\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}
+
+\def\bibleciteA#1{%
+   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
+   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+      {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}%
+      {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}%
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\fullbibleciteA#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited.
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\shortbibleciteA#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\biblecite#1{%
+   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
+   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+      {\fullbiblecite{#1}}%
+      {\shortbiblecite{#1}}%
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\fullbiblecite#1{%
+   % Open parenthesis.
+   {\BBOP}%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Add bible version.
+   {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
+   % Close parenthesis.
+   {\BBCP}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited.
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\shortbiblecite#1{%
+   % Open parenthesis.
+   {\BBOP}%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Close parenthesis.
+   {\BBCP}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\bibleciteNP#1{%
+   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
+   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+      {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}%
+      {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}%
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Add bible version.
+   {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited.
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% COMMANDS TO CITE SONGS.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The APA manual gives some rules how songs should be cited. These
+% rules require some tweaking of standard apacite. This is done here.
+
+\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{}
+
+\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+  }%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+  }%
+  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+  }%
+  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% COMMANDS TO CITE DSM.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The APA manual gives some rules how the DSM should be cited, which
+% is a bit different from ordinary citations. These rules are not
+% implemented in standard apacite, so I provide a workaround here.
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibDSM}[4]{#1}
+%   author, title, edition, abbreviated title
+% Default prints author, so you get something decent if
+% an ordinary cite is used.
+\def\origbibDSM{}
+\let\origbibDSM\bibDSM
+
+\newcommand{\DSMauthor}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##1}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfulltitle}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##2}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshorttitle}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##4}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMedition}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##3}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{%
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+        % Removes a possible space before the citation key
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % Is this the first citation?
+      \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\DSMfullciteA{#1}}%
+         {\DSMshortciteA{#1}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{%
+  % \emph{Full Title} (edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}
+  \BBOP
+  \DSMedition{#1};
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+  \citeNP{#1}%
+  \BBCP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{%
+  % \emph{Short Title}
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{%
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+        % Removes a possible space before the citation key
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % Is this the first citation?
+      \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\DSMfullcite{#1}}%
+         {\DSMshortcite{#1}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+  \BBOP
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}},
+  \DSMedition{#1};
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+  \citeNP{#1}%
+  \BBCP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Short Title})
+  \BBOP\APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}\BBCP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{%
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+        % Removes a possible space before the citation key
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % Is this the first citation?
+      \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\DSMfullciteNP{#1}}%
+         {\DSMshortciteNP{#1}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}},
+  \DSMedition{#1};
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+  \citeNP{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Short Title})
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}%
+}
+
+% \newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{%
+%   \@for\@citec:=#1\do{%
+%     % Check whether citation is defined.
+%     \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}%
+%       {\citeA{\@citec}}%
+%       {\citeauthor{\@citec}}%
+%   }%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{%
+%   \fullciteA{#1}%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{%
+%   \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{%
+%   {\BBOP}%
+%   \@for\@citec:=#1\do{%
+%     % Check whether citation is defined.
+%     \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}%
+%       {\citeNP{\@citec}}%
+%       {\citeauthor{\@citec}}%
+%   }%
+%   {\BBCP}%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{%
+%   \fullcite{#1}%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{%
+%   {\BBOP}\shortciteauthor{#1}{\BBCP}%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{%
+%   \@for\@citec:=#1\do{%
+%     % Check whether citation is defined.
+%     \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}%
+%       {\citeNP{\@citec}}%
+%       {\citeauthor{\@citec}}%
+%   }
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{%
+%   \fullciteNP{#1}%
+% }
+%
+% \newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{%
+%   \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+% }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% These are some commands that are used in this document, but are
+% presumably not especially relevant for users.
+
+\@ifundefined{BibTeX}{%
+  \def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
+      T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% copied from bibtex.web
+}{}
+\newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}}
+\newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty
+\newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}%
+\newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}%
+\newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}%
+
+% My comments accompanying the examples.
+\newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}}
+
+% The date of a version of apacite. Makes it easy to search the document
+% for these dates. The \relax is a safety measure (probably not needed),
+% which ensures that the square brackets are never interpreted as an
+% optional argument.
+\newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [#1]}
+
+\newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion
+\newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table
+\newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table
+
+\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name
+\newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name
+\newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% field name
+\newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% entry type name
+\newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% package option
+\newcommand{\envirname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% environment name
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{cmd}{%
+    \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}% command, incl. `\'
+  }{}%
+}
+
+% Some trickery with backslashes and @ signs.
+\newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash
+\newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape #1}$\rangle$}% generic text
+
+% For \nocite{keys}:
+\newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1\{}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+% For \cite[post]{keys}:
+\newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{]\{}\opt{#3}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+% For \cite<pre>{keys}:
+\newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{>\{}\opt{#3}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+% For \usepackage[options]{apacite}:
+\newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{]\{#3\}}}}%
+% For all \cite<pre>[post]{keys} variants:
+\newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{>[}\opt{#3}%
+                        \texttt{]\{}\opt{#4}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+
+% It is not clear where and how the \flqq command is defined, so provide
+% an escape if it is not available. Use definitions from fguill.sty,
+% included here to avoid requiring a package that may not be available.
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{flqq}{%
+    \newcommand{\flqq}{%
+      {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{19}}}%
+    \newcommand{\frqq}{%
+      {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{20}}}%
+  }{}%
+}%
+\newcommand{\simpleguillemots}{%
+  \renewcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{<\!\!<}}}}}%
+  \renewcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{>\!\!>}}}}}%
+}%
+
+
+\newcommand{\APACdocPageLayout}{%
+    \normalsize
+    \let\oldhoffset\hoffset
+    \let\oldvoffset\voffset
+    \let\oldoddsidemargin\oddsidemargin
+    \let\oldevensidemargin\evensidemargin
+    \let\oldtopmargin\topmargin
+    \let\oldheadheight\headheight
+    \let\oldheadsep\headsep
+    \let\oldtextheight\textheight
+    \let\oldfootskip\footskip
+    \let\oldtextwidth\textwidth
+    \let\oldlinewidth\linewidth
+    \let\oldmarginparsep\marginparsep
+    \let\oldmarginparwidth\marginparwidth
+    \let\oldmarginparpush\marginparpush
+%
+    \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in} % top-left reference point is
+    \setlength{\voffset}{-1in} % the top-left corner of the page
+    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.3in}
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{1.3in}
+    \setlength{\topmargin}{1.35in}
+    %\setlength{\headheight}{\baselineskip}
+    \setlength{\headheight}{0.12in}
+    \setlength{\headsep}{0.24in}
+    \setlength{\textheight}{7.9in}
+    \setlength{\footskip}{30pt}
+    \setlength{\textwidth}{5.9in}
+    \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth}
+    \setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt}
+    \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0pt}
+    \setlength{\marginparpush}{0pt}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\APACcodePageLayout}{%
+    \let\hoffset\oldhoffset
+    \let\oddsidemargin\oldoddsidemargin
+    \let\evensidemargin\oldevensidemargin
+    \let\textwidth\oldtextwidth
+    \let\linewidth\oldlinewidth
+    \let\marginparsep\oldmarginparsep
+    \let\marginparwidth\oldmarginparwidth
+    \let\marginparpush\oldmarginparpush
+}
+
+% Start with doc page layout
+\APACdocPageLayout
+%%
+%</docpkg>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Language definition files}
+%
+% This section describes the code for the language-specific files
+% supplied with \pkg{apacite}.
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{english.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the English language and its ``dialects'' in \pkg{babel}
+% terminology.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*english>
+%%
+%% english.apc - english version of apacite elements
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%% Changes since the [2005/06/01] version:
+%% - Uncommented all the \renewcommand's, so that the file can be
+%%   \input to override previous definitions.
+%% - Replaced `.{}' by `.\hbox{}', with the same goal (but now it works)
+%%   of tricking TeX to make sure the abbreviation period is not
+%%   interpreted as a sentence-ending period.
+%% - Inserted many percent signs to make sure no undesired space is
+%%   put into the document when this file is read.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}%   % ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}%                % between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}%            % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}%                  % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{by}%                  % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}%      % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}%     % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}%          % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}%        % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}%    % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}%   % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}%   % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}%            % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}%          % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}%        % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}%      % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}%         % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}%       % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}%          % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}%           % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}%         % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}%  % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% Used if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+  included in the meta-analysis.}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}%
+%%
+%</english>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{dutch.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Dutch language. The \pkg{babel} package considers Afrikaans
+% as a ``dialect'' of Dutch, but my limited knowledge of Afrikaans
+% suggests that most words are spelt differently (though are phonetically
+% similar), and many other words are simply different. So I doubt if this
+% file can be directly applied to Afrikaans.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*dutch>
+%%
+%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were
+%% used:
+%%
+%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog"
+%%     (indicated below as "[DP]"):
+%%
+%%     Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive
+%%       guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001).
+%%       Retreived January 3, 2005, from
+%%       http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf
+%%
+%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift
+%%     voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden"
+%%     (indicated below as "[NTPG]"):
+%%
+%%     Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004).
+%%       Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
+%%       59, inside back cover.
+%%
+%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book
+%%     (indicated below as "[SW]"):
+%%
+%%     Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.).
+%%       Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu.
+%%
+%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual.
+%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources,
+%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article:
+%%
+%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele
+%%       kijk op angst: Aandacht en automatisme in de verwerking van
+%%       bedreigende stimuli
+%%       [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and
+%%       automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli].
+%%       Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
+%%       59, 135-149.
+%%
+%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary:
+%%
+%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch]
+%%       (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale.
+%%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.\hbox{}}% [SW] (``zonder jaartal'')
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}%
+%
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%       % [DP]
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP]
+%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants:
+%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}%       % [NTPG]
+%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG]
+%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}%        % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}%
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}%
+%
+%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW
+%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on
+%% the language in which the referenced work is written:
+%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch
+%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.''       for referenced works in English
+%% ``Hrsg.''              for referenced works in German
+%% ``edt.''               for referenced works in French
+%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example
+%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used.
+%%
+%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here:
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}%          % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}%         % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
+%
+%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP.
+%% NTPG does not explain how to format this.
+%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: ''
+%%    followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown:
+%%    ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title.
+%%    This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative:
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}%
+%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}%
+%
+% [SW]. NTPG gives an example with ``Vol.'' but this is presumably
+% dependent on the language of the referenced work as well.
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}%   % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}%    % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}%   % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}%     % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}%    % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both.
+% Literally translating ``Tech.'' as ``Technisch'' does not make sense.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}%
+% Schrooten & Smulders use ``dissertatie''
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}%
+% There is no Dutch ``DAI'' and the distinction between ``published'' and
+% ``unpublished'' would generally be interpreted as ``published as a book
+% with an official publisher'' vs. ``privately published''. All PhD theses
+% in the Netherlands are required to be published with an ISBN number.
+% Therefore, it is better in my view to keep the same term here.
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}%
+% Again, there is no official forum to publish abstracts of master's theses,
+% but, unlike PhD theses, they are (generally) unpublished.
+% The term used here refers to the Dutch educational system until ca. 2003.
+% Since ca. 2004, universities are gradually converting to a bachelor -
+% master system, so it's likely that this term will have to be adapted
+% in the near future.
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}%
+% [DP]. They also require the original title after the originalyear.
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}%
+%
+% SW gives the following general names:
+% ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification'']
+% ``Literatuurlijst''  [literally ``Literature list'']
+% For more specific applications, SW gives the following names:
+% ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey
+%                  of publications in a certain area'']
+% ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature'']
+% ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature'']
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
+%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de
+  meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}%
+%
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}%
+%
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
+%
+%%
+%</dutch>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{finnish.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Finnish language.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*finnish>
+%%
+%% finnish.apc - finnish version of apacite elements
+%%
+%% Reference: Appendix E from book
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Kansallinen luetteloinnin ohjausryhm\"a. (2006). Monografioiden
+%% kuvailu, Suomalaiset luettelointis\"a\"ann\"ot. Helsinki: BTJ
+%% Kirjastopalvelu.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+%
+% Msg
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Sanoma}%
+%
+% Computer program
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Tietokoneohjelma}%
+%
+% Computer program manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Tietokoneohjelman k\"asikirja}%
+%
+% Computer program and manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Tietokoneohjelma ja k\"asikirja}%
+%
+% Computer software
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ohjelmisto}%
+%
+% Computer software manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Ohjelmiston k\"asikirja}%
+%
+% Computer software and manual
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ohjelmisto ja k\"asikirja}%
+%
+% Programming language
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ohjelmointikieli}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+%
+% n.d.
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}%  % ``no date'', ``sine anno''
+%
+% and
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}%                % between authors in text
+%
+% et al.
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a
+                                         % dot to suppress an additional one
+                                         % in the reference list
+%
+% et al.
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+                                      % ``others'', the argument contains
+                                      % a dot to suppress an additional one
+                                      % in the reference list. The difference
+                                      % with \BOthers is that, if another
+                                      % string is used to define \BOthers,
+                                      % this one should always finish with a
+                                      % period and the previous one not
+                                      % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+                                      % ``others'' is used).
+%
+% in press
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{painossa}%        % used as year for in-press citations
+%
+% In
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}%       % for ``In '' editor...
+%
+% chap.
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku{}}%        % chapter
+%
+% chap.
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut{}}%      % chapters
+%
+% Ed.
+\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}%    % editor
+%
+% Eds.
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}%   % editors
+%
+% Trans.
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator
+%
+% Trans.
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translators
+%
+% trans.
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field
+%
+% Chair
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}%      % chair of symposium
+%
+% Chairs
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}%     % chairs
+%
+% Vol.
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}%           % volume
+%
+% Vols.
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}%         % volumes
+%
+% No.
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}%           % number
+%
+% Nos.
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}%          % numbers
+%
+% ed.
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}%      % edition
+%
+% p.
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}%      % page
+%
+% pp.
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}%     % pages
+%
+% Tech.\ Rep.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name
+%
+% Doctoral dissertation
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+%
+% Unpublished doctoral dissertation
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Julkaisematon v\"ait\"oskirja}%
+                                     % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
+                                     % type name
+%
+% Master's thesis
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Pro gradu -tutkielma}%
+                                     % (default) master's thesis type name
+%
+% Unpublished master's thesis
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Julkaisematon pro gradu -tutkielma}%
+                                     % (default) unpublished
+                                     % master's thesis type name
+%
+% Original work published
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Alkuaan julk.\hbox{}}%
+%
+% Reprinted from
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Uudelleen julk.\hbox{}}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
+% when a meta-analysis is reported.
+%
+%
+%  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies included in the
+%  meta-analysis.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  \refname merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen
+  sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+%
+% Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}%
+%
+%%
+%</finnish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{german.apc} and \fname{ngerman.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the German language. There is the traditional orthography (`german')
+% and the new orthography (`ngerman'), which are treated as completely
+% different languages by \pkg{babel} (unlike, e.g., the two Norwegian
+% languages), which presumably has technical reasons. We start with `german'.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*german>
+%%
+%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente
+%% Written by Andreas Poege.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung
+%\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}%% Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \cite usw, \citeA usw
+                                   % \citeNP)
+%\renewcommand{\BAastyle}{\scshape}% Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \citeauthor usw.
+%\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}%          % Einleitende Klammer (default "(")
+%\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}%          % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")")
+%\renewcommand{\BAP}{}%            % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen)
+%\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}%         % Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&")
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}%         % Zwischen Autoren im Text
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }%          % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",")
+%\renewcommand{\BBC}{;{}}%         % Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default ";")
+%\renewcommand{\BBN}{,{}}%         % Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ",")
+%\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}%           % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "")
+%\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}%           % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "")
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}%            % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}%            % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
+%\renewcommand{\BAnd}{}%           % Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&")
+% Formatierung des Zusatzes bei Werken vom selben Autor aus
+% einem Jahr (default "\alph{BibCnt}")
+%\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}}%
+% Zitation eines Titels (Artikel o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg.
+% (default in Anf�hrungszeichen)
+%\renewcommand{\APACiteatitle}{}%
+% Zitation eines Titels (Buch o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg.
+% (default ist \emph)
+%\renewcommand{\APACitebtitle}{}%
+% Auszeichnung eines Werkes im Lit.verz. wenn in Metaanalyse
+% (default "*")
+%\renewcommand{\APACmetastar}{}%
+% Verhalten von "\bibnewpage" (default "\clearpage")
+%\renewcommand{\bibnewpage}{\newpage}%
+% Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre
+% (default "\BBAY")
+%\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses
+% Schriftgr��e Literaturverz. (default "\normalsize")
+%\renewcommand{\bibliographytypesize}{\footnotesize}%
+%\setlength{\bibleftmargin}{2.5em}%     % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 2. Zeile (default "2.5em")
+%\setlength{\bibindent}{-\bibleftmargin}% Einzug beim Lit.verz. 1. Zeile (default "-\bibleftmargin")
+%\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}%% vert. Abstand zwischen Eintr�gen im Lit.verz. (default "0pt")
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Befehle f�r die speziellen @misc-Eintr�ge.
+%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst ber�cksichtigt.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% F�r misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Weitere Labels
+% Bei Techreport, falls type-Ang. unterdr�ckt werden soll (default " ")
+%\renewcommand{\bibnotype}{ }%
+% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
+% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
+% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken.
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}%          % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}%                % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}%     % Kapitel
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}%    % Kapitel
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.\hbox{}}%        % Herausgeber(in)
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.\hbox{}}%       % Herausgeber(innen)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}%% Uebersetzer(in)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzer(innen)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}%          % Chair (bei Konferenzen)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}%        % Chairs (bei Konferenzen)
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.\hbox{}}%       % Band
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.\hbox{}}%     % Baende
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.\hbox{}}%       % Nummer
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.\hbox{}}%      % Nummern
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.\hbox{}}%      % Auflage
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.\hbox{}}%         % Seite
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.\hbox{}}%        % Seiten
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}%           % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"'
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}%     % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation
+% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}%
+% (default) Bezeichnung f�r Abschlussarbeit
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}%
+% (default) Bezeichnung f�r unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}%
+%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}%  % Originalausgabe
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}%   % Nachdruck von
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"'
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses
+% Bezeichnung f�r das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}%
+% Bezeichnung f�r das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt
+%%% nach \bibliographytypesize
+%\renewcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}% default nichts
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde
+%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen
+  Studien der Metaanalyse.}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}%
+%
+%%
+%</german>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Now, the file for the new orthography. Apparently, \fname{german.apc}
+% can also be used for the new orthography, so this is a very brief one:
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngerman>
+%%
+%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography)
+%% Written by Erik Meijer, based on instructions of Andreas Poege.
+%
+%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used
+%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this:
+%
+\input{german.apc}%
+%
+%%
+%</ngerman>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{greek.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Greek language.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek>
+%%
+%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements
+%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas and Ioannis Dimakos
+%
+%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
+%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding.
+\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{���������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{���������� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{��������� ��� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{���������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{���������� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{��������� ��� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{������ ���������������}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{����� ����������}% ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{���}%                 % between authors in text
+% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one
+% in the reference list
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{�.\ ���.\hbox{}}%
+% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one
+% in the reference list. The difference with \BOthers is that, if another
+% string is used to define \BOthers, this one should always finish with a
+% period and the previous one not necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+% ``others'' is used).
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{�.\ ���.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{��� ������}%        % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{���}%               % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{���.\hbox{}}%     % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{���.\hbox{}}%    % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{����.\hbox{}}%      % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{����.\hbox{}}%     % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{���.\hbox{}}%    % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{���.\hbox{}}%   % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{���.\hbox{}}%   % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{��������}%       % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{��������}%      % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{�.\hbox{}}%        % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{�.\hbox{}}%       % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{��.\hbox{}}%       % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{��.\hbox{}}%      % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{���.\hbox{}}%       % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{���.\hbox{}}%       % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{���.\hbox{}}%      % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{���.\ ���.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{����������� ��������}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{����������� ����������� ��������}%
+% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{������������ ����������� �������}%
+% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{����������� ������������ ����������� �������}%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{����� ������ ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{��������� ���}%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{������������}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{������������}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
+% when a meta-analysis is reported.
+%
+%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+%  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+%  included in the meta-analysis.}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{��������� ����������}%
+%
+%%
+%</greek>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{norsk.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for both Norwegian languages (Bokm{\aa}l and Nynorsk). In \pkg{babel}'s
+% setup, `norsk' is Bokm{\aa}l and `nynorsk' is a dialect of `norsk'.
+% This does not seem to reflect the relation between these languages
+% very well, but for compatibility with \pkg{babel} we use the same
+% file stricture, i.e., \fname{norsk.apc} defines both languages.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*norsk>
+%%
+%% norsk.apc - Norwegian Bokmal & Nynorsk versions of apacite elements.
+%% Version 1.0.
+%% Written by Karl Ove Hufthammer.
+%%
+%% Note: To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation
+%%       a comma is never used before '&' or 'and', and there
+%%       is no space between initials. The macro for these
+%%       modifications can be found at the end of this file.
+%%       Remove them to use a more 'APA-like' style.
+%%
+%% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA.
+%% Some ideas for this translation have been taken from the following sources:
+%%
+%%   http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf
+%%   http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspråk}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}}    % ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og}            % between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a
+                                      % dot to suppress an additional one
+                                      % in the reference list
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
+                                      % a dot to suppress an additional one
+                                      % in the reference list. The difference
+                                      % with \BOthers is that, if another
+                                      % string is used to define \BOthers,
+                                      % this one should always finish with a
+                                      % period and the previous one not
+                                      % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+                                      % ``others'' is used).
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering}        % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}              % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}       % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}      % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}           % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}         % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}}     % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}}    % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}}    % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer}        % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere}      % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}         % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}       % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}          % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}        % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}}           % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}            % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}          % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport}   % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling}
+                                      % (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling}
+                                      % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
+                                      % type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}%
+                                      % (default) unpublished
+                                      % master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert}
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
+% when a meta-analysis is reported.
+%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} % No comma before & when we have two authors.
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{} % No comma before & when we have three or more authors.
+\renewcommand{\BPBI}{.} % Period between initials. No space.
+
+% Differences between norsk (bokmal) and nynorsk.
+\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk}
+\ifx\languagename\APACnynorsk
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar}        % chair of symposium
+  \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar}      % chairs
+  \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa{}ve}% (default) master's thesis type name
+  \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa{}ve}%
+  \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa{}}
+  \renewcommand{\refname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+  \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+  \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+    Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i metaanalysen.}
+  \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister}
+\fi
+\let\APACnynorsk\undefined
+%
+%%
+%</norsk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+
+
+
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{spanish.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Spanish language.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish>
+%%
+%% spanish.apc - Versi�n espa�ola de elementos en apacite
+%% Escrito por Jorge L�pez Puga
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Comandos para tipos espec�ficos de entradas @misc.
+%%% Estos comandos son reconocidos por apacite.bst.
+%\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa inform�tico y manual}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programaci�n}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Otras etiquetas
+%\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}     % ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y}                 % Entre autores en el texto
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}  % ``y colaboradores'', El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto,                                                                                       %evita poner uno adicional en la lista de referencias. No obstante                                                                                      %algunas revistas aceptan "et al." que es lo que aparece por defecto
+%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
+                                            % a dot to suppress an additional one
+                                        % in the reference list. The difference
+                                          % with \BOthers is that, if another
+                                        % string is used to define \BOthers,
+                                        % this one should always finish with a
+                                        % period and the previous one not
+                                        % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+                                          % ``others'' is used).
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y}                 % Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias (por defecto "\&")
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa}            % Usado como a�o para citas "en prensa"
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{En}                   % Para ``En '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}}              % cap�tulo
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}}            % cap�tulos
+%\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}              % editor
+%\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}          % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}}        % traductor
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}}      % traductores
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}}       % traducci�n, para el campo a�o
+%\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}            % chair of symposium
+%\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}          % chairs
+%\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}            % volume
+%\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}          % volumes
+%\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}             % number
+%\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}           % numbers
+%\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}              % edition
+%\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}               % page
+%\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}             % pages
+%\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}      % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral}
+                                          % (por defecto) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis doctoral no publicada}
+                                      % (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis
+                                      % type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de master}% (por defecto) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de master no publicada}%
+                                      % (por defecto) unpublished
+                                      % master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en}
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresi�n de}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}% Nombbre de la lista de ref. si es una secci�n.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un cap�tulo.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un meta-an�lisis es usado.
+%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en el meta-an�lisis.}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% El nombre (del encabezado) del �ndice de Autores.
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{�ndice de Autores}
+%%
+%</spanish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\fname{swedish.apc}}
+%
+% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite}
+% for the Swedish language.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*swedish>
+%%
+%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements
+%% Written by Stefan Bjork.
+%% Small adaptations by Erik Meijer
+%% $Revision: 1.3 $
+%%
+%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of
+%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources:
+%%
+%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt
+%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from:
+%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf
+%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived
+%% December 9, 2004, from:
+%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html
+%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from
+%% Gothenburg University Web site:
+%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm
+%%
+%
+%% Punctuations
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}%
+%
+%% Labels
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}%
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}%
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}%
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}%
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i
+  meta-analys.}%
+%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}%
+%
+%% Publication date unknown
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.\hbox{}}%
+%
+%% Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}%
+%
+%%
+%</swedish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Bibliography database (\fname{apa5ex.bib})}
+% This file includes the reference entries of all examples in the
+% APA manual, which are all formatted in the \pkg{apacite} reference
+% manual. As such, it shows how ordinary and (especially) difficult
+% items can be formatted.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bibdb>
+%%
+%% apa5ex.bib: References from the 5th edition of the Publication Manual
+%%             of the APA, plus a few additional references
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+%% Entry labels are section number of the APA manual (5th ed.)
+%% plus a sequence number within the section.
+
+@misc{3.94-1,
+  author = {Walker},
+  year   = {2000},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-1,
+  author = {Wasserstein and Zappulla and Rosen and Gerstman and Rock},
+  year   = {1994},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-2,
+  author = {Bradley and Ramirez and Soo},
+  year   = {1994},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-3,
+  author = {Bradley and Soo and Ramirez and Brown},
+  year   = {1994},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-4,
+  author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Barrett and Cave and Tang and Gabrieli},
+  year   = {1996},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-5,
+  author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Gabrieli and Tang and Marsolek and Daly},
+  year   = {1996},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.95-6,
+  author = {Nightlinger and Littlewood},
+  year   = {1993},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@book{3.95-7,
+  author     = {J{\"{o}}reskog, K[arl] G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, D[ag]},
+  year       = {1989},
+  title      = {{LISREL} 7: {A} Guide to the Program and Applications},
+  edition    = {2},
+  address    = {Chicago},
+  publisher  = {SPSS}
+}
+
+@misc{3.96-1,
+  author   = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+  firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}},
+  key      = {{NIMH}},
+  year     = {1999},
+  type     = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.96-2,
+  author   = {{\bibcorporate{University of Pittsburgh}}},
+  year     = {1993},
+  type     = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@book{3.96-3,
+  author       = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+  firstkey     = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}},
+  key          = {{KNSB}},
+  year         = {2002},
+  title        = {Jaarverslag 2002},
+  englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002},
+  address      = {Amsterdam},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+  note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+                  same key, but with different firstkey.}
+}
+
+@book{3.96-4,
+  author       = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+  firstkey     = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}},
+  key          = {{KNSB}},
+  year         = {2003},
+  title        = {Jaarverslag 2003},
+  englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003},
+  address      = {Amsterdam},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}},
+  note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+                  same key, but with different firstkey.}
+}
+
+@book{3.96-5,
+  author       = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+  firstkey     = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}},
+  key          = {{KNSB}},
+  year         = {2002},
+  title        = {Jaarverslag 2002},
+  englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002},
+  address      = {Amsterdam},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+  note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+                  same key, but with different firstkey.}
+}
+
+@book{3.96-6,
+  author       = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+  firstkey     = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}},
+  key          = {{KNSB}},
+  year         = {2003},
+  title        = {Jaarverslag 2003},
+  englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003},
+  address      = {Amsterdam},
+  publisher    = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}},
+  note         = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with
+                  same key, but with different firstkey.}
+}
+
+@magazine{3.97-1,
+  key     = {{\APACciteatitle{Study Finds}}},
+  year    = {1982},
+  month   = apr,
+  title   = {Study Finds Free Care Used More},
+  journal = {{APA} Monitor},
+  pages   = {14}
+}
+
+@book{3.97-2,
+  year      = {1979},
+  title     = {College Bound Seniors},
+  address   = {Princeton, NJ},
+  publisher = {College Board Publications}
+}
+
+@misc{3.97-3,
+  author = {Anonymous},
+  year   = {1998},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@newspaper{3.97-4,
+  year    = {2002},
+  month   = mar,
+  day     = {3},
+  title   = {Editorial},
+  journal = {The Edited Newspaper},
+  pages   = {2},
+  note    = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without
+             author, but with the same title.}
+}
+
+@newspaper{3.97-5,
+  year    = {2003},
+  month   = feb,
+  day     = {12},
+  title   = {Editorial},
+  journal = {The Edited Newspaper},
+  pages   = {2},
+  note    = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without
+             author, but with the same title.}
+}
+
+@newspaper{3.97-6,
+  year    = {2003},
+  month   = jan,
+  day     = {24},
+  title   = {Editorial},
+  journal = {The Edited Newspaper},
+  pages   = {2},
+  note    = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without
+             author, but with the same title.}
+}
+
+@book{3.98-1,
+  author    = {Luce, R. Duncan},
+  year      = {1959},
+  title     = {Individual Choice Behavior},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {Wiley}
+}
+
+@misc{3.98-2,
+  author = {Luce, P. A.},
+  year   = {1986},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.98-3,
+  author = {Goldberg, J. M. and Neff},
+  year   = {1961},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.98-4,
+  author = {Goldberg, M. E. and Wurtz},
+  year   = {1972},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-1,
+  author = {Edeline and Weinberger},
+  year   = {1991},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-2,
+  author = {Edeline and Weinberger},
+  year   = {1993},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-3,
+  author = {Gogel},
+  year   = {1984},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-4,
+  author = {Gogel},
+  year   = {1990},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-5,
+  author = {Gogel},
+  year   = {\BIP},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-6,
+  author = {Johnson},
+  year   = {1991},
+  title  = {Aaa}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-7,
+  author = {Johnson},
+  year   = {1991},
+  title  = {Bbb}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-8,
+  author = {Johnson},
+  year   = {1991},
+  title  = {Ccc}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-9,
+  author = {Singh},
+  year   = {1983},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-10,
+  author = {Singh},
+  year   = {\BIP},
+  title  = {Aaa}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-11,
+  author = {Singh},
+  year   = {\BIP},
+  title  = {Bbb}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-12,
+  author = {Balda},
+  year   = {1980},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-13,
+  author = {Kamil},
+  year   = {1988},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-14,
+  author = {Pepperberg and Funk},
+  year   = {1990},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-15,
+  author = {Minor},
+  year   = {2001},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-16,
+  author = {Adams},
+  year   = {1999},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.99-17,
+  author = {Storandt},
+  year   = {1997},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.100-1,
+  author = {Author},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown},
+  note   = {no example, but rule given in text}
+}
+
+@misc{3.100-1b,
+  author = {Author},
+  year   = {2003 version},
+  type   = {Unknown},
+  note   = {no example, but rule given in text}
+}
+
+@book{3.100-2,
+  author = {Aristotle},
+  year   = {1931},
+  title  = {Unknown},
+  translator = {Someone},
+  originalyear = {\bibnodate}
+}
+
+@book{3.100-3,
+  author = {James},
+  year   = {1983},
+  title  = {Unknown},
+  originalyear = {1890}
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-1,
+  author = {Cheek and Buss},
+  year   = {1981},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-2,
+  author = {Shimamura},
+  year   = {1989},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-3,
+  author = {Myers},
+  year   = {2000},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.101-4,
+  author = {Beutler},
+  year   = {2000},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{3.103-1,
+  author = {Hashtroudi and Chrosniak and Schwartz},
+  year   = {1991},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t1,
+  author = {Brown, J. R.},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t2,
+  author = {Browning, A. R.},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t3,
+  author = {MacArthur},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t4,
+  author = {McAllister},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t5,
+  author = {MacNeil},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t6,
+  author = {M'Carthy},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t7,
+  author = {DeBase},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t8,
+  author = {De Vries, J.},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-t9,
+  author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.},
+  year   = {\bibnodate},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@article{4.04-t10,
+  year    = {2003},
+  title   = {{\APACSortNoop{Two-Thousand and Three}}2003 Hottest Summer Ever},
+  journal = {Journal of Meteorology},
+  note    = {This is a fake entry, used for didactical purposes.}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-1,
+  author = {Hewlett, L. S.},
+  year   = {1996},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-2,
+  author = {Hewlett, L. S.},
+  year   = {1999},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-3,
+  author = {Alleyne, R. L.},
+  year   = {2001},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-4,
+  author = {Alleyne, R. L. and Evans, A. J.},
+  year   = {1999},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-5,
+  author = {Gosling, J. R. and Jerald, K. and Belfar, S. F.},
+  year   = {2000},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-6,
+  author = {Gosling, J. R. and Tevlin, D. F.},
+  year   = {1996},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-7,
+  author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Brown, J.},
+  year   = {1999},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-8,
+  author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Smigel, J.},
+  year   = {1999},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-9,
+  author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.},
+  year   = {2000},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-10,
+  author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.},
+  year   = {2001},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@article{4.04-11,
+  author = {Baheti, J. R.},
+  year   = {2001},
+  title  = {Control {\ldots}}
+}
+
+@article{4.04-12,
+  author = {Baheti, J. R.},
+  year   = {2001},
+  title  = {Roles of {\ldots}}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-13,
+  author = {Mathur, A. L. and Wallston, J.},
+  year   = {1999},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@misc{4.04-14,
+  author = {Mathur, S. E. and Ahlers, R. J.},
+  year   = {1998},
+  type   = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@book{4.05-1,
+  author    = {Bandura, A. J.},
+  year      = {1977},
+  title     = {Social Learning Theory},
+  address   = {Englewood Cliffs, NJ},
+  publisher = {Prentice Hall}
+}
+
+@article{4.05-2,
+  author = {Bretschneider, J. G. and McCoy, N. L.},
+  year   = {1968},
+  title  = {Sexual Interest and Behavior in Healthy
+            80- to 102-Year-Olds},
+  journal = {Archives of Sexual Behavior},
+  volume  = {14},
+  pages   = {343--350}
+}
+
+@article{4.08-1,
+  author  = {Kernis, M. H. and Cornell, D. P. and Sun, C.-R.
+             and Berry, A. and Harlow, T.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {There's More to Self-Esteem than Whether it is High
+             or Low: {T}he Importance of Stability of Self-Esteem},
+  journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+  volume  = {65},
+  pages   = {1190--1204}
+}
+
+@book{4.08-2,
+  editor    = {Robinson, D. N.},
+  year      = {1992},
+  title     = {Social Discourse and Moral Judgment},
+  address   = {San Diego, CA},
+  publisher = {Academic Press}
+}
+
+@misc{4.08-3,
+  author    = {Bulatao, E. {\protect\bibliteral{(with
+               Winford, C.~A.)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+  year      = {\bibnodate},
+  type      = {Unknown}
+}
+
+@article{4.09-1,
+  author = {Fowers, B. J. and Olson, D. H.},
+  year   = {1993},
+  title  = {{ENRICH} {Marital} {Satisfaction} {Scale}:
+            {A} Brief Research and Clinical Tool},
+  journal = {Journal of Family Psychology},
+  volume  = {7},
+  pages   = {176--185}
+}
+
+@article{4.10-1,
+  author  = {Deutsch, F. M. and Lussier, J. B. and Servis, L. J.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Husbands At Home: Predictors of Paternal Participation
+             in Childcare and Housework},
+  journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology},
+  volume  = {65},
+  pages   = {1154--1166}
+}
+
+@incollection{4.10-2,
+  author    = {O'Neil, J. M. and Egan, J.},
+  year      = {1992},
+  title     = {Men's and Women's Gender Role Journeys:
+               Metaphor for Healing, Transition, and Transformation},
+  editor    = {Wainrib, B. R.},
+  booktitle = {Gender Issues Across the Life Cycle},
+  pages     = {107--123},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {Springer}
+}
+
+@article{4.11-1,
+  author  = {Buss, D. M. and Schmitt, D. P.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Sexual Strategies Theory: An Evolutionary Perspective
+             on Human Mating},
+  journal = {Psychological Review},
+  volume  = {100},
+  pages   = {204--232}
+}
+
+@magazine{4.11-2,
+  author  = {Henry, III, W. A.},
+  year    = {1990},
+  month   = apr,
+  day     = {9},
+  title   = {Beyond the Melting Pot},
+  journal = {Time},
+  volume  = {135},
+  pages   = {28--31}
+}
+
+@book{4.12-1,
+  author    = {Saxe, G. B.},
+  year      = {1991},
+  title     = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: Studies in
+               Mathematical Understanding},
+  address   = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+  publisher = {Erlbaum}
+}
+
+@incollection{4.13-1,
+  author    = {Baker, F. M. and Lightfoot, O. B.},
+  year      = {1993},
+  title     = {Psychiatric Care of Ethnic Elders},
+  editor    = {Gaw, A. C.},
+  booktitle = {Culture, Ethnicity, and Mental Illness},
+  pages     = {517--552},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {American Psychiatric Press}
+}
+
+@incollection{4.13-2,
+  author    = {Merikle, Philip M.},
+  year      = {2000},
+  title     = {Subliminal Perception},
+  editor    = {Kazdin, Alan E. and Blanchard, Edward B. and
+               Bootzin, Richard R. and Bower, Gordon and
+               Close Conoley, Jane and Deaux, Kay and Fox, Ronald E. and
+               Harmon, Lenore W. and Howell, William C. and
+               Marsella, Anthony J. and Price, Richard H. and
+               Roediger, III, Henry L. and Rosenthal, Robert and
+               Schmitt, Neal W. and Singer, Jerome L. and Squire, Larry R. and
+               Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn},
+  booktitle = {Encyclopedia of Psychology},
+  volume    = {7},
+  pages     = {497--499},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {Oxford University Press}
+}
+
+@misc{4.15-1,
+  key         = {{\APACcitebtitle{Electronic Reference Formats}}},
+  title       = {Electronic Reference Formats Recommended by the
+                 {American} {Psychological} {Association}},
+  year        = {2000},
+  month       = oct,
+  day         = {12},
+  lastchecked = {October 23, 2000},
+  URL         = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html}
+}
+
+@article{4.15-2,
+  author = {Eid, M. and Langeheine, R.},
+  year   = {1999},
+  title  = {The Measurement of Consistency and Occasion Specificity
+            with Latent Class Models: A New Model and its
+            Application to the Measurement of Affect},
+  journal = {Psychological Methods},
+  volume  = {4},
+  pages   = {100--116},
+  howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database}
+}
+
+%
+%  The rest is from section 4.16. Section number is omitted,
+%  but A-I are used instead. For the numbered examples, these
+%  letters are also omitted in favor of ``ex''.
+%
+
+@article{A-1,
+  author  = {Herman, L. M. and Kuczaj, III, S. A. and Holder, M. D.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Responses to Anomalous Gestural Sequences by a
+             Language-Trained Dolphin: {E}vidence for Processing
+             of Semantic Relations and Syntactic Information},
+  journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology: General},
+  volume  = {122},
+  pages   = {184--194}
+}
+
+@article{ex1,
+  author  = {Mellers, B. A.},
+  year    = {2000},
+  title   = {Choice and the Relative Pleasure of Consequences},
+  journal = {Psychological Bulletin},
+  volume  = {126},
+  pages   = {910--924}
+}
+
+@article{ex2,
+  author  = {Klimoski, R. and Palmer, S.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {The {ADA} and the Hiring Process in Organizations},
+  journal = {Consulting Psychology Journal: Practice and Research},
+  volume  = {45},
+  number  = {2},
+  pages   = {10--36}
+}
+
+@article{ex3,
+  author  = {Saywitz, K. J. and Mannarino, A. P. and Berliner, L.
+             and Cohen, J. A.},
+  year    = {2000},
+  title   = {Treatment for Sexually Abused Children and Adolescents},
+  journal = {American Psychologist},
+  volume  = {55},
+  pages   = {1040--1049}
+}
+
+@article{ex4,
+  author  = {Wolchik, S. A. and West, S. G. and Sandler, I. N. and
+             Tein, J. and Coatsworth, D. and Lengua, L. and others},
+  year    = {2000},
+  title   = {An Experimental Evaluation of Theory-Based Mother and
+             Mother-Child Programs for Children of Divorce},
+  journal = {Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology},
+  volume  = {68},
+  pages   = {843--856}
+}
+
+@article{ex4-2,
+  author  = {Swait, Joffre and Adamowicz, Wiktor and Hanemann, Michael
+             and Diederich, Adele and Krosnick, Jon and Layton, David
+             and Provencher, William and Schkade, David and Tourangeau, Roger},
+  year    = {2002},
+  title   = {Context Dependence and Aggregation
+             in Disaggregate Choice Analysis},
+  journal = {Marketing Letters},
+  volume  = {13},
+  pages   = {195--205}
+}
+
+@article{ex5,
+  author  = {Zuckerman, M. and Kieffer, S. C.},
+  year    = {\BIP},
+  title   = {Race Differences in Face-ism: {D}oes Facial Prominence
+             Imply Dominance?},
+  journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}
+}
+
+@magazine{ex6,
+  author  = {Kandel, E. R. and Squire, L. R.},
+  year    = {2000},
+  month   = nov,
+  day     = {10},
+  title   = {Neuroscience: {B}reaking Down Scientific Barriers to the
+             Study of Brain and Mind},
+  journal = {Science},
+  volume  = {290},
+  pages   = {1113--1120}
+}
+
+@article{ex7,
+  author  = {Brown, L. S.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  month   = spring,
+  title   = {Antidomination Training as a Central Component of
+             Diversity in Clinical Psychology Education},
+  journal = {The Clinical Psychologist},
+  volume  = {46},
+  pages   = {83--87}
+}
+
+@article{ex8,
+  year    = {1993},
+  month   = aug # "/" # sep,
+  title   = {The New Health-Care Lexicon},
+  journal = {Copy Editor},
+  volume  = {4},
+  pages   = {1--2}
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex9,
+  key     = {{\APACciteatitle{New Drug}}},
+  year    = {1993},
+  month   = jul,
+  day     = {15},
+  title   = {New Drug Appears to Sharply Cut Risk of Death from
+             Heart Failure},
+  journal = {The Washington Post},
+  pages   = {A12}
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex10,
+  author  = {Schwartz, J.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  month   = sep,
+  day     = {30},
+  title   = {Obesity Affects Economic, Social Status},
+  journal = {The Washington Post},
+  pages   = {A1, A4}
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex11,
+  author  = {Berkowitz, A. D.},
+  year    = {2000},
+  month   = nov,
+  day     = {24},
+  title   = {How to Tackle the Problem of Student Drinking},
+  type    = {Letter to the editor},
+  journal = {The Chronicle of Higher Education},
+  pages   = {B20}
+}
+
+@article{ex12,
+  editor  = {Barlow, D. H.},
+  year    = {1991},
+  title   = {Diagnoses, Dimensions, and \emph{DSM-IV}:
+             The Science of Classification},
+  type    = {Special issue},
+  journal = {Journal of Abnormal Psychology},
+  volume  = {100},
+  number  = {3}
+}
+
+@article{ex13,
+  author  = {Harris, P. L. and Kavanaugh, R. D.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Young Children's Understanding of Pretense},
+  journal = {Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development},
+  volume  = {58},
+  number  = {1, Serial No.~231},
+}
+
+@article{ex14,
+  author  = {Battig, W. F. and Montague, W. E.},
+  year    = {1969},
+  title   = {Category Norms for Verbal Items in 56 Categories:
+             A Replication and Extension of the {Connecticut}
+             Category Norms},
+  journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs},
+  volume  = {80},
+  number  = {3, Pt.~2}
+}
+
+@article{ex15,
+  author  = {Ganster, D. C. and Schaubroeck, J. and Sime, W. E.
+             and Mayes, B. T.},
+  year    = {1991},
+  title   = {The Nomological Validity of the {Type}~{A} Personality
+             Among Employed Adults},
+  type    = {Monograph},
+  journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
+  volume  = {76},
+  pages   = {143--168}
+}
+
+@article{ex16,
+  author  = {Woolf, N. J. and Young, S. L. and Fanselow, M. S. and
+             Butcher, L. L.},
+  year    = {1991},
+  title   = {{MAP}-2 Expression in Cholinoceptive Pyramidal Cells
+             of Rodent Cortex and Hippocampus is Altered by
+             {Pavlovian} Conditioning},
+  type    = {Abstract},
+  journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts},
+  volume  = {17},
+  pages   = {480}
+}
+
+@article{ex17,
+  author  = {Nakazato, K. and Shimonaka, Y. and Homma, A.},
+  year    = {{\protect\bibreftext{1992}{1992/1993}}},
+  title   = {Cognitive Functions of Centenarians: The {Tokyo}
+             {Metropolitan} {Centenarian} {Study}},
+  journal = {Japanese Journal of Developmental Psychology},
+  volume  = {3},
+  pages   = {9--16},
+  howpublished = {Abstract obtained from
+             {\APACcitebtitle{PsycSCAN: Neuropsychology}},
+             1993, \emph{2}, Abstract No.~604}
+}
+
+@article{ex18,
+  author  = {Regier, A. A. and Narrow, W. E. and Rae, D. S.},
+  year    = {1990},
+  title   = {The Epidemiology of Anxiety Disorders: The Epidemiologic
+             Catchment Area ({ECA}) Experience},
+  journal = {Journal of Psychiatric Research},
+  volume  = {24},
+  number  = {Suppl.~2},
+  pages   = {3--14}
+}
+
+@article{ex19,
+  author  = {Fiske, S. T.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Social Cognition and Social Perception},
+  journal = {Annual Review of Psychology},
+  volume  = {44},
+  pages   = {155--194}
+}
+
+@article{ex20,
+  author  = {Ising, M.},
+  year    = {2000},
+  title   = {Intensit{\"{a}}tsabh{\"{a}}ngigkeit evozierter {Potenzial} im
+             {EEG}: Sind impulsive {Personen} {Augmenter} oder
+             {Reducer}?},
+  englishtitle = {Intensity Dependence in Event-Related {EEG} Potentials:
+             Are Impulsive Individuals Augmenters or Reducers?},
+  journal = {Zeitschrift f{\"{u}}r Differentielle und Diagnostische
+             Psychologie},
+  volume  = {21},
+  pages   = {208--217}
+}
+
+@article{ex21,
+  author  = {Stutte, H.},
+  year    = {1972},
+  title   = {Transcultural Child Psychiatry},
+  journal = {Acta Paedopsychiatrica},
+  volume  = {38},
+  number  = {9},
+  pages   = {229--231}
+}
+
+@article{ex22,
+  author  = {Coltheart, M. and Curtis, B. and Atkins, P. and Haller, M.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Models of Reading Aloud: Dual-Route and
+             Parallel-Distributed-Processing Approaches},
+  journal = {Psychological Review},
+  volume  = {100},
+  pages   = {589--608}
+}
+
+@book{B-1,
+  author    = {Beck, C. A. J. and Sales, B. D.},
+  year      = {2001},
+  title     = {Family Mediation: Facts, Myths, and Future Prospects},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {American Psychological Association}
+}
+
+@book{ex23,
+  author    = {Mitchell, T. R. and Larson, Jr.\hbox{}, J. R.},
+  year      = {1987},
+  title     = {People in Organizations: An Introduction to
+               Organizational Behavior},
+  edition   = {3},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {McGraw-Hill}
+}
+
+@book{ex24,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}},
+  year      = {1991},
+  title     = {Estimated Resident Population by Age and Sex in
+               Statistical Local Areas, {New} {South} {Wales},
+               {June} 1990},
+  number    = {3209.1},
+  address   = {Canberra, Australian Capital Territory},
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}}
+}
+
+@book{ex25,
+  editor    = {Gibbs, J. T. and Huang, L. N.},
+  year      = {1991},
+  title     = {Children of Color: Psychological Interventions with
+               Minority Youth},
+  address   = {San Francisco},
+  publisher = {Jossey-Bass}
+}
+
+@book{ex25-t1,
+  author         = {Vygotsky, L. S.},
+  year           = {1978},
+  title          = {Mind in Society: {T}he Development of Higher Mental
+                    Processes},
+  editor         = {Rice, Edgar},
+  translator     = {Rice, Edgar},
+  address        = {Cambridge, MA},
+  publisher      = {Harvard University Press},
+  originalyear   = {1930, 1933, 1935}
+}
+
+@book{ex25-t2,
+  author         = {J{\"{o}}reskog, Karl G. and S{\"{o}}rbom, Dag},
+  year           = {1979},
+  title          = {Advances in Factor Analysis
+                    and Structural Equation Models},
+  editor         = {Magidson, Jay},
+  address        = {Cambridge, MA},
+  publisher      = {Abt Books}
+}
+
+@book{ex26,
+  year      = {1993},
+  title     = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Collegiate Dictionary},
+  edition   = {10},
+  address   = {Springfield, MA},
+  publisher = {Merriam-Webster}
+}
+
+@book{ex27,
+  author    = {Rosenthal, R.},
+  year      = {1987},
+  title     = {Meta-Analytic Procedures for Social Research},
+  edition   = {Rev.\hbox{}},
+  address   = {Newbury Park, CA},
+  publisher = {Sage}
+}
+
+@book{ex28,
+  editor    = {Koch, S.},
+  year      = {1959--1963},
+  title     = {Psychology: {A} Study of Science},
+  volume    = {1--6},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {McGraw-Hill}
+}
+
+@book{ex29,
+  key       = {{\bibDSM{American Psychiatric
+               Association}{Diagnostic and Statistical Manual
+               of Mental Disorders}{4th ed.\hbox{}}{DSM-IV}}},
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}},
+  year      = {1994},
+  title     = {Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders},
+  edition   = {4},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}}
+}
+
+@book{ex30,
+  editor    = {Sadie, S.},
+  year      = {1980},
+  title     = {The New {G}rove Dictionary of Music and Musicians},
+  edition   = {6},
+  volume    = {1--20},
+  address   = {London},
+  publisher = {Macmillan}
+}
+
+@book{ex30-2,
+  editor    = {Kazdin, Alan E. and Blanchard, Edward B. and
+               Bootzin, Richard R. and Bower, Gordon and
+               Close Conoley, Jane and Deaux, Kay and Fox, Ronald E. and
+               Harmon, Lenore W. and Howell, William C. and
+               Marsella, Anthony J. and Price, Richard H. and
+               Roediger, III, Henry L. and Rosenthal, Robert and
+               Schmitt, Neal W. and Singer, Jerome L. and Squire, Larry R. and
+               Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn},
+  year      = {2000},
+  title     = {Encyclopedia of Psychology},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {Oxford University Press}
+}
+
+@book{ex31,
+  author    = {Piaget, J. and Inhelder, B.},
+  year      = {1951},
+  title     = {La Gen{\`{e}}se de l'Id{\'{e}}e de Hasard chez l'Enfant},
+  englishtitle = {The Origin of the Idea of Chance in the Child},
+  address   = {Paris},
+  publisher = {Presses Universitaires de France}
+}
+
+@book{ex32,
+  author    = {Laplace, P.-S.},
+  year      = {1951},
+  title     = {A Philosophical Essay on Probabilities},
+  translator = {Truscott, F. W. and Emory, F. L.},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {Dover},
+  originalyear = {1814}
+}
+
+@book{ex33,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on
+               Independent Living}}},
+  firstkey  = {{Research and Training Center on Independent Living [RTCIL]}},
+  key       = {RTCIL},
+  year      = {1993},
+  title     = {Guidelines for Reporting and Writing About People
+               with Disabilities},
+  edition   = {4},
+  type      = {Brochure},
+  address   = {Lawrence, KS},
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on
+               Independent Living}}}
+}
+
+@incollection{B-2,
+  author    = {Massaro, D.},
+  year      = {1992},
+  title     = {Broadening the Domain of the Fuzzy Logical Model of Perception},
+  editor    = {Pick, Jr.\hbox{}, H. L. and van den Broek, P. and Knill, D. C.},
+  booktitle = {Cognition: Conceptual and Methodological Issues},
+  pages     = {51--84},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {American Psychological Association}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex34,
+  author    = {Bjork, R. A.},
+  year      = {1989},
+  title     = {Retrieval Inhibition as an Adaptive Mechanism in Human Memory},
+  editor    = {Roediger, III, H. L. and Craik, F. I. M.},
+  booktitle = {Varieties of Memory \& Consciousness},
+  pages     = {309--330},
+  address   = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+  publisher = {Erlbaum}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex35,
+  author    = {Auerbach, J. S.},
+  year      = {\BIP},
+  title     = {The Origins of Narcissism and Narcissistic Personality
+               Disorder: A Theoretical and Empirical Reformulation},
+  editor    = {Masling, J. M. and Bornstein, R. F.},
+  booktitle = {Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic Theories:
+               {Vol}.~4. {Psychoanalytic} Perspectives on Psychopathology},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {American Psychological Association}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex36,
+  author    = {Maccoby, E. E. and Martin, J.},
+  year      = {1983},
+  title     = {Socialization in the Context of the Family:
+               Parent-Child Interaction},
+  editor    = {Mussen (Series Ed.\hbox{}), P. H. and
+               Hetherington{\bibeditortype{Vol.\ Ed.\hbox{}}}, E. M.},
+  booktitle = {Handbook of Child Psychology:
+               {Vol}.~4. {Socialization}, Personality, and Social Development},
+  edition   = {4},
+  pages     = {1--101},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {Wiley}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex37,
+  author       = {Davydov, V. V.},
+  year         = {1972},
+  title        = {De Introductie van het Begrip Grootheid in de Eerste
+                  Klas van de Basisschool: Een Experimenteel Onderzoek},
+  englishtitle = {The Introduction of the Concept of Quantity in the
+                  First Grade of the Primary School: An Experimental Study},
+  editor       = {Van Parreren, C. F. and Carpay, J. A. M.},
+  booktitle    = {Sovjetpsychologen aan het Woord},
+  pages        = {227--289},
+  address      = {Groningen, The Netherlands},
+  publisher    = {Wolters-Noordhoff}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex38,
+  author       = {Bergmann, P. G.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  title        = {Relativity},
+  booktitle    = {The New Encyclopaedia {Britannica}},
+  volume       = {26},
+  pages        = {501--508},
+  address      = {Chicago},
+  publisher    = {Encyclopaedia Britannica}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex39,
+    author       = {Freud, Sigmund},
+    year         = {1961},
+    title        = {The Ego and the Id},
+    editor       = {Strachey, J.},
+    translator   = {Strachey, J.},
+    booktitle    = {The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological
+                    Works of {Sigmund} {Freud}},
+    volume       = {19},
+    pages        = {3--66},
+    address      = {London},
+    publisher    = {Hogarth Press},
+    originalyear = {1923}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex40,
+    author       = {Piaget, J.},
+    year         = {1988},
+    title        = {Extracts from {Piaget}'s Theory},
+    translator   = {Gellerier, G. and Langer, J.},
+    editor       = {Richardson, K. and Sheldon, S.},
+    booktitle    = {Cognitive Development to Adolescence: A Reader},
+    pages        = {3--18},
+    address      = {Hillsdale, NJ},
+    publisher    = {Erlbaum},
+    originalbooktitle = {Manual of Child Psychology},
+    originalpages     = {703--732},
+    originaleditor    = {Mussen, P. H.},
+    originalyear      = {1970},
+    originaladdress   = {New York},
+    originalpublisher = {Wiley}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex40-t1,
+   author          = {Browne, M[ichael] W.},
+   year            = {1977},
+   title           = {Generalized Least Squares Estimators in the Analysis
+                      of Covariance Structures},
+   editor          = {Aigner, D[ennis] J. and Goldberger, A[rthur] S.},
+   booktitle       = {Latent Variables in Socio-Economic Models},
+   pages           = {205--226},
+   address         = {Amsterdam},
+   publisher       = {North Holland},
+   originalyear    = {1974},
+   originaljournal = {South African Statistical Journal},
+   originalvolume  = {8},
+   originalpages   = {1--24},
+}
+
+
+@techreport{C-1,
+  author      = {Mazzeo, J. and Druesne, B. and Raffeld, P. C.
+                 and Checketts, K. T. and Muhlstein, A.},
+  year        = {1991},
+  title       = {Comparability of Computer and Paper-and-Pencil Scores
+                 for Two {CLEP} General Examinations},
+  type        = {College Board Rep.},
+  number      = {91-5},
+  address     = {Princeton, NJ},
+  institution = {Educational Testing Service}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex41,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}},
+  firstkey    = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}},
+  key         = {{NIMH}},
+  year        = {1990},
+  title       = {Clinical Training in Serious Mental Illness},
+  type        = {{DHHS} Publication},
+  number      = {ADM 90-1679},
+  address     = {Washington, DC},
+  institution = {U.S. Government Printing Office}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex42,
+  author      = {Osgood, D. W. and Wilson, J. K.},
+  year        = {1990},
+  title       = {Covariation of Adolescent Health Problems},
+  type        = {\bibnotype},
+  address     = {Lincoln},
+  institution = {University of Nebraska},
+  note        = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex43,
+  author      = {Mead, J. V.},
+  year        = {1992},
+  title       = {Looking at Old Photographs: Investigating the Teacher
+                 Tales that Novice Teachers Bring with Them},
+  type        = {Report},
+  number      = {NCRTL-RR-92-4},
+  address     = {East Lansing, MI},
+  institution = {National Center for Research on Teacher Learning},
+  note        = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex44,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and
+                 Human Services}}},
+  firstkey    = {{U.S. Department of Health and Human Services [DHHS]}},
+  key         = {{DHHS}},
+  year        = {1992},
+  title       = {Pressure Ulcers in Adults: Prediction and Prevention},
+  type        = {AHCPR Publication},
+  number      = {92-0047},
+  address     = {Rockville, MD},
+  institution = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and
+                 Human Services}}}
+}
+
+@intechreport{ex45,
+  author      = {Matthews, K. A.},
+  year        = {1985},
+  title       = {Assessment of {Type}~{A} Behavior, Anger, and Hostility
+                 in Epidemiologic Studies of Cardiovascular Disease},
+  editor      = {Ostfield, A. M. and Eaker, E. D.},
+  booktitle   = {Measuring Psychological Variables in Epidemiologic Studies
+                 of Cardiovascular Disease},
+  type        = {NIH Publication},
+  number      = {85-2270},
+  pages       = {153--183},
+  address     = {Washington, DC},
+  institution = {U.S. Department of Health and Human Services}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex46,
+  author      = {Broadhurst, R. G. and Maller, R. A.},
+  year        = {1991},
+  title       = {Sex Offending and Recidivism},
+  number      = {3},
+  address     = {Nedlands},
+  institution = {University of Western Australia, Crime Research Centre}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex47,
+  editor      = {Shuker, R. and Openshaw, R. and Soler, J.},
+  year        = {1990},
+  title       = {Youth, Media, and Moral Panic in {New} {Zealand}:
+                 From Hooligans to Video Nasties},
+  type        = {Delta Research Monograph},
+  number      = {11},
+  address     = {Palmerston North, New Zealand},
+  institution = {Massey University, Department of Education}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex48,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}},
+  firstkey    = {{Employee Benefit Research Institute [EBRI]}},
+  key         = {{EBRI}},
+  year        = {1992},
+  month       = feb,
+  title       = {Sources of Health Insurance and Characteristics of the
+                 Uninsured},
+  type        = {Issue Brief},
+  number      = {123},
+  address     = {Washington, DC},
+  institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex49,
+  author       = {Deci, E. L. and Ryan, R. M.},
+  year         = {1991},
+  title        = {A Motivational Approach to Self:
+                  Integration in Personality},
+  editor       = {Dienstbier, R.},
+  booktitle    = {Nebraska {Symposium} on {Motivation}: Vol.~38.
+                  {Perspectives} on Motivation},
+  pages        = {237--288},
+  address      = {Lincoln},
+  publisher    = {University of Nebraska Press}
+}
+
+@article{ex50,
+  author  = {Cynx, J. and Williams, H. and Nottebohm, F.},
+  year    = {1992},
+  title   = {Hemispheric Differences in Avian Song Discrimination},
+  journal = {Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, USA},
+  volume  = {89},
+  pages   = {1372--1375}
+}
+
+@lecture{ex51,
+  author       = {Lichstein, K. L. and Johnson, R. S. and Womack, T. D.
+                  and Dean, J. E. and Childers, C. K.},
+  year         = {1990},
+  month        = jun,
+  title        = {Relaxation Therapy for Polypharmacy Use in Elderly
+                  Insomniacs and Noninsomniacs},
+  chair        = {Rosenthal, T. L.},
+  symposium    = {Reducing Medication in Geriatric Populations},
+  howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the First
+                  International Congress of Behavioral Medicine},
+  address      = {Uppsala, Sweden}
+}
+
+@lecture{ex52,
+  author       = {Lanktree, C. and Briere, J.},
+  year         = {1991},
+  month        = jan,
+  title        = {Early Data on the {Trauma} {Symptom} {Checklist}
+                  for {Children} ({TSC-C})},
+  howpublished = {Paper presented at the meeting of the American
+                  Professional Society on the Abuse of Children},
+  address      = {San Diego, CA}
+}
+
+@lecture{ex53,
+  author       = {Ruby, J. and Fulton, C.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  month        = jun,
+  title        = {Beyond Redlining: Editing Software that Works},
+  howpublished = {Poster session presented at the annual meeting of the
+                  Society for Scholarly Publishing},
+  address      = {Washington, DC}
+}
+
+@phdthesis{ex54,
+  author       = {Bower, D. L.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  title        = {Employee Assistant Programs Supervisory Referrals:
+                  Characteristics of Referring and Nonreferring
+                  Supervisors},
+  journal      = {Dissertation Abstracts International},
+  volume       = {54},
+  number       = {01},
+  pages        = {534B},
+  note         = {UMI No.~9315947}
+}
+
+@phdthesis{ex55,
+  author       = {Ross, D. F.},
+  year         = {1990},
+  title        = {Unconscious Transference and Mistaken Identity: When
+                  a Witness Misidentifies a Familiar but Innocent Person
+                  from a Lineup},
+  school       = {Cornell University},
+  originalyear = {1990},
+  journal      = {Dissertation Abstracts International},
+  volume       = {51},
+  pages        = {417}
+}
+
+@phdthesis{ex56,
+  author       = {Wilfley, D. E.},
+  year         = {1989},
+  title        = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: Normalweight
+                  and Obese},
+  school       = {University of Missouri},
+  address      = {Columbia}
+}
+
+@mastersthesis{ex57,
+  author       = {Almeida, D. M.},
+  year         = {1990},
+  title        = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences
+                  for Fathers' Stress and Father--Child Relations},
+  school       = {University of Victoria},
+  address      = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada}
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex58,
+  author       = {Stinson, C. and Milbrath, C. and Reidbord, S. and Bucci, W.},
+  year         = {1992},
+  title        = {Thematic Segmentation of Psychotherapy Transcripts for
+                  Convergent Analyses},
+  howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex59,
+  author       = {D{\'{e}}pret, E. F. and Fiske, S. T.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  title        = {Perceiving the Powerful: Intriguing Individuals Versus
+                  Threatening Groups},
+  howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
+  organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst}
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex60,
+  author       = {McIntosh, D. N.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  title        = {Religion as Schema, with Implications for the Relation
+                  Between Religion and Coping},
+  howpublished = {Manuscript submitted for publication}
+}
+
+@unpublished{ex61,
+  author       = {Bordi, F. and LeDoux, J. E.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  type         = {Auditory response latencies in rat auditory cortex},
+  howpublished = {Unpublished raw data}
+}
+
+@misc{ex62,
+  editor       = {Klombers, N.},
+  year         = {1993},
+  month        = spring,
+  title        = {{ADAA} {Reporter}},
+  note         = {Available from the Anxiety Disorders Association of
+                  America, 6000 Executive Boulevard, Suite 513,
+                  Rockville, MD 20852}
+}
+
+@article{G-1,
+  author       = {Mroczek, D. K.},
+  year         = {2000},
+  title        = {The Emerging Study of Midlife},
+  type         = {Review of the book {\APACcitebtitle{Life in the middle:
+                  Psychological and social development in middle age}}},
+  journal      = {Contemporary Psychology: APA Review of Books},
+  volume       = {45},
+  pages        = {482--485}
+}
+
+@article{ex63,
+  author       = {Schatz, B. R.},
+  year         = {2000},
+  title        = {Learning by Text or Context?},
+  type         = {Review of the book
+                  {\APACcitebtitle{The social life of information}}},
+  journal      = {Science},
+  volume       = {290},
+  pages        = {1304}
+}
+
+@article{ex64,
+  author       = {Kraus, S. J.},
+  year         = {1992},
+  title        = {Visions of Psychology: A Videotext of Classic Studies},
+  type         = {Review of the motion picture
+                  {\APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}}},
+  journal      = {Contemporary Psychology},
+  volume       = {37},
+  pages        = {1146--1147}
+}
+
+@misc{ex65-1,
+  author    = {Scorsese, M. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+               and Lonergan, K.
+               {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer/Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+  year      = {2000},
+  title     = {You Can Count On Me},
+  type      = {Motion picture},
+  address   = {United States},
+  publisher = {Paramount Pictures}
+}
+
+@misc{ex65-2,
+  author    = {Harrison, J. {\protect\bibliteral{(Producer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+               and Schmiechen, R.
+               {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+  year      = {1992},
+  title     = {Changing Our Minds: The Story of {Evelyn} {Hooker}},
+  type      = {Motion picture},
+  note      = {Available from Changing Our Minds, Inc., 170 West End
+               Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023}
+}
+
+@misc{ex65-3,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association (Producer)}}},
+  firstkey  = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+  key       = {{APA}},
+  year      = {2000},
+  title     = {Responding Therapeutically to Patient Expressions of
+               Sexual Attraction: A Stimulus Training Tape},
+  type      = {Motion picture},
+  note      = {Available from the American Psychological Association,
+               750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242}
+}
+
+@misc{ex66,
+  author    = {Crystal, L. {\protect\bibliteral{(Executive
+                            Producer)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+  year      = {1993},
+  month     = oct,
+  day       = {11},
+  title     = {The {MacNeil}/{Lehrer} News Hour},
+  type      = {Television broadcast},
+  address   = {New York and Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service}
+}
+
+@misc{ex67,
+  editor    = {Miller, {\bibinitial{R\bibeditortype{Producer}}}},
+  year      = {1989},
+  title     = {The Mind},
+  type      = {Television series},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {WNET}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex68,
+  author    = {Hall, B. {\protect\bibliteral{(Writer)}\protect\bibskipbracenodot}
+               and Bender, J.
+               {\protect\bibliteral{(Director)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}},
+  year      = {1991},
+  title     = {The Rules of the Game},
+  type      = {Television series episode},
+  editor    = {Sander{\bibeditortype{Producer}}, J.},
+  booktitle = {I'll Fly Away},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {New York Broadcasting Company}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex69-1,
+  key       = {{\protect\bibsong{Shocked}{1992}{Over the
+               Waterfall}{track~5}}},
+  author    = {Shocked, Michelle},
+  year      = {1992},
+  title     = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
+  booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
+  address   = {New York},
+  publisher = {PolyGram Music}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex69-2,
+  key       = {{\protect\bibsong{Goodenough}{1982}{Tails
+                and Trotters}{track~5}}},
+  author    = {Goodenough, J. B.},
+  year      = {1982},
+  title     = {Tails and Trotters{\bibInstring{\BOn}}},
+  type      = {Recorded by G. Bok, A. Mayo, \& E. Trickett},
+  booktitle = {And So Will We Yet {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}},
+  address   = {Sharon, CT},
+  publisher = {Folk-Legacy Records},
+  note      = {1990}
+}
+
+@misc{ex70,
+  author    = {Costa, Jr.\hbox{} {\protect\bibliteral{(Speaker)}}, P. T.},
+  year      = {1988},
+  title     = {Personality, Continuity, and Changes of Adult Life},
+  type      = {Cassette Recording},
+  number    = {207-433-88A-B},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {American Psychological Association}
+}
+
+@article{ex71-1,
+  author  = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.},
+  year    = {2001},
+  title   = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources
+             by Psychology Undergraduates},
+  type    = {Electronic version},
+  journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research},
+  volume  = {5},
+  pages   = {117--123}
+}
+
+@article{ex71-2,
+  author      = {VandenBos, G. and Knapp, S. and Doe, J.},
+  year        = {2001},
+  title       = {Role of Reference Elements in the Selection of Resources
+                 by Psychology Undergraduates},
+  journal     = {Journal of Bibliographic Research},
+  volume      = {5},
+  pages       = {117--123},
+  lastchecked = {October 13, 2001},
+  url         = {http://jbr.org/articles.html}
+}
+
+@article{ex72,
+  author      = {Fredrickson, B. L.},
+  year        = {2000},
+  month       = mar,
+  day         = {7},
+  title       = {Cultivating Positive Emotions to Optimize Health
+                 and Well-Being},
+  journal     = {Prevention \& Treatment},
+  volume      = {3},
+  pages       = {Article 0001a},
+  lastchecked = {November 20, 2000},
+  url         = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html}
+}
+
+@article{ex73,
+  author      = {Crow, T. J.},
+  year        = {2000},
+  title       = {Did \emph{Homo} {\emph{Sapiens}} Speciate on the
+                 {\emph{Y}} Chromosome?},
+  journal     = {Psycoloquy},
+  volume      = {11},
+  lastchecked = {March 25, 2001},
+  url         = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/
+                 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001.
+                 language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow}
+}
+
+@article{ex74,
+  author      = {Glueckauf, R. L. and Whitton, J. and Baxter, J. and Kain, J.
+                 and Vogelgesang, S. and Hudson, M. and others},
+  year        = {1998},
+  month       = jul,
+  title       = {Videocounseling for Families of Rural Teens with
+                 Epilepsy---{P}roject Update},
+  journal     = {Telehealth News},
+  volume      = {2},
+  number      = {2},
+  lastchecked = {June 6, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1}
+}
+
+@misc{ex75,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy
+                  Community 2000,
+                  Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues}}},
+  firstkey    = {{Greater New Milford (Ct) Area Healthy Community 2000,
+                  Task Force on Teen and Adolescent Issues [TFTAI]}},
+  key         = {{TFTAI}},
+  year        = {\bibnodate},
+  title       = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {You} Do!},
+  lastchecked = {October 5, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.familymealtime.org}
+}
+
+@incollection{ex76,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Benton Foundation}}},
+  year        = {1998},
+  month       = jul,
+  day         = {7},
+  title       = {Barriers to Closing the Gap},
+  booktitle   = {Losing Ground Bit by Bit: Low-Income Communities in the
+                 Information Age},
+  chapter     = {2},
+  lastchecked = {August 18, 2001},
+  url         = {http://www.benton.org/Library/Low-Income/two.html},
+}
+
+@misc{ex77,
+  year        = {\bibnodate},
+  title       = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey},
+  lastchecked = {August 8, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/}
+}
+
+@misc{ex78,
+  author    = {Chou, L. and McClintock, R. and Moretti, F. and Nix, D. H.},
+  year      = {1993},
+  title     = {Technology and Education: New Wine in New Bottles:
+               Choosing Pasts and Imagining Educational Futures},
+  howpublished   = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University,
+               Institute for Learning Technologies Web site:
+               \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/
+                    publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+}
+
+@misc{ex79,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{University of California, San Francisco,
+               Institute for Health and Aging}}},
+  firstkey  = {{University of California, San Francisco, Institute for
+                Health and Aging [UCSF-IHA]}},
+  key       = {{UCSF-IHA}},
+  year      = {1996},
+  month     = nov,
+  title     = {Chronic Care in {A}merica: {A} 21st Century Challenge},
+  howpublished   = {Retrieved September 9, 2000, from the Robert Wood Johnson
+               Foundation Web site:
+               \url{http://www.rwjf.org/library/chrcare/}\bibnodot{.}}
+}
+
+@misc{ex80,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{United States Sentencing Commission}}},
+  firstkey    = {{United States Sentencing Commission [USSC]}},
+  key         = {{USSC}},
+  year        = {\bibnodate},
+  title       = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of
+                 Federal Sentencing Statistics},
+  lastchecked = {December 8, 1999},
+  url         = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm}
+}
+
+@misc{ex81,
+  author      = {{\bibcorporate{Canarie, Inc.}}},
+  year        = {1997},
+  month       = sep,
+  day         = {27},
+  title       = {Towards a {Canadian} Health {IWAY}: Vision, Opportunities
+                 and Future Steps},
+  lastchecked = {November 8, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/
+                         health/healthvision.doc}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex82,
+  author    = {Kruschke, J. K. and Bradley, A. L.},
+  year      = {1995},
+  title     = {Extensions to the Delta Rule of Associative Learning},
+  type      = {Indiana University Cognitive Science Research Report},
+  number    = {14\BmakeAbstractRetrieved},
+  lastchecked = {October 21, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.indiana.edu/~kruschke/deltarule_abstract.html},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex83,
+  author       = {Cutler, L. D. and Fr{\"{o}}lich, B. and Hanrahan, P.},
+  year         = {1997},
+  month        = jan,
+  day          = {16},
+  title        = {Two-Handed Direct Manipulation on the Responsive
+                  Workbench},
+  howpublished = {Paper presented at the 1997 Symposium on Interactive 3D
+                  Graphics\BmakeAbstractRetrieved},
+  lastchecked  = {June 12, 2000},
+  url          = {http://www.graphics.stanford.edu/papers/twohanded/},
+}
+
+@lecture{ex84,
+  author       = {Tan, G. and Lewandowsky, S.},
+  year         = {1996},
+  title        = {A Comparison of Operator Trust in Humans Versus Machines},
+  howpublished = {Paper presented at the CybErg 96 virtual conference},
+  lastchecked  = {May 16, 2000},
+  url          = {http://www.curtin.edu.au/conference/cyberg/
+                  centre/outline.cgi/frame?dir=tan},
+}
+
+@misc{ex85,
+  author = {Chalmers, D.},
+  year   = {2000},
+  month  = nov,
+  day    = {17},
+  title  = {Seeing with Sound},
+  type   = {\bibmessage},
+  number = {1},
+  url    = {news://sci.psychology.consciousness}
+}
+
+@misc{ex86,
+  author = {Simons, D. J.},
+  year   = {2000},
+  month  = jul,
+  day    = {14},
+  title  = {News Resources for Visual Cognition},
+  type   = {\bibmessage},
+  number = {31},
+  url    = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31}
+}
+
+@misc{ex87,
+  author = {Hammond, T.},
+  year   = {2000},
+  month  = nov,
+  day    = {20},
+  title  = {{YAHC}: {Handle} {Parameters}, {DOI} {Genres}, etc.},
+  type   = {\bibmessage},
+  howpublished = {Message posted to Ref-Links electronic mailing list,
+            archived at \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/
+                             ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+}
+
+@article{ex88,
+  author  = {Borman, W. C. and Hanson, M. A. and Oppler, S. H. and
+             Pulakos, E. D. and White, L. A.},
+  year    = {1993},
+  title   = {Role of Early Supervisory Experience in Supervisor Performance},
+  journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology},
+  volume  = {78},
+  pages   = {443--449},
+  howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database}
+}
+
+@newspaper{ex89,
+  author      = {Hilts, P. J.},
+  year        = {1999},
+  month       = feb,
+  day         = {16},
+  title       = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out},
+  journal     = {New York Times},
+  lastchecked = {November 21, 2000},
+  url         = {http://www.nytimes.com}
+}
+
+@article{ex90,
+  author  = {Fournier, M. and {\lowercase{D}}e Ridder, D. and Bensing, J.},
+  year    = {1999},
+  title   = {Optimism and Adaptation to Multiple Sclerosis: What Does
+             Optimism Mean?},
+  journal = {Journal of Behavioral Medicine},
+  volume  = {22},
+  pages   = {303--326},
+  howpublished = {Abstract retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycINFO database}
+}
+
+@techreport{ex91,
+  author  = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. General Accounting Office}}},
+  year    = {1997},
+  month   = feb,
+  title   = {Telemedicine: Federal Strategy is Needed to Guide Investments},
+  type    = {Publication},
+  number  = {GAO/NSAID/HEHS-97-67},
+  howpublished = {Retrieved September 15, 2000, from General Accounting Office
+             Reports Online via GPO Access:
+             \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/
+                  aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}}
+}
+
+@misc{ex92,
+  author    = {Miller, M. E.},
+  year      = {1993},
+  title     = {The {Interactive} {Tester}},
+  edition   = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces},
+  type      = {\bibcomputersoftware},
+  address   = {Westminster, CA},
+  publisher = {Psytek Services}
+}
+
+@misc{ex93,
+  author      = {Schwarzer, R.},
+  year        = {1989},
+  title       = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis},
+  type        = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual},
+  lastchecked = {March 23, 2001},
+  url         = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm}
+}
+
+@manual{ex93-t1,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{R Development Core Team}}},
+  year      = {2004},
+  title     = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing},
+  address   = {Vienna, Austria},
+  publisher = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing},
+  url       = {http://www.r-project.org}
+}
+
+@misc{ex94,
+  key       = {{\APACcitebtitle{National Health Interview Survey}}},
+  title     = {National {Health} {Interview} {Survey}---{Current} Health
+               Topics: 1991---{Longitudinal} Study of Aging},
+  edition   = {Version~4\noedition\ignorespaces},
+  type      = {Data file},
+  year      = {\bibnodate},
+  address   = {Hyattsville, MD},
+  publisher = {National Center for Health Statistics}
+}
+
+@misc{ex95,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{Department of Health and Human Services,
+                National Center for Health Statistics}}},
+  firstkey  = {{Department of Health and Human Services,
+                National Center for Health Statistics [DHHS-NCHS]}},
+  key       = {{DHHS-NCHS}},
+  year      = {1991},
+  title     = {National {Health} {Provider} {Inventory}: Home Health
+               Agencies and Hospices, 1991},
+  type      = {Data file},
+  howpublished = {Available from National Technical Information Service
+                  Web site, \url{http://www.ntis.gov}\bibnodot{.}}
+}
+
+%
+%  Additional references.
+%
+
+@book{APAManual3,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+  firstkey  = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+  key       = {{APA}},
+  year      = {1984},
+  title     = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+               {Association}},
+  edition   = {3},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+  note      = {with revisions},
+}
+
+@book{APAManual,
+  author    = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+  firstkey  = {{American Psychological Association [APA]}},
+  key       = {{APA}},
+  year      = {2001},
+  title     = {Publication Manual of the {American} {Psychological}
+               {Association}},
+  edition   = {5},
+  address   = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychological Association}}},
+}
+
+@book{chicago,
+  title     = {The {Chicago} Manual of Style},
+  edition   = {15},
+  year      = {2003},
+  address   = {Chicago},
+  publisher = {The University of Chicago Press},
+}
+
+@book{LaTeXbook,
+  author    = {Lamport, Leslie},
+  year      = {1994},
+  title     = {{\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System.
+               {User}'s Guide and Reference Manual},
+  edition   = {2},
+  address   = {Reading, MA},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{KoDa04,
+  author    = {Kopka, Helmut and Daly, Patrick W.},
+  year      = {2004},
+  title     = {Guide To {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX}},
+  edition   = {4},
+  address   = {Boston, MA},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{TLC2,
+  author    = {Mittelbach, Frank and Goossens, Michel},
+  year      = {2004},
+  title     = {The {\APACSortNoop{LaTeX}}{\LaTeX} Companion},
+  edition   = {2},
+  address   = {Boston, MA},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+}
+
+@book{meijer1998,
+  author    = {Meijer, Erik},
+  year      = {1998},
+  title     = {Structural Equation Models for Nonnormal Data},
+  address   = {Leiden, The Netherlands},
+  publisher = {DSWO Press},
+}
+
+@book{WaMe00,
+  author    = {Wansbeek, Tom and Meijer, Erik},
+  year      = {2000},
+  title     = {Measurement Error and Latent Variables in Econometrics},
+  address   = {Amsterdam},
+  publisher = {North-Holland},
+}
+
+@unpublished{APA-3rd-ed-ex53,
+  author       = {Gottfredson, G. D.},
+  year         = {1978},
+  title        = {Why Don't Vocational Interests Predict Job
+                  Satisfaction Better Than They Do?},
+  howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript},
+  organization = {Johns Hopkins University, Center for Social
+                  Organization of Schools},
+  address      = {Baltimore},
+}
+
+%%
+%</bibdb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \section{\BibTeX\ style (\fname{apacite.bst}, \fname{apacitex.bst})}
+% The program in \BibTeX's language that formats the reference list.
+% These two files are almost identical, but \fname{apacitex.bst}
+% generates information that can be used to generate an author index
+% as well.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst : reference list according to APA manual
+%<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst : reference list according to APA manual
+%<xbibstyle>%%                with author indexing information
+%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version}
+{ % Put identifying string in the .blg file
+%</bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%<bibstyle>  "apacite.bst"
+%<xbibstyle>  "apacitex.bst"
+%<bibstyle>  " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]"
+%<xbibstyle> " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]"
+%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+  * top$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% DECLARATION OF FIELDS, INTEGERS, AND STRINGS FOR EACH     %
+% ENTRY                                                     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+ENTRY
+  { address
+    annote       % not used
+    author
+    booktitle    % for articles in books
+    chair        % for lectures
+    chapter      % for incollection, esp. internet documents
+    day
+    edition
+    editor
+    englishtitle % english translation of title in other language
+    firstkey     % key for first citation
+    howpublished
+    institution  % for technical reports
+    journal
+    key          % key for second and later citations, or all
+                 % citations if firstkey is missing
+    lastchecked  % for URL's
+    month
+    note
+    number       % number of journal or report
+    organization % for unpublished
+        %
+        % for reprints, translations, etc.
+        %
+    originaladdress
+    originalbooktitle
+    originaledition
+    originaleditor
+    originaljournal
+    originalnumber
+    originalpages
+    originalpublisher
+    originalvolume
+    originalyear
+        %
+        % back to normal
+        %
+    pages
+    publisher
+    school       % for theses
+    series       % not used
+    symposium    % for lectures
+    text         % for literals
+    title
+    translator   % translator of book (or article)
+    type         % type of phdthesis (e.g., Doctoral dissertation)
+                 % or type of article (e.g., Letter to the editor)
+                 % etc.
+    url
+    volume
+    year
+  }
+  { title.number           % for sorting titles
+    cite.initials          % dummy (0-1) indicating whether or not
+                           % initials of the 1st author must
+                           % be used for citing
+    cite.num.names.full    % number of names to be cited for full and
+    cite.num.names.short   % short cite
+    add.to.year            % For a, b, c, etc. after year
+                           % in multiple citations with same author-year
+  }
+  { year.label             % For sorting entries by year
+    author.year.sort.label % For sorting entries and checking whether
+                           % initials should be added, how many authors
+                           % should be cited and whether a, b, etc.
+                           % after year is necessary
+    title.sort.label       % for sorting titles
+    type.2                 % Replacement for type with misc entries and
+                           % entries that revert to misc.
+  }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% DECLARATION OF GLOBAL INTEGERS AND STRINGS                %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+INTEGERS { len  pos  name.max  old.number  numnames  numnames.old
+           nameptr  lastname  format.num.names  cite.initials.old
+           cite.num.names.old add.to.year.old  forward
+           multiresult  dot brace.level
+         }
+
+STRINGS  { s  t  u old.label  field
+           aut1f  aut1s  aut1f.old  aut1s.old
+           aut2          aut2.old
+           aut3          aut3.old
+           aut4          aut4.old
+           aut5          aut5.old
+           aut6          aut6.old
+           year.label.old
+         }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% A small function for testing purposes.
+
+FUNCTION {test} { #0 }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% A small function that indicates whether index entries must be
+% generated. This is the only line that is different between
+% apacite.bst and apacitex.bst
+
+%</bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%<bibstyle>FUNCTION {make.index} { #0 }
+%<xbibstyle>FUNCTION {make.index} { #1 }
+%<*bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% MONTH MACROS                                              %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Use numbers now, along with a LaTeX function, which translates
+% them into words. This allows language-specific deviations.
+
+MACRO {jan}    {"{\APACmonth{01}}"}
+
+MACRO {feb}    {"{\APACmonth{02}}"}
+
+MACRO {mar}    {"{\APACmonth{03}}"}
+
+MACRO {apr}    {"{\APACmonth{04}}"}
+
+MACRO {may}    {"{\APACmonth{05}}"}
+
+MACRO {jun}    {"{\APACmonth{06}}"}
+
+MACRO {jul}    {"{\APACmonth{07}}"}
+
+MACRO {aug}    {"{\APACmonth{08}}"}
+
+MACRO {sep}    {"{\APACmonth{09}}"}
+
+MACRO {oct}    {"{\APACmonth{10}}"}
+
+MACRO {nov}    {"{\APACmonth{11}}"}
+
+MACRO {dec}    {"{\APACmonth{12}}"}
+
+MACRO {winter} {"{\APACmonth{13}}"}
+
+MACRO {spring} {"{\APACmonth{14}}"}
+
+MACRO {summer} {"{\APACmonth{15}}"}
+
+MACRO {fall}   {"{\APACmonth{16}}"}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%            LOGICAL `NOT', `AND', AND `OR'                 %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Logical 'not':
+% If the first element on the stack is A then this function
+% does the following:
+%     push { #0 }
+%     push { #1 }
+% So now the first 3 elements of the stack are
+%     { #1 } { #0 } A
+% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if':
+% If A > 0 then { #0 } is executed, else { #1 } is executed:
+%     if A > 0
+%     then 0
+%     else 1
+% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
+% then this does
+%     (if A then false else true)
+% which is a logical 'not'.
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Logical 'and':
+% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
+% then this function does the following:
+%     push 'skip$
+%     push { pop$ #0 }
+% So now first 4 elements are
+%     { pop$ #0 } 'skip$ A B
+% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
+% the stack):
+% If A > 0 then 'skip$ is executed, else { pop$ #0 } is executed:
+%     if A > 0
+%     then (B stays on top of stack)
+%     else (B is popped and #0 is pushed)
+% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
+% then this does
+%     (if A then B else false)
+% which is a logical 'and'.
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Logical 'or':
+% If the first 2 elements on the stack are A B
+% then this function does the following:
+%     push { pop$ #1 }
+%     push 'skip$
+% So now first 4 elements are
+%     'skip$ { pop$ #1 } A B
+% The first 3 are popped and subjected to 'if' (B is on top of
+% the stack):
+% If A > 0 then { pop$ #1 } is executed, else 'skip$ is executed:
+%     if A > 0
+%     then (B is popped and #1 is pushed)
+%     else (B stays on top of stack)
+% So consider integers as logicals, where 1 = true and 0 = false,
+% then this does
+%     (if A then true else B)
+% which is a logical 'or'.
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR FORMATTING                 %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    % issues warning if field is empty
+    % call with
+    %    "field"  field  warning.if.empty
+    % Note that the first field must be between quotes
+    % because it is the fieldname for use in the warning message.
+    %
+FUNCTION {warning.if.empty}
+{ empty$
+    { "No "  swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    { pop$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % issues warning if title, type, and howpublished are empty
+    %
+FUNCTION {check.relevant.fields}
+{ title        empty$
+  type         empty$ and
+  howpublished empty$ and
+    { "No title, type, and howpublished in " cite$ * warning$ }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % delivers 1 if (both editor and translator
+    %                not empty and not equal to each other)
+    %          0 if (editor or translator empty) or
+    %               (editor = translator)
+    %
+FUNCTION {editor.ne.trans}
+{ translator empty$
+    { #0 }
+    { editor empty$
+        { #0 }
+        { translator editor =
+            { #0 }
+            { #1 }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Convert integer to string, assume that integer < 100,000
+
+FUNCTION {conv.int.to.str}
+{ duplicate$ #10 <
+    { "0000" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+    { duplicate$ #100 <
+        { "000" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+        { duplicate$ #1000 <
+            { "00" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+            { duplicate$ #10000 <
+                { "0" swap$ int.to.str$ * }
+                { int.to.str$ }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Delivers 1 if possibly editor in author position
+%          2 if editor not in author position
+%          3 if not applicable: use key
+%          0 if unknown type
+
+FUNCTION {ref.type}
+{ type$ "article"      =
+    type$ "magazine"     =
+      type$ "newspaper"    =
+        type$ "book"         =
+          type$ "techreport"   =
+            type$ "unpublished"  =
+              type$ "misc"         =
+                type$ "booklet"      =
+                  type$ "manual"       =
+                    type$ "proceedings"  =
+                    or
+                  or
+                or
+              or
+            or
+          or
+        or
+      or
+    or
+    { #1 }
+    { type$ "incollection"   =
+        type$ "phdthesis"      =
+          type$ "mastersthesis"  =
+            type$ "lecture"        =
+              type$ "inbook"         =
+                type$ "inproceedings"  =
+                  type$ "conference"  =
+                    type$ "intechreport"   =
+                    or
+                  or
+                or
+              or
+            or
+          or
+        or
+        { #2 }
+        { type$ "literal" =
+            { #3 }
+            { #0 }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Delivers 1 if title is formatted as an "article"-type,
+%          0 otherwise
+
+FUNCTION {is.atype}
+{ type$ "article"        =
+    type$ "magazine"       =
+      type$ "newspaper"      =
+        type$ "incollection"   =
+          type$ "inbook"         =
+            type$ "inproceedings"  =
+              type$ "conference"  =
+                type$ "intechreport"   =
+                  type$ "manual"         =
+                  or
+                or
+              or
+            or
+          or
+        or
+      or
+    or
+    { #1 }
+    { journal empty$ not
+        %
+      type$ "phdthesis"      =
+        type$ "mastersthesis"  =
+        or
+        %
+      and
+        { #1 }
+        { type$ "misc" =
+          type empty$ not and
+            { type "\bibmessage" =
+                type "\bibcomputerprogram" =
+                  type "\bibcomputerprogrammanual" =
+                    type "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual" =
+                      type "\bibcomputersoftware" =
+                        type "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual" =
+                          type "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual" =
+                            type "\bibprogramminglanguage" =
+                            or
+                          or
+                        or
+                      or
+                    or
+                  or
+                or
+                { #1 }
+                { #0 }
+              if$
+            }
+            { #0 }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % connects two strings with connect string
+    % if one of them empty, then connect string
+    % is left out
+    %
+    % call with S1 S2 connectstring connect.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {connect.check}
+{ 'u :=
+    %
+    % if S2 = ""
+    %
+  duplicate$ empty$
+      %
+      % then remove S2
+      %
+    { pop$
+        %
+        % S1 is on top of stack.
+        % if it is empty, it is replaced by the empty string ""
+        %
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ "" }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+      %
+      % else swap S1 and S2 so that S1 can be checked
+      %
+    { swap$
+        %
+        % if S1 is empty, remove S1 so that S2 is left on the
+        % stack and is the result is given
+        %
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ }
+            %
+            % now the real work starts:
+            % push the connect string "C"
+            % so that top of stack is "C" "S1" "S2"
+            % concatenate, so that top of stack is
+            % "S1+C" "S2"
+            %
+        { u *
+            %
+            % swap and concatenate
+            %
+          swap$ *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
+    % if length of second is 4 or larger,
+    % connects them with non-breaking space ("tie", "~")
+    % if length of second smaller than 4
+    %
+    % call with S1 S2 tie.or.space.connect
+    % result: "S1\ S2" or "S1~S2"
+    %
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #4 <
+    { "~" }
+    { "\ " }
+  if$
+  swap$ * *
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % connects two strings with comma (", ")
+    % if one of them is empty, the comma is left out
+    %
+    % call with S1 S2 connect.with.comma.check
+    % result: "S1, S2"
+    %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.comma.check}
+{ ", " connect.check }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % connects two strings with semicolon ("; ")
+    % if one of them is empty, semicolon is left out
+    %
+    % call with S1 S2 connect.with.semicolon.check
+    % result: "S1; S2"
+    %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.semicolon.check}
+{ "; " connect.check }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % connects two strings with colon (": ")
+    % if one of them is empty, colon is left out
+    %
+    % call with S1 S2 connect.with.colon.check
+    % result: "S1: S2"
+    %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.colon.check}
+{ ": " connect.check }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % connects two strings with space ("\ ")
+    %
+    % call with S1 S2 connect.with.space.check
+    % result: "S1\ S2"
+    %
+FUNCTION {connect.with.space.check}
+{ "\ " connect.check }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % encloses string in pre- and postfix string
+    % call with
+    %    prefix postfix  S  enclose.check
+    % delivers empty string if S empty
+    %
+FUNCTION {enclose.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ pop$ pop$
+      ""
+    }
+    { swap$ * * }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % emphasizes top of stack
+    % call with
+    %     "string" emphasize.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {emphasize.check}
+{ "\Bem{" swap$
+  "}"     swap$
+  enclose.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % brackets top of stack
+    % call with
+    %     "string" bracket
+    %
+FUNCTION {bracket.check}
+{ "[" swap$
+  "]" swap$
+  enclose.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % parenthesizes top of stack
+    % call with
+    %     "string" parenthesize
+    %
+FUNCTION {parenthesize.check}
+{ "(" swap$
+  ")" swap$
+  enclose.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % checks whether argument is "multiresult":
+    % whether it contains '-', '+', or ',' characters
+    % used with pages to check whether pp. or p. must be used
+    %
+FUNCTION {multi.result.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+  %
+  % while (not multiresult) and (length(t) > 1) do
+  %
+    { multiresult not
+      t text.length$ #1 >
+      and
+    }
+        %
+        % if t(1-2) = "--" or t(1) = "+" or ","
+        % then  multiresult = 1
+        % else  t = t(2-last)
+        %
+    { t #1 #2 substring$ 's :=
+      "--" s =
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #1 #1 substring$ 's :=
+          "+" s =
+            "," s =
+            or
+            { #1 'multiresult := }
+            { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % Checks whether an author is a corporate author, i.e.,
+    % whether the field starts with "{\bibcorporate".
+    % Call with
+    %   field is.bibcorporate
+    %
+FUNCTION {is.bibcorporate}
+{ #1 #14 substring$ "{\bibcorporate" = }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING                    %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove non-alphanumeric characters
+% and change to lower case .
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove spaces from a string. Used for sorting.
+%
+% Call with
+%     string remove.spaces
+%
+% E.g.,
+%     "fine old day" remove.spaces
+% gives "fineoldday" .
+
+FUNCTION {remove.spaces}
+{   % Remove spaces from string.
+    % Works best if string only contains alphanumeric characters and spaces.
+  's :=                    % The original string
+  s text.length$ 'len :=   % Its length (no. of characters)
+  "" 't :=                 % Initialize the transformed string
+  #0 'pos :=
+    %
+    % while (pos < len) do
+    %
+  { pos len < }
+    { pos #1 +  'pos :=
+      s pos #1 substring$  'u :=
+        %
+        % u is the pos-th character in s
+        % If it is a space, move to next character,
+        % else copy character to output.
+        %
+      u " " =
+        'skip$
+        { t u *  't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+    %
+    % Now push the result back on the stack
+  t
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                BASIC OUTPUT FUNCTIONS                     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
+    % starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+    % whatever is more defined in \newblock
+    %
+FUNCTION {output.end.block}
+{ write$
+  newline$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
+    % starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+    % whatever is more defined in \newblock
+    %
+FUNCTION {output.new.block}
+{ output.end.block
+  "\newblock" write$
+  newline$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % starting new block by writing what's left on the stack,
+    % starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+    % whatever is more defined in \newblock
+    %
+FUNCTION {output.dot.new.block}
+{ add.period$
+  output.new.block
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Starting new block assuming that stack is empty.
+% Starting a new line and adding some extra space or
+% whatever is more defined in \newblock
+
+FUNCTION {start.new.block}
+{ newline$
+  "\unskip\ " write$ newline$
+  "\newblock " write$ newline$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % finish current entry
+    % by writing what's left on the stack and starting a new line
+    %
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{ output.end.block
+  "\PrintBackRefs{\CurrentBib}" write$ newline$
+  test
+    { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  FUNCTIONS FOR SORTING BY AUTHOR (OR SUBSTITUTE), YEAR,   %
+%  TITLE                                                    %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {sort.name.format} { "{ll{}}{  f{}}{  vv{}}{  jj{}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.format} { "{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {cite.initials.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {author.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {editor.name.format} { "{f{\BPBI }.~~}{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {index.name.format} { "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (1).
+% Initialization.
+
+FUNCTION {init.initials}
+{ "yyyyy"  'aut1f.old :=
+  "yyyyy"  'aut1s.old :=
+  #0       'cite.initials.old :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (2).
+% Update when author, editor, and key fields are not used.
+%
+% Call with
+%   field  update.no.initials
+
+FUNCTION {update.no.initials}
+{ 'field :=
+  field  'aut1f.old :=
+  field  'aut1s.old :=
+  #0     'cite.initials.old :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (3).
+
+FUNCTION {check.add.initials.aut}
+{   %
+    % If last name is equal to previous last name
+    % but initials are different, then initials should
+    % be cited. If initials are also the same, initials
+    % should be cited if that is the case for the previous
+    % author .
+    %
+  aut1s aut1s.old =
+    { aut1f aut1f.old =
+        { cite.initials.old  'cite.initials := }
+        { #1             'cite.initials :=
+          aut1f          'aut1f.old :=
+          aut1s          'aut1s.old :=
+          cite.initials  'cite.initials.old :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {  %
+       % Different last name.
+      aut1f          'aut1f.old :=
+      aut1s          'aut1s.old :=
+      cite.initials  'cite.initials.old :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (4).
+% Call with
+%   field  check.add.initials.field
+
+FUNCTION {check.add.initials.field}
+{ 'field :=
+  field #1 cite.initials.name.format format.name$  'aut1f :=
+  field #1 cite.name.format          format.name$  'aut1s :=
+    %
+    % Now do the actual work
+    %
+  check.add.initials.aut
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Check whether initials must be added (4).
+
+FUNCTION {check.add.initials}
+{   %
+    % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author.
+    % Initials are only relevant with author or editor.
+    %
+  firstkey empty$ not
+    { key empty$ not
+        {   %
+            % Both key and firstkey are nonempty.
+            % Then, key is treated as last name of first author,
+            % and firstkey is treated as last name + initials of
+            % first author .
+            %
+          firstkey  sortify  remove.spaces  'aut1f :=
+          key       sortify  remove.spaces  'aut1s :=
+          check.add.initials.aut
+        }
+        { firstkey  sortify  remove.spaces  update.no.initials }
+      if$
+    }
+    { key empty$ not
+        { key  sortify  remove.spaces  update.no.initials }
+        {   %
+            % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+            % to use as author.
+            %
+            % Check reference type:
+            %   if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+            %                2 then editor does not act as author
+            %                3 then key should have been used
+            %                0 then unknown reference type
+          ref.type  #2 =
+            {   %
+                % Format first author with and without initials
+              author empty$
+                { title.sort.label  update.no.initials }
+                { author  check.add.initials.field }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % Format first author with and without initials
+              author empty$
+                { editor empty$
+                    { title.sort.label  update.no.initials }
+                    { editor check.add.initials.field }
+                  if$
+                }
+                { author check.add.initials.field }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (1).
+% Call with
+%   field  tentative.cite.num.names.field
+
+FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names.field}
+{ 'field :=
+  field num.names$  'numnames :=
+  numnames #3 <
+    {   %
+        % 1 or 2 names: always cite all of them.
+      numnames  'cite.num.names.full  :=
+      numnames  'cite.num.names.short :=
+    }
+    { numnames #6 <
+        {   %
+            % 3-5 names: cite all of them the first time,
+            % only the first name later times
+          numnames  'cite.num.names.full  :=
+          #1        'cite.num.names.short :=
+        }
+        {   %
+            % 6 or more names: cite only the first name
+          #1  'cite.num.names.full  :=
+          #1  'cite.num.names.short :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute tentative number of names that must be cited (2).
+
+FUNCTION {tentative.cite.num.names}
+{   %
+    % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author.
+    % Number of names is only relevant with author or editor.
+    %
+  firstkey empty$ not
+    {
+      #1 'cite.num.names.full  :=
+      #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+    }
+    { key empty$ not
+        {
+          #1 'cite.num.names.full  :=
+          #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+        }
+        {   %
+            % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+            % to use as author.
+            %
+            % Check reference type:
+            %   if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+            %                2 then editor does not act as author
+            %                3 then key should have been used
+            %                0 then unknown reference type
+          ref.type  #2 =
+            {   %
+                % Format first author with and without initials
+              author empty$
+                {
+                  #1 'cite.num.names.full  :=
+                  #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+                }
+                { author tentative.cite.num.names.field }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % Format first author with and without initials
+              author empty$
+                { editor empty$
+                    {
+                      #1 'cite.num.names.full  :=
+                      #1 'cite.num.names.short :=
+                    }
+                    { editor tentative.cite.num.names.field }
+                  if$
+                }
+                { author tentative.cite.num.names.field }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Initialize "number of names to be cited" before
+% looping over entries.
+
+FUNCTION {init.cite.num.names}
+{ #0      'cite.num.names.old  :=
+  #0      'numnames.old        :=
+  "yyyy"  'year.label.old      :=
+  #0      'add.to.year.old     :=
+  ""      'aut1f.old           :=
+  ""      'aut2.old            :=
+  ""      'aut3.old            :=
+  ""      'aut4.old            :=
+  ""      'aut5.old            :=
+  ""      'aut6.old            :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Update "number of names to be cited" .
+
+FUNCTION {update.cite.num.names}
+{ cite.num.names.short  'cite.num.names.old  :=
+  numnames              'numnames.old        :=
+  year.label            'year.label.old      :=
+  add.to.year           'add.to.year.old     :=
+  aut1f                 'aut1f.old           :=
+  aut2                  'aut2.old            :=
+  aut3                  'aut3.old            :=
+  aut4                  'aut4.old            :=
+  aut5                  'aut5.old            :=
+  aut6                  'aut6.old            :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format (maximally) 6 authors for comparison issues
+% to determine number of authors that must be cited.
+% It is assumed that the 'field' and 'numnames' variables
+% have already been defined.
+
+FUNCTION {format.6.authors}
+{   %
+    % First author: with initials.
+    %
+  field #1 cite.initials.name.format format.name$  'aut1f :=
+    %
+    % Second and later authors: without initials.
+    %
+  numnames #1 >
+    name.max #1 >
+      and
+    {   %
+        % 2nd author
+      field #2 cite.name.format format.name$  'aut2 :=
+        %
+      numnames #2 >
+        name.max #2 >
+          and
+        {   %
+            % 3nd author
+          field #3 cite.name.format format.name$  'aut3 :=
+            %
+          numnames #3 >
+            name.max #3 >
+              and
+            {   %
+                % 4th author
+              field #4 cite.name.format format.name$  'aut4 :=
+                %
+              numnames #4 >
+                name.max #4 >
+                  and
+                {   %
+                    % 5th author
+                  field #5 cite.name.format format.name$  'aut5 :=
+                    %
+                  numnames #5 >
+                    name.max #5 >
+                      and
+                    {   %
+                        % 6th author
+                      field #6 cite.name.format format.name$  'aut6 :=
+                    }
+                    {   %
+                        % 5 authors: 6 is empty
+                        %
+                      "" 'aut6 :=
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+                {   %
+                    % 4 authors: 5-6 are empty
+                    %
+                  "" 'aut5 :=
+                  "" 'aut6 :=
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % 3 authors: 4-6 are empty
+                %
+              "" 'aut4 :=
+              "" 'aut5 :=
+              "" 'aut6 :=
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        {   %
+            % 2 authors: 3-6 are empty
+            %
+          "" 'aut3 :=
+          "" 'aut4 :=
+          "" 'aut5 :=
+          "" 'aut6 :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {   %
+        % Only 1 author: 2-6 are empty
+        %
+      "" 'aut2 :=
+      "" 'aut3 :=
+      "" 'aut4 :=
+      "" 'aut5 :=
+      "" 'aut6 :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
+% a's or b's are necessary: update add.to.year variable
+
+FUNCTION {change.add.to.year}
+{
+  forward  #1  =
+    {   %
+        % Moving forward: this add.to.year number must be 1 higher than
+        % previous.
+        %
+      add.to.year.old  #0  >
+        { add.to.year.old  #1 +    'add.to.year  := }
+        { #2  'add.to.year  := }
+      if$
+    }
+    {   %
+        % Moving backward: this add.to.year number must be 1 lower than
+        % previous.
+        %
+      add.to.year.old  #1 -    'add.to.year  :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (1).
+% Current and/or previous entry has 1 or 2 authors
+% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
+% same year. The number of authors does not need to be changed
+% in this case, but a's or b's may be necessary.
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2}
+{   %
+  numnames  numnames.old  =
+    {   %
+        % Same number of names: ambiguity could arise. Check whether current
+        % and previous have the same author(s).
+        %
+      aut1f aut1f.old =
+        {   %
+            % Same first author: if the second author is also the same or if
+            % there is only one author, a's and b's should be added.
+            %
+          aut2  aut2.old  =
+            numnames  #2  =
+              and
+                %
+          numnames  #1  =
+            or
+            {   %
+                % Same author(s): add to year.
+                %
+              change.add.to.year
+            }
+            {   %
+                % Different second author: no ambiguity possible.
+                %
+              skip$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        {   %
+            % Different first author: no ambiguity possible.
+            %
+          skip$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {   %
+        % Different number of names: no ambiguity possible.
+        %
+      skip$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (2).
+% Both current and previous entries have 3 or more authors
+% or editors acting as authors and they are published in the
+% same year.
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more}
+{   %
+    % Check whether current and previous have the same first author.
+    %
+  aut1f aut1f.old =
+    {   %
+        % Same first author: check second author
+        %
+      aut2 aut2.old =
+        {   %
+            % Same 1st & 2nd author: check 3rd.
+            %
+          aut3 aut3.old =
+            {   %
+                % Same 1st-3rd authors: check 4th.
+                %
+              numnames.old #3 =
+                { numnames #3 =
+                    {   %
+                        % Both current and previous have 3 authors, which are
+                        % the same, so both have identical author-year
+                        % combinations, so ambiguity should be resolved by
+                        % a's and b's. Check whether more authors were
+                        % necessary for previous one.
+                        %
+                      change.add.to.year
+                      cite.num.names.short  cite.num.names.old  <
+                        { cite.num.names.old
+                            'cite.num.names.short :=
+                        }
+                        'skip$
+                      if$
+                    }
+                    {   %
+                        % Previous has 3 authors, current has more, with same
+                        % first 3, so at least 4 must be used for current to
+                        % make a difference.
+                        %
+                      cite.num.names.short  #4  <
+                        { #4  'cite.num.names.short := }
+                        'skip$
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+                { numnames #3 =
+                    {   %
+                        % Current has 3 authors, previous has more, with same
+                        % first 3, so all 3 of current must be used.
+                        %
+                      numnames  'cite.num.names.short :=
+                    }
+                    {   %
+                        % Same 1st-3rd author and both current and previous
+                        % have at least 4 authors: check 4th.
+                        %
+                      aut4 aut4.old =
+                        {   %
+                            % Same 1st-4th authors: check 5th.
+                            %
+                          numnames.old #4 =
+                            { numnames #4 =
+                                {   %
+                                    % Both current and previous have 4 authors,
+                                    % which are the same, so both have
+                                    % identical author-year combinations, so
+                                    % ambiguity should be resolved by a's and
+                                    % b's. Check whether more authors were
+                                    % necessary for previous one.
+                                    %
+                                  change.add.to.year
+                                  cite.num.names.short cite.num.names.old  <
+                                    { cite.num.names.old
+                                        'cite.num.names.short :=
+                                    }
+                                    'skip$
+                                  if$
+                                }
+                                {   %
+                                    % Previous has 4 authors, current has more,
+                                    % with same first 4, so at least 5 must be
+                                    % used for current to make a difference.
+                                    %
+                                  cite.num.names.short  #5  <
+                                    { #5  'cite.num.names.short := }
+                                    'skip$
+                                  if$
+                                }
+                              if$
+                            }
+                            { numnames #4 =
+                                {   %
+                                    % Current has 4 authors, previous has more,
+                                    % with same first 4, so all 4 of current
+                                    % must be used.
+                                    %
+                                  numnames  'cite.num.names.short :=
+                                }
+                                {   %
+                                    % Same 1st-4th author and both current and
+                                    % previous have at least 5 authors: check
+                                    % 5th.
+                                    %
+                                  aut5 aut5.old =
+                                    {   %
+                                        % Same 1st-5th authors: check 6th.
+                                        %
+                                      numnames.old #5 =
+                                        { numnames #5 =
+                                            {   %
+                                                % Both current and previous
+                                                % have 5 authors, which are the
+                                                % same, so both have identical
+                                                % author-year combinations, so
+                                                % ambiguity should be resolved
+                                                % by a's and b's. Check whether
+                                                % more authors were necessary
+                                                % for previous one.
+                                                %
+                                              change.add.to.year
+                                              cite.num.names.short
+                                                cite.num.names.old  <
+                                                { cite.num.names.old
+                                                    'cite.num.names.short  :=
+                                                }
+                                                'skip$
+                                              if$
+                                            }
+                                            {   %
+                                                % Previous has 5 authors,
+                                                % current has more, with same
+                                                % first 5, so at least 6 must
+                                                % be used for current to make
+                                                % a difference.
+                                                %
+                                              cite.num.names.short #6 <
+                                                { #6 'cite.num.names.short := }
+                                                'skip$
+                                              if$
+                                            }
+                                          if$
+                                        }
+                                        { numnames #5 =
+                                            {   %
+                                                % Current has 5 authors,
+                                                % previous has more, with same
+                                                % first 5, so all 5 of current
+                                                % must be used.
+                                                %
+                                              numnames 'cite.num.names.short :=
+                                            }
+                                            {   %
+                                                % Same 1st-5th author and both
+                                                % current and previous have at
+                                                % least 6 authors. If one has
+                                                % 6 authors and the other has
+                                                % more or the 6th is different,
+                                                % 6 should be used (which is
+                                                % the maximum).
+                                                %
+                                              numnames #6 >
+                                                numnames.old #6 =
+                                                  and
+                                                %
+                                              numnames #6 =
+                                                numnames.old #6 >
+                                                  and
+                                                %
+                                              or
+                                                %
+                                              aut6 aut6.old =
+                                                not
+                                                %
+                                              or
+                                                { #6 cite.num.names.short <
+                                                    { #6
+                                                        'cite.num.names.short
+                                                          :=
+                                                    }
+                                                    'skip$
+                                                  if$
+                                                }
+                                                {   %
+                                                    % The first 6 authors are
+                                                    % the same and either both
+                                                    % have 6 or both have more.
+                                                    % So for all practical
+                                                    % purposes they have
+                                                    % identical author-year
+                                                    % combination, so ambiguity
+                                                    % should be resolved by a's
+                                                    % and b's. Check whether
+                                                    % more authors were
+                                                    % necessary for previous
+                                                    % one.
+                                                    %
+                                                  change.add.to.year
+                                                  cite.num.names.short
+                                                    cite.num.names.old
+                                                      <
+                                                    { cite.num.names.old
+                                                        'cite.num.names.short
+                                                          :=
+                                                    }
+                                                    'skip$
+                                                  if$
+                                                }
+                                              if$
+                                            }
+                                          if$
+                                        }
+                                      if$
+                                    }
+                                  if$
+                                }
+                              if$
+                            }
+                          if$
+                        }
+                        {   %
+                            % Different 4th author: citing 4 authors is
+                            % sufficient for this comparison.
+                            %
+                          cite.num.names.short #4 <
+                            { #4 'cite.num.names.short := }
+                            'skip$
+                          if$
+                        }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % Different 3rd author: citing 3 authors is sufficient for this
+                % comparison.
+                %
+              cite.num.names.short #3 <
+                { #3 'cite.num.names.short := }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        {   %
+            % Different 2nd author: citing 2 authors is sufficient for this
+            % comparison.
+            %
+          cite.num.names.short #2 <
+            { #2 'cite.num.names.short := }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    {   %
+        % Different first author: no ambiguity, move to next entry.
+        %
+      skip$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited
+% and whether a's or b's must be added to year (3).
+% Current entry has an author or editor acting as author.
+%
+% Call with
+%   field  definitive.cite.num.names.field
+%
+% What should we do with explicit "others"? Is now ignored.
+% If this causes ambiguity that could be resolved, the user
+% should have added additional author names.
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.field}
+{ 'field :=
+  field num.names$  'numnames :=
+    %
+    % Format authors
+    %
+  format.6.authors
+    %
+    % Now compare authors with authors of previous entry.
+    %
+  cite.num.names.short   numnames.old    >
+    {   %
+        % The previous entry has less authors than already defined
+        % necessary to be cited. No ambiguity is possible and we're ready.
+        %
+      skip$
+    }
+    {   %
+        % Both previous and current entry have at least one author .
+        %
+      year.label   year.label.old  =
+        {   %
+            % Same year label: possibly ambiguous citation.
+            %
+            % First check: current and/or previous have 1 or
+            % 2 authors.
+            %
+          numnames  #3  <
+            numnames.old  #3  <
+              or
+               %
+            { definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2 }
+            { definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more }
+          if$
+        }
+        {   %
+            % Different year label: everything's fine,
+            % move to next entry.
+            %
+          skip$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % If during the previous process the name maximum is exceeded
+    % (which was not checked), correct this. NOTE: If the name
+    % maximum is smaller than 6, this could lead to ambiguous
+    % citations if, e.g., the year and the first 5 authors are
+    % the same, but the 6th author is different.
+    %
+  cite.num.names.short   name.max   >
+    { name.max  'cite.num.names.short  := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+    % For a "full" cite, the number of names should always be at least
+    % as large as for a "short" cite.
+    %
+  cite.num.names.full   cite.num.names.short   <
+    { cite.num.names.short 'cite.num.names.full := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+    % Update "old" variables for next entry.
+    %
+  update.cite.num.names
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (4)
+% and especially whether a's and b's should be added.
+% This function is for the situation when author or editor
+% are not used and firstkey, key, or something else is
+% used to cite the referenced work.
+%
+% Call with
+%   formatted.field   definitive.cite.no.names
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.no.names}
+{   %
+    % The formatted field that acts as author is on top
+    % of the stack.
+      'aut1f :=
+  ""  'aut2 :=
+  ""  'aut3 :=
+  ""  'aut4 :=
+  ""  'aut5 :=
+  ""  'aut6 :=
+  #1  'numnames  :=
+    %
+  year.label   year.label.old  =
+    {   %
+        % Same year label: possibly ambiguous citation.
+        %
+      definitive.cite.num.names.1.or.2
+    }
+    {   %
+        % Different year label: everything's fine,
+        % move to next entry.
+        %
+      skip$
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Update "old" variables for next entry.
+    %
+  update.cite.num.names
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Compute definitive number of names that must be cited (5).
+
+FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names}
+{   %
+    % Check whether author or editor or other field acts as author.
+    % Number of names is only relevant with author or editor.
+    %
+  firstkey empty$ not
+    { firstkey  sortify  remove.spaces  definitive.cite.no.names }
+    { key empty$ not
+        { key  sortify  remove.spaces  definitive.cite.no.names }
+        {   %
+            % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+            % to use as author.
+            %
+            % Check reference type:
+            %   if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+            %                2 then editor does not act as author
+            %                3 then key should have been used
+            %                0 then unknown reference type
+          ref.type  #2 =
+            {   %
+                % Format first author with and without initials
+              author empty$
+                { title.sort.label  definitive.cite.no.names }
+                { author  definitive.cite.num.names.field }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % Format first author with and without initials
+              author empty$
+                { editor empty$
+                    { title.sort.label  definitive.cite.no.names }
+                    { editor definitive.cite.num.names.field }
+                  if$
+                }
+                { author definitive.cite.num.names.field }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make a tentative year sorting label (without `a' and `b').
+
+FUNCTION {make.tentative.year.sort.label}
+{   %
+    % Implicit or explicit ``no date'' is put at the front
+    % (the year zero; years B.C. will imply complications)
+    % because these are possibly old works.
+    % ``In press'' is put at the end.
+    %
+  year empty$
+    { "0000" 'year.label := }
+    { year "\bibnodate" =
+        year "n.d." =
+        or
+        { "0000" 'year.label := }
+        { year "\BIP" =
+            { "9999" 'year.label := }
+            {   % It is not checked whether the year field
+                % makes sense.
+              year  sortify  remove.spaces  'year.label :=
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Push year sort label on the stack
+  year.label
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Give month and day when available.
+
+FUNCTION {month.number.day}
+{ month empty$
+    { "" }
+    { month sortify remove.spaces
+        %
+        % Add the day when available.
+      day empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "/" *
+          day  sortify  remove.spaces  *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make tentative sort label with names in field on top of
+% the stack.
+%
+% Call with
+%   field make.name.sort.label
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
+
+FUNCTION {make.name.sort.label}
+{   %
+    % Author or editor-acting-as-author available.
+    % => Make tentative "short cite with initials" author
+    %    label (L1) of one of the forms
+    %     "Last1  F1"
+    %     "Last1  F1   Last2"
+    %     "Last1  F1   zzzz"  ("zzzz" representing et al.)
+    % => If more than 2 'authors': make label (L2) for 2nd-6th authors
+    %    of one of the forms
+    %     "Last2   Last3"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4   Last5"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4   Last5   Last6"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4   Last5   Last6   zzzz"
+    %
+    % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms:
+    %     "0000"  (missing year or explicit 'no date')
+    %     "9999"  ('in press')
+    %     year    (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+    %
+    % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+    % to string, which gives title label (L4) .
+    %
+    % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+    % concatenation of
+    %     L1
+    %     "    "
+    %     L3
+    %     "    "
+    %     L2
+    %     "    "
+    %     L4
+    %
+    % The name field is on top of the stack.
+  'field :=
+    %
+    % numnames is the total number of names contained in field
+  field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    %
+    % Format first author
+  field  #1  sort.name.format  format.name$
+    %
+    % Format the second author if there are two, or else "zzzz" = et al.
+  numnames #1 =
+    'skip$
+    { numnames #2 =
+        {   %
+            % Two authors: format second author
+          field  #2  "{ll{}}"  format.name$  's :=
+          s "others" =
+            { "   zzzz" * }    % Add "et al."-substitute
+            { "   " * s * }    % Add second author
+          if$
+        }
+        { "   zzzz" * } % 3 or more authors: add "et al."-substitute
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  make.tentative.year.sort.label *   % Add year (L3).
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+    %
+    % Now build up L2 if applicable
+  numnames #3 <
+    'skip$
+    {   %
+        % Treat last author slightly differently
+      numnames name.max >
+        { name.max  'lastname  :=
+          "   zzzz"                 % Push "et al."-substitute on stack
+        }
+        { numnames  'lastname  :=
+          ""                        % Push empty string on stack
+        }
+      if$
+        %
+        % Names 2 to "last" - 1
+      ""                            % Push empty string on stack
+      #2 'nameptr :=
+      { nameptr lastname < }
+        {   % Add name no. nameptr
+          field  nameptr  "{ll{}}"  format.name$ *
+          "   " *
+          nameptr #1 +  'nameptr :=
+        }
+      while$
+        %
+        % "Last" author
+      field  lastname  "{ll{}}"  format.name$  's :=
+      s "others" =
+        { "zzzz" * }    % Add "et al."-substitute
+        { s * }         % Add last author
+      if$
+        %
+      swap$ *  % Add the previously formatted empty string or
+               % "et al."-substitute if there are many authors.
+      *        % Add L2 to the earlier labels.
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  title.number  conv.int.to.str  *   % Add sorted title number (L4).
+  sortify                            % Clean up and convert to lowercase
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  month.number.day  *                % Add month and day when available
+  'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
+% sort label if key or firstkey is available or author and
+% editor are empty or unusable.
+%
+% Call with
+%   field make.field.year.sort.label
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
+% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
+% beginning.
+
+FUNCTION {make.field.year.sort.label}
+{   %
+    % 'field' acts as first author (L1), subsequent authors
+    % are empty (L2).
+    %
+    % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms:
+    %     "0000"  (missing year or explicit 'no date')
+    %     "9999"  ('in press')
+    %     year    (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+    %
+    % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+    % to string, which gives title label (L4) .
+    %
+    % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+    % concatenation of
+    %     L1
+    %     "    "
+    %     L3
+    %     "    "
+    %     L2
+    %     "    "
+    %     L4
+    %
+    % 'field' is on top of the stack. It is already supposed to be cleaned
+    % (i.e., sortified and space-removed), so this is already L1.
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces to L1
+  make.tentative.year.sort.label *   % Add year (L3).
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  "    "  *                          % L2 is empty, add spaces
+  title.number  conv.int.to.str  *   % Add sorted title number (L4).
+  sortify                            % Clean up and convert to lowercase
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  month.number.day  *                % Add month and day when available
+  'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
+% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
+% author or editor may be used
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.editor.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        {   %
+            % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+            % as author substitute .
+          title.sort.label   make.field.year.sort.label
+        }
+        { editor make.name.sort.label }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author make.name.sort.label }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.tentative.sort.label to make tentative
+% sort label if key or firstkey are not available and
+% author (but not editor) may be used
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+    {   %
+        % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+        % as author substitute .
+      title.sort.label   make.field.year.sort.label
+    }
+    { author make.name.sort.label }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make tentative label for citing and sorting and do some
+% preprocessing.
+
+FUNCTION {make.tentative.sort.label}
+{   %
+    %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    % General strategy:
+    %
+    % Ordinary situation: author or editor-acting-as-author
+    % available.
+    % => Make tentative "short cite with initials" author
+    %    label (L1) of one of the forms
+    %     "Last1  F1"
+    %     "Last1  F1   Last2"
+    %     "Last1  F1   zzzz"  ("zzzz" representing et al.)
+    % => If more than 2 'authors': make label (L2) for 2nd-6th authors
+    %    of one of the forms
+    %     "Last2   Last3"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4   Last5"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4   Last5   Last6"
+    %     "Last2   Last3   Last4   Last5   Last6   zzzz"
+    % When key is available (overrules author and editor fields):
+    % => L1 = key, L2 = ""
+    % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as key
+    % and format as key.
+    %
+    % Then format year label (L3) of one of the forms:
+    %     "0000"  (missing year or explicit 'no date')
+    %     "9999"  ('in press')
+    %     year    (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+    %
+    % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+    % to string, which gives title label (L4) .
+    %
+    % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+    % concatenation of
+    %     L1
+    %     "    "
+    %     L3
+    %     "    "
+    %     L2
+    %     "    "
+    %     L4
+    %
+    % This can then be sorted, from which it can be derived
+    % whether initials are necessary, how many names must
+    % be used for short and full citations, and whether "a"'s and
+    % "b"'s etc. are necessary behind the year labels.
+    %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % key and firstkey overrule author information
+    %
+  firstkey empty$ not
+    { key empty$ not
+        {   %
+            % Both key and firstkey available:
+            % for sorting and checking initials, treat key as last
+            % name and firstkey as initials.
+            %
+          key       sortify  remove.spaces
+          "  " *
+          firstkey  sortify  remove.spaces *
+          make.field.year.sort.label
+        }
+        { firstkey  sortify  remove.spaces make.field.year.sort.label }
+      if$
+    }
+    { key empty$ not
+        { key   sortify  remove.spaces make.field.year.sort.label }
+        {   %
+            % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+            % to use as author.
+            %
+            % Check reference type:
+            %   if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+            %                2 then editor does not act as author
+            %                3 then key should have been used
+            %                0 then unknown reference type
+          ref.type
+          duplicate$ #1 =
+            { pop$
+              make.author.editor.sort.label
+            }
+            { duplicate$ #2 =
+                { pop$
+                  make.author.sort.label
+                }
+                { #3 =
+                    { "no key in " cite$ * warning$
+                      make.author.editor.sort.label
+                    }
+                    { make.author.editor.sort.label }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+  author.year.sort.label  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make final sort label with names in field on top of
+% the stack.
+%
+% Call with
+%   field  make.definitive.name.sort.label
+%
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.name.sort.label}
+{   %
+    % Author or editor-acting-as-author available.
+    % => Make author-with-initials label (L1) of one of the forms
+    %     "Last1  F1   Last2  F2   ...   LastN  FN"
+    %     "Last1  F1   Last2  F2   ...   Last6  F6   zzzz"
+    %     (where N <= 6 is the total number of authors, and
+    %      "zzzz" represents et al. if there are more than 6 authors)
+    % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as sort key.
+    %
+    % The name field is on top of the stack.
+  'field :=
+    %
+    % numnames is the total number of names contained in field
+  field num.names$ 'numnames :=
+    %
+    % If there are more than 6 authors, only 6 are mentioned.
+  numnames  name.max  >
+    { name.max  'format.num.names  := }
+    { numnames  'format.num.names  := }
+  if$
+    % Initialize stack with empty string
+  ""
+    %
+    % Cycle over authors.
+  #1  'nameptr  :=
+    { nameptr  format.num.names  < }
+    { % Format author and add spaces
+       field  nameptr  sort.name.format  format.name$  *
+       "   " *
+       nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+    }
+  while$
+    % Format last author that must be formatted
+  field  nameptr  sort.name.format  format.name$  *
+    % Add et al. if necessary
+  nameptr numnames  <
+    { "   zzzz" * }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  sortify                            % Clean up and change case
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  year.label *                       % Add year
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  title.number  conv.int.to.str  *   % Add sorted title number
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  month.number.day  *                % Add month and day when available
+  'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called to make definitive sort label if author and
+% editor are empty or unusable.
+%
+% Call with
+%   field make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
+% where 'field' is the field that takes the author-role,
+% perhaps already subjected to removing articles from the
+% beginning.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.field.year.sort.label}
+{   %
+    % 'field' acts as author (L1).
+    %
+    % Then format year label (L2) of one of the forms:
+    %     "0000"  (missing year or explicit `no date')
+    %     "9999"  (`in press')
+    %     year    (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+    %
+    % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+    % to string, which gives title label (L3) .
+    %
+    % Then tentative sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+    % concatenation of
+    %     L1
+    %     "    "
+    %     L2
+    %     "    "
+    %     L3
+    %
+    % 'field' is on top of the stack. It is already supposed to be cleaned
+    % (i.e., sortified and space-removed), so this is already L1.
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  year.label *                       % Add year
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  title.number  conv.int.to.str  *   % Add sorted title number
+  "    "  *                          % Add spaces
+  month.number.day  *                % Add month and day when available
+  'author.year.sort.label :=         % Assign result to sort label.
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.final.sort.key if author or editor
+% may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        {   %
+            % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+            % as author substitute .
+          title.sort.label   make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
+        }
+        { editor  make.definitive.name.sort.label }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author  make.definitive.name.sort.label }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Called by make.final.sort.key if author but not editor
+% may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.author.sort.label}
+{ author empty$
+    {   %
+        % Use what has previously been stored in title.sort.label
+        % as author substitute .
+      title.sort.label   make.definitive.field.year.sort.label
+    }
+    { author  make.definitive.name.sort.label }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make final sort key .
+
+FUNCTION {make.final.sort.key}
+{   %
+    %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    % General strategy:
+    %
+    % Ordinary situation: author or editor-acting-as-author
+    % available.
+    % => Make author-with-initials label (L1) of one of the forms
+    %     "Last1  F1   Last2  F2   ...   LastN  FN"
+    %     "Last1  F1   Last2  F2   ...   Last6  F6   zzzz"
+    %     (where N <= 6 is the total number of authors, and
+    %      "zzzz" represents et al. if there are more than 6 authors)
+    % No author, editor, and key: define title or substitute as sort key.
+    %
+    % Then format year label (L2) of one of the forms:
+    %     "0000"  (missing year or explicit `no date')
+    %     "9999"  (`in press')
+    %     year    (otherwise; don't use originalyear here yet)
+    %       Add "/"month"/"day to the latter when available.
+    %
+    % From earlier sorting of titles, we have title number. Convert
+    % to string, which gives title label (L3) .
+    %
+    % Then final sorting label (author.year.sort.label) is a
+    % concatenation of
+    %     L1
+    %     "    "
+    %     L2
+    %     "    "
+    %     L3
+    %
+    % This can then be sorted.
+    %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    %
+    % Find out which field
+    % to use as author.
+    %
+    % Check reference type:
+    %   if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+    %                2 then editor does not act as author
+    %                3 then key should have been used
+    %                0 then unknown reference type
+  ref.type  #2 =
+    { make.definitive.author.sort.label }
+    { make.definitive.author.editor.sort.label }
+  if$
+    %
+  author.year.sort.label  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  FUNCTIONS THAT ALLOW SORTING BY TITLE                    %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove first N characters of string if they are equal to
+% teststring .
+%
+% Call with
+%     teststring N string chop.word
+%
+% E.g.,
+%     "A " #2 "A fine old day" chop.word
+% gives "fine old day"
+% and
+%     "A " #2 "The fine old day" chop.word
+% gives "The fine old day".
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    { s }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from beginning of string.
+%
+% Call with
+%     string chop.articles
+
+FUNCTION {chop.articles}
+{ 's :=
+  "a " #2
+    "an " #3
+      "the " #4
+        s
+      chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format title and other non-name/date entries for sort key.
+%
+% Call with
+%    field format.sort.title
+%
+% Make sure that field is not empty, this is not checked here!
+
+FUNCTION {format.sort.title}
+{   %
+    % Remove non-alphanumeric characters and change to lower case .
+  sortify
+    %
+    % Remove "a ", "an ", and "the " from the front .
+  chop.articles #1 entry.max$ substring$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make title sorting label or substitute.
+
+FUNCTION {make.sort.title}
+{ title empty$
+    { text empty$
+        { type empty$
+            { howpublished empty$
+                { note empty$
+                    { url empty$
+                        { " " }
+                        { url  format.sort.title }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                    { note  format.sort.title }
+                  if$
+                }
+                { howpublished  format.sort.title }
+              if$
+            }
+            { type  format.sort.title }
+          if$
+        }
+        { text format.sort.title }
+      if$
+    }
+    { title  format.sort.title }
+  if$
+  remove.spaces
+  'title.sort.label :=
+  title.sort.label 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make title number: rank number of sorted title .
+
+FUNCTION {make.title.number}
+{ title.sort.label  old.label  =
+    {   %
+        % A tie: old and new label are the same .
+      old.number  'title.number :=
+    }
+    {   %
+        % The usual situation: titles are different.
+      old.number  #1  +  'title.number :=
+      title.number       'old.number   :=
+      title.sort.label   'old.label    :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  NAME FORMATTING                                          %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% In order to support removal of spaces between the initials,
+% we have to split the formatting of the constituent parts,
+% because something like "{ll}{, f{\BPBI }.}{ vv}{, jj}" removes
+% the hyphens between initials as well.
+
+FUNCTION {last.part.name.format} { "{ll}" }
+
+FUNCTION {initials.with.space.name.format} { "{f.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.last.junior.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{ jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {von.junior.name.format} { "{ vv}{, jj}" }
+
+FUNCTION {one.complete.name.format} { "{vv }{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% text.length$ views "special characters" as 1, whereas
+% substring$ looks at the number of actual characters.
+% So
+%  "{\TeX}" text.length$   = 1
+%  "{TeX}"  text.length$   = 3
+% but
+%  "{\TeX}" #4 #2 substring$ = "eX"
+%  "{TeX}"  #4 #2 substring$ = "X}"
+% Therefore, it is convenient to have a string length function
+% that uses the same numbering as substring$:
+%  "{\TeX}" string.length  = 6
+%  "{TeX}"  string.length  = 5
+
+FUNCTION {string.length}
+{ #0 'pos :=
+  % If the next character exists, i.e., is not empty,
+  % add 1 to the string length.
+  % We cannot use empty$ because " " empty$ is true.
+  { duplicate$ pos #1 + #1 substring$ "" = not }
+    { pos #1 + 'pos := }
+  while$
+  pop$ pos
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Replace ". " and ".~" with "\BPBI " (period between initials)
+% and     ".-" with "\BHBI " (hyphen between initials)
+% but only at brace level 0.
+
+FUNCTION {transform.spaces.and.hyphens}
+{ 's :=                    % The original string
+  s string.length 'len :=  % Its length (no. of characters)
+  "" 't :=                 % Initialize the transformed string
+  #1 'pos :=
+  #0 'brace.level :=
+    %
+    % while (pos < len) do
+    %
+  { pos len < }
+    { % First, check whether we are at brace level 0
+      brace.level #0 =
+        {
+          % At least two characters left: check for ". ", ".~", and ".-".
+          % If so, replace and shift two positions.
+          s pos #2 substring$  ". " =
+          s pos #2 substring$  ".~" = or
+            { t "\BPBI " *  't :=
+              pos #2 +  'pos :=
+            }
+            { s pos #2 substring$  ".-" =
+                { t "\BHBI " *  't :=
+                  pos #2 +  'pos :=
+                }
+                { % neither is true, copy one character and shift one position
+                  t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+                  % Check whether we need to increase brace level.
+                  % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+                  % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+                  % Note also that unbalanced braces cause problems.
+                  s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+                    { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+                    'skip$
+                  if$
+                  pos #1 +  'pos :=
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { % Not at brace level 0: copy result literally
+          t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+          % Check whether we need to increase or decrease brace level.
+          % Note that this is not sophisticated: it does not capture
+          % \{, \verb+}+, etc.
+          s pos #1 substring$ "{" =
+            { brace.level #1 + 'brace.level := }
+            { s pos #1 substring$ "}" =
+                { brace.level #1 - 'brace.level := }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+          pos #1 +  'pos :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+    %
+  pos len =
+    { % Last character, copy
+      t   s pos #1 substring$   *   't :=
+    }
+    { % pos = len + 1, so s ends with ". " or ".-"
+      % This should not have happened, but make the best out of it.
+      % Push last two characters of s on the stack, i.e., ". " or ".-".
+      s len #1 - #2 substring$
+      % Remove "\BPBI " or "\BHBI " from t
+      t text.length$ 'len :=   % Length of t (no. of characters)
+      t #1 len #6 - substring$
+      % Concatenate and assign to t
+      swap$ * 't :=
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Now push the result back on the stack
+  t
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format only the initials of a name, retaining hyphens, but
+% removing spaces between first names. So "Jean Pierre" becomes "J.P."
+% and "Jean-Pierre" becomes "J.-P.".
+
+FUNCTION {format.initials.with.hyphen}
+{ % Format initials.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.initials.with.hyphen
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, format initials in the default way, retaining spaces
+  % and hyphens.
+  initials.with.space.name.format format.name$
+  transform.spaces.and.hyphens
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.last.part.name}
+{ % Format a name with last.part.name.format,
+  % as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.last.part.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.last.part.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  last.part.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.last.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+  % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.von.last.junior.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  von.last.junior.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.von.junior.name}
+{ % Format a name with von.last.junior.name.format,
+  % for citing or as part of more complicated things.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.von.junior.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.von.junior.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  von.junior.name.format  format.name$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.cite.initials.name}
+{ % Format a name for citing with initials.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.cite.initials.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.cite.initials.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+  % and push on the stack.
+  one.complete.name.format format.name$
+  %
+  % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+  duplicate$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  %
+  % Format the von-last-junior part and push on the stack.
+  swap$ #1 format.von.last.junior.name
+  %
+  % Connect with "~" hyphen (if they're both non-empty).
+  "~" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.author.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the reference list.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.author.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.author.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  % First, extract the complete name, format it in the canonical form,
+  % and push on the stack.
+  one.complete.name.format format.name$
+  %
+  % Make two copies of the name, format the last name and push on the stack.
+  duplicate$ duplicate$ #1 format.last.part.name
+  %
+  % Format the initials and push on the stack.
+  swap$ #1 format.initials.with.hyphen
+  %
+  % Connect with last name.
+  connect.with.comma.check
+  %
+  % Format the von-junior part and connect with initials.
+  swap$ #1 format.von.junior.name "" connect.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.name}
+{ % Format a name for the reference list as an editor.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.editor.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.editor.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  format.cite.initials.name
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.index.name}
+{ % Format an author name for the index.
+  % Call with
+  %   field authornumber format.index.name
+  % e.g.
+  %   author #1 format.index.name
+  % Instead of field, a string may also be used.
+  %
+  format.author.name
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  CITATION LABELS                                          %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Some macro strings about commas, etc. between authors
+
+FUNCTION {comma.between.two} { "\BCBT{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {comma.between.names} { ", " }
+
+FUNCTION {comma.before.last} { "\BCBL{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {and.before.last} { "\ \BBA{} " }
+
+FUNCTION {et.al.string.cite} { "\ \protect\BOthers{.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {et.al.string} { "\ \BOthers{.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {et.al.string.period} { "\ \BOthersPeriod{.}" }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Add author index entry when desired.
+% "field" must have been defined before and must contain the
+%   contents of the relevant author field.
+% "nameptr" must also have been defined before. It is the
+%   number of the author that must be formatted. (So if it is
+%   #2, then the 2nd author must be formatted.)
+% What's on top of the stack (the formatted author) is written
+% to the .bbl file.
+
+FUNCTION {add.name.index}
+{   %
+    %
+  make.index
+    { "%" * write$ newline$
+        % Check for corporate author
+      field is.bibcorporate
+        { "\corporateAX{" }
+        { "\AX{" }
+      if$
+      write$
+      field nameptr sort.name.format  format.name$  sortify  write$ newline$
+      "@"  write$
+      field nameptr format.index.name
+      "}%"  *   write$ newline$
+    }
+    { "%" * write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
+% Field is on top of the stack.
+%
+% Call with
+%   format.num.names  field  make.name.cite.label
+
+FUNCTION {make.name.cite.label}
+{ 'field  :=
+  'format.num.names  :=
+    %
+  field  num.names$  'numnames :=   % numnames is the total number of names
+                                    %   contained in field
+    %
+    % It is implicit in the APA manual that if "et al." would refer
+    % to exactly one author, then this author should be named
+    % instead of "et al."
+    %
+  format.num.names  numnames  #1  -  =
+    { numnames  'format.num.names  := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+    % Format first author: with or without initials
+    %
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  cite.initials  #1  =
+    { field  nameptr  format.cite.initials.name     }
+    { field  nameptr  cite.name.format format.name$ }
+  if$
+  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+    %
+  numnames  #1  =
+    'skip$
+    { format.num.names  #1  =
+        {   %
+            % First author et al.
+            %
+          et.al.string.cite write$
+        }
+        { numnames  #2  =
+            {   %
+                % Given that  format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
+                % Format second author.
+                %
+              #2  'nameptr :=
+              field  nameptr  cite.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+                %
+                % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others".
+                % If so, insert "et al." string.
+                %
+              s "others" =
+                { et.al.string.cite write$ }  % First et al.
+                {   %
+                    % First \& Second
+                    %
+                  and.before.last write$
+                  s
+                  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited
+                %
+                % for nameptr := 2  to  format.num.names - 1  do
+                %
+              #2  'nameptr  :=
+                { nameptr  format.num.names  < }
+                {   %
+                    % Put comma between consecutive authors
+                    %
+                  comma.between.names  write$
+                    %
+                    % Format and add next author
+                    %
+                  field  nameptr  cite.name.format  format.name$
+                  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                    %
+                    % Move to next author
+                    %
+                  nameptr  #1  +  'nameptr :=
+                }
+              while$
+                %
+                % nameptr  =  format.num.names
+                % Format this author.
+                %
+              field  nameptr  cite.name.format  format.name$  's :=
+                %
+              format.num.names  numnames  =
+                {   %
+                    % This is also the last author. Add (optional) comma.
+                    %
+                  comma.before.last  write$
+                    %
+                    % Check if this author is explicit "others".
+                    % If so, insert "et al." string.
+                    %
+                  s "others" =
+                    { et.al.string.cite  write$ }
+                    { and.before.last    write$
+                      s
+                      add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+                {   %
+                    % This is not the last author.
+                    % Add comma, author name, and "et al."
+                    %
+                  comma.between.names  write$
+                  s
+                  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                    %
+                  comma.before.last  et.al.string.cite  *  write$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when no author, editor, firstkey or key
+% is available.
+
+FUNCTION {make.title.cite.label}
+{   %
+    % Formatting: check if formatted as article title or
+    % as book title, and insert this formatting.
+    %
+  is.atype
+    { "\APACciteatitle{" }
+    { "\APACcitebtitle{" }
+  if$
+    %
+  title empty$
+    { text empty$
+        { type empty$
+            { howpublished empty$
+                { note empty$
+                    { url empty$
+                        { cite$ }
+                        { url   }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                    { note  }
+                  if$
+                }
+                { howpublished }
+              if$
+            }
+            { type }
+          if$
+        }
+        { text }
+      if$
+    }
+    { title }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Connect with formatting.
+    %
+  * "}" *
+    %
+    % Write to output
+    %
+  write$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when author or editor may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.editor.cite.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        {   %
+            % No author or editor:
+            % Use title or other description as citation label.
+            %
+          make.title.cite.label
+          "}{%"  write$ newline$
+          make.title.cite.label
+        }
+        { cite.num.names.full   editor  make.name.cite.label
+          "}{%"  write$ newline$
+          cite.num.names.short  editor  make.name.cite.label
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { cite.num.names.full   author  make.name.cite.label
+      "}{%"  write$ newline$
+      cite.num.names.short  author  make.name.cite.label
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Citation labels when author (but not editor) may be used.
+
+FUNCTION {make.author.cite.label}
+{ author empty$
+    {   %
+        % No author:
+        % Use title or other description as citation label.
+        %
+      make.title.cite.label
+      "}{%"  write$ newline$
+      make.title.cite.label
+    }
+    { cite.num.names.full   author  make.name.cite.label
+      "}{%"  write$ newline$
+      cite.num.names.short  author  make.name.cite.label
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make "a" or "b" supplement to year label when necessary.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.supplement}
+{   %
+    % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+    %
+  add.to.year  #0  =
+    { "" }
+    { "{\protect"
+      year empty$
+        { "\BCntND" * }
+        { year "\bibnodate" =
+            { "\BCntND" * }
+            { year "\BIP" =
+                { "\BCntIP" * }
+                { "\BCnt" * }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+      "{" * add.to.year int.to.str$ * "}}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Add \protect if year is \BIP or \bibnodate.
+
+FUNCTION {protect.year}
+{ year empty$
+    { "{\protect\bibnodate{}}" }
+    { year "\bibnodate" =
+        { "{\protect\bibnodate{}}" }
+        { year "\BIP" =
+            { "{\protect\BIP{}}" }
+            { year }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make year label that is used for citations in text.
+
+FUNCTION {make.definitive.year.label}
+{ "{\protect\APACyear{"
+  originalyear empty$
+    { protect.year }
+    { originalyear "\bibnodate" =    % date of original publication unknown
+        { translator empty$
+            { protect.year }
+            { year empty$
+                { "{\protect\BTRANSL{}~\protect\bibnodate{}}" }  % trans. n.d.
+                { "{\protect\BTRANSL{}}~"   protect.year *    }  % trans. 1931
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { year empty$
+            { originalyear "/{\protect\bibnodate{}}"   * }  % 1923/n.d.
+            { originalyear year =
+                { protect.year }
+                { originalyear  "/"  *  protect.year * }    % 1923/1961
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  * "}}%" * write$ newline$
+    %
+    % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+    %
+  "{\protect\APACexlab{" "}}"
+  make.definitive.year.supplement enclose.check
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Make citation labels:
+% - Full formatted author list (or substitute if no author
+%   available) for first citation;
+% - Short formatted author list (ditto) for subsequent
+%   citations;
+% - Year, with originalyear when applicable, and "a" or "b"
+%   etc. addendum when necessary.
+
+FUNCTION {make.cite.labels}
+{ newline$
+    %
+    % Write a few lines for testing purposes.
+    %
+  test
+    { "\bibitem[]{} \fullciteA{" cite$ * "}" *  write$ newline$
+      "\bibitem[]{} \citeA{"     cite$ * "}" *  write$ newline$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+  "\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{%" write$ newline$
+    %
+    % When key or firstkey is available, this takes precedence.
+    %
+  firstkey  empty$  not
+    {   %
+        % Full cite: firstkey.
+        %
+      firstkey  write$
+      "}{%"     write$ newline$
+        %
+        % Short cite: if key is not empty and cite.initials is 0,
+        % then key, else firstkey.
+        %
+      cite.initials  #0  =
+        key empty$ not
+          and
+        { key      }
+        { firstkey }
+      if$
+      write$
+    }
+    { key empty$ not
+        {   %
+            % No firstkey, but key available:
+            % Both full and short labels are key.
+            %
+          key    write$
+          "}{%"  write$ newline$
+          key    write$
+        }
+        {   % No key or firstkey, so find out which field
+            % to use as author.
+            %
+            % Check reference type:
+            %   if result is 1 then possibly editor acts as author
+            %                2 then editor does not act as author
+            %                3 then key should have been used
+            %                0 then unknown reference type
+          ref.type  #2  =
+            { make.author.cite.label }
+            { make.author.editor.cite.label }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  "}{%"  write$ newline$
+    %
+    % Make year label that's used for citations
+    %
+  make.definitive.year.label  write$
+  "}]{%"                      write$ newline$
+  cite$                       write$
+  "}%"                        write$ newline$
+  % author.year.sort.label      write$ newline$ % for testing purposes
+  % year.label                  write$ newline$ % for testing purposes
+    %
+    % If the item is used in a meta-analysis, indicate this with
+    % a star.
+    %
+  "\APACinsertmetastar{%"     write$ newline$
+  cite$                       write$
+  "}%"                        write$ newline$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  FORMATTING OF REFERENCE LIST                             %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% "(Ed.)" or "(Eds.)" postfix.
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {editor.postfix}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 >
+    { "(\BEDS)" }
+    { "(\BED)"  }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% "(Ed. \& Trans.)" postfix
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {editor.trans.postfix}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 >
+    { "(\BEDS{} \BAnd{} \BTRANSS)" }
+    { "(\BED{} \BAnd{} \BTRANS)"   }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % "(Trans.)" postfix
+    % translator must not be empty
+    %
+FUNCTION {trans.postfix}
+{ translator num.names$ #1 >
+    { "(\BTRANSS)" }
+    { "(\BTRANS)" }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format authors (or editors acting as authors) for
+% reference list.
+%
+% Call with
+%    dot  field  format.author.names
+% where field is the field (string) that contains the authors
+% (or editors acting as authors) that must be formatted and
+% dot is 1 or 0 indicating whether or not a period must end
+% the formatting.
+
+FUNCTION {format.author.names}
+{ 'field  :=
+  'dot    :=
+    %
+  field  num.names$  'numnames :=   % numnames is the total number of names
+                                    %   contained in field
+  numnames  'format.num.names  :=   % Format all authors
+  format.num.names   name.max  >    % Unless this exceeds the maximum of 6.
+    { dot
+        { name.max             'format.num.names := } % Format 6 authors
+        { cite.num.names.full  'format.num.names := } % Format 1 editor
+      if$
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+    % It is kind of explicit in the APA manual that if "et al." would
+    % refer to exactly one author (the 7th), then this author should
+    % still be replaced by "et al.", unlike with citations.
+    % So format.num.names is not adapted.
+    %
+    % Format first author
+    %
+  #1  'nameptr :=
+  field  nameptr  format.author.name
+    %
+    % Add period if required and if this is the only author.
+    %
+  numnames  #1  =
+    dot
+    and
+    { add.period$ }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+    %
+  numnames  #1  =
+    'skip$
+    { format.num.names  #1  =
+        {   %
+            % First author et al.
+            %
+          comma.between.two
+            %
+            % Add period if required.
+            %
+          dot
+            { et.al.string.period * }
+            { et.al.string * }
+          if$
+          write$
+        }
+        { numnames  #2  =
+            {   %
+                % Given that  format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
+                %
+              comma.between.two  write$
+                %
+                % Format second author.
+                %
+              #2  'nameptr :=
+              field  nameptr  format.author.name  's :=
+                %
+                % Check if 2nd author is explicit "others".
+                % If so, insert "et al." string.
+                %
+              s "others" =
+                {   %
+                    % First et al.
+                    % Add period if required.
+                    %
+                  dot
+                    { et.al.string.period }
+                    { et.al.string }
+                  if$
+                  write$
+                }
+                {   %
+                    % First \& Second
+                    %
+                  and.before.last write$
+                    %
+                    % Add period if required.
+                    %
+                  dot
+                    { s add.period$ }
+                    { s }
+                  if$
+                  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited
+                %
+                % for nameptr := 2  to  format.num.names - 1  do
+                %
+              #2  'nameptr  :=
+                { nameptr  format.num.names  < }
+                {   %
+                    % Put comma between consecutive authors
+                    %
+                  comma.between.names  write$
+                    %
+                    % Format and add next author
+                    %
+                  field  nameptr  format.author.name
+                  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                    %
+                    % Move to next author
+                    %
+                  nameptr  #1  +  'nameptr :=
+                }
+              while$
+                %
+                % nameptr  =  format.num.names
+                % Format this author.
+                %
+              field  nameptr  format.author.name  's :=
+                %
+              format.num.names  numnames  =
+                {   %
+                    % This is also the last author. Add (optional) comma.
+                    %
+                  comma.before.last  write$
+                    %
+                    % Check if this author is explicit "others".
+                    % If so, insert "et al." string.
+                    %
+                  s "others" =
+                    {   %
+                        % Add period if required.
+                        %
+                      dot
+                        { et.al.string.period }
+                        { et.al.string }
+                      if$
+                      write$
+                    }
+                    { and.before.last  write$
+                        %
+                        % Add period if required.
+                        %
+                      dot
+                        { s add.period$ }
+                        { s }
+                      if$
+                      add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+                {   %
+                    % This is not the last author.
+                    % Add comma, author name, and "et al."
+                    %
+                  comma.between.names  write$
+                  s
+                  add.name.index  % Add index entry when desired.
+                    %
+                  comma.before.last
+                    %
+                    % Add period if required.
+                    %
+                  dot
+                    { et.al.string.period * }
+                    { et.al.string * }
+                  if$
+                  write$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format authors in reference list, where it is given that
+% the author field is not empty.
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ #1 author format.author.names
+  "%" write$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format editors in reference list in case editors act as
+% authors (such as reference to entire edited book)
+%
+% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds.).
+%     or
+% Letheridge, S. (Ed.).    (if only 1 editor)
+%
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors.as.authors}
+{ #0  editor  format.author.names
+  "\ " editor.postfix * add.period$ write$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Format editors in reference list in case editors are also
+% translators and act as authors (such as reference to entire
+% edited book of translated articles)
+%
+% Letheridge, S., \& Cannon, C. R. (Eds. and Trans.).
+%     or
+% Letheridge, S. (Ed. and Trans.).    (if only 1 editor)
+%
+% editor must not be empty
+
+FUNCTION {format.ed.trans.as.authors}
+{ #0  editor  format.author.names
+  "\ " editor.trans.postfix * add.period$ write$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Format a list of names with the initials before the
+% last names (i.e., names in the editor position),
+% commas between names (not between 2),
+% and ampersand (\&) before last name.
+% These names are not put in the author index.
+%
+% Call with
+%     field format.editor.names
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.names}
+{ 'field  :=
+    %
+  field  num.names$  'numnames :=   % numnames is the total number of names
+                                    %   contained in field
+  numnames  'format.num.names  :=   % Format all authors
+  format.num.names   name.max  >    % Unless this exceeds the maximum of 6.
+    { #1 'format.num.names := }     % Then it becomes 1 (First et al.)
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+    % Format first editor
+    %
+  field  #1  format.editor.name
+    %
+  numnames  #1  =
+    'skip$
+    { format.num.names  #1  =
+        { et.al.string * } % First editor et al., no comma.
+        { numnames  #2  =
+            {   %
+                % Given that  format.num.names > 1, it is 2.
+                % No comma. Format second editor.
+                %
+              field  #2  format.editor.name  's :=
+                %
+                % Check if 2nd editor is explicit "others".
+                % If so, insert "et al." string.
+                %
+              s "others" =
+                { et.al.string  * }          % First et al.
+                { and.before.last  *  s * }  % First \& Second
+              if$
+            }
+            {   %
+                % 3 or more names, 2 or more must be cited
+                %
+                % for nameptr := 2  to  format.num.names - 1  do
+                %
+              #2  'nameptr  :=
+                { nameptr  format.num.names  < }
+                {   %
+                    % Put comma between consecutive editors
+                    %
+                  comma.between.names  *
+                    %
+                    % Format and add next editor
+                    %
+                  field  nameptr  format.editor.name  *
+                    %
+                    % Move to next editor
+                    %
+                  nameptr  #1  +  'nameptr :=
+                }
+              while$
+                %
+                % nameptr  =  format.num.names
+                % Format this editor.
+                %
+              field  nameptr  format.editor.name  's :=
+                %
+              format.num.names  numnames  =
+                {   %
+                    % This is also the last editor. Add (optional) comma.
+                    %
+                  comma.before.last  *
+                    %
+                    % Check if this editor is explicit "others".
+                    % If so, insert "et al." string.
+                    %
+                  s "others" =
+                    { et.al.string     *     }
+                    { and.before.last  * s * }
+                  if$
+                }
+                {   %
+                    % This is not the last editor.
+                    % Add comma, editor name, and "et al."
+                    %
+                  comma.between.names  * s *
+                  comma.before.last    * et.al.string  *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format editors in case editors do not act as authors
+    % (such as reference to chapter in edited book)
+    %
+    % L. W. Poon (Ed.)                         (1 editor)
+    %    or
+    % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Eds.)    (2 editors)
+    %    or
+    % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Eds.) (>2 editors)
+    %
+    % editor must not be empty
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.editors.in.line}
+{ editor           format.editor.names
+  editor.postfix   connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format editors in case editors are also translators
+    % and do not act as authors
+    % (such as reference to chapter in edited book
+    %  of translated articles)
+    %
+    % L. W. Poon (Ed. and Trans.)                         (1 editor)
+    %    or
+    % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Eds. and Trans.)    (2 editors)
+    %    or
+    % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Eds. and Trans.) (>2 editors)
+    %
+    % editor must not be empty
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.editors.trans.in.line}
+{ editor                 format.editor.names
+  editor.trans.postfix   connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format translators in case translators act as editors
+    % (such as reference to chapter in translated book)
+    %
+    % L. W. Poon (Trans.)                         (1 translator)
+    %    or
+    % A. S. Gurman \& D. P. Kniskern (Trans.)    (2 translators)
+    %    or
+    % L. Poon, A. Jones, \& D. P. Smith (Trans.) (>2 translators)
+    %
+    % translator must not be empty
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.translators.in.line}
+{ translator      format.editor.names
+  trans.postfix   connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format translators in case translator does not act as editor
+    % (such as reference to translated book)
+    %
+    % L. Solotaroff, Trans.
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.translators.in.paren.check}
+{ translator empty$
+    { "" }
+    { translator format.editor.names
+      translator num.names$ #1 >
+        { ", \BTRANSS{}" * }
+        { ", \BTRANS{}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format editors and translators in case neither act as editor
+    % (such as reference to edited or translated book with a
+    % a single author)
+    %
+    % L. Solotaroff, Ed.
+    % L. Solotaroff, Ed. \& Trans.
+    % L. Solotaroff, Trans.
+    % L. Solotaroff, Ed. \& S. Prokofieff, Trans.
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.editors.translators.in.paren.check}
+{ editor empty$
+    { translator empty$
+        { "" }
+        { translator format.editor.names
+          translator num.names$ #1 >
+            { ", \BTRANSS{}" * }
+            { ", \BTRANS{}" * }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.editor.names
+      editor num.names$ #1 >
+        { ", \BEDS{}" * }
+        { ", \BED{}" * }
+      if$
+      translator empty$
+        'skip$
+        { editor translator =
+            { editor num.names$ #1 >
+                { " \BAnd{} \BTRANSS" * }
+                { " \BAnd{} \BTRANS" * }
+              if$
+            }
+            { " \BAnd{} " *
+              translator format.editor.names *
+              translator num.names$ #1 >
+                { ", \BTRANSS{}" * }
+                { ", \BTRANS{}" * }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % translator of article
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atrans.check}
+{ format.translators.in.paren.check   parenthesize.check }
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format "In editor (Ed.), "
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.in.editors}
+{ "\BIn{} "
+  editor empty$
+    'skip$
+    { format.editors.in.line * ", " * }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format "In translator (Trans.),"
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.in.trans}
+{ "\BIn{} "
+  translator empty$
+    'skip$
+    { format.translators.in.line * ", " * }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format "In editor (Ed. and Trans.)"
+    %  or "In editor (Ed.)" if editor not equal to translator
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.in.editors.trans}
+{ "\BIn{} "
+  editor empty$
+    { translator empty$
+        'skip$
+        { format.translators.in.line * ", " * }
+      if$
+    }
+    { translator empty$
+        { format.editors.in.line * }
+        { editor translator =
+            { format.editors.trans.in.line * }
+            { format.editors.in.line * }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+      ", " *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                            DATE                           %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Formats year (+ extra label) between parentheses (which
+% may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
+% Extra label can be used for
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983a) <article 1>
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983b) <article 2>
+
+FUNCTION {format.year.check}
+{ "\APACrefYear{"
+  year empty$
+    { "\bibnodate{}" * }
+    { year * }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+    %
+  make.definitive.year.supplement *
+  "}" *
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Formats year (+ extra label)  + month + day between
+% parentheses (which may be redefined by \BBOP and \BBCP).
+% Extra label can be used for
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983a, June 7)  <article 1>
+% Bentler, P. M. (1983b, April 4) <article 2>
+
+FUNCTION {format.year.month.day.check}
+{ "\APACrefYearMonthDay{"
+  year empty$
+    { "\bibnodate{}" * }
+    { year * }
+  if$
+    %
+    % Add "a", "b", etc. when necessary.
+    %
+  make.definitive.year.supplement *
+  "}{" *
+    %
+    % Add month and day when present.
+    %
+  month empty$
+    'skip$
+    { month * }
+  if$
+  "}{" *
+  day empty$
+    'skip$
+    { day * }
+  if$
+  "}" *
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                     TITLE FORMATTING                      %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of article in journal or book
+    % no finishing period
+    % field must be on top of stack
+    %  (so englishtitle can be handled also)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.no.dot}
+{ "\BBOQ{}" swap$
+  "\BBCQ{}" swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+  enclose.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of article in journal or book
+    % with finishing period
+    % field must be on top of stack
+    %  (so englishtitle can be handled also)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.dot}
+{ "\BBOQ{}" swap$
+  "\BBCQ{}" swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefatitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" * add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+  enclose.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of article in journal or book
+    % field must be on top of stack
+    % second element on stack must be connected:
+    %   if that is empty, then atitle.dot
+    %   else atitle.no.dot, connect, and add period
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.connect}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      format.atitle.dot
+    }
+    { swap$
+      format.atitle.no.dot
+      swap$ connect.with.space.check
+      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of book or so, without period
+    % call with
+    %     field format.btitle.no.dot
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.no.dot}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$
+      % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefbtitle{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$
+      "t" change.case$
+      * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of book or so, with period
+    % call with
+    %     field format.btitle.dot
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.dot}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { add.period$ format.btitle.no.dot }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of book and similar
+    % field must be on top of stack
+    % second element on stack must be connected:
+    %   if that is empty, then btitle.dot
+    %   else btitle.no.dot, connect, and add period
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      format.btitle.dot
+    }
+    { swap$
+      format.btitle.no.dot
+      swap$   connect.with.space.check
+      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of book and similar
+    % field must be on top of stack
+    % second element on stack must be connected
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.connect.no.dot}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      format.btitle.no.dot
+    }
+    { swap$
+      format.btitle.no.dot
+      swap$   connect.with.space.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format englishtitle (of nonenglish article, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.aetitle.check}
+{ englishtitle empty$
+    { "" }
+    { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefaetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" *
+                         englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format englishtitle (of nonenglish book, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.betitle.check}
+{ englishtitle empty$
+    { "" }
+    { % Two arguments: Title twice: (1) don't change case; (2) change case
+      "\APACrefbetitle{" englishtitle * "}{" *
+                         englishtitle "t" change.case$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format type (of article, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atype.check}
+{ type bracket.check }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format title and englishtitle (of article, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format title, englishtitle, and type
+    % (of article, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  format.atype.check   connect.with.space.check
+  title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format title, englishtitle,
+    % and translator (of article, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.trans.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  format.atrans.check  connect.with.space.check
+  title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format title, englishtitle, type,
+    % and translator (of article, etc.)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.atitle.type.trans.check}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  format.atype.check   connect.with.space.check
+  format.atrans.check  connect.with.space.check
+  title format.atitle.connect
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                    JOURNAL FORMATTING                     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format journal, volume, number and pages
+    % call with
+    %   formatted.pages format.journal.vol.num.pages.check
+    %
+FUNCTION { format.journal.vol.num.pages.check }
+{ "journal" journal warning.if.empty
+  duplicate$ empty$
+  journal    empty$ and
+  volume     empty$ and
+  number     empty$ and
+    { pop$ "" }
+    { "\APACjournalVolNumPages{" journal "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     volume  "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     number  "" connect.check
+      "}{" *                     swap$   "" connect.check
+      "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    BOOK VOLUME, EDITION, AND OTHER SUPPLEMENTARY INFO     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % volume of book, checks whether
+    % "Volume" or "Volumes"
+    %
+    % call with
+    %   field format.bvolume.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+        { "\BVOLS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BVOL"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % edition of book, must not be empty
+    % call with
+    %   field format.edition.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.edition.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" *
+      "\BEd" connect.with.space.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % volume and edition of book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.check}
+{ edition format.edition.check
+  volume  format.bvolume.check
+  connect.with.comma.check
+}
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % volume and edition of book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+  parenthesize.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % volume and edition and translator of translated book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.trans}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+  format.translators.in.paren.check connect.with.semicolon.check
+  parenthesize.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % volume, edition, editor, and translator of (translated) book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.editor.trans}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+  format.editors.translators.in.paren.check connect.with.semicolon.check
+  parenthesize.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % formats pages by first checking if 1 or more pages
+    % and prefixing pages with "p." or "pp." (these strings
+    % are given in the commands \BPG and \BPGS, respectively),
+    % whichever is applicable, and do a tie or space connect
+    %
+    % call with
+    %   field format.bpages.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bpages.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+        { "\BPGS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BPG~" swap$ * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % formats chapters by first checking if 1 or more chapters
+    % and prefixing pages with "chap." (this string
+    % is given in the commands \BCHAP and \BCHAPS, respectively),
+    % whichever is applicable, and do a tie or space connect
+    %
+    % call with
+    %   field format.bchapter.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bchapter.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+        { "\BCHAPS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BCHAP"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % volume, edition, and pages or chapter of article in book etc.
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.bvol.edition.pages}
+{ format.bvol.edition.check
+  pages empty$
+    { chapter format.bchapter.check  connect.with.comma.check }
+    { pages   format.bpages.check    connect.with.comma.check }
+  if$
+  parenthesize.check
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title, volume, edition of book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition}
+{ format.betitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
+  title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title, volume, edition, and translator of book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.trans}
+{ format.betitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition.trans  connect.with.space.check
+  title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title, volume, edition, editor, and translator of book
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans}
+{ format.betitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition.editor.trans  connect.with.space.check
+  title  format.btitle.connect.no.dot
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                 ADDRESS AND PUBLISHER                     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format address and publisher of book etc.
+    %
+    % New York: Wiley
+    %      or
+    % Wiley      (if address empty)
+    %      or
+    % New York   (if publisher empty)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.address.publisher}
+{   %
+    % If publisher = author or publisher = "author" or publisher = "Author"
+    % then hand over the final choice how to format this to \LaTeX.
+    % (I could imagine similar code for editors, but the APA manual does
+    % not mention it and then we'd have to check whether the editor is in
+    % the author position, so let's keep it simple until someone complains.)
+    %
+  author empty$
+  publisher empty$ or
+    { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{" }
+    { author   publisher =
+      "author" publisher =  or
+      "Author" publisher =  or
+        { author    "\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth{" }
+        { publisher "\APACaddressPublisher{"       }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  address "" connect.check  "}{" *
+    % Recover publisher that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+  swap$   "" connect.check  "}"  *
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format address and publisher of book etc.
+    %
+    % New York: Wiley
+    %      or
+    % Wiley      (if address empty)
+    %      or
+    % New York   (if publisher empty)
+    %
+    % warning if no publisher or no address
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.check}
+{ "publisher" publisher warning.if.empty
+  "address"   address   warning.if.empty
+  publisher empty$
+  address   empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.address.publisher
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%            TYPE AND NUMBER OF A REPORT                    %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format number as in reports: No. 2017
+    % call with
+    %   field format.rnumber.check
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.rnumber.check}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.result.check
+        { "\BNUMS" swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+        { "\BNUM"  swap$ tie.or.space.connect }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format type and number of a standalone item
+    % call with
+    %   format.type.number
+    %
+FUNCTION { format.type.number }
+{ type empty$
+    { type.2 }
+    { type   }
+  if$
+  number empty$
+    { bracket.check }
+    { number format.rnumber.check connect.with.space.check
+      parenthesize.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                     HOWPUBLISHED                          %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format howpublished if not empty,
+    % for various entry types
+    % call with
+    %   format.howpublished
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.howpublished}
+{ howpublished empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'pop$
+        { output.dot.new.block }
+      if$
+      "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format howpublished if not empty,
+    % for misc
+    % call with
+    %   output.howpublished
+    %
+FUNCTION {output.howpublished}
+{ howpublished empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" *
+      output.dot.new.block
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%              URL FORMATTING FUNCTIONS                     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % begin and end of url environment
+    %
+FUNCTION {begin.end.url.env}
+{ " \begin{APACrefURL} "
+    % For "Retrieved <date>, from"
+  lastchecked empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "[{" * lastchecked * "}]" * }
+  if$
+  " \end{APACrefURL} "
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % begin and end of message environment
+    %
+FUNCTION {begin.end.msg.env}
+{ " \begin{APACrefURLmsg} "
+  " \end{APACrefURLmsg} "
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format url given that it is not empty,
+    % for various entry types
+    % call with
+    %   format.url
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{ % First format begin and end of the enclosing environment.
+  % With posted messages, a different environment is used.
+  type.2 empty$
+    { begin.end.url.env }
+    { type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+        { begin.end.msg.env }
+        { begin.end.url.env }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    % The url string.
+  "\url{" url * "}" *
+    % Enclose in begin and end environment
+  enclose.check
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%              NOTE FORMATTING FUNCTIONS                    %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format optional note
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{ "\APACrefnote{"  "}"  note  enclose.check }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format original year of publication and note
+    % (reprint or translation)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.year.note}
+{ originalyear empty$
+    { format.note }
+    { "\APACorigyearnote{"
+      originalyear    "" connect.check "}{" *
+      note            "" connect.check "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format original journal of publication and note
+    % (reprint or translation)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.journal.note}
+{ "\APACorigjournalnote{"
+  originalyear    "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaljournal "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalvolume  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalnumber  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpages   "" connect.check "}{" *
+  note            "" connect.check "}"  *
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format original book of publication and note
+    % (reprint or translation)
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.book.note}
+{ "\APACorigbooknote{" originalyear  ""  connect.check "}{" *
+    %
+  originaleditor empty$
+    'skip$
+    { originaleditor num.names$ #1 >
+        { "\APACorigEDS{" * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
+        { "\APACorigED{"  * originaleditor format.editor.names * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+  "}{" *
+  originalbooktitle format.btitle.no.dot "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaledition   format.edition.check "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalvolume    format.bvolume.check "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpages     format.bpages.check  "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originaladdress   "" connect.check "}{" *
+  originalpublisher "" connect.check "}{" *
+  note              "" connect.check "}"  *
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format information about original publication of reprint
+    % and format optional note
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.orig.note}
+{ originaljournal empty$
+    { originalbooktitle empty$
+        { note empty$
+            { originalyear empty$
+                'skip$
+                { originalyear "\bibnodate" =
+                    'skip$
+                    { output.new.block
+                      format.orig.year.note
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+            { output.new.block
+              format.orig.year.note
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { output.new.block
+          format.orig.book.note
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { output.new.block
+      format.orig.journal.note
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                     PERIODICALS                           %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % article in periodical: journal, magazine, newspaper, ...
+    %
+    % call with
+    %   formatted.pages  formatted.date   periodical
+    %
+FUNCTION {periodical}
+{   %
+    % author or editor, year, title, englishtitle, type
+    %
+  author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: possibly special issue with editors as authors
+        % (APA manual, ex. 11, p. 121)
+        %
+    { editor empty$
+            %
+            % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+            % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this,
+            % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and
+            % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title)
+            %
+        { format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block
+            %
+            % now formatted date on top of stack
+            %
+          output.dot.new.block
+        }
+            %
+            % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+            % format article title and check if title or type present
+            %
+        { format.editors.as.authors   start.new.block
+            %
+            % now formatted date on top of stack
+            %
+          output.dot.new.block
+          format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format article title and check if title or type present
+        %
+    { format.authors   start.new.block
+            %
+            % now formatted date on top of stack
+            %
+      output.dot.new.block
+      format.atitle.type.trans.check output.new.block
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % format journal name, volume and issue number, and pages
+    %   and check if journal not empty
+    %
+  format.journal.vol.num.pages.check
+    %
+    % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+    % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
+    %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % possible reprint and optional note
+    %
+  format.orig.note
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % journal article
+    %
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ pages  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % magazine article
+    %
+FUNCTION {magazine}
+{ pages  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % newspaper article
+    %
+FUNCTION {newspaper}
+{ pages  format.bpages.check  format.year.month.day.check  periodical }
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % (translation of) entire book
+    %
+FUNCTION {book}
+{     %
+      % author or editor,
+      % year, title, englishtitle, translator
+      %
+  author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: possibly edited book with editors as authors
+        %
+    { editor empty$
+            %
+            % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+            % title formatted as book title
+            %
+        { format.btitle.vol.edition.trans
+          format.type.number               connect.with.space.check
+          output.dot.new.block
+          format.year.check                add.period$
+        }
+            %
+            % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+            % format booktitle, volume, and edition and check if title present
+            %
+        { translator empty$
+            { format.editors.as.authors  start.new.block
+              format.year.check          output.dot.new.block
+              format.btitle.vol.edition
+            }
+                %
+                % format translator correctly
+                %
+            { translator editor =
+              not
+                { format.editors.as.authors        start.new.block
+                  format.year.check                output.dot.new.block
+                  format.btitle.vol.edition.trans
+                }
+                { format.ed.trans.as.authors  start.new.block
+                  format.year.check           output.dot.new.block
+                  format.btitle.vol.edition
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+          format.type.number     connect.with.space.check
+          add.period$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format booktitle, volume, and edition and check if title present
+        %
+    { format.authors                          start.new.block
+      format.year.check                       output.dot.new.block
+      format.btitle.vol.edition.editor.trans
+      format.type.number                      connect.with.space.check
+      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format address and publisher, check if address and publisher present
+      %
+  format.address.publisher.check
+      %
+      % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+      % (used if book is retrieved from the internet)
+      %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
+      % and optional note
+      %
+  format.orig.note
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % (translated) article or chapter in edited book
+    %
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: title serves as author.
+        % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this,
+        % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and
+        % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title)
+        %
+    { editor.ne.trans
+        { format.atitle.type.trans.check }
+        { format.atitle.type.check }
+      if$
+      output.new.block
+        %
+        % format month and day as well when available
+        % esp. for ``collections'' that are not books,
+        % such as parts of internet documents
+        %
+      format.year.month.day.check   add.period$
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format article title and check if title or type present
+        %
+    { format.authors                start.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check   output.dot.new.block
+      editor.ne.trans
+        { format.atitle.type.trans.check }
+        { format.atitle.type.check }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), "
+      % booktitle, volume, edition, pages
+      %
+  output.new.block
+  format.in.editors.trans
+  format.bvol.edition.pages
+  booktitle  format.btitle.connect * add.period$
+      %
+      % format address and publisher, check if publisher present
+      %
+  format.address.publisher.check
+      %
+      % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+      % (used if article is retrieved from the internet)
+      %
+  format.howpublished  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
+      % and optional note
+      %
+  format.orig.note
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                       REPORTS                             %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % technical report number
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ type empty$
+    { "\BTR{}" }
+    { type "\bibnotype" =
+        { ""   }
+        { type }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  number format.rnumber.check   connect.with.space.check
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title, volume, edition, report number
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.tr.title.number}
+{ format.betitle.check
+    % Single out the situation in which there is no number
+    % and type = {\bibnotype}, i.e., no type as well.
+    % (Why not use book then?)
+  type empty$
+    { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+      % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+      "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+      format.tr.number *  "}" *
+    }
+    { type "\bibnotype" =
+        number empty$
+          volume empty$
+            edition empty$
+            and
+          and
+        and
+        { "" }
+        { % Now, we're in the regular situation with at least a
+          % number, a type, a volume, or an edition.
+          "\APACbVolEdTR{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+          format.tr.number *  "}" *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  connect.with.space.check
+  title  format.btitle.connect
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % format address and institution of reports etc.
+    %
+    % Washington, DC: National Institute of Education
+    %      or
+    % National Institute of Education (if address empty)
+    %
+    % warning if no institution
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.address.institution.check}
+{ "institution" institution warning.if.empty
+  "address"     address     warning.if.empty
+  institution empty$
+  address     empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+        %
+        % If institution = author or institution = "author"
+        % or institution = "Author" then hand over the final choice how to
+        % format this to \LaTeX. See also format.address.publisher
+        %
+      author empty$
+      institution empty$ or
+        { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{" }
+        { author   institution =
+          "author" institution =  or
+          "Author" institution =  or
+            { author      "\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth{" }
+            { institution "\APACaddressInstitution{"       }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+      address "" connect.check  "}{" *
+        % Recover institution that was pushed onto the stack previously.
+      swap$   "" connect.check  "}"  *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % reports
+    %
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: possibly edited report with editors as authors
+        %
+    { editor empty$
+            %
+            % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+            % title formatted as book title
+            %
+        { format.tr.title.number      output.dot.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check add.period$
+        }
+            %
+            % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+            % format report title and check if title present
+            % format volume, edition, type, and number
+            %
+        { format.editors.as.authors   start.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+          format.tr.title.number      add.period$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format report title and check if title present
+        % format volume, edition, type, and number
+        %
+    { format.authors              start.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+      format.tr.title.number      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % format address and institution, check if institution present
+    %
+  format.address.institution.check
+    %
+    % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+    % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
+    %
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % format optional note
+    %
+  note empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % (translated) article or chapter in report
+    %
+FUNCTION {intechreport}
+{ author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: title serves as author.
+        % title formatted as article title (APA manual not consistent in this,
+        % compare statement on p. 119: ``treat as book title'' and
+        % example 8, p. 121: no underlining => article title)
+        %
+    { editor.ne.trans
+        { format.atitle.trans.check }
+        { format.atitle.check }
+      if$
+      output.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format article title and check if title or type present
+        %
+    { format.authors                start.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check   output.dot.new.block
+      editor.ne.trans
+        { format.atitle.trans.check }
+        { format.atitle.check }
+      if$
+      output.new.block
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format "In " editor " (Ed. \& Trans.), "
+      % booktitle, volume, edition, pages
+      %
+  format.in.editors.trans
+      %
+      % volume, edition, report type and number, pages
+      %
+  "\APACbVolEdTRpgs{" format.bvol.edition.check * "}{" *
+  format.tr.number *
+  "}{" * pages format.bpages.check *
+  "}" *
+      %
+  booktitle format.btitle.connect *
+  add.period$
+      %
+      % format address and publisher, check if publisher present
+      %
+  format.address.institution.check
+    %
+    % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+    % (used if report is retrieved from the internet)
+    %
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format original publication (of reprint/translation)
+      % and optional note
+      %
+  format.orig.note
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % papers presented at conferences etc.
+    %
+FUNCTION {lecture}
+{ author empty$
+    { "author" author warning.if.empty }
+    { format.authors  start.new.block  }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format year, month, and day, and check if year present
+      % format title and check if title present
+      % format howpublished and check if howpublished present
+      %
+  format.year.month.day.check output.dot.new.block
+  symposium empty$
+    { format.betitle.check
+      title  format.btitle.connect  output.new.block
+      howpublished empty$
+        { "symposium and howpublished missing in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * }
+      if$
+      address connect.with.comma.check
+    }
+    { format.atitle.type.check output.new.block
+      "\BIn{} "
+      chair empty$
+        'skip$
+        { chair  format.editor.names
+          chair num.names$ #1 >
+            { "(\BCHAIRS)" }
+            { "(\BCHAIR)" }
+          if$
+          connect.with.space.check * ", " *
+        }
+      if$
+      symposium format.btitle.no.dot *
+      format.howpublished
+      address connect.with.comma.check
+    }
+  if$
+  add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format optional note
+      %
+  note empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                        THESES                             %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % default thesis type is on top of stack
+    % now, if type field is empty, this default is used
+    % else default is removed and replaced by value of
+    % type field
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.type.school}
+{ type empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$
+      type "t" change.case$
+    }
+  if$
+  school connect.with.comma.check
+}
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % phd theses, etc.
+    % call with
+    %   "default.published.thesis" "default.unpublished.thesis" thesis
+    %
+FUNCTION {thesis}
+{ author empty$
+    { "author" author warning.if.empty }
+    { format.authors  start.new.block  }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format year and check if year present
+      %
+  format.year.check output.dot.new.block
+      %
+      % format title and check if title present
+      % journal empty => unpublished PhD thesis
+      % journal not empty => published (e.g., Dissertation Abstracts Int.)
+      %
+  journal empty$
+    { format.btitle.vol.edition output.dot.new.block
+        %
+        % pop default unpublished thesis, top is default published thesis
+        %
+      swap$ pop$
+      format.type.school
+      address   connect.with.comma.check
+    }
+        %
+        % pop default published thesis, top is default unpublished thesis
+        %
+    { pop$
+      type empty$
+        school empty$
+          originalyear empty$
+          and
+        and
+        { pop$
+          ""
+        }
+        { format.type.school
+          originalyear   connect.with.comma.check
+          parenthesize.check
+        }
+      if$
+      format.aetitle.check
+      swap$    connect.with.space.check
+      "title"  title warning.if.empty
+      title    format.atitle.connect   output.new.block
+      pages    format.journal.vol.num.pages.check
+    }
+  if$
+    %
+    % if not empty, insert howpublished.
+    % (used if thesis is retrieved from the internet)
+    %
+  format.howpublished add.period$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format optional note
+      %
+  note empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % phd theses, etc.
+    %
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ "\BPhD"  "\BUPhD"  thesis }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % master's theses, etc.
+    %
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ "\BMTh"  "\BUMTh"  thesis }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                        OTHER                              %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of something (used in unpublished and misc)
+    % english translation of title
+    % type and number of something
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.btitle.type.num}
+{ format.betitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
+  format.type.number
+  connect.with.space.check
+  title empty$
+    { add.period$ }
+    { title format.btitle.connect }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title of message or software-related thing (used in misc)
+    % english translation of title
+    % type and number of something
+    %
+FUNCTION {format.mtitle.type.num}
+{ format.aetitle.check
+  format.bvol.edition  connect.with.space.check
+  type.2 "\bibmessage" =
+    { number empty$
+        'skip$
+        { type.2 number tie.or.space.connect
+          bracket.check
+          connect.with.space.check
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { format.type.number
+      connect.with.space.check
+    }
+  if$
+  title empty$
+    { add.period$ }
+    { title format.atitle.connect }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % title, english translation of title,
+    % type and number of something (used in misc)
+    %
+FUNCTION {output.misctitle.type.num}
+{ type.2 empty$
+    { format.btitle.type.num }
+    { type.2 "\bibmessage"                    =
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogram"            =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogrammanual"      =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputerprogramandmanual"   =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftware"           =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual"     =  or
+      type.2 "\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual"  =  or
+      type.2 "\bibprogramminglanguage"        =  or
+        { format.mtitle.type.num }
+        { format.btitle.type.num }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % unpublished manuscripts, etc.
+    %
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ check.relevant.fields
+  author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: possibly edited book with editors as authors
+        %
+    { editor empty$
+            %
+            % no author or editor: title serves as author.
+            % title formatted as book title
+            %
+        { format.btitle.type.num       output.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
+        }
+            %
+            % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+            % format book title, volume, and edition and check if title present
+            %
+        { format.editors.as.authors    start.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check  output.dot.new.block
+          format.btitle.type.num
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format book title, volume, and edition
+        % and check if title or type present
+        %
+    { format.authors               start.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check  output.dot.new.block
+      format.btitle.type.num
+    }
+  if$
+  howpublished empty$
+  organization empty$ and
+  address      empty$ and
+    'skip$
+    { output.new.block
+      "\APAChowpublished{" "}" howpublished enclose.check
+      organization    connect.with.comma.check
+      address         connect.with.comma.check
+      add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format optional note
+      %
+  note empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % nonprint media and other things that don't fit
+    %
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{   %
+    % To handle @manual: use type.2 instead of type.
+  type.2 empty$
+  type   empty$ not and
+    { type 'type.2 := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+    %
+  author empty$
+        %
+        % no author: possibly edited item with editors as authors
+        %
+    { editor empty$
+            %
+            % no author or editor: title/type serves as author.
+            % title formatted as book title
+            %
+            % if no title and no type, howpublished is title
+            %
+        { title  empty$
+          type.2 empty$ and
+            { howpublished empty$
+                { "No author, editor, title, type, and howpublished in "
+                  cite$ * warning$
+                  ""
+                }
+                { "\APAChowpublished{" howpublished * "}" * add.period$ }
+              if$
+              format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
+            }
+            { output.misctitle.type.num    output.new.block
+              format.year.month.day.check  add.period$
+              format.howpublished          add.period$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+            %
+            % format editor and year, and check if year is present
+            % format book title, volume, and edition and check if title present
+            %
+        { format.editors.as.authors        start.new.block
+          format.year.month.day.check      output.dot.new.block
+          output.misctitle.type.num
+          format.howpublished              add.period$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+        %
+        % format author and year, and check if year is present
+        % format book title, volume, and edition
+        % and check if title or type present
+        %
+    { format.authors                   start.new.block
+      format.year.month.day.check      output.dot.new.block
+      output.misctitle.type.num
+      format.howpublished              add.period$
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+  address   empty$
+  publisher empty$ and
+      'skip$
+      { % Clear the stack
+        duplicate$ empty$
+          'skip$
+          { output.new.block }
+        if$
+        format.address.publisher add.period$
+      }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format url
+      %
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.url
+    }
+  if$
+      %
+      % format optional note
+      %
+  note empty$
+    'skip$
+    { % Clear the stack
+      duplicate$ empty$
+        'skip$
+        { output.new.block }
+      if$
+      format.note
+    }
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % for legal cases and other cases that need to be
+    % done by hand
+    %
+FUNCTION {literal}
+{ "key"  key  warning.if.empty
+  "text" text warning.if.empty
+  text empty$
+    { "" }
+    { text }
+  if$
+  fin.entry
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % technical documentation
+    %
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ %
+  % If type is empty, assume that it is a computer software manual.
+  %
+  type empty$
+    { "\bibcomputersoftwaremanual"  'type.2 := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  misc
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % following functions not used for APA Manual examples
+    %
+
+
+
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % booklet
+    %
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ misc }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % part of a book
+    %
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ incollection }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % article in proceedings
+    %
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ incollection }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % article in proceedings (Kopka & Daly, 2004, p. 230)
+    %
+FUNCTION {conference}
+{ inproceedings }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % proceedings
+    %
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ misc }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    %
+    % unknown types
+    %
+FUNCTION {default.type}
+{ misc }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  INITIALIZATION FUNCTIONS                                 %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+FUNCTION {initialize}
+{   %
+    % Maximum number of names to be formatted .
+  #6  'name.max :=
+%  #250  'entry.max$ :=
+%  #5000  'global.max$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.old.number}
+{   %
+    % For numbering the entries according to current sorting order.
+  #0  'old.number :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.old.label}
+{   %
+    % For comparing labels across entries .
+  "zzzzzz"   'old.label  :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.cite.initials.add.to.year}
+{   %
+    % Initialize "cite initials" indicator for all entries.
+  #0  'cite.initials :=
+    %
+    % Initialize "add to year", i.e., whether a, b, etc. must
+    % be added to the year in citation, to "no".
+  #0  'add.to.year :=
+    %
+}
+
+FUNCTION {move.forward}
+{   %
+    % Indicates that we're moving forward (ITERATE) through the entry list .
+  #1 'forward :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {move.backward}
+{   %
+    % Indicates that we're moving backward (REVERSE) through the entry list .
+  #0 'forward :=
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  BASIC BIBLIOGRAPHY OUTPUT FUNCTIONS                      %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Beginning of the thebibliography environment:
+% Write preamble if there is one, write \begin command
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{ preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+  "\begin{thebibliography}{}"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Write \end{thebibliography} command
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+  "\end{thebibliography}"  write$ newline$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Write the citation labels and reference list entry to
+% the .bbl file.
+
+FUNCTION {write.bbl.entry}
+{   %
+    % Output \bibitem and \citeauthoryear command.
+    %
+  make.cite.labels
+    %
+    % Format and output reference list entry.
+    %
+  call.type$
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  READ AND PROCESS ENTRIES, MAKE THEBIBLIOGRAPHY           %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Read entries .
+
+READ
+
+% Write version info to .blg file
+
+EXECUTE { identify.apacite.version }
+
+% Some initializations .
+
+EXECUTE { initialize }
+
+% Sort items by title in order to replace each title by
+% its number in later sorting .
+
+ITERATE { make.sort.title }
+
+SORT
+
+EXECUTE { init.old.number }
+
+EXECUTE { init.old.label }
+
+ITERATE { make.title.number }
+
+% Now generate some tentative author-year labels and do some
+% preprocessing for the later definitive author and year
+% labels.
+
+ITERATE { make.tentative.sort.label }
+
+SORT
+
+% Now check whether initials must be added to first author,
+% how many authors must be formatted, whether an "a", "b",
+% etc., must be added to the year label.
+
+ITERATE { init.cite.initials.add.to.year }
+
+EXECUTE { init.initials }
+
+ITERATE { check.add.initials }
+
+EXECUTE { init.initials }
+
+REVERSE { check.add.initials }
+
+ITERATE { tentative.cite.num.names }
+
+EXECUTE { init.cite.num.names }
+
+EXECUTE { move.forward }
+
+ITERATE { definitive.cite.num.names }
+
+EXECUTE { init.cite.num.names }
+
+EXECUTE { move.backward }
+
+REVERSE { definitive.cite.num.names }
+
+
+% Make final sorting label and do definitive sorting .
+
+ITERATE { make.final.sort.key }
+
+SORT
+
+% Write preamble and \begin{thebibliography}{} statement
+
+EXECUTE { begin.bib }
+
+% Make final cite labels, format reference list entry,
+% and write to .bbl file.
+
+ITERATE { write.bbl.entry }
+
+
+% Write \end{thebibliography} statement
+
+EXECUTE { end.bib }
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  DONE                                                     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%</bibstyle|xbibstyle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eb16002b110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%%
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\declarepreamble\drvpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+elsewhere in this file.
+
+This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+-------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+the generated files.
+
+You are allowed to make changes to this file, in order to generate
+the user's manual with your preferred settings (e.g., to choose
+whether or not to include the documented source code). Please
+do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\edef\noendinputpostamble{%
+  \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+  \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.%
+}
+
+\askonceonly
+\generate{%
+  \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+  \file{apacite.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{package}}
+  \file{apacdoc.sty}{\from{apacite.dtx}{docpkg}}
+  \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}}
+  \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}}
+  \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}}
+  \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}}
+  \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}}
+  \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}}
+  \file{norsk.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{norsk}}
+  \file{spanish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{spanish}}
+  \file{swedish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{swedish}}
+  \usepreamble\drvpreamble
+  \file{apacite.drv}{\from{apacite.dtx}{driver}}
+  \usepreamble\mainpreamble
+  \usepostamble\noendinputpostamble
+  \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}}
+  \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}}
+  \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}}
+}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the   *}
+\Msg{* following files into a directory searched by TeX: *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*     All *.apc, *.sty                              *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* and to move the following files into a directory  *}
+\Msg{* searched by BibTeX:                               *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*     All *.bib, *.bst                              *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation, run the following   *}
+\Msg{* script (or something similar, depending on your   *}
+\Msg{* operating system):                                *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  bibtex   apacite                                 *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  makeindex -o apacite.and apacite.adx             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*  pdflatex apacite.drv                             *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* See the README file for a brief explanation and   *}
+\Msg{* the file apacite.drv for how to customize the     *}
+\Msg{* manual (e.g., to include the documented source    *}
+\Msg{* code.                                             *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!                                     *}
+\Msg{*                                                   *}
+\Msg{*****************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacdoc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacdoc.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..95b16aedbbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacdoc.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,594 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apacdoc.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `docpkg')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{apacdoc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation style]
+
+%%
+%% apacdoc.sty : Style package that is used for the apacite documentation.
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+
+\newif\if@APACdoc@AX
+\DeclareOption{makeAX}{\@APACdoc@AXtrue}%
+\@APACdoc@AXfalse
+\ProcessOptions
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS THAT MAY BE USEFUL FOR WIDER USE.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}}
+%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{#1}
+%%\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral{#1}}
+%% This is the result of lots of trial and error. If I change something
+%% in another part, I typically have to change something here as well.
+%% The \space is necessary because in the current setup, an additional
+%% space is inserted in the bibliography, and MakeIndex is space-sensitive.
+\newcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\string\bibliteral\space{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibinitial}[1]{\string#1}
+
+\newcommand{\bibnodot}[1]{}
+
+\newcommand{\BOn}{On}
+
+\newcommand{\SwapArgs}[2]{#2#1}
+
+\newcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{#2}
+
+\newcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{#2}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{\relax }%
+\def\renewbibeditortype{%
+  \def\oldBED{}%
+  \def\oldBEDS{}%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{%
+    \global\let\oldBED\BED
+    \global\let\oldBEDS\BEDS
+    \global\def\BED{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED  \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
+    \global\def\BEDS{##1\global\let\BED\oldBED \global\let\BEDS\oldBEDS}%
+  }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\bibInstring}[1]{%
+  \global\let\oldBIn\BIn
+  \global\def\BIn{#1\global\let\BIn\oldBIn}%
+}
+
+\global\def\BAbstractRetrieved#1{Abstract retrieved {#1}, from\ }%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BmakeAbstractRetrieved}{%
+  \global\def\oldBRetrieved{}%
+  \global\let\oldBRetrieved\BRetrieved
+  \global\def\BRetrieved##1{%
+     \BAbstractRetrieved{##1}%
+     \global\let\BRetrieved\oldBRetrieved%
+  }%
+}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\noedition}{%
+  \global\def\oldBEd{}%
+  \global\let\oldBEd\BEd
+  \global\def\BEd{%
+     \unskip
+     \global\let\BEd\oldBEd
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\swallownext#1{\relax}
+\def\swallowdot{%
+    \@ifnextchar.%
+      {\swallownext}%
+      {\relax}%
+}
+
+\def\bibskipbracenodot{\noexpand\bibskipbracenodot}
+\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}
+
+\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeBib}{%
+    % Redefine commands that should be different in the bibliography.
+    \renewcommand{\bibreftext}[2]{##1}%
+    \renewcommand{\Dutchvon}[2]{##1}%
+    \renewbibeditortype
+    \global\let\oldbibskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot
+    \global\def\bibskipbracenodot{\aftergroup\swallowdot}%
+    \global\let\oldbibliteral\bibliteral
+    \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{##1}%
+    \global\let\oldbibinitial\bibinitial
+    \renewcommand{\bibinitial}[1]{##1}%
+}
+
+\def\APACbibstyle{%
+  \if@APAC@index
+    apacitex% with index option
+  \else
+    apacite% without index option
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newcommand{\APACmanBeforeIndex}{%
+    \clearpage
+    % Redefine commands that should be different in the author index.
+    \renewcommand{\bibeditortype}[1]{}%
+    \renewcommand{\bibliteral}[1]{\unskip}%
+    \global\let\indexskipbracenodot\bibskipbracenodot
+}
+
+\newcommand{\APACmanAfterIndex}{%
+    % Revert to old definitions of commands.
+    \global\let\bibskipbracenodot\oldbibskipbracenodot
+    \global\def\indexskipbracenodot{\noexpand\indexskipbracenodot}%
+    \APACdocindex
+}
+
+
+\@ifundefined{IndexPrologue}{}{%
+  \IndexPrologue{\clearpage\section*{{Code Index}}%
+                 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Code Index}%
+                 \markboth{{Code Index}}{{Code Index}}%
+                 Numbers written in italic refer to the page
+                 where the corresponding entry is described;
+                 numbers underlined refer to the
+                 \ifcodeline@index
+                   code line of the
+                 \fi
+                 definition; numbers in roman refer to the
+                 \ifcodeline@index
+                   code lines
+                 \else
+                   pages
+                 \fi
+                 where the entry is used.
+                }%
+}
+\@ifundefined{GlossaryPrologue}{}{%
+  \GlossaryPrologue{\section{{Change History}}%
+                    \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}%
+                   }%
+}
+
+\def\APACdocindex{%
+    \ifhave@multicol
+      \renewenvironment{theindex}
+        {\begin{multicols}\c@IndexColumns[\index@prologue][\IndexMin]%
+          \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
+        {\end{multicols}}
+    \else
+      \typeout{Can't find multicol.sty -- will use normal index layout if
+         necessary.}
+      \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+        \columnseprule \z@  \columnsep 35\p@
+        \twocolumn[\index@prologue]%
+        \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+      \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+    \fi
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% CITATIONS TO THE BIBLE
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%% To define which Bible version you used.
+\def\bibleversion#1{\gdef\@bibleversion{#1}}
+\def\@bibleversion{Revised Standard Version}
+
+\def\bibleciteA#1{%
+   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
+   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+      {\fullbibleciteA{#1}}%
+      {\shortbibleciteA{#1}}%
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\fullbibleciteA#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   { \BBOP\@bibleversion\BBCP}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited.
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\shortbibleciteA#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\biblecite#1{%
+   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
+   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+      {\fullbiblecite{#1}}%
+      {\shortbiblecite{#1}}%
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\fullbiblecite#1{%
+   % Open parenthesis.
+   {\BBOP}%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Add bible version.
+   {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
+   % Close parenthesis.
+   {\BBCP}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited.
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\shortbiblecite#1{%
+   % Open parenthesis.
+   {\BBOP}%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Close parenthesis.
+   {\BBCP}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\bibleciteNP#1{%
+   % If this is the first citation, add bible version.
+   {\@ifundefined{flag@bible}%
+      {\fullbibleciteNP{#1}}%
+      {\shortbibleciteNP{#1}}%
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\fullbibleciteNP#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Add bible version.
+   {\BBAY{} \@bibleversion}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited.
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+\def\shortbibleciteNP#1{%
+   % Insert relevant chapter and verse.
+   {#1}%
+   % Flag that bible has been cited (is this appropriate?).
+   {\global\expandafter\def\csname flag@bible\endcsname{DUMMY}}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% COMMANDS TO CITE SONGS.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newcommand{\bibsong}[4]{}
+
+\newcommand{\citeAsong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fullciteAsong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\shortciteAsong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3} {\BBOP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\citesong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fullcitesong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\shortcitesong}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    {\BBOP}\APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}{\BBCP}%
+  }%
+  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\citesongNP}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+  }%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\fullcitesongNP}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+  }%
+  \fullciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\shortcitesongNP}[1]{%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{%
+    \APACciteatitle{##3},{\BAP}{##1}{\BBAY}{##2}{\BBN}{##4}%
+  }%
+  \shortciteauthor{#1}%
+  \def\bibsong##1##2##3##4{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% COMMANDS TO CITE DSM.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bibDSM}[4]{#1}
+\def\origbibDSM{}
+\let\origbibDSM\bibDSM
+
+\newcommand{\DSMauthor}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##1}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfulltitle}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##2}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshorttitle}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##4}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMedition}[1]{%
+  \def\bibDSM##1##2##3##4{##3}%
+  \citeauthor{#1}%
+  \let\bibDSM\origbibDSM
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{%
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+        % Removes a possible space before the citation key
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % Is this the first citation?
+      \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\DSMfullciteA{#1}}%
+         {\DSMshortciteA{#1}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{%
+  % \emph{Full Title} (edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}}
+  \BBOP
+  \DSMedition{#1};
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+  \citeNP{#1}%
+  \BBCP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{%
+  % \emph{Short Title}
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{%
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+        % Removes a possible space before the citation key
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % Is this the first citation?
+      \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\DSMfullcite{#1}}%
+         {\DSMshortcite{#1}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+  \BBOP
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}},
+  \DSMedition{#1};
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+  \citeNP{#1}%
+  \BBCP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Short Title})
+  \BBOP\APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}\BBCP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{%
+    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+        % Removes a possible space before the citation key
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % Is this the first citation?
+      \@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\DSMfullciteNP{#1}}%
+         {\DSMshortciteNP{#1}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Full Title}, edition; \emph{Short Title}; author, year)
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMfulltitle{#1}},
+  \DSMedition{#1};
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}};
+  \citeNP{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{%
+  % (\emph{Short Title})
+  \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\@ifundefined{BibTeX}{%
+  \def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
+      T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}% copied from bibtex.web
+}{}
+\newcommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}}
+\newcommand{\latextohtml}{\textup{\LaTeX2\texttt{HTML}}}% from html.sty
+\newcommand{\LaTeXrtf}{\textup{\LaTeX2RTF}}%
+\newcommand{\TeXht}{\textup{\TeX4ht}}%
+\newcommand{\Perl}{\textsl{Perl}}%
+
+\newcommand{\EM}{\ensuremath{\triangleright\quad}}
+
+\newcommand{\APACversiondate}[1]{\relax [#1]}
+
+\newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion
+\newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table
+\newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table
+
+\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name
+\newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name
+\newcommand{\fieldname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% field name
+\newcommand{\entryname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% entry type name
+\newcommand{\pkgoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% package option
+\newcommand{\envirname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% environment name
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{cmd}{%
+    \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}% command, incl. `\'
+  }{}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\bs}{{\ttfamily \@backslashchar}}% backslash
+\newcommand{\opt}[1]{$\langle${\itshape #1}$\rangle$}% generic text
+
+\newcommand{\cmdtwo}[2]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1\{}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+\newcommand{\cmdthree}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{]\{}\opt{#3}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+\newcommand{\cmdthreepre}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{>\{}\opt{#3}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+\newcommand{\cmdthreealt}[3]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1[}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{]\{#3\}}}}%
+\newcommand{\cmdfour}[4]{{\mdseries\bs\texttt{#1<}\opt{#2}%
+                        \texttt{>[}\opt{#3}%
+                        \texttt{]\{}\opt{#4}%
+                        \texttt{\}}}}%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{flqq}{%
+    \newcommand{\flqq}{%
+      {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{19}}}%
+    \newcommand{\frqq}{%
+      {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{20}}}%
+  }{}%
+}%
+\newcommand{\simpleguillemots}{%
+  \renewcommand{\flqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{<\!\!<}}}}}%
+  \renewcommand{\frqq}{\raisebox{2.5pt}{\tiny{\ensuremath{\mathord{>\!\!>}}}}}%
+}%
+
+\newcommand{\APACdocPageLayout}{%
+    \normalsize
+    \let\oldhoffset\hoffset
+    \let\oldvoffset\voffset
+    \let\oldoddsidemargin\oddsidemargin
+    \let\oldevensidemargin\evensidemargin
+    \let\oldtopmargin\topmargin
+    \let\oldheadheight\headheight
+    \let\oldheadsep\headsep
+    \let\oldtextheight\textheight
+    \let\oldfootskip\footskip
+    \let\oldtextwidth\textwidth
+    \let\oldlinewidth\linewidth
+    \let\oldmarginparsep\marginparsep
+    \let\oldmarginparwidth\marginparwidth
+    \let\oldmarginparpush\marginparpush
+    \setlength{\hoffset}{-1in} % top-left reference point is
+    \setlength{\voffset}{-1in} % the top-left corner of the page
+    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.3in}
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{1.3in}
+    \setlength{\topmargin}{1.35in}
+    %\setlength{\headheight}{\baselineskip}
+    \setlength{\headheight}{0.12in}
+    \setlength{\headsep}{0.24in}
+    \setlength{\textheight}{7.9in}
+    \setlength{\footskip}{30pt}
+    \setlength{\textwidth}{5.9in}
+    \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth}
+    \setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt}
+    \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0pt}
+    \setlength{\marginparpush}{0pt}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\APACcodePageLayout}{%
+    \let\hoffset\oldhoffset
+    \let\oddsidemargin\oldoddsidemargin
+    \let\evensidemargin\oldevensidemargin
+    \let\textwidth\oldtextwidth
+    \let\linewidth\oldlinewidth
+    \let\marginparsep\oldmarginparsep
+    \let\marginparwidth\oldmarginparwidth
+    \let\marginparpush\oldmarginparpush
+}
+
+\APACdocPageLayout
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `apacdoc.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty
index 8a0cb810d61..3944dfd5454 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/apacite.sty
@@ -1,128 +1,100 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `apacite.sty'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
+%%
+%% This is file `apacite.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `package')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{apacite}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA citation]
 
+%%
 %% apacite.sty : citation and reference list according to APA manual
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
 %%
 %% Contains code adapted from
 %%   index.sty [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)],
 %%   hyperref.dtx [6.71, 2000/10/04],
 %%   babel.def [2001/03/01, v3.7h],
 %%   backref.dtx [1.20, 2002/06/09],
-%% and code (used with permission) provided by others:
-%%   Ross Moore, Stefan Bj\"ork.
-
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1998/06/01] % Should this be a later one?
-\ProvidesPackage{apacite}[2005/06/08 APA citation]
-
-
+%%   ltbibl.dtx [2004/02/15 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)],
+%%   bibtopic.dtx [2002/08/22 v1.0k],
+%%   multibib.dtx [2004/01/28 v1.3 Multiple bibliographies for one document.],
+%%   multibbl.dtx [2004/07/27 v1.1],
+%%   amsrefs.dtx [2004/06/30 v2.0]
+%%   ltidxglo.dtx [1996/01/20 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Index and Glossary)]
+%%   doc.dtx [2004/02/09 v2.1b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)]
+%% and code (used with permission) provided by:
+%%   Stefan Bj\"ork.
+%%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%% Default. The ``old'' version
 %%%   \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}
 %%% cannot exist jointly with this, so has to be moved to an option.
 \def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3}
 
-\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with previous versions
+\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with old versions
    \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}%
 }
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
-%%% Accent fix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\DeclareOption{accentfix}{%
-  %
-  % A cedilla accent (\c{c}) in an author name used to lead
-  % to errors, only due to the checking whether subsequent authors
-  % in the same citation are equivalent. The same problem is
-  % anticipated with the \b{...} accent and the \d{...} accent
-  % and the \copyright symbol (will the latter turn up in an
-  % author name?), due to the same use of \crcr, cf. The TeXbook, p. 356.
-  %
-  % This fix therefore redefines these to sensible alternatives,
-  % only for comparison of authors, not for any real formatting.
-  % Therefore, the user should not notice this, apart from the
-  % lack of errors, of course. Therefore, it is also a default
-  % option. However, because I haven't tested this thoroughly, I give
-  % the user the option to turn it off (noaccentfix). The user
-  % is then responsible for fixing any error messages generated
-  % by such characters.
-  %
-  \def\b@APAC#1{#1\_}%              bar-under accent
-  \def\c@APAC#1{\accent'30 #1}%     cedilla accent
-  \def\d@APAC#1{#1.}%               dot-under accent
-  \def\copyright@APAC#1{copyright}% copyright symbol
-  \def\@pre@accentfix{%
-    %
-    % store original definitions
-    \let\old@b@APAC\b
-    \let\old@c@APAC\c
-    \let\old@d@APAC\d
-    \let\old@copyright@APAC\copyright
-    %
-    % redefine them
-    \let\b\b@APAC
-    \let\c\c@APAC
-    \let\d\d@APAC
-    \let\copyright\copyright@APAC
-  }%
-  \def\@post@accentfix{%
-    %
-    % restore original definitions
-    \let\b\old@b@APAC
-    \let\c\old@c@APAC
-    \let\d\old@d@APAC
-    \let\copyright\old@copyright@APAC
-  }%
-}
-
-\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{%
-  %
-  % See accentfix above for description.
-  %
-  \let\@pre@accentfix\relax%
-  \let\@post@accentfix\relax%
-}
-%%% End Accent fix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-
 %%%%%% No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% The \if is necessary because packages can not be required here, so
-% we must handle the consequences of the index and noindex options
-% later.
-%
 \newif\if@APAC@index
 \DeclareOption{noindex}{\@APAC@indexfalse}%
-%
 %%%%%% End No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%% Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
 \DeclareOption{index}{\@APAC@indextrue}%
-%
 %%%%%% End Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%% Include Corporate Authors in index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newif\if@APAC@include@corporate
+\DeclareOption{includecorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatetrue}%
+\DeclareOption{suppresscorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatefalse}%
+%%%%%% End Corporate Author options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%% Use index package or standard LaTeX index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newif\if@APAC@index@package
+\DeclareOption{indexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagetrue}%
+\DeclareOption{noindexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagefalse}%
+%%%%%% End index package options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
 %%%%%% Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%
 %% Standard index: from the index package
@@ -134,6 +106,10 @@
   %% i.e., without table of contents entry.
   %%
   \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option requires the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}%
+  %%
   \AtEndOfPackage{%
     \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
        \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
@@ -198,13 +174,16 @@
     }%
   }%
 }%
-%
 \DeclareOption{tocindex}{%
   %%
   %% Index style as with the stdindex option, but with an
   %% added table of contents entry.
   %%
   \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option requires the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}%
+  %%
   \AtEndOfPackage{%
     \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
        \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
@@ -277,12 +256,15 @@
     }%
   }%
 }
-%
 \DeclareOption{emindex}{%
   %%
   %% My (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too.
   %%
   \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option requires the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}%
+  %%
   \AtEndOfPackage{%
     %%
     %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section
@@ -312,11 +294,54 @@
       }%
   }%
 }%
+\DeclareOption{ltxemindex}{%
+  %%
+  %% Variation on emindex, without the `index' package
+  %%
+  \ExecuteOptions{index}%
+  %%
+  %% This option drops the index package
+  \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}%
+  %%
+  \AtEndOfPackage{%
+    %%
+    %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section
+    %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents
+    %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment.
+    %%
+    \RequirePackage{multicol}
+    \renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+        % The index naming scheme of the `index' package is also absent,
+        % therefore try to guess an index name.
+        \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{%
+          \@ifundefined{indexname}{%
+            \edef\@indexname{Index}%
+          }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}%
+        }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}%
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+          {\section*{\@indexname}%
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}%
+          }%
+          {\chapter*{\@indexname}%
+           \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}%
+          }%
+        \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this?
+        \def\pfill{\relax{}}%
+        \parindent\z@
+        \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+        \let\item\@idxitem
+        \setlength{\columnsep}{2em}
+        \small
+        \begin{multicols}{2}
+        \raggedright
+      }%
+      {\end{multicols}\normalsize
+      }%
+  }%
+}
 %%%%%% End Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%% Some options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
 \newif\if@numberedbib
 \DeclareOption{numberedbib}{%
   %
@@ -394,120 +419,158 @@
   \let\@bibnewpage\relax
 }
 
-
 %%%%%% End options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-%%%%%% Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% (This does not work completely satisfactory, so
-% is only a non-default option.)
-%
-\newif\if@hyper@APA@comp
+%%%%%% Obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 \DeclareOption{hyper}{%
-  \@hyper@APA@comptrue % hyperref compatibility option is on
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `hyper' ignored}%
 }
-%%%%%% End Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-%%%%%% No Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% If the hyperref compatibility code is not desired.
-%
 \DeclareOption{nohyper}{%
-  \@hyper@APA@compfalse % hyperref compatibility option is off
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `nohyper' ignored}%
 }
-%%%%%% End No Hyperref compatibility option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%% End obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%% Obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DeclareOption{accentfix}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `accentfix' ignored}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `noaccentfix' ignored}%
+}
+%%%%%% End obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%%%%% Execute default options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-\ExecuteOptions{accentfix,noindex,nohyper,unnumberedbib,tocbib,%
-                nobibnewpage}
+\ExecuteOptions{noindex,indexpackage,unnumberedbib,tocbib,%
+                nobibnewpage,suppresscorporate}
 
 %%%%%% Execute user-requested options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
 \ProcessOptions
 
 %%%%%% Define author indexing stuff when requested
-%
 \newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}
 \if@APAC@index
-   %
-   % Author index requested.
-   % Load \pkg{index} package.
-   %
-   \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28]
-   %
-   % Define Author Index.
-   % This may be changed in the preamble of the
-   % document (or in a user-provided package)
-   % by a \renewindex command.
-   %
-   \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname}
-   %
-   % Author indexing command
-   %
-   \def\AX#1{%
-     \write\@auxout%
-       {\string\@writefile{autx}{%
-        \string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}}%
-%        \expandafter\string\expandafter\indexentry{#1}{\thepage}}}%
-   }
-   %
+    %
+    % Author index requested.
+    %
+    \if@APAC@index@package
+        %
+        % Load \pkg{index} package.
+        \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28]
+        %
+        % Define Author Index.
+        % This may be changed in the preamble of the
+        % document (or in a user-provided package)
+        % by a \renewindex command.
+        %
+        \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname}
+        %
+        % Author indexing command
+        %
+        \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{%
+          \if@filesw{%
+            \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+              \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{%
+              \string\string\string
+              \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}%
+          }%
+          \fi
+        }%
+    \else
+        %
+        % Without \pkg{index} package (experimental).
+        % A bit of code adapted from ltidxglo.dtx
+        \newwrite\@AXfile
+        \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx
+        \typeout
+            {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }%
+        %
+        \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{%
+            \protected@write\@AXfile{}%
+                {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % Some code adapted from doc.dtx
+        \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}%
+             \@input@{\jobname.and}%
+             \global\let\PrintAX\@empty
+        }%
+        %
+        % Do some hacking to make sure both \printindex and \printindex[autx] are defined
+        % As yet untested.
+        \AtBeginDocument{%
+          % Make sure \printindex is defined.
+          \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}%
+          % Now, redefine \printindex to accommodate both \printindex and \printindex[autx]
+          \let\orig@printindex\printindex
+          \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{%
+                                        \orig@printindex}}%
+          %
+          \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}%
+        }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Index corporate authors?
+    \if@APAC@include@corporate
+        % Include corporate authors in index.
+      \let\corporateAX\AX
+    \else
+        % Swallow argument (do not index).
+      \let\corporateAX\@gobble
+    \fi
+    %
 \else
-   %
-   % No author index.
-   %
-   % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another
-   % package is loaded that defines \printindex.
-   %
-   \AtBeginDocument{%
-     \@ifundefined{printindex}%
-       {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it
-         % suppresses the indexes.
-         \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{%
-                                       \check@printindex[]}}%
-         %
-         \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }%
-       }%
-       {% \printindex defined, so save its definition.
-         \let\orig@printindex\printindex
-         %
-         % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index
-         % but does not change other indexes.
-         % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original
-         %    definition.
-         \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}%
-         %
-         % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is
-         %    equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index.
-         %    If not, use the original definition.
-         \def\check@printindex[#1]{%
-           % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx
-           % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work.
-           \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}%
-           \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}%
-             {\orig@printindex[#1]}%
-             {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}%
-         }%
-       }%
-   }%
-   %
-   % Empty author indexing command
-   %
-   \def\AX#1{}
-   %
+    %
+    % No author index.
+    %
+    % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another
+    % package is loaded that defines \printindex.
+    %
+    \AtBeginDocument{%
+      \@ifundefined{printindex}%
+        {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it
+          % suppresses the indexes.
+          \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{%
+                                        \check@printindex[]}}%
+          %
+          \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }%
+        }%
+        {% \printindex defined, so save its definition.
+          \let\orig@printindex\printindex
+          %
+          % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index
+          % but does not change other indexes.
+          % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original
+          %    definition.
+          \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}%
+          %
+          % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is
+          %    equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index.
+          %    If not, use the original definition.
+          \def\check@printindex[#1]{%
+            % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx
+            % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work.
+            \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+            \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}%
+              {\orig@printindex[#1]}%
+              {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}%
+          }%
+        }%
+    }%
+    %
+    % Empty author indexing commands
+    %
+    \let\AX\@gobble
+    \let\corporateAX\@gobble
+    %
 \fi
 
-
 %%%%%% Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% From the instructions of the chapterbib package.
 
 \@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{}
 \gdef\@extra@binfo{}
 
 %%%%%% End Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
 %%% These are recognized by apacite.bst.
@@ -521,25 +584,23 @@
 \newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Command for corporate authors.
+%%% This is recognized by apacite.bst.
+\let\bibcorporate\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%% The following commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
 %%% They denote that the publication date is unknown,
 %%% and that the type should be left empty (for @techreport, where
 %%% ``Tech. Rep.'' is the default type if the field is left empty).
-\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.{}}
+\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}
 \newcommand{\bibnotype}{}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% cite punctuations %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-% text style of authors in-text citation
-%      (\cite,   \shortcite,   \fullcite,
-%       \citeA,  \shortciteA,  \fullciteA,
-%       \citeNP, \shortciteNP, \fullciteNP)
 \newcommand{\BAstyle}{}%
 
-% text style of authors in-text citation
-%      (\citeauthor, \shortciteauthor, \fullciteauthor)
 \newcommand{\BAastyle}{}%
 
 \newcommand{\BBOP}{(}   % open parenthesis
@@ -553,14 +614,13 @@
 \newcommand{\BBN}{, }   % before note
 \newcommand{\BBOQ}{}    % open quote for article title
 \newcommand{\BBCQ}{}    % closing quote for article title
-%
 \newcommand{\BCBT}{,}   % comma between authors in ref. sec
                         % when no. of authors = 2
 \newcommand{\BCBL}{,}   % comma before last author
 \newcommand{\BAnd}{\&}  % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list
-%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials
 \newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA}
-%
 \let\Bem\emph
 
 \newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}%  Format as article title in text
@@ -571,97 +631,60 @@
                                 % the argument of this command, but the
                                 % argument is never displayed.
 
-% Two commands that are used to trick natbib.
 \newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}%
 \newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}%
 
-%
-% For multiple citations with same author-year.
-% (Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b)
-% The \protect is necessary when natbib is used.
-%
 \newcounter{BibCnt}
 \renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}}
 \newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\protect\theBibCnt}
-%
-% In press, no date.
-% The \mbox prevents a line break at the hyphen.
-%
 \newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}}
 \newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Labels, mostly for reference list %
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}}    % ``others'', the argument contains a
-                                      % dot to suppress an additional one
-                                      % in the reference list
-\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a
-                                      % dot to suppress an additional one
-                                      % in the reference list. The difference
-                                      % with \BOthers is that, if another
-                                      % string is used to define \BOthers,
-                                      % this one should always finish with a
-                                      % period and the previous one not
-                                      % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
-                                      % ``others'' is used).
+\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}
+\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}
 \newcommand{\BIP}{in press}           % used as year for in-press citations
 \newcommand{\BIn}{In}                 % for ``In '' editor...
-\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.{}}          % chapter
-\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.{}}         % chapters
-\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.{}}              % editor
-\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.{}}            % editors
-\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.{}}        % translator
-\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.{}}       % translators
-\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.{}}       % translation, for the year field
+\newcommand{\Bby}{by}                 % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}     % chapter
+\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}    % chapters
+\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}         % editor
+\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}       % editors
+\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}   % translator
+\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}  % translators
+\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}  % translation, for the year field
 \newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}           % chair of symposium
 \newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}         % chairs
-\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.{}}            % volume
-\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.{}}          % volumes
-\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.{}}             % number
-\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.{}}           % numbers
-\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.{}}              % edition
-\newcommand{\BPG}{p.{}}               % page
-\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.{}}             % pages
-\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.{}}      % (default) technical report type name
-\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}
-                                      % (default) PhD thesis type name
+\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}       % volume
+\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}     % volumes
+\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}        % number
+\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}      % numbers
+\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}         % edition
+\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}          % page
+\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}        % pages
+\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name
+\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name
 \newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}
-                                      % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
-                                      % type name
 \newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}   % (default) master's thesis type name
-\newcommand{\BUMTh}%
-    {Unpublished master's thesis}     % (default) unpublished
-                                      % master's thesis type name
+\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}
+\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}         % Used if publisher = author
 \newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}
 \newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}
-
+\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }%          Websites; note the space.
+\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space.
+\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }%     Messages; note the space.
 \def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
 \def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
-%
-% An optional note just before the references in the reference list.
-% Defaults to nothing, but can be changed to a list of commands
-% (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the reference
-% list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note).
-%
 \newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}
 
-%
-% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
-% when a meta-analysis is reported.
-%
 \newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
   References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
   included in the meta-analysis.}
-%
-% The star that's put in front of the entries used in the meta-analysis
-%
-\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{$\star$\ }
+\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  Load language dependent sections from an external file.
-%  (Based on code by Stefan Bj\"ork, 2004/12/25.)
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -679,35 +702,6 @@
   \@ifundefined{iflanguage}%
     {\relax }%
     {%  %
-        % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true"
-        % code if the language is defined and equal to the current
-        % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives
-        % an error if the language is not loaded.)
-        %
-       \def\APAC@iflang#1#2{%
-         \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
-         \else
-           \ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language
-             {#2}%
-           \fi
-         \fi
-       }%
-        % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input
-        % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file
-        % has been defined. The language files that are shipped with the
-        % current release are defined explicitly. If the requested language
-        % is not in this list, \languagename.apc is loaded if it exists.
-        %
-      \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}%
-      \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}%
-      \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}%
-      \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}%
-      \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}%
-      \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}%
-        %
-      \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{%
-        \def\APAC@apcfile{\languagename.apc}}{\relax}%
-        %
         % My teTeX under Cygwin automatically loads babel with
         % default language "nohyphenation", so this language should
         % revert to doing nothing. Strangely enough \iflanguage
@@ -719,76 +713,352 @@
       \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}%
       \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp
       \else
-        \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{%
-          \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
-            Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found.}}%
+        \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{%
+            %
+            % \languagename.apc does not exist; try whether the current
+            % language is a dialect of one of the known languages. This
+            % is not perfect, because languages for which no hyphenation
+            % patterns have been found revert to the default language,
+            % so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that
+            % case.
+            %
+            % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true"
+            % code if the language is defined and equal to the current
+            % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives
+            % an error if the language is not loaded.)
+            %
+          \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{%
+            \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax
+            \else
+              \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language
+                {##2}%
+              \fi
+            \fi
+          }%
+            % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input
+            % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file
+            % has been defined.
+            %
+          \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}%
+          \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}%
+            %
+            % The default English as last one.
+          \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}%
+            %
+          \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{%
+            \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
+              No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}%
+          }{%
+             \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{%
+               \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{%
+                 Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}%
+             }%
+          }%
+          \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined
+        }%
       \fi
       \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined
     }%
+    \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%  Bibliography style parameters.
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}% apa.cls uses \newpage, change with \renewcommand
 \let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize
-%
 %%% declare four parameters
 \newskip{\bibleftmargin}
 \newskip{\bibindent}
 \newskip{\bibparsep}
 \newskip{\bibitemsep}
-%
 %%% and give them default values
 \bibleftmargin=2.5em
 \bibindent=-\bibleftmargin
 \bibparsep=0pt%
 \bibitemsep\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
 
-%
-% To force another order (in Part 1, Part 2 cases)
-% Actually, this is the same as \SortNoop used in the examples,
-% so I do not discuss this in the documentation. It should
-% not be considered part of apacite, but I keep it for backwards
-% compatibility.
 \newcommand{\bibphant}[1]{}
 
-%
-% Around 1998, I got error messages with accented characters
-% in author names. After some trial and error, I found out that
-% this works. However, later it was apparently not necessary anymore
-% (tests without it worked well), but I keep it because it's harmless
-% and I'm not sure enough.
-%
-\@ifundefined{accent@spacefactor}{\def\accent@spacefactor{}}{}
+\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}%
+\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}%
 
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% citations %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{%
     \def\BBA{\BBAA}%
-    \item[\@biblabel{#1}]%
+      % For compatibility with chapterbib, bibunits, backref, and hyperref.
+      % Adapted from natbib.dtx.
+    \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+          \@biblabel{#1}%
+          \hyper@natanchorend]%
     \if@filesw{%
         \def\BBA{\string\BBA}%
-        \def\protect##1{\string ##1}%
-        \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}%
+        \let\protect\noexpand
+          % bibunits redefines \bibcite through \AtBeginDocument
+          % in a way that is incompatible with apacite's definition.
+          % The simplest way to get things working automatically
+          % seems to be introducing the parallel \APACbibcite command.
+          % This should also solve many other compatibility problems.
+        \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}%
+        \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}%
         \def\BBA{\BBAA}%
     }%
-    \fi%
-    \ignorespaces%
+    \fi
+    \ignorespaces
+}
+
+\def\APACbibcite#1#2{%
+  \global\expandafter
+    \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}%        names
+  \global\expandafter
+    \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year
 }
+\let\bibcite\APACbibcite
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL                         %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx:
+%%
+%%    Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with
+%%    macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten
+%%    to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''.
+%%
+%% END COMMENTS
+%%
+%% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted.
+%% The other \bibcite-restoring compatibility code above does something
+%% similar, but does not do the job correctly if babel is loaded (why?).
+%% Clearly, this only works if babel is loaded before apacite, but
+%% putting it in a \AtBeginDocument does not work well.
+
+\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{%
+  \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{%
+    \let\bibcite\APACbibcite
+  }%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBTOPIC                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{%
+      %
+      % Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired
+      % error message of bibtopic.
+    \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}%
+  }{%
+      %
+      % These bibtopic hooks are included in the thebibliography
+      % environment, so bibtopic should work correctly. If bibtopic is
+      % not loaded, they should do nothing.
+    \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax}
+    \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax}
+  }%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBUNITS                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+  \let\APACstd@cite\cite
+  \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite
+  \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem
+}
+
+\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{%
+      % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.).
+    \def\APAC@bu{%
+      \ifx\cite\std@cite
+          % Outside a bibunit; the `@APACbu' strings are intended to
+          % minimize the possibility of wrong matches, such as
+          % \b@ex11 = ex11 from the global aux
+          %   or
+          % \b@ex11 = ex1  from bibunit 1,
+          % and the last `@' is similarly intended to avoid confusion
+          % if both bibunits and chapterbib are loaded (`11@1' = 11th
+          % bibunit, 1st chapterbib unit; `1@11' = 1st bibunit, 11th
+          % chapterbib unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would
+          % be used at the same time, but safety first.
+        @APACbu0@%
+      \else
+          % Within a bibunit: use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits.
+        @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @%
+      \fi
+    }%%
+      % Standard apacite definition of \cite and \nocite commands.
+    \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite
+      % This is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect `Citation undefined'
+      % warnings.
+    \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite
+      % Restore apacite definition of \bibitem, mainly because of the
+      % \@newciteauxhandle instead of \@auxout.
+    \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{%
+      \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux
+      \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}%
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout
+    }%%
+      % To make sure everything works whether bibunits is loaded
+      % before or after apacite.
+    \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem
+      %
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBBL                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{%
+      % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.).
+    \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}%
+      % Ditto. This puts the \bibcite commands in #1.aux instead
+      % of in the main aux file, so that the flags can be differentiated.
+      % This also means that the aux file has to be read by LaTeX
+      % before it is overwritten.
+    \def\newbibliography#1{%
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+      \@input@{#1.aux}%
+      \begingroup
+        \if@filesw
+          \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname
+          \expandafter\immediate\openout
+            \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax
+          \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }%
+        \fi
+      \endgroup
+    }%%
+      % Add the flag to the bibliography.
+    \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography
+    \def\bibliography#1#2#3{%
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+      \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle
+      \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}%
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp
+      \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+      \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout
+    }%%
+      % Add an extra argument to \@@cite.
+    \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite
+    \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{%
+      \nocite{#3}{#4}%
+      \let\@temp@nocite\nocite
+      \let\nocite\@gobble
+        %
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}%
+      \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}%
+        %
+      \let\nocite\@temp@nocite
+      \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined
+    }%%
+      %
+      % Add an extra argument to \nocite.
+    \let\@orig@nocite\nocite
+    \def\nocite#1#2{%
+        % Define a flag.
+      \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}%
+        %
+        % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite,
+        % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite.
+      \@bsphack
+      \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+          % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations:
+        \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
+          \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+            % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib
+            % #1@auxfile for compatibility with multibbl
+          \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{%
+            \if@filesw
+              \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+            \fi
+          }{\if@filesw
+              \expandafter\immediate%
+              \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+            \fi
+          }%
+            %
+          \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{%
+            \edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
+            \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy
+            \else
+              \G@refundefinedtrue
+              \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+            \fi
+          }{}%
+        }%
+      \else
+           % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work
+           % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested
+           % in ltbibl.dtx:
+         \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}%
+      \fi
+      \@esphack
+        %
+        % For compatibility with multibib.
+      \@restore@auxhandle
+    }%%
+      %
+      % Add an extra argument to \nocitemeta.
+    \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta
+    \def\nocitemeta#1#2{%
+      \nocite{#1}{#2}%
+      \let\@temp@nocite\nocite
+      \let\nocite\@gobble
+        %
+      \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}%
+        %
+      \let\nocite\@temp@nocite
+      \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined
+    }%
+  }{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBIB                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}
+\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}}
+\def\@mb@citenamelist{%
+  cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,%
+  citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,%
+  citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,%
+  citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta%
+}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH SPLITBIB                      %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-% Year is separately handled by \Y@<citation key>
-\def\bibcite#1#2{%
-  \global\expandafter\def\csname b@#1\@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}%        names
-  \global\expandafter\def\csname Y@#1\@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{splitbib}{%
+      % Presumably, this doesn't hurt without splitbib as well.
+    \def\citeauthoryear{\string\citeauthoryear}%
+  }{}%
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH NATBIB                        %%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
 \AtBeginDocument{%
   \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
       %
@@ -803,119 +1073,187 @@
       % is necessary and therefore I do this here.
       %
     \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{%
-        \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}%
+      \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}%
+    }%
+      %
+      % natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little
+      % with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches.
+      %
+    \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble
+    \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined
+                     % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought
+                     % of a better hack yet.
+      \@oldbibpreamble%
+      \bibliographytypesize%
+      \bibliographyprenote%
+      \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+        {}% skip
+        {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
     }%
+    \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography
+    \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography%
+                            \normalsize}%
   }{}%
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH HYPERREF                      %%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Include experimental hyperref-compatibility code provided by Ross Moore,
-% if the hyper option is requested.
-\if@hyper@APA@comp% hyperref compatibility option is on
-  %
-  % accommodate both APA and other (e.g. hyperref) patchings of \bibcite
-  %
-  \def\bibcite@APA@other#1#2{%
-    \bibcite@other{#1}{#2}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname Y@#1\endcsname{\@year@#2}}%
-  \let\bibcite@APA\bibcite   % record the APA-only definition of \bibcite
-  %
-  % check via \AtBeginDocument as to whether \bibcite has been changed;
-  % if so, then correct the patching when the .aux file is read.
-  %
-  \AtBeginDocument{%
-    \ifx\bibcite\bibcite@APA\else
-     \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\install@other@APA}%
-    \fi }%
-  %
-  \def\install@other@APA{%
-    \ifx\bibcite\bibcite@APA\else
-     \let\bibcite@other\bibcite
-     \let\bibcite\bibcite@APA@other
-    \fi \let\install@other@APA\relax }%
-  %
-  % This command should not be needed; it allows the patch to be
-  % forced at an earlier time, if desired.
-  %
-  \def\installhyperAPA{%
-    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\install@other@APA}%
-      {\AtBeginDocument{\install@other@APA}}%
-  }%
-\fi
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+    \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{%
+      \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{%
+      \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{%
+      \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{%
+      \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{%
+      \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}%
+    \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{%
+      \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}%
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+      % The next should always be true, but just to be sure...
+    \@ifpackageloaded{url}{%
+        % Is obeyspaces option requested? If not, then...
+      \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty
+        % remove spaces from hyperlinks.
+        \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}%
+                    \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}%
+                    \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}%
+      \fi
+    }{}%
+  }{}}
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL                         %%
+%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF                       %%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 %%
-%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx:
-%%
-%%    Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with
-%%    macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten
-%%    to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''.
-%%
-%% END COMMENTS
-%%
-%% Here, I (EM) literally insert the code mentioned above.
-%% Are the \begingroup and \endgroup necessary or even useful?
-%% The hyperref-compatibility patch above does a similar thing with
-%% \bibcite.
-%%
-
-\let\Hy@bibcite\bibcite
-\begingroup
-  \@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{%
-    \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{%
-      \let\bibcite\Hy@bibcite
+%% A bit of code that makes life a little easier
+%% (adapted from amsrefs.dtx).
+\def\back@cite{}%
+\def\CurrentBib{}%
+\def\PrintBackRefs{}%
+\def\APACrestorebibitem{}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{%
+      % Make sure that \ifBR@verbose is defined.
+    \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{%
+      \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse
+      \let\fi\fi}{}%
+      % A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better
+      % readable.
+    \def\back@cite#1{%
+      \ifBR@verbose
+        \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}%
+      \fi
+      \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+    }%%
+      % Adaptation of the \bibitem command so that backref does not
+      % scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly
+      % done through \PrintBackRefs.
+    \def\APACrestorebibitem{%
+      \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{%
+        \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}%
+        \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+      }%%
     }%
+      % Printing the backrefs: revert to the standard backrefs macro.
+    \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}%
+  }{%%%
+      % backref not loaded.
+    \let\back@cite\@gobble
+    \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble
   }%
-\endgroup
+}
+
+\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{%
+  \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3%
+  \BR@backref{#2}%
+}%
+
+\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax}%
+\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax}%
 
-%%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%                   COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF                       %%
+%%           FOR USE WITH THE URL PACKAGE (AND HYPERREF)              %%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%
-%% some code from backref.dtx, adapted by EM
-%%
 \AtBeginDocument{%
-  \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{%
-    \global\let\BRorg@citeapa\@@cite      % EM
-    \global\let\@@cite\BR@citeapa         % EM
+  \@ifpackageloaded{url}{%
+      % To circumvent an ``undefined'' error
+    \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}%
+      %
+      % The original dot. (Simply using `.' causes an infinite loop.
+      % This command is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved
+      % easier by redefining \Url@APACdot.)
+    \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }%
+    \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }%
+    \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }%
+    \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }%
+    \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }%
+    \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}%
+      %
+      % APA-definitions.
+    \def\APACurlBreaks{%
+        % Remove dot and slash from ordinary breaks.
+      \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}%
+        % Add slash to big breaks, so that http:// is broken after the second
+        % slash instead of after the colon.
+      \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}%
+        % These are the default ones. Repeat them to get a complete style and
+        % we don't have to rely on what is the default (which might change).
+      \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}%
+      \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}%
+        % Define a dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may
+        % occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur).
+        % The Chicago Manual of Style requests the same treatment of
+        % a couple of other punctuation marks, different from url.sty's
+        % default behavior.
+      \def\UrlSpecials{%
+        \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }\do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }%
+        \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }%
+        \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }%
+        \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }%
+        \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }%
+        \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}%
+        \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde
+    }%%
+    % Change underscore for when a non-tt font is used.
+    \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do
+      \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do
+      \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial}
+
+      % Now define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in
+      % url.sty.
+    \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+    \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+    \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }%
+    \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }%
+      %
+      % Use APACtt-style by default.
+    \urlstyle{APACtt}%
   }{}%
 }
-\def\BR@citeapa<#1>[#2]#3{%               % EM
-  \BRorg@citeapa<#1>[#2]{#3}%             % EM
-  \ifBR@verbose
-    \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#3\string'}% EM
-      % Am I allowed to define an info message of another package?
-      % It seems strange. But it's also strange to change `backref'
-      % into `apacite', because backref does the backreferencing,
-      % and the command is merely an adaptation of the corresponding
-      % backref command.
-  \fi
-  \Hy@backout{#3}%
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{url}{%
+    \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}%
+  }{}%
 }
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%                    THE CITATION COMMANDS                           %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
-% First citation in multi-citation.
 \newif\if@F@cite\@F@citetrue
 
-% Two flags to denote whether only author or year must be cited or both.
 \newif\if@A@cite\@A@citefalse
 \newif\if@Y@cite\@Y@citefalse
 
-
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \cite<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \fullcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \shortcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
-%       produces (prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix)
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\cite{%
@@ -949,13 +1287,6 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \citeNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \fullciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \shortciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
-%       produces prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\citeNP{%
@@ -989,9 +1320,6 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-%       second layer of \cite command
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\@cite<#1>{%
@@ -1014,13 +1342,6 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \citeA<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \fullciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \shortciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
-%       produces prefix Authors1 (Year1), ..., AuthorN (YearN, postfix)
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\citeA{%
@@ -1048,16 +1369,13 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-%       second layer of \citeA command
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\@citeA<#1>{%
       %
       % definition of some parameters
       %
-    \def\@BBOP{}%      % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BBOP{}%      % open parenthesis.
     \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
     \def\@BBA{\BBAB}%  % `and' between authors
     \def\@BBAY{ \BBOP}%% between author and year
@@ -1075,13 +1393,6 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \citeauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \fullciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-% \shortciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
-%       produces prefix Authors1, ..., AuthorsN, postfix
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\citeauthor{%
@@ -1108,10 +1419,31 @@
         {\@citeauthor<>}%
 }
 
+\def\citeauthorNP{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthorNP}%
+        {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+
+\def\fullciteauthorA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthorNP}%
+        {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+
+\def\shortciteauthorA{%
+    \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions
+    \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}%
+    \@ifnextchar<%    %>
+        {\@citeauthorNP}%
+        {\@citeauthorNP<>}%
+}
+
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-%       second layer of \citeauthor command
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\@citeauthor<#1>{%
@@ -1135,16 +1467,28 @@
         {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
 }
 
+\def\@citeauthorNP<#1>{%
+      %
+      % definition of some parameters
+      %
+    \def\@BBOP{}%      % open parenthesis
+    \def\@BAP{\BAP}%   % after precitation [=#1] before first citation
+    \def\@BBA{\BBAA}%  % `and' between authors
+    \def\@BBAY{}%      % between author and year
+    \def\@BAY{}%       % after year
+    \def\@BBY{}%       % between years of multiple citations with same author
+    \def\@BBC{\BBC}%   % between cites
+    \def\@BBN{\BBN}%   % after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2]
+    \def\@BBCP{}%      % close parenthesis
+    \def\@BAstyle{\BAastyle}% text style of authors
+    \@A@citetrue%      % cite authors
+    \@Y@citefalse%     % do not cite years
+    \@ifnextchar[%     % ]
+        {\@@cite<#1>}%
+        {\@@cite<#1>[]}%
+}
+
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \citeyear<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
-%       produces (prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix)
-%
-% \citeyearNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys}
-%       writes \citation{keys} on .aux
-%       produces prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\citeyear{%
@@ -1168,9 +1512,6 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-%       second layer of \citeyear command
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\@citeyear<#1>{%
@@ -1210,7 +1551,7 @@
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 %%% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal previous
-\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de{%
+\def\@ifauthorsequalc@de#1{%
   \if@F@cite%
      \@F@citefalse%
   \else%
@@ -1219,12 +1560,14 @@
      \fi%
   \fi%
   \if@Y@cite%
-     {\csname Y@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+     {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkend
   \fi%
 }
 
 %%% Code to be executed if current author(s) do not equal previous
-\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de{%
+\def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{%
   \if@F@cite%
      \@F@citefalse%
   \else%
@@ -1236,34 +1579,35 @@
   \edef\@cite@undefined{?}%
   \def\BBA{\@BBA}%
   \if@A@cite%
-     {\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+     {\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkend
      \if@Y@cite%
         {\@BBAY}%
      \fi%
   \fi%
   \if@Y@cite%
-     {\csname Y@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkstart{#1}%
+     {\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \hyper@natlinkend
   \fi%
   \let\BBA\relax%
 }
 
 \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3{%
       %
-      % write citation(s) to .aux file
+      % Write citation(s) to .aux file(s)
       %
-    \if@filesw{%
-        \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#3}}%
-    }%
-    \fi%
+    \nocite{#3}%
       %
       % the previous cite, for multiple citations with same author
       %
     \edef\@citeP{}%
       %
-      % open parenthesis and precitation
-      %
-    {\@BBOP}%
-    \ifx\@empty#1%
+      % open parenthesis and pre-note
+      % The \mbox is to avoid hyperref problems if a \citeA follows an \item.
+    \mbox{\@BBOP}%
+    \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
     \else%
       {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}%
     \fi%
@@ -1271,15 +1615,22 @@
       % loop over citation entries
       %
     \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%
+          % Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that
+          % e.g. \cite{key1, key2} can be done.
+        \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+          % For backref.
+        \back@cite{\@citeb}%
           %
           % check whether citation is defined
           %
-        \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
-          {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
-           \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
-           \@warning{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined}%
+        \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+          {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+           \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}%
+           % The following is now handled by \nocite
+           %\G@refundefinedtrue
+           %\@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
           }%%
-            % if citation is defined:
+            % If citation is defined:
             % check whether flag is set that identifies that
             % this is not the first citation to the work
             % if flag is not set, it will be set to DUMMY
@@ -1287,9 +1638,9 @@
             % the full citation is used; else the short version
             % is used
             %
-          {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+          {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
              {\global\expandafter
-              \def\csname flag@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+              \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
               \def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##1}}%
              }%
              {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}%
@@ -1300,48 +1651,26 @@
            % and a \@BBY (probably comma and space) is inserted between
            % the two years.
            %
-           % Code differs depending on whether hyperref-compatibility
-           % option is loaded.
-        \if@hyper@APA@comp
-           % hyperref-compatibility option on
-           % (code provided by Ross Moore)
-             \expandafter\def\expandafter\B@my@dummy
-                   \expandafter{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
-             \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
-             \ifx\expandafter\@citeP\B@my@dummy\relax%
-                 \@ifauthorsequalc@de
-             \else%
-                 \@ifauthorsunequalc@de
-             \fi%
-                % define previous citation-author as current
-                %
-             \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citeP
-                \expandafter{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
-           %
+           % The \protected@edef fixes the problem with authors with accents
+           % (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Previous versions of apacite solved this
+           % less elegantly (accentfix option). This fix provided by Robert Schlicht.
+           % See also the new definition of \@citeP below.
+        \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
+        \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy%
+            \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
         \else%
-           % else: hyperref-compatibility option off
-           % (code dating from theapa.sty)
-             \@pre@accentfix%  fix problems with cedilla-type accents
-             \edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
-             \@post@accentfix% return to old definitions
-             \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy%
-                 \@ifauthorsequalc@de
-             \else%
-                 \@ifauthorsunequalc@de
-             \fi%
-                % define previous citation-author as current
-                %
-             \@pre@accentfix%  fix problems with cedilla-type accents
-             \edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
-             \@post@accentfix% return to old definitions
+            \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+        \fi%
+           % define previous citation-author as current
+           %
+        \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
            %
-        \fi
         \let\BCA\relax%
     }%%
       % end loop over citation entries
       % add note [=#2] and closing parenthesis
       %
-    \ifx\@empty#2%
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
     \else%
       {\@BBN #2}%
     \fi%
@@ -1356,92 +1685,79 @@
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \nocite{key} : entry in reference list, not in text
-%
-% This is a little different from \@@cite with
-%  \@A@citefalse and \@Y@citefalse
-% because of the `*' variant (cite all entries in bibfile)
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\nocite#1{%
-    \@bsphack%
-    \if@filesw{%
-        \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#1}}}%
-    \fi%
+    % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite,
+    % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite.
+  \@bsphack
+  \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+      % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations:
     \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
-        \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
-          {\edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
-           \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy%
-           \else%
-             \@warning{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined}%
-           \fi%
-          }%
-          {}% Removed flag-setting: a no-cite is not a cite,
-            % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite.
+      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+        % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib
+      \if@filesw
+        \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%
+      \fi
+        %
+      \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{%
+        \edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
+        \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy
+        \else
+          \G@refundefinedtrue
+          \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}%
+        \fi
+      }{}%
     }%
-    \@esphack%
+  \else
+       % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work
+       % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested
+       % in ltbibl.dtx:
+     \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}%
+  \fi
+  \@esphack
+    %
+    % For compatibility with multibib.
+  \@restore@auxhandle
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \nocitemeta{key} : entry in reference list, not in text,
-%                    for entries that are used in a meta-analysis.
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\nocitemeta#1{%
+    \nocite{#1}%
     \@bsphack%
-    \if@filesw{%
-        \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#1}}}%
-    \fi%
-      %
-    \global\def\APAC@metaprenote{\APACmetaprenote}%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\def
+      \csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{%
+        \APACmetaprenote}%
+    %
     \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
-        \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
-          {\edef\B@my@dummy{*}%
-           \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy%
-           \else%
-             \@warning{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined}%
-           \fi%
-          }%
-          { % Define meta-analysis flag for current item
-            %
-           \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
-             {\global\expandafter
-              \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
-             }%
-             {}%
-          }%
+       \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+         % Define meta-analysis flag for current item
+       \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+         {\global\expandafter
+          \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}%
+         }%
+         {}%
     }%
     \@esphack%
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \APACinsertmetastar{key}: insert an asterisk before the names in the
-%     reference list for entries that are used in a meta-analysis.
-%
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 
 \def\APACinsertmetastar#1{%
-    \@bsphack%
-    \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
-       \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
-         {}% skip
-         {{\APACmetastar}}%
-      }%
-    \@esphack%
+  \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+    \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+    \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
+      {}% skip
+      {{\APACmetastar}}%
+  }%
 }
 
 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% No labels in the bibliography.
-%
 \def\@biblabel#1{}
 
-%
 \def\st@rtbibsection{%
   \@bibnewpage%           start a new page if desired
   \if@numberedbib%
@@ -1457,7 +1773,6 @@
     %
   \fi%
 }%
-%
 \def\st@rtbibchapter{%
   % here no \@bibnewpage, because it is assumed that
   % the \chapter starts a new page
@@ -1472,19 +1787,15 @@
     %
   \fi%
 }%
-%
-%
 \def\thebibliography#1{%
     %
     % Start the bibliography section or chapter
     %
   \@ifundefined{chapter}%
     {\st@rtbibsection}%
-% else: chapter is defined
     {\@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}%     we have to guess
        {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}% check if mainmatter exists
           {\st@rtbibchapter}%
-%       else: mainmatter is defined
           {\if@mainmatter%
              \st@rtbibsection% typically, a chapter-specific bibliogr.
            \else%
@@ -1504,47 +1815,335 @@
     %
   \bibliographytypesize% e.g., to put the bibliography in \small type
   \bibliographyprenote%  some explanatory note before the references
-  \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote}
+  %
+  \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}%
     {}% skip
-    {\APAC@metaprenote}
+    {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}%
     %
   \list{\relax}{\labelsep=0em%
-%                 \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
                 \parsep=\bibparsep%
                 \itemsep=\bibitemsep%
                 \leftmargin=\bibleftmargin%
                 \itemindent=\bibindent}% changed to cope with 4th ed.
-   \def\newblock{\unskip\ \hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
+   \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
    \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
    \sfcode`\.=1000\relax
+     % For compatibility with bibtopic.
+   \bt@beg@thb@hook
+     % To overrule backref.
+   \APACrestorebibitem
 }
-\def\endthebibliography{\endlist\normalsize}
-%
-% natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little
-% with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches.
-%
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-  \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
-     \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble
-     \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined
-                      % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought
-                      % of a better hack yet.
-        \@oldbibpreamble%
-        \bibliographytypesize%
-        \bibliographyprenote%
-        \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote}
-          {}% skip
-          {\APAC@metaprenote}%
-     }%
-     \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography
-     \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography%
-                             \normalsize}
+\def\endthebibliography{%
+     % For compatibility with bibtopic.
+   \bt@end@thb@hook
+     %
+   \def\@noitemerr{%
+       \@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}%
+   }%
+   \endlist\normalsize
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%               REFERENCE LIST FORMATTING COMMANDS                   %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\APACrefYear}[1]{%
+  % Should never be empty.
+  {\BBOP}{#1}{\BBCP}%
+}
+\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or
+    April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or
+    November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else
+    {#1}\fi}
+\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{%
+    % year (+ addendum)
+  {\BBOP}{#1}%
+    % month
+  \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#2}%
+  \fi
+    % day
+  \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip\ {#3}%
+  \fi
+  {\BBCP}%
+}
+\newcommand{\APACrefatitle}[2]{#2}
+\newcommand{\APACrefbtitle}[2]{\Bem{#2}}
+\newcommand{\APACrefaetitle}[2]{[#2]}
+\newcommand{\APACrefbetitle}[2]{[#2]}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\let\@xp\expandafter
+\newcommand{\PrintCardinal}[1]{%
+    \afterassignment\print@cardinal
+    \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil
+}
+\def\print@cardinal#1#2\@nil{%
+    \ifx\relax#1\relax
+        \ifnum\count@>\z@
+            \CardinalNumeric\count@
+        \else
+            ??th%
+        \fi
+    \else
+        \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi
+        #1#2\relax
+    \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{%
+    \number#1\relax
+    \if
+        \ifnum#1<14
+            \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi
+        \else
+            F%
+        \fi
+        T%
+        th%
+    \else
+        \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax
+        \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi
+    \fi
+}
+\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{%
+    \ifx\relax#2%
+        \@xp\@gobbletwo
+    \else
+        #1=#2\relax
+    \fi
+    \keep@last@digit#1%
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{%
+    % journal
+  \Bem{#1}%
+    % volume
+  \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, \Bem{#2}%
+  \fi
+    % issue number
+  \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip({#3})%
+  \fi
+    % pages
+  \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      % publisher
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+      {#2}%
+    \fi
+      %
+  \else
+      % address
+    {#1}%
+      % publisher
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+      \unskip: {#2}%
+    \fi
+      %
+  \fi
+}
+\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher
+\newcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      % Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the author.
+    {\BAuthor{}}%
+      %
+  \else
+      % Address and publisher. These are not empty.
+    {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}%
+      %
+  \fi
+}
+\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth
+\let\APAChowpublished\relax
+\newenvironment{APACrefURL}[1][]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \BAvailFrom
+  \else
+    \BRetrieved{#1}%
+  \fi
+}{}
+\newenvironment{APACrefURLmsg}{%
+  \BMsgPostedTo
+}{}
+\newcommand{\APACorigED}[1]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+      % ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)''
+    \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}%
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACorigEDS}[1]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+      % ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)''
+    \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}%
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACrefnote}[1]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+    ({#1})%
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACorigyearnote}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+      % Original year empty: format note.
+    \APACrefnote{#2}%
+  \else
+      % Check for \bibnodate. I think the following command does not check
+      % whether #1 = `\bibnodate', but expands them, but that should
+      % also be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \expandafter commands.
+    \ifx\bibnodate#1\@empty
+        % Original year unknown: format (only) note.
+      \APACrefnote{#2}%
+    \else
+        % Original year has been given: ``Original work published''.
+      (\BOWP{} {#1}%
+        % Note
+      \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \else
+        \unskip; {#2}%
+      \fi
+        % Final parenthesis.
+      )%%
+        %
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{%
+    % "(Reprinted from " (note the space)
+  (\BREPR{} %
+    % Journal (should not be empty)
+  \Bem{#2}%
+    % Year
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#1}%
+  \fi
+    % Volume
+  \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, \Bem{#3}%
+  \fi
+    % Issue number
+  \ifx\@empty#4\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip{[#4]}%
+  \fi
+    % Pages
+  \ifx\@empty#5\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip, {#5}%
+  \fi
+    % Note
+  \ifx\@empty#6\@empty
+  \else
+    \unskip; {#6}%
+  \fi
+    % Final parenthesis.
+  )%%
+    %
+}
+\def\@connect@with@commas#1{%
+    % Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty.
+  \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }%
+  \let\@connect@string\relax
+    % Loop over elements.
+  \@for\@element@:=#1\do{%
+     \ifx\@empty\@element@%
+     \else
+         % Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first
+         % nonempty element, a comma and space afterwards).
+       \@connect@string\@element@%
+       \let\@connect@string\@comma@space
+     \fi
   }%
-  {}%
-}%
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% EOF apacite.sty
-%
+  \let\@connect@string\@undefined
+  \let\@comma@space\@undefined
+}
+\newcommand{\APACorigbooknote}[9]{%
+    %
+    % "(Reprinted from " (note the space)
+  (\BREPR{} %
+    %
+    % Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher
+    % These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here
+    % (because it's done in the .bst file).
+  \@connect@with@commas{%
+    {#3},{#4},{#5},{#6},{#2},{#1},{\APACaddressPublisher{#7}{#8}}%
+  }%%
+    %
+    % Add optional note.
+  \ifx\@empty#9\@empty
+  \else
+    ; #9%
+  \fi
+    %
+    % Final parenthesis.
+  )%%
+    %
+}
+\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+        % (Technical Report No.\ <no>)
+      {(#2)}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+      % (2nd ed., Vol.~1
+    ({#1}%
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+    \else
+        % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>
+      \unskip; {#2}%
+    \fi
+      % Final parenthesis.
+    )%%
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+      \else
+          % (pp. 10--30)
+        {(#3)}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+        % (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30)
+      (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})%
+    \fi
+  \else
+      % (2nd ed., Vol.~1
+    ({#1}%
+    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty
+      \ifx\@empty#3\@empty
+      \else
+          % ; pp. 10--30
+        \unskip; {#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+        % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30
+      \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}%
+    \fi
+      % Final parenthesis.
+    )%%
+  \fi
+}
+%%
 
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `apacite.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc
index 1624229e010..a5bbe586658 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/dutch.apc
@@ -1,188 +1,166 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `dutch.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%%
-%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were
-%% used:
-%%
-%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog"
-%%     (indicated below as "[DP]"):
-%%
-%%     Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive
-%%       guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001).
-%%       Retreived January 3, 2005, from
-%%       http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf
-%%
-%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift
-%%     voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden"
-%%     (indicated below as "[NTPG]"):
-%%
-%%     Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004).
-%%       Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
-%%       59, inside back cover.
-%%
-%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book
-%%     (indicated below as "[SW]"):
-%%
-%%     Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.).
-%%       Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu.
-%%
-%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual.
-%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources,
-%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article:
-%%
-%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele
-%%       kijk op angst:
-%%       [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and
-%%       automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli].
-%%       Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
-%%       59, 135-149.
-%%
-%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary:
-%%
-%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch]
-%%       (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale.
-%%
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Other labels
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.{}}   % [SW] (``zonder jaartal'')
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}
-
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}}       % [DP]
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}} % [DP]
-%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants:
-%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.{}}       % [NTPG]
-%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.{}} % [NTPG]
-
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}        % [SW]
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.{}}
-
-%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW
-%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on
-%% the language in which the referenced work is written:
-%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch
-%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.''       for referenced works in English
-%% ``Hrsg.''              for referenced works in German
-%% ``edt.''               for referenced works in French
-%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example
-%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used.
-%%
-%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here:
-\renewcommand{\BED}{red.{}}          % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.{}}         % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
-
-%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP.
-%% NTPG does not explain how to format this.
-%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: ''
-%%    followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown:
-%%    ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title.
-%%    This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative:
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.{}}
-
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.{}}
-
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.{}}          % [SW]. NTPG gives an example with
-                                     % ``Vol.'' but this is presumably
-                                     % dependent on the language of the
-                                     % referenced work as well.
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.{}}         % [SW]
-
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.{}}          % [SW]
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.{}}         % [SW]
-
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.{}}           % [SW]
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.{}}
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.{}}          % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both.
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}         % Literally translating ``Tech.'' as
-                                     % ``Technisch'' does not make sense.
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}
-                                     % Schrooten & Smulders use ``dissertatie''
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}
-                                     % There is no Dutch ``DAI'' and the
-                                     % distinction between ``published'' and
-                                     % ``unpublished'' would generally be
-                                     % interpreted as ``published as a book
-                                     % with an official publisher'' vs.
-                                     % ``privately published''. All PhD theses
-                                     % in the Netherlands are required to be
-                                     % published with an ISBN number.
-                                     % Therefore, it is better in my view to
-                                     % keep the same term here.
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}%
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% Again, there is no official forum
-                                     % to publish abstracts of master's theses,
-                                     % but, unblike PhD theses, they are
-                                     % (generally) unpublished.
-                                     % The term used here refers to the Dutch
-                                     % educational system until ca. 2003.
-                                     % Since ca. 2004, universities are
-                                     % gradually converting to a bachelor -
-                                     % master system, so it's likely that
-                                     % this term will have to be adapted
-                                     % in the near future.
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% [DP]. They also require the
-                                     % original title after the originalyear.
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}
-
-\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
-\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
-  % SW gives the following general names:
-  % ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification'']
-  % ``Literatuurlijst''  [literally ``Literature list'']
-  % For more specific applications, SW gives the following names:
-  % ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey
-  %                  of publications in a certain area'']
-  % ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature'']
-  % ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature'']
-
-\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-  Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de
-  meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}
-
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}
-
-\newcommand{\BCBT}{} % [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
-\newcommand{\BCBL}{} % [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
-
+%%
+%% This is file `dutch.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `dutch')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{dutch.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%%
+%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were
+%% used:
+%%
+%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog"
+%%     (indicated below as "[DP]"):
+%%
+%%     Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive
+%%       guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001).
+%%       Retreived January 3, 2005, from
+%%       http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf
+%%
+%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift
+%%     voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden"
+%%     (indicated below as "[NTPG]"):
+%%
+%%     Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004).
+%%       Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
+%%       59, inside back cover.
+%%
+%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book
+%%     (indicated below as "[SW]"):
+%%
+%%     Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.).
+%%       Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu.
+%%
+%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual.
+%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources,
+%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article:
+%%
+%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele
+%%       kijk op angst: Aandacht en automatisme in de verwerking van
+%%       bedreigende stimuli
+%%       [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and
+%%       automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli].
+%%       Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
+%%       59, 135-149.
+%%
+%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary:
+%%
+%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch]
+%%       (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramma en handleiding}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computersoftware}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.\hbox{}}% [SW] (``zonder jaartal'')
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%       % [DP]
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP]
+%% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants:
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}%        % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}%
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}%
+%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW
+%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on
+%% the language in which the referenced work is written:
+%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch
+%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.''       for referenced works in English
+%% ``Hrsg.''              for referenced works in German
+%% ``edt.''               for referenced works in French
+%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example
+%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used.
+%%
+%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here:
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}%          % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}%         % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'')
+%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP.
+%% NTPG does not explain how to format this.
+%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: ''
+%%    followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown:
+%%    ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title.
+%%    This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative:
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}%   % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}%    % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}%   % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}%     % [SW]
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}%    % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both.
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}%
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}%
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}%
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}%
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG]
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de
+  meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}%
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}%
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma.
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dutch.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc
index b173155000a..d9349ddb47f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/english.apc
@@ -1,107 +1,116 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `english.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{english.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% english.apc - dummy english version of apacite elements
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-
-%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
-%% If you use this as a template for other languages,
-%% don't forget to uncomment the commands!
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
-%\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}
-%\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Other labels
-%\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.{}}    % ``no date''
-%\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}            % between authors in text
-%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a
-                                      % dot to suppress an additional one
-                                      % in the reference list
-%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
-                                      % a dot to suppress an additional one
-                                      % in the reference list. The difference
-                                      % with \BOthers is that, if another
-                                      % string is used to define \BOthers,
-                                      % this one should always finish with a
-                                      % period and the previous one not
-                                      % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
-                                      % ``others'' is used).
-%\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}        % used as year for in-press citations
-%\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}              % for ``In '' editor...
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.{}}       % chapter
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.{}}      % chapters
-%\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.{}}           % editor
-%\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.{}}         % editors
-%\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.{}}     % translator
-%\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.{}}    % translators
-%\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.{}}    % translation, for the year field
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}        % chair of symposium
-%\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}      % chairs
-%\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.{}}         % volume
-%\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.{}}       % volumes
-%\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.{}}          % number
-%\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.{}}        % numbers
-%\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.{}}           % edition
-%\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.{}}            % page
-%\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.{}}          % pages
-%\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.{}}   % (default) technical report type name
-%\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}
-                                      % (default) PhD thesis type name
-%\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}
-                                      % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
-                                      % type name
-%\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name
-%\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}%
-                                      % (default) unpublished
-                                      % master's thesis type name
-%\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}
-%\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
-%\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
-%\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
-% when a meta-analysis is reported.
-%
-%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-%  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
-%  included in the meta-analysis.}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
-%\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}
+%%
+%% This is file `english.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `english')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{english.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% english.apc - english version of apacite elements
+%% Written by Erik Meijer
+%% Changes since the [2005/06/01] version:
+%% - Uncommented all the \renewcommand's, so that the file can be
+%%   \input to override previous definitions.
+%% - Replaced `.{}' by `.\hbox{}', with the same goal (but now it works)
+%%   of tricking TeX to make sure the abbreviation period is not
+%%   interpreted as a sentence-ending period.
+%% - Inserted many percent signs to make sure no undesired space is
+%%   put into the document when this file is read.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}%   % ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}%                % between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}%            % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}%                  % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\Bby}{by}%                  % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}%      % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}%     % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}%          % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}%        % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}%    % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}}%   % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}}%   % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}%            % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}%          % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}%        % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}%      % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}%         % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}%       % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}%          % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}%           % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}%         % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}%  % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}%
+\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% Used if publisher = author
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
+  included in the meta-analysis.}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}%
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `english.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/finnish.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/finnish.apc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14da9396c61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/finnish.apc
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `finnish.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `finnish')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{finnish.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% finnish.apc - finnish version of apacite elements
+%%
+%% Reference: Appendix E from book
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Kansallinen luetteloinnin ohjausryhm\"a. (2006). Monografioiden
+%% kuvailu, Suomalaiset luettelointis\"a\"ann\"ot. Helsinki: BTJ
+%% Kirjastopalvelu.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Sanoma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Tietokoneohjelma}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Tietokoneohjelman k\"asikirja}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Tietokoneohjelma ja k\"asikirja}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ohjelmisto}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Ohjelmiston k\"asikirja}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ohjelmisto ja k\"asikirja}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ohjelmointikieli}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}%  % ``no date'', ``sine anno''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}%                % between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a
+                                         % dot to suppress an additional one
+                                         % in the reference list
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+                                      % ``others'', the argument contains
+                                      % a dot to suppress an additional one
+                                      % in the reference list. The difference
+                                      % with \BOthers is that, if another
+                                      % string is used to define \BOthers,
+                                      % this one should always finish with a
+                                      % period and the previous one not
+                                      % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+                                      % ``others'' is used).
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{painossa}%        % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}%       % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku{}}%        % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut{}}%      % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}%    % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}%   % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}%      % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}%     % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}%           % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}%         % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}%           % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}%          % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}%      % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}%      % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}%     % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Julkaisematon v\"ait\"oskirja}%
+                                     % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
+                                     % type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Pro gradu -tutkielma}%
+                                     % (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Julkaisematon pro gradu -tutkielma}%
+                                     % (default) unpublished
+                                     % master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Alkuaan julk.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Uudelleen julk.\hbox{}}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  \refname merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen
+  sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}%
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `finnish.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc
index 9eb2ae01041..8e8f1c16520 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/german.apc
@@ -1,142 +1,117 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `german.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{german.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente
-%% Written by Andreas Poege <poge@uni-muenster.de>
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung
-%\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}              % Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \cite usw, \citeA usw
-                                                % \citeNP)
-%\renewcommand{\BAastyle}{\scshape}             % Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \citeautor usw.
-%\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}                        % Einleitende Klammer (default "(")
-%\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}                        % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")")
-%\renewcommand{\BAP}{}                          % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen)
-%\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}                       % Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&")
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}                       % Zwischen Autoren im Text
-\renewcommand{\BBAY}{ }                         % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",")
-%\renewcommand{\BBC}{;{}}                       % Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default ";")
-%\renewcommand{\BBN}{,{}}                       % Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ",")
-%\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}                         % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "")
-%\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}                         % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "")
-\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}                          % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
-\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}                          % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
-%\renewcommand{\BAnd}{}                         % Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&")
-%\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}}
-                                                % Formatierung des Zusatzes bei Werken vom selben Autor aus
-                                                % einem Jahr (default "\alph{BibCnt}")
-%\renewcommand{\APACiteatitle}{}                % Zitation eines Titels (Artikel o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg.
-                                                % (default in Anf�hrungszeichen)
-%\renewcommand{\APACitebtitle}{}                % Zitation eines Titels (Buch o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg.
-                                                % (default ist \emph)
-%\renewcommand{\APACmetastar}{}                 % Auszeichnungg eines Werkes im Lit.verz. wenn in Metaanalyse
-                                                % (default "*")
-%\renewcommand{\bibnewpage}{\newpage}           % Verhalten von "\bibnewpage" (default "\clearpage")
-%\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }                       % Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre (
-                                                % NEU, default "\BBAY")
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses
-%\renewcommand{\bibliographytypesize}{\footnotesize}
-                                                % Schriftgr��e Literaturverz. (default "\normalsize")
-%\setlength{\bibleftmargin}{2.5em}              % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 2. Zeile (default "2.5em")
-%\setlength{\bibindent}{-\bibleftmargin}        % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 1. Zeile (default "-\bibleftmargin")
-%\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}         % vert. Abstand zwischen Eintr�gen im Lit.verz. (default "0pt")
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Befehle f�r die speziellen @misc-Eintr�ge.
-%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst ber�cksichtigt.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.}               % F�r misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Weitere Labels
-%\renewcommand{\bibnotype}{ }               % Bei Techreport, falls type-Ang. unterdr�ckt werden soll (default " ")
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.{}}        % "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet
-                                            % einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
-                                            % Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.{}}  % "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet
-                                            % einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im
-                                            % Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken
-                                            % The difference
-                                            % with \BOthers is that, if another
-                                            % string is used to define \BOthers,
-                                            % this one should always finish with a
-                                            % period and the previous one not
-                                            % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
-                                            % ``others'' is used).
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}               % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}                     % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber...
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.{}}               % Kapitel
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.{}}              % Kapitel
-\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.{}}                  % Herausgeber(in)
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.{}}                 % Herausgeber(innen)
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.{}}          % Uebersetzer(in)
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.{}}         % Uebersetzer(innen)
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.{}}         % Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe)
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}               % Chair (bei Konferenzen)
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}             % Chairs (bei Konferenzen)
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.{}}                 % Band
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.{}}               % Baende
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.{}}                 % Nummer
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.{}}                % Nummern
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.{}}                % Auflage
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.{}}                   % Seite
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.{}}                  % Seiten
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}                % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"'
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}          % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}
-                                            % (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}          % (default) Bezeichnung f�r Abschlussarbeit
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}
-                                            % (default) Bezeichnung f�r unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}       % Originalausgabe
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}        % Nachdruck von
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.{}}         % "`ohne Jahresangabe"'
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses
-\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}          % Bezeichnung f�r das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section
-\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}
-                                            % Bezeichnung f�r das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt nach \bibliographytypesize
-%\renewcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}      % default nichts
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde
-%
-\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen Studien der Metaanalyse.}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}
+%%
+%% This is file `german.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `german')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{german.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente
+%% Written by Andreas Poege.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung
+                                   % \citeNP)
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}%         % Zwischen Autoren im Text
+\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }%          % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",")
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}%            % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}%            % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",")
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Befehle f�r die speziellen @misc-Eintr�ge.
+%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst ber�cksichtigt.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% F�r misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Weitere Labels
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}%          % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}%                % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}%     % Kapitel
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}%    % Kapitel
+\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.\hbox{}}%        % Herausgeber(in)
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.\hbox{}}%       % Herausgeber(innen)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}%% Uebersetzer(in)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzer(innen)
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair}%          % Chair (bei Konferenzen)
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs}%        % Chairs (bei Konferenzen)
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Bd.\hbox{}}%       % Band
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Bde.\hbox{}}%     % Baende
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.\hbox{}}%       % Nummer
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.\hbox{}}%      % Nummern
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.\hbox{}}%      % Auflage
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{S.\hbox{}}%         % Seite
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.\hbox{}}%        % Seiten
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}%           % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"'
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}%     % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}%
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}%  % Originalausgabe
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}%   % Nachdruck von
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"'
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}%
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt
+%%% nach \bibliographytypesize
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen
+  Studien der Metaanalyse.}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}%
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `german.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc
index ddd2e2edcca..f7a5f4e1349 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/greek.apc
@@ -1,109 +1,106 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `greek.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{greek.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements
-%% Original (English) written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>
-%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas <protopap@ilsp.gr>
-%%  and Ioannis Dimakos <idimakos@upatras.gr>
-
-%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
-%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding.
-\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{������}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{���������}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{���������� ����������}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{��������� ��� ����������}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{���������}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{���������� ����������}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{��������� ��� ����������}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{������ ���������������}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% Other labels
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{����� ����������} % ``no date''
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{���}              % between authors in text
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{�.\ ���.{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a
-                                       % dot to suppress an additional one
-                                       % in the reference list
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{�.\ ���.{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
-                                       % a dot to suppress an additional one
-                                       % in the reference list. The difference
-                                       % with \BOthers is that, if another
-                                       % string is used to define \BOthers,
-                                       % this one should always finish with a
-                                       % period and the previous one not
-                                       % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
-                                       % ``others'' is used).
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{��� ������}        % used as year for in-press citations
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{���}               % for ``In '' editor...
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{���.{}}          % chapter
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{���.{}}          % chapters
-\renewcommand{\BED}{����.{}}           % editor
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{����.{}}          % editors
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{���.{}}         % translator
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{���.{}}        % translators
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{���.{}}        % translation, for the year field
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{��������}       % chair of symposium
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{��������}      % chairs
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{�.{}}             % volume
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{�.{}}            % volumes
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{��.{}}            % number
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{��.{}}           % numbers
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{���.{}}            % edition
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{���.{}}            % page
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{���.{}}           % pages
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{���.\ ���.{}}     % (default) technical report type name
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{����������� ��������}
-                                       % (default) PhD thesis type name
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{����������� ����������� ��������}
-                                       % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
-                                       % type name
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{������������ ����������� �������}% (default) master's thesis type name
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{����������� ������������ ����������� �������}%
-                                       % (default) unpublished
-                                       % master's thesis type name
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{����� ������ ����������}
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{��������� ���}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
-\renewcommand{\refname}{������������}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
-\renewcommand{\bibname}{������������}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list
-% when a meta-analysis is reported.
-%
-%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-%  References marked with an asterisk indicate studies
-%  included in the meta-analysis.}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{��������� ����������}
+%%
+%% This is file `greek.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `greek')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{greek.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements
+%% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas and Ioannis Dimakos
+%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE!
+%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding.
+\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{���������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{���������� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{��������� ��� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{���������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{���������� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{��������� ��� ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{������ ���������������}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{����� ����������}% ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{���}%                 % between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{�.\ ���.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{�.\ ���.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{��� ������}%        % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{���}%               % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{���.\hbox{}}%     % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{���.\hbox{}}%    % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{����.\hbox{}}%      % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{����.\hbox{}}%     % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{���.\hbox{}}%    % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{���.\hbox{}}%   % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{���.\hbox{}}%   % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{��������}%       % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{��������}%      % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{�.\hbox{}}%        % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{�.\hbox{}}%       % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{��.\hbox{}}%       % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{��.\hbox{}}%      % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{���.\hbox{}}%       % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{���.\hbox{}}%       % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{���.\hbox{}}%      % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{���.\ ���.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{����������� ��������}% (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{����������� ����������� ��������}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{������������ ����������� �������}%
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{����������� ������������ ����������� �������}%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{����� ������ ����������}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{��������� ���}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{������������}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{������������}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{��������� ����������}%
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `greek.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc
index 06ddc0a3827..0a0bbb786c3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/ngerman.apc
@@ -1,33 +1,56 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `ngerman.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography)
-%% Written by Erik Meijer <e.meijer@eco.rug.nl>, based on instructions of
-%% Andreas Poege.
-
-\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used
-%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this:
-
-\input{german.apc}
+%%
+%% This is file `ngerman.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `ngerman')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{ngerman.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography)
+%% Written by Erik Meijer, based on instructions of Andreas Poege.
+%% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used
+%% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this:
+\input{german.apc}%
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `ngerman.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/norsk.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/norsk.apc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..398cd6c9981
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/norsk.apc
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `norsk.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `norsk')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{norsk.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+%%
+%% norsk.apc - Norwegian Bokmal & Nynorsk versions of apacite elements.
+%% Version 1.0.
+%% Written by Karl Ove Hufthammer.
+%%
+%% Note: To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation
+%%       a comma is never used before '&' or 'and', and there
+%%       is no space between initials. The macro for these
+%%       modifications can be found at the end of this file.
+%%       Remove them to use a more 'APA-like' style.
+%%
+%% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA.
+%% Some ideas for this translation have been taken from the following sources:
+%%
+%%   http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf
+%%   http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa{}ndbok}
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspråk}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Other labels
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}}    % ``no date''
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og}            % between authors in text
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a
+                                      % dot to suppress an additional one
+                                      % in the reference list
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains
+                                      % a dot to suppress an additional one
+                                      % in the reference list. The difference
+                                      % with \BOthers is that, if another
+                                      % string is used to define \BOthers,
+                                      % this one should always finish with a
+                                      % period and the previous one not
+                                      % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+                                      % ``others'' is used).
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering}        % used as year for in-press citations
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}              % for ``In '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}       % chapter
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}      % chapters
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}           % editor
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}         % editors
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}}     % translator
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}}    % translators
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}}    % translation, for the year field
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer}        % chair of symposium
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere}      % chairs
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}         % volume
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}       % volumes
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}          % number
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}        % numbers
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}}           % edition
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}            % page
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}          % pages
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport}   % (default) technical report type name
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling}
+                                      % (default) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling}
+                                      % (default) unpublished PhD thesis
+                                      % type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}% (default) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}%
+                                      % (default) unpublished
+                                      % master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert}
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} % No comma before & when we have two authors.
+\renewcommand{\BCBL}{} % No comma before & when we have three or more authors.
+\renewcommand{\BPBI}{.} % Period between initials. No space.
+
+\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk}
+\ifx\languagename\APACnynorsk
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok}
+  \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar}        % chair of symposium
+  \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar}      % chairs
+  \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa{}ve}% (default) master's thesis type name
+  \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa{}ve}%
+  \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa{}}
+  \renewcommand{\refname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a section.
+  \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter.
+  \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+    Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i metaanalysen.}
+  \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister}
+\fi
+\let\APACnynorsk\undefined
+%%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `norsk.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/spanish.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/spanish.apc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..88de1763212
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/spanish.apc
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `spanish.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `spanish')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{spanish.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+
+%%
+%% spanish.apc - Versi�n espa�ola de elementos en apacite
+%% Escrito por Jorge L�pez Puga
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Comandos para tipos espec�ficos de entradas @misc.
+%%% Estos comandos son reconocidos por apacite.bst.
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa inform�tico y manual}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software inform�tico}
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programaci�n}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% Otras etiquetas
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y}                 % Entre autores en el texto
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}  % ``y colaboradores'', El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto,                                                                                       %evita poner uno adicional en la lista de referencias. No obstante                                                                                      %algunas revistas aceptan "et al." que es lo que aparece por defecto
+                                            % a dot to suppress an additional one
+                                        % in the reference list. The difference
+                                          % with \BOthers is that, if another
+                                        % string is used to define \BOthers,
+                                        % this one should always finish with a
+                                        % period and the previous one not
+                                        % necessarily (e.g., if explicit
+                                          % ``others'' is used).
+\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y}                 % Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias (por defecto "\&")
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa}            % Usado como a�o para citas "en prensa"
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{En}                   % Para ``En '' editor...
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}}              % cap�tulo
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}}            % cap�tulos
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}}        % traductor
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}}      % traductores
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}}       % traducci�n, para el campo a�o
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral}
+                                          % (por defecto) PhD thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis doctoral no publicada}
+                                      % (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis
+                                      % type name
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de master}% (por defecto) master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de master no publicada}%
+                                      % (por defecto) unpublished
+                                      % master's thesis type name
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en}
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresi�n de}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias
+\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}% Nombbre de la lista de ref. si es una secci�n.
+\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un cap�tulo.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ %Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un meta-an�lisis es usado.
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en el meta-an�lisis.}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% El nombre (del encabezado) del �ndice de Autores.
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{�ndice de Autores}
+%%
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `spanish.apc'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc
index 9615c949366..57e78862253 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/apacite/swedish.apc
@@ -1,93 +1,115 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% This is file `swedish.apc'.
-%
-% Copyright 1994-2005 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
-% elsewhere in this file.  All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
-% -------------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the `apacite' package, with a
-% short description, is given in the file `manifest.txt'.
-%
-% \fi
-
-\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc}[2005/06/01]
-
-%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements
-%% Written by Stefan Bjork <stefan@raggmunk.nu>
-%% $Revision: 1.2 $
-%%
-%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of
-%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources:
-%%
-%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt
-%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from:
-%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf
-%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived
-%% December 9, 2004, from:
-%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html
-%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from
-%% Gothenburg University Web site:
-%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm
-%%
-
-%% Punctuations
-\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}
-
-%% Labels
-\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.}
-\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.}
-\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}
-\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.}
-\renewcommand{\BED}{red.}
-\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.}
-\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}
-\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}
-\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.}
-\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.}
-\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.}
-\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.}
-\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}
-\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.}
-\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.}
-\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}
-\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.}
-\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.}
-\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}
-\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}
-\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}
-\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}
-\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
-Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i
-meta-analys.}
-
-%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
-\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}
-\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}
-\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}
-
-%% Publication date unknown
-\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.}
-
-%% Author Index
-\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}
+%%
+%% This is file `swedish.apc',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% apacite.dtx  (with options: `swedish')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed
+%% elsewhere in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the `apacite' package.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version.  The latest version of this license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins, and the following generated files:
+%% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib,
+%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty,
+%% english.apc, dutch.apc,   finnish.apc,  german.apc, ngerman.apc,
+%% greek.apc,   norsk.apc,   spanish.apc,  swedish.apc.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'
+%% 
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Erik Meijer
+%% 
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the
+%% source files of the apacite package, i.e., apacite.dtx and
+%% apacite.ins. You may however distribute the apacite package without
+%% the generated files.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc}
+   [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file]
+
+
+%%
+%% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements
+%% Written by Stefan Bjork.
+%% Small adaptations by Erik Meijer
+%% $Revision: 1.3 $
+%%
+%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of
+%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources:
+%%
+%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt
+%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from:
+%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf
+%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived
+%% December 9, 2004, from:
+%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html
+%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from
+%% Gothenburg University Web site:
+%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm
+%%
+%% Punctuations
+\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}%
+%% Labels
+\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}%
+\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}%
+\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}%
+\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}%
+\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.\hbox{}}%
+\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}%
+\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}%
+\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}%
+\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}%
+\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{%
+  Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i
+  meta-analys.}%
+%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries.
+\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{handbok till datorprogram}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}%
+\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}%
+\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}%
+%% Publication date unknown
+\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.\hbox{}}%
+%% Author Index
+\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}%
+%%
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `swedish.apc'.
author	Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>	2007-09-06 00:08:55 +0000
committer	Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>	2007-09-06 00:08:55 +0000
commit	a8abd64279331cac2c141488b03a710e755e3fad (patch)
tree	52b10a31167e0077005f3039f2e8007a8222078a /Master/texmf-dist
parent	ead5e3fc51a4bb838c6501f0b5629ee4bdb05f1e (diff)